E MG_UCP A&P Manual_1.6_sw2.1 MG UCP Manual 1.6 Sw2.1
User Manual: eMG_UCP-A&P manual_1.6_sw2.1
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 689
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration & Programming
Manual
Please read this manual carefully before operating System.
Retain it for future reference.
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Revision History
SW version
ISSUE
DATE
1.1.x
1.2.x
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
Sep., 2013
Dec., 2013
Feb., 2015
May, 2015
2.0.x
1.4
Jan., 2016
DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES
Initial Release
Changed Ericsson-LG to Ericsson-LG Enterprise
Update contents according to S/W integration for both eMG80 & eMG800
We updated the following features:
On-line user guide
Terminal attributes (Small popup use, large popup timer, SLT open
loop time)
Web Access Authorization
NTP attributes
Digit Conversion Table
System attributes
U-LOOP, PBX code insertion for emergency call
Disconnect with Inband information
Temp License expiration notify
Trace Log via Web
Add System Date and Time to Installation wizard
Added Speed code number plan in PGM100.
IPCR announce only for incoming call.
Updated Strong password in PGM 160/161.
Updated ‘Do not overwrite station name in PGM 211.
Added Attendant ring mode in PGM 257.
Added the more item for Alarm in PGM 163.
Added Flexible button default table (PGM 239)
Added Preset flexible button default (PGM 240)
Added System DST mode in PGM 439.
Added LDAP server setting in PGM 160/161.
Added Arabic language.
Updated Message wait indication LED in PGM 112.
Updated Company directory in Station Name Display.
Added Station User Greeting in Station Data.
Added the search box in Maintenance.
Added MOH Management in Maintenance.
Updated DB management by adding Comment field.
Updated Install wizard
DTMF repeat tone does not have nothing to do with PSTN in
PGM160-15
Added Call wait signal and duration in PGM 113.
Added some admin (Alternate/Secondary signal port, Local route ID,
Remote route ID, Sending Name option) in PGM 324.
Added SLT Pulse and SLT pulse-MW type in PGM 110.
Added Lift Handset for Page & Privacy in PGM 111.
Added Short Modem in PGM 112.
Added NFC Authorization Code use in PGM 112.
Added rel 180 after 183 and “Add ‘user=phone’ param” in PGM 133.
Added Short Modem Timer in PGM 182~182, 186
Added Alarm mode to send email to the address in PGM 163.
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
-
2.0.x
2.1.x
1.5
1.6
April, 2016
August, 2016 -
-
-
Issue 1.6
Added the special character to DB management.
Added Ring detection register setting in Analog parameter.
Added LCD Dimming for LIP-9000 Series & LDP-9240D in PGM 112.
‘Go to assignment’ function added to Personal group overview and
can check the master & member list at a glance.
Added Station ICR scenario (1201) to Station Data.
Changed the name from UCS Standard to UCS data.
Added MOH management in Maintenance.
Added Keyset admin password to Install Wizard.
‘Unified SMB A&P manual’ by integrating eMG and UCP.
The type of Speed numbering is added more in PGM 100.
‘DDNS usage of Firewall’ & ‘Domain name of Firewall’ is added in
PGM 102.
The LCD LED is changed to the option ‘MWI/Ring’ or ‘Ring’.
The ACD & CRM function is added for UCS Client: CRM function
and ACD login/out & ACD On/Off duty in PGM 112.
UCS Dialing Rule Use for Standard UCS in PGM 112.
UCS Mobile Dial Use (Android) for Standard UCS in PGM 112.
The description of CLI Name Display is changed, refer to PGM 113.
Display full CLI function is added in PGM 113.
SMTP Server Address fills out up to 64 characters in PGM 127.
Proxy Server Address fills out up to 64 characters in PGM 133.
The range for ICLID Usage is changed to Disable, CLI, Name/CLI in
PGM 140.
Web hacking block is added in PGM 160; Web admin login failure
count to block, Web admin hacking block period, Wed admin
hacking Email notification.
UCS Ring ACK count is added in PGM 160 and UCS Ring ACK
timer is added in PGM 180.
SLT Line monitor and SLT Line Monitor time is added in PGM 160.
Dial Back to Caller from Remote VM Access is added in PGM 160.
Alarm Display is added in PGM 163.
The range about Alarm is changed to Off, On, Alarm only,
Alarm/Email. Especially, the default of Maintenance Expire Notify is
Email only.
Message wait (Call back) for LED flash is added in PGM 170.
Outgoing Call type is added for All call or Answered call in PGM 177.
Call log/Directory Auto Idle Timer is added in PGM 180.
The range of Hot Desk for eMG and UCP is changed in PGM 250:
eMG80 (100), eMG800 (300), UCP (1200).
Advice of Charge is added in PGM 133.
SIP Profile is added in PGM 211.
Signaling port, TLS Version, First & Second TLS crypto, SRTP
usage, First & Second SRTP crypto are added in PGM 212.
Interworking system is added in PGM 322.
Name option is deleted in PGM 327.
Alarm display is added in PGM 335.
Firewall IP is added in PGM 441.
MS Excel-like table data management (copy/paste from/to the excel
file, Input/Edit) is to be extended to the following tables.
- PGM 105 : Flexible Station Number
- PGM 115/129 : Flexible Buttons
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
-
Issue 1.6
- PGM 202 : MSN Table
- PGM 206 : Prefix Dialing Table
- PGM 443 : Station User Login
- PGM 231 : Flexible DID Conversion
- PGM 262 : System Speed Dial
- PGM 3241 : Net Numbering Plan Table
- PGM 227 : Station/System Authorization Code Table
- PGM 442 : Remote Device Registration
- Station Name Display
User Greeting is added to Maintenance.
Company Directory is added to Maintenance.
Web Certificate is added to Maintenance.
Custom 1 and Custom 2 are added in Web Access Authorization and
User management.
Line Echo added to SLT attributes in PGM 112.
DSS in use added to LED Flashing Rates in PGM 170.
Multiple Announcement (1~9) is added to IPCR Agent table in PGM
237.
Copyright© 2013 Ericsson-LG Enterprise Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved
This material is copyrighted by Ericsson-LG Enterprise Co., Ltd. (Ericsson-LG Enterprise). Any
unauthorized reproductions, use or disclosure of this material, or any part thereof, is strictly prohibited
and is a violation of Copyright Laws. Ericsson-LG Enterprise reserves the right to make changes in
specifications at any time without notice. The information furnished by Ericsson-LG Enterprise in this
material is believed to be accurate and reliable, but is not warranted to be true in all cases. If you are not
the intended recipient, you should destroy or retrieve this material to Ericsson-LG Enterprise.
iPECS is trademark of Ericsson-LG Enterprise Co., Ltd.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies.
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table of Contents
1. Introduction ................................................................... 1
1.1 Manual Application .............................................................. 1
1.2 Manual Organization ........................................................... 1
2. System & admin information ...................................... 3
2.1 System capacities for eMG and UCP ................................ 3
2.2 Slot configuration for eMG80 ............................................. 9
2.3 Initialization ........................................................................ 11
2.3.1 eMG Initialization ........................................................................11
2.3.2 UCP Initialization ........................................................................13
2.3.2.1 Normal Registration Process.............................................................. 13
2.3.2.2 Replacement Module Registration ..................................................... 15
2.4 General Admin and Menu Structure ................................ 16
3. STATION ADMIN PROGRAMMING for eMG ............ 17
3.1 General................................................................................ 17
3.1.1 LCD & Button Functions ............................................................17
3.1.2 Alphanumeric Data Entries .......................................................17
3.2 Data Entry Mode ................................................................ 18
3.3 Procedure for Data Entry .................................................. 19
3.3.1 System ID — PGM 100 ...............................................................19
3.3.2 NUMBERING PLANS DATA — PGM 102 to 109 ......................21
3.3.2.1 System IP Address Plan — PGM 102................................................ 21
3.3.2.2 Device IP Address Plan -PGM 103 .................................................... 23
3.3.2.3 CO Device Sequence Number -PGM 104 ......................................... 27
3.3.2.4 Flexible Station Numbering Plan -PGM 105 ...................................... 28
3.3.2.5 Flexible Numbering Plan part A to D - PGM 106 to 109 .................... 29
3.3.2.6 8-Digit Table ....................................................................................... 35
3.3.3 Station Data –PGM 110-125 .......................................................36
3.3.3.1 Station Type -PGM 110 ...................................................................... 36
3.3.3.2 Station Attributes I to III - PGM 111-113 ............................................ 37
3.3.3.3 Station Attributes IV -PGM 114 .......................................................... 47
3.3.3.4 Flexible button Assignment -PGM 115............................................... 52
3.3.3.5 Station Class-of-Service – PGM 116 ................................................. 56
3.3.3.6 CO/IP Group Access – PGM 117....................................................... 58
i
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.3.7 Internal Page Zone Access – PGM 118 ............................................. 58
3.3.3.8 PTT (Push-To-Talk) Group Access – PGM 119 ................................ 59
3.3.3.9 Preset Call Forward – PGM 120 ........................................................ 59
3.3.3.10 Idle Line Selection – PGM 121 ......................................................... 60
3.3.3.11 Station IP Attributes – PGM 122 ...................................................... 61
3.3.3.12 Station Timers – PGM 123 ............................................................... 62
3.3.3.13 Linked Station Table – PGM 124 ..................................................... 63
3.3.3.14 ICM Tenancy Group – PGM 125...................................................... 64
3.3.3.15 Station VM Attributes – PGM 127 .................................................... 65
3.3.3.16 Station CCR Table – PGM 128 ........................................................ 67
3.3.3.17 LSS Label Edit – PGM 129 .............................................................. 68
3.3.4 BOARD DATA – PGM 130 to 132 ..............................................69
3.3.4.1 H.323 VoIP Attributes – PGM 130 ..................................................... 69
3.3.4.2 T1/E1/PRI Attributes – PGM 131 ....................................................... 72
3.3.4.3 Board Base Attributes – PGM 132 ..................................................... 73
3.3.5 CO LINE DATA – PGM 140 to 151 .............................................75
3.3.5.1 CO Service Type – PGM 140 ............................................................. 75
3.3.5.2 CO/IP Attributes I ~ III - PGM 141~143 .............................................. 75
3.3.5.3 CO/IP Ring Assignment – PGM 144 .................................................. 86
3.3.5.4 DID Service Attributes – PGM 145 ..................................................... 87
3.3.5.5 DISA Service – PGM 146 ................................................................... 88
3.3.5.6 CO Line Preset Forward Attributes – PGM 147 ................................. 89
3.3.5.7 CO Additional Attributes – PGM 148.................................................. 90
3.3.5.8 NA ISDN Line Attributes – PGM 150 ................................................. 91
3.3.5.9 ISDN CO Line Attributes – PGM 151 ................................................. 93
3.3.5.10 T1 Line Timers – PGM 152 .............................................................. 95
3.3.5.11 DCOB CO Attribute – PGM 153 ....................................................... 97
3.3.6 SYSTEM DATA –PGM 160 to 182 ..............................................98
3.3.6.1 System Attributes I & II – PGM 160 to 161 ........................................ 98
3.3.6.2 System Password – PGM 162 ......................................................... 108
3.3.6.3 Alarm Attributes – PGM 163............................................................. 109
3.3.6.4 Attendant Assignment – PGM 164 ................................................... 110
3.3.6.5 Multi-cast RTP/RTCP Ports – PGM 165 .......................................... 110
3.3.6.6 DISA COS – PGM 166 ..................................................................... 115
3.3.6.7 DID/DISA Destination – PGM 167 ................................................... 116
3.3.6.8 External Control Contacts – PGM 168 ............................................. 117
3.3.6.9 LCD Display Mode -PGM 169 .......................................................... 117
3.3.6.10 Button LED Flash Rate – PGM 170 ............................................... 119
3.3.6.11 Music Sources – PGM 171............................................................. 122
3.3.6.12 PABX Access Codes – PGM 172 .................................................. 123
3.3.6.13 Ringing Line Preference Priority – PGM 173 ................................. 123
3.3.6.14 RS-232 Port Settings – PGM 174 .................................................. 124
ii
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.15 Serial Port Function Selections – PGM 175 ................................... 125
3.3.6.16 Break/Make Ratio – PGM 176 ....................................................... 127
3.3.6.17 SMDR Attributes – PGM 177 ......................................................... 127
3.3.6.18 System Date, Time and Daylight Saving Time (DST) – PGM 178 132
3.3.6.19 Multi Language – PGM 179............................................................ 133
3.3.6.20 System Timers I to III - PGMs 180-182 .......................................... 133
3.3.6.21 In-Room Indication – PGM 183 ...................................................... 138
3.3.6.22 DCOB SYS Timers – PGM 186 ..................................................... 139
3.3.6.23 NTP Attributes – PGM 195 ............................................................. 140
3.3.6.24 CRR Attributes – PGM 252 ............................................................ 141
3.3.6.25 VM COS Attributes – PGM 253 ...................................................... 142
3.3.6.26 Personal Group – PGM 260 ........................................................... 143
3.3.6.27 Personal Group Attribute – PGM 261 ............................................ 144
3.3.7 STATION GROUP DATA – PGM 190 & 192 ............................145
3.3.7.1 Station Group Assignment -PGM 190 .............................................. 146
3.3.7.2 Station Group Attributes – PGM 191................................................ 147
3.3.7.3 Pick Up Group Assignment – PGM 192 ........................................... 162
3.3.8 ISDN LINE & ICLID ROUTING DATA – PGM 200-206 ............163
3.3.8.1 ISDN Attributes – PGM 200 ............................................................. 163
3.3.8.2 CLIP/COLP Table – PGM 201 ......................................................... 164
3.3.8.3 MSN Table – PGM 202 .................................................................... 165
3.3.8.4 ICLID Route Table – PGM 203 ........................................................ 166
3.3.8.5 ICLID Ring Assignment – PGM 204................................................. 167
3.3.8.6 PPP Attributes – PGM 205 ............................................................... 168
3.3.8.7 Prefix Dialing Table – PGM 206 ....................................................... 169
3.3.9 TABLES DATA – PGM 220 to 235 ...........................................171
3.3.9.1 LCR Assignment Tables - PGM 220 to 223 ..................................... 171
3.3.9.2 Toll Tables – PGM 224 ..................................................................... 177
3.3.9.3 Emergency Code Table – PGM 226 ................................................ 178
3.3.9.4 Authorization Codes Table – PGM 227............................................ 178
3.3.9.5 Customer Call Routing/VSF AA Table – PGM 228 .......................... 179
3.3.9.6 Executive/Secretary Table – PGM 229 ............................................ 181
3.3.9.7 Flexible DID Conversion Table – PGM 231 ..................................... 182
3.3.9.8 System Speed Zone Table – PGM 232 ........................................... 184
3.3.9.9 Auto Ring Mode – PGM 233 ............................................................ 185
3.3.9.10 Voice Mail Dialing Table – PGM 234 ............................................. 186
3.3.9.11 Registration & Fractional Module Table – PGM 235...................... 187
3.3.9.12 Mobile Extension Table – PGM 236............................................... 188
3.3.9.13 Hot Desk Attributes – PGM 250 ..................................................... 190
3.3.9.14 CO Call Rerouting – PGM 252 ....................................................... 191
3.3.9.15 Digit Conversion Tables – PGM 270 .............................................. 192
3.3.10 NETWORKING DATA – PGM 320 to 324 ..............................194
iii
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.10.1 Network Basic Attribute – PGM 320............................................... 194
3.3.10.2 Network Supplementary Attribute – PGM 321 ............................... 195
3.3.10.3 Network CO LINE Attribute – PGM 322 ......................................... 196
3.3.10.4 NET Numbering Plan Table – PGM 324 ........................................ 197
3.3.10.5 Network Feature Code Table – PGM 325 ...................................... 199
3.3.11 TNET (Centralized Networking) – PGM 330 ~ 336 ...............200
3.3.11.1 TNET Basic Attributes – PGM 330................................................. 200
3.3.11.2 TNET CM Attributes – PGM 331 .................................................... 201
3.3.11.3 TNET LM ATTRIBUTES – PGM 332 ............................................. 202
3.3.11.4 FoPSTN Attributes – PGM 333 ...................................................... 203
3.3.11.5 TNET LM External Contact Attributes – PGM 334......................... 204
3.3.11.6 TNET LM Music Attributes – PGM 335 .......................................... 205
3.3.11.7 TNET LM Alarm Attributes – PGM 336 .......................................... 206
3.3.12 Zone Data – PGM 436 - 441, 444 ...........................................207
3.3.12.1 Zone Holiday Assignment – PGM 444 ........................................... 208
3.3.13 GREEN MODE .........................................................................209
3.3.13.1 Green mode activation – PGM 500 ................................................ 209
3.3.13.2 Green mode time setting – PGM 501............................................. 210
3.3.14 INITIALIZATION — PGM 450..................................................211
3.3.15 PRINT-OUT DATABASE — PGM 451....................................213
3.3.16 VIRTUAL TRACE DIP-SWITCH — PGM 452 .........................215
3.3.17 VIRTUAL DIP-SWITCH — PGM 453 ......................................217
3.3.18 DECT ATTRIBUTES — PGM 491 ...........................................218
4. WEB SERVICE .......................................................... 219
4.1 General.............................................................................. 219
4.1.1 PC/Browser ...............................................................................219
4.1.2 Environment for LAN connection ...........................................219
4.1.3 Web Browser setting ................................................................220
4.1.4 Password Encryption ...............................................................220
4.2 iPECS system Web Access & Login ............................. 221
4.3 Web Admin & Maintenance Main Page Overview ........ 223
4.3.1 Favorite Program Groups ........................................................227
4.3.2 Using Function Base ................................................................229
4.3.3 iPECS Web Page Navigation ...................................................233
4.3.4 General Web Page Features ....................................................233
4.3.4.1 Web Page Range Entries ................................................................. 233
4.3.4.2 Table Check Boxes .......................................................................... 233
4.3.4.3 Sorting Displayed Data ..................................................................... 233
iv
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.3.5 Install wizard .............................................................................234
4.3.5.1 System Upgrade ............................................................................... 234
4.3.5.2 Nation Code...................................................................................... 235
4.3.5.3 Set System Time and Date .............................................................. 235
4.3.5.4 Set Station Number .......................................................................... 236
4.3.5.5 Set Flexible Numbering Plan ............................................................ 236
4.3.5.6 Set CO Ring Assignment ................................................................. 237
4.3.5.7 Set License Upload .......................................................................... 237
4.3.5.8 Set Maintenance ID & Password ..................................................... 238
4.3.5.9 Set IP Information ............................................................................. 239
4.4 Web Admin Programming .............................................. 240
4.4.1 System ID & Numbering Plans ................................................240
4.4.1.1 System ID – PGM 100 ...................................................................... 241
4.4.1.2 System Overview.............................................................................. 245
4.4.1.3 Device Port Number Change – PGM 101 ........................................ 248
4.4.1.4 System IP Plan - PGM 102 .............................................................. 250
4.4.1.5 Device IP Plan - PGM 103 ............................................................... 253
4.4.1.6 CO Device Sequence Number - PGM 104 ...................................... 255
4.4.1.7 Flexible Station Numbering Plan - PGM 105 ................................... 256
4.4.1.8 Flexible Numbering Plan - PGM 106 ~ 109 ..................................... 258
4.4.1.9 8 Digit Extension Table - PGM 238 .................................................. 262
4.4.2 Station Data ...............................................................................263
4.4.2.1 Station Type - PGM 110 ................................................................... 264
4.4.2.2 Common Attributes - PGM 111 ........................................................ 265
4.4.2.3 Terminal Attributes - PGM 112 ......................................................... 272
4.4.2.4 CLI Attributes - PGM 113 ................................................................. 276
4.4.2.5 Flexible Buttons - PGM 115/129 ...................................................... 279
4.4.2.6 Station COS - PGM 116 ................................................................... 281
4.4.2.7 CO/IP Group Access - PGM 117 ..................................................... 283
4.4.2.8 Internal Page Zone Access - PGM 118............................................ 284
4.4.2.9 PTT Group Access - PGM 119 ........................................................ 286
4.4.2.10 Preset Call Forward - PGM 120 ..................................................... 287
4.4.2.11 Station ICR Scenario - PGM 1201 ................................................. 288
4.4.2.12 Idle Line Selection - PGM 121........................................................ 289
4.4.2.13 Station IP Attributes - PGM 122 ..................................................... 290
4.4.2.14 Station Timers - PGM 123 .............................................................. 291
4.4.2.15 Linked Station - PGM 124 .............................................................. 292
4.4.2.16 Station ICM Group - PGM 125 ....................................................... 294
4.4.2.17 Station Voice Mail Attributes – PGM 127 ....................................... 295
4.4.2.18 Station Personal CCR Table – PGM 128 ....................................... 299
4.4.2.19 Station Name Overview & Display ................................................. 301
4.4.2.20 Station User Greeting ..................................................................... 303
v
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.21 Station Data Copy .......................................................................... 304
4.4.2.22 Station CTI IP Address (1st Party TAPI) ......................................... 305
4.4.2.23 Station Recording Information ........................................................ 306
4.4.3 Board Based Data.....................................................................307
4.4.3.1 H.323 VoIP Attributes - PGM 130 .................................................... 308
4.4.3.2 T1/E1/PRI Attributes - PGM 131 ...................................................... 311
4.4.3.3 Board Base Attributes - PGM 132 .................................................... 312
4.4.4 CO Line Data .............................................................................314
4.4.4.1 Common Attributes - PGM 140 ........................................................ 316
4.4.4.2 Analog Attributes - PGM 141............................................................ 321
4.4.4.3 VoIP Attributes - PGM 142 ............................................................... 323
4.4.4.4 ISDN Attributes - PGM 143 .............................................................. 324
4.4.4.5 CO/IP Ring Assignment - PGM 144 ................................................. 326
4.4.4.6 DID Service Attributes - PGM 145.................................................... 327
4.4.4.7 DISA Service Attributes - PGM 146 ................................................. 328
4.4.4.8 CO/IP Preset Forward Attributes - PGM 147 ................................... 329
4.4.4.9 MATM Attributes - PGM 149 ............................................................ 330
4.4.4.10 NA ISDN Line Attributes - PGM 150 .............................................. 332
4.4.4.11 CID/CPN Attributes - PGM 151 ...................................................... 334
4.4.4.12 T1 CO Line Attributes - PGM 152 .................................................. 337
4.4.4.13 DCOB CO Line Attributes - PGM 153 ............................................ 339
4.4.5 System Data ..............................................................................340
4.4.5.1 System Attributes - PGM 160 & 161 ................................................ 341
4.4.5.2 System Password - PGM 162 .......................................................... 352
4.4.5.3 Alarm Attributes - PGM 163 ............................................................. 353
4.4.5.4 Attendant Assignment - PGM 164 .................................................... 355
4.4.5.5 Multi-cast IP/Port - PGM 165............................................................ 356
4.4.5.6 DISA COS - PGM 166 ...................................................................... 362
4.4.5.7 DID/DISA Destination - PGM 167 .................................................... 363
4.4.5.8 External Control Contacts - PGM 168 .............................................. 364
4.4.5.9 LCD Display Mode - PGM 169 ......................................................... 365
4.4.5.10 LED Flashing Rate - PGM 170 ....................................................... 367
4.4.5.11 Music Sources - PGM 171 ............................................................. 370
4.4.5.12 PBX Access Codes - PGM 172...................................................... 371
4.4.5.13 Ringing Line Preference Priority - PGM 173 .................................. 372
4.4.5.14 RS-232 Port Settings - PGM 174 ................................................... 373
4.4.5.15 Serial Port Selections - PGM 175................................................... 374
4.4.5.16 Pulse Dial (Break/Make) Ratio - PGM 176..................................... 375
4.4.5.17 SMDR Attributes - PGM 177 .......................................................... 376
4.4.5.18 System Date & Time - PGM 178 .................................................... 379
4.4.5.19 System Multi Language - PGM 179 ............................................... 380
4.4.5.20 System Timers - PGM 180 ~ 182 & 186 ........................................ 381
vi
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.21 In-Room Indication - PGM 183 ....................................................... 386
4.4.5.22 Web Access Authorization ............................................................. 387
4.4.5.23 Station Web Access Authorization ................................................. 388
4.4.5.24 NTP Attributes - PGM 195.............................................................. 389
4.4.5.25 SNMP Attribute - PGM 196 ............................................................ 390
4.4.5.26 Cabinet Attribute for UCP - PGM 197 ............................................ 392
4.4.5.27 Hot Desk Attributes - PGM 250 ...................................................... 393
4.4.5.28 System Call Routing - PGM 251 .................................................... 394
4.4.5.29 CO Call Rerouting - PGM 252 ........................................................ 396
4.4.5.30 VM COS Attributes – PGM 253 ...................................................... 398
4.4.5.31 Static Route Attributes – PGM 254 ................................................ 399
4.4.5.32 Access Control List – PGM 255 ..................................................... 400
4.4.5.33 Attendant Ring Mode – PGM 257 .................................................. 401
4.4.5.34 System Speed Dial ......................................................................... 402
4.4.5.35 Custom Messages .......................................................................... 403
4.4.5.36 PPTP Attributes .............................................................................. 404
4.4.5.37 PPP Attributes for eMG – PGM 205............................................... 405
4.4.6 Station Group Data ...................................................................406
4.4.6.1 Station Group Overview ................................................................... 407
4.4.6.2 Station Group Assignment - PGM 190 ............................................. 408
4.4.6.3 Station Group Attributes - PGM 191 ................................................ 409
4.4.6.4 Pick Up Group Overview .................................................................. 426
4.4.6.5 Pick Up Group - PGM 192................................................................ 427
4.4.6.6 Personal Group Overview ................................................................ 428
4.4.6.7 Personal Group - PGM 260 .............................................................. 429
4.4.6.8 Personal Group Attribute - PGM 261 ............................................... 430
4.4.7 ISDN Line Data ..........................................................................431
4.4.7.1 ISDN Attributes - PGM 200 .............................................................. 432
4.4.7.2 CLIP/COLP Table - PGM 201 .......................................................... 433
4.4.7.3 MSN Table - PGM 202 ..................................................................... 434
4.4.7.4 ICLID Route Table - PGM 203 ......................................................... 435
4.4.7.5 ICLID Ring Assignment Table - PGM 204 ....................................... 436
4.4.7.6 PPP Attributes for UCP - PGM 205 .................................................. 437
4.4.7.7 Prefix Dialing Table - PGM 206 ........................................................ 438
4.4.7.8 ISDN Clock Priority for eMG800 - PGM 207 .................................... 440
4.4.8 SIP Data .....................................................................................441
4.4.8.1 SIP Common (System based) Attributes - PGM 210 ....................... 442
4.4.8.2 SIP Trunk Status Overview .............................................................. 446
4.4.8.3 SIP CO Attributes - PGM 133........................................................... 447
4.4.8.4 SIP Registration Status Overview .................................................... 460
4.4.8.5 SIP UID Allocation Status Overview ................................................ 461
4.4.8.6 SIP User ID Attributes – PGM 126 ................................................... 462
vii
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.8.7 SIP Phone Attributes - PGM 211...................................................... 464
4.4.8.8 SIP Phone Provisioning - PGM 212 ................................................. 470
4.4.8.9 Provisioning File View & Delete ....................................................... 474
4.4.8.10 VMEX Station Data - PGM 215 ...................................................... 475
4.4.8.11 VMEX Connection table - PGM 216............................................... 476
4.4.9 Tables Data................................................................................477
4.4.9.1 LCR Control Attributes - PGM 220 ................................................... 478
4.4.9.2 LCR LDT (Leading Digit Table) - PGM 221 ..................................... 480
4.4.9.3 LCR DMT (Digit Modification Table) - PGM 222 .............................. 482
4.4.9.4 LCR Table Initialization - PGM 223 .................................................. 484
4.4.9.5 Digit Conversion Table - PGM 270 .................................................. 485
4.4.9.6 Toll Exception Table - PGM 224 ...................................................... 486
4.4.9.7 Emergency Code Table - PGM 226 ................................................. 487
4.4.9.8 COS Table ........................................................................................ 488
4.4.9.9 Authorization Codes Table - PGM 227 ............................................ 489
4.4.9.10 Customer Call Routing Table - PGM 228....................................... 493
4.4.9.11 Executive/Secretary Table - PGM 229 ........................................... 495
4.4.9.12 Flexible DID Conversion Table - PGM 231 .................................... 497
4.4.9.13 System Speed Zone Table - PGM 232 .......................................... 499
4.4.9.14 Auto Ring Mode Table - PGM 233 ................................................. 500
4.4.9.15 Voice Mail Dialing Table - PGM 234 .............................................. 501
4.4.9.16 Registration Table - PGM 235 ........................................................ 503
4.4.9.17 Mobile Extension Table - PGM 236 ............................................... 504
4.4.9.18 IPCR Agent Table - PGM 237 ........................................................ 506
4.4.9.19 Dummy Dial-Tone Digit Table ........................................................ 507
4.4.9.20 Flexible Button Default Table – PGM 239 ...................................... 508
4.4.9.21 Preset Flexible Button Default – PGM 240 .................................... 509
4.4.10 Networking Data .....................................................................510
4.4.10.1 Network Basic Attributes - PGM 320.............................................. 511
4.4.10.2 Network Supplementary Attributes - PGM 321 .............................. 512
4.4.10.3 Net CO Line Overview.................................................................... 513
4.4.10.4 Network CO Line Attributes - PGM 322 ......................................... 514
4.4.10.5 Network Numbering Plan Table Overview ..................................... 515
4.4.10.6 Network Numbering Plan - PGM 324 ............................................. 516
4.4.10.7 Network Feature Code Table - PGM 325 ...................................... 519
4.4.11 H.323 Routing Table ...............................................................520
4.4.11.1 H.323 Basic Attributes -PGM 326 .................................................. 521
4.4.11.2 H.323 CO Group Attributes -PGM 327........................................... 522
4.4.11.3 H.323 Incoming Route table -PGM 328 ......................................... 524
4.4.12 T-NET Data ..............................................................................525
4.4.12.1 T-NET Basic Attributes -PGM 330 ................................................. 526
4.4.12.2 T-NET CM Attributes -PGM 331 .................................................... 527
viii
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.12.3 T-NET LM Attributes -PGM 332 ..................................................... 528
4.4.12.4 T-NET FoPSTN table -PGM 333.................................................... 529
4.4.12.5 T-NET Control Contact -PGM 334 ................................................. 530
4.4.12.6 T-NET Music/Alarm -PGM 335 ~ 336 ............................................ 531
4.4.12.7 T-NET ISDN Clock Priority for eMG800 - PGM 337 ...................... 532
4.4.13 Zone Data ................................................................................533
4.4.13.1 Zone Number Overview ................................................................. 534
4.4.13.2 Device Zone Number – PGM 436 .................................................. 535
4.4.13.3 Device Zone Attributes – PGM 437................................................ 536
4.4.13.4 Access & Page Relay – PGM 438 ................................................. 538
4.4.13.5 Inside Zone Attributes Overview .................................................... 539
4.4.13.6 Zone Attribute – PGM 439.............................................................. 540
4.4.13.7 Zone RTP Relay Group – PGM 440 .............................................. 543
4.4.13.8 Inter Zone Attribute – PGM 441 ..................................................... 544
4.4.13.9 Zone Holiday Assignment - PGM 444 ............................................ 546
4.4.14 Device Login ...........................................................................547
4.4.14.1 Remote Device Registration – PGM 442 ....................................... 548
4.4.14.2 Station User Login – PGM 443 ...................................................... 549
4.4.15 UCS Data .................................................................................551
4.4.15.1 Common Attributes – PGM 445 ..................................................... 552
4.4.15.2 UCS Standard Client Login – PGM 446 ......................................... 554
4.4.15.3 UCS Premium Client Login – PGM 446 ......................................... 556
4.4.15.4 UCS Standard Client Attributes – PGM 447 .................................. 558
4.4.15.5 Administrative Message – PGM 448 .............................................. 559
4.4.15.6 UCS Standard Client Audio Setting – PGM 449 ............................ 560
4.4.16 DECT Data ...............................................................................562
4.4.16.1 DECT Registration (0#) .................................................................. 563
4.4.16.2 DECT ATTRIBUTES - PGM 491.................................................... 565
4.4.16.3 DECT Multi-zone support ............................................................... 566
4.4.17 Hotel Data ................................................................................567
4.4.18 Green Mode for eMG - PGM 500 ...........................................568
4.4.18.1 Green mode activation ................................................................... 569
4.4.18.2 Green Mode Time Setting .............................................................. 570
4.4.19 Redundancy Data for UCP600 & 2400 ..................................571
4.4.19.1 Redundancy Attributes – PGM 502................................................ 572
4.4.19.2 Redundancy IP Address – PGM 503 ............................................. 573
4.4.20 Initialization - PGM 450 ..........................................................574
4.4.20.1 Initialization Table - PGM 450 ........................................................ 575
4.5 Maintenance ..................................................................... 576
4.5.1 S/W Upgrade .............................................................................578
4.5.1.1 File Upload ....................................................................................... 579
ix
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.1.2 Upgrade Process .............................................................................. 580
4.5.1.3 Upgrade HTML Files ........................................................................ 582
4.5.1.4 WTIB Base upgrade Process for eMG800 ....................................... 583
4.5.2 Database ....................................................................................584
4.5.2.1 Database Upload .............................................................................. 584
4.5.2.2 Database management .................................................................... 584
4.5.3 Multi Language .........................................................................585
4.5.3.1 Multi Language File Upload.............................................................. 585
4.5.3.2 Multi Language File Download ......................................................... 585
4.5.4 SMDR .........................................................................................586
4.5.5 File System ................................................................................587
4.5.5.1 File View & Delete ............................................................................ 587
4.5.5.2 File System Information .................................................................... 587
4.5.6 MOH (Music On-Hold) Management .......................................588
4.5.6.1 MOH Delete & Download ................................................................. 588
4.5.6.2 MOH Upload ..................................................................................... 588
4.5.7 License Install ...........................................................................589
4.5.7.1 License upload ................................................................................. 590
4.5.7.2 Gateway License for UCP ................................................................ 590
4.5.7.3 Temp License Activation .................................................................. 591
4.5.8 DECT Statistics Feature ...........................................................592
4.5.9 VSF Prompt Upload ..................................................................593
4.5.9.1 Prompt selection ............................................................................... 593
4.5.9.2 Prompt Upload/Delete ...................................................................... 594
4.5.9.3 Individual Upload .............................................................................. 595
4.5.10 VSF System Greeting .............................................................596
4.5.10.1 Individual Upload ............................................................................ 596
4.5.10.2 Individual download ........................................................................ 597
4.5.10.3 System greeting Upload ................................................................. 597
4.5.10.4 System greeting Download ............................................................ 598
4.5.11 User Greeting ..........................................................................599
4.5.11.1 User Greeting Upload ..................................................................... 599
4.5.11.2 User Greeting Download ................................................................ 600
4.5.12 Company Directory ................................................................601
4.5.12.1 CDN Upload ................................................................................... 601
4.5.12.2 CDN Download ............................................................................... 602
4.5.13 Voice Mail Management .........................................................603
4.5.13.1 Voice Mail Delete............................................................................ 603
4.5.13.2 Voice Mail USB Backup ................................................................. 604
4.5.14 Function program ...................................................................605
x
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.14.1 User Function Management Page ................................................. 605
4.5.15 User Management...................................................................609
4.5.15.1 Company (Tenant group) Administrator Account........................... 609
4.5.16 Trace ........................................................................................611
4.5.17 TDM Gain Control ...................................................................612
4.5.18 IP Gain Control .......................................................................613
4.5.19 Tone/ Ring Gain & Cadence Control ....................................613
4.5.20 Appliances Control.................................................................614
4.5.21 Web Certificate .......................................................................614
4.6 On-Line web user guide .................................................. 617
Appendix A Program Codes ....................................... 618
Appendix B Flexible Numbering Plan (Web based) . 620
Appendix C Database Details & Default for Station
Administration for eMG ............................................... 630
xi
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Manual Application
This document provides detailed information covering the configuration of the eMG/UCP
database and maintenance of the eMG/UCP. The manual also details the power-up and
initialization routines and the Station Web Portal.
The manual is written for the experienced installer with knowledge of telephony terms, and
functions of small and mid-sized business telecommunications systems.
1.2 Manual Organization
This manual is organized in ten (10) major sections including:
Section 1 Introduction: This section introduces the content and organization of the
manual.
Section 2 System & Admin Information: In this section general information on
System capacities, power-up routines and the system initialization process are detailed.
Also, this section discusses the process for registration of IP and softphones with the
system.
Section 3 Station Administration for eMG: This section provides details on
configuring the eMG system employing a station allowed administrative access. Step
by step procedures are given along with brief but concise descriptions of the various
configuration parameters and available settings. We recommend that you use Section
4 Web administration.
Section 4 Web Administration: Similar to the Station Administration section, the Web
Administration section gives step by step procedures and descriptions for the
configuration parameters and settings available using a Web browser.
-
Section 4.5 Maintenance: The Maintenance section provides details on managing
the eMG including database upload and download, software upgrade, and user
access management using the Web browser interface.
-
Section 4.6 Station Program: This section discusses the configuration of the
features and functions available in the portal.
-
Section 4.7 On-line web user guide: This section explains the frequent use of
features to a user. We didn’t describe this section because you can easily get the
information on the web by clicking [User’s guide] of login page.
Appendix A: The Station and Attendant Station User Program codes are listed with the
associated function. These fixed codes are available at the iPECS IP or LDP phones to
configure basic functions such as ring tones, activate features and assign features and
functions to Flex buttons.
Appendix B: A complete listing of the nine basic Flexible Numbering Plans. One is
1
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
selected as the system’s Flexible Numbering Plan. Each of the basic Numbering Plans
includes all feature and resource access codes, and any individual code can be
changed.
Appendix C: This Appendix includes a detailed listing of all the configurable
parameters by Program group and includes the default values for each parameter. It is
only for eMG Station Administration.
2
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
2. SYSTEM & ADMIN INFORMATION
2.1 System capacities for eMG and UCP
iPECS eMG is available in several hardware configurations based on the Main board of the KSU.
Upon initialization, the software will structure a database for the maximum possible station and
CO/IP Line configurations. Thus, the software port count capacities will differ from the hardware
count however, the hardware limitations always apply. The total System ports supported by the
software include the Station ports, CO/IP Line ports and ports for various options including the
integrated AA/VM, Miscellaneous ports, etc. Other than the Station and CO/IP Line ports, the
hardware and software capacities are the same. The capacities relative to the software are
provided in the table below.
Table 2.1-1 eMG80 Software Capacities
Item
Capacity
CO/Trunk lines
Max. 74
Stations
Max. 140
Attendants
4
LAN port
2 (1 each, KSU and VVMU)
Modem Channel
1 (MODU)
Serial Port(RS-232C)
1
USB(2.0) Host port
1
Alarm/Doorbell input
2 (1 per KSU)
External Control Relays
2 (1 per KSU)
1 Internal: select one of 13 melodies
Music Source Inputs
1 External source input
5 SLT ports
3 VSF announcements
Power Fail Circuit
Max. 6 (1 per KSU, EKSU, CH204, CH408, CS416)
VSF Device 1: Built-in AA/VM
8 channels(2 Chan. by default, 1 Channel by license), 1 hour
w/MEMU
15 hours(no license needed)
w/MEMU2
60 hours(no license needed)
VSF Device 2 (VVMU)
8 channels (by license) & 15 hours(by license), 1 hour(by default)
Conference channels
148 channels/13 party per group
WTIB
1
DECT Phones
48
Built-in VoIP channels
8 (2 channels by default, 6 channels by license)
VVMU VoIP channels
8 (by license)
IP Stations and SIP Trunks
48 port (32 Stations+16 SIP Trunks)
External Page
1 port
Internal Page
35 zones
System Speed Dial
3000 numbers, 25 digits each
3
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Item
Issue 1.6
Capacity
System Speed Dial Zones (Groups)
10 zones
Station Speed Dial
100 per station, 25 digits each (Max. 4000 numbers)
Last Number Redial
10 numbers
Save Number Redial
1 number
DSS Consoles per Station
3
Serial DSS - System
100
Serial DSS – Station (LIP-8000)
4
Serial DSS – Station (LIP-9000)
1
SMDR buffer
5000
CO Line Groups
20
Station & Station Groups
40
Station & Station Group Members
70
Pickup Group
50
Pickup Group Member
140
Conference Groups - System
40
Conference Groups - Station
20 per station
Executive/Secretary pairs
36
Authorization Codes
500 (Station: 140, System: 360)
Transparent Networking Table
15
ICLID Routing table
250
Tenancy (ICM) Group
15
Attendant Station
4
DID Digits Analysis
4
MSN Table
500
Table 2.1-2 eMG800 Software Capacities
Item
CO/Trunk lines
Stations
Attendants
LAN port
Modem Channel
Serial Port(RS-232C)
USB(3.0) Host port
Alarm/Doorbell input
External Control Relays
Capacity
Power Fail Circuit
Max. 600
Max. 1200
5
MPB(1), VOIB(1), VMIB(1)
1(MODU)
1
1
1
2 (1 per KSU)
1 Internal: select one of 13 melodies
1 External source input
5 SLT ports
3 VSF announcements
1 port / 1 LCOB
VSF Device
VMIU
VMIB
4ch, 1 hours
8ch, 100 hours
Music Source Inputs
4
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Item
Issue 1.6
Capacity
Conference channels
WTIB
DECT Phones
Built-in VoIP channels
VOIB128 channels
IP Stations and SIP Trunks
148 channels/13 party per group
3
192
8 (4 channel by default)
128 (32 channel by default)
600
External Page
1 port
Internal Page
100 zones
System Speed Dial
8000 numbers, 25 digits each
System Speed Dial Zones (Groups)
10 zones
Station Speed Dial
100 per station, 25 digits each (Max. 12,000 numbers)
Last Number Redial
10 numbers
Save Number Redial
1 number
DSS Consoles per Station
3
Serial DSS - System
500
Serial DSS – Station (LIP-8000)
4
Serial DSS – Station (LIP-9000)
1
SMDR buffer
30,000
CO Line Groups
200
Station & Station Groups
200
Station & Station Group Members
200
Pickup Group
200
Pickup Group Member
12,000
Conference Groups - System
160
Conference Groups - Station
100 per station
Executive/Secretary pairs
100
Authorization Codes
2,400 (Station: 1,200/System: 1,200)
Transparent Networking Table
32
ICLID Routing table
250
Tenancy (ICM) Group
32
Attendant Station
5
DID Digits Analysis
4
MSN Table
1,500
5
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 2.1-3 UCP System Capacities
ITEM
UCP100
UCP600
UCP2400
10 Slots
Main Cabinet
Remark
1 slot used by the PSU
System channels, basic
maximum
50
199
100
600
600
2400
Stations
199
600
2400
CO/IP Lines (external network
channels incl. VoIP)
199
600
998
Registrations
100
200
400
Simultaneous
100
200
400
199
600
2400
No
Yes
Yes
w/License
Total stations and Lines
cannot exceed the available
System channels
UCS Standard Clients
UCS Premium Clients
Registrations
Server Redundancy
Yes
Cabinet Power Redundancy
Integrated Telephony ports
*1
2 FXS (SLT)
4 CO, or 2 BRI
or 4 BRI Lines
standard
optional
None
None
Two FXS ports are equipped
as standard in the UCP100
module; an optional CO/BRI
line unit may be equipped or
installed.
132
WTIM4/8 modules (Max.)
Max DECT phones
Supports local and remote
redundancy
100
255
255
2-6
16
199
6
24
600
0
0
998
6
6
0
6/10/14/18
6/18
0
*2&3
VoIP Switch channels,
Built-in basic
Built-in maximum
System Maximum
VoIP DSP channels,
Built-in max
Multi-party Conference Unit
(MCIU) channels
VSF*4
VoIP DSP channels can be
assigned to the MCIU, 2
VoIP = 4 Conf channels.
For UCP100 see Note 1.
30
Maximum MCIMs
Max SIP channels
w/License (8ch increment)
w/VOIM and VCIM
100
600
1200
8-Ch./4 Hrs.
8-Ch./6Hrs.
NA
14 Hours
16 Hours
NA
UVM capacity, basic
maximum
8 Channels at 50 hours
16 Channels at 200 hours
UVM per system
30
Attendants
50
Serial Port (RS-232C)
1
USB Host port
1
Alarm/Doorbell input
1
2
External Control Relays
1
4
Music Source Inputs (Ext)
1
2
Power Fail Circuit
1
4
External Page zones
1
2
Internal Page Zones
100
System Speed Dial
12,000
50
System Speed Dial Zones
6
w/License
w/License
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 2.1-3 UCP System Capacities
ITEM
UCP100
UCP600
UCP2400
Remark
(Groups)
100
Station Speed Dial, per Station
24,000
Total Station Speed Dial
200
Call park
Last Number Redial
10 (23 digits)
Save Number Redial
1 (23 digits)
9
Standard DSS Consoles/Station
500
Serial DSS - System
4
Serial DSS - Station (LIP-8000)
1
Serial DSS – Station (LIP-9000)
30,000
SMDR buffer
CO Line Groups
200
Station & Station Groups
200
Station & Station Group Members
200
Pickup Groups
200
2,4000
Pickup Group Member
Personal Groups
1200
Conference Group - System
160
Conference Group - Station
100
100
Executive/Secretary pairs
Authorization Codes
5200 (Station:2400/System:2800)
100
Transparent Networking Table
4,000
CLI Msg Wait (Missed calls)
Redundancy
N/A
Yes
Flex DID Table
10,000
MSN table
2,400
4
DID Digits Analysis
Tenancy (ICM) Groups
100
ICLID table
500
NOTE
1. iPECS UCP-100 is equipped with two (2) FXS ports, and one of several built-in CO
Line units may be factory or field installed.
4 analog CO Lines (UCP-COIU4), uses two (2) VoIP DSP channels
2 BRI Lines, 2B+D each, (UCP-BRIU2) , uses two (2) VoIP DSP channels
4 BRI Lines, each 2B+D, (UCP-BRIU4) , uses four (4) VoIP DSP channels
Note the built-in PSTN interfaces require dedicated DSP resources. These DSP
resources reduce the maximum VoIP DSP resources available shown in the above
chart.
2. The built-in VoIP Switching channels implement agent and packet relay functions.
Remote device and network interfaces send RTP traffic to the VoIP channel, which
forwards traffic to the appropriate local iPECS device. The VoIP Switching channel
also forwards multi-cast packets to the remote end-points and local non-iPECS
devices. Only the g.711 codec is allowed unless there is an available VoIP DSP
channel.
7
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3. The number of VoIP Switching channels can be increased to the maximum with
license installation.
4. Approximately 35 minutes (16 Mbytes) of the VSF and UVM memories are used to
provide basic system prompts, the remaining memory can be used for
announcements and voice message storage. Note the built-in VSF supports the
g.711 Codec only; the UVM supports g.711, g.729, g.723, and g.722 Codecs.
8
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
2.2 Slot configuration for eMG80
The built-in interface ports, ports of the optional Interface boards and the optional Function
boards are organized into Slots. For the built-in and optional board interfaces two Slots are
defined, a Slot for the Stations and a Slot for the CO/IP Lines. The Function boards use a single
Slot to identify the board location. The Slots are used during the initialization routines, refer to
section 2.3, to identify the installed equipment and establish the numbering for the Stations,
CO/IP lines, and Function board channels. An additional Slot (Slot 18) is used by the software
to identify the Conferencing channels as a virtual board.
The figure below depicts the Slot locations and Table 2.2-1 lists the Slots, the hardware
designation for boards applicable for the Slot and the software reference for the type of
interfaces.
Table 2.2-1 eMG80 Slot Configuration (Standard)
Slot
KSU
1
KSU
2
KSU
3
KSU
4
EKSU
5
EKSU
H/W Reference
Built-in KSU Station interface group
KSUA and KSUI: 1-DKT & 7-Hybrid
KSUAD & KSUID: 8-DKT &-4 SLT
CH204 or BH104
CH408, BH208 or HYB8
CS416 or SLIB16
WTIB4
CH204 or BH104
CH408, BH208 or HYB8
CS416 or SLIB16
WTIB4
Built-in EKSU Station interface group
8-Hybrid
CH204
CH408 or HYB8
CS416 or SLIB16
9
S/W Reference
HYIB8
DSIB12
HYIB4
HYIB8
SLIB16
WTIB4
HYIB4
HYIB8
SLIB16
WTIB4
HYIB8
HYIB4
HYIB8
SLIB16
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Slot
KSU
6
EKSU
7
KSU
8
KSU
9
KSU
10
EKSU
11
EKSU
12
EKSU
13
14
15
16
17
18
KSU
KSU
KSU
KSU
KSU
H/W Reference
CH204
CH408 or HYB8
CS416 or SLIB16
Built-in KSU Station interface group
KSUA and KSUAD: 4-CO Line
KSUI & KSUID w/PRIU:
KSUI & KSUID w/BRIU2
CH204
CH408 or CS416
BH104
BH208
CH204
CH408 or CS416
BH104
BH208
Built-in EKSU Station interface group
4-CO Line
CH204
CH409 or CS416
CH204
CH408 or CS416
Built-in KSU VoIP channels
VVMU VoIP channels
Built-in 4-port 1-Hour AA/VM
VVMU 4-port, 15-hour AA/VM
Miscellaneous connections
Virtual Slot for Conferencing channels
10
Issue 1.6
S/W Reference
HYIB4
HYIB8
SLIB16
LCOB4
PRIB
BRIB2
LCOB2
LCOB4
BRIB1
BRIB2
LCOB2
LCOB4
BRIB1
BRIB2
LCOB4
LCOB2
LCOB4
LCOB2
LCOB4
VOIU
VOIB
VMIU
VMIB
MISU
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
2.3 Initialization
2.3.1 eMG Initialization
The system should be initialized before starting the configuration to assure a known starting point
and automatically register installed boards. Also, if the Nation Code requires modification, the
system will be initialized in the process so as to establish tones and gains appropriate for the
region. You can initialize the system using the Initialization switch (Dip-switch SW1, pole-2) in the
KSU or using the software Initialization PGM 450. Note the former must be used to change the
Nation Code as detailed section 3.3.1.
Basic Power-Up Routine
When the KSU power switch is turned On or the KSU Reset button is pressed with power ON, the
system will initiate the “Power-up” routine. During the Power-Up routine the system checks the
Initialization switch and, if the switch is in the Off position, the system will perform the basic
Power-up routine; clear all scratch-pad memory, load run-time programs, establish
communications with each registered Interface board, Function board, iPECS IP Phone and LDP
Phone, send Restart commands and load appropriate settings to the boards and terminals. The
KSU also will attempt to communicate and register the EKSU. If a registered board or terminal
does not respond after several attempts, the system places the device in an out-of-service mode
but maintains the configuration of the device. Once the Power-up routine is complete, the system
will conduct normal operations.
Registration of Boards
If the Initialization switch is in the ON position, in addition to the Power-Up routine, the system will
perform the full Initialization procedure. During initialization, the system attempts to communicate
with the board in each Slot, starting with Slot 1 and progressing sequentially through the slots, to
determine the installed equipment. If the board is installed, the Slot number (“Sequence Number”)
is registered, an “Order number” is determined and the MPB MAC and IP address are assigned.
Using “Order number”, which is the order that devices of the same type (CO/IP Line, Station, VSF
device, etc.) register, the system assigns the Station numbers and CO/IP Line numbers.
An exception to the above is the MAC and IP address of the VOIB which covers the VoIP
channels on the VVMU. The VOIB has a separate MAC address and the IP address is assigned
from the system. Note this IP address can be modified at a later time.
Once the system is operational and the database configured, the system can be expanded
manually by registering the optional boards as detailed in PGM 235, Registration Table.
11
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Initial Station and CO Numbering
The default Station Numbering Plan assigns a Three-digit number to each station port. Starting at
the first (left) port of Slot 1, the system assigns the Station Numbers beginning at “100 (eMG80)
or 1000 (eMG800)”. The Station number increments for each port in the slot, moving to the right
until reaching the last port. The process is repeated for each Station slot (1 to 6) in sequence
assigning consecutive Station Numbers.
Note the Station Number Plan can be two to four digits and the Station Number for each port can
be modified individually.
Slots 7 to 14 are then registered and, since they are CO/IP Lines, the Order numbers 1 to 8 are
used to number the CO/IP Lines. The process is repeated for each device type.
IP Phone Registration
Unregistered iPECS IP Phones attempt to discover and register with a local (on the same LAN)
iPECS system, in this case the eMG. The phone will send a registration request to the MPB IP
address. If no response is received, the phone will send a multi-cast request. With the request,
the phone will send the MAC address. This address must be assigned in the PGM 235.
When the system receives the request, the MAC address received is compared to the
Registration table and, if matched, the phone is registered, it is given the next available sequence
number starting at “19”, and assigned the next available Station Number.
If the iPECS IP Phone is configured as a remote device, it will send a registration request to the
iPECS system at the configured IP address. When the system receives the request, it is
processed normally except the MAC address must be assigned in PGM 442 Remote Device
Register.
Default Database
Based on the installed equipment, the system populates the database with the default values,
refer to Appendix C based on Keyset administration as numbering plan 1. Once the database is
set to default, the system will conduct normal operations.
12
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
2.3.2 UCP Initialization
When power is applied to the UCP or the UCP Reset button is pressed, the system will initiate the
“Power-up” routine. During the Power-Up routine, the system will check the Initialization switch
(pole 4th of UCP Mode Dip Switch). If the switch is in the OFF position, the system will perform a
simple Power-Up routine; clear all scratch-pad memory, load run-time programs, establish
communications with each registered gateway Module and iPECS terminal, send RESTART
commands and load appropriate settings to the Modules and terminals. If a Module or terminal
does not respond after several attempts, the system places the device in an out-of-service mode
but maintains the database settings. Once the Power-up routine is complete, the system will
conduct normal operations.
If the Initialization switch is in the ON position, in place of the Power-Up routine, the system will
perform the full Initialization procedure. The initialization procedure will set the system database
to default values. Further, during the full initialization procedure, the system will establish
communications with each gateway Module and iPECS terminal for registration. This
communication will use the default device IP address and the UCP MAC address for system
identification. The system will maintain IP addresses and Sequence Numbers for previously
registered gateway Modules and iPECS terminals. These values are employed for subsequent
communication and logical assignments of numbering plans, respectively. In addition, the system
sends commands to modify all settings to the default values, including IP addresses but
maintains the existing Sequence Numbers.
After successful initialization, should a device not respond to several attempts by the system to
communicate, the system places the device in an out-of-service mode but maintains the
database. Once initialization is complete, set the initialization switch to the OFF position to protect
the database. The system must be restarted to complete the initialization.
2.3.2.1 Normal Registration Process
Module & Terminal
When power is applied and an Ethernet link is established, an unregistered device will attempt to
discover and register with a local (on the same LAN) iPECS system. The Module or terminal will
send a registration request to the assigned iPECS system (UCP) IP address. If no response is
received, the device will generate a Multi-cast discovery request for registration.
Remote iPECS Phone & Remote Services Module
A remote device, iPECS Phone or gateway Module, registers with the system using the MAC
address of the device. The MAC address must be assigned in the system database and the IP
address of the system must be assigned in the remote device. Using this address, the remote
device will attempt to register with the assigned iPECS system. When the system receives the
registration request, the MAC address is compared with the database to authenticate the remote
device. With a matching MAC, the system will accept the registration request and provide the
remote device with the appropriate settings. Note that the position of the UCP Registration switch
does not affect remote registration.
13
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
iPECS Softphone or SIP Phone
iPECS softphones (iPECS UCS Client) and SIP phones register with the system employing the
User Id and Password. When the system receives the registration request, the Id and password
are compared to the Station Login parameters. If a match is found in the Station Login Table, the
system registers the device and assigns the phone the Station Number requested (Desired
number), if available. As with remote registration, the position of the UCP Registration switch will
not affect Softphone or SIP Phone registration.
iPECS system
When power is applied, an Ethernet link is established, and the Registration switch (UCP DIP
Switch position 3) is in the ON position, the UCP will send a Multi-cast request to unregistered
gateway Modules and iPECS terminals for registration.
When the system receives a valid registration or discovery request, and the Registration switch
(UCP DIP Switch position 3) is in the ON position, the system will respond to the gateway Module
or terminal with a Registration command including the system IP and MAC address. During the
registration process, the Module or terminal will receive data from the system including a
Sequence Number, IP address, RTP characteristics, etc., as well as default settings appropriate
to the type of Module or terminal. Once registered, the Module or terminal will maintain the
system IP and MAC address in non-volatile memory and will not attempt further registrations.
If the Registration switch is in the OFF position, the system will not respond to normal registration
requests from a local device.
Sequence Number
Sequence numbers are allocated to the different device types and are assigned sequentially to
devices of the same type as shown in the Table 2.3.1 below.
Table 2.3.1 Sequence Number Allocation
Device Type
Station
CO line
VSF
MISC
MCIM
UCS server
IPCR and 3rd party server
WTIM
Start Sequence Number
End Sequence Number
1
2401
3001
3101
3201
3231
3247
3257
2400
3000
3100
3200
3230
3246
3256
3388
14
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
2.3.2.2 Replacement Module Registration
Under certain situations, it is necessary to force the registration of gateway modules and
terminals specifically when an UCP, gateway Module or iPECS Terminal is replaced. When
replacing a UCP module, gateway Modules and iPECS terminals must be forced to register with
the new system. With Module or terminal replacement, the system must recognize the
“replacement” status to transfer the existing database values.
When replacing a UCP, the local Web interface is used to access the system. The user may
update the system database using the database downloaded from the previous UCP memory.
Using the Terminal mode Command Line interface (“maint > reset ip”), the user provides the new
UCP with the IP address of the previous UCP, and issues the Register command. The new
system will then send a Uni-cast Register command to each gateway Module and iPECS terminal
registered to the previous system. This Register command will include the previous system IP
address. These commands are repeated several times only. As communication is established,
the new UCP will update the settings of the gateway Modules and iPECS terminals appropriately.
When the gateway Modules and terminals respond, they are registered to the new system.
When replacing a gateway Module, use PGM 103 “Device IP Plan” in Web admin to change the
service mode to “Out of Service”, change the MAC information for the new module, change the
service mode to in-service and install the new gateway Module.
When replacing an iPECS terminal, using PGM 103 “Device IP Plan” in Web admin change the
service mode to “Out of Service” change the MAC information for the new iPECS terminal,
change the service state to in-service, and install the new terminal.
15
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
2.4 General Admin and Menu Structure
The iPECS system can be configured to meet each customer's individual needs. System
configuration may be accomplished by entering the “Program mode” at an assigned Admin
Station or by pointing a Web Browser at the IP address of the MPB/UCP. Section 3 provides a
description of eMG system for data entry using the Admin Station. Section 4 discusses
configuration employing the Web browser. Note that some parameters are available through Web
Admin and not the Keyset Admin.
Configurable items are organized as “Data” groups with a common affect, i.e. station, system,
numbering plan, etc. Items are further grouped into “Programs” forming a multi-layered menu
structure as the following list. Each of the Program groups is assigned a three digit “Program”
(PGM) code used to access the group. The top level Data groups include:
-
System ID & Numbering Plans
-
Station Data
-
Board Based Data
-
CO Line Data
-
System Data
-
Station Group Data
-
ISDN Line Data
-
SIP Data
-
Tables Data
-
Networking Data
-
H.323 Routing Table
-
T-NET Data
-
Zone Data
-
Device Login
-
UCS Data
-
DECT Data
-
Redundancy Data (for UCP600 & UCP2400)
-
Hotel Data
-
Green Mode for eMG
-
Initialization
The default and range of values for each configurable parameter are provided in Section Web
admin programming. The index and charts are helpful references when entering data into the
system‘s database.
16
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3. STATION ADMIN PROGRAMMING
FOR EMG
3.1 General
3.1.1 LCD & Button Functions
While in the Program mode, the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) and Flex button LEDs of an Admin
Station are used to guide and indicate status of the feature. The dial-pad is most often used to
enter data after selecting a data item using the Flex buttons. In some cases, pressing a Flex
button will toggle the entry with the Flex button LED indicating the status (On/Off).
For Programs with multiple Flex button selections, the volume controls ([VOL UP] and [VOL
DOWN] buttons) may be used to select the next or previous item. The [SPEED] button is
generally employed as a delete button to erase existing entries. However, where noted, it may be
used to confirm a range input. Pressing the [CONF] button, returns to the 1st step of the data
entry procedure for the Program without storing unsaved entries.
The [Save] button is used to store data after entry. If there are no conflicts in the entered data,
confirmation tone will be received and the data stored. If a conflict exists, error tone is provided
and newly entered data are not saved. Generally, corrected data may be entered and stored
without restarting the entry procedure from the 1st step.
3.1.2 Alphanumeric Data Entries
In some cases, an alphanumeric entry is required. Two (2) dial-pad digits represent each
character of an alphanumeric entry, as shown in Table 3.1.2–1 below. Use the Table to
determine the two digits that must be entered from the dial-pad for each character.
Table 3.1.2-1 ALPHANUMERIC DIAL-PAD ENTRIES
1
4
7
*
Q – 11
Z – 12
. – 13
1 – 10
G – 41
H - 42
I - 43
4 - 40
P - 71
R - 72
S - 73
Q - 7*
7 - 70
Blank - *1
: - *2
, - *3
2
5
8
0
A - 21
B - 22
C - 23
2 - 20
J - 51
K - 52
L - 53
5 - 50
T - 81
U - 82
V - 83
8 - 80
0-00
17
3
6
9
#
D - 31
E - 32
F - 33
3 - 30
M - 61
N - 62
O - 63
6 - 60
W - 91
X - 92
Y - 93
Z - 9#
9 - 90
#
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.2 Data Entry Mode
Limited data entry can be accomplished from an Admin Station or station assigned for data entry
(Station Attributes III PGM 113, Flex button 1). After initialization and registration, any enabled
iPECS IP or LDP Phone may access the system database. In addition, as default, there is no
Station Admin password defined. To enter the Program mode from the Admin Station follow the
procedure below. In the left column of the chart are the LCD displays and in the right column are
step-by-step instructions to modify database items.
PROCEDURE:
STATION 100 (T)
04 SEP 01 02:49 PM
1. Press the [PGM] button.
Dial ‘*‘ and ‘#’.
ENTER ADMIN PASSWORD
Enter the Admin password. Confirmation tone is received. As
a default there is no password and this step is skipped.
ADMIN PROGRAM START
ENTER PGM NUMBER
To select a program, use the instructions in the following
sections, starting with “Press the [PGM] button” and dial the
specified Admin Program code.
18
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3 Procedure for Data Entry
The following sections provide specific instructions for entering data from the Admin Station once
in the Program mode. Each section provides descriptive information, step-by-step instructions
and Tables for determining appropriate entries.
3.3.1 System ID — PGM 100
Under System ID, the country is identified using the international dial codes (NATION CODE). If
the NATION code requires changing, the system must be initialized to restructure memory and
create the country specific defaults, gain, frequencies and other system characteristics specific to
the country and regional regulatory requirements.
To change the NATION Code on eMG:
Set the MPB Dip-switch 1 pole 2 to the ON position,
Follow the procedure below to modify the NATION code
Press the reset button on the KSU, power the system Off and On, or use PGM 450 to
initialize the system.
After initialization, reset switches as needed, Dip-switch 1 pole 2 should be OFF.
A twenty-four (24) character SITE NAME and the local Area Code are also defined in this
program. The SITE NAME is primarily useful for the installer/programmer as a reference to the
customer.
In addition, under this program the system can be programmed to select one of eight (8) Flexible
Number Plans, refer to Appendix B. Individual items from the selected Numbering Plan can be
changed under Flexible Numbering Plan part A to D – PGM 106 to 109- in section 3.3.2.5.
PROCEDURE:
SYSTEM ID
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-6)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 100.
Select the desired Flex button (1~5), refer to Table 3.3.1-1.
For COUNTRY CODE, refer to Table 3.3.1-2 for appropriate
entries.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired System Id data. For
System Reset, button 5, press [Save] to reset the System Id
to default.
To store the System Id data press the [Save] button.
Table 3.3.1-1 SYSTEM ID (PGM 100)
BTN
1
− DISPLAY
COUNTRY CODE
1
REMARK
Refer to Table 3.3.1-2 below.
Note system must be re-initialized if
changed.
19
RANGE
DEFAULT
4 digits
1
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.1-1 SYSTEM ID (PGM 100)
BTN
2
3
4
5
6
− DISPLAY
REMARK
CUSTOMER SITE NAME
………………………………….
MY MULTI AREA CODE
ENTER TABLE NO(00-40)
RANGE
Refer to Table 3.1.2-1 for alphanumeric
dial-pad entries.
24
character
Enter the area code of the installed site.
6 digits
Refer to Appendix B for details of
Numbering Plan selection.
NUMBERING PLAN (1-9)
1
Enable/Disable 8-digit Station Numbering
Plan. Assign the Prefix codes in the 8Digit Numbering Table (PGM238).
Returns the System Id to default.
PREFIX USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
SYSTEM ID
SYSTEM RESET
DEFAULT
1-9
1
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Table 3.3.1-2 COUNTRY CODES
COUNTRY
America
Bahrain
Bolivia
Burma
China (Taiwan)
Costa Rica
Denmark
El Salvador
Finland
Germany
Guam
Haiti
India
Iraq
Italy
Kenya
Liberia
Luxembourg
Mexico
Netherlands
Norway
Panama
Peru
Qatar
Singapore
Sri Lanka
Switzerland
Turkey
Uruguay
CODE
1
973
591
95
886
506
45
503
358
49
671
509
91
964
39
254
231
352
52
31
47
507
51
974
65
94
41
90
598
COUNTRY
Argentina
Bangladesh
Brazil
Cameroon
CIS
Cyprus
Ecuador
Ethiopia
France
Ghana
Guatemala
Honduras
Indonesia
Ireland
Japan
Korea
Libya
Malaysia
Monaco
New Zealand
Oman
P.N.G
Philippines
Saudi Arabia
South Africa
Swaziland
Thailand
U.A.E.
Venezuela
20
CODE
54
880
55
237
7
357
593
251
33
233
502
504
62
353
81
82
218
60
377
64
968
675
63
966
27
268
66
971
58
COUNTRY
Australia
Belgium
Brunei
Chile
Colombia
Czech
Egypt
Fiji
Gabon
Greece
Guyana
Hong Kong
Iran
Israel
Jordan
Kuwait
Malta
Morocco
Nigeria
Pakistan
Paraguay
Portugal
Senegal
Spain
Sweden
Tunisia
United Kingdom
Y.A.R.
CODE
61
32
673
56
57
42
20
679
241
30
592
852
98
972
962
965
356
212
234
92
595
351
221
34
46
216
44
967
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.2 NUMBERING PLANS DATA — PGM 102 to 109
3.3.2.1 System IP Address Plan — PGM 102
The System IP Address Plan sets several IP addresses including the KSU LAN port IP address
(MPB IP Address) required for external VoIP calls, the IP address for the router, and the system‘s
internal private IP address Plan. Note that the MPB and Router addresses and sub-net mask
must be a routable IP address for access to an external VoIP network, remote access by a
gateway/board or terminal and remote Web access. The VOIB must also have a routable IP
address for access to/from an external VoIP network or remote user.
When Automatic IP Assignment, button 7, is enabled, the system will assign IP addresses to
each local terminal and the VOIB using the assigned System IP address range. These addresses
are used for communications between the system and the VOIB and terminals.
The system may be connected to a LAN that is segmented by two separate private IP address
schemes. This segmenting technique is often used to separate voice and data devices.
However, with this segmenting technique, the system would normally treat the segmented
Terminals such as iPECS Soft Phones, as remote devices, using valuable WAN bandwidth.
Assigning the “Second Sys IP address” with valid IP address from the second segment permits
the system to communicate with the devices directly over the LAN.
iPECS can be installed behind a NAPT server, if the NAPT server provides fixed address
translation and port forwarding to the system. In this case, the system will employ the “Firewall IP
address”, button 10, as the fixed public IP address for communication with remote devices. This
address must be assigned as the “MPB” address in the remote device.
PROCEDURE:
SYSTEM IP ADDRESS PLAN
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-17)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 102.
Select the desired button 1~19, refer to Table 3.3.2.1-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired IP addresses. Use an “*” to
enter a dot (“.”)
Press the [Save] button to store IP address entries.
Table 3.3.2.1-1 SYSTEM IP ADDRESS PLAN (PGM 102)
BTN
1
2
3
4
DISPLAY
MPB IP ADDRESS
10 . 10 . 10 . 2
MPB SUB NET MASK
255.255.255.0
ROUTER IP ADDRESS
10 . 10 . 10 . 1
SYSTEM START IP ADDRESS
10.10.10.10
DEFAULT
10.10.10.2
REMARK
This is the IP address of the KSU LAN port A. A
Public IP Address is required for remote user and
external VoIP network access. IPv4 format.
255.255.0.0
10.10.10.1
10.10.10.10
21
IP Address of router for external network (WAN)
access. Required for shared voice and data LAN,
external VoIP and remote Web access.
Start of range for private IP addresses assigned by
the system to Modules/Terminals.
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.2.1-1 SYSTEM IP ADDRESS PLAN (PGM 102)
BTN
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
DISPLAY
SYSTEM END IP ADDRESS
10.10.10.254
SYSTEM SUB NET MASK
255.255.255.0
AUTOMATIC IP ASSIGN
(1:ON/0:OFF): ON
SECOND SYS IP ADDRESS
0 . 0 . 0
.0
SECOND SYS SUB NET MASK
255.255.255 .0
FIREWALL IP ADDRESS
0 . 0 . 0
.0
FIRST START MAC ADDR
000000000000
FIRST END MAC ADDR
000000000000
SECOND START MAC ADDR
000000000000
SECOND END MAC ADDR
000000000000
DEFAULT
10.10.10.254 End of range for private IP addresses assigned by
the system to Modules/Terminals.
255.255.0.0
ON
0.0.0.0
MPB DHCP
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
The system will automatically assign IP addresses
to modules and terminals (ON) or, when OFF, IP
addresses are assigned manually in PGM 103
Device IP Address Plan.
When devices are located on a different private
address on the same net, enter the MPB IP
address for the second LAN.
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
00.00.00.0
0.00.00
When the system is installed behind a NAPT
server, the fixed IP Address provided by the NAPT
server must be assigned in this field.
Also, use this IP address for the MPB address in
remote devices.
A range of MAC addresses can be entered to
register devices. This entry is the start address of
the first range.
00.00.00.0
0.00.00
A range of MAC addresses can be entered to
register devices. This entry is the end address of
the first range.
00.00.00.0
0.00.00
A range of MAC addresses can be entered to
register devices. This entry is the start address of
the second range.
00.00.00.0
0.00.00
A range of MAC addresses can be entered to
register devices. This entry is the end address of
the second range.
Returns System IP Address Plan to default values.
SYSTEM IP ADDRESS PLAN
SYSTEM RESET
MPB DNS IP ADDR
0 . 0 . 0 .0
REMARK
0.0.0.0
OFF
22
IP Address of Domain Name Server, which iPECS
will use to resolve URL to an IP address. The DNS
provides the resolution after receiving the name
from iPECS.
Enable/Disable DHCP client function for the MPB.
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.2.2 Device IP Address Plan -PGM 103
TDM board is registered with own slot number. It is registered automatically without any
configuration.
To register an IP device:
As IP gateway/board and terminals register to the iPECS, a logical slot number is assigned,
which indicates the order of registration. Also, based on the type of device (CO/IP gateway/board,
Terminal) the system assigns a logical Sequence Number. Thus, Sequence Numbers for CO
gateway/board, Terminals are independently assigned based on the type of gateway/board.
These Sequence Numbers are employed to provide a relationship between the physical MAC
address and the logical port numbers of the device.
The system may assign a default private IP address to each Sequence Number. If desired, this
program may be used to modify the assigned IP address for each gateway/board and iPECS
Phone.
Each local gateway/board and terminal can be assigned for “Direct Send”. With Direct Send
enabled, the system will employ the Ethernet MAC address, layer 2 switching to eliminate the
need for IP traffic overhead, reducing overall LAN traffic.
The system normally employs IP multi-cast protocol to respond to a registration request from a
gateway/board or terminal. When the device is separated from the system by a router, the system
must use the IP uni-cast protocol. This is established by the “Local Device” assignment.
When disabled (Off), the system will send an IP uni-cast message to the device in response to a
registration request.
PROCEDURE:
DEVICE IP ADDRESS PLAN
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-7)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 103.
Select the desired Flex button.
Button 1: CO & VOIP Gateway/Board
Button 2: Stations
Button 3: MISU
Button 4: VMIU, VMIB
Button 5: MCIB
Button 6: SYSTEM RESET
Button 7: WTIB
Use the [VOL UP] and [VOL DOWN] buttons to see next/
previous IP Address. Refer to Table 3.3.2.2-1 for display
information.
23
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
PROCEDURE:
Press Flex 1~6 to select the Sub-menu item desired. See
Table 3.3.2.2-1.
Button 1: IP address
Button 2: MAC address
Button 3: ARP
Button 4: REGISTRATION
Button 5: CPU Type
Button 6: Device (Board) ID
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data. For IP and MAC
addresses, an “*” is used to enter a dot (“.”)
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.2.2-1 DEVICE & STATION ADDRESS PLAN (PGM 103)
BTN
1
1–1
1–2
1–3
1–4
1–5
1–6
2
2–1
DISPLAY
001-001 :B40EDCBF5606
VOIP 1 :10 .10 .10 .2
SET IP ADDRESS
VOIP 1 : 10.10.10.2
SET MAC ADDRESS
001-001 : B40EDCBF5606
ARP
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
REGISTRATION
(0:UCAST/1:MCAST): MCAST
CPU TYPE
MSC1K
DEVICE(BOARD) ID
PRIB
001-001 : B40EDCBF5606
KTU 100 :10.10.10.10
SET IP ADDRESS
KTU 100 :10.10.10.10
FEATURE
DEFAULT
LCD shows:
Line 1 Sequence Number, 2 or 3 digits MAC
Address, 12 digits
Line 2 Module Type, 4 characters First Logical
port number IP Address, 7~12 digits
CO & VoIP
board IP
address set
sequentially,
from the range
in PGM 102.
Use Flex button 1 to set the device‘s IP address 10.10.10.10~254
in IP v4 format.
Use Flex button 2 to enter the device‘s MAC
address in the system memory.
None
Use Flex button 3 to enable/disable Direct Send
mode, which employs layer 2 switching to local
devices.
Use Flex button 4 to enable/disable Local
Device Mode, which defines the device as on a
common LAN with the MPB.
Flex button 5 displays the type of CPU
employed in the device.
OFF
MCAST
Flex button 6 displays the Board type
designation.
LCD shows:
Station IP
Line 1 Sequence Number, 3 digits MAC
address set
Address, 12 digits
sequentially,
Line 2 Station Type, 3 characters Station
from the range
Number, 2~4 digits IP Address, 7~12 digits
in PGM 102.
Use Flex button 1 to set the device‘s IP address 10.10.10.10~254
in IP v4 format.
24
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.2.2-1 DEVICE & STATION ADDRESS PLAN (PGM 103)
BTN
2–2
2–3
2–4
2–5
2–6
3
3–1
3–2
3–3
3–4
3–5
3–6
4
4–1
DISPLAY
SET MAC ADDRESS
001-001 : B40EDCBF5606
ARP
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
REGISTRATION
(0:UCAST/1:MCAST): MCAST
CPU TYPE
MSC1K
DEVICE(BOARD) ID
HYIB
001-017 : B40EDCBF5606
MISU :10.10.10.2
SET IP ADDRESS
MISU :10.10.10.2
SET MAC ADDRESS
001-003 : B40EDCBF5606
ARP
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
REGISTRATION
(0:UCAST/1:MCAST): MCAST
CPU TYPE
MSC1K
DEVICE(BOARD) ID
MISU
001-015 : B40EDCBF5606
VMIU :10.10.10.2
SET IP ADDRESS
VMIU :10.10.10.2
FEATURE
DEFAULT
Use Flex 2 button to enter the device‘s MAC
address into system memory.
None
Use Flex button 3 to enable/disable Direct Send
mode, which employs layer 2 switching to local
devices.
Use Flex button 4 to enable/disable Local
Device Mode, which defines the device as on a
common LAN with the MPB.
Flex button 5 displays the type of CPU
employed in the device.
OFF
MCAST
Flex button 6 displays the terminal type
designation.
LCD shows:
Line 1 Sequence Number, 2 digits MAC
Address, 12 digits Line 2 “MISU” IP Address,
7~12 digits.
IP address of
MISU.
Functions in the
system‘s MPB
set
automatically,
Use Flex button 1 to set the device‘s IP address 10.10.10.10~254
in IP v4 format.
Use Flex button 2 to enter the device‘s MAC
address into system memory.
None
Use Flex button 3 to enable/disable Direct Send
mode, which employs layer 2 switching to local
devices.
Use Flex button 4 to enable/disable Local
Device Mode, which defines the device as on a
common LAN with the MPB.
OFF
MCAST
Flex button 5 displays the type of CPU
employed in the device.
Flex button 6 displays the MISU type
designation.
LCD shows:
Line 1 Sequence Number, 2 digits MAC
Address, 12 digits Line 2 device type and IP
address.
.
Use Flex button 1 to set the device‘s IP address 10.10.10.10~254
in IP v4 format.
25
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.2.2-1 DEVICE & STATION ADDRESS PLAN (PGM 103)
BTN
4–2
4–3
4–4
4–5
4–6
5
5–1
5–2
5–3
5–4
5–5
5–6
6
7
7–1
DISPLAY
SET MAC ADDRESS
001-015 : B40EDCBF5606
ARP
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
REGISTRATION
(0:UCAST/1:MCAST): MCAST
CPU TYPE
MSC1K
DEVICE(BOARD) ID
VMIU
001-018 : FFFF0000FFFF
MCIB : 10 .10 .10 .2
SET IP ADDRESS
MCIB :10.10.10.2
SET MAC ADDRESS
001-018 : FFFF0000FFFF
ARP
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
REGISTRATION
(0:UCAST/1:MCAST): MCAST
CPU TYPE
MS828
DEVICE(BOARD) ID
MCIB_V
DEVICE IP ADDRESS PLAN
SYSTEM RESET
001-003 : 00405A142C67
WTIB : 10:10:10:14
SET IP ADDRESS
WTIB :10.10.10.14
FEATURE
DEFAULT
Use Flex button 2 to enter the device‘s MAC
address into system memory.
None
Use Flex button 3 to enable/disable Direct Send
mode, which employs layer 2 switching to local
devices.
OFF
Use Flex button 4 to enable/disable Local
Device Mode, which defines the device as on a
common LAN with the MPB.
Flex button 5 displays the type of CPU
employed in the device.
MCAST
Flex button 6 displays the type designation.
LCD shows:
Line 1 Sequence Number, 2 digits MAC
Address, 12 digits Line 2 device type and IP
address.
Use Flex button 1 to set the device‘s IP address 10.10.10.10~254
in IP v4 format.
Use Flex button 2 to enter the device‘s MAC
address into system memory.
None
Use Flex button 3 to enable/disable Direct Send
mode, which employs layer 2 switching to local
devices.
Use Flex button 4 to enable/disable Local
Device Mode, which defines the device as on a
common LAN with the MPB.
Flex button 5 displays the type of CPU
employed in the device.
OFF
MCAST
Flex button 6 displays the type designation,
MCIB_V.
If the [Save] button is pressed, the system will
reset and restart.
LCD shows:
Line 1 Sequence Number, 2 digits MAC
Address, 12 digits Line 2 “WTI4” and IP
Address, 7~12 digits.
Use Flex button 1 to set the device‘s IP address 10.10.10.10~254
in IP v4 format.
26
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.2.2-1 DEVICE & STATION ADDRESS PLAN (PGM 103)
BTN
7–2
7–3
7–4
7–5
7–6
DISPLAY
FEATURE
SET MAC ADDRESS
001-003 : 00405A142C67
ARP
(0:ON/1:OFF): OFF
REGISTRATION
(0:UCAST/1:MCAST):MCAST
CPU TYPE
MS828
DEVICE(BOARD) ID
WTIB
DEFAULT
Use Flex button 2 to enter the device‘s MAC
address into system memory.
None
Use Flex button 3 to enable/disable ARP, ARP
OFF enables Direct Send, which employs layer
2 switching to local devices.
Use Flex button 4 to disable/enable Local
Device Mode, which defines the device as on a
common LAN with the system. MCAST enables
Local Device Mode.
Flex button 5 displays the type of CPU
employed in the device.
OFF
MCAST
Flex button 6 displays the type designation,
WTIB.
3.3.2.3 CO Device Sequence Number -PGM 104
The system uses the Sequence Number to assign logical (software) port numbers. This
Sequence Number relates the hardware and software port numbers for each device.
PROCEDURE:
001 002 003 004 005 006
009 007 008 013 014 . . .
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 104.
001 002 003 004 005 006
009 007 008 013 014 . . .
Press the Flex button (1~6) for the desired Sequence
Number, use the [VOL UP] and [VOL DOWN] buttons for
the next/previous set of six Sequence Numbers.
001 002 003 004 005 006
009 007 008 013 014 . . .
Using the dial pad, enter new slot numbers. Note slot
numbers cannot be duplicated and duplicates will cause an
error. The [SPEED] button may be used to erase the slot
number associated with the selected Sequence Number.
Press the [Save] button to store the new Slot data.
27
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.2.4 Flexible Station Numbering Plan -PGM 105
Each LDP Phone, iPECS IP Phone and SLT is assigned a Sequence Number during the
registration process. The station Sequence Number is a 3-digit number starting at 001, which is
incremented as each terminal device is registered. At registration, station numbers increment
sequentially with the Sequence Number and are assigned starting at station 100 for Sequence
Number 001. The Station Numbering Plan allows the station numbers to be Three (3) to eight (8)
digits in length.
PROCEDURE:
001
100
001
…
003
102
004
103
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 105.
002 003
… … …
004
Use either of the two methods below to change the station
number associated with a Sequence Number. Note pressing
the [SPEED] button twice clears all station number
assignments.
002
101
The [VOL UP] / [VOL DOWN] buttons are used to view
the next/previous 2 station Sequence Numbers.
Range entry:
Using the dial-pad, enter a station number range (first &
last station number). The two station numbers must be of
the same length, 2~8 digits. The range assignment
begins with the first station number shown by the LCD
and continues to the end of the entered range.
Single entry:
4.1 Press Flex button 1~4 to select the desired Sequence
Number from the two shown by the LCD.
4.2 Dial new station number.
Press the [Save] button to store the new station numbers.
28
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.2.5 Flexible Numbering Plan part A to D - PGM 106 to 109
Feature dial codes for the system can be assigned using the system‘s Flexible Numbering Plan.
Feature codes should be one (1) to four (4) digits in length and must not conflict. For example,
Feature dial codes 53 and 536 represent a conflict. The system will generate error tone and will
not update the database. Table 3.3.2.5-1 to Table 3.3.2.5-4 below show the defaults for the 1st
base Numbering Plan. Appendix B provides the default values for each of the 9 basic Numbering
Plans, select the base Numbering Plan in PGM 100. The default is based on Numbering plan 1.
PROCEDURE:
FLEX NUMBERING PLAN A
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-24)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial:
106 for part A
107 for part B
108 for part C
109 for part D.
Select the desired button (01~24); refer to Table 3.3.2.5-1 to
Table 3.3.2.5-4 for PGM 106 to 109 respectively.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data. Where a range is
required, input the first and last numbers in the range.
Press the [Save] button to store the new Numbering Plan
data.
Table 3.3.2.5-1 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN PART A (PGM 106)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DISPLAY
INT PAGE ZONES
START& END:301-335
INT ALL CALL
ENTER NEW #:543
MEET ME PAGE
ENTER NEW #:544
EXT PAGE ZONE 1
ENTER NEW #:545
FEATURE
DEFAULT
Internal Page Zone access codes.
eMG80:301~335
eMG800:301~400
Internal All Call Page access code.
543
Meet-Me-Page answer code.
544
External Page Zone 1 access code.
545
External All Call Page access code.
548
All Call Page access code.
549
UNUSED
EXT ALL CALL
ENTER NEW #:548
ALL CALL PAGE
ENTER NEW #:549
29
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.2.5-1 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN PART A (PGM 106)
BTN
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
DISPLAY
SMDR ACT CODE ENTER
ENTER NEW #:550
FLASH CMD TO CO
ENTER NEW #:551
SLT LAST SPD DIAL
ENTER NEW #:552
DND
ENTER NEW #:553
CALL FWD
ENTER NEW #:554
SPD DIAL PGM
ENTER NEW #:555
MSG WAIT ENABLE
ENTER NEW #:556
MSG WAIT RETURN
ENTER NEW #:557
SPD DIAL ACCESS
ENTER NEW #:558
DND/FWD CANCEL
ENTER NEW #:559
CO SYS HOLD
ENTER NEW #:560
SLT PGM MODE ENTER
ENTER NEW #:561
ATTD UNAVAILABLE
ENTER NEW #:562
ALARM RESET
ENTER NEW #:565
GROUP CALL PICK-UP
ENTER NEW #:566
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
ENTER NEW #:567
FEATURE
DEFAULT
Dial code to signify the start of an SMDR
Account Code.
550
Dial code to generate a Flash on the
active CO Line.
551
SLT Last Number Redial feature access
code.
552
Dial code to activate Do-Not-Disturb.
553
Dial code to activate Call Forward.
554
Speed Dial programming access dial
code for SLTs.
555
Dial code to activate a Message
Wait/Call Back.
556
Dial code to return a Message Wait/Call
Back.
557
SLT Speed Dial access code.
558
Dial code to cancel DND/FWD/MSG
Wait.
559
Dial code to place a CO call on System
Hold.
560
User program mode entry dial code for
SLTs.
561
Dial code to place attendant in the
“unavailable” mode, attendant only.
562
Dial code to terminate Alarm contact
signal.
565
Group Call Pick-up dial code.
566
Universal Night Answer dial code.
567
30
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.2.5-1 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN PART A (PGM 106)
BTN
24
DISPLAY
ACCNT CODE WITH BIN
ENTER NEW #:568
FEATURE
DEFAULT
Dial code for entering an Account code.
568
Table 3.3.2.5-2 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN PART B (PGM 107)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
DISPLAY
WALKING COS
ENTER NEW #:569
ACD AGENT ON/OFF DUTY
ENTER NEW #:571
ACD SUPERVISOR LOGIN
ENTER NEW #:572
ACD SUPERVISOR LOGOUT
ENTER NEW #:573
ACD HELP CODE
ENTER NEW #:574
ACD CALLS IN QUEUE
ENTER NEW #:575
ACD SUPERVISOR STATUS
ENTER NEW #:576
ACD SUPERVISOR MONITOR
ENTER NEW #:577
ACD REROUTE QCALL ANS
ENTER NEW #:578
ACD REROUTE QCALL NO AN
ENTER NEW #:579
CAMP-ON ANSWER
ENTER NEW #:621
CALL PARK LOCATIONS
START#:#601-#619
STA GRP PILOT NUMBER
START #:401-440
FEATURE
DEFAULT
Dial code to activate Walking Class-ofService.
569
Dial code to toggle ACD Agent or
Supervisor ON and OFF duty.
571
Supervisor login dial code.
572
Supervisor logout dial code.
573
Agent code requesting Supervisor help
and Supervisor Help request Response
code.
Dial code to display calls in queue.
574
575
Dial code to display group status.
576
Dial code to activate Supervisor monitor.
577
Dial code to reroute call after answer.
578
Dial code to reroute call prior to answer.
579
Dial code to answer a Camped On call.
621
Dial code to place/retrieve a call in a
Park location.
Station group pilot numbers.
31
eMG80:#601~#619
eMG800:#601~#800
eMG80:401~440
eMG800:401~500
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.2.5-2 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN PART B (PGM 107)
BTN
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
DISPLAY
STA USER VSF FEATURES
ENTER NEW #:*66
CALL COVERAGE RING
ENTER NEW #:76
DIRECT CALL PICK-UP
ENTER NEW #:*77
ACCESS CO GROUP FEAT
ENTER NEW #:89
ACCESS IND CO/IP FEAT
ENTER NEW #:88
ACCESS HELD CO/IP FEAT
ENTER NEW #:8*
ACCESS HELD IND CO/IP
ENTER NEW #:8#
ACCESS CO IN 1ST CO GRP
ENTER NEW #:9
ATTENDANT CALL
ENTER NEW #:0
VM MSG WAIT ENABLE
ENTER NEW #:*8
VM MSG WAIT CANCEL
ENTER NEW #:*9
FEATURE
DEFAULT
VSF feature access code.
*66
Code for Call Coverage button.
76
Dial code to activate Directed Call Pickup.
*77
Dial code to access a CO Line or IP
channel from a CO/IP group.
89
Dial code to access a specific CO Line.
88
Dial code to access last held CO Line or
IP channel from Hold.
8*
Dial code to access a specific CO Line/IP
channel from Hold.
8#
Dial code to access the 1st available CO
Line in any accessible group.
9
Dial code to call an Attendant.
0
Dial code for external Voice mail to
activate Message Wait indication.
*8
Dial code for external Voice Mail to
deactivate Message Wait indications.
*9
Table 3.3.2.5-3 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN PART C (PGM 108)
BTN
1
2
DISPLAY
DOOR OPEN 1
ENTER NEW #:#*1
DOOR OPEN 2
ENTER NEW #:#*2
FEATURE
DEFAULT
Dial code to activate Door 1 contact
(open door 1)
#*1
Dial code to activate Door 2 contact
(open door 2).
#*2
32
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.2.5-4 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN PART D (PGM 109)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
DISPLAY
MCID REQUEST
ENTER NEW #:*0
AME FEATURE
ENTER NEW #: 564
US-CONF TMR EXTENSION
ENTER NEW #:##
PTT GROUP LOGIN/OUT
ENTER NEW #:#0
ACD AGENT P LOGIN
ENTER NEW #:581
ACD AGENT P LOGOUT
ENTER NEW #:582
ACD AGENT S LOGIN
ENTER NEW #:583
ACD AGENT S LOGOUT
ENTER NEW #:584
ACD AGENT WRAPUP END
ENTER NEW #:585
TNET CM LOGIN/OUT
ENTER NEW #:586
ENTER INTO CONF-ROOM
ENTER NEW #:59
ENTER INTO CONF-GROUP
ENTER NEW #:68
STATION ICR
ENTER NEW #:587
PICK UP GROUP PICK-UP
ENTER NEW #:588
EMERGENCY PAGE
ENTER NEW #:589
REMOTE MEX CONTROL
ENTER NEW #:580
FEATURE
DEFAULT
Dial code to activate Malicious Call ID
Request in ISDN Supplementary service.
Not available in USA version.
Dial code to assign an Answering
Machine Emulation Flex button.
*0
564
Dial code to extend Unsupervised
conference time.
##
Push-To-Talk group login and logout dial
code. The station must have a PTT
button for proper operation.
ACD Agent Primary Login code.
#0
581
ACD Agent Primary Logout code.
582
ACD Agent Secondary Login code.
583
ACD Agent Secondary Logout code.
584
ACD Agent wrap-up end code.
585
When Central Control networking (TNET)
is employed, a station can be manually
logged in or out of the Central system
using this code.
Code for a station to enter a conference
room.
586
Code to open a conference group.
68
Code to activate Station ICR.
587
Pick Up Group Call Pick-up dials code.
588
Code for emergency page.
589
Code to control the mobile extension
settings remotely.
580
33
59
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.2.5-4 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN PART D (PGM 109)
BTN
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
DISPLAY
ALL GR AGENT ON/OFF DUT
ENTER NEW #:58*
SLT ACNR CODE
ENTER NEW #:58#
ACD SUPERVISOR RING MODE
ENTER NEW #:570
COMPANY DIRECTORY NAME
ENTER NEW #:563
ISDN SUPP HOLD
ENTER NEW #:57*
ISDN SUPP CONF
ENTER NEW #:57#
FORCED SEIZE BUSY STN/CO
ENTER NEW #:56*
DEFAULT
Code to change the state of the Agent
ON/Off duty in all hunt groups.
58*
In SLT, user can ACNR feature by using
this numbering plan.
58#
Code to check and change ACD group
Ring mode by ACD group supervisor.
570
Code to check and change recording
station subscribe name of Company
Directory feature. (USA Only)
ISDN Supplementary Service for HOLD.
563
ISND Supplementary Service for
Conference (Not supported).
57#
Busy Station / CO can be connected with
entering this Code.
56*
[56#] + Station number, then the station’s
DND or CFW setting will be overridden.
56#
57*
ADDED FLEX NUMBER PLAN
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-5)
24-1
OVERRIDE DND/CFW
ENTER NEW #:56#
24-2
CANCEL CALL BACK
ENTER NEW #:….
24-3
FEATURE
XFER TO VSF ANNC NO
ENTER NEW #:55*
24-4
CCR
ENTER NEW #:#2
24-5
UCS SYS CONF GRP JOIN
ENTER NEW #:5*0
It is used to cancel call back.
When a station is talking over a CO line
User, [Transfer] + [55*] + Valid system
announcement (01-70), then Outside
user can hear system announcement,
and system starts DISA service.
It is used in digit conversion.
55*
It is used to join UCS conference group
by entering the code.
5*0
34
#2
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.2.6 8-Digit Table
We can support it more 4 digits for station number. Station numbering should not conflict with
numbering plan. It is consist of prefix digits and add digits. Prefix digits can have up to 4 digits
and Add digits can have up to 4 digits.
PROCEDURE:
DIGIT 8 TBL
ENTER TBL NO(01-10)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 238.
Digit 8 TBL 1 : Empty
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired table number.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.2.6-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the required data.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.2.6-1 8-Digit Table (PGM 238)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
TBL 1 : SET 8 digit
8 Digit 1 : …....
TBL 1: SET ADD DIGIT
ADD DIGIT : 0
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
The user may be allowed to enter
the prefix digits using character
assign method. (ex : 4+0 → 4)
The user can be allowed to add
digits. (ex: if it’s set 3, prefix digits +
xxx)
Up to 4 digits
N/A
Up to 4 digits
0
35
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.3 Station Data –PGM 110-125
3.3.3.1 Station Type -PGM 110
Each station is assigned a type, which is used by the system to recognize the station‘s
capabilities and default Flex button configuration. In addition, for the iPECS DSS/BLF Consoles,
the associated station number is identified here. Note that the maximum of three (3) DSS
Consoles(LIP DSS & LDP DSS) can be associated and connected to a station.
PROCEDURE:
STATION TYPE ASSIGN
ENTER STA RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 110.
100-110 F1:TY F2:ASC
IPKTU
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex 100~110). For
a single station, enter the same number twice; use this
procedure for an iPECS DSS Console.
Select Flex button 1, to set the station type and, for iPECS
DSS Consoles (types 2~4), Flex button 2 assigns the
associated station.
100-110 F1:TY F2:ASC
IPKTU
111-111 F1:TYPE F2 :ASC
DSS MAP2 : STA . . . .
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data:
4-1. For Flex button 1 (TYPE), enter the station TYPE;
refer to Table 3.3.3.1–1.
4-2. For Flex button 2 (Associated station), enter the
number of the station used with the console. Flex button
2 is only available for iPECS DSS Consoles (Types 2~4),
see Table 3.3.3.1-2 for default configurations.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entries.
Table 3.3.3.1-1 STATION TYPE ASSIGNMENT — (PGM 110)
TYPE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DESCRIPTION
IP KEYSET
DSS MAP 1
DSS MAP 2
DSS MAP 3
SLT (DTMF)
SLT (DTMF) – Voltage Message lamp
SLT (DTMF) – FSK Message lamp
SLT (DTMF) – Polarity Reversal Message lamp
36
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.3.1-2 CONSOLE BUTTON CONFIGURATION (PGM 110)
MAP
DEFAULT CONSOLE BUTTON CONFIGURATION
MAP 1
MAP 2
MAP 3
Button 1: Intrusion
Button 2: All Call Page
Button 3: Call Park 1
Button 4: Station Group 1
Button 5: Camp-On
Button 6: Internal All Call Page
Button 7: Call Park 2
Button 8: Station Group 2
Button 9: [Release]
Button 10: Ext. All Call Page
Button 11: Call Park 3
Button 12: Station Group 3
Buttons 13 ~ 48: Station Ports 100 ~ 135
Station Ports 136 ~ 183
Station Ports 184 ~ 231
3.3.3.2 Station Attributes I to III - PGM 111-113
Station Attributes define features and functions available to the station. Generally, the entry will
turn the feature ON (enable) or OFF (disable). Refer to Table 3.3.3.2-1 to Table 3.3.3.2-3 for a
description of the features and the input required.
PROCEDURE:
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial:
STATION ATT 1
ENTER STA RANGE
111 for Station Attributes I
112 for Station Attributes II
113 for Station Attributes III
100-110 STATION ATT 1
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-24)
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110). For
a single station, enter the same number twice.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.3.2-1 to
Table 3.3.3.2-3.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the attribute
setting, refer to Table 3.3.3.2-1 to Table 3.3.3.2-3.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.3.2-1 STATION ATTRIBUTES I (PGM 111)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100-110 AUTO SPKR
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
100-110 CALL FWD
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Enables [SPEAKER] activation when
a CO/IP, DSS or other feature button
is pressed, no need to lift handset.
Enables Call Forward activation by the
station.
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
37
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.3.2-1 STATION ATTRIBUTES I (PGM 111)
BTN
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100-110 DND
(0-3) : 0(OFF)
100-110 DATA SECURITY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100-110 HOWLING TONE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
100-110 NO TCH ANS
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100-110 PAGE ACCESS
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100-110 HEADSET RING
(1:S/2:H/3:BOTH) : SPKR
100-110 SPKR/HEAD
(1:SPKR/0:HEAD): SPKR
100-110 LCD DISP LED
(1:RING/0:MWI): MWI
100-110 LOOP LCR ACCT
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100-110 CALL COVERAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100-110 CALL COVERAGE
DELAY RING: 0
100-110 OFFNET FWD
(1:DIS/0:EN):ENABLE
100-110 FORCED ICM
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Enables DND activation by the station.
0: OFF
1: ALL
2:ICM call only
3:CO call only
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Disables override and camp-on tones
to the station when busy.
OFF
Permits Howler tone to be sent to a
SLT when left off-hook.
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
Enables No-touch answer; this will
automatically connect transferred calls
to the station‘s speakerphone.
Allows station to access paging.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
1: Speaker
2: Headset
3: Both
0: Headset
1: Speaker
SPKR
0: MWI
1: Ring
MWI
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0~9
0
0: Enable
1: Disable
Enable
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
This item selects device to receive
incoming ring signals, Speaker,
Headset or Both.
Selects Speakerphone mode or
Headset mode
The LCD LED, upper left of LCD, may
be used for Intercom Call ring
Indication or Message Wait Indication.
Station based LOOP LCR
authorization; this is used for LOOP
LCR operation.
The Call Coverage feature permits an
iPECS Phone user to receive ring and
answer calls to other stations.
When a covered station rings, the
{CALL COVERAGE} button LED will
flash at the covering station and will
receive ring (immediate or delayed, 0
to 9 ring cycles).
A station must be allowed Off Net Fwd
to forward external incoming calls
outside the system or otherwise
establish a CO-to-CO connection
(Unsupervised Conference). (Except
USA version)
When placing an intercom call, a user
can change the ICM signaling mode,
Tone Ring to Hands free answer mode
or HF Answer to Tone Ring.
38
SPKR
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.3.2-1 STATION ATTRIBUTES I (PGM 111)
BTN
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100-110 ACT PTT GRP
ACTIVE PTT GROUP: .
100-110 ICM GROUP
(01-15): 01
100-100 VMIU/VMIB BOARD
USE 1ST VMIU/VMIB
100-110 SIP UID TBL
(000-140) : 000
100-110 CAMP ON TONE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
100-110 SERIAL DSS
(1:EN/0:DIS):ENABLE
100-110 DLTN (00-10)
DIAL TONE (00)
100-110 RBTN (00-10)
RING BACK TONE (00)
100-110 ATTACH MSG
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
DESCRIPTION
A station can be assigned to a PTT
group and the group enabled so the
station can place and receive PTT
announcements for the group.
Assigns station to an ICM Tenancy
Group, refer to PGM 125.
Assigns the VMIU or VMIB where
messages for the station are stored.
Index to SIP User ID table, PGM 126,
for the station. Note PGM 126 is
accessible by Web only.
Permits camp on tone to be sent to a
station when the station receives
camp-on request.
Assigns Serial DSS usage authority.
Each station can choose one of eleven
dial tone sources
RANGE
DEFAULT
0~9
.
eMG80:1~15
eMG800:0~32
1
Sequence no
000-140
000
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enable
00: dial tone
01: INT music
02: EXT music
03: VSF MOH
04: SLT MOH1
05: SLT MOH2
06: SLT MOH3
07: SLT MOH4
08: SLT MOH5
09: VSF MOH2
10:VSF MOH3
Each station can choose one of eleven 00: ring back
ring back tone sources
tone
01: INT music
02: EXT music
03: VSF MOH
04: SLT MOH1
05: SLT MOH2
06: SLT MOH3
07: SLT MOH4
08: SLT MOH5
09: VSF MOH2
10:VSF MOH3
When e-mail notification of a new VSF
0: OFF
message is enabled, (PGM 236-button
1: ON
7) the e-mail may include the voice
mail as a wav file attachment. VSF
mail server IP (PGM 113-button18) &
VSF Mail Address (PGM 113button19) are required for proper
operation.
39
dial tone
ring back
tone
ON
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.3.2-2 STATION ATTRIBUTES II (PGM 112)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100-110 CALL TIME TN
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100-110 AUTO HOLD
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100-110 TIME RESTRICT
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100-110 IND CO ACCESS
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
100-110 CO/IP QUEUING
(1:EN/0:DIS): ENABLE
100-110 CO PGM
(1:EN/0:DIS): DISABLE
100-110 RING LINE PRE
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
100-110 SPD ACCESS
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
100-110 UCD GRP SVC
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100-110 RING GRP SVC
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100-110 TWO WAY RECD
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100-110 MSG SCRL SPD
(0 - 7) : 3
100-110 HOT DESK STA
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
A tone can be sent periodically
indicating the elapsed time of an
outgoing CO/IP call. The Elapsed Call
Timer (PGM 180-button 19)
determines the period between tones.
Enables Auto Hold for the station. With
Auto Hold enabled, the system will
place an active external call on hold if
the user presses a CO/IP or DSS
button.
The system can automatically
disconnect outgoing calls at expiration
of the Call Restrict timer (PGM 180button 14).
Permits stations to use dial codes to
access individual CO Lines.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0:
OFF(Others)
1: ON(ATD)
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enable
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enable
0: Disable
1: Enable
Disable
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enable
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enable
When unavailable, DID/DISA calls to
the station can be routed to the ACD
Group to which the station is a
member.
When unavailable, DID/DISA calls to
the station can be routed to the Ring
Group to which the station is a
member.
When allowed, the station can activate
the Two-way record feature to record a
conversation.
Select message scroll speed for IP
phone (Not presently used).
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0~7
3
A station can be assigned as a Hot
Desk phone. Users and agents can
login and use resources of the system
through the Hot Desk phone.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Permits the station to queue for the
next available Line when an All Lines
Busy signal is received.
A station can be permitted to change
the CO Line numbers (ports)
associated with a CO Line button.
Enables Ringing Line Preference for
the station. Calls that ring the
telephone are answered by going offhook.
Allows the station access to System
Speed Dial bins.
40
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.3.2-2 STATION ATTRIBUTES II (PGM 112)
BTN
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100-110 PREFER CO/GRP
…..
100-110 SEND SLT CLI
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
100-110 UCD PRIORITY
(0-9) : 0
100-110 EZ PWD LOGIN
(1:ON/0:OFF
100-110 EMERGENCY CO
…..
100-110 STA ACCOUNT
(1:ON/O:OFF) : OFF
100-110 AUTO CALL REC
(0:OFF/1:ALL/2:CO): OFF
100-110 CALL REC DEST
……..
100-110 VSF BK DEL
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
The system will seize this CO Line or
CO group number when the station
dials ‘9’ (First available CO access
code).
When allowed, system will send CLI
information to the SLT.
ACD Group members may be
assigned a priority, 0-9. Members with
the highest priority are sent calls
ahead of lower priority members. This
field is the same as PGM 191-button
19 for ACD Groups.
For ez ATD. Enables/disables required
Auth code use.
RANGE
DEFAULT
CO # or
CO Group #
..
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
0~9
0
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
This field defines the CO Line or Group
CO #,
employed by the system to place
CO Group #,
Emergency Assistance calls.
Transit-out
When ON, the station user must enter
0: OFF
an authorization code to access CO
1: ON
Lines.
This field enables unconditional
0: OFF
recording of all calls placed/received
1: ALL
by the station.
2: CO
Recordings, in .wav format, are stored
at the UCS Client or Recording Server
(IPCR or 3rd party) defined under
button 21. Station and CO calls are
recorded with ALL. Only CO calls are
recorded with CO.
When Unconditional Call recording is
station
enabled as above, the recording UCS
Client station number is defined here.
UCS Client may monitor voice
0: OFF
messages for another station as a
1: ON
backup.
The UCS Client will include the
message count for the station in the
Voice message count. When enabled
here, the UCS Client may delete
messages for the station.
41
Any CO
OFF
OFF
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.3.2-2 STATION ATTRIBUTES II (PGM 112)
BTN
23
24
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100-110 VSF BK STA
……..
100-110 VSF BK PROM
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
UCS Client may monitor voice
messages for another station as a
backup.
UCS Client will include the message
count for the station in the Voice
message count. This field defines the
UCS Client station number that will be
used as the VMIU/VMIB back up.
Enables UCS Client to backup VSF
Prompts.
station
0: OFF
1: ON
DEFAULT
OFF
Table 3.3.3.2-3 STATION ATTRIBUTES III (PGM 113)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100-110 ADMIN
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
100-110 VSF ACCESS
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
100-110 GROUP LISTEN
(1:EN/0:DIS) : DISABLE
100-110 OVERRIDE
(1:EN/0:DIS) : DISABLE
100-110 SMDR HIDE
(1:EN/0:DIS) : DISABLE
100-110 VOICE OVER
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
100-110 PRIME LINE
(1:HOT/0:WARM) : WARM
100-110 ALARM/DOORBEL
(1:EN/0:DIS) : DISABLE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Enables station access to the
System Database.
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enable
Permits station access to the built-in
AA/VM.
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enable
Enables Group Listen feature, audio
is sent to both the handset and
speaker with the handset
microphone active and
speakerphone microphone OFF.
Enables intrusion to gain access to
an active CO/IP call.
0: Disable
1: Enable
Disable
0: Disable
1: Enable
Disable
Enables hiding dialed digits in
SMDR output.
0: Disable
1: Enable
Disable
Enables use of Voice Over by
station.
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enable
Enables Delayed Prime Line (Idle
Line) activation, see PGM 121, Idle
Line Selection and PGM 182-button
6 for Prime Line timer.
Assigns station to receive
Alarm/Doorbell signal.
0: WARM
1: HOT
WARM
0: Disable
1: Enable
Disable
42
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.3.2-3 STATION ATTRIBUTES III (PGM 113)
BTN
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100-110 CALL WAIT
(0-3) : For Ext/Int
100-110 LEFT MSG EXEC
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : ON
100-110 E&MIC HEADSET
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
100-110 ENBLOCK MODE
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
100-110 MSG RETRIEVE
(1:FIFO/0:LIFO ) : LIFO
100-110 VMID NUMBER
100
100-110 AUTO ACD-DND
([SPD],0-9,*,#): ..
100-110 FWD IF OOS
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100-110 BACK LIGHT
(O:OFF/1:BUSY/2:ON): 1
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
When a busy station receives a call,
0: OFF,
For
1: For
the call may queue to the station
External/Internal
instead of receiving busy tone. With External/Internal
2:For External,
Call Wait, the caller will hear Ring3: For Internal
back and the user sees the CO line
LED flash.
If this option is set to a station, and a
co-line is ring assigned to the
station, second ring assigned call
CLI will show in the station’s LCD.
When a call is forward to the
0: OFF
ON
Secretary of an Executive/Secretary
1: ON
pair, messages can be left for the
Executive (ON) or Secretary (OFF).
Select E&MIC Headset mode.
0: OFF
OFF
1: ON
When On, the user-dialed digits are
stored at iPECS IP or LDP Phones
until explicitly sent by the user.
When sent, all dialed digits are sent
to the system in a block. En-block
mode is only available to iPECS IP
and LDP Phones with 3-Soft keys.
Messages stored in the VSF may be
retrieved in either a FIFO (first-infirst-out) or LIFO (last-in-first-out)
order based on this entry.
When using an adjunct VM, the
system can translate the Mailbox
number from the user’s station
number to the assigned VMID. The
system sends the station number or
VMID to the VM (in-band or SMDI) in
order to identify the appropriate
Voice Mailbox.
If an Agent does not answer an ACD
call in the ACD No Answer timer, the
Agent enters an Unavailable state
with the Reason code entered here.
The reason code is sent in the ACD
Event message.
If a station is Out-of-Service and has
previously forwarded calls, the
system will forward the calls, if
enabled here.
The backlight of the LIP phones is
assigned to stay off, light only when
the station is busy, or light
constantly.
43
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
1: FIFO
0: LIFO
LIFO
0000-9999
Station #
0: None
#, *
1~9
None
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: Busy
2: ON
Busy
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.3.2-3 STATION ATTRIBUTES III (PGM 113)
BTN
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
24-1
24-2
24-3
24-4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100-110 VSF MailSvrIP
……………………………..
100-110 VSF Mail Addr
…………………………..
100-110 BLOCK B-CALL
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100-110 BY PASS DTMF
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100-110 PROCTOR MONIT
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100-110 VSF MailSvrID
………………………
ADDED STATION ATT3
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-24)
100-110 VSF MailSvrPW
………………………
100-110 DOOR OPEN
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
100-110 VSF MSG DD/TM
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
100-110 OGM DEST
NOT ASSIGNED
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
The VMIB includes notification of
IP v4 address
new messages to the user’s e-mail.
Or Mail server
This field displays the user’s e-mail
name
mail server for the notification. Use
Web Admin PGM 132 to modify this
value.
The VMIB includes notification of
e-mail address
new messages to the user’s e-mail.
This field displays the e-mail
address to notify when a new
message is received at the VMIB.
Use Web Admin to modify this value.
When an SLT extension tries to
0 : OFF
transfer a CO call to a CO line it is
1 : ON
blocked and the call is released.
When detected, DTMF from an SLT
0 : OFF
may be regenerated by the analog
1 : ON
CO line ports, the SLT port can bypass detection so DTMF is not
detected.
Enables use of PABX ANI Link
0 : OFF
device for E-911 support, Only an
1 : ON
SLT can be used for this feature.
The VMIU and VMIB include
notification of new messages to the
user’s voice mail. This field defines
the user’s ID to notify when a new
message is received at the VMIU or
VMIB.
01-24
DEFAULT
OFF
OFF
OFF
Unified Mail server password
Enables use of Door open feature by
station - Default value :
Australia : Disable except for port
1or2
Otherwise : Enable
When ON, play the date/time stamp
of VSF message.
Assign Mail box destination. When a
user dial attendant code (‘0’ or ‘9’), if
it is assigned then the call will be
delivered to assigned mail box
destination instead of attendant. If it
is not assigned then the call will be
delivered to attendant.
44
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enable
0 : OFF
1 : ON
ON
NOT
ASSIGNED
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.3.2-3 STATION ATTRIBUTES III (PGM 113)
BTN
24-5
24-6
24-7
24-8
24-9
24-10
24-11
24-12
24-13
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100-110 VSF DEL MSG
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100-110 VM PWD CHECK
(0-2) : STN&PWD
100-110 BARGE IN MODE
(0-2) : DISABLE
100 – 110 SLT FLASH
MODE
(0-3) : FLASH TRANSFER
100 – 110 RLS COST DISP
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100 – 110 LDT TBL INDEX
(00-10) : 01
100 – 110 WEB CALL BACK
(1:EN/0:DIS) : DISABLE
100 – 110 VSF SMTP SECU
(0-2) : NO SECUTIRY
100 – 110 VSF SMTP PORT
(00001-65535) : 00025
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
When ON, delete VSF messages
when send UMS e-mail notification.
0 : OFF
1 : ON
OFF
When ON, check password when a
user access to the VSF messages.
0 : No
Password
1 : PWD only
2: station
number and
Password
0: Disable
1: Monitor
2:Monitor&Join
& Disconnect
2: station
number and
Password
Barge in permits an authorized
extension to intrude into other
existing outside/internal calls or to
disconnect existing call forcedly.
If 0, Barge In is disabled.
If 1, Barge In monitors other
conversation.
If 2, Barge In monitor join and
Forced Disconnect.
SLT Flash works as following option.
0: Transfer
0: Flash Transfer – Flash detected,
1: Drop
then the line is held and the line
2: Ignore
goes to waiting state.
3: Hold Release
1: Flash Drop - Flash detected and
Line is disconnected.
2: Flash Ignore – Flash detected, but
Ignored.
3: Hold Release – Flash detected,
then the line is held and the line
goes to waiting state.
And the SLT user goes on-hook,
then the held line is disconnected,
not recalling.
When CO line is released, according
0 : OFF
to admin option, call-cost or
1 : ON
disconnection-cause can be
displayed to user LCD.
LCR will be operated with this LDT
No. of LDT
table index
Table
Enable Web call back service. When
enabled, call back service on station
web admin could be used.
Security for VSF mail sending can
be chosen.
When VSF mail sending, SMTP port
can be program.
45
Disable
Transfer
OFF
1
0: Disable
1: Enable
Disable
0: No Security
1: SSL
2: TSL
00001 – 65535
No Security
25
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.3.2-3 STATION ATTRIBUTES III (PGM 113)
BTN
24-14
24-15
24-16
24-17
24-18
24-19
24-20
24-21
24-22
24-23
24-24
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100 – 110 VSF SMAILADDR
…………………………
100 – 110 PREPAID CALL
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100 – 110 PREPAID
MONEY
000000
100 – 110 DEFAULT VM NO
….
100 – 110 SLT MODE
(0-3) : DEFAULT
100 – 110 OFF HOOK RING
(0-3) : REFER TO SYS
100 – 110 SIP COLOR
RING
…..
100 – 110 FORCED ACNT
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100 – 110 FLEX BTN PGM
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
100 – 110 STNWEB_LEVEL
(1-3) : LEVEL 1
100 – 110 HEADSET PAGE
(1:S/2:H/3:BOTH): SPKR
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
000000 999999
0
0: Default
1: Short
2: Long
3: Far
0: BURST
1: MUTE
2: SYSTEM
3:SILENCE
Default (0)
When VSF mail sending, Sender
Mail Address can be program.
Enable prepaid call service.
Prepaid Money can be entered.
By Call Metering signal, pre-paid
money can be calculated.
Default VM group number used
when users press the [Msg/Call
Back] button and there is no
message.
SLT configuration mode.
It is used only for South Africa.
SLT gain is changed cording to this
configuration.
Off hook ring type could be selected
by station base.
Color ring is provided from assigned
SIP VM (UMS).
SIP extension number that is
connected to SIP VM (UMS) server
should be assigned.
User should enter an Account Code
prior to placing an outgoing call
when this value has “ON”.
A user can program Flex buttons at
station.
There are 3 access levels that can
be assigned to station.
The station with level 1 can
view/access all programs in station
web.
The station with level 2/3 follows
Station Web Authorization menu
(System Data -> Station Web
Authorization).
Paging is provided on selected
device (SPEAKER/HEADSET/Both)
while in the headset mode.
46
Refer to System
(2)
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
LEVEL 1 ~
LEVEL 3
LEVEL 1
1~3
(SPKR/
HEADSET/
Both)
1: SPKR
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.3.3 Station Attributes IV -PGM 114
When a station uses an ISDN Line, various parameters relating to ISDN Calling Line Identification
and Connected Line Identification can be assigned for each station. In addition, when the station
is an SLT, several parameters must be set to indicate the capabilities related to the station, such
as 3.1 KHz audio for ISDN use. Refer to Table 3.3.3.3-1 for a description of the attributes and the
inputs available.
PROCEDURE:
STATION ATT 4
ENTER STA RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 114.
100-110 STATION ATT4
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-24)
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110). For
a single station, enter the same number twice.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.3.3-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the attribute, refer
to Table 3.3.3.3-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.3.3-1 STATION ISDN ATTRIBUTES (PGM 114)
BTN
1
2
3
4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100-110 CLIP DISPLAY
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
100-110 COLP DISPLAY
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
100-110 PROGRESS IND
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
100-11- CLIR SERVICE
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
CLIP (Calling Line Identification
Presentation), an ISDN service, sends
the number of the calling party to the
system in the call SETUP message. If
enabled here, the number will be shown
in the iPECS Phone LCD.
COLP (Connected Line Id Presentation),
an ISDN service, sends the number of
the answering party to the system in the
call CONNECT message. If enabled
here, the number will be shown in the
iPECS Phone LCD.
When employing a non-ISDN terminal,
specifically a modem or analog FAX, the
ISDN call SETUP message must include
this message and the Progress Indication
parameter should be set to “ON”.
CLIR (Calling Line Identification
Restriction), an ISDN service, removes
calling party Id sent from the PSTN to the
called party with a RESTRICT instruction
in the SETUP message.
If enabled here, the system will send the
RESTRICT instruction to the PSTN when
an outgoing ISDN call is placed.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
47
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.3.3-1 STATION ISDN ATTRIBUTES (PGM 114)
BTN
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100-110 COLR SERVICE
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
100-110 STN CLI 1
100
100-110 3.1 kHz AUDIO
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
100-110 CLI NAME DISP
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
100-110 CLI/REDIRECT
(1:RED/0:CLI) : CLI
100-110 CLI MSG-WAIT
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
100-110 EXT OR ATD
(1:ATD/0:EXT ) : EXT
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
COLR (Connected Line Id Restriction),
an ISDN service, removes connected
party Id sent from the PSTN to the calling
party with a RESTRICT instruction in the
CONNECT message.
If enabled here, the system will send the
restrict instruction to the PSTN when the
station answers an ISDN call.
When not restricted (button 4 & 5 above)
and entry 00 of the CLIP/CLOP Table is
selected in PGM 143-button 1& 2, this
entry is added to the number sent in the
ISDN call SETUP or CONNECT
message in place of the station number.
When an analog device (SLT or FAX)
uses an ISDN Line in the system, the
Information Element of the ISDN SETUP
message must indicate it only has 3.1
KHz audio capabilities. If a SLT or analog
FAX will be allowed access to the ISDN
Lines, this parameter must be “ON”.
When the CLI data from the PSTN in the
call SETUP message matches a number
in Speed Dial, the system can display the
name associated with the Speed Dial bin,
if set to ON.
When an incoming ISDN call is
Redirected by the ISDN, the call SETUP
message will contain an original and
redirected CLI. This selection determines
if the iPECS Phone will display the
original or redirected number.
A log of caller identification can be
maintained for the user, permitting the
user to call back the identified party.
System-wide, up to 1000 entries can be
maintained in the log.
When the system sends a station
number with CLIP or COLP, the number
can be either the Attendant number or
the number of the station.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
12 digits
Station
number
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: CLI
1: Redirect
CLI
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: EXT
1: ATD
EXT
48
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.3.3-1 STATION ISDN ATTRIBUTES (PGM 114)
BTN
12
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100-110 MSN WAIT
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
When a call that is corresponding to a
MSN Telephone Number comes in to
system, the call is basically routed to idle
stations that have free MSN button that is
assigned for the corresponding
Telephone Number. And also the call can
be routed to busy stations in the following
condition.
OFF : if a keyset is in a busy status,
cannot receive incoming MSN Telephone
Number corresponding call even though
it has a free(idle) corresponding MSN
LOOP Button
ON : if a keyset is in a busy status, can
receive incoming MSN Telephone
Number corresponding call if it has a
free(idle) corresponding MSN LOOP
Button
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Enable station receive DID call.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Enable station receive DISA call.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
It is used to set modem attributes.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
If a user transfers a CO call with CLI to
SLT or DECT, CO CLI can be seen
instead of station number when this
option is set to ORI.
0: TRN
1: ORI
TRN
It is used to set pick up by flex button.
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
Selected language prompt is played to
the user when accessing the VMIU or
VMIB.
1~6
(1:
N.AMERICA
2:KOREA
3:TURKIYE
4:RUSSIA
5:AUTRALIA
6:GERMANY)
1
13
14
15
100-110 DID RESTRICT
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
100-110 DISA RESTRICT
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
16
17
18
100-110 MODEM ENABLE
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
100-110 FAST XFER CLI
(1:ORI/0:TRN ) : TRN
19
20
21
100-110 PICKUP BY BTN
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : ON
100-110 MULTI LANG
(1-6):PROMPT1 A.AMERICA
49
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.3.3-1 STATION ISDN ATTRIBUTES (PGM 114)
BTN
22
23
24
24-1
24-2
24-3
24-4
24-5
24-6
24-7
24-8
24-9
24-10
24-11
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100-110 P-MSG DND
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100-110 P-MSG LANG
(1-6):PROMPT1 U.S
DESCRIPTION
If it is ON, the pre-selected station
doesn’t receive the ring and the caller
hears DND tone.
Select voice enabled preselected
message for a station playing toward an
incoming CO call
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
1~6
(1: US
2:KOREA
3:TURKIYE
4:RUSSIA
5:AUTRALIA
6:GERMANY)
1
16 Chars
None
16 Chars
None
16 Chars
None
ADDED STATION ATT4
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-23)
100-110 STN CLI 2
…………....
100-110 STN CLI 3
…………....
100-110 STN CLI 4
…………....
100-110 STN CLI 5
…………....
100-110 SLT CID TYPE
(0:FSK./1:DTMF) : FSK
100-110 WAKEUP ANNC
00
100-110 CAMP ON ENABLE
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : ON
100-110 GAIN TBL
(1-3) : 1
100-110 TONE TBL
(1-5) : 1
100-110 DGT CONV TBL
(01-15) : 00
100-110 VIDEO ON CALLING
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
Station CLI 2 can be programmed. If a
CO line is set to Station CLI 2, then this
CLI is used for outgoing CLI.
Station CLI 3 can be programmed. If a
CO line is set to Station CLI 3, then this
CLI is used for outgoing CLI.
Station CLI 4 can be programmed. If a
CO line is set to Station CLI 4, then this
CLI is used for outgoing CLI.
Station CLI 5 can be programmed. If a
CO line is set to Station CLI 5, then this
CLI is used for outgoing CLI.
SLT can send CID by programming
options.
16 Chars
None
(0:FSK./1:DT
MF)
FSK
Wakeup Announce can be programmed.
0-200
0
If it is ON (enabled) then this station will
receive camp on. But if it is OFF
(Disabled) then this station will not
receive camp on by other person.
TDM gain table can be programmed.
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
1-3
1
1-5
1
eMG80:1-15
eMG800:1-32
0
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Tone table can be programmed.
Set the digit conversion table.
Video show to called party when calling
(ex. IP Video Door Phone)
50
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.3.3-1 STATION ISDN ATTRIBUTES (PGM 114)
BTN
24-12
24-13
24-14
24-15
24-16
24-17
24-18
24-19
24-20
24-21
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100-110 E.164 CLI TO
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
100-110 FLEX PAGE
(1-3 ) : 3 PAGE
100-110 ALIGN LCD
(0-2) : NOT ALIGN
100-110 TWOWA REC AN
00
100-110 LDT ZONE
(001-100 ) : 001
100-110 ECM FAX(T.38)
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : ON
100-110 DISP RESTRICT
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
100-110 SMALL WIN USE
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
100-110 LARGE WIN TMR
(0-5) : 0
100-110 MWI LED
(0-4) : ALL MWI
DESCRIPTION
Send CLI with E.164 format if it is ON.
The iPECS LIP-9030 and 9040 have 8
and 12 Flexible buttons, respectively.
Additional Flex buttons are available
using Flex button pages. The phone can
have up to 3 pages each with the 8 or 12
Flex buttons. Thus, an LIP-9030 can
have 24 Flex buttons and the LIP-9040
can have 36 Flex buttons.
The Navigation Up/Down button is used
to scroll through the Flex buttons pages
assigned.
For the iPECS LIP-9010/20/30/40,
character alignment for messages to the
phone can be right or left aligned by the
system, or alignment controlled by the
phone (“Not Align”).
The two way record announcement can
be recorded to play to the station as
Announcement.
If the LDT Zone Number of a LDT table
(LCR LDT(221)) is equal to this value,
the LDT table is available to this CO
Line.
ECM stands for Error Correction Mode. If
you failed to send something via Faxes,
you can send it again until it is
successful.
When {Display Restricted Caller Number}
in CLI Attributes(113) of a station is ON,
Although the caller number is restricted
in ISDN message, the ringing station
displays the caller number.
If this option is set to ON, small popup is
displayed on the LCD of LIP-9030/9040.
If it is set to OFF, top bar is displayed
instead of small popup.
When Large popup timer is set to any
value from 1 to 5 except 0, the display of
large popup is disappeared after the
timer expired and then the large popup
information is displayed at top bar.
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
1-3
3 PAGE
0: Not align
1: Left
2: Right
Not Align
0-200
00
001-100
001
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0-5
0
0: All MWI
1: VM MWI
User can program Message wait lamp for
2: CLI MWI
each type, refer to the range.
3: SMS MW
4: ICM MWI
51
ALL MWI
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.3.3-1 STATION ISDN ATTRIBUTES (PGM 114)
BTN
24-22
24-23
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100-110 NFC AUTH USE
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : ON
100-110 SHORT MODEM
(1:ON/0:OFF ) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
If this option is ON, User enters
Authorization code to use NFC function
only for LIP-9071.
If this value of SLT is ON, SLT is the
modem mode in seizing a co line.
When the CO line is CO Board, the
{short modem timer} is starting when the
SLT seizes the CO line. And if the {short
modem timer} is expired, the SLT goes to
the original mode.
When the CO line is ISDN, the {short
modem timer} is starting after receiving
the ISDN connect message. And if the
{short modem timer} is expired, the SLT
goes to the original mode.
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
3.3.3.4 Flexible button Assignment -PGM 115
Each Flex button for each iPECS IP and LDP Phone, and DSS Console is assigned a function
(Type) and an associated Value as shown in Table 3.3.3.4-1.
For assignments to an DSS Console, the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] buttons shift the Flex button
appearance on the Admin station to the next or previous group of 24 buttons as they appear on
the iPECS DSS Console. When multiple DSS Consoles are associated with a station, [VOL
UP]/[VOL DOWN] are used to access and assign a function to the console buttons. Each
console contains entries for 48 buttons even though the console may only have 12 buttons. In this
case, assignments for buttons 13 to 48 are ignored.
Table 3.3.3.4-2 shows the default button assignments for the iPECS IP and LDP Phones and
Table 3.3.3.4-3 and Table 3.3.3.4-6 provides default assignment for the various DSS Console
button maps.
PROCEDURE:
FLEX BUTTON ASSIGN
ENTER STA RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 115.
100-110 BTN ASSIGN
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-24)
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110). For
a single station, enter the same number twice.
Press the desired Flex button (1~24).
52
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired button TYPE (1~6) and
value, if required. Refer to Table 3.3.3.4-1 for types and
value range. Defaults for the iPECS IP and LDP Phones are
shown in Table 3.3.3.4-2, for DSS Console defaults refer to
Table 3.3.3.4-3. In addition, for the DSS Console, use [VOL
UP]/[VOL DOWN] buttons to access the next/previous 24
flex buttons.
Press the [Save] button to store the Flex button data entry.
Table 3.3.3.4-1 FLEX BUTTON TYPE & VALUE CODES (PGM 115)
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
Remarks
1
Empty Button
2
User Program Fixed Numbering Plan
3
{[SPEED] XXX}
4
Flexible Numbering Plan Code
5
6
7
Station or Network Station
MSN
U-LOOP
Empty (unassigned) button, may be defined by the user.
Assigns button to perform a User Program function from the Fixed
Numbering Plan, Appendix A.
Station or System Speed Dial bin.
Assigns button to dial a code from the Flexible Numbering Plan,
see Appendix B.
Assign network station number from network table.
Enter desired MSN Table index.
U-Loop button for call wait of internal & external call
Table 3.3.3.4-2 iPECS IP & LDP PHONE BUTTON DEFAULT CONFIGURATION (PGM 115)
iPECS LDP Phone
BTN
1
9030
9008
7004
7008
7016
7024
{CO 1}
{CO 1}
Trans/
DND
{CO 1}
{CO 1}
Call Back
{LOOP}
{LOOP}
empty
empty
empty
empty
{CO 2}
{CO 3}
{CO 4}
{CO 5}
{CO 6}
{CO 7}
{CO 8}
{CO 9}
{CO 10}
{LOOP}
{LOOP}
empty
empty
empty
empty
{CO 2}
{CO 3}
{CO 4}
{CO 5}
{CO 6}
{CO 7}
{CO 8}
{CO 9}
{CO 10}
{LOOP}
{LOOP}
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
PGM*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
{CO 2}
{CO 3}
{CO 4}
{CO 5}
{CO 6}
{CO 7}
{CO 8}
{CO 9}
{CO 10}
{LOOP}
{LOOP}
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
{CO 2}
{CO 3}
{CO 4}
{CO 5}
{CO 6}
{CO 7}
{LOOP}
empty
empty
Speed*
{LOOP}
{LOOP}
53
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
iPECS LDP Phone
BTN
9030
21
22
23
24
9008
7004
7008
7016
7024
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
iPECS IP Phone (7000/8000/8000E series)
BTN
8004
8008
8012
8024
8040
7004
7008
7016
7024
1
{CO 1}
{CO 1}
{CO 1}
{CO 1}
{CO 1}
DND
{LOOP}
{CO 1}
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
{CO 2}
{CO 3}
{CO 4}
{CO 2}
{CO 3}
{CO 4}
{CO 5}
{CO 6}
{CO 7}
{LOOP}
{CO 2}
{CO 3}
{CO 4}
{CO 5}
{CO 6}
{CO 7}
{CO 8}
{CO 9}
{CO 10}
{LOOP}
{LOOP}
{CO 2}
{CO 3}
{CO 4}
{CO 5}
{CO 6}
{CO 7}
{CO 8}
{CO 9}
{CO 10}
{LOOP}
{LOOP}
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
{CO 2}
{CO 3}
{CO 4}
{CO 5}
{CO 6}
{CO 7}
{CO 8}
{LOOP}
{LOOP}
Trans/
PGM*
{LOOP}
{LOOP}
{LOOP}
{LOOP}
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
{CO 2}
{CO 3}
{CO 4}
{CO 5}
{CO 6}
{CO 7}
{CO 8}
{CO 9}
{CO 10}
{LOOP}
{LOOP}
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
empty
iPECS IP Phone (9000 series)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
9002
{LOOP}
{LOOP}
9010
{CO 1}
{CO 2}
{CO 3}
{CO 4}
{LOOP}
9020
{CO 1}
{CO 2}
{CO 3}
{CO 4}
{CO 5}
{CO 6}
{CO 7}
{CO 8}
{LOOP}
{LOOP}
54
9030
9040
9070
(8/24)
(12/36)
(48)
{CO 1}
{CO 2}
{CO 3}
{CO 4}
{CO 5}
{CO 6}
{CO 7}
{CO 8}
{CO 9}
{CO 10}
{LOOP}
{LOOP}
{CO 1}
{CO 2}
{CO 3}
{CO 4}
{CO 5}
{CO 6}
{CO 7}
{CO 8}
{CO 9}
{CO 10}
{LOOP}
{LOOP}
{CO 1}
{CO 2}
{CO 3}
{CO 4}
{CO 5}
{CO 6}
{CO 7}
{CO 8}
{CO 9}
{CO 10}
{LOOP}
{LOOP}
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
NOTE:
These button definitions cannot be changed.
Table 3.3.3.4-3 IP CONSOLE BUTTON CONFIGURATION
MAP
MAP 1
MAP 2
MAP 3
DEFAULT CONSOLE BUTTON CONFIGURATION
Button 1: Intrusion
Button 2: All Call Page
Button 3: Call Park 1
Button 4: Station Group 1
Button 5: Camp-On
Button 6: Internal All Call Page
Button 7: Call Park 2
Button 8: Station Group 2
Button 9: [Release]
Button 10: Ext. All Call Page
Button 11: Call Park 3
Button 12: Station Group 3
Buttons 13 ~ 48: Station Ports 100 ~ 135
Station Ports 136 ~ 183
Station Ports 184 ~ 231
55
Issue 1.6
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.3.5 Station Class-of-Service – PGM 116
All stations are assigned a Class-of-Service (COS), which determines the ability of the user to dial
certain types of calls, refer to Table 3.3.3.5-1. Separate COS assignments are made for Day,
Timed and Night Mode system operation. As a default, all stations are assigned with a Station
COS of 1, no restrictions for all three modes.
The station COS interacts with the CO Line COS to establish overall dialing or Toll restrictions.
This interaction and the resulting restrictions are given in Table 3.3.3.5-2.
Long distance calls are determined by the 1st dialed digit (“0”) and/or the number of digits dialed.
If the 1st digit dialed is an LD code, default “0”, or, if the number of digits dialed exceeds the
assigned LD digit counter (SMDR Attributes PGM 177 button 4), the call is consider a Long
Distance call and appropriate restrictions are applied.
PROCEDURE:
STATION COS
ENTER STA RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 116.
100-110 STATION COS
DAY=01 NIGHT=01 TIMED=01
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110). For
a single station, enter the same number twice.
Press desired Flex button,
1: Day mode COS
2: Night mode COS
3: Timed mode COS
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Station COS,
refer to Table 3.3.3.5-1 & Table 3.3.3.5-2.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.3.5-1 STATION CLASS-OF-SERVICE (PGM 116)
STATION
COS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
RESTRICTIONS
No restrictions are placed on dialing from the station.
The assignments in Exception Table A are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
The assignments in Exception Table B are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
The assignments in both Exception Tables A & B are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
The leading digit dialed cannot be a Long Distance code, default “0”, and further
denied/allowed based on Exception Table C.
The leading digits dialed cannot be a Long Distance code & digit count cannot exceed the LD
digit counter, default 8 digits, and further denied/allowed based on Exception Table C.
Intercom and paging calls are allowed. No outgoing dialing except for emergency calls is
allowed on CO Lines.
The assignments in the Exception Table D are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
The assignments in the Exception Table E are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
The assignments in the Exception Table D & E are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
The assignments in the Exception Table A & B and D & E are monitored for allow and deny
numbers.
56
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.3.5-2 STATION/CO LINE COS TOLL RESTRICTIONS (PGM 116)
STA COS 1
STA COS 2
STA COS 3
STA COS 4
STA COS 5
STA COS 6
STA COS 7
STA COS 8
STA COS 9
STA COS 10
STA COS 11
CO COS 1
CO COS 2
CO COS 3
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
Exception Table
A governs the
dialing
Exception Table
A governs the
dialing
No Restriction
Exception Table
B governs the
dialing
No Restriction
Exception Table
B governs the
dialing
Exception Table
A & B governs
the dialing
Exception Table
A governs the
dialing
Exception Table
B governs the
dialing
Local Call only
(LD Code, “1” or
“0”) and Table C
Local Call only
(LD Code, “1” or
“0”) and Table C
Local Call only
(LD Code, “1” or
“0”) and Table C
Only Local Call
Only Local Call
(LD code/counter) (LD
and Table C
code/counter)
and Table C
In-house dialing In-house dialing
only
only
Exception Table Exception Table
D governs the
D governs the
dialing
dialing
Only Local Call
(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
In-house dialing
only
No Restriction
Exception Table
E governs the
dialing
Exception Table
E governs the
dialing
No Restriction
Exception Table
D & E governs
the dialing
Exception Table
D & E governs
the dialing
No Restriction
Exception Table
A & B and D & E
governs the
dialing
Exception Table
A & B and D & E
governs the
dialing
No Restriction
57
CO COS 4
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
In-house dialing
only
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
CO COS 5
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
In-house dialing
only
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.3.6 CO/IP Group Access – PGM 117
Stations can be allowed or denied access to CO Lines and IP Channels by group (eMG80: 20
/eMG800:200), refer to CO Line Attributes, PGM 141, button 1. As a default, all stations are
allowed access to all groups except Private Lines (group 00) and unused CO Lines. The CO Line
of an RSGM is assigned as a Private Line by default.
PROCEDURE:
CO/IP GROUP ACCESS
ENTER STA RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 117.
100 – 110 CO/IP GRP
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-20)
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110). For
a single station, enter the same number twice.
The first 20 Flex button LEDs indicate group access for
eMG.
Press the desired Flex button to toggle CO/IP Group
access,
LED on: group access allowed
LED off: group access not allowed
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
3.3.3.7 Internal Page Zone Access – PGM 118
Each iPECS IP and LDP Phone is assigned to receive announcements from each Internal Page
Zone. A station can be assigned to any, all or no zones. Note a remote station or a station not
assigned to any Internal Zone will not receive any page announcements including Internal All Call.
As a default, all stations except remote stations are assigned to zone 1.
PROCEDURE:
INTERNAL PAGE ZONE
ENTER STA NUMBER
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 118.
100-110 I-PAGE ZONE
PRESS FLEX KEY (001-024)
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110). For
a single station, enter the same number twice.
The LEDs indicate the status for Page Zones 1 to 24, Use
the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button to display Page Zones
25 to 35.
Press the desired Flex button to toggle Internal Page
Zone assignments,
LED On: station receives announcement
LED Off: station does not receive announcement.
Press the [Save] button to store the Page Zone data.
58
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.3.8 PTT (Push-To-Talk) Group Access – PGM 119
Each iPECS Phone is assigned to receive PTT announcements from any combination of the nine
PTT groups. Note remote stations and stations not assigned to a group will not receive PTT page
announcements including All PTT group page. As a default, all stations except remote stations
are assigned to group 1.
PROCEDURE:
PTT GROUP ACCESS
ENTER STA NUMBER
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 119.
100-110 PTT GRP ACC
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-10)
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110). For
a single station, enter the same number twice.
The first 10 Flex button LEDs indicate assigned zones.
Press the desired Flex button to toggle Push-To-Talk group
assignments,
LED On: station receives announcement
LED Off: station does not receive PTT announcement
Flex button 10 assigns group 0, all groups.
Press the [Save] button to store the PTT group data.
3.3.3.9 Preset Call Forward – PGM 120
This assignment allows an external or internal call to initially ring at a station and forward to a predetermined destination. Preset Call Forward can be assigned separately for internal and external
calls forwarding for all calls (Unconditional), Internal Busy, No-Answer or DND, or External Busy,
No-Answer or DND. Calls can set as Preset Forward to a Station, Hunt group, System Speed dial
for Off-net, or Station ICR.
For the “Transfer to Mail-Box” enter the Station Group number of the Voice Mail group (external
VM, VSF or Feature Server Voice Mail group). This will permit other iPECS IP Phone and LDP
users to transfer a call directly to the desired user‘s Voice Mail-Box.
PROCEDURE:
CALL FWD PRESET
ENTER STA RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 120.
100 – 110 STA PRES FWD
CONDITION CHOICE (F1 –F8)
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110). For
a single station, enter the same number twice.
59
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
PROCEDURE:
F1:S F2:H F3:SPD F4:ICR
UNCONDITION : ….
Press Flex Button for the desired type of forward:
1. Unconditional
2. Internal Busy
3. Internal No Answer
4. External Busy
5. External No Answer
6. Transfer to Mailbox (destination must the VM Group).
7. Internal DND
8. External DND
ENTER FWD STA NO.
UNCONDITION : STA ….
Select Flex button for the Destination type:
1. Station
2. Hunt Group
3. System Speed Bin for Off-net
4. Station ICR
Use the dial pad to enter the value associated with the
selected type:
For Station & Net Station, enter station number,
For Hunt Group, enter Station Group Number,
For System Speed Bin for Off-Net enter Speed bin
number.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
3.3.3.10 Idle Line Selection – PGM 121
When a station goes to an off-hook condition (lifts handset or presses [SPEAKER] button), the
system normally provides intercom dial tone. In place of the dial tone, the station can be
programmed to access a CO Line, CO/IP Group or call a Station or Station Group as described in
Table 3.3.3.10-1. The Idle Line Selection (Prime Line) can be either immediate or delayed after
going off-hook. The immediate/delay selection is based on the Hot/Warm assignment in Station
Attributes III Prime Line PGM 113, button 7 and System timers PGM 182, button 6.
PROCEDURE:
IDLE LINE SELECTION
ENTER STA RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 121.
100-110 IDLE LINE
NOT ASSIGNED (1-7)
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110). For
a single station, enter the same number twice.
60
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Use the dial-pad to enter the type and value for the desired
Idle Line selection, refer to Table 3.3.3.10-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.3.10-1 IDLE LINE SELECTION TYPE & VALUE (PGM 121)
TYPE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Flex button
CO line
CO group
Station
Hunt Group
Station Speed
System Speed
Flex button, activates Flex Number as if dialed.
CO/IP path seizes CO line.
CO/IP Group seizes CO line from the CO/IP Group.
Station, calls the assigned station
Call to Hunt Group
Call to Station Speed
Call to System Speed
3.3.3.11 Station IP Attributes – PGM 122
Stations are allowed access to the systems H.323 VoIP resources based on the Station IP
Attributes. Refer to Table 3.3.3.11-1 for a description of the attributes and the inputs available.
PROCEDURE:
STATION IP ATTRIBUTE
ENTER STA RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 122.
100-110 STA IP ATT
PRESS FLEX KEY (1)
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110). For
a single station, enter the same number twice.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.3.11-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Station IP
Attribute, refer to Table 3.3.3.11-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.3.11-1 STATION IP ATTRIBUTES (PGM 122)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100-110 DTR IP CALL
(1:EN/0:DIS) : ENABLE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Enables station to access an IP
channel directly by dialing the IP
Group access code to place
H.323 or SIP VoIP calls.
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enable
61
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.3.12 Station Timers – PGM 123
Certain timers can be assigned on a station basis. Available timers, description and valid inputs
are given in Table 3.3.3.12-1.
PROCEDURE:
STATION TIMERS
ENTER STA RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 123.
100-110 STATION RANGE
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-2)
Use the dial-pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100~110). For
a single station, enter the same number twice.
Press the desired Flex button.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Station IP
Attribute, refer to Table 3.3.3.12-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.3.12-1 STATION TIMERS (PGM 123)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
STA FWD NO ANS TMR (sec)
(000-600) : 000
CUT OFF (Min)
(00-99) : 00
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
This timer determines the
duration the station will ring prior
to Ring-No-Answer Forward.
This setting affects both manual
and Preset Call Forward and
overrides the System Ring No
Answer timer PGM 181-button
1.
Allowed length of CO/IP calls
when station is assigned Call
Time restriction in Station
Attributes II, PGM 112, button 3
000-600
seconds
000
00-99
minutes
00
62
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.3.13 Linked Station Table – PGM 124
A station can be linked to another station so that the two stations effectively act as a single station
with the attributes of the primary station number. An unregistered or registered station may be
linked to a primary station. When unregistered station linking is used, the linked station does not
reduce the system’s capacity.
PROCEDURE:
LINKED STA TABLE
ENTER STA NUMBER
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 124.
STA 110 IS LINKED PAIR
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-3)
Use the dial-pad to enter primary station number for the
Linked pair (Ex. 110).
Press the desired Flex button.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data, refer to Table
3.3.3.13-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.3.13-1 LINKED STATION ATTRIBUTES (PGM 124)
BTN
1
2
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
SET IP ADDRESS
IP: IP NOT ASSIGNED
ROUTER IP ADDRESS
IP: ROUTER IP NOT ASSIGN
STA 110 : SET MAC ADDR
MAC: NOT ASSIGNED
DESCRIPTION
IP Address of the linked station not
required.
Set Router IP address associated with
linked station.
Set MAC address of linked un-registered
station, required data. Note the
secondary station must not be registered
in the system prior to linking. If needed,
delete the device from the system.
63
RANGE
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.3.14 ICM Tenancy Group – PGM 125
Stations can be assigned to an ICM Tenancy group under Station Attributes II PGM 111, button
17. Up to 15 Tenant groups for eMG80 and up to 32 for eMG800 can be defined. Each group is
configured to allow or deny placing intercom calls to stations in other groups and an Attendant
station can be defined for each group. The Attendant will receive “dial 0” calls and controls
Day/Night mode for the Group.
PROCEDURE:
ICM TENANCY GROUP
ENTER GRP NUMBER (01-15)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 125.
ICM TENANCY GRP 01
F1:ATD F2:ACCESS
Use the dial-pad to enter the group number (Ex. 01)
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.3.14-1.
For Attendant assignment, use the dial-pad to enter the
station number of the Group Attendant.
To assign accessible ICM Tenancy groups for the group, the
Flex button indicates the current Tenant group access.
Press the Flex.
Buttons to toggle Group access settings.
LED ON: group access allowed
LED OFF: group access denied
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.3.14-1 ICM TENANCY GROUP ATTRIBUTES (PGM 125)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
ICM TENANCY GRP 01
ATD: . . . .
ICM TENANCY GRP 01
PRESS ACCESS GRP(1-15)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Attendant station for the ICM
tenancy group. ATD. Receives dial
‘0’ calls and controls Day/Night
mode.
ICM Tenancy groups allowed
access to the selected group.
STA No
-
eMG80:01-15
eMG800:01-32
GROUP 1
64
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.3.15 Station VM Attributes – PGM 127
Voice Mail attributes can be assigned on a station basis. The description and valid inputs are
given in Table 3.3.3.15-1.
PROCEDURE:
ENTER PGM NUMBER
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 127.
STATION VM ATT
ENTER STA RANGE
Enter Station Range.
100-110 STA VM ATT
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-20)
Press the desired Flex button.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data, refer to Table
3.3.3.15-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.3.15-1 STATION VM Attributes (PGM 127)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
− ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
VM COS
(1-5) : 1
ADMINISTRATOR MAILBOX
(1:EN/0:DIS):DISABLE
ANNC. ONLY MAILBOX
(1 :EN/0 :DIS) :DISABLE
ANNC. ONLY OPTION
(0-1):PREVIOUS MENU
COMPANY DIR FIRST NAME
…............
COMPANY DIR LAST NAME
…............
USER-MSG RW/FF TIME
(03-99):04 Sec
NOTIFY REPEAT COUNT
(00-99) : 03
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Voice Mail COS (Grade) can be set on
each station. Each COS attributes can
be set at PGM 253.
If this option is set to ON, Administrator
Voice Mail feature can be accessed.
1-5
1
0: Disable
1: Enable
Disable
0: Disable
1: Enable
Disable
0: Previous
1: Hang Up
Previous
menu
Max 12 Char
N/A
This field is last name of a station for
Company Directory feature.
Max 12 Char
N/A
User Message Rewind / Fast Forward
are supported by this time.
03-99
04
It is used to transfer call to attendant if
retry count is over this for VM
notification.
00-99
03
If this option is set to ON, no message
can be left and only the greeting is
played.
This option is available only ANNC.
ONLY MAIL BOX is set to ON.
If Previous Menu, after greeting
message is played, go to previous
menu.
If Hang Up, after greeting message is
played, call is hanged up.
This field is first name of a station for
Company Directory feature.
65
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.3.15-1 STATION VM Attributes (PGM 127)
BTN
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
− ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
00-99
(seconds)
15
NOTIFY DIAL TIME
(00-99) : 15 Sec
It is dial waiting time after provide
VMIU/VMIB announcement for VM
notification.
FORWARD OPTION
(0-1) : MOVE
When a left message is forwarded, this
option is applied.
0:Move
1: Copy
Move
Message ca scading i s a f eature that
copies messages left for the originating
mailbox to another mailbox. This field is
destination mail box station.
Station No.
N/A
CASCADE MAILBOX1
….
CASCADE MAILBOX2
….
CASCADE MAILBOX3
….
CASCADE MAILBOX4
….
CASCADE MAILBOX5
….
CASCADE METHOD
(0-2) : DISABLE
CASCADE MESG TYPE
(0-2) : NORMAL ONLY
CASCADE APPLY TYPE
(0-2) : IMMEDIATE
CASCADE TMR(min)
(000-250) : 000
MSG WAIT NOTICE
(0-2) : TONE
0:Disable
Cascade method is determined.
1: Copy
Disable
2: Move
0:Normal Only
Normal
Cascade Message Type is determined. 1: Urgent Only
only
2:All
Cascade Apply Type is determined.
0:Immediate
Immediate: Cascade is done as soon
1: After Notify
as a message is left.
Retry Count
After Notify Retry Count: After Notify
Immediate
2: After
Retry Count is over, cascade is done.
Cascade
After Cascade Timer: Cascade is done
Timer
after cascade timer.
Cascade Apply Timer is set.
000 ~250
(min)
0
When a user has voice mail, system
can provides this as voice prompt
instead of dial tone according to option
based on station.
Disable: System provides normal dial
tone when a user goes to off hook
status.
Tone: System provides warning tone
instead of dial tone to give indication
when a user goes to off hook status.
Prompt: System provides message
indication as voice prompt when a user
goes to off hook status.
0: OFF
1:Tone
2:Prompt
Tone
66
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.3.16 Station CCR Table – PGM 128
CCR Table can be assigned on a station basis. The description and valid inputs are given in
Table 3.3.3.16-1.
PROCEDURE:
ENTER PGM NUMBER
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 128.
STATION CCR
ENTER STA RANGE
Enter Station Range (Ex. 100~110).
100-110 STA CCR
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-14)
Press the desired Flex button.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.3.16-1.
Table 3.3.3.16-1 STATION CCR Table (PGM 128)
BTN
1-10
11
12
13
14
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
101 – 110 STA CCR
INPUT 0 : NOT ASSIGNED
101 – 110 CCR TBLUSAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
101 – 101 CCR 1 DGT ONLY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
101 – 101 * USED AS
(0-3): NUMBERING PLAN
101 – 101 # USED AS
(0-3): ACCESS MAILBOX
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Button 1 to 10 means outside user
press 1 to 0. This dialing is matched
with this table destination.
The destination is 14 kinds.
If this option is set to ON, this CCR
OFF
table is worked.
ON
If this option is set to OFF, this CCR
table is not worked, instead of that,
outside caller’s dialed digit can be
regarded as DISA dialing.
If this option is set to ON, Only the
ON/OFF
first digit that is user entered is
affected to the CCR routing.
If this option is set to OFF, the
following next digits are also
affected to the DISA routing.
0 : Numbering
While listening User Greeting, *
Plan
button working is followed by this
1
:
Replay
attribute.
Greeting
2 : Access
Mail Box
3 : Leave
Message
While listening User Greeting, #
0 : Numbering
button working is followed by this
Plan
attribute.
1 : Replay
Greeting
2 : Access
Mail Box
3 : Leave
Message
67
DEFAULT
NA
OFF
OFF
Numbering
Plan
Access
Mailbox
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.3.16-1 CCR DESTINATIONS (PGM 128)
TYPE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
DESCRIPTION
Route to a Station
Route to a Hunt Group
Route with System Speed Dial
Route as PBX Transfer with System Speed Dial (Flash then dial speed dial digits)
Route to VSF Announcement
Route to VSF Announcement and disconnect
Route to Networked Station
Conference Room
Internal Page
External page
All Call Page
Route to voice mail (Hunt group/station number)
Company Directory (USA Only)
Record VM Greeting (USA Only)
3.3.3.17 LSS Label Edit – PGM 129
The LIP-8012 LSS 12 button DSS Console incorporates an LCD used to label the function of
each button. The label, which can be up to 12 characters, is assigned in this program.
PROCEDURE:
LSS LABEL EDIT
ENTER STA NUMBER
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 129.
STA 100 LSS LABEL
ENTER LSS IDX(1-4)
Use the dial-pad to enter the station number associated with
the console (Ex. 100).
STA 100 LSS 1
ENTER BTN NO (01 – 12)
Consoles are indexed, allowing multiple consoles to be
associated with a station. Use the dial-pad to enter the index
of the LSS console (1 ~ 4).
STA 100 LSS 1 BTN 1
LABEL IS EMPTY
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired LSS console button
number (1 ~ 12).
Edit the label referring to Table 2.1.2-1 Alpha-numeric Entry
Chart.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
68
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.4 BOARD DATA – PGM 130 to 132
3.3.4.1 H.323 VoIP Attributes – PGM 130
The VOIP channels are used for Distributed Networking, access to SIP or H.323 networks and for
remote iPECS devices. When the standard H.323 VoIP protocol is employed for an external VoIP
call, several attributes of these channels can be assigned. The H.323 call set-up mode and
tunneling (H.245 Encapsulation) can be established.
Also for H.323 support, a RAS (Registration, Admissions and Status) channel can be defined.
The RAS channel IP addresses (uni-cast and multi-cast) as well as the IP port Numbering Plan
and other H.323 set-up characteristics are defined.
This PGM also allows setting the IP TOS bit for Diffserv, a commonly recognized packet
prioritization protocol. Higher priority packets are given priority in the Router or Layer 3 Switch
queue. However, they are the first to be discarded in the event of long queue delays, which may
cause excess packet loss and poor voice quality.
Refer to Table 3.3.4.1-1 for a description of the features and the input required.
PROCEDURE:
H323 VOIP ATTRIBUTE
ENTER SEQ NO(001-300)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 130. eMG800 range is
0001-2890.
001 H323 VOIP ATTR
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-24)
Use the dial pad to enter the VoIP board sequence number.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.4.1-1.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired data, refer to Table
3.3.4.1-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.4.1-1 H.323 VOIP ATTRIBUTES (PGM 130)
BTN
1
2
3
4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
H.323 SETUP MODE
(1:FAST/0:NORM): FAST
H.323 TUNNEL MODE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
H.323 DTMF PATH
(0:IN/1:OUT/2:2833): 0
DIFFSERV PRETAG
TAG (00-63) : 04
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
H.323 IP calls can be set-up
using the H.323 normal or Fast
Start mode.
H.323 IP calls can be set-up
using the H.245 encapsulation
(Tunneling).
During a connection, DTMF Digits
can be sent in-band or out of
band (H.245).
0: Fast
1: Norm
Fast
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
0: In band
1: Out band
2: 2833
0
0~63
4
Diffserv pre-tagging for Voice
packet. Note high values may
cause high packet discard levels.
69
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.4.1-1 H.323 VOIP ATTRIBUTES (PGM 130)
BTN
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
RAS USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
RAS MULTICAST IP
224.0.1.41
RAS MULTICAST PORT
(00001-65535): 01718
RAS UNICAST IP
82.134.80.2
RAS UNICAST PORT
(00001-65535): 01719
RAS KEEP_ALIVE TM
(001-999) : 120 (sec)
RAS NUM PLAN PREFIX
9
RAS GATEWAY ID
ONLY POSSIBLE BY WEB ADM
RAS LIGHT RRQ
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
TCP KEEP ALIVE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
FAIL OVER USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
FAIL OVER TIME(sec)
(03-10) : 05
FAIL OVER CO GRP
(01-21) : . .
Q931 START PORT
(00001-65535) : 02048
Q931 END PORT
(00001-65535) : 02559
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
IP Address
224.0.1.41
IP Port #
1718
IP Address
82.134.80.2
Uni-cast IP Port for RAS
Information of Gatekeeper.
IP Port #
1719
The time between exchange of
RAS Information between GK
and VOIB/VOIU.
The numbering plan for Calling
Number in RAS Setup.
001-999
(SEC)
120
Number
(24 digits)
9
Determine whether VOIU/VOIB
Board will be used as a
Gatekeeper.
Multi-cast IP address for RAS
Information of Gatekeeper.
Multi-cast IP Port for RAS
Information of Gatekeeper.
Uni-cast IP address for RAS
Information of Gatekeeper.
The Gatekeeper ID (This can be 128 Character
programmed only via WEB
Admin).
The system can be assigned to
0: OFF
use the simple RRQ (Registration
1: ON
Request) message (ON) or the
full RRQ message (OFF).
The system will send a polling
0: OFF
message every 75 seconds to
1: ON
assure the status of the TCP
connection.
The H.323 call will be failover to
0: OFF
another line (FAIL OVER USAG:
1: ON
ON).
The H.323 call will be failover.
03-10
The time will be set.
(Sec.)
OFF
ON
OFF
5
If the H.323 call will be failover,
assign another CO group.
01-21
IP-Binding H.323 signaling
option: Q.931 TCP Start Port in
case of outgoing call.
IP-Binding H.323 signaling
option: Q.931 TCP End port in
case of outgoing call.
00001-65535
2048
00001-65535
2559
70
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.4.1-1 H.323 VOIP ATTRIBUTES (PGM 130)
BTN
20
21
22
23
24
24-1
24-2
24-3
24-4
24-5
24-6
24-7
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
H245 START PORT
(00001-65535) : 02560
H245 END PORT
(00001-65535) : 03071
RAS START PORT
(00001-65535) : 02048
RAS END PORT
(00001-65535) : 03071
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
P-Binding H.323 signaling option:
H.245 TCP Start Port.
00001-65535
2560
IP-Binding H.323 signaling
option: H.245 TCP End Port.
00001-65535
3071
IP-Binding H.323 signaling
option: RAS UDP Start Port.
00001-65535
2048
IP-Binding H.323 signaling
option: RAS UDP End Port.
00001-65535
3071
IP-Binding media option: Media
UDP Start Port.
00001-65535
6000
IP-Binding media option: Media
UDP End Port.
00001-65535
7036
IP-Binding option: Data Sharing
TCP Start Port.
00001-65535
8500
IP-Binding option: Data Sharing
TCP End Port.
00001-65535
8548
001 H323 VOIP ATTR (2ND)
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-4)
MEDIA START PORT
(00001-65535) : 06000
MEDIA END PORT
(00001-65535) : 07036
DATA START PORT
(00001-65535) : 08500
DATA END PORT
(00001-65535) : 08548
H.245 SETUP
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
H.245 PROCEEDING
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
H.245 ALERTING
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
This feature is the ability of two
user endpoints to communicate
before call is actually established
in normal call mode. This feature
is not used when 'H323 Setup
Mode' is 'Fast'.
* Setup: Caller party tries to open
early media on receiving the
Setup message.
* Proceeding: Calling party tries
to open early media on receiving
the Proceeding message.
* Alerting: Calling party tries to
open early media on receiving the
Alerting message.
71
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.4.2 T1/E1/PRI Attributes – PGM 131
Each T1/PRI module can be assigned for various attributes of the interface. The T1 interface
framing and line coding can be selected and, for the PRI, TE or NT operation and CRC check can
be selected. Refer to Table 3.3.4.2-1 for a description of the features and the input required. Note
that the Sequence Number can be determined in PGM 103, Button 1.
PROCEDURE:
T1 /E1/PRI ATTRIBUTE
ENTER SEQ NO ( 001 –300 )
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 131 and enter sequence
number (Ex. 001). eMG800 range is 0001-2890.
001 T1 /PRI ATTR
PRESS FLEX KEY ( 1 – 7 )
Use the dial pad to enter the Sequence Number of the
desired T1/PRI module. Use PGM 103 to determine
Sequence Numbers. (e.g. enter the sequence number
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.4.2-1.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired data, refer to Table
3.3.4.2-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the Table data entry.
Table 3.3.4.2-1 T1/PRI MODE (PGM 131)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
T1 SETUP MODE
(1:ESF/0:D4) : D4
T1 LINE MODE
(1:AMI/0:B8ZS) : B8ZS
PRI LINE MODE
(1:TE/0:NT): TE
PRI/E1 CRC CHECK
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
E1 R2DSP CHECK
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
DCO PX TYPE
(0-3): STANDARD (2)
CALLER NAME TYPE
(1:DISP/0:FAC) : FACILIT
DESCRIPTION
Select T1 Setup mode.
D4 frame: Use In-Band Control
Protocol.
ESF: Use Data link Message.
Select T1 line mode (AMI/B8ZS).
Select TE/NT mode.
For PRI lines the CRC (Cyclical
Redundancy Check) can be
disabled (OFF).
Used for R2-El board or E1 board.
Reserved for future use with R2 E1
board.
If the caller has a name, the Caller
Name is sent to the network
according to the option (FACILITY,
DISPLAY). (USA only)
72
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: D4
1: ESF
D4
0: B8ZS
1: AMI
B8ZS
0: NT
1: TE
TE
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: S1240
STANDARD
1: TDX1B
2: STANDARD
3:CONGES_DIS
0:FACILITY
1:DISPLAY
FACILITY
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.4.3 Board Base Attributes – PGM 132
Appliances (Boards and IP Phones) can be connected to the iPECS over a managed WAN
without the need to employ a VoIP channel. In this case, the system does not implement security
(IPSec) or QoS treatment over the link. To implement the managed WAN connectivity, the iPECS
must be assigned with the IP address of the router for all appliances that may attempt a point-topoint connection over the managed WAN, including devices on the iPECS LAN. Note that if the
device’s Router IP address is not defined, the system will use the Router IP address defined in
PGM 102.
The default codec employed by each device can be specifically defined as G.711, G.723, G.729,
G.722 or the system default codec PGM 161 can be defined.
Note that the Sequence Number can be determined in PGM 103, Button 1.
PROCEDURE:
BOARD BASE ATTRIBUTE
ENTER RANGE (001–300 )
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 132 and enter Range
(Ex. 001~002). eMG800 range is 0001-2890.
001-002 BOARD ATTRIBUTE
PRESS FLEX KEY (01–13)
Use the dial pad to enter the Sequence Number range of the
desired module. Use PGM 103 to determine Sequence
Numbers.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.4.3-1.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired data, refer to Table
3.3.4.3-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the Table data entry.
Table 3.3.4.3-1 BOARD ATTRIBUTES (PGM 132)
BTN
1
2
3
4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
001-002 ROUTER IP ADDR
0 .0 .0 .0
001-002 DEV CODEC TYPE
(0-4): SYSTEM CODEC
001-002 FIRWALL IP ADDR
0 .0 .0 .0
001-002 RTP SECURITY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
DESCRIPTION
Enter the default Router IP address
associated with the selected
devices.
Select the CODEC type for the
selected devices:
0: G.711,
1: G.723.1,
2: G.729,
3: G.722
4: System Codec refer to
PGM 161-button 9.
Enter the Firewall IP address
associated with the selected
devices.
Remote iPECS IP & LDP phones
use IPSec to assure a secure
connection. To reduce bandwidth
use, IPSec may be disabled.
73
RANGE
DEFAULT
0.0.0.0
0-4
4
0.0.0.0
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.4.3-1 BOARD ATTRIBUTES (PGM 132)
BTN
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
001-002 TNET ENABLE
(0:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
001-002 VSF SENDER MAIL
............
001-002 T38 ENABLE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
001-002 USE BRD IP FWIP
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
001-002 RTP FIRWALL IP
0 .0 .0 .0
001-002 T38 PORT USAGE
(0:D/1:S/2:T) : 0
001-002 2833 PAYLOAD
(000-127) : 000
001-002 2833 VOLUME
(00-36) : 00
001-002 2833 REDUNDANCY
(1-8) : 0
DESCRIPTION
When a module or station is to
be connected in a Centralized
Control network (TNET), the
device must be enabled for
TNET operation.
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
VMIU/VMIB e-mail address for
Mailbox Mail Sending.
NULL
T38 mode ON/OFF for FAX data
transfer.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
VOIB IP will be used for SIP
signaling in Multi NAT
circumstance.
Enter the Firewall IP address
associated with the Remote Phone
or Gateway/board if there needs
Dual Broadband connection for SIP
trunks and Remote phones (using a
VOIB).
T38 Port can be different with
Voice Port. Or, be same or be
triggered.
RFC 2833 Payload is
programmable.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
RFC 2833 packet volume.
RFC2833 Packet Redundancy.
74
0.0.0.0
0: D
1: S
2: T
000-127
0
000
00-36
00
1-8
0
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.5 CO LINE DATA – PGM 140 to 151
3.3.5.1 CO Service Type – PGM 140
Each CO Line is assigned a type, Normal or DID. Normal CO Lines can be employed for DISA
Service PGM 146. DID lines are for incoming only operation and provide call routing based on
signaling from the carrier, refer to section 3.3.5.4 DID Service Attributes - PGM 145.
PROCEDURE:
COL SERVICE ATT
ENTER COL RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 140 and enter the range
(Ex. 0102).
01-02 SVC TYPE
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-1)
2. Press the desired Flex button.
01-02 SVC TYPE (1-4)
NORMAL CO (1)
Use the dial pad to enter a CO Line range. For a single CO
Line, enter the same number twice.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired service type:
1. Normal CO line
2. DID line
3. TIE line
4. Unused
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
3.3.5.2 CO/IP Attributes I ~ III - PGM 141~143
CO/IP Attributes define various characteristics of the CO lines and IP facilities under control of the
system. Most require a dial pad input of 1 or 0 to set the characteristic, refer to Table 3.3.5.2-1 to
Table 3.3.5.2-3. Specific descriptions for Class-of-Service and CO line Call Metering tones are
provided in Table 3.3.5.2-4 and Table 3.3.5.2-5 respectively.
PROCEDURE:
CO/IP ATTRIBUTE 1
ENTER COL RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial:
141 for CO/IP Attributes I
142 for CO/IP Attributes II
143 for CO/IP Attributes III.
01-02 CO/IP ATT 1
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-24)
Use the dial-pad to enter a CO/IP line range. For a single
CO/IP Line, enter the same number twice.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.5.2-1 to
Table 3.3.5.2-3.
75
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
PROCEDURE:
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute, refer
to Table 3.3.5.2-1 through Table 3.3.5.2-5.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.5.2-1 CO/IP ATTRIBUTES I (PGM 141)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 CO/IP GROUP
GRP NO (01-20) : 01
01-02 CO LINE COS
COS (1–5) : 1
01-02 CO START SIGNAL
(1:GND/0:LOOP) : LOOP
01-02 CO LINE TYPE
(1:PBX/0:CO) : CO
01-02 CO LINE SIGNAL
(1:DTMF/0:PULSE):DTMF
DESCRIPTION
DEFAULT
Each CO Line is assigned to a group;
grouping should be based on the Line type
and COS.
01
Each CO Line is assigned a Class-of-Service
which will interact with the Station COS, refer
to section 3.3.5.2.
CO COS 1: Station COS applies
CO COS 2: Exception Table A governs
CO COS 3: Exception Table B governs
CO COS 4: Restricts LD calls and Exception
Table C
CO COS 5: Overrides Station COS 2~6 with
no restrictions.
The system can recognize a loop closure or a
ground as the “connect” (start) signal on an
analogue CO Line.
Each CO Line can be assigned as connected
to a CO Line or a PBX/CTX Line.
1
Each analogue CO Line can be assigned to
send either DTMF or Pulses for dialed digits
to the PSTN.
LOOP
CO
DTMF
01-02 UNSED
01-02 UNIVERSAL ANS
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
01-02 CO/IP GRP AUTH
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
01-02 DATA STATION NO
FAX : ….
01-02 TENANCY GROUP
(00-15) : 00
Universal Night Answer (UNA) allows any
station to answer a call on the CO Line by
dialing the UNA code.
Each CO/IP Group can be assigned to require
the user enter an Authorization Code for
access.
Each CO/IP line can be assigned to recognize
a FAX call when a specified station answers.
OFF
Only stations in the assigned Tenancy group
are permitted access to the defined CO Line.
00
76
OFF
….
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.5.2-1 CO/IP ATTRIBUTES I (PGM 141)
BTN
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 CO VOIP MODE
VOIP MODE(1-6) : COMMON
01-02 PROCTOR ON/OFF
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
01-02 WAIT IF VSF BUSY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
DESCRIPTION
The VOIB channels can support iPECS,
H.323 or SIP protocols. This field defines the
protocol for the VoIP channel(s).
1: COMMON
2:H.323 ONLY
3: SIP ONLY
4:RTP RLY
5:H.323/RTP RLY
6:SIP/RTP RLY
Each analogue CO line can be assigned to
send the station number as DTMF digits for
Proctor service.
DEFAULT
COMMON
OFF
When a DID/DISA call assigned to receive a
VMIU/VMIB announcement arrives and all
channels are busy, the call may wait with Ring
back until a channel is available (ON) or route
to the DID/DISA Destination - PGM 167.
ON
Ring Tone can be programmable by CO-line
base admin.
00
TDM gain table can be programmed.
1
Tone table can be programmed.
1
Select digit conversion table.
01
01-02 UNUSED
01-02 UNUSED
01-02 RING TONE
(00-12, 0:N/A) : 00
01-02 UNUSED
01-02 GAIN TABLE
(1-3) : 1
01-02 TONE TBL
(1-5) : 1
01-02 DGT CONV. TBL
(01-15) : 01
01-02 PREPAID CALL
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Enables Pre-paid Call feature.
77
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.5.2-1 CO/IP ATTRIBUTES I (PGM 141)
BTN
22
23
24
24-1
24-2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 PREPAID MONEY
0 (USED:0)
01-02 LDT ZONE
(001-100) : 001
DESCRIPTION
An amount can be associated with the station
as prepayment for outgoing calls. The
assigned “Pre-paid Money” is reduced by the
calculated call cost (Call Metering or
cost/minute). This parameter displays the
remaining funds for outgoing calls. Prepaid
Money is often used in small hospitality
businesses.
The “Used Pre-paid Money” displays the
money that has been used.
If the LDT Zone Number of a station/co line is
equal to this value, this LDT table is available
to the station/co line.
DEFAULT
001
ADDED CO/IP ATTRIBUTE 1
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-2)
01-02 ICLID USAGE
(0-2) : CLI
01-02 EMERGENCY PBX C
(0-4) : DISABLE
An incoming call can be routed to the
destination based on Calling Name.
Disable - ICLID feature is disabled
CLI - ICLID feature is operated with CLI
Name - ICLID feature is operated with Name
System can insert PBX code automatically if
pre-configured when a user make an
emergency call.
CLI
Disable
Table 3.3.5.2-2 CO/IP ATTRIBUTES II (PGM 142)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 CO NAME DISPLAY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
01-02 CO NAME ASSIGN
…………
01-02 METERING UNIT
00:NONE (0-6)
01-02 LINE DROP(CPT)
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
01-02 DISA ACCT CODE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
DESCRIPTION
DEFAULT
The IP Phone display can indicate the CO
Line/IP channel number or a twelve (12)character name, if assigned.
Each CO Line and the IP group can be
assigned a twelve (12) character name for
display purposes, see Table 3.1.2-1 for
character entry sequence.
Selects the call-metering signal from the
PSTN to indicate call cost, refer to Table
3.3.5.2-5.
Each CO Line can be programmed to
disconnect if an error tone is detected.
OFF
With DISA ACCT CODE “ON”, users will be
required to enter an Authorization code. Enter
codes in Authorization Codes Table - PGM
227.
ON
78
00
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.5.2-2 CO/IP ATTRIBUTES II (PGM 142)
BTN
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 MOH: (00-10)
MUSIC 1 (01)
01-02 CO DIAL TONE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
01-02 CO RBACK TONE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
DEFAULT
A held call can be connected to one (1) of
three (3) possible audio sources while on Hold
as Music-on-Hold (MOH).
00:REFER TO SYS HOLD
01: INT music
02: EXT music
03: VSF MOH
04: SLT MOH1
05: SLT MOH2
06: SLT MOH3
07: SLT MOH4
08: SLT MOH5
09: VSF MOH2
10:VSF MOH3
ISDN Lines may provide a digital signal rather
than actual tones.
If the ISDN tone is set to “OFF”, iPECS can
provide the tones.
01
OFF
01-02 CO BUSY TONE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
01-02 FLASH TMR
(000-300 10 ms) : 050
01-02 OPEN LOOP
(00-20 100ms) : 04
01-02 ICLI DT TMR
(00-20 SEC) : 00
01-02 SMS OUTGOING
(1:EN/0:DIS) : DISABLE
01-02 SMS RCV STATION
STA : ….
OFF
OFF
01-02 CO ERROR TONE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
01-02 DISA CO ACCESS
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
ON
Permits DISA users access to the VoIP
facilities of the system.
OFF
This entry sets the duration of a Flash on the
CO Line.
050
500 msec
This entry sets the duration of open loop that
will be recognized as a “Disconnect Signal”.
04
When a call is received, the system may use
the ICLID (Incoming Caller ID) to route the
call. The system will delay routing a call for
this timer while awaiting ICLID. Enter a 00 to
disable ICLID routing.
Each CO line can be assigned to support
PSTN SMS.
00
When a PSTN SMS is received, the system
delivers the message to the assigned station.
79
Disable
….
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.5.2-2 CO/IP ATTRIBUTES II (PGM 142)
BTN
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 DL TN:(00-10)
DIAL TONE (00)
01-02 RB TN: (00-10)
RING BACK TONE (00)
01-02 REJECT ANONYMOUS
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
01-02 PREFIX TABLE ID
(0-6) : 0
01-02 CO CUT OFF TMR
(00-99 MIN) : 00
01-02 DISA DELAY TMR
(0-9 SEC): 0
01-02 LDT TBT INDEX
(00-10) : 01
01-02 DISA ANS TMR
(0-9 SEC) : 0
DESCRIPTION
DEFAULT
One of eleven dial tones can be used by the
CO line.
00:DIAL TONE
01:INT MUSIC
02:EXT MUSIC
03:VSF MOH
04:SLT MOH1
05:SLT MOH2
06:SLT MOH3
07:SLT MOH4
08:SLT MOH5
09:VSF MOH2
10:VSF MOH3
One of eleven ring back tones can be used by
the CO line.
dial tone
When REJECT ANONYMOUS “ON”,
incoming call without Caller ID will be
rejected.
If prefix table ID is set to 0, then prefix dialing
call cannot be applied.
If prefix table ID is set to (1-6), then prefix
dialing call can be applied with PREFIX
DIALING TABLE (PGM 206)
Co base call cut off timer can be set at this
field.
Ring back tone
OFF
0
00
It is only used for Russia.
System is connected to DISA call
immediately, and DISA announcement is
played after this timer.
LCR will be operated with LDT table index.
0
It is only used for Russia.
When DISA incoming call, System is
connected after DISA Answer Timer.
0
1
Table 3.3.5.2-3 CO/IP ATTRIBUTES III (PGM 143)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 COLP TABLE IDX
INDEX : NOT ASSIGNED
DESCRIPTION
DEFAULT
When an incoming call on an ISDN Line is
answered, the system will send caller id using
the number from the CLIP/COLP Table –PGM
201- entry defined by this parameter.
None
80
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.5.2-3 CO/IP ATTRIBUTES III (PGM 143)
BTN
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 CLIP TABLE IDX
INDEX : NOT ASSIGNED
01-02 ENBLOCK SENDING
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
01-02 TYPE OF NO(0-4)
NATIONAL (2)
01-02 DID REMOVE NO
(00-99) : 00
02 TEI TYPE
(1:AUTO/0:FIX) : AUTO
02 ISDN-SS CD/CR
(1:EN/0:DIS) : DISABLE
02 ISDN 1 DGT RM
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
001-002 AOC TYPE (0-5)
NO SERVICE (0)
001-002 ISDN LINE TYPE
(1:U/0:A): U_LAW
01-02 CALLING SUBADDR
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
DEFAULT
When a call is placed on an ISDN Line, the
None
system will send caller id using the number
from the CLIP/COLP Table –PGM 201- entry
defined by this parameter. For entry 00, the
CLI STA NO entered in PGM 114-button 6 will
be used in place of the station number. For
other entries, the station number is added as
a suffix to the entry in PGM 201.
eMG80 : OFF,
This entry determines if the system sends
eMG800: ON
dialed digits to the ISDN line as they are
received (Overlap) or collects all digits and
forwards them in a block, ENBLOCK.
For outgoing calls on the ISDN Line, this
2
parameter defines the “Type of Number Plan”
provided in Calling Party Information Element
of the ISDN call SETUP message.
0: UNKNOWN
1: INTERNATIONAL
2: NATIONAL
3: Unused
4: SUBSCRIBER
When a DID call is received on an ISDN Line,
00
this entry determines the number of digits that
will be removed starting with the first received
digit.
The TEI (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) is a
AUTO
unique identifier for each device attached to
the ISDN line. When the system shares an
ISDN connection with other devices, the TEI
should be automatic to assure no conflict with
other attached devices.
When the ISDN connection is not shared, the
Fixed identifier option should be employed.
Permits a user access to ISDN
Disable
Supplementary Call Deflection or Call Reroute Service.
(Except USA version)
Select one digit remove mode in ISDN Called
OFF
Digits (for Italy).
When assigned, the system will analyze the
Advice of Charge information in the Facility
Message according to the ETSI specifications
with appropriate regional protocol support.
The system will encode voice using the A-law
or u-law PCM format and should be set to
match the ISDN Back bone type.
For outgoing calls, the user’s station number
may be included in the ISDN call SETUP
message Sub-address field.
81
No Service
u-Law
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.5.2-3 CO/IP ATTRIBUTES III (PGM 143)
BTN
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 IN PREFIX INS
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
01-02 OUT PREFIX INS
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
01-02 INT ACCESS CODE
….
01-02 AREA CODE
……
01-02 PREFIX CODE
….
01-02 CLI TRANSIT
(1:ORI/0:CFW):CFW
01-02 PRESERVE NAME
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
01-02 REDIRECT INFO
NO SERVICE (0)
DESCRIPTION
DEFAULT
Regional ISDN providers may use the Local
Area Prefix code for special services. In cases
where the code is not provided in the
incoming call SETUP message, the system
can insert the Local Prefix and Area code in
SMDR, LNR, displays, etc.
Regional ISDN providers may use the Local
Area Prefix code for special services. The
system can insert the Local Prefix in the
outgoing call SETUP message.
When an incoming call includes the
international Country code in the ISDN call
SETUP message, the Country code will be
included in the station display.
To include the Country code, Incoming Prefix
insertion (button 12 above) and CLI Display
for the station (PGM 114-button 1) must be
On.
Regional ISDN providers may use the Local
Prefix and Area codes for special services.
The system will insert this Local Area Code in
the call SETUP messages defined under
button 13 above.
OFF
Regional ISDN providers may use the Local
Prefix and Area codes for special services.
The system will insert this Local Prefix Code
in the call SETUP messages defined under
button 13 above.
When the system must send CLI to the ISDN
for an off-net call, the CLI can be either the
original caller’s CLI or the CLI of the Off-net
forwarding/transferring station.
For DID lines, the CLI is normally displayed
only during ringing. If enabled here, the CLI
will be displayed for the entire call duration.
When the system needs to send Redirecting
number to the ISDN for an off-net call, the
Redirecting number can be either the original
caller’s CLI or the CLI of the Off-net
forwarding/transferring station.
If it is no service then system will not send this
information.
If it is OGR CLI (original CLI) then system will
send original CLI that is received from
incoming CO line.
If it is CFW CLI then system will send
redirecting CLI that is CLI for call off-net call
forwarded station.
-
82
ON
-
CFW
OFF
NO
SERVICE
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.5.2-3 CO/IP ATTRIBUTES III (PGM 143)
BTN
20
21
22
23
24
24-1
24-2
24-3
24-4
24-5
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 INC CLI CHOICE
(1:ORI/0:TRANSIT):TRS
01-02 CALLING NUM PLAN
(0-6):ISDN/TELEPHONY (1)
01-02 CALLED NUM PLAN
(0-6) : UNKNOWN (0)
01-02 SCREENING (0-3)
USER PROVIDED, NO S (0)
DESCRIPTION
DEFAULT
Incoming CLI Choice – When ISDN setup
message have two CLI (Transit Point CLI /
Original CLI), by using this option, CLI can be
chosen.
ISDN Calling Party Numbering Plan can be
programmable.
0: Unknown.
1: ISDN / Telephony.
2: Data / Numbering.
3: Telex.
4: National Standard.
5: Private.
6: Reserved.
ISDN Called Party Numbering Plan can be
programmable.
0: Unknown.
1: ISDN / Telephony.
2: Data / Numbering.
3: Telex.
4: National Standard.
5: Private.
6: Reserved.
Transit
ISDN Screening Indicator can be
programmable.
0: User Provided, No Service.
1: User Provided, Pass.
2: User Provided, Fail.
3: Network Provided.
ISDN/
Telephony
Unknown
0
ADDED CO LINE ATT3
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-6)
01-02 CLI TYPE (1-5)
STN CLI 1 (1)
01-02 ISDN PLUSE CODE
….
01-02 CP/ALERT INBAND
(1:ON/0:OFF):OFF
01-02 DISCONNECT INBAND
(1:ON/0:OFF):OFF
01-02 BURSTTN TO CALLER
(1:ON/0:OFF):OFF
Outgoing CLI can be chosen from CLI 1 to
CLI 5. This program is combined with PGM
114 – Station CLI 1 to Station CLI 5.
When incoming CLI start with “+” code, this
Plus code can be translated as this program.
Send progress indication with in-band
information in call proceeding and alerting
message.
Send progress indication with in-band
information in disconnect message.
Send to burst tone to caller if it’s set ON.
83
1 (Station CLI 1)
-
OFF
OFF
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.5.2-3 CO/IP ATTRIBUTES III (PGM 143)
BTN
24-6
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 DISCONN. (INBAND)
IGMORE (0)
DESCRIPTION
DEFAULT
When system receives DISCONNECT
message with Inband information from PSTN,
the following option can be applied:
-. Ignore Inband information: Line is
disconnected
-. Bypass Inband information: Progress
Information is transferred
-. Wait Release: System wait to send Release
message till the other party is disconnected
Ignore
Table 3.3.5.2-4 STATION/CO LINE COS TOLL RESTRICTIONS
CO COS 1
CO COS 2
CO COS 3
STA COS 1
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
STA COS 2
Exception Table
A governs the
dialing
Exception Table
A governs the
dialing
No Restriction
STA COS 3
Exception Table
B governs the
dialing
No Restriction
Exception Table
B governs the
dialing
STA COS 4
Exception Table
A & B governs
the dialing
Exception Table
A governs the
dialing
Exception Table
B governs the
dialing
STA COS 5
Local Call only
(LD Code, 1st
digit “0” or “1”)
and Table C
Local Call only
(LD Code, 1st
digit “0” or “1”)
and Table C
STA COS 6
Only Local Call
(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
STA COS 7
STA COS 8
CO COS 4
CO COS 5
No Restriction
Local Call only
(LD Code, 1st
digit “0” or “1”)
and Table C
Only Local Call
(LD Code /
Counter) and
Table C
Only Local Call
(LD Code /
Counter) and
Table C
Only Local Call
(LD Code /
Counter) and
Table C
Only Local Call
(LD Code /
Counter) and
Table C
Only Local Call
(LD Code /
Counter) and
Table C
Only Local Call
(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
Only Local Call
(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
Only Local Call
(LD Code /
Counter) and
Table C
No Restriction
In-house dialing
only
In-house dialing
only
In-house dialing
only
In-house dialing
only
In-house dialing
only
Exception Table
D governs the
dialing
Exception Table
D governs the
dialing
No Restriction
Only Local Call
(LD Code /
Counter) and
Table C
No Restriction
84
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.5.2-4 STATION/CO LINE COS TOLL RESTRICTIONS
CO COS 1
CO COS 2
CO COS 3
STA COS 9
Exception Table
E governs the
dialing
Exception Table
E governs the
dialing
No Restriction
STA COS 10
Exception Table
D & E governs
the dialing
Exception Table
D & E governs
the dialing
No Restriction
STA COS 11
Exception Table
A & B and D & E
governs the
dialing
Exception Table
A & B and D & E
governs the
dialing
No Restriction
CO COS 4
Only Local Call
(LD Code /
Counter) and
Table C
Only Local Call
(LD Code /
Counter) and
Table C
Only Local Call
(LD Code /
Counter) and
Table C
Table 3.3.5.2-5 CALL METERING FUNCTION
ENTRY
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
CALL METERING TYPE
- None
- 50 Hz
- 12 KHz
- 16 KHz
- Singular Polarity Reverse (SPR)
- Plural Polarity Reverse (PPR)
- No Polarity Reverse (NPR)
85
CO COS 5
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.5.3 CO/IP Ring Assignment – PGM 144
Each CO/IP line is assigned to signal a station or group for an incoming call (Ring). Separate ring
assignments are made for Day, Night, and Timed Ring modes. When assigned to ring to a VSF
announcement, the call can be dropped automatically after the assigned announcement by
entering ‘#’ after the VSF announcement number.
When CO Lines are programmed to Ring an external AA/VM or Feature Server Group as an
Automated Attendant, the Ring signal can be on an immediate or delayed basis allowing other
stations/groups to be assigned Ring and answer prior to signaling the AA. The delay is defined in
seconds from 00 to 30.
PROCEDURE:
CO RING ASSIGNMENT
ENTER COL RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 144.
01-02 PRESS KEY
DAY NIGHT TIMED-R
Use the dial-pad to enter a CO Line range. For a single CO
Line, enter the same number twice.
Press the desired Flex button:
Button 1: Day Ring
Button 2: Night Ring
Button 3: Timed Ring
Use the dial pad to select the destination type:
Dial 1: Station
Dial 2: Hunt Group
Dial 3: VSF
Dial 4: AA Ring Time
Dial 5: Net number
Use the dial pad to enter a value for the selected destination
type. For:
Dial 1: Enter a station range (enter the same station
number twice to assign a single station) and the ring
delay if any, in ring cycles (0~9).
Dial 2: Enter a hunt group number.
Dial 3: Enter the VSF announcement number and, if
desired ‘#’ to drop the call after the announcement.
Dial 4: For AA Ring Time, enter the desired delay from 00
to 30 seconds.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
86
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.5.4 DID Service Attributes – PGM 145
PSTN DID lines can be assigned the type of “Start” signaling and treatment of any received digits.
Digits can be used “as is” to route the call within the system, digits can be converted and used to
route the call, or digits can be converted to a Table index to determine the call routing based on
the assigned conversion method, see Table 3.3.9.7-1 (PGM 231).
PROCEDURE:
DID ATTRIBUTES
ENTER COL RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 145.
01-02 DID ATTRIBUTES
PRESS FLEX KEY(1–4)
Use the dial-pad to enter the DID Line range. For a single
DID Line, enter the same number twice.
Select the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.5.4-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired value for the selected
Attribute, refer to Table 3.3.5.4-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.5.4-1 DID LINE ATTRIBUTES (PGM 145)
BTN
1
2
3
4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 SIG. TYPE: 1-3
WINK (2)
01-02 DID CONV TYPE
(0 – 2) : 1
01-02 DID DGT RCV NO
3 (2 – 4)
01-02 DID DGT MASK
#***
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Assigns the type of DID start
signaling, Immediate, Wink or
Delayed.
The received DID digits can be
treated to determine call routing,
simple conversion (PGM 230), “use
as is” (no treatment), or modify
using look-up Table (PGM 231).
Number of digits expected from the
PSTN DID circuit.
1: Immediate
2: Wink
3: Delayed
Wink
0: Convert
1: Use as is
2: Look-up
Use as is
2~4
eMG80:3
eMG800:4
DID digit modification sequence: “#”
deletes the digit, “*” accepts the
digit as is, a digit (0~9) replaces the
digit. The modification is based on
the position of the digit (1~4) in the
received number.
(0~9, *, #)
#***
87
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.5.5 DISA Service – PGM 146
DISA Service can be enabled on CO lines based on the system operation mode (Day, Night, and
Timed). DISA calls may be routed to dial tone and await user dialing (simple routing) or through a
multi-layered Audio Text menu assigning a VSF Announcement/Customer Call Route (CCR)
Table Index. The system can be instructed to disconnect after the announcement or follow the
CCR Table routing with a user-recorded announcement requesting specific inputs from the user.
PROCEDURE:
DISA ATTRIBUTES
ENTER COL RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 146.
01-02 DISA ATTRIBUTE
F1:DAY F2:NIGHT F3:TIME
Use the dial-pad to enter the CO Line range. For a single
CO Line, enter the same number twice.
001-002 DISA ATTRIBUTE
DAY SERVICE 00 (00 – 71)
Select the desired Flex button:
Button 1: Day
Button 2: Night
Button 3: Timed
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired VSF AA
Announcement, (00: disabled, 01~70 CCR Table index PGM
228, or 71: await user digits). Enter ‘#’ after the entry to
include a “drop after announcement instruction”.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
88
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.5.6 CO Line Preset Forward Attributes – PGM 147
The CO Line Preset Forward feature enables a CO line to initially ring at multiple stations and
forward to a pre-determined destination (PGM 204). The destination can be a station, Voice
Mailbox, ACD group, or Hunt group. Each CO line has a Preset Forward Timer. Each CO line
also can be assigned a VMID (Voice Mail Id) to allow sending specific VM digits when a CO line
forwards to an external VM group.
PROCEDURE:
CO PRESET FWD ATT
ENTER COL RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 147.
01-02 CO PRE-FWD
PRESS FLEX KEY(1–3)
Use the dial-pad to enter the CO Line range. For a single
CO Line, enter the same number twice.
Select the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.5.6-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired value for the selected
Attribute, refer to Table 3.3.5.6-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.5.6-1 CO LINE PRESET FORWARD ATTRIBUTES (PGM 147)
BTN
1
2
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 PRESET FWD TMR
(00-99 SEC) : 00
01-02 RING TBL INDEX
INDEX : NOT ASSIGNED
01-02 VMID NUMBER
….
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
An incoming call, which remains
unanswered for this timer, is routed
to the pre-determined Ring Table
Index, PGM 147-button 2.
If an incoming call remains
unanswered after the Preset Fwd
time the call is routed as defined in
the ICLID Ring Assignment table
bin entered here, refer to PGM 204.
Each CO/IP line can be assigned a
VMID (Voice Mail Id) that is sent to
the VM group to identify the desired
Mailbox for the CO/IP line.
00-99 Sec
00
001-250
…
0000~9999
…
89
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.5.7 CO Additional Attributes – PGM 148
CID Attributes are assigned for Analog CO Line Caller Id services.
PROCEDURE:
CO ADDITIONAL ATTR
ENTER COL RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 163.
01–02 CID SETTING
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01–13)
Use the dial–pad to enter a CO line range. For a single
CO Line, enter the same number twice.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.5.7-1.
Use the dial–pad to enter desired data for the Attribute.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.5.7-1 CO Additional Attributes (PGM 148)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01–02 CID MODE SELECT
(0–4) : FSK
01-02 RCID DETECT
(1: ALL/0: LOCAL) : ALL
01-02 RCID REQUEST
(1: AUTO/0: USER) : AUTO
01-02 RCID REQ TMR(10ms)
(010–150) : 030
01-02 RCID NOANS TMR(s)
(001–300) : 020
01-02 RCID DGT NUMBER
(04–10) : 07
01-02 RCID REQ COUNT
(1–3) : 1
01-02 RCID REQ DELAY
(10–30) : 10 (10ms)
01-02 CC BLOCKING
(0-2): DISABLED
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: Disabled
1: FSK
2 : DTAS FSK
3: DTMF
4: Russia CID
0: LOCAL
1: ALL
FSK
Russia CID Request Mode.
0: USER
1: AUTO
AUTO
Russia CID First Delay
Timer.
010–150
(10msec)
030
Russia CID NO–Answer
Timer.
001–300 (sec)
020
04–10
07
1–3
1
Russia CID Retry Delay
Timer.
10–30
(10msec)
10
It’s for only Brazil R2, it
blocks for collect call if
double answer or with
indication is selected.
0: Disabled
1: Double
Answer
2: With
Indicator
Disabled
CID signal type can be
assigned according to the
CID type PSTN provides.
Russia CID Detect Mode.
Russia CID Digit Number.
Russia CID Request Count.
90
ALL
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.5.7-1 CO Additional Attributes (PGM 148)
BTN
10
11
12
13
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 CC ANS TMR
(001-250): 010 (100ms)
01-02 CC IDLE TMR
(001-250): 020 (100ms)
01-02 LINE MONITORING
(1: ON / 0: OFF): ON
01-02 RING DETECT REG
(000-255) : 015
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
If it is set to Double Answer
for collect call blocking, this
timer is sending dummy
answer signal.
If it is set to Double Answer
for collect call blocking, this
timer is sending dummy idle
signal.
This determines that detect
line fault or not.
1-250 (100ms)
10
1-250 (100ms)
20
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
In the web admin, it is
located in the Maintenance
page [Appliances Control] >
[Analog CO Param Set].
000-255
015
3.3.5.8 NA ISDN Line Attributes – PGM 150
To comply with the North American ISDN standards, certain attributes must be defined for the
system. These include Directory (telephone) Number and Service Profile (SPID) for the device.
Note that this programming is required only for “Country Code” 1, USA installations.
PROCEDURE:
COL NA ISDN ATT
ENTER CO RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 150.
01-02 COL NA ISDN ATT
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-8)
Use the dial-pad to enter a CO Line range. For a single CO
Line, enter the same number twice.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.5.8-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute, refer
to Table 3.3.5.8-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.5.8-1 NA ISDN ATTRIBUTES (PGM 150)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 TYPE OF PX(1-4)
NI1 (1)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
The type of PSTN determines several
specifics of the protocol and is required
for proper operation.
1: NI 1
2: NI 2
3: 5 ESS
4: NORTEL
NI 1
91
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.5.8-1 NA ISDN ATTRIBUTES (PGM 150)
BTN
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 SPID NUMBER
……………………..…….
01-02 DN NUMBER
………………………….
01-02 EKTS MODE
(1:EKTS/0:NONE) : NONE
01-02 TYPE FOR 1/2/3
UNKNOWN (0)
01-02 TYPE FOR 4/5/6
UNKNOWN (0)
01-02 TYPE FOR 7/8/9
UNKNOWN (0)
01-02 TYPE FOR 10/11
UNKNOWN (0)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
The Service Profile Identifier (SPID) is
a number assigned to a fully initializing
ISDN terminal and enables the Stored
Program Control switching System
(SPCS) to identify the ISDN terminal at
layer 3 of the D-channel signaling
protocol.
The SPID is a free-formatted numeric
string composed of 9 to 23 numeric {09} and International Alphabet (IA5)
characters. The SPID uniquely
identifies a particular set of
subscription parameters assigned to a
TSP.
Initializing terminals are required to
store a 7-digit DN in order to perform
the compatibility checking procedures
that are part of call termination.
The EKTS (Electronic Key Telephone
Service) terminal permits a user to
operate those features that are specific
to EKTS, as well as voice features that
may function distinctly in the EKTS
environment. EKTS allows a DN to be
shared by more than one terminal, on
the same or on different interfaces.
ISDN CALLED NO is made with the
International format, National format,
Network format, Subscriber format, or
Abbreviated format when user dials
1~3 digits.
9~23 digits
DEFAULT
23 digits
-
0: None
1: EKTS
NONE
0: Unknown
1: International
2: National
3: Network
4: Subscriber
5: Abbreviated
Unknown
ISDN CALLED NO is made with the
International format, National format,
Network format, Subscriber format, or
Abbreviated format when user dials
4~6 digits.
0: Unknown
1: International
2: National
3: Network
4: Subscriber
5: Abbreviated
Unknown
ISDN CALLED NO is constructed with
the International format, National
format, Network format, Subscriber
format, or Abbreviated format when
user the dials 7~9 digits.
0: Unknown
1: International
2: National
3: Network
4: Subscriber
5: Abbreviated
Unknown
ISDN CALLED NO is constructed with
the International format, National
format, Network format, Subscriber
format, or Abbreviated format when
user the dials more than 10 digits.
0: Unknown
1: International
2: National
3: Network
4: Subscriber
5: Abbreviated
Unknown
92
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.5.9 ISDN CO Line Attributes – PGM 151
ISDN standards require that the ISDN terminating device, in this case the iPECS eMG, include
various “adjustable” timers and counters as described below.
PROCEDURE:
COL ISDN ATT
ENTER CO RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 151.
01-02 COL ISDN ATT
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-16)
Use the dial-pad to enter a CO Line range (Ex. 01-02). For a
single CO Line, enter the same number twice.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.5.9-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute, refer
to Table 3.3.5.9-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.5.9-1 ISDN CO LINE ATTRIBUTES (PGM 151)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 T200 (1- 5)
(1-5) : 1 (sec)
01-02 T201 (1- 5)
(1-5) : 1 (sec)
01-02 T202(1-5)
(1-5) : 2 (sec)
01-02 T203 (05 – 15)
(05-15) : 10 (sec)
01-02 T204 (05 – 15)
(05-15) : 10 (sec)
01-02 T302 (10 – 30)
(10-30) : 15 (sec)
01-02 T303 (01 – 10)
(01-10) : 04 (sec)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
The terminal must support one
T200 timer for each data link
supported.
The minimum time between TEI ID
check messages.
1~5 (seconds)
1
1~5 (seconds)
1
When the terminal transmits a TEI
1~5 (seconds)
Identify Request message, it must
provide one T202 timer for each
logical link supported.
If the terminal initiates the link
5~15
monitoring function, it must provide
(seconds)
one T203 timer for each logical link
supported.
T203 defines the maximum time
between message exchanges.
The T204 timer defines the
5~15
minimum time between
(seconds)
transmissions of XID messages.
In the Overlap dial mode, when the
10~30
system receives incomplete dialing
(seconds)
information from the ISDN, the
system will wait the T302 timer
duration for the additional digits. At
time-out of this timer, the call will be
disconnected.
T303 establishes the time Interval
1~10
for a response after sending a call
(seconds)
setup message.
2
93
10
10
15
4
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.5.9-1 ISDN CO LINE ATTRIBUTES (PGM 151)
BTN
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 T305 (10 – 60)
(10-60) : 30 (sec)
01-02 T308 (01 – 10)
(01-10) : 04 (sec)
01-02 T309 (001 – 100)
(001-100) : 090 (sec)
01-02 T310 (10 – 60)
(10-60) : 40 (sec)
01-02 N200 (1 – 5)
(1-5) : 3
01-02 N201 (250 – 300 )
(250~300) : 260 (byte)
01-02 N202 (1 – 5)
(1-5) :3
01-02 N204 ( 1 – 5)
(1-5) : 1
01-02 K_VALUE
(1-5) : 1
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
T305 establishes the Interval for a
Released signal after receiving a
Disconnect message.
T308 establishes the Interval for a
Released ACK signal after sending
a release message.
Optional state timer.
10~60
(seconds)
30
1~10
(seconds)
4
1~100
(seconds)
90
Timer used in accepting Received
signal.
10~60
(seconds)
40
The terminal shall provide one
N200 counter for each logical link
supported. The default value of this
counter shall be 3.
The N201 counter sets the
maximum number of Octets in the
ISDN information field.
If the terminal transmits a TEI
Identify Request message (to
request assignment of a TEI), the
terminal shall provide one N202
counter for each logical link that it
supports.
1~5
3
250~300
(bytes)
260
1~5
3
1~5
1
1~5
1
The N204 counter establishes the
maximum number of XID retransmissions from the terminal.
The terminal shall provide one K
counter for each logical link
supported.
94
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.5.10 T1 Line Timers – PGM 152
North American T1 standards require that the T1 terminating device, in this case the iPECS eMG,
include various “adjustable” timers and counters as described below.
PROCEDURE:
COL T1 ATT
ENTER CO RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 152.
01-02 COL T1 ATT
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-13)
Use the dial-pad to enter a CO Line range (Ex. 01-02). For a
single CO Line, enter the same number twice.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.5.10-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute, refer
to Table 3.3.5.10-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.5.10-1 T1 LINE TIMERS (PGM 152)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 PAUSE
(1-9) : 2 (sec)
01-02 RLS GRD
(01-60) : 20 (100ms)
01-02 DT DELAY
(02-50) : 10 (100ms)
01-02 INTER DGT
(15-30) : 15 (20ms)
01-02 WINK
(07-15) : 10 (20ms)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
A timed pause may be included in a 1~9 (seconds)
Speed Dial number, in which case,
the pause time is defined by this
entry.
Not currently implemented.
The release guard timer defines the
01~60
length of time the system will
(100 ms)
maintain a Line as busy after the
call has been terminated to assure
the PSTN has sufficient time to
‘clear down’ the circuit. Not
currently implemented.
The DT (Dial tone) Delay timer
02~50
defines the duration that dial tone
(100 ms)
must be received for DT
recognition.
Not currently implemented.
The Inter Digit timer defines the
15~30
duration between digit
(20 ms)
transmissions.
Not currently implemented.
For TIE or DID Lines the Wink timer
7~15
defines the length of time the ‘wink’
(20 ms)
(T1 TIE line circuit reversal) will last.
95
DEFAULT
2
20
10
15
10
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.5.10-1 T1 LINE TIMERS (PGM 152)
BTN
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 OP RATE ( 0- 3)
60-40 (10pps) (0)
01-02 SEZ DTC
(000-127) : 003 (20ms)
01-02 RELEASE
(000-127) : 007 (20ms)
01-02 IASG TY
(1:DTMF/0:PULSE) : DTMF
01-02 RING DTC
(2-9) : 2 (100ms)
01-02 RING STOP
(10-60) : 60 (100ms)
01-02 COLLECT DGT
(1-6) : 3
01-02 STORE TIME
(01~15) : 15 (1sec)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: 60-40
(10pps)
1: 66-33
(10pps)
2: 60-40
(20pps)
3: 66-33
(20pps)
0~127
(20 ms)
60-40
(10pps)
For Ground Start Lines, defines the
minimum length of time ground will
not be applied to the TIP side from
the PSTN.
0~127
(20 ms)
7
Incoming Address Signaling Type
defines the type of signaling (DTMF
or Pulse) expected.
The Ring DTC (detect) timer
defines the minimum acceptable
length of the Ring-on time during a
ring cycle.
The Ring Stop timer defines the
maximum Ring-off time during a
ring cycle.
Collect DGT (digits) defines the
number of digits expected on a DID
line.
For DID lines, this timer defines the
maximum delay between incoming
DID digits.
0~1
DTMF
2~9
(100 ms)
2
10~60
(100 ms)
60
1~6
3
1~15
(second)
15
For Pulse signaling, defines the
duration and make/break ratio of
each pulse.
This timer defines the length of a
valid ‘line seizure’ signal.
96
3
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.5.11 DCOB CO Attribute – PGM 153
The DCOB Attributes defines various characteristics of the E1/PRI module when employing R2
signaling.
PROCEDURE:
DCOB COLINE ATT
ENTER CO RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 153.
01-02 DCOB CO ATT
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-6)
Use the dial-pad to enter a CO Line range (Ex. 01-02). For a
single CO Line, enter the same number twice.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.5.11-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute, refer
to Table 3.3.5.11-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.5.11-1 DCOB CO ATTRIBUTE (PGM 153)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-02 LINE STATUS
(1-9) : 6
01-02 DNIS SERVICE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
01-02 NO OF CLI DGTS
(01-15) : 10
01-02 DCOB TYPE(0-2)
DID (2)
01-02 CALL CATEGORY
(1-9) : 1
01-02 DID DGT NUM
(00-32) : 00
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Send Line status information to PX
when a call routed to subscriber
before the called party is ringing.
In R2, determine whether system
will send caller information to PX or
not.
In R2, board request CLI Digit to
PX.
1~9
6
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
01~15
10
0~2
(0: DID/DOD
1:DOD
2:DID)
1~9
2
1
00~32
0
According to this type, the line can
be restricted to seize CO line for
outgoing call.
In R2 signaling, the category signal
used by the iPECS is defined here.
Maximum number of DID digits if
line is E1/R2
(if it is N/A then it will follow PGM
145 3rd.)
97
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6 SYSTEM DATA –PGM 160 to 182
3.3.6.1 System Attributes I & II – PGM 160 to 161
There are two (2) System Attributes programs to define settings that affect system-wide features
and functions. Generally, the entry will turn the feature ON (enable) or OFF (disable).
Refer to Table 3.3.6.1-1 and Table 3.3.6.1-2 for a description of the Attributes, LCD displays and
the data entries required.
PROCEDURE:
SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES 1
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-24)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial:
160 for System Attributes I
161 for System Attributes II.
Press the Flex button for the desired Attribute, refer to Table
3.3.6.1-1 & Table 3.3.6.1-2.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute, refer
to Table 3.3.6.1-1 to Table 3.3.6.1-2.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.6.1-1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES I (PGM 160)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
ATD CALL QUE RB TONE
(1:RBT/0:MOH): MOH
CAMP-ON RBT/MOH
(1:RBT/0:MOH) : MOH
CO DIAL TONE DETECT
(1 : ON/ 0 : OFF) : OFF
CO LINE CHOICE
(0:RR/1:LAST/2:FIRST): 1
DISA RETRY COUNT
(1 –9): 3
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
When calling a busy attendant, the
system will provide either ring-back
tone or MOH. If MOH is selected,
the source must be defined in PGM
171.
When Camp-On is used, the calling
station will receive either ring-back
tone or MOH. If MOH is selected,
the source must be defined in PGM
171.
The system can use dial-tone
detection or a timed pause for
Speed Dial numbers that contain a
Pause.
0: MOH
1: RB tone
MOH
0: MOH
1: RB tone
MOH
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
CO Lines are selected by the
system from groups using either the
LAST used, ROUND robin method
or FIRST line in the group.
A DISA user is allowed to retry
erroneous authentication code
entries. This entry sets the number
of retries before the system
disconnects.
0: ROUND
1: LAST
2: FIRST
LAST
1~9
3
98
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.1-1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES I (PGM 160)
BTN
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
EXTERNAL NIGHT RING
(1 : ON/ 0 : OFF) : OFF
HOLD PREFERENCE
(1: SYS/ 0: EXC) : SYS
PRINT LCR CONV DIGIT
(1 : LCR/ 0 : USER) : LCR
ATD CALL QUE AVAILABLE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
USE PGM_0 IN ALL ATTD
(1 : ON/ 0 : OFF) : OFF
OFFNET PROMPT USAGE
(1 : ON/ 0 : OFF) : OFF
CO-TO-CO UC TMR EXTEND
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
ACD MANAGER PRINT
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
CALL LOG LIST NUM
(15-50) : 15
REPEAT DTMF TONE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
CO/IP calls, which are assigned
UNA, can activate the Loud Bell
Contact. An incoming call, received
while in Night, will activate the
contact.
A single depression of the [HOLD]
button places the call on the
preferred hold, System or
Exclusive.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: Excl
1: System
System
0: User
1: LCR
LCR
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
15~50
15
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
SMDR will output the number dialed
by either the system’s LCR or the
user.
The system can be configured to
queue incoming calls to a busy
Attendant.
This field allows Main attendants
access to all Attendant functions
including System Attendant features
and programming.
(Except PGM 06 – Record system
announcement)
When a call is routed to a
destination external to the iPECS,
the Off Net routing prompt can be
played. Not available in US version.
When an Unsupervised Conference
is established with DISA, Off-Net
Fwd, etc., the Unsupervised
Conference timer (PGM 182-button
5 determines the allowed duration
of the call. If enabled here, the user
may dial ‘#’ to extend the allowed
duration.
When the optional ACD Message
events are desired, the system
must be enabled to send ACD
event messages.
The Call Log that saves the
Outgoing call, Received call, or Lost
call information can be displayed by
pressing Call Log Display Button.
The maximum size of the Call Log
per station is defined here.
When enabled, the system will
provide DTMF repeat tone to the
caller’s station. It’s nothing to do
with PSTN.
99
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.1-1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES I (PGM 160)
BTN
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
AUTH RETRY COUNT
(1-9) : 3
CONFROOM CO TEL NUMBER
CO TEL:..
MPB DIFFSERV
TAG(00-63): 04
UPGRADE MODE
(1:FTP/0:TFTP): FTP
TRANSFER TONE
(1:RBT/0:MOH): RBT
CONF WARN TONE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
TLS for WEB
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DUMMY DIAL TONE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
SYSTEM 2 ADDED ATTR
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-23)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
If a CO’s have “CO/IP group
Authorization” set to ON in
th
PGM141, 8 or the Stations have
“Station Account” set to ON in
th
PGM112, 19 then a valid
authorization code must be entered
to make an external CO call.
When user fails to enter a valid
Authorization code in the number of
attempts assigned in this field, the
station is disconnected or the
Station COS is changed to COS 7.
If the COS 7 WHEN AUTH FAIL,
th
PGM 161, 17 is on then the station
COS is changed to COS 7
otherwise the station is
disconnected. When the station
COS is changed COS 7, the user
must employ COS Restore in
Station User PGM 2 to return the
station to the normal COS.
ISDN DID number an external party
must dial to enter a Conference
room. UCS Client must preestablish the Conf Room.
MPB Diff-Serv pre-tag value.
1~9
3
8 digits
00-63
04
Upgrade transfer mode from MPB
to IP devices.
1: FTP
0: TFTP
FTP
When a CO call is transferred to a
busy extension, Ring Back Tone or
Music On Hold will be played to the
CO Line.
As new members join a conference
room, the system provides warning
tone to conference members.
Enables Transport Layer Security
TLS for Web access.
0: MOH
1: RBT
RBT
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
When a CO/IP line does not provide
dial tone, the system can provide
dummy dial tone to the user.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Select button 24 to access added
attributes 1~23.
100
FLEX 1 ~
FLEX 23
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.1-1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES I (PGM 160)
BTN
24-1
24-2
24-3
24-4
24-5
24-6
24-7
24-8
24-9
24-10
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
SIP STA MODE
(1:PTP/0:RTD): RTD
SYS AUTH END CODE(#)
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
STN VM FEATURE USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
REMOTE VM ACCESS
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
TRANSFER TONE USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
LCR DIAL TONE DETECT
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
ICM CALL LOG
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
ATD PWORD USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
PICKUP STA NAME USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DISPLAY LCR MODE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
SIP phones may set-up a point-topoint RTP connection (PTP) or to
assure a controlled connection,
RTP can be routed via a VoIP
channel (RTD).
If this value is set to ON, the end
dialing digit (#) must be entered
when system Auth code is entered.
If this value is set to ON, Station VM
feature (PGM 127) can be used.
0: RTD
1: PTP
ROUTED
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
If this value is OFF, the user cannot
access their VSF mailbox via DID,
DISA CO call and so on (i.e.
through CO line channel).
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
If this value is ON, Warning tone is
served to the [transfer to] station.
This is only applied to screened
transfer case.
If this value is set to ON, system
first checks if the CO provides dial
tone in case if analog CO is seized
for LCR dialing.
If there’s no dial tone, the call is
rerouted to Alternate DMT Index.
If LCR type is set to M13, LCR dial
tone detect option is not applied.
If this value is set to ON, system
save and provide ICM call log for IP
and LDP phone.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
If this value is set to ON, system
requests password below cases.
When a user enters attendant
program([PGM] + 0) in attendant
keyset,
When a user enters speed program
in attendant keyset,
When a user assigns attendant
program code([PGM] + 0) to flexible
button in attendant keyset,
Name of picked up station is display
when pickup internal call.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Display “LCR MODE” when LCR is
activated.
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
101
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.1-1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES I (PGM 160)
BTN
24-11
24-12
24-13
24-14
24-15
24-16
24-17
24-18
24-19
24-20
24-21
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
EASY 5 WAKE UP USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
WEB LOGIN ID USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
VM MEX NOTIFY OVER LCO
(1:EN/0:DIS) : DISABLE
MODEM ASC CO LINE
(00-74) : 00
MEET ME SOFT DISPLAY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
DEV INFO REQ INTERVAL
(015-255) : 015
NUM OF CLI WAIT LIST
(000-255) : 000
EMER MAIL STA
...
MSVC XML PORT
(00001-65535) : 07878
MEXT CO PASSWD
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DIAL BY NAME LIST
(0:ALL/1:GRP) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
If this value is set to ON, and PGM
161 – 5-Wake Up Usage is also set
to ON, each station user can enter
his wake up time, without entering
wake up type, wake up index.
If this value is set to ON, Login ID
should be entered to login the web
admin.
If this value is set to ON, LCO can
be used for the VM notification call
to MEX.
Call is delivered to built-in modem if
calls come in from assigned CO
line.
If this value is set to OFF, {MEET
ME} soft button is not displayed in
being paged.
System checks each device by
polling message periodically using
this timer.
The number of CLI wait list can be
the available number.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: DISABLE
1: ENABLE
DISABLE
00-74
0
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
015-255
015
000-255
000
When an Emergency Mailbox
Station is assigned, an emergency
call placed by a station is recorded
automatically to the assigned
mailbox.
The XML port used to support Web
callback, call-through and iPECS
00001~65535
ClickCall application for MSVC
(Mobile Service) must be defined.
When a mobile extension places an
external call using an iPECS CO/IP
OFF
Line, the user may be required to
ON
enter a valid Authorization code to
place the call.
7878
The Dial by Name feature can allow
stations in any ICM tenancy groups
to call a station any in ICM Tenancy
group. When desired, Dial by Name
can be limited to function within
allowed Tenancy calling groups,
PGM 125.
ALL
102
All
Accessible
ICM Group
only
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.1-1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES I (PGM 160)
BTN
24-22
24-23
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DIAL BY SYSNAME LIST
(0:ALL/1:ZONE) : OFF
NO CLI CALL LOG
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
If this value is set to "Accessible
System Speed Zone Only", the
system speed dial number of
Accessible system speed zone
(System Speed Zone(232)) is
displayed in {Dial by Name}.
Leave system Call log even though
there is no CLI information if it is
ON. Otherwise Call log is not
leaved.
RANGE
DEFAULT
All,
Accessible
System
Speed Zone
Only
ALL
OFF
ON
OFF
Table 3.3.6.1-2 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES II (PGM 161)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
OFF-HOOK RING TYPE
(1:MUTE/0:BURST) : MUTE
PAGE WARN TONE
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : ON
AUTOMATIC PRIVACY
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : ON
PRIVACY WARN TONE
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : ON
ACD PRINT ENABLE
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF
ACD PRINT TIMER(1sec)
(001 –255) : 001
CLEAR ACD DATABASE
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF
OVERRIDE 1ST CO GRP
(1: ON/0: OFF) : ON
BASE CODEC TYPE
(0-3): G.711(0)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Off-hook ring can be a single tone
burst or muted normal ring.
0:BURST
1:MUTE
MUTE
A warning tone can be sent prior to
a page announcement.
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
Automatic Privacy can be disabled,
allowing stations to join an active
CO/IP call. A warning tone can be
provided, see button 4 below.
If desired, warning tone can be
provided when privacy is overridden.
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
001~255
(10 sec)
010
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
0: G.711
1: G.723.1
2:G.729
3:G.722
G.711
ACD statistics can be periodically
sent to the assigned serial port. To
provide periodic reports, this entry
must be ON.
This entry defines the time, in 10second increments, between the
periodic ACD reports.
When a periodic report is sent, the
ACD database can be cleared
automatically, if “ON”.
When a user dials ‘9’, the system
can search all CO/IP Groups for the
first available CO/IP line.
The default codec can be defined as
G.711 or G.723.1 for decreased
bandwidth needs.
The selected codec will be used on
all internal communications as well
as for remote iPECS devices.
103
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.1-2 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES II (PGM 161)
BTN
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
G711 PACKETIZATION(1ms)
(10/20/30) : 20
G723 PACKETIZATION(1ms)
(30/60) : 030
NETWORK TIME/DATE
(0-2) : DISABLE
INCOMING TOLL CHK
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
WEB SERVER PORT
(00001-65535) : 00080
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
The G.711 voice frame packetization
time determines the interval at which
voice samples are packetized and
sent when the G.711 codec is used.
The G.723.1 voice frame
packetization time determines the
interval at which voice samples are
packetized and sent when the
G.723.1 codec is used.
The system can use ISDN Network
time or NTP to synchronize time with
the ISDN or data network. To
disable time sync, use OFF. ISDN
sync is not available in USA version.
The system can invoke COS dialing
restrictions when a user dials while
connected to incoming call.
This field determines the TCP port
employed to access the system
WEB server.
10/20/30
20
30/60
030
0~2
DISABLE
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
00001~
65535
00080
System Authorization codes are
entered by the user as “*” and the
code (ON) or “*”+ the Auth code
index and the code (OFF).
If user fails to enter a valid
Authorization code in the number of
attempts assigned in FAC RETRY
COUNT, PGM 160-button 16, the
station is disconnected or the
Station COS is changed to COS 7.
In the latter case, the user must
employ COS Restore in Station User
PGM 2 to return the station to the
normal COS.
System Integration Messages are
sent out the defined serial or TCP
channel.
When call recording is active, a tone
can be sent to all connected parties
to indicate the conversation is being
recorded.
Unused.
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
UNUSED
OLD AUTH CODE USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
COS 7 WHEN AUTH FAIL
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
UNIFIED MESSAGE FORMAT
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
RECORD WARNING TONE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
UNUSED
104
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.1-2 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES II (PGM 161)
BTN
21
22
23
24
24-1
24-2
24-3
24-4
24-5
24-6
24-7
24-8
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
UNUSED
SMS CENTER NUMBER
.......................
SMS PROTOCOL
(0-8) : NONE (0)
SYSTEM 2 ADDED ATTR
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-23)
G722 PACKETIZATION(1ms)
(10/20/ 30) : 20
UNUSED
SMS CENTER CLI
.......................
TRANSIT-OUT SECURITY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
EMR CALL ATD NOTIFY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
UNUSED
FIRST DIGIT * IN SPD
DISPLAY SECURITY (0)
STRONG PASSWORD
(1:ON/0:OFF) :OFF
DESCRIPTION
Unused.
When the PSTN will be used to send
SMS, the phone number of the Short
Message Service Center must be
entered.
The Short Message Service Protocol
must be selected to support SMS:
0: No PSTN SMS support,
1: ETSI-P1
2: ETSI-P2
3: KT-LivingNet
4: SIP-Text
5: SIP-XML
6: KT-IP-PBX
7: SKN-IP-PBX
8: KT XML
Select button 24 to access added
attributes 1~23.
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
23 digits
0~8
FLEX 1 ~
FLEX 23
The G.722 voice frame packetization 10/20/30msec
time determines the interval at which
voice samples are packetized and
sent when the G.722 codec is used.
This filed is used only for KOREA.
When the CO/IP will be used to
receive SMS, the Caller Id expected
from the Short MSG Service Center
must be defined.
Check IP address for transit-out in
the master system, if it is not valid IP
address then it will be denied.
Provide notification to attendant
when user dials emergency number.
NONE
20
23 digits
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
Unused.
0: LOCAL
1: MCIB_V
MCIB_V
If it is ‘0’ then the first ‘*’ in speed will
be used for display security
otherwise DTMF ‘*’ will be send.
ON: Password in PGM162 must be
longer than 8 and made by
Numbers, Characters.
0: DISPLAY
SECURITY
1: DIGIT *
0: OFF
1: ON
DISPLAY
SECURITY
105
ON
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.1-2 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES II (PGM 161)
BTN
24-9
24-10
24-11
24-12
24-13
24-14
24-15
24-16
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
VSF SMTP PORT
(00001~65535) : 00025
ICM BUSY SVC
(1:INTR/0:OHVO): OHVO
AUTO SAVE NEW MEG
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
IGMP QUERY USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
IGMP INTV_TMR(1sec)
(0000~3600) : 0180
IGMP QUERY ALL HOSTS
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
IGMP QUERY GENERIC
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
SMTP port of VMIU/VMIB
If ICM busy, choice OHVO or
Intrusion.
RANGE
DEFAULT
00001~65535
00025
0: OHVO
1: INTR
OHVO
If it’s ON, Move current (new)
0: OFF
message to saved message
1: ON
category.
If it is OFF, leave it in new message
category.
Regarding PGM161 (Flex 24-12 to
0: OFF
15) are used when there are some
1: ON
problems in multicast packet
forwarding like as registering
devices or multicast MOH. With
some multicast snoop enabled
switch devices, they do not forward
multicast packets if there is no IGMP
query device in the network.
This entity enables the IGMP query
option and MPB sends IGMP query
message with periodic to avoid
multicast related problem.
This timer defines the interval time
(0~3600) sec
of each IGMP query messages. With
some special switches, this timer
value should be modified.
This entity defines which destination
0: OFF
address is used when IGMP query is
1: ON
sent to. If ON is selected, query
message is sent to ALL HOST group
by using address 224.0.0.1. And
OFF is selected, query is sent to
iPECS specific address by using
address 239.20.19.50. This should
be ON when there is a MOH
problem.
This entity specifies a group address
0: OFF
being queried. If ON is selected, all
1: ON
multicast group are queried. If OFF
is selected, iPECS registering
device group (239.20.19.50) is only
queried. This should be ON when
there is a MOH problem.
UNUSED
106
OFF
OFF
180
ON
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.1-2 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES II (PGM 161)
BTN
24-17
24-18
24-19
24-20
24-21
24-22
24-23
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
RESTRICT * AND #
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
RESTRICT ANS DGT DISP
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
IP BIND USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
ACD MAILSEND WEEKLY SET
N/A (0-7)
ACD MAILSEND DAILY SET
..(00-23)
ACD DEL AFTER MAILSEND
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF
NEW 5 WAKE UP USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
If it’s ON, if the first digit is * or #
then the call will be prohibited.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
If it’s OFF, SMDR print digits after
answer.
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
If It’s ON, VOIU/VOIB will apply IPBinding with information in PGM130
(Flex 18 – Flex 24-3) / PGM133
(Media port)
Sets day of week to send ACD
statistic data weekly. (0 for no
weekly data, 1-7 for Monday through
Sunday)
Sets time-of-day for ACD statistic
data to be sent on a daily basis. (00
for no daily records, 01-23 for hour
of the day)
Delete ACD statistic data after
sending e-mail.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0-7
0
00-23
..
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
New Wake-Up function usage
option.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
107
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.2 System Password – PGM 162
Access to the system database and maintenance functions can be protected by passwords up to
twelve (12) digits. Three passwords can be defined, Keyset Admin, Remote access, and CID.
The Maintenance password has full and unlimited access to the database and maintenance
functions of the system. The User and Admin password have access to database items defined in
Web Admin. Note there are no default passwords.
PROCEDURE:
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 162.
SYSTEM PASSWORD
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-3)
KEYSET ADMIN PASSWORD
Press the Flex button for the desired password:
@@@@@@@@@@@@
For the Keyset Admin password press Flex button 1.
For the Remote access password press Flex button 2.
For the CID password press Flex button 3.
REMOTE ACCESS PASSWORD
@@@@@@@@@@@@
Enter the desired password, up to 12 digits. To erase a
password press the [SPEED] button.
Enter the desired password, up to 12 digits. To erase a
password press the [SPEED] button.
CID PASSWORD
@@@@@@@@@@@@
Press the [Save] button to store the password entry.
Table 3.3.6.2-1 System Passwords
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
KEYSET ADMIN PASSWORD
@@@@@@@@@@@@
2
REMOTE ACCESS PASSWORD
@@@@@@@@@@@@
3
CID PASSWORD
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Admin password, configurable
database access in Keyset
Admin.
Remote access password, full
and unlimited access to database
and maintenance functions.
CID password.
12 digits
none
12 digits
none
12 digits
none
@@@@@@@@@@@@
108
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.3 Alarm Attributes – PGM 163
The system can monitor an external contact. This contact is most often employed as an Alarm
indicator or Doorbell. The Alarm attributes define the operation of the external contact. The Alarm
Signal sent to assigned stations can be repeating or a single burst, the former is often desired.
For the Doorbell, a single tone is sent each time the contact activates. Refer to Table 3.3.6.3-1 for
a description of the features, the data entries required and LCD displays for each attribute.
PROCEDURE:
SYSTEM ALARM ATT
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-8)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 163.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.6.3-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the attribute, refer
to Table 3.3.6.3-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.6.3-1 ALARM ATTRIBUTES (PGM 163)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
ALARM ENABLE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
ALARM CONTACT TYPE
(1:CLOSE/0:OPEN) : CLOSE
ALARM/DOORBELL MODE
(1:ALARM/0:BELL): ALARM
ALARM SIGNAL MODE
(1:RPT/0:ONCE) : RPT
EMER CALL NOTIFY
(1:ON/0:FF) : ON
DCOB FAULT NOTIFY
(1:ON/0:FF) : ON
SIP REG FAULT NOTIFY
(1:ON/0:FF) : ON
TEMP LICENSE NOTIFY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
This parameter enables the external
contact monitoring circuitry.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
This parameter establishes the
contact state that will activate the
Alarm, close or open.
The contact can be treated to
function as a doorbell instead of an
alarm.
0: Open
1: Close
CLOSE
0: Bell
1: Alarm
ALARM
0: Once
1: Repeat
RPT
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
This parameter enables/disables
the DCOB Fault notification.
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
This parameter enables/disables
the SIP Registration Fault
notification.
This entry enables user to get the
notification before expiring Temp
license.
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
The assigned stations will receive a
Repeating signal or single burst
(ONCE) of alarm tone.
This parameter enables/disables
the emergency call notification.
109
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.4 Attendant Assignment – PGM 164
eMG80 is consist of 1 System attendant and 3 Main attendant. eMG800 is consist of 1 System
attendant and 4 Main attendant. The System Attendant has higher priority in call handling and
system management functions with access to PGM 0. As a default, the System Attendant is
assigned Station 100 for eMG80 and Station 1000 for eMG800. Main Attendants are not
assigned by default.
PROCEDURE:
ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT
100
...
...
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 164.
ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT
100
.
..
.
..
2. Select the desired button:
Button 1: System Attendant
Button 2: Main Attendants
3. Use the dial-pad to enter desired station numbers for the
System and Main Attendants. Use the [SPEED] button to
erase an entry and the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button to
scroll through the Main Attendants.
4. Press the [Save] button to store the Attendant
assignment entry.
3.3.6.5 Multi-cast RTP/RTCP Ports – PGM 165
Multi-cast is employed by the system to send BGM, MOH, paging and Push-To-Talk packets.
Employing a single multi-cast packet reduces the overall LAN traffic. In some cases, specifically
when multiple systems are connected to the same default router it may be advantageous to
define different ports for each system.
PROCEDURE:
MULTICAST RTP/RTCP
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-2)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 165.
MULTICAST RTP
PRESS FLEX_KEY (01-24)
Press Flex button 1 for RTP ports or Flex button 2 for RTCP
ports.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.6.5-1. The
24 Flex buttons are used to assign ports for the first 24
RTP/RTCP functions. To assign port numbers for additional
RTP/RTCP functions, use the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN]
buttons.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the port, refer to
Table 3.3.6.5-1.
110
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.5-1 MULTI-CAST RTP/RTCP PORTS — (PGM 165)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
M-CAST RTP BGM INT
8100 (8101)
M-CAST RTP BGM EXT 1
8102 (8103)
M-CAST RTP BGM EXT 2
8104 (8105)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 1
8106 (8107)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 2
8108 (8109)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 3
8110 (8111)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 4
8112 (8113)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 5
8114 (8115)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 6
8116 (8117)
M-CAST RTP(RTCP) I-PAGE 7
8118 (8119)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 8
8120 (8121)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 9
8122 (8123)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 10
8124 (8125)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 11
8126 (8127)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 12
8128 (8129)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
RTP and RTCP ports for internal
BGM.
0000-9999
8100
(8101)
RTP and RTCP ports for external
BGM 1.
0000-9999
8102
(8103)
RTP and RTCP ports for external
BGM 2.
0000-9999
8104
(8105)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 1.
0000-9999
8106
(8107)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 2.
0000-9999
8108
(8109)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 3.
0000-9999
8110
(8111)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 4.
0000-9999
8112
(8113)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 5.
0000-9999
8114
(8115)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 6.
0000-9999
8116
(8117)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 7.
0000-9999
8118
(8119)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 8.
0000-9999
8120
(8121)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 9.
0000-9999
8122
(8123)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 10.
0000-9999
8124
(8125)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 11.
0000-9999
8126
(8127)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 12.
0000-9999
8128
(8129)
111
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.5-1 MULTI-CAST RTP/RTCP PORTS — (PGM 165)
BTN
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 13
8130 (8131)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 14
8132 (8133)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 15
8134 (8135)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 16
8136 (8137)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 17
8138 (8139)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 18
8140 (8141)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 19
8142 (8143)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 20
8144 (8145)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 21
8146 (8147)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 22
8148 (8149)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 23
8150 (8151)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 24
8152 (8153)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 25
8154 (8155)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 26
8156 (8157)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 27
8158 (8159)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 28
8160 (8161)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 13.
0000-9999
8130
(8131)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 14.
0000-9999
8132
(8133)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 15.
0000-9999
8134
(8135)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 16.
0000-9999
8136
(8137)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 17.
0000-9999
8138
(8139)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 18.
0000-9999
8140
(8141)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 19.
0000-9999
8142
(8143)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 20.
0000-9999
8144
(8145)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 21.
0000-9999
8146
(8147)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 22.
0000-9999
8148
(8149)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 23.
0000-9999
8150
(8151)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 24.
0000-9999
8152
(8153)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 25.
0000-9999
8154
(8155)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 26.
0000-9999
8156
(8157)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 27.
0000-9999
8158
(8159)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 28.
0000-9999
8160
(8161)
112
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.5-1 MULTI-CAST RTP/RTCP PORTS — (PGM 165)
BTN
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 29
8162 (8163)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 30
8164 (8165)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 31
8166 (8167)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 32
8168 (8169)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 33
8170 (8171)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 34
8172 (8173)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE 35
8174 (8175)
M-CAST RTP I-PAGE ALL
8176 (8177)
M-CAST RTP E-PAGE 1
8178 (8179)
MULTICAST RTP E-PAGE 2
8180 (8181)
M-CAST RTP E-PAGE ALL
8182 (8183)
M-CAST RTP PAGE ALL
8184 (8185)
M-CAST RTP PTT 1
8186 (8187)
M-CAST RTP PTT 2
8188 (8189)
M-CAST RTP PTT 3
8190 (8191)
M-CAST RTP PTT 4
8192 (8193)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 29.
0000-9999
8162
(8163)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 30.
0000-9999
8164
(8165)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 31.
0000-9999
8166
(8167)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 32.
0000-9999
8168
(8169)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 33.
0000-9999
8170
(8171)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 34.
0000-9999
8172
(8173)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
Page 35.
0000-9999
8174
(8175)
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal
All Call Page.
0000-9999
8176
(8177)
RTP and RTCP ports for External
Page 1.
0000-9999
8178
(8179)
RTP and RTCP ports for External
Page 2.
0000-9999
8180
(8181)
RTP and RTCP ports for External
All Call Page.
0000-9999
8182
(8183)
RTP and RTCP ports for All Call
Page.
0000-9999
8184
(8185)
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group
1.
0000-9999
8186
(8187)
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group
2.
0000-9999
8188
(8189)
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group
3.
0000-9999
8190
(8191)
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group
4.
0000-9999
8192
(8193)
113
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.5-1 MULTI-CAST RTP/RTCP PORTS — (PGM 165)
BTN
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
M-CAST RTP PTT 5
8194 (8195)
M-CAST RTP PTT 6
8196 (8197)
M-CAST RTP PTT 7
8198 (8199)
M-CAST RTP PTT 8
8200 (8201)
M-CAST RTP PTT 9
8202 (8203)
M-CAST RTP PTT ALL
8204 (8205)
M-CAST RTP BGM VSF 1
8206 (8207)
M-CAST RTP SLT MOH 1
8208 (8209)
M-CAST RTP SLT MOH 2
8210 (8211)
M-CAST RTP SLT MOH 3
8212 (8213)
M-CAST RTP SLT MOH 4
8214 (8215)
M-CAST RTP SLT MOH 5
8216 (8217)
M-CAST RTP VSF MOH 2
8218 (8219)
M-CAST RTP VSF MOH 3
8220 (8221)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group
5.
0000-9999
8194
(8195)
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group
6.
0000-9999
8196
(8197)
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group
7.
0000-9999
8198
(8199)
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group
8.
0000-9999
8200
(8201)
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group
9.
0000-9999
8202
(8203)
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group
ALL.
0000-9999
8204
(8205)
RTP and RTCP ports for VSF/VMIB
BGM use.
0000-9999
8206
(8207)
RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH
1 use.
0000-9999
8208
(8209)
RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH
2 use.
0000-9999
8210
(8211)
RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH
3 use.
0000-9999
8212
(8213)
RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH
4 use.
0000-9999
8214
(8215)
RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH
5 use.
0000-9999
8216
(8217)
RTP and RTCP ports for VSF/VMIB
MOH 2 use.
0000-9999
8218
(8219)
RTP and RTCP ports for VSF/VMIB
MOH 3 use.
0000-9999
8220
(8221)
114
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.6 DISA COS – PGM 166
A DISA user is subject to the dialing restrictions assigned in the DISA Class-of-Service (COS).
The restrictions applied are the same as with the corresponding Station COS levels 1~11 and
interact with the CO COS in the same manner. Assignments for DISA COS are made for the Day,
Timed and Night mode of system operation. The default for all three DISA COS modes is 1, no
restrictions.
PROCEDURE:
DISA COS (1 – 11)
DAY: 07 NIGHT: 07 TIMED:07
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 166.
Select the desired button;
Button 1: Day mode COS
Button 2: Night mode COS
Button 3: Timed mode COS
Use the dial-pad to enter desired DISA COS (1~11).
Press the [Save] button to store the DISA COS data entry.
115
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.7 DID/DISA Destination – PGM 167
When a DID line or DISA user dials an invalid/vacant or busy station number the caller will be
sent to the assigned destination that is selected according to the CO tenancy group of the
DID/DISA line.
The destination is separately defined for invalid, busy, no answer and DND conditions and can be
defined as the Attendant, busy tone, Station Group or VSF System Announcement.
Note that for calls on a DID line to a busy station, Call Wait can be assigned, refer to PGM 113,
Station Attributes III, button 9.
Also, for DID calls only, announcements (prompts) can be sent from the VSF to the caller for
various conditions, busy, error, DND, No Answer, reroute busy, reroute error, reroute no answer,
or Attendant Transfer.
PROCEDURE:
DID/DISA DESTINATION
ENTER ICM GROUP (00-15)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 167.
DID/DISA DESTINATION :0
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-9)
Press the [PGM] button and dial 167 and press Flexible
button (Ex.1).
BUSY DESTINATION
TONE (F1-F4)
Select the desired Flex button,
Button 1: Busy Destination (F1-F4)
Button 2: Error Destination (F1-F4)
Button 3: No Answer Destination (F1-F4)
Button 4: VSF Prompt Usage (F1-F5)
Button 5: Reroute Busy Destination (F1-F3)
Button 6: Reroute Error Destination (F1-F3)
Button 7: Reroute No answer Destination (F1-F3)
Button 8: DND destination (F1-F3)
Button 9: Reroute NET CO BUSY Destination (F1-F3)
Select ICM tenancy group (eMG80:0~15 / eMG800:0~32)
For Flex button 1~3 or 1~4, use the dial-pad to enter 1:
ON or 0: OFF for the following VSF prompts.
1: Tone
2: Attendant
3: Station Group number
4: VSF Announcement
For Flex button 4, select Flex button 1~5 for the desired
VSF prompt and use the dial-pad to enter 1: ON or 0:
OFF:
Button 1: Busy Prompt
Button 2: Error Prompt
Button 3: DND Prompt
Button 4: No Answer Prompt
Button 5: Attendant Transfer Prompt
Press the [Save] button to store the destination data entry.
116
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.8 External Control Contacts – PGM 168
The MPBs include programmable contacts, which can be used to control external devices. Refer
to Table 1.1-1 System Capacity Chart for number of available contacts. Each contact is assigned
to activate under one of several conditions. As a Loud Bell Contact (LBC), the contact will activate
when the assigned station or group receives an external call. Note for LBC, when the system is in
the Night or Timed Ring mode, the contact will activate for incoming UNA calls and will ignore any
station assignment. The contact may alternatively activate as a Door open contact, when External
Page Zone 1 is accessed.
PROCEDURE:
EXT CONTROL CONTACT
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-2 )
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 168.
EXT CONTROL CONTACT
NO 1 :
...
(1-3)
Select Flex button 1~2 for the desired External Control
contact.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data.
1: LBC + station number
2: Door open
3: External Page 1 access
Press the [Save] button to store the External Contact data
entry.
3.3.6.9 LCD Display Mode -PGM 169
The LCD display mode sets the time (12/24 hr.), date (day/month order), language and day-ofweek display. Refer to Table 3.3.6.9-1 and Table 3.3.6.9-2 for a description of the modes, the
data entries required and LCD displays for each attribute.
PROCEDURE:
LCD DISPLAY MODE
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-4)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 169.
Select the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.6.9-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired mode and language,
refer to Table 3.3.6.9-1 and Table 3.3.6.9-2.
Press the [Save] button to store the LCD Display mode data
entry.
117
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.9-1 LCD DISPLAY MODE (PGM 169)
BTN
1
2
3
4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
LCD DATE MODE
(1:MMDD/0:DDMM): MMDDYY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Sets the Date display as month/day
or day/month.
0: DD-MM-YY
1: MM-DD-YY
MMDDYY
0: 24 Hour
Mode
1: 12 Hour
Mode
00~18
12 Hour
Sets the Time display mode as 12
hour or 24-hour (military) time.
LCD TIME MODE
(1:12H/0:24H):12H
Sets the Language used in the LCD;
Refer to Table 3.3.6.9-2 below.
LCD LANGUAGE (00-18)
ENGLISH (00)
LCD WEEKDAY MODE (0-2)
PGM 169 BTN 1 (0)
Sets the Day-of-Week (DoW)
display mode:
0: no DoW, see PGM 169-BTN1...
1: display MM/DD WDY, (alpha
month display, overrides button 1.
2: display MM DD WDY, numeric
month display, overrides button 1.
0: use button 1 Use button
1: MM/DD WDY
1
2: MM DD WDY
Table 3.3.6.9-2 LCD LANGUAGE SELECTION
ENTRY
LANGUAGE
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
English
Italian
Finnish
Dutch
Swedish
Danish
Norwegian
Hebrew
German
French
Portuguese
Spanish
Korean
Estonian
Russian
Turkish
Polish
Greek
Arabic
118
00
(English)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.10 Button LED Flash Rate – PGM 170
The LED flash rate for various functions and states can be assigned any one of the system’s 15
signals. The various functions and states are shown in Table 3.3.6.10-1. The 15 flash signals
available in the system are shown in Table 3.3.6.10-2.
PROCEDURE:
LED FLASHING RATE
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-24)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 170.
LED FLASHING RATE
PRESS FLEX KEY (25-35)
There are 35 Flash rate entries represented by Flex buttons.
To access entries 25 to 35, use the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN]
buttons. Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table
3.3.6.10-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the flash rate, refer
to Table 3.3.6.10-1 and Table 3.3.6.10-2.
Press the [Save] button to store the Flash Rate data entry.
Table 3.3.6.10-1 BUTTON LED FLASH RATE (PGM 170)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
COL IN RING
FLASH 30 IPM
COL XFER RING
FLASH 120 IPM
COL QUE RING
FLASH 240 IPM FLUTTER
COL RCL RING
FLASH 480 IPM FLUTTER
COL I HOLD RING
FLASH 30 IPM WINK
COL SYS HOLD RING
FLASH 60 IPM
COL EXC HOLD RING
FLASH 120 IPM
COL OUT DISABLED
FLASH 240 IPM FLUTTER
COL IN OFFNET CFW
FLASH 240 IPM FLUTTER
COL DISA IND
FLASH 240 IPM
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
CO button Incoming ring flashing
rate.
00-14
FLASH 30
IPM (2)
CO button transfer ring flashing
rate.
00-14
FLASH
120 IPM(10)
CO button queue call back ring
flashing rate.
00-14
CO button recall ring flashing rate.
00-14
CO button I hold flashing rate.
00-14
FLASH
240 IPM
FLUTTER(6)
FLASH
480 IPM
FLUTTER(8)
FLASH 30
IPM WINK(12)
CO button system hold flashing
rate.
00-14
FLASH 60
IPM (3)
CO button exclusive hold flashing
rate.
00-14
FLASH
120 IPM(10)
CO button out going disabled
flashing rate.
00-14
CO button incoming off-net call
forward flashing rate.
00-14
CO button DISA indication flashing
rate.
00-14
FLASH
240 IPM
FLUTTER(6)
FLASH
240 IPM
FLUTTER(6)
FLASH
240 IPM(5)
119
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.10-1 BUTTON LED FLASH RATE (PGM 170)
BTN
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
COL SUPP CW
FLASH 240 IPM FLUTTER
COL SUPP HOLD
FLASH 480 IPM
DSS CO RING
FLASH 30 IPM
DSS ALL RING
FLASH 60 IPM
DSS ASC RING
FLASH 120 IPM
DSS IN DND
FLASH 60 IPM
DSS LOCK OUT
FLASH 480 IPM FLUTTER
DSS PRESEL MSG
FLASH 30 IPM
DSS ICM HOLD
FLASH 60 IPM
DSS OTHER
FLASH 120 IPM
UCD QUE RING 2
FLASH 60 IPM
UCD QUE RING 6
FLASH 120 IPM
UCD QUE RING 7-X
FLASH 240 IPM
UCD DND(OFF DUTY)
FLASH 120 IPM
UCD WARNING
FLASH 120 IPM
UCD HELP
FLASH 120 IPM
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
CO button supplementary call
waiting flashing rate.
00-14
CO button supplementary hold
flashing rate.
00-14
FLASH
240 IPM
FLUTTER(6)
FLASH
480 IPM(7)
DSS button CO ring flashing rate.
00-14
FLASH 30
IPM (2)
DSS button ICM ALL ring flashing
rate.
00-14
FLASH 60
IPM (3)
DSS button ICM ring associate
device flashing rate.
00-14
FLASH
120 IPM(10)
DSS button station in DND.
00-14
FLASH 60
IPM (3)
DSS button station in lockout.
00-14
DSS button station in pre-selected
message.
00-14
FLASH
480 IPM
FLUTTER(8)
FLASH 30
IPM (2)
DSS button station on ICM hold.
00-14
FLASH 60
IPM (3)
DSS button station in other state.
00-14
FLASH
120 IPM(10)
CIQ Threshold # 1.
00-14
FLASH 60
IPM (3)
CIQ Threshold # 2.
00-14
FLASH
120 IPM(10)
CIQ Threshold # 3.
00-14
FLASH
240 IPM(5)
UCD agent is off duty (UCD DND).
00-14
FLASH
120 IPM(10)
UCD warning tone.
00-14
FLASH
120 IPM(10)
UCD help request/response.
00-14
FLASH
120 IPM(10)
120
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.10-1 BUTTON LED FLASH RATE (PGM 170)
BTN
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
FEATURE RECORD
FLASH 240 IPM
FEATURE MSG WAIT
FLASH 30 IPM
DSS OUT OF SERVICE
FLASH OFF
ON DEMAND RING MODE
FLASH 60 IPM
NIGHT RING MODE
FLASH STEADY
TIMED RING MODE
FLASH 240 IPM
AUTO RING MODE
FLASH 480 IPM
PAGE HOLD BUTTON
FLASH 60 IPM
DSS OFF DUTY
FLASH 120 IPM
CALLBK
FLASH OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
FEATURE voice record button.
00-14
FLASH
240 IPM(5)
FEATURE message wait.
00-14
FLASH 30
IPM (2)
Station in out-of-service state.
00-14
FLASH
OFF (00)
DND LED of attendant for ring
mode indication (On-demand).
00-14
FLASH 60
IPM (3)
DND LED of attendant for ring
mode indication (Night).
00-14
FLASH
STEADY(01)
DND LED of attendant for ring
mode indication (TIMED).
00-14
FLASH
240 IPM(5)
DND LED of attendant for ring
mode indication (AUTO).
00-14
FLASH
480 IPM(7)
HOLD LED for paging.
00-14
FLASH 60
IPM (3)
DSS button station in Hunt DND.
00-14
FLASH 120
IPM (10)
Message wait (call back).
00-14
FLASH OFF
Table 3.3.6.10-2 FLASH RATE TABLE (PGM 170)
Flash Rate
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
DESCRIPTION
Flash OFF
Steady On
30 ipm flash (30% On)
60 ipm flash (30% On)
60 ipm double wink (30% On-Off-On-Off & 70% On)
240 ipm flash (30% On)
240 ipm flutter (30% On-Off-On-Off-On & 70% Off)
480 ipm flash (30% On)
480 ipm flutter (30% On-Off-On-Off-On & 70% Off)
15 ipm flash (30% On)
120 ipm flash (30% On)
120 ipm flutter (30% On-Off-On-Off-On & 70% Off)
30 ipm double flash (30% On-Off-On & 70% Off)
480 ipm double wink (30% On-Off-On-Off & 70% On)
480 ipm double flash (30% On-Off-On & 70% Off)
121
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.11 Music Sources – PGM 171
Music inputs are provided for use as the Background Music and/or Music-On-Hold source inputs.
MPBs provide for two (2) music inputs. The first input is the internal source and the second is
external. In addition, a VMIU or VMIB announcement may be recorded and played as MOH to a
holding caller. And SLIB port is used as MOH to a holding caller.
PROCEDURE:
MUSIC ASSIGN
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-6)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 171.
Select the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.6.11-1.
Use the dial-pad to select the desired Music Source, refer to
Table 3.3.6.11-1.
To save the Music Source, press the [Save] button.
Table 3.3.6.11-1 MUSIC SOURCES FOR MOH & BGM (PGM 171)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
BGM TYPE (00-10)
MUSIC 1 (01)
MOH TYPE (00-10)
MUSIC 1 (01)
INT MOH TYPE (00-12)
ROMANCE (00)
ASGN SLT MOH (F1-F5)
…. …. …. …. ….
VSF MOH2 (01-70)
VSF NO (..)
VSF MOH3 (01-70)
VSF NO (..)
DESCRIPTION
Assigns the source for
BGM.
Assigns the source for
MOH
Assigns the input for
source 1
Assign the SLIB port as a
SLT MOH.
A system announcement
could be used for VSF
MOH 2
A system announcement
could be used for VSF
MOH 3
122
RANGE
DEFAULT
00: No BGM
Music 1
01: INT Music
02: EXT Music
03: VSF MOH
04-08: SLT MOH1-5
09: VSF MOH2
10: VSF MOH3
00: Hold tone
Music 1
01: INT Music
02: EXT Music
03: VSF MOH
04-08: SLT MOH1-5
09: VSF MOH2
10: VSF MOH3
00: ROMANCE
ROMANCE
01: TURKISH MARCH
02: GREEN SLEEVE
03: FUR ELISE
04: CARMEN / 05: WALTZ
06: PAVANE
07: SICHILIANO
08: SONATA
09: SPRING
10: CAMPANELLA
11: BADINERIE
12: BLUE DANUBE
F1-F5:SLTMOH1-5
01-70
N/A
01-70
N/A
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.12 PABX Access Codes – PGM 172
When the system is used “behind” a PBX/CTX, the system needs to recognize the PBX/CTX
Trunk access codes to implement dialing restriction, tone detection sequences and Flash timing.
A maximum of four (4) Trunk Access Codes of one (1) or two (2) digits can be entered.
PROCEDURE:
PABX ACCESS CODE
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-4)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 172.
PABX ACCESS CODE 1
..
Select the Flex button for the desired Access Code (button
1~4).
Use the dial-pad to enter the PABX Trunk Access Code, two
(2) digits 0~9, Use “*” as a wild card (any digit) entry.
Press the [Save] button to store the access code data entry.
3.3.6.13 Ringing Line Preference Priority – PGM 173
When multiple calls are ringing at a station assigned Ringing Line Preference, the order of
preference can be assigned based on the type of call; CO/IP Transfer (XFR), CO/IP Recall (REC),
Incoming call (INC), or CO/IP Queue (QUE). ICM calls are always assigned the lowest priority.
PROCEDURE:
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 173.
XFR REC INC QUE
1
2
3
4
Select the Flex button for the desired Call Type; refer to
Table 3.3.6.13-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the priority 1~4.
Press the [Save] button to store the RLP Priority data entry.
Table 3.3.6.13-1 RLP PRIORITY (PGM 173)
BTN
1
2
3
4
DESCRIPTION
CO/IP Transferred call
CO/IP Recall
COIP Incoming call
Queued CO/IP recall
123
RANGE
DEFAULT
1~4
1~4
1~4
1~4
1
2
3
4
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.14 RS-232 Port Settings – PGM 174
The system has an RS–232 serial port located on the MPB; refer to the iPECS eMG Hardware
Description and Installation Manual. Certain characteristics of each port are programmable:
baud rate, RS–232 control, and page settings. Refer to Table 3.3.6.14-1 for a description of the
settings, the data entries required and LCD displays.
PROCEDURE:
RS232 PORT SETTING
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-3)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 174.
Press Flex button 1 for Serial port 1 or Flex button 2 for USB
COM1 port or Flex button 3 for USB COM2 port, then select
a Flex button for the desired attribute (e.g. Flex button 1),
refer to Table 3.3.6.14-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired Port data, refer to
Table 3.3.6.14-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the Port Data entry.
Table 3.3.6.14-1 RS–232 PORT SETTINGS (PGM 174)
BTN
1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
SERIAL1 PORT SETTING
PRESS (F1-F5)
SERIAL1 BAUD RATE
BAUDRATE: 115200
SERIAL1 CTS/RTS
(1:ON/0:OFF):OFF
SERIAL1 PAGE BREAK
(1:ON/0:OFF):OFF
SERIAL1 LINE PAGE
(001-199) : 066
SERIAL 1 XON/XOFF
(1:ON /0:OFF):XOFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Select a Flex button for the desired
attribute.
F1-F5
This entry establishes the BAUD
rate for the RS-232 serial port.
The system’s RS-232 port can
support Clear-to-Send (CTS) and
Ready-to-Send (RTS), control
leads.
The system can send a page break
command over the serial port at the
end of each page. See button 4 for
page length set-up.
This entry is used to set the page
length, the number of lines the
system will send before sending the
page break, see button 3 above.
This entry enables XON/XOFF
protocol. (It is not supported)
124
DEFAULT
1: Unused
2: 9600
3: 19200
4: 38400
5: 57600
6: 115200
115200
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
001~199
66
0: OFF
1: ON
XOFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.15 Serial Port Function Selections – PGM 175
The system has an RS-232 serial port located on the MPB; Also, the system can employ IP over
three (3) TCP channels for the output of various system information.
Each output function is assigned a Serial port or TCP channel that is used to output the
information. In addition, a TCP port must be assigned when a function is defined to use a TCP
channel. The Serial port is located on the MPB; refer to the iPECS eMG Hardware Description
and Installation Manual. Note each function can be defined to use only one output. Refer to
Table 3.3.6.15-1 and Table 3.3.6.15-2 for a description of the selections, the data entries
required and LCD displays.
PROCEDURE:
PRINT PORT SELECTION
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-2)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 175.
SELECT TCP NO
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-9)
Press Flex button 1 to assign the output type for each
function or Flex button 2 to assign the TCP port for the
function when a TCP channel is selected for the function.
Select the Flex button for the desired function, refer to Table
3.3.6.15-1 or Table 3.3.6.15-2.
Use the dial pad to enter the output type (Flex button 1) or
TCP port (Flex button 2). For Flex button 1 the entries
available are:
1: Serial port 1
2: Serial port 2
3: TCP channel 1
4: TCP channel 2
5: TCP channel 3
6: USB COM1 (6)
7: USB COM2 (7)
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.6.15-1 FUNCTION OUTPUT TYPE (PGM 175)
BTN
1
2
3
4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
OFF LINE SMDR (1-7)
SERIAL1 (1)
ADMIN DATA (1-7)
SERIAL1 (1)
TRAFFIC (1-7)
SERIAL1 (1)
SMDI (1-7)
SERIAL1 (1)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Defines the serial port or TCP
channel used for Off-line
SMDR/Statistics output.
Defines the serial port or TCP
channel used for the ADMIN Report
output.
Defines the serial port or TCP
channel used for the TRAFFIC
report output.
Defines the serial port or TCP
channel used for the SMDI output.
1~7
SERIAL1
1~7
SERIAL1
1~7
SERIAL1
1~7
SERIAL1
125
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.15-1 FUNCTION OUTPUT TYPE (PGM 175)
BTN
5
6
7
8
9
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
CALL INFO (1-7)
SERIAL1 (1)
ON-LINE SMDR (1-7)
SERIAL1 (1)
TRACE (1-7)
SERIAL1 (1)
DEBUG (1-7)
SERIAL1 (1)
ACD PACK (1-7)
SERIAL 1 (1)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
1~7
SERIAL1
1~7
SERIAL1
1~7
SERIAL1
Defines the serial port or TCP
channel used for the Debug output.
1~7
SERIAL1
Defines the serial port or TCP
channel used for the Unified
Messages.
1~7
SERIAL1
Defines the serial port or TCP
channel used to receive Call
Information output.
Defines the serial port or TCP
channel used for the On-line
SMDR.
Defines the serial port or TCP
channel used for the Trace output.
Table 3.3.6.15-2 OUTPUT FUNCTION TCP PORT (PGM 175)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
OFF-LINE SMDR (1-9999)
TCP PORT(NULL)
ADMIN DATA (1-9999)
TCP PORT(NULL)
TRAFFIC (1-9999)
TCP PORT(NULL)
SMDI (1-9999)
TCP PORT(NULL)
CALL INFO (1-9999)
TCP PORT(NULL)
ON-LINE SMDR (1-9999)
TCP PORT(NULL)
TRACE (1-9999)
TCP PORT(NULL)
DEBUG (1-9999)
TCP PORT(NULL)
ACD PACK (1-9999)
TCP PORT(NULL)
I-SMDR (1-9999)
TCP PORT(NULL)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Defines the TCP port used for Offline SMDR/ Statistics output.
1 ~ 9999
NULL
Defines the TCP port used for the
ADMIN Report output.
1 ~ 9999
NULL
Defines the TCP port used for the
TRAFFIC report output.
1 ~ 9999
NULL
Defines the TCP port used for the
SMDI output.
1 ~ 9999
NULL
Defines the TCP port used to
receive Call Information output.
1 ~ 9999
NULL
Defines the TCP port used for the
On-line SMDR.
1 ~ 9999
NULL
Defines the TCP port used for the
Trace output.
1 ~ 9999
NULL
Defines the TCP port used for the
Debug output.
1 ~ 9999
NULL
Defines the TCP port used for
Unified Messages.
1 ~ 9999
NULL
Defines the TCP port used for ISMDR(Interactive-SMDR)
1 ~ 9999
NULL
126
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.16 Break/Make Ratio – PGM 176
For Pulse dial CO Lines, the system supports 10pps and the percent break/make ratios of 66/33
or 60/40.
PROCEDURE:
BREAK/MAKE RATIO
(1:66/33 / 0: 60/40): 60/40
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 176.
Dial the digit (1 or 0) for the desired Break/Make ratio:
1: 66/33
0: 60/40
To save Break/Make ratio data, press the [Save] button.
3.3.6.17 SMDR Attributes – PGM 177
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) is an ASCII output of details on both incoming and
outgoing calls. Various SMDR attributes can be assigned including; output records for all calls or
LD only, call cost per pulse when using call metering, etc. Refer to Table 3.3.6.17-1 for a
description of each Attribute, LCD displays and the data entries required.
PROCEDURE:
SMDR ATTRIBUTES
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-24)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 177.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.6.17-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired data, refer to Table
3.3.6.17-1.
To save SMDR Attribute data, press the [Save] button.
Table 3.3.6.17-1 SMDR ATTRIBUTES (PGM 177)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
SMDR SAVE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
SMDR PRINT
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : ON
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
The system can store all outgoing calls
(ON) or only calls that exceed the SMDR
Timer (OFF).
The later allows PSTN call set-up times
to be removed from the recorded call
time. For SMDR Timer settings refer to
button 12 below.
The system can output SMDR records
automatically as they occur (real-time) or
only when requested. When this attribute
is ON, SMDR output is automatic at call
completion.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
127
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.17-1 SMDR ATTRIBUTES (PGM 177)
BTN
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
RECORD TYPE
(1 : LD/ 0: ALL) : LD
LD CALL DIGIT COUNT
(07-15) : 07
PRINT INCOMING CALL
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF
PRINT LOST CALL
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : ON
RECORD IN DETAIL
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : ON
HIDDEN DIALED DIGIT
(0–9):0
SMDR CURRENCY UNIT
…
COST PER PULSE
000000
SMDR DECIMAL LOCATION
(0-5) : 0
SMDR START TIMER (1sec)
(000 – 250) : 000
SMTP IP ADDR
0 .0
.0
.0
(WEB)
USER MAIL ADDR (WEB)
…………………………
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
The system can record all outgoing calls 0: ALL calls
or only long distance calls. Long
1: LD
distance calls are identified by the LD
digit count and LD codes assigned in
Flex button 4 and 19, respectively.
Dialed numbers, which exceed the
07-15
assigned LD digit count, are considered
long distance calls for SMDR and COS
purposes.
The system can output records for
0: OFF
incoming calls as well as outgoing calls.
1: ON
If enabled, incoming calls are recorded
as well as outgoing calls.
The system can provide lost call records,
0: OFF
records for unanswered incoming
1: ON
(abandoned) calls.
The system can output detailed call
0: OFF
records (ON) or summary information
1: ON
(total number of calls, cost and cost for
each station).
For security purposes, digits dialed for
0~9
an outgoing call can be hidden and
replaced with “*”. This field defines the
number of digits to hide.
Button 24 below defines whether leading
or trailing digits are hidden. In addition,
the station must be assigned for SMDR
HIDE, PGM 113 button 5.
The unit of currency used for call cost
can be identified with 3 alpha characters
for easy reference, refer to Table 2.1.21.
When metering is provided by the PSTN,
6 digits
the cost per metering pulse can be
assigned.
This value determines the position of the
0~5
decimal in the Cost per Pulse, button 10,
starting from the right most digits.
To allow for call set-up times through the
000~250
PSTN, a “Valid call timer” can be set. A
seconds
call must be longer than the SMDR Start
Timer for a call record to be generated if
enabled under button 1 above.
SMTP Mail server IPv4 address to
12-digits
receive the SMDR e-mail reports.
User e-mail address to receive the
SMDR e-mail reports, display only. To
change data, use Web Admin.
128
DEFAULT
LD
07
OFF
ON
ON
0
-
000000
0
000
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.17-1 SMDR ATTRIBUTES (PGM 177)
BTN
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
24-1
24-2
24-3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
MAIL SEND WEEKLY SET
N/A (0-7)
MAIL SEND DAILY SET
00(00-23)
AUTO SEND MODE
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF
AUTO DELETE MODE
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF
LONG DISTANCE CODE
0
..
..
..
..
SMDR RIN/CLI/CPN SVC_I
(0:RIN/1:CLI/2:CPN):0
MSN PRINT ON SMDR
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
SMDR RIN/CLI/CPN SVC_II
(0:RN/1:CL/2:CP/3:NO):2
PRINT SERIAL NO
(1 : ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Sets day of week to send SMDR data
weekly (0 for no weekly data, 1-7 for
Monday through Sunday)
Sets time-of-day for SMDR data to be
sent on a daily basis (00 for no daily
records, 01-23 for hour of the day).
If the SMDR buffer is full, the system can
automatically send a notification by email.
Delete SMDR records after sending email.
0-7
0
00-23
00
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
For SMDR and COS purposes, five (5)
Flex button
Long Distance codes of up to two (2)
1~5 +
digits each can be assigned. If dialed as
digits 0~9
st
the 1 digits, the call is considered an LD & ‘*’ as a
call.
wild card
For incoming calls, the system will send
0: RING
the defined data item for “Field I”. The
1: CLI
data item may be CLI, CPN or Ring
2: CPN
Service Time. Note the User dialed
number is always provided for an
outgoing call.
Print MSN number Information in SMDR
0: OFF
Record.
1: ON
For incoming calls, the system will send
the defined data item for “Field II”. The
data item may be CLI, CPN or Ring
Service Time.
Print record number as part of SMDR
output, will reset to 1 when SMDR
capacity is reached or SMDR records
are deleted, see button 18.
SMDR INTERFACE SVC
(0 : OFF/1:CO/2:CO&ICM) : 0
SMDR ICM SAVE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
RING time
OFF
CPN
OFF
01-19
SMDR ATTRIBUTRS(2ND)
PRESS FELX KEY (01-19)
SMDR HIDE DGT
1:RIGHT/0:LEFT) : RIGHT
0: RING
1: CLI
2: CPN
3: None
0: OFF
1: ON
BTN 1: 0
When “HIDDEN DIALED DIGIT” is
0: Left
enabled, button 8 above, this field
1: Right
determines if leading or trailing digits are
hidden.
When enabled, the system stores SMDR 0: OFF
1: CO
data to send to applications including
2:CO&ICM
NMS upon request.
When enabled, intercom call data is
0: OFF
stored as part of the SMDR data.
1: ON
129
Right
OFF
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.17-1 SMDR ATTRIBUTES (PGM 177)
BTN
24-4
24-5
24-6
24-7
24-8
24-9
24-10
24-11
24-12
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
SMDR ICM PRINT
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
SMDR DISC CAUSE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
LONG TIME CALL (10min)
(000-144) : 000
PRT LIMIT TO NET CALL
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
INTERNATIONAL CODE
….
MOBILE PHONE CODE
….
SMTP MAIL SERVER ID
……………………………
SMTP MAIL SERVER PWD
……………………………
TRANSFER CHARGE RATE
(0-2): INDIVIDUAL
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
When enabled, intercom call data is
printed as part of the On-line SMDR.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
When enabled, the disconnect cause is
stored in Off-line SMDR data and printed
as parted of the On-line SMDR.
To monitor long time CO call, a “Long
Time Call” can be set. 0 means no
monitoring. If CO call duration exceeds
this value, a notification will be sent to
NMS server and alarm will be displayed.
When CO call is transferred to Net
transit out CO, it’s automatically deleted
from SMDR.
It is used to distinguish international call
for SMDR.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
000 ~ 144
000
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
4 digit
….
4 digit
….
It is used to distinguish mobile call for
SMDR.
This field defines the user’s ID for SMTP
Max 40
Mail server. If user’s ID and password is
Chars
assigned, SMTP Mail server will check
the validation of user ID and password.
This field defines the user‘s password for
Max 20
SMTP Mail server. If user‘s ID and
Chars
password is assigned, SMTP Mail server
will check the validation of user ID and
password.
1. INDIVIDUAL: When a call is
0:
INDIVIDUAL
transferred to another station, the
INDIVIDUAL
transferred call is charged to two stations
1:
respectively.
INTEGRATE
2. INTEGRATE XFERING: When a call
XFERING
is transferred to another station, the call
2:
is charged to the transferring station.
INTEGRATE
3. INTEGRATE XFERED: When a call is
XFERED
transferred to another station, the call is
charged to the transferred station.
130
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.17-1 SMDR ATTRIBUTES (PGM 177)
BTN
24-13
24-14
24-15
24-16
24-17
24-18
24-19
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
ATD XSFER CHARGE RATE
(0-2):INDIVIDUAL
SMTP DNS ADDR (WEB)
...........
SMTP SENDER MAIL (WEB)
...........
SMTP SECURITY
(0-2) : NO SECURITY
SMTP PORT
(00001-65535) : 00025
VSF VM DISPLAY
(0:’I’, 1:’V’)
DISPLAY N TYPE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
1. INDIVIDUAL: When Attendant make
outgoing call and transfer this call to
another station, the transferred will follow
the Transfer Charge Mode.
2. ATD CHARGING: When Attendant
makes outgoing call and transfers this
call to another station, the call is charged
to the Attendant.
3. XFERED CHARGING: When
Attendant makes outgoing call and
transfers this call to another station, the
call is charged to the transferred station.
SMTP Mail server Domain address to
receive the SMDR e-mail reports.
RANGE
DEFAULT
0:
INDIVIDUAL
INDIVIDUAL
1: ATD
CHARGING
2: XFERED
CHARGING
Max 100
Chars
-
Program VSF mail Sender mail Address
(It is moved to web admin PGM 160161)
Choose SMTP Security (It is moved to
web admin PGM 160-161)
Max 40
Characters
-
0-2
(0:No
security
1:SSL
2:TLS)
0
Choose SMTP Port (It is moved to web
admin PGM 160-161)
1-65535
25
If the value is ‘I’, the call to “VSF voice
mail” is displayed as ‘I’ in SMDR.
But if the value is ‘V’, the call to “VSF
voice mail” is displayed as ‘V’ in SMDR.
‘I’ means “incoming call”.
‘V’ is new indication for “VSF voice mail”.
0:’I’
1:’V’
0:’I’
Display ‘N’ in SMDR to distinguish and
1:ON
2:OFF
OFF
it is network call.
131
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.18 System Date, Time and Daylight Saving Time (DST) – PGM 178
The system Date, Time and DST feature are established by this entry. The date and time are
employed for several features and functions including; LCR, LCD displays, SMDR outputs, Auto
Ring Mode Selection, Wake-Up Alarm, etc. If DST is enabled the system time will be adjust onehour forward and back at the DST start and end times, respectively.
PROCEDURE:
SET TIME/DATE & DST
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1 - 5)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 178.
Press the Flex button for the desired Attribute; refer to Table
3.3.6.18-1.
Button 1: Time
Button 2: Date
Button 3: DST enable mode
Button 4: DST start time
Button5 : DST end time
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the Attribute, refer
to Table 3.3.6.18-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.6.18-1 SYSTEM TIME, DATE & DST (PGM 178)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
SET TIME
TIME 00:22(HH:MM)
SET DATE
DATE : 07/24/13(MMDDYY)
DST ENABLE MODE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DST START TIME
ONLY POSSIBLE BY WEBADM
DST END TIME
ONLY POSSIBLE BY WEBADM
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Sets the system time.
HH:MM
Sets the system date.
MMDDYY
Enables DST feature for
System Time.
0: OFF
1: ON
The DST start time.
See DST Table
This can be set only via WEB
Admin.
The DST end time.
See DST Table
This can be set only via WEB
Admin.
132
DEFAULT
OFF
nd
2
Sunday of March
at 2:00 AM
st
1
Sunday in
Nov., at
2:00 AM
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.19 Multi Language – PGM 179
The VMIU and VMIB support multiple languages; up to six languages may be supported
simultaneously. Once the prompts are downloaded to the VMIU/VMIB, the caller receives the
Language selection announcement for DISA and CCR calls as well as proceeding a Hunt Group
guaranteed announcement or DID error announcement. The language selection announcement
will only affect the language prompts enabled for use.
PROCEDURE:
SET SYSTEM MULTI LANG
ENTER SEQ NO (001 -300)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 179 (e.g. enter 015).
eMG800 sequence number range is 0001-2890.
SET 015 SYS MULTI LANG
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-6)
Select Flex button,
Button 1: N. AMERICA Prompt Usage
Button 2: UNKNOWN Prompt Usage
Button 3: UNKNOWN Prompt Usage
Button 4: UNKNOWN Prompt Usage
Button 5: UNKNOWN Prompt Usage
Button 6: UNKNOWN Prompt Usage
N.AMERICA Prompt Usage
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Us the dial pad to enable or disable the desired language
prompts.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
3.3.6.20 System Timers I to III - PGMs 180-182
A number of timers can be assigned to control and affect many features and functions of the
system. Refer to Table 3.3.6.20-1 to Table 3.3.6.20-3 for a description of the timers and the input
required.
PROCEDURE:
SYSTEM TIMER 1
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-22)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial:
180 for System Timers I
181 for System Timers II
182 for System Timers III
Press the Flex button for the desired Timer; refer to Table
3.3.6.20-1 to Table 3.3.6.20-3.
Us the dial pad to enable or disable the desired language
prompts.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired Timer data, refer to
Table 3.3.6.20-1 to Table 3.3.6.20-3.
Press the [Save] button to store the Timer data entry.
133
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.20-1 SYSTEM TIMERS I (PGM 180)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
ATD RECALL TMR(min)
(00-60) : 01
CALL PARK TMR(sec)
(000-600) : 120
CAMP-ON RECALL TMR(sec)
(000-600) : 030
EX-HOLD RECALL TMR(sec)
(000-600) : 060
I-HOLD RECALL TMR(sec)
(000-600) : 030
S-HOLD RECALL TMR(sec)
(000-600) : 030
TRANS RECALL TMR(sec)
(000-600) : 030
ACNR DELAY TMR(sec)
(000-300) : 030
ACNR PAUSE TMR(sec)
(000-300) : 030
ACNR RETRY COUNT
(01-13) : 03
ACNR TONE DTC TMR(sec)
(001-300) : 030
AUTO RELEASE TMR(sec)
(000-300) : 030
CCR INT DGT TMR(100ms)
(000-300) : 030
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Determines the amount of time the
attendant receives recall after which
the system will disconnect the call.
Determines the amount of time before
a parked call will recall the station that
parked the call.
When a call transfer is camped-on,
this timer determines the amount of
time before the station receives recall.
Determines the amount of time before
a call placed on exclusive hold will
recall the station.
Determines the amount of time before
a call that is recalling the station will
recall before also recalling the
attendant.
Determines the amount of time before
a call placed on system hold will recall
the station.
Determines the amount of time a
transferred call will ring at the
receiving station before recalling the
station that transferred the call.
If the ACNR Pause Timer expires and
no CO Line is available for ACNR
recall, the delay timer sets the delay
before ACNR attempts to access a
CO line. The retry counter is not
decremented by this action.
This timer establishes the time
between ACNR recall attempts.
00~60
(minutes)
01
000~600
(seconds)
120
000~600
(seconds)
030
000~600
(seconds)
060
000~600
(seconds)
030
000~600
(seconds)
030
000~600
(seconds)
030
000~300
(seconds)
030
000~300
(seconds)
030
1~13
03
001~300
(seconds)
030
000~300
(seconds)
030
000~300
(100msec)
030
This counter sets the number of recall
attempts for ACNR before ACNR is
abandoned. (For CIS : 1-9).
If call progress tones are not available
for ACNR, the system will wait this
duration after dialing before
considering the called party as
busy/no answer.
If a user accesses a CO/IP path and
does not take any action, the system
will automatically release the CO/IP
path when this timer expires.
Inter-digit timer used with Customer
Call Routing function.
134
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.20-1 SYSTEM TIMERS I (PGM 180)
BTN
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
CALL RESTRICT TMR(min)
CHECK PGM 123-F2
CO DIAL DLY TMR(100ms)
(00-99) : 05
RLS GUARD TMR(100ms)
(010-150) : 020
CO RING OFF TMR(100ms)
(010-150) : 060
CO RING ON TMR(100ms)
(1-9) : 2
ELAPSED CALL TMR(sec)
(005-900) : 180
WEB PWD GUARD TMR (min)
(001-999) : 005
ON HOOK IDLE TMR (sec)
(00-99) : 00
CALL REC REPEAT TMR(sec)
(000-999) : 000
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Not used. Check PGM123-BTN2
00~99
(minutes)
00
Delay for through connection to
prevent illegal dialing when CO/PBX
has slow response.
When a CO Line is returned to idle,
the system will deny access for this
time to assure the PSTN returns the
CO circuitry to idle.
This timer sets the maximum ‘OFF’
duration of the incoming ring cycle to
determine when a call has been
abandoned.
This timer sets the ‘ON’ time of the
incoming ring cycle for the Ring
Detect circuitry of the system to
recognize an incoming call.
Users can receive a periodic tone
indicating the length of an outgoing
call. This timer sets the time before
and between the tones. Note Call
Time Tone must be enabled in PGM
112-button 1.
If no data packets are received during
a Web Admin connection for the
Guard time, a password check will be
initiated by the system.
Phone (IP/DKTU) goes to idle after
this timer when the phone receives
disconnect message or signal from
CO line.
If record warning tone is set and this
timer is set greater than 1, it works
periodically when it’s recorded.
00~99
(100msec)
05
010~150
(100msec)
020
010~150
(100msec)
060
1~9
(100msec.)
2
005~900
(seconds)
180
001~999
(minutes)
5
00~99
(seconds)
0
000~999
(seconds)
0
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
When a user activates No-Answer
Forward, calls will ring for this
duration before the calls are forward.
The Station No-Answer Forward timer
PGM 123 will take precedence.
A DID/DISA call to a station will
forward to the DID/DISA Destination
assigned in PGM 167 should this
timer expire before the call is
answered.
000~600
(seconds)
015
000~255
(seconds)
000
Table 3.3.6.20-2 SYSTEM TIMERS II (PGM 181)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
FWD NO ANS TMR(sec)
(000-600) : 015
DID/DISA NO ANS(sec)
(000-255) : 000
135
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.20-2 SYSTEM TIMERS II (PGM 181)
BTN
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
VSF USR RECORD(sec)
(000-999) : 060
VSF VALID USER MSG(sec)
(0-9) : 4
DOOR OPEN TMR(100ms)
(00-99) : 20
ICM DIAL TONE TMR(sec)
(001-255) : 010
INTER DIGIT TMR(sec)
(01-20) : 05
MSG REMINDER TONE(min)
(00-60) : 00
PAGE TIME OUT TMR(sec)
(000-255) : 015
PAUSE TMR(sec)
(1-9) : 3
SOFT AUTO RLS TMR(sec)
(01-30) : 10
VM PAUSE TMR(100 msec)
(01-90) : 30
VSF CUT ERR TMR(1 SEC)
(01-90) : 00
UNUSED
EMERGENCY RETRY TMR
(00-99) : 00 SEC
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
This timer sets the maximum duration
allowed for the User Greeting in the
system’s basic Voice Mail.
This timer sets the minimum duration
allowed for a voice mail message in
the system’s basic VSF Voice Mail.
Messages shorter than this period are
not stored.
This timer sets the minimum contact
closure time required to activate the
contact assigned as a door open
contact.
If a user goes off-hook on the
Intercom and takes no action for this
timer, the user will receive error tone.
This timer sets the maximum allowed
time between user dialed digits. At
expiration, the user will receive errortone.
An iPECS Phone user will receive
periodic reminder tones of a message
waiting at intervals based on this
timer.
Determines the maximum duration of
a page after which the caller and
Page Zone are released.
A Timed pause of this duration is
used in Speed Dial and during other
automatically dialed digits sent to the
PSTN.
When a Soft Key is used on the
iPECS Phone, after expiration of this
timer, the display will return to the
previous display.
When the system sends a “Pause” to
Voice Mail using In-band signals, the
Pause interval is defined by this timer.
Not available in the USA.
To cut error tone in VSF message
that is leaved in a station.
000~999
(seconds)
60
0~9
(seconds)
4
00~99
(100msec.)
20
001~255
(seconds)
10
01~20
(seconds)
05
00~60
(minutes)
00
000~255
(seconds)
15
1~9
(seconds)
3
1~30
(seconds)
10
1~90
(100msec.)
30
1~90
(1 sec.)
00
00~99
(1 sec.)
00
Unused.
System try to make emergency call
according to the CO access
rule/Prefer CO/CO group if system
could not seize predefined emergency
Co line within this timer.
136
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.20-2 SYSTEM TIMERS II (PGM 181)
BTN
16
17
18
19
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
ERROR TONE TMR(1sec)
(005-180) : 030
HOWLING TONE TMR(1sec)
(000-180) : 030
NOTIFY PLAY DELAY(1sec)
(01-99) : 10
SHORT MODEM TMR(1sec)
(01-60) : 10
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Error Tone Timer
005~180
(1 sec.)
30
Howling Tone Timer
000~180
(1 sec.)
30
When VM notification call uses LCO,
system will treat the call as the
answered after this timer and play the
new message prompt.
If {Short modem} of a SLT is ON, the
SLT maintains the modem mode for
this time.
1~99
(1 sec.)
10
01~60
(1 sec.)
10
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
This timer determines the duration the
system considers an actual state
change in the hook-switch and not a
spurious contact bounce.
This timer sets the maximum time an
SLT user can depress the hookswitch for a Flash signal.
This time sets the minimum time an
SLT user must depress the hookswitch for a Flash signal.
For an internal call, the system will
return a station to idle if the call
remains unanswered for this duration.
This timer determines the duration of
an “Unsupervised conference” before
the station is recalled or the
conference is dropped.
This timer sets the delay (no action
duration) for delayed Prime Line
operation.
This timer sets the duration of the
“Seize Acknowledge Signal” (Wink)
sent to the PSTN on a DID line.
When an ISDN Line is assigned to
send digits En-block, PGM 143-button
3, the system will send a dialed digit if
the user dials “#” or this timer is
expired.
01~25
(100msec.)
01
01~25
(100msec.)
07
000~250
(10 msec.)
010
000~300
(seconds)
060
00~99
(minutes)
10
01~20
(seconds)
05
010~200
(10 msec.)
010
01~20
(seconds)
05
This timer establishes the duration of
the DTMF tone sent on an analog CO
Line.
04~99
(10 msec.)
10
Table 3.3.6.20-3 SYSTEM TIMERS III (PGM 182)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
SLT HOOK BOUNCE(100ms)
(01-25) : 01
SLT MAX H_FLASH(100ms)
(01-25) : 07
SLT MIN H_FLASH(10ms)
(000-250) : 010
STA AUTO RLS TMR(sec)
(000-300) : 060
UNSUPER CONF TMR(min)
(00-99) : 10
PRIME LINE TMR(sec)
(01-20) : 05
WINK SIGNAL TMR(10ms)
(010-200) : 010
EN-BLOC I_DGT TMR(sec)
(01-20) : 05
DTMF DURATION TMR(10ms)
(04-99) : 10
137
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.6.20-3 SYSTEM TIMERS III (PGM 182)
BTN
10
11
12
13
14
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
The system will receive DID digits for
this timer. After the timer expires, the
system will use the last 2 to 4 digits
received as DID digits.
Provide wake up fail indication to
attendant according to this timer.
01~99
(100msec.)
30
00~99
(1 sec.)
20
Prove warning tone when run out of
prepaid money if this timer is not zero.
00~99
(1 sec.)
00
FAX DETECT TMR (sec)
(01-20): 10
It is maximum fax tone detection time
to deliver FAX call to fax destination.
1~20
(1 sec.)
10
AUTO PAUSE TMR (sec)
(000-255): 000
IPCR Mute function will be released
by this auto pause released timer.
0~255
(1 sec.)
0
FLEX DID TMR(100ms)
(01-99): 30
WAKE UP FAIL TMR (sec)
(00-99): 20
PREPAID WARN TMR (sec)
(00-99): 00
3.3.6.21 In-Room Indication – PGM 183
The Supervisor Station can set the In-Room Indication to all members in the same Group up to
10 bins can be programmed, and each bin has (at most) 20 members excluding the Supervisor.
PROCEDURE:
IN ROOM INDICATION
ENTER BIN NO (01-10)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 183.
IN ROOM INDICATION
F1:SUPERVISOR F2:MEM
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired bin number.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.9.6-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.6.21-1 In-Room Indication (PGM 183)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
IN ROOM INDICATION
SURERVISOR : STA 100
STA 100 MEM
101 …. …. ….
DESCRIPTION
Assigns Supervisor station.
This entry assigns stations as
members.
138
RANGE
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.22 DCOB SYS Timers – PGM 186
A number of timers can be assigned to control and affect operation of E1 lines using R2 signaling.
Refer to Table 3.3.6.22-1 for the timer descriptions and inputs required.
PROCEDURE:
DCOB SYS ATTRIBUTES
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-6)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 186.
Press the Flex button for the desired Timer; refer to Table
3.3.6.22-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired Timer data, refer to
Table 3.3.6.22-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the Timer data entry.
Table 3.3.6.22-1 DCOB SYSTEM TIMERS (PGM 186)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
R2 OUT MANAG TMR(sec)
(01-50) : 14
R2 IN MANAG TMR(sec)
(01-50) : 14
R2 DISAPPEAR TMR(sec)
(01-50) : 14
R2 PULSE TMR(20msec)
(01-30) : 07
R2 READY TMR (20msec)
(000-500) : 007
DIAL TONE DELAY (20msec)
(01-30) : 20
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
In R2 signaling, maximum time for
waiting for forward signal from PBX.
01~50
(seconds)
14
In R2 signaling, maximum time for
waiting for forward signal from PBX.
01~50
(seconds)
14
In R2 signaling, maximum time for
waiting for the acknowledge of R2
signal.
In R2 signaling, time duration to
send pulse typed R2 signal.
01~50
(seconds)
14
01~30
(20 msec)
07
Reserved for future usage for R2
timers.
000~500
(20 msec)
07
Reserved for future usage for R2
timers.
01~30
(20 msec)
20
139
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.23 NTP Attributes – PGM 195
The system can employ the Network Time Protocol (NTP) or ISDN clock to synchronize the
system time with the NTP time server or ISDN clock. The system requests the time from the NTP
server at 10-minute intervals and then determines the time differential. If the system time is more
2 seconds off the NTP time, the system time is adjusted to synchronize with the NTP server time.
PROCEDURE:
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 195.
NTP ATTRIBUTES
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-1)
Press the Flex button for the desired NTP Attribute; refer to
Table 3.3.6.23-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired data, refer to Table
3.3.6.23-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.6.23-1 NTP ATTRIBUTES
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
NETWORK TIME/DATE
(0-2): DISABLE(0)
DESCRIPTION
Sets time synchronization for the
system as :
Disable
ISDN clock
NTP, NTP Attributes are set only
via the Web.
140
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: DISABLE
1: ISDN
2: NTP
DISABLE
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.24 CRR Attributes – PGM 252
System can reroute incoming call to CO. If called number matched with compare digits of Table
252, the call are routed to Rerouting number.
PROCEDURE:
CRR ATTRIBUTES
PRESS FLEX KEY (1–3)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 252.
Press the Flex button 1~3 for the desired setting, refer to
Table 3.3.6.24-1.
For Flex button 1 enable or disable CRR. For Flex button 2,
press the [Save] button to reset the CRR table. For Flex
button 3, dial the table bin number to input data.
For Flex button 3, Enter the bin number, refer to Table
3.3.6.24-1.
Table 3.3.6.24-1 CRR ATTRIBUTES (PGM 252)
BTN
1
2
3
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
ENABLE CRR
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
INIT CRR
PRESS [Save] KEY
DESCRIPTION
This field is used to enable or
disable CO Call Rerouting.
CRR 001 RECEIVE DGTS
............
CRR 001 CO+TEL NUMBER
.........................
CRR 001 TYPE
.......
DEFAULT
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
This field is used to initialize the
CRR table.
000-169
CRR ATTRIBUTES
ENTER BIN NO(000-169)
CRR 001 COMPARE CO GRP
GRP NO (01-20) : 01
RANGE
Compared Co group should be
matched with incoming CO group.
01-20
Max 2 digits
Incoming digit numbers should be
matched with these digits. An “*”
may be entered as a wild-card to
indicate insertion of the compared
number.
This field defines the CO line, CO
group or CO access code plus
telephone number.
If you chose ‘1’ for NET type, you
can use transit out code for CO to
CO rerouting. If you chose ‘2’ for
DISA type, you can access the
station number as DISA mode.
Other case, you should not use this
type.
Max 12 digits
141
Max 20 digits
N/A
01
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.25 VM COS Attributes – PGM 253
Each Station is assigned one of the five Voice Mail Classes of Service. The VM COS attributes
include user greeting length, E-Mail notifications, message retention and optional message
marking.
PROCEDURE:
ENTER PGM NUMBER
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 253.
VM COS ATTRIBUTE
ENTER COS RANGE (1-5)
Enter COS range from 1 to 5.
1-2 VM COS ATT
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-8)
Press flex button 1-8 for the desired setting, refer to Table
3.3.6.25-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired data, refer to Table
3.3.6.25-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.6.25-1 VM COS ATTRIBUTES (PGM 253)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
GREETING LENGTH
(00-99) : 60
MESSAGE LENGTH
(000-600) : 000
NUMBER OF MESSAGE
(000-250) : 000
RETENTION TIME
(00-99) : 00 (DAYS)
E-MAIL NOTIFICATION
(0-2) : NOTI. DELETE
FUTURE DELEVERY MSG
(1 :ON /0 :OFF) : OFF
CONFIRM MSG RECEIPT
(1 :ON/0 :OFF) : OFF
PRIVATE MSG MARK
(1 :ON/0 :OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
This defines maximum user
greeting length.
00-99
60
This defines maximum user
message recording time.
000-600
000
This defines maximum number of
voice mail message.
000-250
000
Voice mail messages will be
automatically deleted after this
amount of days.
E-mail notification can be enabled
or disabled.
00-99
00
Future Delivery message can be
enabled or disabled.
0: OFF
Notification &
1: Notification
Delete
2: Notification
& Delete
0: OFF
OFF
1: ON
Confirm message receipt can be
enabled or disabled.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Private message mark can be
enabled or disabled.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
142
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.26 Personal Group – PGM 260
Several stations can share same station number. That means Personal Group is extended
feature of Linked Pair.
A Personal Group is composed with a master station and several member stations.
A master station and all member stations share master station‘s number.
By using this shared number, almost features (Call To xxx / Call From xxx / SMDR / Message
Wait…) can be activated.
But, some features can be chosen by PGM 261 attribute about all station activating or individual
station working.
In PGM 260, Personal group master and member can be assigned.
In PGM 261, Personal group attribute can be set.
PROCEDURE:
PERSONAL GRP ASSIGN
ENTER GRP NUM (01–70)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 260.
PERSONAL GRP 01
F1 : MASTER STA F2 : MEM
Press Flex button 1, register Master station.
And Enter Group number (eMG80:1~7 /eMG800:1~600)
Press Flex button 2, register member stations.
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired data.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
143
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.6.27 Personal Group Attribute – PGM 261
In PGM 261, Personal group attribute can be set.
PROCEDURE:
PERSONAL ATTRIBUTE
ENTER GRP NUM (01–70)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 261.
PERSONAL GRP 01
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-3)
2. Press the Flex button 1~4 for the desired setting, refer to
Table 3.3.6.27-1.
And Enter Group number.(eMG80:1~70 /eMG800:1~600)
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired data, refer to Table
3.3.6.27-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.6.27-1 PERSONAL GROUP ATTRIBUTES (PGM 261)
BTN
1
2
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01 USE MASTER WAKEUP
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
01 USE MASTER DND
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
01 SET LINKED PAIR
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
If this value is set to ON, all
member wake-up follow by master
wake up.
If this value is set to OFF, individual
wake-up is worked by each station.
If this value is set to ON, DND
setting affect to Master and all
member.
If this value is set to OFF, individual
DND is worked by each station.
If this value is set to ON, Master
and Member Stations are linked
and
only one station can be
activated.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
144
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.7 STATION GROUP DATA – PGM 190 & 192
Stations can be grouped so that incoming calls will search (hunt) for an idle station in the group.
The system allows assignment of three hunt processes, Circular, Terminal and UCD. In addition,
there are eight (8) functional groups available: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) based on UCD
hunt, Ring, Call Pick-Up, External Voice Mail (SLT connected), VSF-Voice Mail, iPECS Feature
Server Voice Mail, Network Voice Mail and UCS Groups.
Certain types of groups can incorporate announcements, which are given to the calling party. The
system’s VMIU or VMIB can store up to seventy (70) announcements for use with Station Groups.
Note that a station can belong to multiple groups if the groups are all of the same type. Also note
that when a station group is assigned to a group type (Station, ACD, VM, FS VM, VSF-VM, Net
VM, UCS and Ring), the group attributes are initialized to the default values.
145
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.7.1 Station Group Assignment -PGM 190
Under Station Group Assignments the type, members and Pick-Up attribute are assigned to the
Station Group. Note for the Net VM group, the network number must be assigned as the Net VM
group member station. Refer to Table 3.3.7.1-1 for a description of the functions, the LCD
displays and data entries required.
PROCEDURE:
STATION GRP ASSIGN
ENTER GRP NO(401-440)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 190.
STATION GRP 401
F1:TYPE F2:PKUP F3:MEM
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Station Group number.
Press the Flex button for the desired setting; refer to Table
3.3.7.1-1.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Station Group data.
Note for group members, enter a station or station range.
For an individual station press the desired Flex button for the
position of the station in the group and dial the station
number. For a range, enter the first and last station number
in the range.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.7.1-1 STATION GROUP ASSIGNMENT (PGM 190)
BTN
1
2
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
STATION GRP 401
CIRCULAR GROUP (00-10)
GROUP 401 PICK-UP
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
CIRCULAR GROUP 401
....
....
....
DESCRIPTION
This entry defines the type of
station group.
Stations can pick-up group calls
ringing at other stations in the
group. This does not apply to
VSF groups.
This entry assigns stations as
members of a station group, or
for Net VM, the Network number.
146
RANGE
DEFAULT
00: Not Assign
01: Circular
02: Terminal
03: UCD/ACD
04: RING
05: Ext VM
06: PICK-UP
07: VSF-VM
08: UMS
09: NET-VM
10:UCS Server
Not Assign
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.7.2 Station Group Attributes – PGM 191
Each type of group has a different set of available attributes relating to announcements, timers,
overflow, etc. Table 3.3.7.2-1 through Table 3.3.7.2-8 provides descriptions for the attributes,
LCD displays and data entries required. The attributes for the Circular and Terminal Hunt groups
are given in Table 3.3.7.2-1 and the UCD attributes include the ACD functions Table 3.3.7.2-2. In
addition, there are no attributes for a group assigned as a Net VM group in PGM 190.
PROCEDURE:
STATION GRP ATT
ENTER GRP NO(401-440)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 191.
CIRC GRP 401
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-21)
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Station Group. The
system will display the type of group from the Station Group
Assignment PGM 190 data (Ex. 01 Circular).
Press the Flex button for the desired attribute; refer to Table
3.3.7.2-1 to Table 3.3.7.2-8.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Group Attributes data,
refer to Table 3.3.7.2-1 to Table 3.3.7.2-8.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.7.2-1 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — CIRCULAR & TERMINAL GROUPS
(PGM 191)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
CIRC 401 ANNC 1 TMR(1s)
(000 - 999) : 015
CIRC 401 ANNC 2 TMR(1s)
(000 - 999) : 000
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
If all stations in the group are busy
when a call is offered, the call may
continue to wait (queue) for an
available station.
st
If the queue period exceeds 1
Announcement Timer, the call may
be sent to a VSF announcement.
If the timer is set to 000, the call will
receive the first announcement, in
full, prior to the hunt process
(guaranteed announcement).
st
nd
After the 1 announcement, the 2
ANNC TMR is activated. At
expiration, if the call remains
queued to the group, the call is
nd
sent to the assigned 2 VSF
announcement.
000~999
(seconds)
015
000~999
(seconds)
000
147
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.7.2-1 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — CIRCULAR & TERMINAL GROUPS
(PGM 191)
BTN
3
4
5
6
7
8
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
CIRC 401 ANNC1 LOC
VSF ANNC .. (01 – 70)
CIRC 401 ANNC2 LOC
VSF ANNC .. (01 – 70)
CIRC 401 ANNC2 RPT TMR
(000 - 999) : 000.
CIRC 401 ANNC 2 RPT
(1: ON / 0: OFF): OFF
CIRC 401 OVERFLOW DEST
S/H/V/SPD (Dial 1-4)
CIRC 401 OVERFLOW TMR
(000 - 600) : 180
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
The Station Group can be assigned
an announcement, which is played
if the call remains queued beyond
the ANNC 1 TMR duration. The
announcement location is the VSF
ANNC1 number. An entry of 00
indicates no announcement.
Including ‘#’ at the end of an entry
instructs the system to disconnect
after the announcement.
The Station Hunt Group can be
nd
assigned a 2 announcement,
which is played if the call remains
queued beyond the ANNC 2 TMR
duration. The announcement
location is the VSF ANNC2
number. An entry of 00 indicates no
announcement. Including ‘#’ at the
end of an entry instructs the system
to disconnect after the
announcement.
nd
The 2 announcement can be
repeated to calls that remain in
queue at intervals of the
Announcement 2 Repeat Timer.
01~70
00: none
01~70
00: none
000~999
(seconds)
000
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
NOTE
Repeating must be “ON” under
button 6 below.
nd
After the 2 announcement, if the
call remains queued to the group,
nd
the 2 VSF announcement can be
repeated at the Announcement
Repeat Timer interval.
A call to the group will continue to
route through the group until
answered or all group members
have been tried. The call will
remain at the last station or will
pass to the assigned Overflow
Destination.
A call to a group will remain at the
last station in the group or can be
sent to the assigned Overflow
Destination after expiration of the
OVERFLOW Timer.
148
1-4
(1:Station
2:Station group
3:VSF Announce
4:System speed)
000~600
(seconds)
180
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.7.2-1 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — CIRCULAR & TERMINAL GROUPS
(PGM 191)
BTN
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
CIRC 401 WRAP-UP TMR
(000 - 999) : 002
CIRC 401 NO ANS TMR(1s)
(00 – 99) : 15
CIRC 401 PILOT HUNT
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : ON
CIRC 401 RPT NO MEMBER
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF
CIRC 401 MUSIC SRC
(00–10) : 01
CIRC 401 MBR FORWARD
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : ON
MAILBOX MSG WAIT STA
....
MAILBOX PASSWORD
…………
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
After terminating any call, a Group
member will be maintained in a
busy state for the duration of the
WRAP-UP Timer.
Calls to a station in the group are
directed to the station, if
unavailable or unanswered in the
NO Answer Timer, the call can be
routed based on the assigned hunt
process.
A circular/terminal hunt group can
be set so that only calls to the pilot
number (Station Group number)
will hunt.
000~999
(seconds)
002
00~99
(seconds)
15
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
If a call is received and no
members are on-duty, an ICM call
will return re-order tone, while a
CO/IP call will be routed to the
overflow destination.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
A Music source is assigned so that
calls to the group receive audio
from the source in place of ringback tone.
00: Ring-back
01: INT Music
02: EXT Music
03: VSF MOH
04: SLT MOH1
05: SLT MOH2
06: SLT MOH3
07: SLT MOH4
08: SLT MOH5
09: VSF MOH2
10: VSF MOH3
0: OFF
1: ON
01
A member activating Call forward
may be placed in an unavailable
state for hunt group calls (ON).
When OFF, group calls are sent to
the member as normal.
When a group calls overflows or
routes to the VM group, a station
number is used to identify the
Mailbox for the Circular group
messages.
The password associated with a
group Mailbox is defined here.
The password is used in
conjunction with the Circular group
as with a normal station.
149
ON
Station
….
12 digits
….
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.7.2-1 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — CIRCULAR & TERMINAL GROUPS
(PGM 191)
BTN
17
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
CIRC 401 FORCED DEST
S/H/V/SPD (DIAL 1-4)
18
FORCED FWD DEST USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
19
WAIT IF 1ST ANNC BUSY
(1:ON/0:OFF): ON
20
GROUP NAME
……………………………….
21
CIRC 401 MAX QUE C-CNT
(00-99) : 99
DESCRIPTION
When a call is delivered to the
group the system can redirect the
call to the Forced destination if
enabled under button 18 below.
Enables the system to redirect
group calls to the Forced
destination defined under button 17
above.
When a call assigned to receive an
announcement arrives and all
channels are busy, the call may
wait with Ring back until a channel
is available (ON) or bypass the
announcement.
A hunt group name can be
designated.
RANGE
DEFAULT
1-4
(1:Station
2:Station group
3:VSF Announce
4:System speed)
0: OFF
1: ON
-
When the number of calls queued
to the group match this parameter,
new calls will receive error tone
and be disconnected after the VSF
AA announcement, if assigned, is
played.
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
20 character
….
00-99
99
Table 3.3.7.2-2 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — UCD/ACD GROUPS (PGM 191)
BTN
1
2
− ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
ACD 403 ANNC 1 TMR(1s)
(000 – 999) : 015
ACD 403 ANNC 2 TMR(1s)
(000 – 999) : 000
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
If all stations in the group are busy
when a call is offered, the call may
continue to wait (queue) for an
available station.
st
If the queue period exceeds this 1
Announcement Timer, the call may be
sent to a VSF announcement.
If the timer is set to 000, the call will
receive the first announcement, in full,
prior to the hunt process (guaranteed
announcement).
After the 1st announcement, a 2nd
ANNC TMR is activated. At expiration,
if the call remains queued to the group,
nd
the call is sent to the assigned 2 VSF
announcement.
000~999
(seconds)
015
000~999
(seconds)
000
150
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.7.2-2 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — UCD/ACD GROUPS (PGM 191)
BTN
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
− ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
ACD 403 ANNC1 LOC
VSF ANNC .. (01–70)
ACD 403 ANNC2 LOC
VSF ANNC .. (01–70)
ACD 403 ANNC2 RPT TMR
(000 – 999) : 000
ACD 403 ANNC2 RPT
(1: ON / 0: OFF): OFF
ACD 403 OVERFLOW DEST
S/H/V/SPD (Dial 1-4)
ACD 403 OVERFLOW TMR
(000 - 600) : 180
ACD 403 WRAP-UP TMR
(000 - 999) : 002
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Each Station Hunt Group can be
assigned an announcement, which is
played if the call remains queued
beyond the ANNC 1 TMR duration.
The announcement location is a VSF
ANNC1 number. An entry of 00
indicates no announcement. Including
‘#’ at the end of an entry instructs the
system to disconnect after the
announcement.
The Station Hunt Group can be
nd
assigned a 2 announcement, which is
played if the call remains queued
beyond the ANNC 2 TMR duration.
The announcement location is a VSF
ANNC2 number. An entry of 00
indicates no announcement. Including
‘#’ at the end of an entry instructs the
system to disconnect after the
announcement.
01~70
00: none
01~70
00: none
The 2nd announcement can be
repeated to calls that remain in queue
at intervals of the Announcement 2
Repeat Timer. Note repeating must be
“ON” under button 6 below.
000~999
(seconds)
000
After the 2nd announcement, if the call
nd
remains queued to the group, the 2
VSF
Announcement can be repeated at the
Announcement Repeat Timer interval.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
A call to the group will continue to
1-4
route through the group until answered
(1:Station
or all group members have been tried. 2:Station group
The call will then queue to the group or
3:VSF
route to the assigned Overflow
Announce
4:System
Destination.
speed)
A call to a group will remain queued to
000~600
the group or be sent to the assigned
(seconds)
Overflow Destination after expiration of
the OVERFLOW Timer.
After terminating any call, a Hunt
000~999
Group member will be maintained in a
(seconds)
busy state for the duration of the
WRAP-UP Timer.
151
180
002
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.7.2-2 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — UCD/ACD GROUPS (PGM 191)
BTN
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
− ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
ACD 403 RPT NO MEMBER
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF
ACD 403 MUSIC SRC
(00– 10) : 01
ACD 403 ACD WARN TONE
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF
ACD 403 ALTER DEST
S/H/SPD (Dial 1-3)
ACD 403 SP-VISOR TMR
(000-999) : 030
ACD 403 SP-VISOR C-CNT
(00-99) : 00
WAIT IF 1ST ANNC BUSY
(1:ON/0:OFF): ON
ACD 403 MAX QUE C-CNT
(00-99) : 99
ACD 403 SUPERVISOR
….
….
….
….
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
If a call is received and no members
0: OFF
are on-duty, an ICM call will return re1: ON
order tone, while a CO/IP call will be
routed to overflow destination.
A Music source can be assigned so
00: Ring-back
that calls to the group will receive
01: INT Music
audio from the assigned source in
02: EXT Music
place of ring-back tone while in Queue. 03: VSF MOH
04: SLT MOH1
05: SLT MOH2
06: SLT MOH3
07: SLT MOH4
08: SLT MOH5
09: VSF MOH2
10: VSF MOH3
An ACD supervisor can monitor agent
0: OFF
conversations. A warning tone can be
1: ON
provided to the agent and connected
party when the supervisor activates the
monitor feature.
When a call comes into the group and
1-3
there are no group members available,
(1:Station
the call will be routed to the assigned
2:Station group
3:System
alternate destination.
speed)
When calls have been in queue longer
000~999
than the Supervisor Timer, the ACD
(seconds)
supervisor is notified by a display of
the longest queue time.
DEFAULT
OFF
01
OFF
....
030
When the number of calls in queue
exceeds the Supervisor Call Counts,
the ACD Supervisor is notified by a
display of queued calls count.
00~99
00
When a call assigned to receive an
announcement arrives and all channels
are busy, the call may wait with Ring
back until a channel is available (ON)
or bypass the announcement.
When the number of calls queued to
the group match this parameter, new
calls will receive error tone and be
disconnected after the VSF AA
announcement, if assigned, is played.
Any valid IP Phone can be assigned as
a Supervisor, max. 5 ACD Supervisors.
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
00-99
99
Station
....
152
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.7.2-2 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — UCD/ACD GROUPS (PGM 191)
BTN
19
20
21
22
23
231~2310
24
24-1
24-2
24-3
− ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100 110 123 124
0 0 0
0
ACD 403 ACD_DND W_TMR
(002-200) : 010
ACD 403 ICLID USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
GROUP NAME
………. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ……
ACD 403 CIQ ROUTE
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-10)
ACD 403 CIQ ROUTE
INPUT 1 : NOT ASSIGNED
ACD 403 ADDED ATTR
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-24)
ZAP TONE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
MAILBOX MSG WAIT STN
….
MAILBOX PASSWORD
…………
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
ACD Group members may be
assigned a priority, 0-9.
Members with the highest priority are
sent calls ahead of lower priority
members. This field is the same as
PGM 112-button 16.
ACD agents are placed in the Wrap-up
mode for the Wrap-up timer duration
after call completion.
Within 5 seconds of a guaranteed
announcement, the caller may dial
digits as an ICLID. The User dialed
digits are compared to the ICLID Table
entries, PGM 203 for routing or, for a
single dialed digit, to the ACD CCR
table PGM 191 BTN 23.
An ACD group name can be
designated.
0~9
0
002~200
sec
010
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
20 character
..
CCR for ACD Calls-in-queue permits
FLEX 1 ~ FLEX
caller to re-route the call by dialing a
10
single digit. The destination is assigned
to Flex button 1 ~ 10 for digits 1 ~ 9 &
0.
When an ACD call is queued and the
caller may exit this queue by entering
one digit. The queued call can be
routed to station, hunt, system-speed
bin, or network station.
Dial 1: Enter a station number.
Dial 2: Enter a hunt group number.
Dial 3: Enter a system speed bin.
Dial 4: Enter a network station number.
To select an ACD group “Added
FLEX 1 ~ FLEX
Attribute”, press flex button 24, then
24
select button 1~24 for the attribute
desired.
Agents, using a headset can have
0: OFF
ACD calls connected to them
1: ON
automatically preceded by a tone (Zap
tone).
When an ACD call overflows or routes
Station
to the VM group, a station number is
used to identify the Mailbox for the
ACD group messages.
The password associated with an ACD
12 digits
group Mailbox is defined here. The
password is used in conjunction with
the ACD group as with a normal
station.
153
-
OFF
….
….
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.7.2-2 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — UCD/ACD GROUPS (PGM 191)
BTN
24-4
24-5
24-6
24-7
24-8
24-9
24-10
24-11
24-12
24-13
24-14
24-15
− ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
CIQ AGENT DISPLAY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
FORCED FWD DEST USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
CIQ #1 THRESHOLD
(00-99) : 10
CIQ #1 ANNC LOC
VSF ANNC .. (00-200)
CIQ #1 PAGE ZONE
(00-40) : 00
CIQ #1 ANNC DELAY TMR
(000-180) : 015
CIQ #1 ANNC REPEAT TMR
(000-180) : 045
CIQ #2 THRESHOLD
(00-99) : 20
CIQ #2 ANNC LOC
VSF ANNC .. (00-200)
CIQ #2 PAGE ZONE
(00-40) : 00
CIQ #2 ANNC DELAY TMR
(000-180) : 015
CIQ #2 ANNC REPEAT TMR
(000-180) : 025
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
When an ACD call is in queue, the Call
in queue information can be displayed
on LCD of agent and supervisor
telephones.
Enables the system to redirect group
calls to the Forced destination defined
under button 24-24 below.
If the queued call count exceeds the
threshold, the system plays the CIQ #1
Announcement (button 7 below) to the
CIQ #1 Page Zone (button 8 below)
after the CIQ #1 Announcement Delay
Timer (button 9 below).
Announcements are repeated at
intervals of the CIQ #1 Announcement
Repeat Timer (button 10 below).
VSF announcement number for the
CIQ #1 Announcement.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
00-99
10
00-200
…
Page Zone to receive CIQ #1
Announcement.
eMG80:00~15
or 00~40,
eMG800:0~105
Delay timer for CIQ #1 Announcement.
000-180
Interval for repeating the CIQ #1
Announcement.
If the queued call count exceeds the
threshold, the system plays the CIQ #2
Announcement (button 12 below) to
the CIQ #2 Page Zone (button 13
below) after the CIQ #2 Announcement
Delay Timer (button 14 below).
Announcements are repeated at
intervals of the CIQ #2 Announcement
Repeat Timer (button 15 below).
VSF announcement number for the
CIQ #2 Announcement.
045
00-99
20
00-200
…
eMG80:00~15
or 00~40,
eMG800:0~105
Delay timer for CIQ #2 Announcement.
000-180
154
015
000-180
Page Zone to receive CIQ #2
Announcement.
Interval for repeating the CIQ #2
Announcement.
00
000-180
00
015
025
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.7.2-2 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — UCD/ACD GROUPS (PGM 191)
BTN
24-16
24-17
24-18
24-19
24-20
24-21
24-22
24-23
24-241
24-242
− ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
CIQ #3 THRESHOLD
(00-99) : 30
CIQ #3 ANNC LOC
VSF ANNC .. (00-200)
CIQ #3 PAGE ZONE
(00-40) : 00
CIQ #3 ANNC DELAY TMR
(000-180) : 015
CIQ #3 ANNC REPEAT TMR
(000-180) : 005
CIQ MENT ON/OFF
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
ACD NO ANS TMR
(000-180) : 000
ACD 403 MBR FORWARD
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : ON
ACD 403 FORCED DEST
S/H/V/SPD (DIAL 1-4)
ACD Q CALL INDI
0(OFF)1(R/LED)2(LED):0
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
If the queued call count exceeds the
threshold, the system plays the CIQ #3
Announcement (button 17 below) to
the CIQ #3 Page Zone (button 18
below) after the CIQ #3 Announcement
Delay Timer (button 19 below).
Announcements are repeated at
intervals of the CIQ #3 Announcement
Repeat Timer (button 20 below).
VSF announcement number for the
CIQ #3 Announcement.
00-99
30
00-200
…
eMG80:00~15
or 00~40,
eMG800:0~105
00
Delay timer for CIQ #3 Announcement.
000-180
015
Interval for repeating the CIQ #3
Announcement.
000-180
005
If enabled, queued callers receive the
CIQ message (You are # in queue)
st
nd
after the 1 and 2 announcement.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Page Zone to receive CIQ #3
Announcement.
Calls to an agent in the group are
000-180
directed to the station, if unanswered in
the NO ANSWER TIMER, the call is
routed to another agent.
A member activating Call Forward may
0: OFF
be placed in an unavailable state for
1: ON
hunt group calls (ON). When OFF,
group calls are sent to the member as
normal.
When a call is delivered to the group
1-4
the system can redirect the call to the
(1:Station
Forced destination, if enabled under
2:Station group
button 24-5 above.
3:VSF
Announce
4:System
speed)
If there are queued group calls, the
0:OFF
queuing indication can be served to
1:RING& LED
group members by Mute Ring and LED
2: LED only
button flashing.
155
000
ON
-
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.7.2-3 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — RING GROUPS (PGM 191)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
RING 405 ANNC1 TMR(1s)
(000 – 999) : 015
RING 405 ANNC 2 TMR(1s)
(000 – 999) : 000
RING 405 ANNC1 LOC
VSF ANNC .. ( 01–70 )
RING 405 ANNC2 LOC
VSF ANNC .. ( 01–70 )
RING 405 ANNC2 RPT TMR
(000 – 999) : 000
RING 405 ANNC2 RPT
(1: ON / 0: OFF): OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
If all stations in the group are busy
when a call is offered, the call may
continue to wait (queue) for an
available station.
st
If the queue period exceeds this 1
Announcement Timer, the call may
be sent to a VSF announcement.
If the timer is set to 000, the call will
receive the first announcement, in
full, prior to the hunt process
(guaranteed announcement).
After the 1st announcement, a 2nd
ANNC TMR is activated. At
expiration, if the call remains
queued to the group, the call is sent
to the assigned 2nd VSF
announcement.
000~999
(seconds)
015
000~999
(seconds)
000
Each Ring Group can be assigned
an announcement, which is played if
the call remains queued beyond the
ANNC 1 TMR duration.
The announcement location is a
VSF ANNC1 number. An entry of 00
indicates no announcement.
Including ‘#’ at the end of an entry
instructs the system to disconnect
after the announcement.
01~70
00: none
The Ring Group can be assigned a
2nd announcement, which is played
if the call remains queued beyond
the ANNC 2 TMR duration.
The announcement location is a
VSF ANNC2 number. An entry of 00
indicates no announcement.
Including ‘#’ at the end of an entry
instructs the system to disconnect
after the announcement.
The 2nd announcement can be
repeated to calls that remain in
queue at intervals of the
Announcement 2 Repeat Timer.
Note repeating must be “ON” under
button 6 below.
After the 2nd announcement, if the
call remains queued to the group,
nd
the 2 VSF announcement can be
repeated at the Announcement
Repeat Timer interval.
01~70
00: none
000~999
(seconds)
000
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
156
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.7.2-3 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — RING GROUPS (PGM 191)
BTN
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
RING 405 OVERFLOW DEST
S/H/V/SPD (Dial 1-4)
RING 405 OVERFLOW TMR
(000 - 600) : 180
RING 405 WRAP-UP TMR
(000 - 999) : 002
RING 405 MUSIC SRC
(00–10) : 01
RING 405 MAX QUE C-CNT
(00-99) : 99
RING 405 MBR FORWARD
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : ON
MAILBOX MSG WAIT STA
....
MAILBOX PASSWORD
…………
RING 405 FORCED DEST
S/H/V/SPD (DIAL 1-4)
DESCRIPTION
A call to the group rings at member
stations until the Overflow timer
expires then the call passes to the
assigned Overflow Destination.
A call to a ring group will continue to
ring stations in the group or be sent
to the assigned Overflow
Destination after expiration of the
OVERFLOW Timer.
After terminating any call, a Ring
Group member will be maintained in
a busy state for the duration of the
WRAP-UP Timer.
A Music source is assigned so that
calls to the group will receive audio
from the assigned source in place of
ring-back tone.
RANGE
1-4
(1:Station
2:Station group
3:VSF Announce
4:System speed)
000~600
(seconds)
180
000~999
(seconds)
002
00: Ring-back
01: Int music
02: Ext music
03: VSF MOH
04: SLTMOH1
05: SLTMOH2
06: SLTMOH3
07: SLTMOH4
08: SLTMOH5
09: VSFMOH2
10: VSFMOH3
00-99
01
When the number of calls queued is
reached, new calls will receive error
tone and be disconnected after the
VSF AA announcement, if assigned,
is played.
A member activating Call Forward
0: OFF
may be placed in an unavailable
1: ON
state for hunt group calls (ON).
When OFF, group calls are sent to
the member as normal.
When a group calls overflows or
Station
routes to the VM group, a station
number is used to identify the
Mailbox for the Ring group
messages.
The password associated with a
12 digits
group Mailbox is defined here. The
password is used in conjunction with
the Ring group as with a normal
station.
When a call is delivered to the group
1-4
the system can redirect the call to
(1:Station
the Forced destination if enabled
2:Station group
under button 16 below.
3:VSF Announce
4:System speed)
157
DEFAULT
99
ON
….
….
-
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.7.2-3 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — RING GROUPS (PGM 191)
BTN
16
17
18
19
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
FORCED FWD DEST USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
WAIT IF 1ST ANNC BUSY
(1:ON/0:OFF): ON
GROUP NAME
……………………………….
RING Q CALL INDI
0(OFF)1(MUTE)2(BURST):1
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Enables the system to redirect
group calls to the Forced destination
defined under button 15 above.
When a call assigned to receive an
announcement arrives and all
channels are busy, the call may wait
with Ring back until a channel is
available (ON) or bypass the
announcement.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
20 character
….
0:OFF
1: Mute
2: Burst
Mute
A Ring group name can be
designated.
When a station calls a Ring Group,
DSS/BLF buttons assigned for the
calling station will flash and muted
ring is received.
Table 3.3.7.2-4 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — EXTERNAL VM GROUPS (PGM 191)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
VM 407 WRAP-UP TMR
(000 – 999) : 002
VM 407 PUT MAIL INDEX
(1 – 4) : 1
VM 407 GET MAIL INDEX
(1 – 4) : 2
VM 407 HUNT TYPE
(1 : CIR/ 0 : TERM): TERM
VM 407 OVERFLOW TMR
(000 - 600) : 180
VM 407 OVERFLOW DEST
S/H/V/SPD (Dial 1-4)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
After terminating any call, the VM
port will be maintained in a busy
state for the duration of the WRAPUP Timer.
For external analog Voice Mail
groups, an index to the Voice Mail
Dial Table, this contains the “Put
Mail” dial code.
For external analog Voice Mail
groups, an index to the Voice Mail
Dial Table, which contains the “Get
Mail” dial code?
The type of Hunt process applied to
the SLT ports connected to the VM
can be assigned as Circular or
Terminal.
A call to a group will remain queued
to the group or be sent to the
assigned OVERFLOW DEST after
expiration of the OVERFLOW TMR.
A call to the group will continue to
route through the group until
answered or all group members
have been tried. The call will remain
at the last station or routes to the
assigned OVERFLOW DEST.
000~999
(seconds)
002
1~4
1
1~4
2
0: TERM
1: CIRC
TERM
000~600
(seconds)
180
1-4
(1:Station
2:Station group
3:VSF Announce
4:System speed)
-
158
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.7.2-4 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — EXTERNAL VM GROUPS (PGM 191)
BTN
7
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
FORCED FWD DEST USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
8
VM 407 FORCED DEST
S/H/V/SPD (DIAL 1-4)
9
GROUP NAME
……………………………….
10
VM 407 SERVER TYPE
(0:IPCR/1:3RD) : 3RD
11
VM 407 SERVER NUMBER
(01-10) : . .
12
VM 407 MEMBER TYPE
(0:SIP/1:SLT) : SLT
13
VM 407 SERVER CAPACITY
(001-140) : 000
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
When a call is delivered to the group
the system can redirect the call to
the Forced destination if enabled
under button 8 below.
Enables the system to redirect
group calls to the Forced destination
defined under button 7 above.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
1-4
(1:Station
2:Station group
3:VSF Announce
4:System speed)
20 character
-
A hunt group name can be
designated.
rd
….
Server Type can set 3 or IPCR.
0: IPCR
1: 3RD
3RD
Sever Number can set 01 ~ 10 for
237 table.
01-10
..
Server Member can set SIP or SLT.
0: SIP
1: SLT
SLT
eMG80:00~140,
eMG800:0~1200
0
Maximum number of channels of
SIP VM (UMS).
Table 3.3.7.2-5 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — PICK-UP GROUPS (PGM 191)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
PICK UP 408 AUTO PICKUP
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF
PICK UP 408 ALL RING
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
If a Pick-Up Group member is
ringing, another member of the
Pick-Up Group can Pick-Up a call
ringing at another member by
simply going “off-hook”.
When a call is offered to a member
of the Pick-Up Group in the Tone
Ring mode, all members will ring.
NOTE
Auto Pickup, Button 1 must be
“ON”.
159
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.7.2-6 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — VSF-VM GROUP (PGM 191)
BTN
1
2
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
VSF-VM 409 RETENSION (1d)
(00 – 99) : 00
VSF-VM 409 DIAL TIME (1s)
(00 – 99) : 15
VSF-VM GROUP NAME
……………………………….
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
When voice messages are stored in 00-99
the VSF, the system will maintain
(day)
(store) the message for the
maximum number of days set in this
program (1 to 99 days). (Not used
currently)
00
This timer determines the inter-digit 00-99
time employed during a VSF-VM
(seconds)
session. If this timer expires while
the VSF-VM is awaiting user input,
the system will assume the remote
party has disconnected and will
return the channel to idle.
A VSF-VM group name can be
20 character
designated.
15
….
Table 3.3.7.2-7 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — UMS GROUP (PGM 191)
BTN
1
2
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
UMS 410 ANNC 1 TMR(1s)
(000 - 999) : 015
UMS 410 ANNC 2 TMR(1s)
(000 - 999) : 000
UMS 410 ANNC1 LOC
VSF ANNC .. (01 – 70)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
If all stations in the group are
busy when a call is offered, the
call may continue to wait (queue)
for an available station.
If the queue period exceeds this
st
1 Announcement Timer, the call
may be sent to a VSF
announcement. If the timer is set
to 000, the call will receive the
first announcement, in full, prior to
the hunt process (guaranteed
announcement).
st
After the 1 announcement, the
nd
2 ANNC TMR is activated. At
expiration, if the call remains
queued to the group, the call is
nd
sent to the assigned 2 VSF
announcement.
The Station Group can be
assigned an announcement,
which is played if the call remains
queued beyond the ANNC 1 TMR
duration. The announcement
location is the VSF ANNC1
number. An entry of 00 indicates
no announcement. Including ‘#’ at
the end of an entry instructs the
system to disconnect after the
announcement.
000~999
(seconds)
015
000-999
(seconds)
000
01~70
00: none
160
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.7.2-7 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — UMS GROUP (PGM 191)
BTN
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
UMS 410 ANNC2 LOC
VSF ANNC .. (01 – 70)
UMS 410 ANNC2 RPT TMR
(000 - 999) : 000.
UMS 410 ANNC 2 RPT
(1: ON / 0: OFF): OFF
UMS 410 OVERFLOW DEST
S/H/V/SPD (Dial 1-4)
UMS 410 OVERFLOW TMR
(000 - 600) : 180
UMS 410 NANS TMR(1s)
(00 – 99) : 15
UMS 410 PILOT HUNT
(1 : ON/ 0: OFF) : ON
UMS 410 ALTER DEST
STA/HUNT
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
The Station Hunt Group can be
01~70
nd
assigned a 2 announcement,
which is played if the call remains
queued beyond the ANNC 2 TMR
duration. The announcement
location is the VSF ANNC2
number. An entry of 00 indicates
no announcement. Including ‘#’ at
the end of an entry instructs the
system to disconnect after the
announcement.
nd
The 2 announcement can be
000~999
repeated to calls that remain in
(seconds)
queue at intervals of the
Announcement 2 Repeat Timer.
Note; repeating must be “ON”
under button 6 below.
nd
After the 2 announcement, if the
0: OFF
call remains queued to the group,
1: ON
nd
the 2 VSF announcement can
be repeated at the Announcement
Repeat Timer interval.
A call to the group will continue to
1-4
route through the group until
(1:Station
answered or all group members
2:Station group
have been tried. The call will
3:VSF Announce
remain at the last station or routes 4:System speed)
to the assigned Overflow
Destination.
A call to a group will remain at the
000~600
last station in the group or can be
(seconds)
sent to the assigned Overflow
Destination after expiration of the
OVERFLOW Timer.
Calls to a station in the group are
00~99
directed to the station, if
(seconds)
unavailable or unanswered in the
NO Answer Timer, the call can be
routed based on the assigned
hunt process.
DEFAULT
00: none
000
OFF
180
15
A FS VM group can be set so that
only calls to the pilot number
(station group number) will hunt.
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
When a call comes into the group
and there are no group members
available, the call will be routed to
the assigned Alternate
Destination.
Station or Group
Number
....
161
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.7.2-7 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — UMS GROUP (PGM 191)
BTN
12
13
14
15
16
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
UMS 410 HUNT TYPE
(1 : CIRC/ 0 : TERM): CIR
UMS 410 WRAP-UP TMR
(002 – 999) : 002
FORCED FWD DEST USAGE
(1:ON/0:OFF): OFF
UMS 410 FORCED DEST
S/H/V/SPD (DIAL 1-4)
GROUP NAME
……………………………….
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
When a call is offered to the
group, the Hunt process can be
defined for Circular or Terminal
hunt group.
After terminating any call, the VM
port will be maintained in a busy
state for the duration of the
WRAP-UP Timer.
Enables the system to redirect
group calls to the Forced
destination defined under button
15 below.
When a call is delivered to the
group the system can redirect the
call to the Forced destination if
enabled under button 14 above.
0: TERM
1: CIR
CIR
002~999
(seconds)
002
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
1-4
(1:Station
2:Station group
3:VSF Announce
4:System speed)
20 character
-
A hunt group name can be
designated.
….
Table 3.3.7.2-8 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES — UCS SERVER GROUP (PGM 191)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
UCS SVR [411] ASSIGNED
UC Server 1 (01–16)
DESCRIPTION
UCS Server number, this value
must be set to 1.
RANGE
DEFAULT
01-16
1
3.3.7.3 Pick Up Group Assignment – PGM 192
Under Pick-Up Group Assignments members are assigned to the Station Pick Up Group.
PROCEDURE:
PICKUP GRP ASSIGN
ENTER GRP NUM(00-49)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 192 and enter group
number (Ex. 00). (eMG80:00~49/ eMG800:0~199)
PICKUP GRP 00
….
….
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Pickup Group.
….
PICKUP GRP 00
….
….
….
The system will display the member of pickup group.
Note for group members, enter a station or station range.
For an individual station press the desired Flex button for the
position of the station in the group and dial the station
number. For a range, enter the first and last station number
in the range.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
162
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.8 ISDN LINE & ICLID ROUTING DATA – PGM 200-206
Each ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) Line provides digital services to the end-user.
Basic Rate Lines have three (3) channels, 2 B channels and a D channel. The 2 B channels
provide 64 Kbps each, a total of 128 Kbps for “Bearer” or voice channels. The D channel provides
a 16 Kbps signaling channel. Primary Rate Lines have 23/30 64 Kbps ‘B’ channels and 1/2 64
Kbps signaling channels. For proper operation, entries are required for various attributes in PGM
200 ~ 202 to match the ISDN circuit and services from the PSTN.
3.3.8.1 ISDN Attributes – PGM 200
ISDN attributes define several characteristics of the ISDN interface. ISDN call cost services
(Advice of Charge), CLI modification, voice encoding, and other characteristics of the interface
are defined.
PROCEDURE:
SYSTEM ISDN ATT
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-3)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 200.
Press the Flex button for the desired Attribute; refer to Table
3.3.8.1-1.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Attribute data.
Press the [Save] button to store the Attribute data entry.
Table 3.3.8.1-1 ISDN LINE ATTRIBUTES (PGM 200)
BTN
1
2
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
CO ATD CODE (2DGT)
..
CLI PRINT TO SERIAL
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DISPLAY DID INFO
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
When the system is set to send the
station number with ISDN CLIP or
COLP, either the station number or
this ATD code will be sent based on
PGM 114 button 11.
The ISDN Calling Line Id may be
included in call records output over
the serial port assigned for “Call
Information”, PGM 175 button 5.
Display DID digit information on
LCD and print it to serial port.
1~2 digits
163
DEFAULT
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.8.2 CLIP/COLP Table – PGM 201
Normally, the system will send the primary Directory Number of the ISDN Line in the ISDN call
SETUP and CONNECT messages to identify the caller (CLIP) or the answering (COLP) party
respectively. Under certain circumstances, it may be desirable to provide a secondary or DID
number for the ISDN Line. In these cases, the CLIP/COLP Table may be used to define the digits
sent. The number sent is selected based on the index assigned for the ISDN Line under CO/IP
Attributes III (PGM 143).
For the CLIP/COLP Table entry, the CLI Station Number (PGM 114) is sent in place of the station
number. For all other CLIP/COLP Table entries, the station number is sent as a suffix to the
number in the Table. Note that this number is sent only if CLIR and COLR are disabled under the
CLIR Service and COLR Service assignments in the Station ISDN Attributes (PGM 114).
PROCEDURE:
CLIP/COLP TABLE ENTRY
ENTER BIN NO ( 00 –4 9 )
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 201 and enter the bin
number (Ex.00).
CLIP/COLP TABLE 00
……….
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Bin number (00-49)
Use the dial pad to enter the desired CLIP/COLP data,
maximum 10 digits.
Press the [Save] button to store the CLIP/COLP data entry.
164
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.8.3 MSN Table – PGM 202
When an ISDN Line assigned for DID operation, receives an incoming call, the call will be routed
to a station based on the Flexible DID Table Index in the MSN Table.
PROCEDURE:
MSN TABLE ATT
ENTER BIN NO ( 001 – 500 )
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 202 and enter the bin
number (Ex.121). (eMG80:001~500/ eMG800:1~1500)
MSN TABLE 121
PRESS FLEX KEY ( 1 – 3 )
Use the dial pad to enter a MSN Table index number.
Press the Flex button for the desired MSN Table entry; refer
to Table 3.3.8.3-1.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Table data.
Press the [Save] button to store the Table data entry.
Table 3.3.8.3-1 MSN ATTRIBUTES (PGM 202)
BTN
1
2
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
MSN TABLE 121 CO RANGE
…-…
MSN TABLE 121
INDEX : NOT ASSIGNED
TABLE 121 TEL NUMBER
……………………..
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
CO Line number associated with
the MSN.
DEFAULT
None
Index to the Flexible DID Table,
PGM 231.
000~999
None
Telephone Number (called number)
23 Digits
None
165
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.8.4 ICLID Route Table – PGM 203
The system can employ ICLID (Incoming Calling Line Id) to determine the routing of incoming
external calls. Each CO/IP Line and ACD group may be assigned to employ ICLID routing. The
system will compare the received ICLID to entries in the ICLID Route Table and, if a match is
found, will route the call to the destination indicated by the index (bin) number of PGM 204.
PROCEDURE:
ICLID ROUTE TABLE ATT
ENTER BIN NO (001-250)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 203 and enter the bin
number (Ex.001).
ICLID ROUTE TABLE 001
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-4)
To program ICLID Route table, dial Bin No (001 – 250).
Press the Flex button for the desired ICLID Table entry; refer
to Table 3.3.8.4-1.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Table data
Press the [Save] button to store the Table data entry.
Table 3.3.8.4-1 ICLID ROUTE INDEX (PGM 203)
BTN
1
2
3
4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
ROUTE TABLE 001
INDEX : NOT ASSIGNED
TABLE 001 ICLID NUMBER
…………………….
TABLE 001 ICLID NAME
……………………..
TABLE 001 ICLID TONE
..
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Index to the ICLID Ring Assignment
001~250
Not assigned
Table PGM 204 that determines the
call routing.
ICLID (Incoming Caller Id) to match 24-digits 0 ~ 9
None
for the index. If the Caller Id
& ‛*’ and ‛#’ as
matches the Table entry, the index
a wild-card.
is used to select the route from
PGM 204.
ICLID name that is sent by the
12.Character
None
system to the destination for the
ICLID routed call.
If the ICLID Number is matched
2 digits.01~12
None
with CID of caller, the Ring tone is
followed this ICLID Tone.
166
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.8.5 ICLID Ring Assignment – PGM 204
If the Incoming Caller ID matches an entry in the ICLID Route Table, the index from the Table is
used to determine the call routing from the ICLID Ring Assignment Table. Separate ring
assignments are made for Day, Night, and Timed Ring mode for each index, 001 to 250, in this
table. When assigned to ring to a VSF announcement, the call can be automatically dropped after
the announcement by entering ‘#’ after the announcement number.
When CO Lines are programmed to Ring an external AA/VM, VSF or Feature Server Group as
an Automated Attendant, the Ring signal can be on an immediate or delayed basis allowing other
stations/groups to be assigned Ring and answer prior to signaling the AA. The delay is defined in
seconds from 00 to 30.
PROCEDURE:
ICLID RING ASN TBL ATT
ENTER BIN NO (001-250)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 204 and enter the bin
number (Ex.001).
PRESS KEY
DAY NIGHT TIMED-R
Use the dial pad to enter the Index or Bin number (001 –
250).
Press the desired Flex button:
Button 1: Day Ring
Button 2: Night Ring
Button 3: Timed Ring
Use the dial pad to select the destination type:
Dial 1: Station
Dial 2: Hunt Group
Dial 3: VSF Announcement
Dial 4: AA Ring Time
Dial 5 : Net number
Use the dial pad to enter a value for the selected destination
type.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
167
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.8.6 PPP Attributes – PGM 205
In addition to remote access via an IP network connection, the system database may be
accessed remotely via MODU. The system will request a user id and password, which must
match one of the User Ids and passwords assigned. After matching id and password are entered,
the iPECS Home page is provided and Web Admin is available as explained in section 4.
PROCEDURE:
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 205.
PPP ATTRIBUTES
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-7)
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.8.6-1.
Used the dial pad to enter desired data, refer to Table
3.3.8.6-1 for appropriate entries.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.8.6-1 PPP ATTRIBUTES (PGM 205)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
PPP DEST STA
….
PPP USER ID 1
likppp01
PPP PASSWORD 1
Ipkts01
PPP USER ID 2
likppp02
PPP PASSWORD 2
Ipkts02
PPP SERVER IP ADDR
10 . 0 . 0 . 3
PPP CLIENT IP ADDR
10 . 0 . 0 . 2
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
If the incoming capability is 64 Kbps
unrestricted digital and the called
party number matches the PPP
destination, the system will
automatically answer the call and
request PPP ID and password.
System accepts this PPP ID 1.
Station
number
None
12 Character
likppp01
The password entered is used to
authorize PPP ID 1.
12 Character
Ipkts01
System accepts this PPP ID 2.
12 Character
likppp02
The password entered is used to
authorize PPP ID 2.
12 Character
Ipkts02
Operator can configure PPP Server
IP Address with this option. To
apply this option, system must be
restarted.
Operator can configure PPP Client
IP Address with this option. To
apply this option, system must be
restarted.
168
10.0.0.3
10.0.0.2
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.8.7 Prefix Dialing Table – PGM 206
With this table, three features can be supported.
1. Analog CO Call Charge with NPR metering.
2. SIP direct dialing with no wait inter-digit timer.
3. ISDN Prefix Call – ISDN en-block Dialing with Prefix Call Setup.
If first some digits (up to 8 digits) of outgoing dial number are matched with Prefix Code of each
table, this table can start work. By each CO-line (PGM 142 – F20), Table ID (0-6) can be set. This
table ID (PGM 142 – F20) is associated with PGM 206 – each table ID.
PROCEDURE:
PREFIX DIALING TABLES
ENTER BIN NO (001-500)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 206 and enter the bin
number (Ex.001).
PREFIX TABLE 001
PRESS FLEX KEY(01-10)
Use the dial-pad to enter the Table index number (bin).
Refer to Table 3.3.8.7-1
DISPLAY
2. Press the desired Flex button, refer to Table 3.3.8.7-1
Use the dial pad to enter desired data, refer to Table 3.3.8.71...
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.8.7-1 Prefix Dialing Table (PGM 206)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
001 PREFIX CODE
........
001 TABLE ID
(0 – 6) : 0
001 MIN DIGIT
(00 – 30) : 00
001 MAX DIGIT
(00 – 30) : 00
001 NUM OF TYPE(0-6)
UNKNOWN(0)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Enter Table ID (0-6). 0 means NOT
used.
0-6
0
Select the minimum dial digits (0030)
00-30
00
Select the minimum dial digits (0030)
00-30
00
Enter the Prefix code. (Max 8
digits)
Select Number of Type (0~6).
Unknown/International/National/
Network Spec/Subscriber/
Abbreviated /Reserved
169
0-6
UNKNOWN(0)
(0:Unknown
1:International
2:National
3:Network Spec.
4:Subscriber
5:Abbreviated
6:Reserved)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.8.7-1 Prefix Dialing Table (PGM 206)
BTN
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
001 NUM PLAN(0-6)
UNKNOWN(0)
001 SENDING COMPLETE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
001 CALL TYPE (0-5)
UNKNOWN(0)
001 CALL TIMER(sec)
(000 – 999) : 000
001 CALL COST
000000
001 FLAT RATE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
PREFIX TABLE INIT
PRESS [HOLD] TO INIT
DESCRIPTION
Select Numbering Plan (0~6).
Unknown/ISDN/Data
Numbering/Telex/National
Standard/Private /Reserved
Select Sending Complete option.
(On/Off)
Call Charge Type (0~5).
Unknown/Local/Long Distance/
International/Mobile/reserved
Call Charge Timer can be
assigned. By this timer value Call
Metering can be established.
Call Cost is calculated by CALL
TIMER. (ex : timer is 1 min, cost is
000020, then after 3 minute call,
total call cost is calculated to
000060)
If Flat Rate is ON, Flat Rate is
applied by CALL COST per a call
Initialize Prefix table.
170
RANGE
DEFAULT
UNKNOWN(0)
0-6
(0:Unknonw
1:ISDN/Telephony
2:Data numbering
3:Telex
4:National
standard
5:Private
6:Reserved)
0-1
OFF
0-5
UNKNOWN(0)
(0:Unknown
1:Local
2:Long Distance
3:International
4:Mobile
5:reserved)
000-999
000
000000-999999
000000
0-1
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.9 TABLES DATA – PGM 220 to 235
3.3.9.1 LCR Assignment Tables - PGM 220 to 223
The LCR Tables provide a mechanism to define the database, which will route outgoing calls,
particularly long distance, using the most cost effective route. User dialed digits are compared to
table entries and modified appropriately based on time of day, day of week, and assigned routes.
There are four LCR Tables, LCR Control Attributes, LCR Leading Digit Table, LCR Digit
Modification Table, and LCR Initialization Table.
3.3.9.1.1
LCR Control Attributes - PGM 220
The LCR Control Attributes, among others items, allows access to the LCR Access Mode
assignments. The LCR Access Modes define the user operations that will access the LCR feature.
The LCR Access Modes are:
Mode 00:
Mode 01:
Mode 02:
Mode 11:
Mode 12:
Mode 13:
LCR Disabled
Loop (user dials ‛9’ or CO/IP Group code (8xx) or presses a Loop button)
Loop and Internal (user dials digits without a CO/IP Access Code prefix)
Loop and Direct CO Line (user dialed CO Line Access Code, or presses {CO} button).
Loop, Direct CO Line, and Internal
Loop, Direct CO Line, Internal and Direct
In addition, days of the week are grouped into zones (Day Zones) and the time of day can be set
into three groups (Time Zones). Table 3.3.9.1.1-1 provides general descriptive information and
input ranges.
− PROCEDURE:
LCR CONTROL ATTRIBUTES
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-5)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 220.
Press Flex button 1~5, refer to Table 3.3.9.1.1-1.
For LCR Access Mode and Time Zones, use the dial-pad to
enter desired data and proceed to step 5). Refer to Table
3.3.9.1.1-1 for input ranges. For Day Zones press the Flex
button 1~7 to select the day of week, Monday: Flex button 1
to Sunday: Flex button 7.
For Day Zones, after selecting the desired day of week Flex
button, use the dial pad to enter the desired zone, 1~3.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
171
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.9.1.1-1 LCR CONTROL ATTRIBUTES (PGM 220)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
LCR ACCESS MODE (1-6)
(M00) DISABLE LCR
DAY ZN 1:1234567 2: 3:
M1 T2 W3 T4 F5 SA6 SU7
TIME ZONE 1
1:00-24 2: . .-. .
TIME ZONE 2
1:00-24 2: . .-. .
3:. .- . .
3:. .- . .
TIME ZONE 3
1:00-24 2: . .-. . 3 :. .- . .
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
This entry defines the effective LCR
modes, the modes by which the
user can access LCR.
M00: 1
M01: 2
M02: 3
M11: 4
M12: 5
M13: 6
Flex 1~7 +
1~3
1
For each day of the week, a Day
Zone (1 to 3) is assigned. The
active Day Zone is the Zone
assigned to the current day of the
week (Flex button 1~7).
This entry defines the hours of the
day during which Time Zone 1 is
active. Note hours not defined in
Time Zone 2 and 3 are
automatically part of Time Zone 1.
This entry defines the hours of the
day during which Time Zone 2 is
active.
This entry defines the hours of the
day during which Time Zone 3 is
active.
172
Zone 1: all
days of
the week
00~24
00~24
00~24
00~24
00~24
00~24
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
3.3.9.1.2
Issue 1.6
LCR Leading Digit Table — PGM 221
The Leading Digit Table is used to analyze the user-dialed digits to determine an appropriate
Digit Modification Table Index. LDT Tables are provided for 32 LDT Table for iPECS-1200, 10 for
the other systems. The Table is divided into bins. The applicable LCR Access Modes (LCR Type)
and the digits (up to the first 12) to be compared with the number dialed by the user are entered
in the Leading Digit Table bin. In addition, indices to the Digit Modification Table are defined for
each Time Zone of each Day Zone; refer to LCR Control Attributes PGM 220.
Note the mode used to access LCR must match the LCR Type and must be within the effective
LCR Access Mode assigned in PGM 220 to access the Digit Modification Table index. The
allowed LCR Types are:
1. CO Line or Loop access: User dials CO Line Access Code, CO/IP Group Access Code
(8xx), Any CO Line Access Code ‛9’, or presses a CO Line, CO/IP Group or Loop button.
2. Internal: User dials outgoing call while receiving Intercom dial tone with no CO/IP
access code.
3. Both: Both COL and Internal.
In addition, each Leading Digit Table bin has the option to require an authorization code entry.
When the user-dialed digits match an entry in the LCR Leading Digit Table, the system will check
the Authorization option for the LDT Table bin. If the Authorization option is enabled, the user
must enter a valid Authorization code to place the call.
PROCEDURE:
LDT TABLE
ENTER LDT TBL NO (01-10)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 221 and enter LDT
Table number (Ex.01).(eMG80:01~10/eMG800:1~32)
LDT 01 TABLE
ENTER LDT BIN (000)
Enter the LDT Table number (Ex.000).
000 BOTH CD: . . . . . . . .
DMT: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The system displays the first available bin (000~249) of the
Leading Digits Table. To select a different bin, use the dial
pad to enter the desired bin number.
Press the desired Flex button (1~6), refer to Table 3.3.9.1.21.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Leading Digit Table
data, refer to Table 3.3.9.1.2-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry. Note, as the
data is stored, the system sorts the LDT bins in ascending
order to allow rapid “look-up” of data. Thus, the bin number
will be changed appropriately.
173
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.9.1.2-1 LCR LEADING DIGITS (PGM 221)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
LDT 01/000 : LCR TYPE
LCR MODE : BOTH (3)
LDT 01/000 : LCR CODE
............
LDT 01/000 : DAY 1 DMT
INDEX(6DGT): . . . . . .
LDT 01/000: DAY 2 DMT
INDEX(6DGT): . . . . . .
LDT 01/000: DAY 3 DMT
INDEX(6DGT): . . . . . .
LDT 01/000: CHK PASSWORD
(1:ON / 0:OFF) : OFF
LDT 01/000: ZONE NO
(001-100) : 001
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
This entry defines the LCR modes that
will apply to this Leading Digit Table bin.
To apply the DMT index, the LCR Type
must be part of the LCR Mode defined
in PGM 220.
Up to 12 digits that, if matched by the
user dialed digits, will access the DMT
entry for the index assigned for the Day
and Time zone below.
This entry defines the Digit Modification
Table index (00~99) for each Time
Zone for Day Zone 1. The appropriate
index will be selected for the current
Day and Time Zone. An entry of 6 digits
(2 per Time Zone) must be entered.
This entry defines the Digit Modification
Table index (00~99) for each Time
Zone for Day Zone 2. The appropriate
index will be selected for the current
Day and Time Zone. An entry of 6 digits
(2 per Time Zone) must be entered.
This entry defines the Digit Modification
Table index (00~99) for each Time
Zone for Day Zone 3. The appropriate
index will be selected for the current
Day and Time Zone. An entry of 6 digits
(2 per Time Zone) must be entered.
If enabled (ON), when the dialed digits
match the LDT table digits, the system
will send second dial tone to request the
user input a valid Authorization code.
If the LDT Zone Number of a station/co
line is equal to this value, this LDT table
is available to the station/co line.
1: Internal
2: CO Line
3: Both
Both
174
12 digits
0 ~ 9 and
‘*’ as a
wildcard
00~99
3 DMT
indices
00~99
3 DMT
indices
00~99
3 DMT
indices
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
001-100
001
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.9.1.3
LCR Digit Modification Table — PGM 222
Using the index determined from the analysis of the LCR Leading Digits Table PGM 221, the
dialed number is modified in accordance with the Digit Modification Table and sent over the
CO/IP group assigned for the index.
Digits of the dialed number can be deleted based on the “Removal Position (RP)” and “Number of
Remove digits (NR)” and a digit stream can be inserted in the resulting number. Counting from
the first dialed digit, the Removal Position defines the location of the digit where removal begins
and, NR defines the number of digits to remove. The “Add Digit Stream” is then inserted in the
resulting number at the digit position assigned by the Add Position entry. The resulting number is
then dialed over the CO/IP path assigned. If the assigned path is not available, the “Alternate
DMT index” is used to determine the number and CO/IP path to be used.
Table 3.3.9.1.3-1 provides the displays, descriptions and entry ranges for the Digit Modification
Table.
PROCEDURE:
DMT TABLE
ENTER DMT BIN (00-99)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 222 and enter DMT bin
number (Ex.55).
55 A: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RP01 NR00 AP01 CG01 AD ..
Using the dial pad enter the desired Digit Modification Table
index.
Press the Flex button (1~6) for the desired Table entry, refer
to Table 3.3.9.1.3-1.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired Digit Modification Table
data, refer to Table 3.3.9.1.3-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.9.1.3-1 LCR DIGIT MODIFICATION (PGM 222)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DMT 55 ADDED DGT
..........................
DMT 55 REMOVAL POSITION
(01-12) : 01
DMT 55 NUM OF REMOVE
DIGITS (00-12) : 00
DMT 55 ADD POSITION
(01-13) : 01
DMT 55 CO/IP GROUP
(01-21) : 01
DMT 55 ALT INDEX
(00-99) : . .
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
This entry defines the digit stream to insert in
the number after digits are removed. Digits
0~9, ‛*’, ‛#’, and special characters:
[HOLD]: timed Pause
[DND]: Dial tone detect
[FLASH]: Billing station number
25 digits
DEFAULT
This entry defines the position of the digit
where removal is to begin, starting with the
1st dialed digit (01).
This entry defines the number of digits to
remove starting at the “Removal Position”.
01~12
01
00~12
00
This entry defines the position in the number
(after digits are removed) where the Add
Digits are inserted.
This entry defines the CO/IP Group that the
system will attempt to use for the call.
01~13
01
01~21
01
This entry defines an Alternate Digit
Modification Table Index to use if no path is
available in the assigned CO/IP Group.
00~99
175
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.9.1.3-1 LCR DIGIT MODIFICATION (PGM 222)
BTN
7
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DMT 55 NET NUM PLAN BIN
(000-251) : . . .
8
DMT 55 SMDR CODE
....
3.3.9.1.4
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
This entry defines the Net Number Plan
Table bin that the system will attempt to use
for the transit out call.
This only used for TNET with CM. This code
will be send to CM when the TNET status is
changed from Local survival mode to bypass
mode.
000~251
DEFAULT
4 digit
LCR Table Initialize — PGM 223
The LCR Table Initialize allows global values to be assigned to the various Digit Modification
Table entries. In addition, the LCR Leading Digits and LCR Digit Modification Tables can be
initialized, no entries state.
PROCEDURE:
INITIALIZE LCR DB
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-6)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 223.
Press the Flex button (1~6) for the desired Table entry, refer
to Table 3.3.9.1.4-1.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired LCR data, refer to
Table 3.3.9.1.4-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.9.1.4-1 LCR TABLE INITIALIZE (PGM 223)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
ENTER DMT INIT VAL(DAY1)
.. .. ..
ENTER DMT INIT VAL(DAY2)
.. . . . .
ENTER DMT INIT VAL(DAY3)
.. . . . .
ENTER CO GRP INIT VAL
..
ENTER ALT INDEX INIT VA
..
INITIALIZE ALL LCR ?
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
This entry permits the global setting of the 00~99 3 DMT
indices
Digit Modification Table Time Zone 1 to 3
indices for Day Zone 1.
This entry permits the global setting of the 00~99 3 DMT
indices
Digit Modification Table Time Zone 1 to 3
indices for Day Zone 2.
This entry permits the global setting of the 00~99 3 DMT
Digit Modification Table Time Zone 1 to 3
indices
indices for Day Zone 3.
This entry permits the global setting of the
01~21
CO/IP Group to be used for LCR calls.
This entry permits the global setting of the
Digit Modification Alternate Index.
Pressing [Save] will return the LCR LDT
and DMT tables to the default (no entries)
setting.
176
00~99
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.9.2 Toll Tables – PGM 224
There are five Toll restriction Tables and each has a pair of Table entries. Each pair consists of
an Allow and a Deny entry. Allow and Deny entries for Table ‛A’ apply to Station and DISA Class
of Service 2, 4 and 11. Allow and Deny entries for Table ‛B’ apply to Station and DISA Class of
Service 3, 4 and 11. Allow and Deny entries for Table ‛C’ apply to Station and DISA Class of
Service 5 and 6. Allow and Deny entries for Table ‛D’ apply to Station and DISA Class of Service
8, 10 and 11. Allow and Deny entries for Table ‛E’ apply to Station and DISA Class of Service 9,
10 and 11.
For each Table, there can be up to 50 separate Allow and Deny entries (total of 100) of up to 20
digits. Entries in the Tables can be any digit (0-9), “#” as a wild card (don’t care) digit, or “*” as an
end of entry digit.
Based on Table entries, stations or DISA users are allowed or denied dialing specified numbers.
The following rules apply to establishing restrictions based on the Table entries:
-
If the appropriate Allow/Deny Table pair has no entries and COS is 2 to 4, or 8 to 9, no
restrictions are applied. If the COS is 5 or 6, no Long Distance dialing is allowed.
-
If entries are only made in the Allow Table, only those numbers entered can be dialed,
all other dialed numbers will be restricted.
-
If entries are only made in the Deny Table, only those numbers entered will be
restricted and all other numbers can be dialed.
-
When there are entries in both the Allow and Deny Table pair, if the number is in the
Deny Table, the number will be restricted otherwise the number can be dialed without
restriction.
PROCEDURE:
TOLL EXCEPTION TABLES
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-10)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 224.
ALLOW TABLE A
ENTER BIN NO (01-50)
Press Flex button 1~10:
Button 1: Allow Table A
Button 2: Deny Table A
Button 3: Allow Table B
Button 4: Deny Table B
Button 5: Allow Table C
Button 6: Deny Table C
Button 7: Allow Table D
Button 8: Deny Table D
Button 9: Allow Table E
Button 10: Deny Table E
Use the dial-pad to select a bin number (01~50).
Use the dial-pad to enter the dialed number desired (up to
20 digits). Use “#” as a wild card to represent any digit and,
at the end of an entry, dial “*” to end the entry. To delete a
Toll Table entry, press the [SPEED] button.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
177
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.9.3 Emergency Code Table – PGM 226
The Emergency Code Table is used to identify emergency numbers which, when dialed, will
override all COS dialing restrictions. An Emergency Code number may be up to fifteen (15) digits
in length.
PROCEDURE:
EMERGENCY SVC CALL
ENTER BIN NO (01 - 10)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 226 and enter the bin
number (Ex.01).
EMERGENCY SVC CALL
BIN 01: 911
Use the dial-pad for the desired Emergency code entry, 01 ~
10.
Use the dial-pad to enter the Emergency code number. After
entering the number dial “*”, the number is displayed with an
“E” indicating END of entry.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
3.3.9.4 Authorization Codes Table – PGM 227
Authorization codes are employed to control access to the system resources and facilities.
Walking COS, CO/IP Group access, DISA callers, and certain Call Forward types may require
input of a valid Authorization code. Codes up to 12 digits may be entered into the system
database. The station has an associated Station Authorization bin, which can be assigned by the
user from the user‘s telephone. The System Authorization codes are stored in System bins and
are entered or deleted only through Admin.
PROCEDURE:
AUTHORIZATION CODE
F1:STA_AUTH F2:SYS_AUTH
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 227.
Press Flex button 1 or 2 to select the desired entry:
Flex button 1 - Station authorization code
Flex button 2 - System Authorization code
For Flex button 1 enter a station range, enter the same
station number twice for a single station entry.
Then press Flex button 1 to set the password and Flex
button 2 to set the COS (Day, Night and Timed).
Use the dial-pad to enter the Authorization code or COS.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
178
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.9.4-1 AUTHORIZATION CODES (PGM 227)
BTN
1
1-1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
AUTHORIZATION CODE
ENTER STA RANGE
STATION AUTHORIZATION
100-110 : . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTHORIZATION CODE
ENTER BIN NO(001-360)
SYSTEM AUTHORIZATION
F1:SET_PWD F 2:SET_COS
2-1
2-2
SYSTEM AUTHORIZATION
001: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SET COS :
F1:DAY F2 :NIGHT F3 :TIME
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Authorization code for each station
can be assigned up to 12 digits in
length (enter STA range (Ex.
100110)).
Authorization codes for system-wide
use can be assigned up to 12 digits in
length.
Selects attribute, code or Class of
Service.
100-239
DEFAULT
eMG80:001~360,
eMG800:1~1200
Press Flex button 1 or 2 to select the
desired entry:
Flex button 1 – Set Password
Flex button 2 – Set class of service
A password of up to 12 digits is
defined.
Flex button1-2
Establishes the COS associated with
the System Authorization code during
Day, Night and Timed Service modes.
Flex button1-3
3.3.9.5 Customer Call Routing/VSF AA Table – PGM 228
The system incorporates IVR (Integrated Voice Response) capabilities called CCR (Customer
Call Routing). After or during a VSF AA Announcement, a caller may dial a digit to select a
destination or route for the call. The CCR/VSF-AA Routing Audio Text Table defines the
destination associated with digits dialed by the caller in response to the VSF AA Announcement
(01-70). Up to 70 single-level Audio Text menus may be assigned or, multi-level menu structures
(maximum 70 levels) can be established using one menu as a destination for the previous level.
PROCEDURE:
CUSTOM CALL ROUTING
SELECT CCR TABLE (01-70)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 228 and select CCR
table (Ex.01).
CCR TABLE 01
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-14)
Use the dial-pad to select a CCR Table index, 01~70. The
index number 01-70 is the VSF Announcement number.
179
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
PROCEDURE:
CCR TABLE 01
INPUT 1 : NOT ASSIGNED
2. Press a Flex button (1~13, 10=0) to assign a route for the
associated CCR dialed digit. (11~13 is assigned to busy,
no answer, error destinations)
− Flex button 01-10 is matched with input dial digit from
outside user. The flex key number 10 is matched with dial
digit 0.
− Flex button 11-13 is related with CCR re-route Busy / Error /
No Answer destination – The destination type is Tone /
Attendant / Hunt Group / VSF Announcement.
Flex button 14 is CCR One Digit Only option. If this option is
set to ON, user can dial only one digit. If this option is set to
OFF, user can dial more than one digit. That means CCR or
DISA service can be possible.
CCR TABLE 01
INPUT 1 : ...
Use the dial-pad to enter the Type and Value for Destination,
refer to Table 3.3.9.5-1 for Type and value codes.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.9.5-1 CCR DESTINATIONS (PGM 228)
TYPE
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
DESCRIPTION
Route to a Station
Route to a Hunt Group
Route with System Speed Dial
Route as PBX Transfer with System Speed Dial (Flash then dial speed dial digits)
Route to VSF Announcement
Route to VSF Announcement and disconnect
Route to Networked Station
Conference Room
Internal Page (eMG80:1~35 / eMG800:1~100)
External page
All Call Page
Route to voice mail (station group/station number)
Company Directory (USA Only)
Record VM Greeting (USA Only)
UCS system conference group (eMG80:100~139 / eMG800:100~259)
180
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.9.6 Executive/Secretary Table – PGM 229
Stations can be paired as Executive/Secretary pairs so that when the Executive enters DND,
intercom and transferred calls are automatically routed to the Secretary. An Executive may have
only one Secretary however, a Secretary can be assigned to multiple Executives. A Secretary of
one pair may be the Executive of another however, assignments that form a loop-back are not
allowed. In addition, when active, the Secretary can be assigned to receive the Executive‘s voice
messages, refer to Station Attributes III PGM 113 button 10.
PROCEDURE:
EXEC/SEC PAIRS
ENTER BIN NO (01-36)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 229 and enter the bin
number (Ex.01).
EXEC/SEC PAIR 01
PRESS FLEX KEY(1-7)
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired Executive/Secretary
pair bin.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.9.6-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.9.6-1 EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY PAIRS (PGM 229)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
EXEC/SEC PAIR 01
PAIR 1 : . . . /. . .
CO CALL TO SEC
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
CALL EXEC IF SEC DND
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
EXEC GRADE
(01-12): 12
ICM CALL TO SEC
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
SEC. AUTO ANS
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
EXEC GROUP
(00-50) : 00
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
If desired, all incoming CO calls to the Exec.
The call is routed to the Secretary’s station
regardless of the Executive’s status.
If the Secretary is in DND, Executive calls
can be routed back to the Executive.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Higher (or equal) grade Executives can
override the Executive/Secretary Forward
th
feature (5 : ICM call to SEC) to call a lower
grade Executive. Highest grade: 01, Lowest
grade: 12.
If this option is ON, all internal calls to the
executive station (except for calls from
higher or same grade executive) are routed
to the Secretary’s station regardless of the
Executive’s status.
8801 Default value
Korea, India, Israel, Turkey,
Thailand : ON / Otherwise : OFF
When executive call to the secretary who is
in ‘T’ mode. The call will be answered by
hands free mode if it is ON.
If Group is greater than 1, it works that lower
grade executive can call to higher grade
executive directly when they are same
group.
01~12
12
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
00-50
00
Assigns Executive/Secretary pair stations.
181
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.9.7 Flexible DID Conversion Table – PGM 231
When the received DID digits are converted as in PGM 230, the resulting 4 digit number may be
used as an index to the Flexible DID Conversion Table. The Flexible DID Table index is used
when DID Line is assigned a Conversion type 2; refer to PGM 145 Flex button 2. Based on the
index from PGM 230 and the system mode (Day, Night or Timed) a destination for the DID call is
determined. The destination can be a VSF AA Announcement with CCR assigned allowing
further routing of the call or can route using the ICLID routing tables.
PROCEDURE:
FLEX DID CONV TABLE
F1:INPUT F2:INIT F3:DEL
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 231.
FLEX DID CONV TBL INPUT
ENTER BIN NO (0000-9999)
Select Flex button 1~3:
Flex button 1: Input new data
Flex button 2: Initialize Table
Flex button 3: Delete entry
Enter the bin number (Ex.0001)
TABLE BIN 001
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-9)
Use the dial pad to enter a Table index (0000~9999).
Press Flex button 1~9 to select the desired destination, refer
to Table 3.3.9.7-1.
Use the dial pad to enter the desired type and value for the
destination, refer to Table 3.3.9.7-2.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.9.7-1 FLEXIBLE DID CONVERSION (PGM 231)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
TABLE 001 NAME
………...
TABLE 001 DAY DEST
NONE (01-15)
TABLE 001 NIGHT DEST
NONE (01-15)
TABLE 001 TIMED_R DEST
NONE (01-15)
TABLE 001 REROUTE DEST
NONE (01-15)
DESCRIPTION
Name associated with the
destination.
RANGE
11 characters
Destination setting for Day Ring
mode.
01-15
Destination setting for Night Ring
mode. Table 3.3.9.7-2.
01-15
Destination setting for Timed Ring
mode. Table 3.3.9.7-2.
01-15
Destination setting for Reroute Dest
mode. Table 3.3.9.7-2.
01-15
182
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.9.7-1 FLEXIBLE DID CONVERSION (PGM 231)
BTN
6
7
8
9
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
TABLE 001 USE ICLID
(1:ON/O:OFF) : OFF
TABLE 001 AUTO RING TBL
(00-16),16:N/A) : 00
TABLE 001 MOH : (00-10)
REFER TO CO HOLD(00)
TABLE 001 RING TONE
(00-16, 0:N/A) : 00
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
A DID Conversion Table index can
0: OFF
OFF
be assigned to employ ICLID
1: ON
routing, section 3.3.8.4.
A DID Conversion Table Index can
00-16
00
be assigned to employ an Auto ring
mode table, section 3.3.9.9.
A Music source is assigned so that
Refer to CO
00-10
(00: Refer to CO
calls to the destination receive
Hold
Hold
audio from the source in place of
01: INT Music
ring-back tone.
02: EXT Music
03: VSF MOH
04: SLT MOH1
05: SLT MOH2
06: SLT MOH3
07: SLT MOH4
08: SLT MOH5
09: VSF MOH2
10: VSF MOH3
Ring tone of destination is followed
2 digits.
00
this ring tone value.
00~16
Table 3.3.9.7-2 FLEXIBLE DID DESTINATION (PGM 231)
TYPE
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
DEFAULT
DESCRIPTION
Route to a Station
Route to a Hunt Group
Route with System Speed Dial
Route as PBX Transfer with System Speed Dial
(Flash then dial speed dial digits)
Route to VSF AA Announcement
Route to VSF AA Announcement and disconnect
Route to a Networking Station
Conference Room
Internal Page
External page
All Call Page
Voice Mail Box Group
Voice Mail Box Station
ICLID Ring Assignment Table
Company Directory
(USA Only)
Record VM Greeting
(USA Only)
183
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.9.8 System Speed Zone Table – PGM 232
The System Speed Dial numbers can be grouped into zones. Only stations allowed can access
numbers within a zone, allowing System Speed Dials to be partitioned. Each zone can be
assigned to apply the appropriate Station and CO Line COS for the Speed Dial number prior to
dialing.
PROCEDURE:
SYSTEM SPEED ZONE PGM
ENTER BIN NO (01-10)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 232 and enter the bin
number (Ex.01).
SYSTEM SPEED ZONE 1
F1:ZN F 2:ST F3:TK F4:AK
Using the dial-pad, enter the zone number, 01~10.
Press Flex button 1~3 for the desired zone characteristic,
refer to Table 3.3.9.8-1.
Using the dial pad, enter the desired data as indicated in
Table 3.3.9.8-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.9.8-1 SPEED ZONE (PGM 232)
BTN
1
2
3
4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
ENTER NEW ZONE RANGE
ZONE 1 : 2200- 4999
ENTER STA RANGE
ZONE 1 : 100 – 239
SPEED ZONE 1 TOLL CHK
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
SPEED ZONE 1 AUTH CHK
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
2200-4999
eMG80:2200~4999,
eMG800:2200~9999
Station range for zone.
100-239
eMG80:100~239,
eMG800:1000~2199
Assignment to apply toll
restriction.
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
Speed Dial Authorization Check
for zone.
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
Speed Dial Bin range for zone.
184
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.9.9 Auto Ring Mode – PGM 233
The system can automatically select the Ring and COS Mode based on time of day and day of
week. Three Ring and COS modes are supported, Day, Night, and Timed modes. The ring
assignments are as defined in CO/IP Ring Assignment - PGMs 144. The COS assignments are
defined in the DISA COS - PGM 166.
The start times for Day, Night and start and end times for timed modes are entered for each day
of week. When the Timed mode ends, the system reverts to the appropriate mode based on the
Day/Night settings and the time-of-day. The Attendant can override the automatic selection and
select the desired system Mode (Day, Night, and Timed). A separate Auto Ring Table can be
established for each ICM Tenancy Group - PGM 125 (indices 1 ~ 15) and for the system (index
00).
PROCEDURE:
WEEKLY TIME TABLE
DIAL DIGIT (00-15)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 233 and enter Dial digit
(Ex.00).(eMG80:00~15/eMG800:00~32)
WEEKLY TIME TBL 0
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-7)
Use the dial-pad to enter a tenant Table index or 00 for the
system (00~15).
Press the Flex button 1~7 for the desired day of week
(Monday ~Sunday) followed by Flex button 1~3 for the
desired ring mode (Day, Night, Timed), refer to Table
3.3.9.9-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter a time (military time), 0000 to 2359.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.9.9-1 AUTO RING MODE ASSIGNMENT (PGM 233)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
MON DAY-09:00 NITE-18:00
TDS-..:.. TDE-..:..
Monday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring
mode start times and TIMED mode
end times.
0000~2359
TUE DAY-09:00 NITE-18:00
TDS-..:.. TDE-..:..
Tuesday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring
mode start times and TIMED mode
end times.
0000~2359
WED DAY-09:00 NITE-18:00
TDS-..:.. TDE-..:..
Wednesday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED
ring mode start times and TIMED
mode end times.
0000~2359
THU DAY-09:00 NITE-18:00
TDS-..:.. TDE-..:..
Thursday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring
mode start times and TIMED mode
end times.
0000~2359
FRI DAY-09:00 NITE-18:00
TDS-..:.. TDE-..:..
Friday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring
mode start times and TIMED mode
end times.
0000~2359
DAY: 9:00
NITE: 18:00
TDS: ..:..
TDE: ..:..
DAY: 9:00
NITE: 18:00
TDS: ..:..
TDE: ..:..
DAY: 9:00
NITE: 18:00
TDS: ..:..
TDE: ..:..
DAY: 9:00
NITE: 18:00
TDS: ..:..
TDE: ..:..
DAY: 9:00
NITE: 18:00
TDS: ..:..
TDE: ..:..
185
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.9.9-1 AUTO RING MODE ASSIGNMENT (PGM 233)
BTN
6
7
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
SAT DAY-09:00 NITE-18:00
TDS-..:.. TDE-..:..
Saturday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring
mode start times and TIMED mode
end times.
0000~2359
SUN DAY-09:00 NITE-18:00
TDS-..:.. TDE-..:..
Sunday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring
mode start times and TIMED mode
end times.
0000~2359
DAY: 9:00
NITE: 18:00
TDS: ..:..
TDE: ..:..
DAY: 9:00
NITE: 18:00
TDS: ..:..
TDE: ..:..
3.3.9.10 Voice Mail Dialing Table – PGM 234
When an external Voice Mail system is used that employs in-band signaling, a digit sequence
must be defined for the system to signal various call characteristics to the Voice Mail system. The
voice mail uses the sequences to determine appropriate announcements or further call routing.
The Table permits the definition of digits as either a prefix or suffix to other digits (station number
for mailbox identification). Sequences are defined for such call characteristics as Put Mail, Get
Mail, No Answer call, etc.
PROCEDURE:
VOICE MAIL DIALING TBL
DIAL DIGIT (1-9)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 234.
Use the dial-pad to enter a table entry (1~9), refer to Table
3.3.9.10-1.
Use the dial-pad to select Prefix or Suffix and the digit
sequence, use the [MSG/CALLBK] button to enter a Pause,
refer to Table 3.3.9.10-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.9.10-1 VOICE MAIL DIAL (PGM 234)
BTN
1
2
3
4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
VOICE MAIL 1
PREFIX OR SUFFIX (1-2)
VOICE MAIL 2
PREFIX OR SUFFIX (1-2)
VOICE MAIL 3
PREFIX OR SUFFIX (1-2)
VOICE MAIL 4
PREFIX OR SUFFIX (1-2)
DESCRIPTION
Code sent when the voice mail is to
receive call to record a message.
Put Mail
Code sent when the voice mail is to
playback recorded messages.
Get Mail
Code sent when the voice mail is to
receive a call while the user is busy.
Busy Mail
Code sent when the voice mail is to
receive a call while the user is in
DND.
DND Mail
186
RANGE
DEFAULT
1: Prefix
2: Suffix
Any digits
1: Prefix
2: Suffix
Any digits
1: Prefix
2: Suffix
Any digits
1: Prefix
2: Suffix
Any digits
P#
P##
P#*3P
P#*4P
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.9.10-1 VOICE MAIL DIAL (PGM 234)
BTN
5
6
7
8
9
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
VOICE MAIL 5
PREFIX OR SUFFIX (1-2)
VOICE MAIL 6
PREFIX OR SUFFIX (1-2)
VOICE MAIL 7
PREFIX OR SUFFIX (1-2)
VOICE MAIL 8
PREFIX OR SUFFIX (1-2)
VOICE MAIL 9
DISCONNECT [DIAL DGT_1]
DESCRIPTION
Code sent when the voice mail is to
receive a call when the user did not
answer.
No Answer Mail
Code sent when the voice mail is to
receive a call when a dialing error
exists.
Error Mail
It is reserved.
RANGE
DEFAULT
1: Prefix
2: Suffix
Any digits
P#*5P
1: Prefix
2: Suffix
Any digits
P#*6P
1: Prefix
2: Suffix
Any digits
It is reserved.
1: Prefix
2: Suffix
Any digits
Code sent when the voice mail is to
disconnect a call.
Disconnect Mail
1: Prefix
2: Suffix
Any digits
*****
3.3.9.11 Registration & Fractional Module Table – PGM 235
When multiple iPECS eMG are located on the same LAN, it may be desirable to register add-on
devices employing the Registration Table.
PROCEDURE:
REGISTRATION TBL
ENTER TBL NO(1-5)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 235 and enter Table
number (Ex.1).
REG TBL 1: NO MAC INFO
MAX PORT : 00, DEV ID: . . . .
Use the dial-pad to select a Table entry (1~5).
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.9.11-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired data, refer to Table
3.3.9.11-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.9.11-1 MAC REGISTRATION (PGM 235)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
TBL 1: SET MAC ADDR
MAC 1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TBL 1: SET MAX PORT
NO OF PORT : 00
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
00-99
00
Enter the MAC address of the
device to register.
Enter maximum number of ports
(channels) for the device. For a 00
entry the system will accept
physical port number.
187
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.9.11-1 MAC REGISTRATION (PGM 235)
BTN
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
TBL 1: DEVICE ID
DEVICE ID : ....
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Enter device ID when it has multiple
device ID in Board/Gateway.
0-255
0 (N/A)
3.3.9.12 Mobile Extension Table – PGM 236
A mobile phone can be used in conjunction with an iPECS Phone. The Mobile phone can access
system resources available to the user‘s wired phone and will receive ring for incoming iPECS
calls. The user may be allowed to enable the Mobile extension and define the mobile number.
The system can be defined to employ a specific CO/IP Line Group to place calls to the Mobile
phone.
The Mobile Extension Table also defines Notification of new VSF messages. When a new
message is received for a user in the VSF, the system will call the assigned ‘Tel Number’
notifying the user of the new message.
PROCEDURE:
MOBILE EXTENSION TABLE
ENTER STA NUMBER
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 236 and enter STA
number (Ex.100).
100 : MOBIL EXT ATTR
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-14)
Use the dial-pad to enter the desired station number.
Press the Flex button for the desired item; refer to Table
3.3.9.12-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the required data.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.9.12-1 MOBILE EXTENSION (PGM 236)
BTN
1
2
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100 : PGM AUTHORITY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100 : USAGE
DISABLE
(0 -2)
100 : ACCESS CO GRP
CO GRP : 01
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
The user may be allowed to activate
the mobile extension feature.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: DISABLE
1: MOBILE
EXT
2: FAIL OVER
eMG80:1-21
eMG800:1~201
DISABLE
Mobile extension feature can be
enabled and Fail Over to Mobile
extension can be included
CO group used to call (ring) the
mobile extension.
188
01
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.9.12-1 MOBILE EXTENSION (PGM 236)
BTN
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
100 : TEL NUMBER
………………………..
TABLE 001 CLI
………………………
100 : HUNT CALL ENABLE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100 : VSF NOTIFY
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100 : NOTIFY RETRY CNT
(1~9) : 3
100 : NOTIFY RETRY INT
(1~3) : 3
100 : NOTIFY BY MY CLI
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100 : CALL BACK
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
100 : DELAY TIMER
(000-255) : 000
100 : ANNOUNCE
(00-200) : 00
100 : SUFFIX DID TBL T
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Telephone number of the Mobile
extension.
Not assigned
When the mobile Telephone
number and CLI do not match, the
CLI entered here is used to
authorize incoming calls from the
mobile.
When the paired station is a
member of a hunt group (ACD,
Circular or Terminal), group calls
can be sent to the active mobile
extension.
Not assigned
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
1~9
3
1~3
(Minutes)
3
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
000~255
0
It can be announced for remote
control.
0~200
0
It provide flexible DID table index
when DID type 2 is used.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Enables outbound notification by
the system when the VSF has
unheard messages.
Defines the number of attempts the
system will make to complete a
notification when receiving busy/noanswer.
Defines the time between
notification attempts. If a notification
fails, the system will retry after the
timer expires.
When the system sends CLI to the
mobile extension, the CLI can be
either the original caller’s CLI or the
CLI of station.
If it is set to “ON”, incoming mobile
extension call will be released
before answered and system places
a call to mobile extension. After
mobile extension answers, the dial
tone is provided and mobile
extension can make internal or
external call.
Mobile extension call will be placed
after delay time.
189
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.9.13 Hot Desk Attributes – PGM 250
A Hot Desk station allows a user to login for access to the system features and resources. Once
logged in, the user is provided access to system features and resources employing the database
for the user‘s assigned station.
PROCEDURE:
HOTDESK ATTRIBUTE
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-3)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 250.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.9.13-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the appropriate data.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.9.13-1 HOT DESK ATTRIBUTES (PGM 250)
BTN
1
2
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
NO OF AGENT (000-140)
000
VIEW AGENT RANGE
N/A
AUTO LOGOUT TMR (hour)
(00-24) : 00
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Assign number of hot desk
agents.
0-140
000
0~24 Hrs.
00
View the assigned station
number for agents.
A Hot desk station will
return to inactive if the
logged in user takes no
action for the Auto Logout
timer.
190
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.9.14 CO Call Rerouting – PGM 252
System can reroute incoming call to CO. If called number matched with compare digits of Table
252, the call are routed to Rerouting number.
PROCEDURE:
CRR ATTRIBUTE
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-3)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 252.
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.9.14-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the appropriate data.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.9.14-1 CALL REROUTING ATTRIBUTES (PGM 252)
BTN
1
2
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
ENABLE CRR
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
INIT CRR
PRESS [Save] KEY
CRR ATTRIBUTES
ENTER BIN NO (000-169)
CRR TABLE 000
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-4)
DESCRIPTION
Enable CRR
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Initialize all data
If PGM 252-BTN1 is set ‘ON’,
BTN3 is available.
(Ex. enter the bin number 000)
Press the desired Flex button,
refer to Table 3.3.9.14-2
000-169
Flex button 1-4
Table 3.3.9.14-2 CRR TABLE ATTRIBUTES (PGM 252)
BTN
1
2
3
4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
CRR 000 COMPARE CO GRP
GRP NO (01-20) : 01
CRR 000 RECEIVE DGTS
......
CRR 000 CO+TEL NUMBER
..........................
CRR 000 TYPE
...
DESCRIPTION
Enter group number for compare
digits in incoming.
RANGE
DEFAULT
01-20
01
Enter receive digits.
..
Enter co group (or individual co,
access co) plus telephone number.
..
N/A : press digit ‘0’
NET TYPE : ‘1’ for transit out
DISA TYPE : ‘2’ for using DISA
191
0-2
N/A
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.9.15 Digit Conversion Tables – PGM 270
The Digit Conversion Table index is assigned to the Station and CO line. And the digit conversion
can be applied according to the Apply Time Type (Unconditional, Day/Night/Timed or LCR
Day/Time) differently.
Each Table includes 200 entries of up to 16 digits; entries in the Tables can be any digit (01–15),
or “*”, “#”. Each Index can be applied by Apply Option. (All/Station/CO line/Disable)
PROCEDURE:
DIGIT CONVERSION TABLE
ENTER TABLE NO (01–15)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 270 and enter the table
number (Ex. 01).(eMG80 : 1-15 / eMG800:1-32)
01 DIGIT CONVERSION
ENTER BIN NO (001–200)
2. Dial Digit Conversion Table Number (01–15) and enter
the bin umber (Ex.001).
01/001 DIGIT CONV.
PRESS FLEX KEY (01–18)
3. Dial conversion Bin No (001–200).
−
−
−
−
−
−
Flex 1: Apply Time Type
Flex 2: Dialed Digit
Flex 3: Unconditional Changed Digit
Flex 4−6: Day/Night Timed Changed Digit
Flex 7−15: LCR Time (Day/Time Zone Changed Digit)
Flex 16 : Ring mode table
− Flex 17 : Apply Option
− Flex 18: ARS CO Access CO
4. Use the dial–pad to enter the dialed number.
5. Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.9.15-1 DIGIT CONVERSION TABLE ATTRIBUTES (PGM 270)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01/001 APPLY T–TYPE
(0–2): UNCONDITIONAL
01/001 DIALED DIGIT
…………………..
01/001 UNCOND CHANGED
…………………..
01/001 DAY CHANGED
…………………..
01/001 NIGHT CHANGED
…………………..
01/001 TIMED CHANGED
…………………..
DESCRIPTION
The Apply time type to be applied
when the dialed digit is dialed.
The dialed digits
The dialed digits are converted to this
digit stream unconditionally.
RANGE
0: Unconditional Unconditional
1: Follow DNT
2: Follow LCR
Max. 24 digits
Max. 24 digits
The dialed digits are converted to this Max. 24 digits
digit stream when Apply Time type is
‘FOLLOW DNT’ and current ring mode
is DAY.
The dialed digits are converted to this Max. 24 digits
digit stream when Apply Time type is
‘FOLLOW DNT’ and current ring mode
is NIGHT.
The dialed digits are converted to this Max. 24 digits
digit stream when Apply Time type is
‘FOLLOW DNT’ and current ring mode
is TIMED.
192
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.9.15-1 DIGIT CONVERSION TABLE ATTRIBUTES (PGM 270)
BTN
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01/001 D1/T1 CHANGED
…………………..
01/001 D1/T2 CHANGED
…………………..
01/001 D1/T3 CHANGED
…………………..
01/001 D2/T1 CHANGED
…………………..
01/001 D2/T2 CHANGED
…………………..
01/001 D2/T3 CHANGED
…………………..
01/001 D3/T1 CHANGED
…………………..
01/001 D3/T2 CHANGED
…………………..
01/001 D3/T3 CHANGED
…………………..
01/001 RING MODE TBL
(00–15) : 0
01/001 APPLY OPTION
(0–3): ALL
01/001 ARS CO ACCESS CO
........
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
The dialed digits are converted to this
digit stream when Apply Time type is
‘FOLLOW LCR’ and day zone is 1 and
time zone is 1.
The dialed digits are converted to this
digit stream when Apply Time type is
‘FOLLOW LCR’ and day zone is 1 and
time zone is 2.
The dialed digits are converted to this
digit stream when Apply Time type is
‘FOLLOW LCR’ and day zone is 1 and
time zone is 3.
The dialed digits are converted to this
digit stream when Apply Time type is
‘FOLLOW LCR’ and day zone is 2 and
time zone is 1.
The dialed digits are converted to this
digit stream when Apply Time type is
‘FOLLOW LCR’ and day zone is 2 and
time zone is 2.
The dialed digits are converted to this
digit stream when Apply Time type is
‘FOLLOW LCR’ and day zone is 2 and
time zone is 3.
The dialed digits are converted to this
digit stream when Apply Time type is
‘FOLLOW LCR’ and day zone is 3 and
time zone is 1.
The dialed digits are converted to this
digit stream when Apply Time type is
‘FOLLOW LCR’ and day zone is 3 and
time zone is 2.
The dialed digits are converted to this
digit stream when Apply Time type is
‘FOLLOW LCR’ and day zone is 3 and
time zone is 3.
The dialed digits are converted
according to the auto ring mode time.
Max. 24 digits
The Apply Option can be applied
according to the caller.
If a selected path is not available for
some reason (All Busy, Line Fault etc.)
after digit conversion, Alternative
Route Selection (ARS) will connect
calls using predefined designated ARS
digit in digit conversion table.
193
DEFAULT
Max. 24 digits
Max. 24 digits
Max. 24 digits
Max. 24 digits
Max. 24 digits
Max. 24 digits
Max. 24 digits
Max. 24 digits
00-15
0
0. All
1. Reserved
2. CO Line
3. Disable
All
Max. 8 Digits
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.10 NETWORKING DATA – PGM 320 to 324
3.3.10.1 Network Basic Attribute – PGM 320
PROCEDURE:
NET BASIC ATTRIBUTE
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-8)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 320.
Press the Flex button 1~8 for the desired setting, refer to
Table 3.3.10.1-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the required data.
Press the [Save] button to store the new data.
Table 3.3.10.1-1 NETWORK BASIC ATTRIBUTE (PGM 320)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
NET ENABLE
(1:ON/:OFF) :OFF
NET RETRY COUNT
(00-99) :00
NET CNIP ENABLE
(1:ON/:OFF) :ON
NET CONP ENABLE
(1:ON/:OFF) :OFF
NET SIGNAL METHOD
(1:FAC/:UUS) :FAC
NET CAS ENABLE
(1:ON/:OFF) :OFF
NET VPN ENABLE
(1:ON/:OFF) :OFF
NET CC RETAIN MODE
(1:ON/:OFF) :OFF
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Enable Networking function
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Not used.
00-99
00
The name of calling station is sent
to the called system between
iPECS eMG. CNIP is displayed at
called party stations display based
on the programming.
Reserved for future usage.
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Select the information element type
for QSIG supplementary service
message.
Not used.
0: UUS
1: FAC
FAC
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Not used.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Not used.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
194
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.10.2 Network Supplementary Attribute – PGM 321
PROCEDURE:
NET SUPPLEMENTARY ATTR
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-9)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 321.
Press Flex button 1~9 for the desired setting, refer to Table
3.3.10.2-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the required data, refer to Table
3.3.10.2-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the new data.
Table 3.3.10.2-1 NETWORK SUPPLEMENTARY ATTRIBUTE (PGM 321)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
NET TRANSFER MODE
(1:RERT/0:JOIN) :REROUT
TCP PORT FOR BLF
(9500-9999) :9500
UDP PORT FOR BLF
(9500-9999) :9501
BLF MANAGER IP
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
DURATION OF BLF STS
(01-99) 100 mm sec : 10
MULTI CAST IP
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
NET TRANS FAULT RCL TMR
(001-300)sec : 010
VOIP CALL REROUTE CO GR
(00-20) : 00
BLF SERVICE USAGE
(1:ON/:OFF) :ON
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
1: RERT
0: JOIN
REROUT
TCP port for sending BLF message
to BLF Manager
0000-9999
9500
UDP port for sending BLF message
to BLF Manager
0000-9999
9501
Select type for Transfer and Call
forward – Rerouting or Join
IP Address of BLF Server used only
when iPECS is configured with LDK
systems for Voice Networking
Duration of BLF status message
sending to BLF Server.
0.0.0.0
01-99
(msec)
IP address of Multicast for BLF
service.
Network transfer fault recall timer to
001-300
be used when no responses from
(seconds)
other systems.
SIP outgoing call is rerouted via
eMG80:1-20
alternative backup CO line when
eMG800:1~200
call is failed or there is no answer
during 3 seconds.
Enable/disable for BLF manager
0: OFF
function.
1: ON
195
10
0.0.0.0
10
00
ON
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.10.3 Network CO LINE Attribute – PGM 322
PROCEDURE:
NET COL ATTRIBUTE
ENTER CO RANGE
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 322 and enter CO range
(Ex. 0101).(eMG80 : 1-74 / eMG800: 1-600)
01-01 NET COL PGM
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-2)
Use the dial-pad to enter the CO Range.
Press the Flex button 1~2 for the desired setting, refer to
Table 3.3.10.3-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the required data, refer to Table
3.3.10.3-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the new data.
Table 3.3.10.3-1 NETWORK BASIC ATTRIBUTE (PGM 322)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01-01 NET CO GRP
( 00 – 24 ) : 00
01-01 NET CO TYPE
(0:PSTN/1:NET) : PSTN
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Networking CO group programming
for Networking call.
00-24
00
0: PSTN
1: NET
PSTN
Select network CO Line Type
196
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.10.4 NET Numbering Plan Table – PGM 324
PROCEDURE:
NET NUM PLAN TABLE
ENTER BIN NO (000-251)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 324 and enter bin
number (Ex.001).
001 NET NUM PLAN TBL
PRESS FLEX KEY (01 – 16)
Use the dial-pad to enter the 3-digit Table index (bin)
number, 000 ~ 251.
Press the Flex button, 1~16 for the desired setting, refer to
Table 3.3.10.4-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the required data, refer to Table
3.3.10.4-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the new data.
Table 3.3.10.4-1 NETWORK NUMBERING PLAN (PGM 324)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
001 SYSTEM USAGE
(0:NET/1:PSTN) : NET
001 NUM PLAN CODE
. . . . . . . . . . . .. .
001 NUM PLAN CO GRP
(00 - 24) : . .
001 CPN INFORMATION
PRESS FLEX KY (1-4)
001 ALT SPD BIN
(2000-4999) : . . . .
DEST SYSTEM IP ADDR
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
DEST SYSTEM PORT NO
(0000-9999) : 5588
001 DIGIT REPEAT
(0:NO/1:YES): NO
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Select system usage
0: NET
1: PSTN
NET
‘*’ means any digits can be
inserted between 0 ~ 9.
The digits followed by ‘#’ are an
internal station number.
‘00’ means an internal net station
number
16 digits
Flex 1: ISDN CPN
INFORMATION
Flex 2: ( Flex button 1- 4 )
1: 00 CPN INFORMATION 01
2: 00 CPN INFORMATION 02
3: 00 CPN INFORMATION 03
4: 00 CPN INFORMATION 04
Alternative Dial Number (System
SPD Bin) when the networking
path has a fatal problem.
IP Address of destination MPB
system only when iPECS eMG is
configured for Voice Networking.
Port Number of destination
system for Networking.
16 digits
When the number plan code (Flex
2) is for PSTN call or transit-call,
this number code can be
enveloped in SETUP message or
not whether if this field is set or
not.
197
00-24
..
eMG80:2000~4999
eMG800:2000~9999
0.0.0.0
0000-9999
5588
0: NO
1: YES
NO
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.10.4-1 NETWORK NUMBERING PLAN (PGM 324)
BTN
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
001 NET PSTN ENBLOCK
(0:NO/1:YES) : NO
001 CO ATD CODE CLI
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
001 FIREWALL ROUTING
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
001 AUTHO CODE COS USE
(0:NO/1:YES): NO
001 SMDR DIAL HIDDEN
(0:NO/1:YES): NO
001 NET PSTN CLI
(0:NET/1:PSTN): NET
001 SITE NAME
.............
001 EMERGENCY RERTE
TMR
(00-10) : 00
DESCRIPTION
Choose “Transit-out Public Line”
to En-block or Over-lap.
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: NO
1: YES
NO
Determine whether if Centralized
0: OFF
ATD CLI is sent or not when slave
1: ON
system makes transit call.
Select IP address (Firewall IP
0: OFF
address or Non-firewall IP
1: ON
address).
If the destination system (VOIB) is
in same VPN then Non-firewall IP
address should be sent.
Otherwise the firewall IP address
should be sent.
ON : Send firewall IP address
OFF : Send Non-firewall (Internal)
IP address
When there‘s a transit out call
0: NO
request from user of slave system
1: YES
by seizing CO line, apply COS
according to the authorization
code.
Determine to display dialed digit of
0: NO
transit out call or not at the slave
1: YES
system; it can contain
authorization code.
NET: Send network station
0: NET
number for CLI PSTN: Send full
1: PSTN
CLI (e.g., 02-450-1000)
It is comment field to set name of Max. 12 characters
network site.
When timer is ‘0’: The reroute
emergency call is not work. When
timer is set ‘1’~’10’: The reroute
emergency call is activated after
this timer. This is only work when
PGM 112-18th is transit-out CO
group.
198
00-10
OFF
ON
NO
NO
NET
00
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.10.5 Network Feature Code Table – PGM 325
PROCEDURE:
NET FEATURE CODE TBL
ENTER BIN NO (01-20)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 325 and enter the bin
number (Ex.01).
01 NET FEATURE CODE TBL
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-2)
Use the dial-pad to enter the bin no.
Press the Flex button 1~2 for the desired setting, refer to
Table 3.3.10.5-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the required data, refer to Table
3.3.10.5-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the new data.
Table 3.3.10.5-1 NETWORK FEATURE CODE TABLE (PGM 325)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
01 NET FEATURE CODE
...............
01 NET DEST
NONE (1-6)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Networking Feature Code
16 digits
programming for Networking paging
call.
Select network feature type (1-6)
1 : INT PAGE
and dial associated number.
2 : EXT PAGE
INT PAGE ZONE (eMG80:013 : ALL CALL
35/eMG800:1-100)
PAGE
EXT PAGE ZONE : (1-1)
4: DOOR OPEN
ALL CALL PAGE ZONE : (1-3 :
5:Conference
1(INT), 2(EXT), 3(ALL))
Room (1-9)
DOOR OPEN : 1~2
6:Call park (01 Conference Room (1-9)
19)
Call park (eMG80:0119/eMG800:1-200)
199
DEFAULT
N/A
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.11 TNET (Centralized Networking) – PGM 330 ~ 336
In a Centralized Control TNET (Transparent Networking), remote devices may be registered to a
Central MPB/MPB (CM) and to a Local MPB/MPB (LM). In this way, the CM maintains control of
the remote device. Should the WAN connection between an LM and CM fail (2 second polling
error), the LM will initiate operational control of the locally registered devices. Calls between the
systems (CM & LM) can automatically shift to PSTN Modules registered with the LM for Fail-over
operation. The configuration and characteristics of LMs and CM are configurable as is Fail-over
operation.
3.3.11.1 TNET Basic Attributes – PGM 330
Each MPB in a Central Control network environment must be enabled for TNET operation in
order to function as part of the network.
PROCEDURE:
TNET BASIC ATTRIBUTES
PRESS FLEX KEY (1 – 1)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 330.
TNET ENABLE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
Press Flex button 1.
Use the dial-pad to enable or disable TNET, Central Control
networking.
Press the [Save] button to store the new data.
200
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.11.2 TNET CM Attributes – PGM 331
Each LM (Local MPB), which is part of a Central Control Network, must be defined with the IP
Address of the CM (Central MPB) as well as the LM configuration data that will be sent to the CM
at the time the LM registers with the CM. The port counts define the ports, which are allocated in
the CM database for use by devices registered to the LM. The number of ports defined in the
database of each LM must be equal or less than the ports defined in the CM for the LM, see PGM
332, in order to register properly.
PROCEDURE:
TNET CM ATTRIBUTES
PRESS FLEX KEY (1 – 10 )
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 331.
Press the Flex button, 1~6 for the desired setting, refer to
Table 3.3.11.2-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the required data, refer to Table
3.3.11.2-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the new data.
Table 3.3.11.2-1 TNET CM ATTRIBUTES (PGM 331)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
CM REGISTER REQ
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
CM SERVER TYPE
0:LIK / 1:CM : LIK(0)
CM1 IP ADDRESS
0 .0 .0 .0
CM2 IP ADDRESS
0 .0 .0 .0
CM1 MAC ADDRESS
000000000000
CM2 MAC ADDRESS
000000000000
CM IPKTS PORT
(0001 - 9999) :5588
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
This field informs the LM to attempt
registration with the CM. This field must
be set to ON for proper registration.
This field defines Central Call Manager
type. The LIK is eMG/UCP even though
the display is LIK.
This field defines the IP address of the
CM1 that will be used by the LM.
IPv4
address
This field defines the IP address of the
CM2 that will be used by the LM.
IPv4
address
DEFAULT
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0:LIK
1: CM
LIK
This field defines the MAC address of
the CM1 that will be used by the LM.
This field defines the MAC address of
the CM2 that will be used by the LM.
In the TNET environment, the IP KTS
protocol signaling UDP port is defined.
At present this field is not used, do not
change this port number.
201
0000-9999
5588
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.11.2-1 TNET CM ATTRIBUTES (PGM 331)
BTN
8
9
10
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
CM TOTAL PORT
(000 – 999) : 011
POLLING COUNT
(00 – 99) : 05
POLLING INTERVAL
(00 – 99) : 02
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
This field defines the total number of
ports the LM will request be allocated
by the CM for devices attached to the
LM.
This value must be equal to or less than
the port count in the CM for the LM
devices.
This field defines the maximum polling
failures an LM considers a WAN fault.
This field defines the interval time
between LM to CM polling attempts.
DEFAULT
000-999
000
00-99
05
00-99
02
3.3.11.3 TNET LM ATTRIBUTES – PGM 332
The CM (Central MPB/MPB) must be programmed with the MAC and IP address of each LM
(Local MPB) in the Centralized Control network as well as the maximum configuration of each LM.
The port counts define the ports, which are allocated in the CM database for use by devices
registered to the LM. The number of ports defined in the database of each LM, sees PGM 331,
must be equal to or less than the ports defined in the CM for the LM, in order to register properly.
VoIP channels are needed to support RTP Packet relay or codec translation between other
devices. The CO port count must include any VoIP channels required.
PROCEDURE:
TNET LM ATTRIBUTES
ENTER BIN NO(01-15)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 332.
TNET LM(01) ATTRIBUTES
PRESS FLEX KEY (1- 4)
Use the dial pad to enter the bin number associated with the
LM.
Press the Flex button, 1~4 for the desired setting, refer to
Table 3.3.11.3-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter the required data, refer to Table
3.3.11.3-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the new data.
Table 3.3.11.3-1 TNET LM ATTRIBUTES (PGM 332)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
LM(01) MAC ADDRESS
0000000000000
DESCRIPTION
This field defines the MAC address of the
LM that will be part of the TNET
environment and is used by the CM for
authorization.
202
RANGE
MAC
address
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.11.3-1 TNET LM ATTRIBUTES (PGM 332)
BTN
2
3
4
5
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
LM(01) IP ADDRESS
0 .0 .0 .0
LM(01) IPKTS PORT
(0001 - 9999) :5588
LM (01) TOTAL PORT
(000 – 999) : 000
LM (01) MULTICAST IP
239.20.19.1
DESCRIPTION
This field displays the IP address of the
LM.
RANGE
DEFAULT
IPv4
address
In the TNET environment, the IP KTS
0000-9999
protocol signaling UDP port is defined. At
present this field is not used, do not
change this port number.
This field defines the total number of ports
000-999
the LM will request be allocated by the CM
for devices attached to the LM.
This value must be equal to or more than
the available port count in the LM.
This field defines the multicast IP address
IPv4
that could be used in TNET branch site.
address
5588
000
3.3.11.4 FoPSTN Attributes – PGM 333
The Fail-over function allows the systems in a Centralized Control network (TNET) environment
to complete calls from system to system over a PSTN (analog or digital) line should the WAN
connection to the CM fail. A CO Gateway/Board must be registered to the LM for local control and
access CO services. Users may call others in the normal manner and the call is routed over CO
facilities to the remote CM. When calls are directed to a DID line at the receiving system, the
system will select a line from the assigned CO Group and dial the Tel Number with the station
number dialed as the trailing digits.
PROCEDURE:
FoPSTN ATTRIBUTES
PRESS FLEX KEY (1–3)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 333.
Press the Flex button 1~3 for the desired setting, refer to
Table 3.3.11.4-1.
For Flex button 1 enable or disable FO. For Flex button 2,
press the [Save] button to reset the FO table. For Flex
button 3, dial the table bin number to input data.
For Flex button 3, use the dial-pad to enter the required
data, refer to Table 3.3.11.4-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the new data.
Table 3.3.11.4-1 FAIL-OVER ATTRIBUTES (PGM 333)
BTN
1
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
ENABLE FoPSTN
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
DESCRIPTION
This field is used to enable or disable
Fail-over operation from the CM or LM.
203
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.11.4-1 FAIL-OVER ATTRIBUTES (PGM 333)
BTN
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
INIT FoPSTN TABLE
PRESS [Save] KEY
3
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
This field is used to initialize the FO table.
FoPSTN ATTRIBUTES
ENTER BIN NO(000-199)
3-1
3-2
3-3
FoPSTN 001 NUM PLAN
xxxxxxxx
FoPSTN 001 CO GROUP
GRP NO (00-21) : 01
FoPSTN 001 TEL NUMBER
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Station numbers associated with the
Max 8 digits
remote system. A range can be indicated
by using “*” to indicate the range.
eMG80:1~20
This field defines the CO Group of the
eMG800:1~200
local system that will be used to place
calls to the stations entered in the FO
Numbering Plan, should WAN failure
occur.
This field defines the telephone number
the system should dial to place a call to
the stations entered in the FO Numbering
Plan, should Wan failure occur. An “*”
may be entered as a wild-card to indicate
insertion of the dialed station number.
3.3.11.5 TNET LM External Contact Attributes – PGM 334
Each LM incorporates relay contacts, which can be employed as a Door Lock Release. The
contact activates a 3rd party Door Lock Release mechanism activated by dialing the Door Unlock
code at a local station. Note assigning other functions to the contact may cause unexpected
operation.
PROCEDURE:
TNET LM EXT CONTACT
ENTER BIN NO (01-15)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 334.
LM(01) EXT CONTACT
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-4)
Select LM number
The range is : eMG80 : 1-15 / eMG800: 1-32
Select Flex button 1~4 for the desired External Control
contact.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data.
1. LBC + station number, (ex. 150)
2. Door Lock Release
3. External Page 1 access
4. External Page 2 access
Press the [Save] button to store the External Contact data
entry.
204
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.11.6 TNET LM Music Attributes – PGM 335
The CM does not provide BGM/MOH to an LM. The LM employs local BGM and MOH facilities,
which reduces traffic load on the WAN and IP channel processors. The LM uses IP Multicast for
local BGM and MOH transport.
PROCEDURE:
TNET LM MUSIC ATTR
ENTER BIN NO (01-15)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 335
MUSIC ASSIGN
PRESS FLEX_KEY (1-3)
Select LM number
Refer to Table 3.3.11.6-1
DISPLAY
Select the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.11.6-1.
Use the dial-pad to select the desired Music Source, refer to
Table 3.3.11.6-1.
To save the Music Source, press the [Save] button.
Table 3.3.11.6-1 MUSIC SOURCES FOR MOH & BGM (PGM 335)
BTN
1
2
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
BGM TYPE (0-3)
MUSIC 1 (1)
MOH TYPE (0-3)
MUSIC 1 (1)
INT/EXT1 MUSIC
(0:INT/1:EXT1): INT
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Assigns the source for
BGM.
00: Ring-back
01: Int music
02: Ext music
03: VSF MOH
04: SLTMOH1
05: SLTMOH2
06: SLTMOH3
07: SLTMOH4
08: SLTMOH5
09: VSFMOH2
10: VSFMOH3
Music 1
Assign the source for
MOH.
00: Ring-back
01: Int music
02: Ext music
03: VSF MOH
04: SLTMOH1
05: SLTMOH2
06: SLTMOH3
07: SLTMOH4
08: SLTMOH5
09: VSFMOH2
10: VSFMOH3
Music 1
Assigns the input for
source 1 (Internal or
External)
0: Internal
1: Ext. Music 1
Internal
205
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.11.7 TNET LM Alarm Attributes – PGM 336
The LM incorporates circuitry to monitor an external contact. This contact is most often employed
as an Alarm indicator or Doorbell. The Alarm attributes define the operation of the monitoring
circuitry. For the Alarm, the signal to the LM stations can be repeating or a single burst, the
former is often desired. For the Doorbell, a single tone is sent each time the contact activates.
PROCEDURE:
TNET LM ALARM ATTR
ENTER BIN NO (01-15)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 336.
LM(01) ALARM ATTR
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-4)
Select LM number
Press the desired Flex button; refer to Table 3.3.11.7-1.
Use the dial-pad to enter desired data for the attribute, refer
to Table 3.3.11.7-1.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.11.7-1 ALARM ATTRIBUTES (PGM 336)
BTN
1
2
3
4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
ALARM ENABLE
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
ALARM CONTACT TYPE
(1:CLOSE/0:OPEN) : CLOSE
ALARM/DOORBELL MODE
(1:ALARM/0:BELL): ALARM
ALARM SIGNAL MODE
(1:RPT/0:ONCE) : RPT
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
This parameter enables the external
contact monitoring circuitry.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
This parameter establishes the
contact state that will activate the
Alarm, close or open.
The contact can be treated to
function as a doorbell instead of an
alarm.
The assigned stations will receive a
Repeating signal or single burst
(ONCE) of alarm tone.
0: Open
1: Close
CLOSE
0: Bell
1: Alarm
ALARM
0: Once
1: Repeat
RPT
206
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.12 Zone Data – PGM 436 - 441, 444
Zone data is a tool employed to easily manage the characteristics of groups of devices under the
control of an MPB. Often, devices are installed in groups with common characteristics. Such
devices can be grouped to a Zone to define common characteristics including Country Code,
DSCP, RTP packet handling, etc. Common attributes are defined at the device, Zone and Interzone level. Device settings have priority over Zone settings, while Zone settings have priority over
system settings.
Generally, transport of RTP packets should be a peer-to-peer communication over either a LAN
or VPN. If iPECS devices are separated by a NAPT server or direct peer-to-peer communications
is not available, packet relay must be employed to assure communication. In packet relay, RTP
packets are received by a local VoIP channel (MPB or VOIB), which is under control of the MPB,
and the IP address is translated from a public to the device’s private address. The VoIP channels
implement a secure channel using IPSec protocol. Devices can be assigned as part of an “RTP
Relay group” to use the same VoIP channels to implement relay of RTP packets. Packet relay
groups also provide for conversion of multi-cast packets from the MPB to uni-cast and back again
at the group level to multi-cast. Note packet relay requires an MPB or VoIP channel be available
locally for each simultaneous call that requires packet relay. Programs 436 to 441 define device
zone assignments and zone configurations. These programs are available only in Web admin.
Holiday and Vacation assignments for each zone are defined in Program 444.
207
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.12.1 Zone Holiday Assignment – PGM 444
Holidays and vacation day intervals for each zone can be established to define a specified
Service mode (Day, Night, and Timed) Up to 40 holidays and 5 vacation intervals can be defined.
PROCEDURE:
ZONE HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT
ENTER BIN (01-32)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 444 and enter the bin
number (Ex.01).
ZONE(01) HOLIDAY ATTR
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-3)
Use the dial-pad to enter the bin (Zone) number (01~32).
Press the Flex button, 1 ~ 3, for the desired setting, refer to
Table 3.3.12.1-1.
Use the dial pad to enter the required data, refer to Table
3.3.12.1-1.
Press the [Save] button to save any changes.
Table 3.3.12.1-1 ZONE HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT (PGM 444)
BTN
1
2
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
ZONE(01) RING MODE(0-3)
TIMED-R
ZONE(01) VACATION
ENTER BIN NO(1-5)
ZONE(01) HOLIDAY
ENTER BIN NO(01-40)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Enter the desired Service mode for
the Holiday or Vacation.
0 -3
0: DAY
1: NIGHT
2: TIMED
3: N/A
12 digits
TIMED
Assign a date range for the vacation
entering the start and end dates as
yymmdd - yymmdd.
Assign a date for the holiday for the
Zone as MMDD.
208
None
None
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.13 GREEN MODE
The system can disable the power of a Digital Phone or SLT (Single Line Telephone) installed in
the system at night or during holiday mode. The power On/Off can be controlled by Web Admin
manually or automatically according to the assigned power On/Off time.
3.3.13.1 Green mode activation – PGM 500
It is applied for SLIB, DSIB and HYIB. Regarding the exact board related to terminal, refer to
iPECS eMG Hardware Description and Installation Manual.
PROCEDURE:
GREEN MODE ACTIVATION
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-4)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 500.
Press the Flex button, 1 ~ 4, for the desired setting, refer to
Table 3.3.13.1-1.
Use the dial pad to enter the required data, refer to Table
3.3.13.1-1.
Press the [Save] button to save any changes.
Table 3.3.13.1-1 GREEN MODE ACTIVATION (PGM 500)
BTN
1
2
3
4
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
POWER SAVE USAGE
(1:EN/0:DIS) : DISABLE
POWER ON/OFF
(1:ON/0:OFF) : ON
POWER SAVE MODE
PRESS SLOT BTN (F1-F6)
POWER CURRENT STATE
CHECK SLOT BTN (F1-F6)
DESCRIPTION
Enable or Disable power usage.
Power ON/OFF manually all of
stations in Power Save used board.
Enables or Disables Power Save
Usage Mode of each board.
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: Disable
1: Enable
DISABLE
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
Flex button1-6
Displays the current status of board Flex button1-6
power ON/OFF.
209
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.13.2 Green mode time setting – PGM 501
It is applied for SLIB, DSIB and HYIB. Regarding the exact board related to terminal, refer to
iPECS eMG Hardware Description and Installation Manual.
PROCEDURE:
GREEN MODE TIME
ENTER WEEK DAY NO (1-7)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 501 and enter the day
from 1 to 7 by dial pad (Ex.1).
(MON) GREEN MODE TIME
F1:ON TIME F2:OFF TIME
Press the desired Flex button 1 or 2.
Press the Flex button, 1 ~ 2, for the desired setting, refer to
Table 3.3.13.2-1.
Use the dial pad to enter the required data, refer to Table
3.3.13.2-1.
Press the [Save] button to save any changes.
Table 3.3.13.2-1 GREEN MODE TIME (PGM 501)
BTN
1
2
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
POWER ON TIME (HH:MM)
NOT ASSIGNED
POWER OFFIME (HH:MM)
NOT ASSIGNED
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Enable power on time
Not assigned
Enable power off time
Not assigned
210
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.14 INITIALIZATION — PGM 450
The system has been pre-programmed with certain features, which are based on the default
database. The defaults are loaded into memory when the system is initialized. The system should
always be initialized when installed or the database is suspected of being corrupt. The system
can be initialized manually during installation, refer to the iPECS eMG Hardware Description &
Installation Manual.
This program allows all or any of several distinct portions or the database to be initialized,
returned to default.
PROCEDURE:
INITIALIZATION
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-17)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 450.
Select a Flex button to initialize the desired data, refer to
Table 3.3.14-1.
Press the [Save] button, the selected data is initialized and
confirmation tone is received.
Table 3.3.14-1 INITIALIZATION DATA (PGM 450)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DISPLAY
INITIALIZATION
FLEX NUM PLAN
INIT STATION DATA
STATION DATA(ENT STA RNG)
INIT COL DATA
COL DATA(ENT COL RNG)
INIT COL DATA
SYSTEM DATA
INITIALIZATION
STATION GROUP
INITIALIZATION
ISDN TABLES
INITIALIZATION
SYSTEM TIMER
INITIALIZATION
TOLL TABLES
REMARK
It will initialize numbering plan.
It will initialize station attributes for selected stations.
It will initialize CO line attributes for selected CO lines.
It will initialize system attributes.
It will initialize hunt attributes.
It will initialize ISDN related attributes.
(MSN/Flexible DID, COLP, DID conversion)
It will initialize system timer attributes.
It will initialize toll tables.
211
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.14-1 INITIALIZATION DATA (PGM 450)
BTN
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
DISPLAY
INITIALIZATION
LCR DATA
INITIALIZATION
OTHER TABLES
INITIALIZATION
FLEX BUTTON
INITIALIZATION
NET DATA
INITIALIZATION
ALL DATA
SYSTEM RESTART
RESTART NOW
REMARK
It will initialize LCR attributes.
It will initialize miscellaneous tables.
(Exec/Sec, CCR, Prefix, Authorization code, Auto ring mode, VM
prefix, System SPD Zone, Multicast table, Mobile Extension)
It will initialize flexible button and DSS/LSS.
It will initialize networking attributes.
It will initialize all programs.
It will restart the MPB.
UNUSED
INITIALIZATION
PERSONAL GROUP
INITIALIZATION
Default password *
It will initialize Personal Group.
It will initialize(remove) password if it is *
INITIALIZATION
HOTEL DATA
212
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.15 PRINT-OUT DATABASE — PGM 451
The system can output all or portions of the system database in order to provide a ‘hard-copy’.
The data is output over the appropriate Serial port (Serial 1 or Serial 2).
PROCEDURE:
DATABASE PRINT OUT
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-22)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 451.
Select Flex button 1~22 to output the desired data, refer to
Table 3.3.15-1.
For Station, Station Flex buttons, and CO/IP line data, use
the dial pad to enter the desired range for stations or CO/IP
lines, or for all skip this step.
Press the [Save] button, after output, confirmation tone is
heard.
Table 3.3.15-1 DATABASE PRINT OUT (PGM 451)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DISPLAY
REMARK
DATABASE PRINT OUT
FLEX NUM PLAN
DATABASE PRINT OUT
IP SETTING PLAN
DATABASE PRINT OUT
STA DATA(ENT STA RNG)
DATABASE PRINT OUT
COL DATA(ENT COL RNG)
A station range must be entered to output the Station data.
A CO/IP line range (01~21) must be entered to output CO/IP
data.
DATABASE PRINT OUT
SYSTEM DATA
DATABASE PRINT OUT
STATION GROUP
DATABASE PRINT OUT
ISDN TABLES
DATABASE PRINT OUT
SYSTEM TIMER
DATABASE PRINT OUT
TOLL TABLES
213
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.15-1 DATABASE PRINT OUT (PGM 451)
BTN
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
DISPLAY
REMARK
DATABASE PRINT OUT
LCR DATA
DATABASE PRINT OUT
OTHER TABLES
DATABASE PRINT OUT
NATION SPECIFIC
DATABASE PRINT OUT
FLX BTN(ENT STA RNG)
A station range must be entered to output the Station Flex button
data. Data may be output in 20 or 10 character format, see Flex
button 17 below.
DATABASE PRINT OUT
ALL DATA
DATABASE PRINT OUT
LCD PRINT(0-2):NORMAL 24
DATABASE PRINT OUT
TO QUIT PRESS [Save]
STRING LENGTH
(1:20/0:10): 20(CHAR)
The Station Flex button print out can be provide in a 20 or 10
character format, default is 20 characters.
DATABASE PRINT OUT
BOARD ATTRIBUTES
DATABASE PRINT OUT
NETWORKING TABLE
DATABASE PRINT OUT
HOTEL DATA
FLEX BTN LCD PRINT
STR LEN(0-1): 20
WORKING LCD PRINT
Print out strings those are used in flexible button to display the
content.
Print out strings those are used to activate some features.
214
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.16 VIRTUAL TRACE DIP-SWITCH — PGM 452
The Virtual Trace Dip-switch is used to enable and disable traces for various functions as
defined in Table 3.3.16-1.
PROCEDURE:
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
PRESS FLEX KEY (01-22)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 452.
To enable trace, press the desired trace button 1-9. The Flex
button LEDs indicate trace setting, On/Off, press the desired
Flex button to toggle Trace Enable,
LED on: trace enable
LED off: trace disabled.
To enable selected trace settings, press the [Save] button.
Table 3.3.16-1 VIRTUAL TRACE DIP-SWITCH (PGM 452)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
CALL TRACE : (OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
VOIP TRACE : (OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
HTTP TRACE : (OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
MULTICAST TRACE : (OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
CTI TRACE : (OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
RAW DATA TRACE : (OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
MPMP TRACE: (OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
CPU RE TRACE: (OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
MISU/VMIU TRACE:( OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
DSP TRACE (OFF)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
‘Call Trace’ is enabled for output.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
VoIP Trace is enabled for output.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
HTTP Trace is enabled for output.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Multicast Data (normally registration
data between MPB and local mode
device) Trace is enabled for output.
CTI Device Trace is enabled for
output.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Detailed Data Trace is enabled.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
MPB to MPB Data Trace is enabled
for output.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
CPU Redundancy Data Trace is
enabled for output. It is not used.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
MISU/VMIU Trace is enabled for
output.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
DSP Trace is enabled for output.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
215
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 3.3.16-1 VIRTUAL TRACE DIP-SWITCH (PGM 452)
BTN
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
SIP TRACE (OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
ISDMR TRACE (OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
SIP MSG TRACE (OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
FULL SIP TRACE (OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
HOTEL TRACE (OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
SIP EXT TRACE (OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
DEBUG TRACE (OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
IPATD TRACE (OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
ISDN TRACE (OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
SPI TRACE (OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
DECT TRACE (OFF)
VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW
HTTPXML T RACE (OFF)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
SIP Trace is enabled for output.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
ISMDR Trace is enabled for output.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
SIP MSG Trace is enabled for
output.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
FULL SIP Trace is enabled for
output.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
Hotel trace is enabled for output.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
SIP EXT Trace is enabled for
output.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
DEBUG Trace is enabled for output.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
IPATD Trace is enabled for output.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
ISDN Trace is enabled for output.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
SPI Trace is enabled for output.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
DECT Trace is enabled for output.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
HTTPXML Trace is enabled for
output.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
216
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.17 VIRTUAL DIP-SWITCH — PGM 453
The Virtual Dip Switch is employed to change from in-band to SMDI for External Voice Mail
communications and manually poll each IP KTS device.
PROCEDURE:
VIRTUAL DIP SWITCH
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-6)
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 453.
To enable trace, press desired Flex button 1~6. The Flex
button LEDs indicates Dip switch setting, On/Off. Press the
desired Flex button to toggle setting,
LED On: enabled
LED Off: disabled
To enable call trace, press the [Save] button.
Table 3.3.17-1 VIRTUAL DIP-SWITCH (PGM 453)
BTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
VIRTUAL DIP SWITCH
DEVICE POLLING: (ON)
VIRTUAL DIP SWITCH
SMDI SETTING: (OFF)
VIRTUAL DIP SWITCH
MULTICAST LED: (OFF)
VIRTUAL DIP SWITCH
AUTO NEGO: (MANUAL)
VIRTUAL DIP SWITCH
FULL-HALF: (FULL)
VIRTUAL DIP SWITCH
10-100 TX: (100)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
‘Device polling’. If enabled (On), the
system will check each registered
device, Gateway/Board and iPECS
Phone to determine if the device is
alive or not.
SMDI setting is enabled for output.
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
If this value is set, the LED
commands from MPB will be sent to
Gateway/boards and terminals in
the multi-cast mode.
This field enables negotiation of
speed between the LAN switch port
and the system.
The duplex mode of LAN
connections can be set according to
this field.
The speed of the Ethernet interface
is established based on this field,
10 Base T or 10/ 100 Base T.
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: AUTO
1: MANUAL
MANUAL
0: FULL
1: HALF
FULL
0: 100
1: 10
100
217
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3.3.18 DECT ATTRIBUTES — PGM 491
DECT Attributes define functions associated with the DECT equipment and operation. Generally,
the entry will turn the feature ON (enable) or OFF (disable).
PROCEDURE:
1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 491.
DECT ATTRIBUTES
PRESS FLEX KEY (1-4)
Press the Flex button for the desired Attribute; refer to Table
3.3.18-1.
Use the dial pad to enter the required data.
Press the [Save] button to store the data entry.
Table 3.3.18-1 DECT ATTRIBUTES (PGM 491)
BTN
1
2
3
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY
AUTO CALL RLS
(1:ON/0:OFF) : OFF
BASE FAULT ALARM
(1:EN/0:DIS) : DISABLE
CHAIN FAULT ALARM
(1:EN/0:DIS) : DISABLE
DESCRIPTION
If enabled, when the other party of
an active internal call disconnects,
GDC-450H/480H/500H returns to
idle.
If enabled, DECT Base station
(GDC-600BE) alarms are sent to
the Attendant.
Not used.
218
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: OFF
1: ON
OFF
0: Disable
1: Enable
Disable
0: Disable
1: Enable
Disable
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4. WEB SERVICE
4.1 General
The iPECS system incorporates a Web Server, which is employed by the system’s Web Service.
Using a Web browser the system’s Web Server can be accessed and the database managed in a
user-friendly environment. In addition to modifying the system database, Web Admin provides for
Maintenance such as system file upload, remote upgrade, database download and maintenance
functions.
We provide On-line web user guide to a user. You can get the information about the frequent use
of features by clicking [User’s guide] in the login page.
The default database includes assignment of a private IP address to the system. This address
(10.10.10.2) may be used to access the system from the LAN. However, a routable IP address
must be assigned for access from a remote location.
To access the iPECS Web Server requires:
1)
Operating iPECS series system
2)
IP address assigned in the system and is known
3)
TCP port assigned for the KSU LAN port and is known
4)
iPECS system connected to an accessible LAN
5)
iPECS system password (Keyset Admin, Remote access, and CID) if any, is known
4.1.1 PC/Browser
MS Explore 10.0, Chrome 24.0, Firefox 18.0 or higher version is recommended
(HTML5 support required)
Windows PC, at least 32MB RAM (64MB or more RAM is recommended)
NIC (Network Interface Card)
4.1.2 Environment for LAN connection
IEEE 802.3, 10/100 Base T
Static/DHCP addressing
Firewall, requires Network Administrator to allow access.
Remote access requires a routable IP address for the iPECS system Web Server. This
must be assigned to the system prior to access.
219
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.1.3 Web Browser setting
Web browsers may store (cache) a copy of the iPECS Web pages in a cache memory. The Web
browser may use these copies to provide a “quick view”. If the Web page has been altered by
data entered in Station Admin or a file upgrade, the cached copy will be out-of-date and could
cause unexpected system operation. To assure proper page views and data entry, the browser
should be set to eliminate the use of the cached pages. For Explorer, in “Internet Options”, enable
refresh on “Every visit to the page”, for other browser, the procedure may be different.
4.1.4 Password Encryption
When enabled in PGM 162, iPECS system implements decryption of the password employing
RC-6 block encryption. iPECS system employs a Sun Java Virtual Machine applet to implement
AES encryption. The PC entering the Password must have a JAVA Virtual Machine and the JRE
(Java Runtime Environment) Explorer option enabled to properly handle encrypted passwords.
The Sun JVM is downloaded from the Java home page (www.java.com). Once downloaded,
execute the downloaded file. To enable the Explorer JRE option,
1. From the Explorer menu select Internet Options-Advanced.
2. From the Advanced Internet Options check the [Use JRE….] Option.
3. After restarting the computer, access iPECS system Web Manager, section 4.2.
“Applet iPECSPwd started” will display in the bottom left corner to indicate password
encryption is active.
220
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.2 iPECS system Web Access & Login
In the browser ‘ADDRESS’ field, enter the MPB or UCP IP address (default is 10.10.10.2) and
TCP port. Select GO; the Web server returns iPECS system Web Services Login page, Figure
4.2.1-1. The Web services include the Admin and Maintenance functions and the Station
Program User Portal. To access the Admin and Maintenance function, User ID and Password
should be matched with the assignments in the User Management. The default Maintenance
User ID is ‘admin’ and the password is ‘1234’. The system will return the Admin & Maintenance
Main page, section 4.3.
To access the Station program, the user must enter their Station number and full Authorization
code (station number and Auth code) in Tables Data – Station Authorization Code (PGM 227).
The system will return the Station Program Main page as shown in section 4.6.
221
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Figure 4.2-1 iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP600 Home page
For reference, we explain Admin and Maintenance based on UCP600. The home page is
displayed according to eMG80, eMG800 & UCP type (UCP100, UCP600, UCP2400).
To access User portal, the user must enter Station number and full Authorization code
(station number and Auth code) as defined in Tables Data – Station Authorization Codes (PGM
227). The system will go to the user portal Main page as below. For detail information, refer to
“User Portal User Guide” provided.
Figure 4.2-2 iPECS User Portal main page
222
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.3 Web Admin & Maintenance Main Page Overview
In the Web Admin Login screen (see section 4.2), enter the User ID and Password then click the
[Login] button to access the iPECS Admin & Maintenance Main Page as shown in Figure 4.3-1.
Figure 4.3-1 iPECS UCP Admin & Maintenance Main Page
The Admin & Maintenance Main Page has three sections,
Menu bar – Upper frame
Directory & Navigation section – Left frame
Favorite Programs and Entry section – Central frame
Items in the Menu bar are mouse-clickable for selections of:
Administration – accesses the system database.
Maintenance – SW upgrade, Database, Multi Language, SMDR, VSF, Voice Mail, Trace, etc.
Change Language – change the desired language.
Log out – log out the web server
223
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
What is the meaning about Buttons and Text on page?
1)
Hide menu by clicking the left arrow in the middle of window on left side.
2)
X button at the top of the page on the right side functions whether the current tab or
all tabs are closed or not.
3)
button will display all PGM by click and check which PGM is using.
4)
The Application, Boot, and Kernel version can find at the left side of bottom.
5)
User can check the status indicator at the bottom on the right side of page by
displaying the text such Disconnected or Read Only User.
Disconnected: discconected to Web Admin Server without working for a long
time. User can connect to Web Admin Server by clicking Refresh button.
Read Only User: User who access to Web Admin Sever has no authority to set
the function as the maintenance user and just is only for read.
224
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
License State Display
If “Installation Period” or the color of SW Maint. is GREEN, system software can be upgraded.
Major version upgrade is possible in “Installation” or “Maintenance” Period but Minor version
upgrade is possible in “Warranty” Period. In other states, both upgrade and downgrade are not
allowed.
First LED : SW maintenance
Second LED: Temporary License
Third LED: T-Net (eMG & UCP) / Redundancy (UCP only)
Note)
1) To turn off the alarm, Administrator can set ‘Alarm Enable’ to OFF in System Data >
Alarm Attributes (163) > Alarm enable: OFF. For more information, refer to Alarm
Attributes.
2) To turn off the alarm on Phone, press ‘Alarm reset’ PGM code *565 to stop. It’s a onetime thing. Please check the exact alarm reset code in Flexible Numbering Plan
(106~109) because the code is different according to the numbering plan.
SW Maintenance State
The following figure is SW Maintenance state for SMB. System Alarm (Attenant alarm & E-mail
notification) occurs once 30 days before expiration and daily during 7 days before expiration.
If the system goes to the limited service mode, the station COS is changed to 7.
225
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Temp License State
Temp License can be activated totally 6 times. It is valid for 60 days at first activation and is valid
30 days from second activation to the last. System Alarm occurs daily during 7 days before
expiration.
T-Net or Redundancy State
T-Net LCM license is valid for 60 days if the connection is broken. And Redundancy for UCP
system is valid for 60 days if System is slave, active state, and the connection is broken. But the
limitation is not applied in Master system. System Alarm occurs daily whenever the broken day
coutner is smaller than 7 and the alarm will be stopped if the connection is restored.
226
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.3.1 Favorite Program Groups
To ease access to frequently used program, the iPECS Admin Main Page displays a Favorite
PGM list. The Favorite PGM list buttons, when selected, return the associated Web page. Up to
20 favorites are configured using the Edit button in the upper right of the page.
Figure 4.3.1-1 Favorite Program
To register a Favorite program, click Edit button. The following page will be displayed.
Clear button: Clears the check box for all programs.
Save button: Saves the Web page, PGMs with checked boxes are stored as Favorites,
up to 20.
Back button: Returns to the previous page.
227
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Figure 4.3.1-2 Favorite Program Groups for edit
228
Issue 1.6
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.3.2 Using Function Base
Function Base is designed to customize the feature or PGM by configuring the Function base so
that customer can be easy to use the desired and frequent feature.
There are two buttons: Common Function List and User Function List. The feature or PGM can
register up to 20 as Favorite function.
1) Common Function List
Generally, iPECS system supports the basic function list as default. The available function is 5
(DID Setting Scenario, Network Scenario, SIP Extension Registration, SIP Trunk Configuration,
Station Group Scenario). The 5 functions can’t be deleted or editable.
Figure 4.3.2-1 Common Function List
2) User Function List
To configure the user function list, click Maintenance button and then you can see the Function
Program in the left frame and click the sub menu ‘User Function Management’ as the following
figure. On this web page, you can add or delete the function.
Figure 4.3.2-2 User Function Management
229
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Adding Function
This step is divided into 5 steps and you can make the desired function each step. The following
is the guide to make Name and add the function on each step:
1) To enter the function name, English, Numbering, Underscore (_) and Parentheses are
available. Function name has to be filled out.
2)
To enter the step name, English, Numbering, and Special letters except Double
quotation marks are available.
3) The step name doesn’t need to be filled out, but the function has to be configured each
step.
4) To cancel or close this tab, click the close button (X) and pop up the blow;
1. Click the Add Function button.
2. On the below window, click the desired PGM in the left frame. First fill out the function
name and step name. To configure the step 1, click the Make table to check the desired
function and then click [Save] button.
Check All: check all functions
Save: Save the checked functions
Initialize: Initialize the checked functions
230
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3. The selected functions are displayed and click [Save] button after checking each
functions. The rest steps are the same as the step 1.
4. Finally, click [Save] Function to save and then click [OK] button.
231
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
5. To check the function, click Function Base button in the left frame and User Function List
and you will see the following figure.
You can enable or disable the function by checking each function and then click the save
after setting Value. Also move to each step by clicking [Next] button or [Previous] button.
Deleting Function
To delete the user function, click Maintenance at the top of window and then click the Function
Program -> User Function Management. Check the desired function to delete and click [Delete]
button.
232
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.3.3 iPECS Web Page Navigation
The Navigation frame appears in the left after login; refer to Figure 4.3-1. Selecting a Program
group from either the Navigation pane or the Favorites list will display the selected Web entry
page.
Each of the system‘s data entry Web pages includes a frame for data display and modification.
To modify data, click in the data field, either a drop-down menu will appear for entry selection or a
cursor will appear in the field and the user may type in the data required. Once all new data for a
Web page has been entered, the [Save] button must be clicked to send the new page to the
system and save the modified data.
In some cases, where mentioned, it may be necessary to reset the system. The system can be
reset manually as described in the iPECS Hardware Description and Installation Manual by
selecting the Reset System button on the Initialization Web page or using the reset button.
4.3.4 General Web Page Features
4.3.4.1 Web Page Range Entries
On many of the Web pages for Station, CO Line and Tables Data a range of station, lines or table
indices must be entered to display the appropriate data entry page. In this case, a range of
devices or indices can be selected by entering the lowest and highest device number separated
by a dash. In addition, a comma can be used to enter non-sequential numbers. Note no space
characters should be entered before or after the dash or comma. Note the data entry page
displays the data for the lowest device or table index entered.
4.3.4.2 Table Check Boxes
Data entry pages that require a range entry, only display the data for the lowest device number or
Table index entered in the range. To assure that only the appropriate data is changed for all
entries in the range, a check box is located in front of each attribute. When the page is saved,
only data for attributes with the box checked are saved for the range while data for unchecked
attributes are not modified.
4.3.4.3 Sorting Displayed Data
Charts in the data pages typically allow the data to be sorted based on a given column in either
ascending or descending order. In the column header, the sorting symbol displays to indicate the
sorting function is available for the column.
233
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.3.5 Install wizard
After the system is initialized, the first time Web Admin is accessed, the Install Wizard is
displayed. The Wizard presents 9 pages in sequence with parameters that should be verified or
commonly need modification prior to operation of the system including:
1) System Upgrade
2) Nation Code
3) System Time & Date
4) Station Number
5) Flexible Numbering Plan
6) CO Ring Assignment
7) License Upload
8) Maintenance ID & Password
9) IP Information
4.3.5.1 System Upgrade
Click the Select files button and then open the pop-up folder. Select the desired file to upload to
the system’s memory and click the [Start] button. The file is sent to the system’s memory, saved
and automatically loaded upon a system reset or restart.
Figure 4.3.5.1-1 System upgrade
234
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.3.5.2 Nation Code
During initialization, the system employs the Nation Code to establish the default gains and tones
for the various interfaces (analog CO Lines, ISDN lines, etc.), as well as the numbering plans for
the specific country. The gains, in particular must be set to comply with the local regulatory
requirements. Normally, the Nation Code will be set at the factory, however, assure the Nation
code matches the system location.
Changing Nation Code
1) Dip Switch pole 4 of UCP100 (or UCP600, UCP2400) moves to ON. Dip Switch pole 2 of
KSU (eMG) moves to ON.
2) Change Nation Code by clicking in the combo box.
3) Click [Save] button and then the system start resetting to apply.
In addition, all other data will be initialized, so the Nation Code should be properly set prior to
other programming. You can change the numbering plan for your situation.
Figure 4.3.5.2-1 Set Nation Code Wizard
4.3.5.3 Set System Time and Date
You can set System time and date in this page.
Figure 4.3.5.3-1 Set system time and date
235
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.3.5.4 Set Station Number
You want to change the current station number to New station number. In this page, you can
change the station number.
Figure 4.3.5.4-1 Set Station Number
4.3.5.5 Set Flexible Numbering Plan
The Flexible Numbering Plan defines the various digit strings (codes) users may dial to access
system resources (outside lines, page zones, etc.) and features. In the wizard, codes for features
that commonly may require modification are displayed.
Figure 4.3.5.5-1 Set Flexible Numbering plan
236
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.3.5.6 Set CO Ring Assignment
CO Ring Assignment establishes how the system will route incoming calls. The wizard
assignments cover all CO/IP Lines in the system and the Ring assignments for Day, Night and
Timed Ring modes can be established.
Figure 4.3.5.6-1 Set CO Ring Assignment
4.3.5.7 Set License Upload
Before License upload, make sure that the date of system is set correctly. Click [Select files]
button and then open the pop-up folder. Select a valid license file to upload to the system and
click the [Start] button. If the file which is sent to the system is “System License File”, it will be
saved and automatically applied without restart. The enabled features by uploading license file
can be shown in “System Overview” page.
Figure 4.3.5.7-1 Set License Upload
237
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.3.5.8 Set Maintenance ID & Password
The Wizard includes a password entry page. It is strongly recommended that a unique User
ID and strong password be entered to minimize the risk of admin and maintenance access
by unauthorized personnel.
In order to finish the final step, you should register at least a maintenance ID. If not so, the Wizard
can’t go on to the next.
Also, Keyset admin password can be registered in this page.
Figure 4.3.5.6-1 Set Maintenance Password
NOTE
1. The new information will be in effect immediately upon saving the information. When
a new Admin User ID and Password are saved, the Web login screen appears. A
new Admin session will be required using the new login credentials.
2. The number of Tenancy group for each system is as below:
UCP100/600/2400
100 groups
eMG800
32 groups
eMG80
15 groups
238
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.3.5.9 Set IP Information
The IP Information page establishes the IP address scheme. DHCP can be enabled or static
addressing can be configured. When the system is behind a firewall, the Firewall address must
be entered allowing proper operation with remote users, devise and SIP trunks. A DNS (Directory
Name Server) for Domain Name resolution should also be entered on this page. Note that
changing any IP address in the system requires a system reset; the reset does not initialize data.
Figure 4.3.5.2-1 Set IP Information
239
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4 Web Admin Programming
4.4.1 System ID & Numbering Plans
Selecting the System ID & Numbering Plans expands the Navigation frame to display the
available Program groups as shown in the below figure.
Figure 4.4.1-1 System ID & Numbering Plans sub-menu
240
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.1.1 System ID – PGM 100
Selecting System ID will display the following Input Entry page. Click [Reset System] to restart
the system after changing Nation code, Site name, Site detail, My area code, Multi area code,
Numbering Plan, etc.
Figure 4.4.1.1-1 System ID
Under System ID, the country is identified using the international dial codes (Nation Code). A
twenty-four (24) character Site Name, Site detail and the local My Area Code maybe defined.
This information is used to set gain, frequencies and other system characteristics specific to the
country and regional regulatory requirements. The Site Name is primarily useful for the
installer/programmer as a reference to customer.
Note
1) In case of eMG, to change Nation code, Dip-switch 1 pole # 2 is ON; you cannot change the
Nation code while the switch is OFF.
2) In case of UCP, to change the Nation Code or disable the VOIU, the UCP Module “Mode”
dip switch pole 4 must be ON; you cannot change the Nation code while the switch is OFF.
3) The rest attributes are additional options for Customer’s convenience.
4) In case of UCP, the built-in VoIP DSP channels (VOIU) can be disabled allowing use of the
DSPs for the Multi-party Conference function. Note the capability to disable the VOIU is only
available when dip switch 4 of the UCP module is in the ON position.
241
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Numbering Plan
The system employs one of the nine (9) basic Flexible Number Plans as detailed in Appendix B.
Individual items from the selected Numbering Plan can be changed under Flexible Numbering
Plan in section 4.4.1.7.
Note
The numbering plan on this manual is based on Numbering plan 2. The value (or feature code)
may be different according to Numbering plan.
In case of eMG80
1. Administrator can select the channel capacity of VoIP and Voice Mail in this filed.
- In case of VMIU8/VOIU0, the default 2 channel of VoIP can't be used.
2. VVMU channel field can't be available if VVMU is not installed.
3. Select VoIP and Voice mail channel for Built-in (MPB) and VVMU by referring the below chart.
Item
Specification
Max. 8 Channels
VOIU(MPB)
Built-in VoIP
- 2 Channels (by default)
- 6 Channels (1 Channel increment by license)
Max. 8 Channels
VMIU(MPB)
Built-in Voice Mail
- 2 Channels (by default)
- 6 Channels (1 Channel increment by license)
VOIB(VVMU)
VMIB(VVMU)
VoIP
Voice Mail
Max. 8 Channels
- 8 Channels (1 Channel increment by license)
Max. 8 Channels
- 8 Channels (1 Channel increment by license)
In case of eMG800
Flexible VMIU/VOIU channel
You can select one of the following types according to the current configuration using Voice mail
and VoIP channel:
1) VMIU8 / VOIU0
2) VMIU8 / VOIU2
3) VMIU8 / VOIU4
4) VMIU4 / VOIU8
242
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
In case of UCP
You can set VOIU in this page. The MCIU (Audio Conference) channel is flexible according to
VoIU ‘Enable or Disable’ and installing the related module as below:
eMG ‘Speed Numbering’
You can easily memory the system speed dial code and station dial code by selecting the desired
type depending on the situation among the following types:
eMG80
1) Type (0): System speed (2000~4999), Station speed (000~099)
2) Type (1): System speed (200~999), Station speed (000~099)
3) Type (2): System speed (200~999), Station speed (00~19)
4) Type (3): System speed (20~99), Station speed (00~19)
5) Type (4): System speed (1000~3999), Station speed (000~099)
6) Type (5): System speed (100~999), Station speed (000~099)
7) Type (6): System speed (100~999), Station speed (00~09)
8) Type (7): System speed (10~99), Station speed (00~09)
9) Type (8): System speed (1~9), Station speed (0~0)
eMG800
1) Type (0): System speed (2000~9999), Station speed (000~099)
2) Type (1): System speed (200~999), Station speed (000~099)
3) Type (2): System speed (200~999), Station speed (00~19)
4) Type (3): System speed (20~99), Station speed (00~19)
5) Type (4): System speed (1000~8999), Station speed (000~099)
6) Type (5): System speed (100~999), Station speed (000~099)
7) Type (6): System speed (100~999), Station speed (00~09)
8) Type (7): System speed (10~99), Station speed (00~09)
9) Type (8): System speed (1~9), Station speed (0~0)
243
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
UCP ‘Speed Numbering’
You can easily memory the system speed dial code and station dial code by selecting the desired
type depending on the situation among the following types:
1) Type (0): System speed (20000~31999), Station speed (000~099)
2) Type (1): System speed (2000~9999), Station speed (000~099)
3) Type (2): System speed (200~999), Station speed (000~099)
4) Type (3): System speed (200~999), Station speed (00~19)
5) Type (4): System speed (20~99), Station speed (00~19)
6) Type (5): System speed (1000~9999), Station speed (000~099)
7) Type (6): System speed (100~999), Station speed (000~099)
8) Type (7): System speed (100~999), Station speed (00~09)
9) Type (8): System speed (10~99), Station speed (00~09)
10) Type (9): System speed (1~9), Station speed (0~0)
The notifications is displayed ‘Speed Numbering type is successfully changed. Please refresh this
page to reload Speed numbering data.” According to selecting Speed numbering type, the range
of System speed dial and Station speed dial is changed over the related PGM.
244
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.1.2 System Overview
Selecting System Overview will display the System Overview page. This page displays the
system capacity, the system license overview related to Application, Device ID list, and Gateway
list. Note that data cannot be entered on this page. Especially, you can check the status of
software license and Temp license.
Note
System overview may show different figure between the below and yours according to installing
Module, Device, etc.
Figure 4.4.1.2-1 eMG80 System Overview
245
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Figure 4.4.1.2-2 eMG800 System Overview
246
Issue 1.6
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Figure 4.4.1.2-3 UCP System Overview
The above information may be different according to installing the related board and license.
Especially UCP is different according to UCP type (UCP100, UCP600, UCP2400).
247
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
4.4.1.3 Device Port Number Change – PGM 101
Selecting Device Port Num Change (101) will display the input entry page.
Figure 4.4.1.3-1 eMG80 Device Port Num Change
Figure 4.4.1.3-2 eMG800 Device Port Num Change
Figure 4.4.1.3-3 UCP Device Port Num Change
248
Issue 1.6
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
The system supports changing port count of a device or deleting devices. In this window, the
Device ID, Mac address, IP address and port count of the device can be modified. Also checking
the [Device Delete] check box will delete the device.
Devices may be registered through the Virtual Registration page by accessing to “Device Port
Number Change” page. Devices can be registered with or without a MAC address and the
number of ports associated with the device may be limited. This may be useful for example to
implement a “partial T1” gateway where only some of the T1 channels are available. Note to
virtually register a SIP trunk, use the Device Type of CO and device as VOIM, enter the desired
number of channels. If you want to use virtual MAC address when you register Device, please
check the check box in front of MAC address input field. Click [Register] button after finishing
the desired value.
Figure 4.4.1.3-2 Virtual Registration
249
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.1.4 System IP Plan - PGM 102
Selecting System IP Plan will display the following input entry page. Use the check boxes to
indicate which attributes to modify and the data for checked attributes is stored for the entire
range of stations when saved.
Figure 4.4.1.4-1 eMG System IP Plan
Figure 4.4.1.4-2 UCP System IP Plan
250
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
The System IP Plan sets several IP addresses including MPB (UCP) IP address that is required
for external VoIP calls, the IP address for the router, and the system‘s internal private IP address
Plan. Note that the LAN and Router addresses must be routable IP addresses for access to an
external VoIP network, remote access by an iPECS Phone or remote Web access. When used,
the LAN port of the VVMU(eMG80), VOIB(eMG800) or VOIM (Voice over IP device unit) must
also have a routable IP address for access to/from an external VoIP network and a remote iPECS
device.
When “Automatic IP Assign” is enabled, the system will assign IP addresses to each iPECS IP
terminal and gateway Modules including any VOIM using the System IP address range defined.
These addresses are used for communications between the system and other VOIMs and
terminals.
When “Automatic IP Assign” is enabled, the system will assign IP addresses to each iPECS IP
terminal and Board (Gateway Modules) including any VVMU, VOIB or VOIM using the System IP
address range defined. These addresses are used for communications between the system and
other VVMU (VOIB, VOIM) and terminals.
The system may be connected to a LAN that is segmented by two separate private IP address
schemes. This segmenting technique is often used to separate voice and data devices. However,
with this segmenting technique, the system will normally treat the segmented devices such as IP
soft phones, as remote devices, using valuable WAN bandwidth. Assigning the “Second Sys IP
address” with a valid IP address from the second segment permits the system to communicate
directly with the devices over the LAN.
iPECS can be installed behind a NAPT server, if the NAPT server provides fixed address
translation and port forwarding to the system. In this case, the system will employ the “Firewall IP
address” as the fixed IP address for communication with remote devices. This address must be
assigned as the “MPB (UCP)” address in the remote device.
Table 4.4.1.4-1 SYSTEM IP ADDRESS PLAN
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
DEFAULT
MPB (UCP) DHCP
Controls the DHCP client function for MPB in the KSU or UCP.
OFF
MPB (UCP) IP Address
Public IP Address of the KSU (UCP) LAN port that required for
remote user and external VoIP network access. IPv4 format.
10.10.10.2
MPB (UCP) Subnet Mask
Defines the system subnet for MPB (UCP) IP addresses.
255.255.255.0
Router IP Address
IP Address of router for external network (WAN) access. Required
10.10.10.1
for shared voice and data LAN, external VoIP and remote Web
access.
System IP Range
Range for private IP addresses of Modules/Terminals.
System Subnet Mask
Define the system subnet for private IP addresses.
255.255.255.0
Automatic IP Assign
The system automatically assigns IP addresses to modules and
terminals (ON) or, when OFF, IP addresses are assigned
manually in Device IP Address Table or from the DHCP address
assigned to the device.
ON
Second System IP
Address
When devices have different address schemes on the same LAN,
0.0.0.0
enter an IP address from the second LAN for use by the system.
251
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.1.4-1 SYSTEM IP ADDRESS PLAN
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
DEFAULT
Second System Net Mask
Net mask of the second private IP addresses
255.255.255.0
Firewall IP Address
When the system is installed behind a NAPT server, the fixed IP
Address provided by the NAPT server must be assigned here.
Also, use this IP address to identify the MPB in remote devices.
0.0.0.0
If the firewall of system has a dynamic IP address, you can use
Dynamic DNS by setting 'DDNS Usage of Firewall' and 'Domain
Name of Firewall'. Note that after IP address of firewall is
changed, VOIP (UCP) / VOIU (eMG) board will be restarted.
ON/OFF,
1-127 (Min.)
First MAC Range
MAC Address Range to register a device if device MAC address
is included in range.
000000000000~
000000000000
Second MAC
Range
MAC Address Range to register a device if device MAC address
is included in range.
000000000000~
000000000000
DNS IP Address
IP Address of Domain Name Server, which iPECS system will use
0.0.0.0
to resolve a URL to an IP address. The DNS provides the
resolution after receiving the name from iPECS.
DDNS Usage of Firewall
Domain Name of Firewall
252
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.1.5 Device IP Plan - PGM 103
Selecting Device IP Plan will display the input entry page.
Figure 4.4.1.5-1 eMG Device IP Plan
TDM board is registered with own slot number. It is registered automatically without any
configuration.
If the station is assigned to Master or Slave by linked station, the bracket ‘[M] or [S]’ will be
displayed by the station number in PGM 101, 103, 105, 124 of Web page.
To register IP device:
As Gateway/board and terminals are registered to the iPECS, a slot number is assigned, which
indicates the order of registration. Also, based on the type of device (CO Gateway/board,
Terminal or Station board) the system assigns a logical Sequence Number. Thus, Sequence
Numbers for CO Gateway/board, Terminals are independently assigned based on the type of
Gateway/board. These Sequence Numbers are employed to provide a relationship between the
physical MAC address and the logical port numbers of the device.
The system may assign a default private IP address to each Sequence Number. If desired, this
program may be used to modify the assigned IP address for each Gateway/board and iPECS
Phone.
Each Gateway/board and terminal can be assigned for “Direct Send”. With Direct Send enabled,
the system will employ the Ethernet MAC address of the device to send iPECS protocol
messages to the device. This reduces the overall LAN traffic by eliminating the need for IP
address headers in the messages.
The system normally employs IP multi-cast protocol to respond to a registration request from a
Gateway/board or terminal. When the device is separated from the system by a router, the
system must use the IP uni-cast protocol. This is established by the “Local Device” assignment.
When disabled (Off), the system will send an IP uni-cast message to the device in response to a
registration request.
253
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Figure 4.4.1.5-2 UCP Device IP Plan
This page displays all of the devices registered to the iPECS UCP by grouping into the type of
device (CO, STA, etc.).
If the station is assigned to Master or Slave by linked station, the bracket ‘[M] or [S]’ will be
displayed by the station number in PGM 101, 103, 105, 124 of Web page.
Selecting the SVC button for a device will toggle the service mode between in and out-of-service.
The device type can be modified as well as the MAC and IP address. Using the SVC check box
to place a device out of service, an errant device can be replaced without affecting the database.
After placing the device out-of-service, it can be removed, replaced and the MAC address of the
new device entered. The SVC check box is used to bring the new device into service employing
the database from the replaced device.
The system may assign a default private IP address to each device. If desired, this program may
be used to modify the assigned IP address for each Gateway/board and iPECS Phone.
The device mode, connected to a local or remote LAN, is displayed. Each Gateway/board and
terminal can be assigned for “ARP”. With ARP disabled, the system will employ the Ethernet
MAC address of the device to send iPECS protocol messages to the device. This reduces the
overall LAN traffic by eliminating ARP messages and the need for IP address headers in the
messages.
The system normally employs IP multi-cast protocol to respond to a registration request from a
Gateway/board or terminal.
When the device is separated from the system by a router, the system must use the IP uni-cast
protocol. This is established by the “Local Device” assignment. When disabled (OFF), the system
will send an IP uni-cast message to the device in response to a registration request.
254
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.1.6 CO Device Sequence Number - PGM 104
Selecting CO Gateway/board Sequence Number will display the input entry page. Selecting the
blue colored text in the Table header will sort the table based on the selected column. Click [Save]
button after changing Value to apply.
Figure 4.4.1.6-1 eMG CO Device Sequence Number
Figure 4.4.1.6-1 UCP CO Device Sequence Number
The system configures the CO/IP Line numbers as discussed in section 2.3. In case of eMG,
each slot is assigned the starting CO/IP Line number based on the Order Numbering. With UCP,
each Module is assigned the starting CO/IP Line number based on the registration order. In
place of the default Order Numbering, the “Order” number assigned in this PGM can be used to
reorder the CO/IP numbering.
255
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.1.7 Flexible Station Numbering Plan - PGM 105
Selecting Flexible Station Number will return the data entry page. For convenience, the copy,
paste, and drag is available to enter or modify data.
This page permits changes in the Station Numbering Plan using one of three methods:
Enter Station Index Range: eMG80: 1-140 / eMG800: 1-1200 / UCP: 1-2400
Station Index Range: use to change the station numbers associated with a range of “Order
Numbers” (the indexes). The “Start Station Number” is assigned to the station with the first
index then the station number is incremented by one and assigned to the next station in the
range. The process is repeated until the station number with the last index is changed.
Station Number: enter the station number to search. The station number is displayed and then
you can change the new station number as you wish.
Multiple Station Number to change: there are two ways to search the station number for
change; Enter Index Range or Enter Station Range.
You can change station numbers over a range of stations using the “Start Station Number” as
the first station number for the range. The station number is incremented by one for each
successive station in the range.
Figure 4.4.1.7-1 Flexible Station Number
Each iPECS IP and LDP Phone and SLT is assigned a logical order number, shown as the “Index”
number on the Web page, during the registration process. The station Index number is
256
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
incremented from 1 as each terminal device is registered. At registration, station numbers
increment sequentially with the index and are assigned starting at Station 100 for eMG80 and at
Station 1000 for eMG800/UCP. The Station Numbering Plan allows the station numbers to be two
(2) to eight (8) digits in length as long as the number of digits in the Station numbers is the same.
Setting CID Password directly
You can set the CID password to click “Go to Setting” button. After clicking it, you will move to the
following PGM 162 and set the CID password, and then save CID password to mark tick on the
save box and click the [Save] button.
257
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.1.8 Flexible Numbering Plan - PGM 106 ~ 109
Selecting Flexible Numbering Plan will display the input entry page. Selecting the blue colored
text in the Table header will sort the table based on the selected column. Click [Save] button after
changing Value to apply.
Figure 4.4.1.8-1 Flexible Number Plan
Feature dial codes for the system can be assigned using the system‘s Flexible Number Plan.
Feature codes should be one (1) to four (4) digit in length and must not conflict. For example,
Feature codes 53 and 536 represent a conflict. The system will not update the database until
correct data is entered. Table 4.4.1.8-1 provides a brief description for each feature and the
default codes as they appear in Numbering Plan 2. The default values for other numbering plans,
which may be selected on the title “System ID (100)” and other numbering plan is described in
Appendix B.
Table 4.4.1.8-1 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN CODES
Order
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
1
Internal Page Zone
Internal Page Zone access codes.
2
3
4
Internal All Call Page
Meet Me Page
External Page Zone – 1
Internal All Call Page access code.
Meet-Me-Page answer code.
External Page Zone 1 access code.
258
DEFAULT
eMG80:301~335
eMG800:*301~*400
UCP:*301~*400
*543
*544
*545
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.1.8-1 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN CODES
Order
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
DEFAULT
External Page Zone 1 access code only for UCP.
External All Call Page access code.
All Call Page access code.
Dial code to signify the start of an SMDR Account
Code.
Dial code to generate a Flash on the active CO
Line.
SLT Last number redial feature access code.
Dial code to activate Do-Not-Disturb.
Code to activate Call Forward.
SLT Speed Dial programming access code.
*546
*548
*549
5
6
7
External Page Zone – 2
External All Call Page
All Call Page
8
SMDR Account Code Enter
9
Flash Command To CO Line
10
11
12
13
*552
*553
*554
*555
15
SLT Last Number Redial
Do-Not-Disturb (DND)
Call Forward
Speed Dial Program
Activate Message Wait/Call
Code to activate Message Wait/Call Back.
Back
Message Wait/Call-Back Answer Code to return Message Wait/Call Back.
16
17
18
19
20
SLT Speed Dial Access
DND/FWD Cancel
SLT CO System Hold
SLT Program Mode Access
Attendant Unavailable
*558
*559
*560
*561
*562
21
AME Feature
22
23
24
25
26
Alarm Reset
Group Call Pick-Up
Universal Night Answer
Account Code With Bin
Walking COS
27
ACD Agent ON/OFF Duty
28
29
30
31
32
33
Code to reroute call after answer.
*578
Code to reroute call prior to answer.
*579
36
ACD Supervisor Login
ACD Supervisor Logout
ACD Help Code
ACD Call In Queue Display
ACD Supervisor Status
ACD Supervisor Monitor
ACD Reroute Queued Call
Answer
ACD Reroute Queued Call No
Answer
Camp-On Answer
SLT Speed Dial access code.
Code to cancel DND/FWD/MSG Wait.
Code to place a CO Line call on System Hold.
SLT user program access code.
Code to make attendant “unavailable”.
Dial code to assign an Answering Machine
Emulation Flex button.
Code to terminate an Alarm signal.
Group Call Pick-up code.
Universal Night Answer code.
Dial code for entering an Account Code.
Dial code to activate Walking Class-of-Service.
Code to toggle ACD Supervisor ON and OFF
duty.
Supervisor log-in code.
Supervisor log-out code.
Agent & Supervisor code for Supervisor help.
Dial code to display calls in queue.
Dial code to display group status.
Dial code to activate Supervisor monitor.
37
Call Park Locations
Dial code to place/retrieve a call in a system Park
Orbit.
38
Station Group Pilot Number
Station group pilot number.
14
34
35
39
40
Station User VSF Features
Access
Call Coverage Ring
Dial code to answer a Camped On call.
*550
*551
*556
*557
*564
*565
*566
*567
*568
*569
*571
*572
*573
*574
*575
*576
*577
*621
eMG80:#601~#619
eMG800:#601~#800
UCP:#601~#800
eMG80: *401~*440
eMG800: *401~*500
UCP: *401~*500
VSF feature access code.
66
Code for Call Coverage button.
*76
259
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.1.8-1 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN CODES
Order
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
DEFAULT
*77
89
88
8*
*581
*582
*583
*584
*585
41
42
43
44
Direct Call Pick-Up
Access CO Group
Access Individual CO/IP
Access Held CO/IP
45
Access Held Individual CO/IP
46
Access CO In First CO Group
47
Attendant Call
48
VM MSG Wait Enable
49
VM MSG Wait Cancel
50
51
52
53
Door Open
Door Open
Door Open
Door Open
54
MCID Request
55
Unsupervised Conf Timer
Extend Code
56
PTT Group Logon/Logoff
57
58
59
60
61
ACD Agent Primary Login
ACD Agent Primary Logout
ACD Agent Secondary Login
ACD Agent Secondary Logout
Wrap-up End
Dial code to activate Directed Call Pick-up.
Dial code to access a CO Line from a group.
Dial code to access a specific CO/IP Line.
Dial code to access the last CO/IP Line from Hold.
Dial code to access a specific CO/IP Line from
Hold.
Dial code to access the 1st available CO/IP Line in
any accessible group.
Dial code to call Main Attendant.
Dial code for external Voice mail to activate
Message Wait indication.
Dial code for external Voice Mail to deactivate
Message Wait indication.
Dial code to activate Door 1 contact.
Dial code to activate Door 2 contact.
Dial code to activate Door 3 contact only for UCP.
Dial code to activate Door 4 contact only for UCP.
Dial code to activate Malicious Caller Id (Except
USA version).
Dial code to extend unsupervised conference
time.
Push-To-Talk group login and logout dial code.
The station must have a PTT button for proper
operation.
ACD Agent Primary Login code.
ACD Agent Primary Logout code.
ACD Agent Secondary Login Code.
ACD Agent Secondary Logout Code.
ACD Agent Wrap-up end code.
62
T-NET CM LOGIN/OUT
T-NET CM Login/out code
*586
63
64
65
66
67
ENTER INTO CONF ROOM
ENTER INTO CONF-GROUP
STATION ICR
PICK UP GROUP PICK-UP
EMERGENCY PAGE
*59
*68
*587
*588
*589
68
REMOTE MEX CONTROL
Code for a station to enter a conference room.
Code for a station to initiate a conference group.
Code for a station to activate ICR forward.
Pick Up Group Call Pick-up dialing code.
Code for emergency page.
Code to control the mobile extension settings
remotely.
Code to change the state of the Agent ON/Off
duty in all Station groups.
Dial code for an SLT to activate ACNR
Code to check and change ACD group Ring mode
by ACD group supervisor.
Code to check and record a user’s Name greeting
for the Company Directory feature.
ISDN Supplementary HOLD Numbering Plan
Code.
ISDN Supplementary Conference Numbering Plan
Code (Not supported).
70
Agent ON/OFF Duty In ALL
GRP
SLT ACNR
71
ACD Supervisor Ring Mode
72
Company Directory Name
73
ISDN Supplementary HOLD
74
ISDN Supplementary
Conference
69
260
8#
9
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
#*4
*0
##
#0
*580
*58*
*58#
*570
*563
*57*
*57#
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.1.8-1 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN CODES
Order
ATTRIBUTE
75
Forced Channel Seize
76
Override DND/Forward
77
Cancel call back
78
Transfer to VSF Number
79
CCR
80
Room Type Conf Group Join
DESCRIPTION
Code to disconnect an existing call and seize the
CO/IP Line or connect to the station.
Dial code to override DND or Call Forward
activated by a station.
Code to cancel a Callback request.
While on a CO/IP Line call, this code may be used
to transfer a call to a valid system announcement,
[Transfer] + [*55*] + valid system announcement
(01-200). The outside party receives the system
announcement and DISA service activates.
It is used in digit conversion.
After a UCS client activates a UCS Conference
Group, other users may dial this code and the
group number to enter the Conference.
261
DEFAULT
*56*
*56#
*55*
#2
5*0
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.1.9 8 Digit Extension Table - PGM 238
Selecting 8 Digit Extension Table will display the input entry page. Click [Save] button after
changing Value to apply.
Figure 4.4.1.9-1 8 Digit Table
The iPECS system supports a Station Numbering Plan of up to eight digits. By combining a prefix
digit string (8 Digit String) of up to six (6) digits with the Add Digit count (digit count from the
Station Numbering assigned in PGM 105), Station Numbering can support up to eight digits. Note
that multiple prefixes (8 Digit Strings) with varying ADD Digit counts can be assigned. In addition,
in case of a conflict, the Prefix digit string will have priority over the Flexible Numbering Plan thus
disabling the feature associated with the digit string but allowing the station to receive calls.
262
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2 Station Data
Selecting the Station Data group will display the Station Data sub-menu displayed in the left
frame as the below figure.
Figure 4.4.2-1 Station Data Main Page
263
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.1 Station Type - PGM 110
Selecting Station Type will display the Station Type data input entry page. Enter a valid station
range and click [Load] to modify the Station Type data. Click [Save] button after changing Value
to apply.
Figure 4.4.2.1-1 Station Type
Each station is assigned a type selected from the “Station Type” drop-down menu. The type is
used by the system to recognize the station‘s capability and set default Flex button configurations.
In addition, for standard iPECS DSS/BLF consoles, the ‘Associated Station Number’ is required
so the system will recognize the station that is used with the console. Note this is not used with
the Serial DSS/BLF Consoles.
In case of selecting SLT type, there are 6 types as below:
SLT (DTMF)
SLT (Pulse)
SLT (DTMF VOL-MW)
SLT (Pulse-MW)
SLT (DTMF FSK-MW)
SLT (DTMF POL-MW)
264
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.2 Common Attributes - PGM 111
Selecting Common Attributes will display the common attributes data input page. Enter a valid
station range and click the [Load] button to enter Common Attributes data.
Use the check boxes to indicate which attributes to define; data for checked attributes is stored
for the entire range of stations by clicking [Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.2.2-1 Common Attributes
Common Attributes define features and functions available to the station. Generally, the entry will
turn the feature ON (enable) or OFF (disable). Refer to the following table for a description of the
features and the input required.
Table 4.4.2.2-1 Common Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
Keyset Admin
Access
CO PGM
Automatic Hold
Auto Transfer By
Button
DESCRIPTION
When enabled, the station can access the system Database.
A station can be permitted to change the CO/IP Line numbers
(ports) associated with a Flexible button.
Enables Auto Hold for the station. With Auto Hold enabled, the
system will place an active external call on hold if the user
presses a CO/IP Line or DSS button.
Transfer a talking call to a new making call by pressing Station
(DSS)/CO (Loop)/U-Loop flexible button.
265
RANGE
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
DEFAULT
Enable
Disable
OFF
ON
ATD: ON
Others:
OFF
OFF
ALL
ALL
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.2.2-1 Common Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
Individual CO
Access
CO/IP Line
Queuing
Ringing Line
Preference
DESCRIPTION
Permits stations to use dial codes to access individual CO/IP
Lines.
Permits the station to queue for the next available Line when
an All Lines Busy signal is received.
Enables Ringing Line Preference for the station. Calls that ring
the telephone can be answered by going off-hook without
selecting the CO/IP Line button.
Speed Dial
Access
Allows the station to access System Speed Dial bins.
Alarm/Door Bell
Assigns a station to receive Alarm/Door Bell signal.
Forced SMDR
Account Code
Loop LCR
Account
When ON, the station user must enter an authorization code
to access CO/IP Lines.
When On, the user must enter an Account code to place an
outgoing call.
The Station may be required to enter a Station Authorization
code to access LOOP LCR operation.
Door Open
Enables use of Door open feature by station.
Station Account
The ability to assign Flexible buttons of the iPECS IP and LDP
Phones can be controlled. When allowed here, the user may
Flex Button PGM
assign features to Flexible buttons but requires special
assignments to configure CO/IP Line buttons.
The System will seize this CO/IP Line or a Line from the
Prefer CO or
CO/IP group number when the station dials “9” (First available
Group
Co access code)
Emergency CO or This field defines the CO/IP Line or Group employed by the
Group
system to place Emergency Assistance calls.
ICM Tenancy
Group
Assigns stations to an ICM Tenancy Group.
All outgoing calls will disconnect at expiration of the Call
Restrict Timer. The Cut-Off Timers can be set the time for
Call Time
Station and CO Line. For cut off timer of Station, refer to the
Restriction
title “Station Timers (123)”. For CO line, refer to the title “CO
Line data: Common Attributes (144)”.
Proctor Monitoring Enables use of PABX ANI Link device for E-911 support, Only
Power-Fail
an SLT port can be used for this feature.
Line Release Cost When a CO/IP line is released, the disconnect cause or callDisplay
cost is displayed in the LCD of iPECS IP or LDP Phone.
A station can be assigned to a PTT (Push-to-Talk) group and
Active PTT Group
the group enabled so the station can place and receive PTT
Number
announcements for the group.
A station (only IP Phone) can be assigned as a Hot Desk
Hot Desk Station phone. Users and agents can login and use resources of the
system through the Hot Desk phone.
SMDR Hidden
If this feature enables, the dialed digit can be hided on SMDR
266
RANGE
DEFAULT
Except CO
to CO
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Disable
Enable
OFF
ON
Enable
Enable
Disable
OFF
OFF
OFF
Enable
ON
CO/IP Line/
CO Group
number
CO # or CO
Group #
eMG80:1~15
eMG800:0~32
UCP:0~100
Any CO
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Access
code
1
OFF
OFF
0~9
OFF
ON
OFF
Disable
Disable
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.2.2-1 Common Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Dialed Digits
output.
When a call forwards to the Secretary of an
Left Message to
Executive/Secretary pair, messages can be left for the
Executive
Executive (ON) or Secretary (OFF).
Based on this level, the user will be able to view the specified
programs within the Station User Web portal. Level 1 can view
Station Web Level all programs, Levels 2 and 3 are configured in the title
“System data: Station Web Authorization”. This is a Web only
PGM.
When a page announcement is received, it is normally played
Headset page
over the Speaker of the iPECS IP or LDP Phone. For headset
mode
users, the page can played to the headset or both the headset
and speaker.
When employing a non-ISDN terminal, specifically a modem
Progress
or analog FAX, the ISDN call SETUP message must include
Indication
this message and “Progress Indication” should be set to “ON”.
When an analog device (SLT or FAX) uses an ISDN Line in
the system, the Information Element of the ISDN SETUP
3.1 KHz Audio
message must indicate the device only has 3.1 KHz audio
capabilities. If an SLT or analog FAX will be allowed access to
the ISDN Lines, this parameter must be “ON”
Pickup by flexible
button
Prepaid Call
When a station receives a call, the DSS/BLF button at other
stations will flash and, if allowed, other stations may use the
button to answer (pick-up) the call.
ON: User can pick up by DSS button.
OFF: User can’t pick up by DSS button.
It is useful feature for user to pay the money within the budget
(Prepaid) for outgoing calls. For more information, refer to the
below feature “Prepaid money”.
RANGE
Enable
OFF
ON
ON
LEVEL 1 ~
LEVEL 3
LEVEL 2
SPKR/
HEADSET/
BOTH
Speaker
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
An amount can be associated with the station as prepayment
000000 –
for outgoing calls. The assigned “Pre-paid Money” is reduced
999999
by the calculated call cost (Call Metering or cost/minute). This
parameter displays the remaining funds for outgoing calls.
000000 Prepaid Money is often used in small hospitality businesses.
The “Used Pre-paid Money” displays the money that has been
999999
used.
SIP USER TABLE These fields reference the index to the SIP User ID Attributes
INDEX
Table. The referenced SIP User ID may be employed for
SIP USER TABLE several of the SIP headers for outgoing calls and may be
eMG80:0~140
employed for incoming call routing as configured in the SIP
INDEX2
eMG800:0~1200
CO Attributes PGM 133, “ID Assigned Station”.
UCP:0~2400
SIP USER TABLE Up to three SIP User Id indices can be assigned to each
station to permit the use of up to three SIP Trunk service
INDEX3
providers.
Station Web
English/
User can select the desired language for Station Web.
Language
Local language
If an iPECS IP or LDP Phone user attempts to page using the
Lift Handset for
OFF
speakerphone, pre-selection will be activated and the display
page
ON
shows “Lift Handset for Page when Lift Handset for Page is
Prepaid Money (0
- 999999)
&
Used Prepaid
Money
267
DEFAULT
0
0
0
0
0
English
ON
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.2.2-1 Common Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
Privacy
DESCRIPTION
ON”.
If Lift Handset for Page is OFF, then User can make page on
speakerphone without lift handset.
If Privacy is ON, then any person could not barge-in to the
station and also Attendant can’t intrude to Station. Also, if
Privacy is ON, any person can’t forcefully disconnect the
station.
Call Coverage Attributes
Call Coverage
Mode
The Call Coverage feature permits an iPECS IP or LDP
Phone user to receive ring and answer calls for other stations.
When a covered station rings, the {CALL COVERAGE}
Call Coverage
button LED will flash at the covering station and the station will
Delay Ring
receive ring (immediate or delayed by 0 to 15 ring cycles).
OFF: Call Coverage is implemented when a covered station is
Call Coverage On in the idle state.
ON: Call Coverage is implemented when a covered station is
Busy
on idle or busy state.
Call Coverage
OFF: Call Coverage Ring is not delivered to Mobile Extension
Through Mobile
ON: Call Coverage Ring is not delivered to Mobile Extension
Extension
External Call Only: Call Coverage only for external calls when
Call Coverage On the covered station is busy
Busy Range
External and Internal Call: Call Coverage both for external &
internal calls when the covered station is busy
by Originator: Call Coverage Delay is implemented by the
covered station’s “Call Cover Delay Ring” delay count’
by Member: Call Coverage Delay is implemented by covering
station’s “Call Cover Delay Ring” delay count’
Call Coverage For OFF: Wakeup Ring to covered station is not covered
Wakeup Ring
ON: Wakeup Ring to covered station is covered
Call Coverage
Delay Ring
Method
Call Coverage
Ring Type on
Member
Silence: No audible ring is presented and the user must press
the flashing Call Coverage button to answer the call.
Normal Ring: Audible ring is presented and the call can be
answered by simply lifting the handset or pressing the
Speaker button.
Mute ring is only supported in LIP-8000E series.
RANGE
DEFAULT
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
0~15
0
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
External Call
Only/
External and
Internal Call
External
Call
Only
by Originator/
by Member
by
Originator
OFF
ON
OFF
Silence/
Normal Ring/
Muted(Continuo
us)-80XXE only/
Muted(One
Burst)-80XXE
only
Normal
Ring
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Dial Tone/
Dial Tone
Tone/Ring Attributes
Call Time Tone
Camp-on Tone
ICM Dial Tone
A tone can be sent periodically with indicating the elapsed
time of an outgoing CO/IP call. The Elapsed Call Timer
determines the period between tones. For more information
about Elapsed Call timer, refer to the title “System data:
System timer (180~182, 186)”.
When the Camp-on feature is enabled for the station, if the
station is busy and receives a Camp-on request, the LCD
indicates the camped on call. In addition, if Camp-on tone is
enabled, the Camp-On tone is sent to the station as an
audible signal for the camp-on.
One of four dial tone sources can be selected for each station.
268
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.2.2-1 Common Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Source
ICM Ring Back
Tone Source
One of four ring back tones can be selected for each station.
While the station is Off hook ring, the type of ring can be
Off hook ring type adjusted as a single burst, muted normal ring, system ring or
no audible ring signal.
SIP color ring
Gain table index
Tone table index
Digit conversion
table
With a SIP based AA/VM that supports color ring, color ring
may be provided to SIP pones. The group number associated
with the external AA/VM should be entered as the SIP Color
Ring source.
Selects one of three Tables employ to set the gain from a
device to other device types. PGM 410 to 417 under the
Maintenance tab set the individual gains.
Selects one of five Tables to determine the tones sent to the
Station. The individual tones are configured in PGM 410 to
417 under the Maintenance.
One of the Digit Conversion Tables can be configured for use
for this CO/IP Line.
RANGE
Internal music/
External music/
VSF MOH/
SLT MOH1~5/
VSF MOH2/
VSF MOH3
Ring Back Tone/
Internal music/
External music/
VSF MOH/
SLT MOH1~5/
VSF MOH2~3
BURST/
MUTE/
Refer to System
Attributes
SILENCE
DEFAULT
Ring Back
Tone
Refer to
System
attributes
Station
number
1-3
1
1-5
1
eMG80:1-15
eMG800:1-32
UCP: 1-32
Routing Attributes
Call Forward
When allowed, Call Forward can be activated by the station.
DND
Enables DND to be activated by the station. The station can
be limited to activate DND for outside calls (CO/IP Only) or for
internal calls (ICM only), if desired.
A station must be allowed Off-Net Fwd to forward external
incoming calls outside the system or otherwise establish a
Off-net Forward
CO-to-CO connection (Unsupervised Conference). (Except
USA version)
ACD Group
When unavailable, DID/DISA calls to the station can route to
Service
the ACD Group to which the station is a member.
Ring Group
When unavailable, DID/DISA calls to the station can route to
Service
the Ring Group to which the station is a member.
ACD Group members may be assigned a priority, 0-9.
Members with the highest priority are sent calls ahead of
ACD Login Priority
lower priority members. This field is the same as PGM 191button 19.
269
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF/
ALL/
ICM call only/
CO call only
OFF
Disable
Enable
Enable
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
0~9
OFF
OFF
0
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.2.2-1 Common Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
Prime Line
Auto ACD DND
Forward if OOS
LDT Table Index
LDT Zone number
Mobile (Web)
Client Service
Click to call
service
MS Lync RCC
service
DESCRIPTION
Forced hands
Free Mode
Group Listening
DEFAULT
This feature enables Delayed Prime Line (Idle Line) activation;
see the title “Idle Line Selection (121)” and “System data:
System timer: Prime Line Delay timer (180~182 & 186)”.
If an Agent does not answer an ACD call in the ACD No
Answer timer, the Agent enters an Unavailable state with the
Reason code entered here. The reason code is sent in ACD
Event messages.
If a station is Out-of-Service and has previously forwarded
calls, the system will forward the calls to the previous
destination if enabled here.
HOT
WARM
WARM
None
#, *, 1~9
NONE
OFF
ON
OFF
LCR operation for the station will employ the LDT Table index
defined by this entry.
eMG80: 1-10
eMG800:1-32
UCP:1-32
1
1-100
1
If the LDT Zone Number of a LDT table (LCR LDT(221)) is
equal to this value, the LDT table is available to this station.
When enabled, the station can activate call back from the
Station Web portal.
To use click call application, it should be enabled.
To use MS Lync RCC, it should be enabled.
When a call that is corresponding to a MSN Telephone
Number comes in to system, the call is basically routed to idle
stations that have free MSN button that is assigned for the
corresponding Telephone Number. And also the call can be
routed to busy stations in the following condition.
MSN Wait
OFF : if a keyset is in a busy status, cannot receive incoming
MSN Telephone Number corresponding call even though it
has a free(idle) corresponding MSN LOOP Button
ON : if a keyset is in a busy status, can receive incoming MSN
Telephone Number corresponding call if it has a free(idle)
corresponding MSN LOOP Button.
A call routed using DID normally routes to the appropriate
DID Restriction
station. If desired, a Station can be restricted from receiving
DID calls.
A call routed using DISA normally routes to the appropriate
DISA Restriction
station. If desired, a Station can be restricted from receiving
DISA calls.
When the user activates Pre-Selected or Custom Messages,
Pre-Selected Msg the system can automatically activate DND for the station so
DND
that the station will not receive ring and the call is routed
based on the DND treatment.
Voice Attributes
Page Access
RANGE
Stations must be allowed Page access to send a page over
the system’s Paging facilities.
When placing an intercom call, a user can change the ICM
signaling mode, Tone Ring to Hands free answer mode or HF
Answer to Tone Ring.
Enables Group Listen feature, audio is sent to both the
270
Disable,
Enable
Disable,
Enable
Disable,
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Disable
Enable
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.2.2-1 Common Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
handset and speaker with the handset microphone active and
speakerphone microphone OFF.
Enable
Override Privilege Enables intrusion to gain access to an active CO/IP call.
Voice Over
Barge In Mode
Camp on enable
Video Show on
Calling (ex. IP
Video Door
Phone)
Enables use of Voice Over by the station.
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable/
Barge-in permits an authorized Station to intrude into other
Only Monitor/
existing outside/internal calls or to force disconnection existing
Monitor & Join &
of an existing call.
Disconnect
Station can receive a Camp-on while busy. If ‘Camp On Tone’
is enabled, the stations receive Camp-on tone, otherwise only
OFF
the LCD will indicate the camp on call. If the station is not
ON
allowed to receive a Camp-On, the calling user receives error
tone.
When VoIP video door phone rings to a video-enabled IPKTS
handset, the video streaming commences immediately while
the IPKTS handset is in the ringing and the video stream
continues when answered.
- OFF : normal implementation (video starts after answer)
- ON: video stream from this Video Door Phone to the ringing
video-enabled LIP Phone even though this is alerting stage.
- Condition: A VOIU/VOIB channel for RTP-Packet-Relay
purpose is required to serve ring-back-tone generation via a
DSP channel.
That is because system does pre-answer to the Video Door
Phone even though the receiving station is on alerting state.
271
OFF
ON
DEFAULT
Disable
Enable
Disable
ON
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.3 Terminal Attributes - PGM 112
Selecting Terminal Attributes will display the Terminal Attributes data input page. Enter a valid
station range and click [Load] to enter Terminal Attributes data. Use the check boxes to indicate
which attributes to define; data for checked attributes is stored for the entire range of stations
by clicking [Save] Button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.2.3-1 Terminal Attributes (PGM 112)
Terminal Attributes define features and functions available to the terminal itself. Generally, the
entry will turn the feature ON (enable) or OFF (disable). Refer to the following table for a
description of the features and the input required.
Table 4.4.2.3-1 Terminal Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Enables [SPEAKER] activation when a CO/IP Line, DSS or
other feature button is pressed; there is no need to lift handset.
Enables No-touch answer, which automatically connects
No-Touch Answer
transferred calls to the station’s speakerphone after a short tone.
Auto Speak
Selection
ICM signaling
Mode
The user may select Hands-free (H), Privacy (P) or Tone Ring
(T) for the ICM Signaling mode.
272
RANGE
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
H,
T,
P
DEFAULT
ON
OFF
T
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.2.3-1 Terminal Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Headset Ring
The user can select how to receive Incoming ring signals among
Speaker, Headset or Both.
Speaker/Headset
The user can select between Speaker and Headset for Call.
LCD Display LED
The LCD LED, upper left of LCD, may be used for Intercom Call
ring Indication or both Message Wait and ring Indication.
Message Scroll
Speed
The user can adjust the scroll speed on message from 0 to 7.
The user can use Ear Microphone Headset for Internal or
Ear & Mic Headset external calls if the phone has the Ear. Microphone headset
port.
When On, the user-dialed digits are stored at the iPECS IP or
LDP Phone until explicitly sent by the user. When sent, all dialed
Enblock mode
digits are sent to the system in a block.
Enblock mode is only available to iPECS IP or LDP Phones with
3-Soft keys.
The backlight of iPECS IP and LDP Phones is assigned to stay
off, light only when the station is busy, or light constantly. Please
Back Light Usage
check the phone if the feature is available before setting this
option.
When detected, DTMF from an SLT may be regenerated by
CO/IP Line interface circuitry, the SLT port can by-pass
By Pass DTMF
detection so DTMF is not detected.
Enables an LIP-8000/LIP-9000 station to have a Serial DSS/BLF
Serial DSS Usage
Console attached.
Howler Tone
Howler tone can be sent to a phone when left off-hook.
Flex Button Page
The iPECS LIP-9030 and 9040 have 8 and 12 Flexible buttons,
respectively. Additional Flex buttons are available using Flex
button pages. The phone can have up to 3 pages each with the
8 or 12 Flex buttons. Thus, an LIP-9030 can have 24 Flex
buttons and the LIP-9040 can have 36 Flex buttons.
The Navigation Up/Down button is used to scroll through the
Flex buttons pages assigned.
Align LCD
Small Popup Use
Large Popup
Timer
Message Wait
Indication LED
For the iPECS LIP-9010/20/30/40, character alignment for
messages to the phone can be right or left aligned by the
system, or alignment controlled by the phone (“Not Align”).
For the other phone, please check if the feature is available
before using this option.
If this option is set to ON, small popup is displayed on the LCD
of LIP-9030/9040.
If it is set to OFF, top bar is displayed instead of small popup.
When Large popup timer is set to any value from 1 to 5 except
0, the display of large popup is disappeared after the timer
expired and then the large popup information is displayed at top
bar.
User can program MWI (Message Wait Indication) LED
according to the following type:
273
RANGE
Speaker/
Headset/
Both
Speaker/
Headset/
MWI/Ring,
Ring
DEFAULT
Speaker
Speaker
MWI/Ring
0 ~7
3
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Always Off/
Busy Only/
Always On
Busy Only
OFF
ON
OFF
Disable
Enable
OFF
ON
Enable
ON
Use 1 Page
Use 2 Page
Use 3 Page
Use 3 Page
Not Align
Align Left
Align Right
Not Align
OFF
ON
OFF
0~5
(Sec.)
0
MWI All,
VM MWI,
MWI ALL
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.2.3-1 Terminal Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
1. MWI All: LED is blinking about all calls and Message
2. VM MWI: blinking in case of getting Voice mail
3. CLI MWI: blinking in case of Calling Line Identification
4. SMS MWI: blinking in case of getting Short message
5. ICM MWI: blinking in case of Incoming call
NFC Authorization If this option is ON, User enters Authorization code to use NFC
code Use
function for LIP-9071.
If this option is ON, LCD dimming is available only for LIP-9000
LCD Dimming
Series and LDP-9240D. LCD is dark when the phone is paused
Apply
so some light is needed. So we provide the dimmable lights.
If the ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) option is set to ON, the
UCS ACD Use
ACD menu is displayed on Tools of UCS. UCS can use ACD
login/logout and ACD On/Off Duty.
If the CRM (Customer Relationship Management) option is set
to ON, the CRM menu is displayed and CRM installation tray
UCS CRM Use
icon is displayed on Tools of UCS. UCS can use CRM function
after installation CRM integration.
UCS client user can use ‘Dialing Rule’ of UCS client such as CO
Access, PBX code, Country Code, Area code, International Call,
UCS DIALING
Long distance call, Add zero setting, etc. by setting ON. But, if
RULE USE
this option is OFF, UCS Client user follows ‘System Dialing
Rule’ such as Digit Conversion and LCR.
This option is only for Android UCS Client. If this option is ON,
UCS MOBILE
UCS client user can place a call by using UCS client application.
DIAL USE
But, if this option is OFF, UCS client user places a call by Mobile
(ANDROID’S)
Network (Commnuication network where the last link is
wireless).
SLT Attributes
Data Security
ECM Faxes in
T.38
MODEM Enable
Disables override and camp-on tones to the station. This feature
is commonly used for an analog modem or FAX to assure tones
do not affect received information.
ECM stands for Error Correction Mode. If you failed to send
something via Faxes, you can send it again until it is successful.
When an SLT port is connected to a Modem, the port can be
enabled for Modem operation. This will activate Echo
Cancellation and disregard any Camp-on/Call Wait to improve
modem performance.
SLT CID TYPE
Caller ID can be sent to an SLT as FSK or DTMF signals.
Send SLT CLI Info
When allowed, the system sends CLI (Calling Line Identification)
information to SLT.
SLT Flash Mode
When an SLT activates a Hook-flash the system will perform
one of the following operations:
Flash Transfer – the active call placed on hold and the dial
tone is returned.
Flash-Drop – the active call is dropped.
Flash-Ignore – the Hook-flash is ignored, no action is taken.
Hold Release – the active call is placed on hold and if the
SLT returns to idle the call is dropped.
274
RANGE
DEFAULT
CLI MWI,:
SMS MWI,
ICM MW
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Allow,
Prevent
Allow
OFF
ON
OFF
FSK
DTMF
OFF
ON
FSK
ON
Flash xfer/
Flash Drop/ FlashTransf
Flash Ignore/
er
Hold Release
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.2.3-1 Terminal Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
SLT configuration
mode
For the South African region, the SLT gain is adjusted based on
the SLT Configuration Mode.
Block Back Call
SLT Open Loop
Time
Short Modem
Line Echo
When an SLT attempts to transfer a CO/IP call to another CO/IP
Line, the transfer can be blocked and the call released.
Send open loop signal to SLT port when counter party user
hangs up SLT.
If this value of a SLT is ON, the SLT is the modem mode in
seizing a CO line.
When the CO line is CO board, the {short modem timer} is
starting when the SLT seizes the co line. And if the {short
modem timer} is expired, the SLT goes to the original mode.
When the CO line is ISDN, the {short modem timer} is starting
after receiving the ISDN connect message. And if the {short
modem timer} is expired, the SLT goes to the original mode.
When LKA-200 SLT is used, the echo may be hearing. If this
option is set to ON, the echo won’t be happen.
275
RANGE
Default,
Short,
Long,
Far
OFF
ON
0~9
(100ms)
DEFAULT
Default
OFF
0
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.4 CLI Attributes - PGM 113
Selecting CLI Attributes will display the CLI Attributes data input page. Enter a valid station range
and click [Load] to enter CLI Attributes data. Use the check boxes to indicate which attributes to
define; data for checked attributes is stored for the entire range of stations by clicking [Save]
Button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.2.4-1 CLI Attributes (PGM 113)
CLI Attributes define features and functions available to the station. Generally, the entry will turn
the feature ON (enable) or OFF (disable) or enter is made in the text box. Refer to the following
table for a description of the features and the input required.
Setting CID Password directly
You can set the CID password to click [Go to Setting] button. After clicking it, you will move to
the following PGM 162 and set the CID password, and then save CID password to mark tick on
the save box and click [Save] button.
Table 4.4.2.4-1 CLI Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
Call Wait
DESCRIPTION
When a busy station receives a call, the call may queue
to the station instead of receiving busy treatment. With
Call Wait, the caller will hear Ring-back tone and the
CO/IP Line LED flashes. Also, the CLI for the new
incoming call displays.
276
RANGE
DEFAULT
OFF,
For
For
External/Internal,
External/Internal
For External,
For Internal
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.2.4-1 CLI Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Call wait signal
continuous
When this filed set On, you will get the indication of Call
wait signal continuously without returning to the current
conversation. In case of Off, you will return to the current
conversation after 1 cycle of Call wait signal indication.
ON,
OFF
OFF
Call wait signal
duration (*3sec.) of a
call
You can set the call wait signal duration of a waiting call:
the default is 2 (2*3sec.) and the range is from 0 to 20.
0-20
(*3sec)
2
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Max. 12 digits
eMG80:100
eMG800:1000
UCP:1000
Max. 16
characters
Related with
PGM 143 –
Station CLI
CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation), a carrier
service, sends the number of the calling party to the
CLIP Display
system in the call SETUP message. If enabled here, the
number will be shown in the iPECS Phone LCD.
COLP (Connected Line Id Presentation), a carrier
service, sends the number of the answering party to the
COLP Display
system in the call CONNECT message. If enabled here,
the number will be shown in the iPECS Phone LCD.
CLIR (Calling Line Identification Restriction), a carrier
service, removes calling party ID sent from the ISDN to
the called party with a RESTRICT instruction in the
CLIR Service
SETUP message. If enabled here, the system will send
the RESTRICT instruction to the PSTN when an
outgoing ISDN call is placed.
COLR (Connected Line Id Restriction), a carrier service,
removes connected party ID sent from the ISDN to the
calling party with a RESTRICT instruction in the
COLR Service
CONNECT message. If enabled here, the system will
send the restrict instruction to the PSTN when the station
answers an ISDN call.
When the Incoming CLI data from the carrier matches a
number in Speed Dial, or Outgoing dial data from a user
CLI Name Display
matches a number in Speed Dial, the system can display
the name associated with the Speed Dial bin, if set to
ON.
A log of missed calls with caller identification can be
maintained for the user, permitting the user to call back
CLI/IP Message Wait
the identified party. Up to 1000 entries are maintained in
the log, system-wide.
If this option is set to ON, when a transferred call is
FASTCLI For Transfer routed to an SLT or DECT phone, the CLI for the CO/IP
Call
call is sent to the SLT or DECT phone instead of
transferring station number.
E.164 Call Log CLI
When enabled, the E.164 format CLI is sent to SIP
(for SIP Extension)
Extensions for an incoming CO/IP call.
When not restricted by CLIR or COLR, this entry is
added to the number in the selected COIP/CLIP Table
Station CLI 1
and sent in the ISDN call SETUP or CONNECT
message in place of the station number.
Station CLI 2
When not restricted by CLIR or COLR, this entry is
Station CLI 3
added to the number in the selected COIP/CLIP Table
and sent in the ISDN call SETUP or CONNECT
Station CLI 4
277
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.2.4-1 CLI Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
message in place of the station number.
When an incoming call is Redirected in the carrier’s
network, the call SETUP message will contain an original
CLI / Redirect Display and redirected CLI. This selection determines if the
iPECS IP and LDP Phone will display the original or
redirected number.
When the system sends a station number with CLIP or
Station or Attendant
COLP, the number can be either the Attendant number
or the number of the station.
RANGE
Station CLI 5
CPN Type
NOT SEND: CPN is not sent to S0 interface.
STATION NUMBER: Station number is sent as CPN to
S0 interface.
BYPASS FROM NET: Incoming CPN is sent as CPN to
S0 interface.
NET: If CLI name is provided from network, then it is
displayed. If CLI name is not provided from network, the
matched Speed name is displayed.
CLI Name Preference SPD: If CLI is matched with Speed bin and it has name,
then the matched Speed name is displayed. If CLI is not
matched or matched Speed name is not configured, CLI
name from network is displayed.
When {Display Restricted Caller Number} in CLI
Display Restricted
Attributes (113) of a station is ON, although the caller
Caller Number
number is restricted in ISDN message, the ringing station
displays the caller number.
Display Full CLI
The system provides CLI information by displaying on
LCD. If this option is ON, the full CLI information is
displayed on the second line of LCD.
If this option is OFF, the CLI information is displayed
from the left to the center on the second line partially. It
means the CLI information is limited so that the full CLI
can’t be displayed.
278
DEFAULT
Type
Original CLI/
Redirect CLI
Original CLI
Station
Attendant
Station
Not send,
Station number,
By pass from
NET
Not send
NET,
SPD
NET
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.5 Flexible Buttons - PGM 115/129
Selecting Flex Buttons will display the Flex buttons data input page. Enter a valid Station range
and click [Load] to enter Flex button data. For convenience, the copy, paste, and drag is
available to enter or modify data. Please click [Save] button after entering or modifying data to
apply.
Figure 4.4.2.5-1 Flex Buttons Assignment
Each Flex button for each iPECS IP and LDP Phone and DSS Console can be assigned a
function (TYPE) as below. After selecting the Type for a button, enter the value, if required. The
types available from the drop-down menu are shown are shown in Table below. In addition, for
the LIP Phone models 8040, 8050, 9070, 9071 and the LSS Console models, a label can be
assigned that is used as the designation for the button in the LCD of the phone.
Table 4.4.2.5-1 FLEX BUTTON TYPE & VALUE
TYPE
REMARK
N/A
Empty (unassigned), may be defined by the user.
CO Line
Assigns button to access a defined CO/IP line.
CO Group
Assigns button to access a free line in the CO/IP Group.
Loop
Assigns button to access a loop line.
Station Number
Assigns button as DSS/BLF for the assigned station number.
Programming (Numbering Plan)
Assigns button to dial a code from the Flexible Numbering Plan, see Appendix
section.
279
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.2.5-1 FLEX BUTTON TYPE & VALUE
TYPE
Programming (PGM)
REMARK
Assigns button to perform a User Program function from the Fixed Numbering
Plan, Appendix section.
Station Speed Bin
Station Speed Dial bin.
System Speed Bin
System Speed Dial bin.
Net Station Number
Refer to Network Numbering Plan Table - PGM 324.
U-Loop
U-Loop button for call wait of internal & external call
280
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.6 Station COS - PGM 116
Selecting Station COS will display the Station COS data input page. Enter a valid station range
and click [Load] to enter the Station COS data. Use the check mark to indicate which attributes
to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save] button.
Figure 4.4.2.6-1 Station COS
In case of PGM 116 is in condition of limited service mode due to License issue, the default value
is 7 for all COS type.
All stations are assigned a Class-of-Service (COS), which determines the ability of the user to dial
certain types of calls, refer to Table 4.4.2.6-1. Separate COS assignments are made for Day,
Timed and Night Mode operation. As a default all stations are assigned with a Station COS of 1
for all modes, no restrictions. The station COS interacts with the CO Line COS to establish overall
dialing or Toll restrictions. This interaction and the resulting restrictions are given in Table
‘Station/CO COS’.
Long distance calls are determined by the first dialed digit (“0” or “1”) and the number of digits
dialed. If the first digit dialed is a LD code, default “0” or “1”, or, if the number of digits dialed
exceeds the assigned LD digit counter in ‘System Data SMDR Attributes section’, the call is
considered a Long Distance call and appropriate restrictions applied.
Table 4.4.2.6-1 STATION COS
STATION
RESTRICTIONS
1
2
3
4
No restrictions are placed on dialing from the station.
The assignments in Exception Table A are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
The assignments in Exception Table B are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
The assignments in both Exception Tables A & B are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
The leading digit dialed cannot be a Long Distance code, default “0” or “1”, and further denied/allowed
based on Exception Table C.
The leading digits dialed cannot be a Long Distance code & digit count cannot
exceed the LD digit counter, default 7 digits, and further denied/allowed based on
Exception Table C.
5
6
281
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.2.6-1 STATION COS
STATION
7
8
9
10
11
RESTRICTIONS
Intercom and paging calls are allowed. No outgoing dialing except for emergency calls is allowed on
CO Lines.
The assignments in the Exception Table D are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
The assignments in the Exception Table E are monitored for allow and deny
Numbers
The assignments in the Exception Table D & E are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
The assignments in the Exception Table A & B and D & E are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
Table 4.4.2.6-2 STATION/CO COS
CO COS 1
STA COS No Restriction
1
STA COS
2
STA COS
3
STA COS
4
STA COS
5
STA COS
6
STA COS
7
CO COS 2
No Restriction
CO COS 3
CO COS 4
No Restriction
Only Local Call (LD
code/counter) and
Table C
Exception Table A
Exception Table A No Restriction
Only Local Call (LD
governs the dialing
governs the dialing
code/counter) and
Table C
Exception Table B
No Restriction
Exception Table B Only Local Call (LD
governs the dialing
governs the
code/counter) and
dialing
Table C
Exception Table A & Exception Table A Exception Table B Only Local Call (LD
B governs the dialing governs the dialing governs the
code/counter) and
dialing
Table C
Local Call only (LD
Local Call only (LD Local Call only
Only Local Call (LD
Code, “1” or “0”) and Code, “1” or “0”)
(LD Code, “1” or
code/counter) and
Table C
and Table C
“0”) and Table C
Table C
Only Local Call (LD Only Local Call (LD Only Local Call
Only Local Call (LD
code/counter) and
code/counter) and (LD code/counter) code/counter) and
Table C
Table C
and Table C
Table C
In-house dialing only In-house dialing
In-house dialing
In-house dialing only
only
only
STA COS Exception Table D
governs the dialing
8
Exception Table D
governs the dialing
No Restriction
STA COS Exception Table D
governs the dialing
9
Exception Table D
governs the dialing
No Restriction
STA COS Exception Table D & Exception Table D
E governs the dialing & E governs the
10
dialing
Exception
Table
A
&
Exception Table A
STA COS
B
and
D
&
E
governs
& B and D & E
11
the dialing
governs the dialing
No Restriction
No Restriction
282
Only Local Call (LD
code/counter) and
Table C
Only Local Call (LD
code/counter) and
Table C
Only Local Call (LD
code/counter) and
Table C
Only Local Call (LD
code/counter) and
Table C
CO COS 5
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
In-house
dialing only
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.7 CO/IP Group Access - PGM 117
Selecting CO/IP Group Access will display the CO/IP Group Access data input page. Enter a
valid station range and click [Load] to enter CO/IP Group Access data. Check the appropriate
boxes to allow or delete access to each CO/IP Group. Click [Save] button after changing Value to
apply.
Figure 4.4.2.7-1 CO/IP Group Access
Stations can be allowed or denied access to CO Lines and IP Channels by group (eMG80: 20 &
eMG800/UCP: 200). As a default, all stations are allowed access to all groups except Private
Lines (group 00) and unused CO Lines. The CO Line is assigned as a Private Line by default.
283
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.8 Internal Page Zone Access - PGM 118
Selecting Internal Page Zone will display the Internal Page Zone data input page. Enter a valid
station range and click [Load] to enter the Internal Page Zone Access data. Check the
appropriate boxes to allow or delete access to each Internal Page Zone. Click [Save] button after
changing Value to apply.
Figure 4.4.2.8-1 Internal Page Zone
Each iPECS IP and LDP Phone is assigned to receive announcements from each Internal Page
Zone. A station can be assigned to any, all or no zones. Note a remote station or a station not
assigned to any Internal Zone will not receive any page announcements including Internal All Call.
As a default, all stations except remote stations are assigned to zone 1.
284
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Figure 4.4.2.8-2 Internal Page Zone overview
285
Issue 1.6
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.9 PTT Group Access - PGM 119
Selecting PTT Group Access will display the PTT Group Access data input page. Enter a valid
Station range and click [Load] to enter the PTT Group Access data. Check the appropriate boxes
to allow or delete access to each PTT Group. Click [Save] button after changing Value to apply.
Figure 4.4.2.9-1 PTT Group Access
Each iPECS IP or LDP Phone is assigned to receive PTT announcements from any combination
of the ten (10) PTT groups. Note a station not assigned to any group will not receive PTT page
announcements including Internal All PTT group page. As a default, all stations except remote
stations are assigned to group 1.
286
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.10 Preset Call Forward - PGM 120
Selecting Preset Call Forward will display the Preset Call Forward data input page. Enter a valid
station range and click [Load] to enter the Station Preset Call Forward data. Use the check mark
to indicate which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save]
button.
Figure 4.4.2.10-1 Preset Call Forward
Stations can be programmed so that incoming CO/IP and Intercom calls forward to a preset
station or station group. This allows an external or internal call to initially ring at a station and
forward to a pre-determined destination. Preset Forward can be separately assigned
Unconditional, Internal Busy, Internal No Answer, Internal DND, External Busy, External No
Answer, External DND preset forwarding to any station, Station group, system speed dial bin (offnet) or Station ICR. As a default, no Preset Call Forward is assigned.
For “Transfer Mail-Box” enter the Station Group number of the Voice Mail group (external VM,
VSF or Feature Server Voice Mail group). This will permit other users to transfer calls directly to
the desired user‘s Voice Mailbox.
287
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.11 Station ICR Scenario - PGM 1201
Selecting Station ICR Scenario displays the input entry page.
Figure 4.4.2.11-1 Station ICR Scenario
Station ICR is an extension of call forward where the user enters scenarios to define the call
forward feature. Each station has ten (10) routing scenarios that define conditions for routing a
user’s incoming calls. Each scenario may define time of day, day of week, date, caller ID and
destination for incoming calls. In addition, the scenarios may be prioritized; calls are routed to the
destination with the highest priority-matching scenario.
288
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.12 Idle Line Selection - PGM 121
Selecting Idle Line Selection will display the Idle Line Selection data input page. Enter a valid
Station range and click [Load] to enter the Idle Line Selection data. Check the appropriate radial
button and enter the value for the Idle Line Selection. Click [Save] button after changing Value to
apply.
Figure 4.4.2.12-1 Idle Line Selection
When a station goes to an off-hook condition (lifts handset or presses [SPEAKER] button), the
system normally provides intercom dial tone. In place of dial tone, the station can be programmed
to access a CO Line, CO/IP Group or call a Station or Station Group as described in Table
4.4.2.12-1 when the station goes off-hook. The Idle Line Selection (Prime Line) can be either
immediate or delayed after going off-hook. The immediate/delay selection is based on the
Hot/Warm assignment in ‘Common Attributes - Prime Line’.
Table 4.4.2.12-1 IDLE LINE SELECTION TYPE & VALUE
TYPE
No Selection
Flex Button
CO Line
CO/IP Group
Station/Net
Station group
Station speed
System speed
DESCRIPTION
Returns Intercom dial tone.
Flex button, activates Flex button as if pressed.
CO/IP path seizes CO line.
CO/IP Group, seizes CO line from the CO/IP Group.
Station, calls the assigned station.
Station group, calls the assigned station group.
Station speed, calls the assigned station speed.
System speed, calls the assigned system speed.
289
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.13 Station IP Attributes - PGM 122
Selecting Station IP Attributes will display the Station IP Attributes data input page. Enter a valid
Station range and click [Load] to enter the Station IP Attributes data. Use the check mark to
indicate which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save] button.
Figure 4.4.2.13-1 Station IP Attributes
Stations are allowed access to the systems VoIP resources based on the Station IP Attributes.
290
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.14 Station Timers - PGM 123
Selecting Station Timers will display the Station Timers input page. Enter a valid Station range
and click [Load] to enter the Station Timers data. Use the check mark to indicate which attributes
to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save] button.
Figure 4.4.2.14-1 Station Timers
Certain timers can be assigned on a station basis. Available timers, description and valid inputs
are given in the below table.
Table 4.4.2.14-1 STATION TIMERS (PGM 123)
ATTRIBUTE
Station Forward No
Answer Timer
Cut Off Timer
DESCRIPTION
This timer set the duration that the station will ring
prior to Ring-No-Answer Forward. This setting
affects both manual and ‘Preset Call Forward’ and
overrides ‘Call forward No Answer timer in System
timer of System data’.
Allowed length of CO/IP calls when station is
assigned ‘Call Time restriction in Common
Attributes of Station data’.
291
RANGE
DEFAULT
000-600
(seconds)
000
00-99
(minutes)
00
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.15 Linked Station - PGM 124
Selecting Linked Station will display the Linked Station input page. Enter a valid Station range
and click [Load] to enter the Linked Station data. Click [Save] button after changing Value to
apply.
Figure 4.4.2.15-1 Linked Station Pair
For UCS Client, it is recommended that PGM 443 be employed for an unregistered (MAC Linked
pair) station. When unregistered station linking is used, the linked station does not reduce the
system‘s capacity. However, in this case, the linked station must be an iPECS IP Phone.
Unregistered linking is allowed only to an iPECS IP Phone. Once UCS Client is linked, it will
display in this Web page as well as in PGM 103 and 443.
If the station is assigned to Master or Slave by linked station, the bracket ‘[M] or [S]’ will be
displayed by the station number in PGM 101, 103, 105, 124 of Web page.
To link registered stations, the Personal Group feature is used and configured in PGM 260 and
261.
Table 4.4.2.15-1 LINKED STATION TABLE
ATTRIBUTE
MAC Address
IP Address
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Set MAC address of linked un-registered station, required
data. Note the secondary station must not be registered
in the system prior to linking. If needed, delete the device
from the system prior to linking.
The IP Address of the linked station.
IPv4 address
292
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
ATTRIBUTE
Router IP Address
Mode
ARP
Register
Codec Type
DESCRIPTION
Set the Router IP address for a linked station.
Display operating mode of the station, remote or local
and NAT or NAPT.
If set OFF, the system will employ layer 2 switching over
the LAN to communicate with the linked station. If set ON,
the system will employ ARP (Address Resolution
Protocol) to determine the IP address of the device, if
required, and communicate using IP.
Normally, iPECS IP devices register using multi-cast
packets. When separated from the system, that is when
the device is remote, unicast is used.
A specific Codec type can be configured for the station.
293
Issue 1.6
RANGE
DEFAULT
IPv4 address
Remote:
-. R/NAPT
-. R/NAT
-. R/NAP
-. R
Local remote
-. LO/NAPT
-. LO/NAT
-. LO/NAP
-. LO Local
-. L/NAPT
-. L/NAT
-. L/NAP
-. L
OFF
ON
L (Local)
Multicast
Unicast
Multicast
G.711/
G.723.1/
G.729/
System, use the
codec defined for
the system
G.711
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.16 Station ICM Group - PGM 125
Selecting Station ICM Tenancy Group displays the Station ICM Tenancy Group input page.
Select ICM Tenancy Group and click [Load], the system will display the ICM Tenancy Group
Characteristics. Enter the Station number of the group Attendant and check the appropriate box
to allow calling to the group. Click [Save] button after changing Value to apply.
Figure 4.4.2.16-1 Station ICM Group
Stations can be assigned to an ICM group under ‘Common Attributes section’. Up to 15 Tenant
groups for eMG80 (up to 32 for eMG800 and up to 100 for UCP) can be defined. Each group is
configured to allow or deny placing intercom calls, including transfers, to stations in other groups
and an Attendant station can be defined for each group. The Attendant will receive “dial 0” calls
and controls Day/Night mode for the group.
Table 4.4.2.16-1 STATION ICM GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Tenancy ATD
Attendant station for the ICM Tenant group. ATD receives dial ‘0’ calls
and controls Day/Night Service.
Station No.
Group Access
eMG80:1~15
ICM tenancy groups allowed access by stations of the selected group. eMG800:1~32
UCP:1~100
294
DEFAULT
1
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.17 Station Voice Mail Attributes – PGM 127
Selecting VM Attributes displays the Station Voice Mail Attributes input page. Enter a valid Station
range and click [Load] to enter the Station Voice Mail Attributes data. Use the check mark to
indicate which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save] button.
Figure 4.4.2.17-1 Station VM Attributes
The Station VM Attributes are divided into three sub-sections. The Basic Attributes assign general
characteristics of the Station’s Voice Mail and announcements. Enhanced Attributes assign
characteristics including VM COS, notification, cascading and Company Directory Names. The EMail Notification section defines various SMTP server data such as the Station and System Email account data.
Table 4.4.2.17-1 STATION VM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Basic Attributes
VSF Access
Two way Record
VM Device Slot Seq.
Multi Language
The station must be permitted VSF access to access the
built-in Voice Mailbox.
When allowed, the station can activate the Two-way
record feature to record a conversation.
The sequence number defines the VMIU or VMIB
where messages for the station are stored
The selected language is employed for prompts played
295
Disable
Enable
OFF
ON
Enable
OFF
Seq. No.
Prompt 1~6
Prompt 2
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.2.17-1 STATION VM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Pre-selected
Message Language
Default VM group
number
DESCRIPTION
to the user when accessing the VSF.
The selected language is employed for prompts played
to an external CO caller if the called station has
activated Pre-selected Message.
When the user has no Voice messages and selects the
[Call Back/Msg] button, the “Default VM group number”
is called.
RANGE
DEFAULT
Prompt 1~6
Prompt 2
This field enables unconditional recording of all calls
OFF,
placed/received by the station. Recordings, in .wav
ALL,
OFF
format, are stored at the UCS Client defined as the Call
CO
Recording Station below.
When Auto Call Recording is defined for a station, the
Station or
Auto Talk Recording destination for the recording is defined here. The UCS
rd
Group
Destination
Client Station number, or an IPCR or 3 party SIP
recording server.
When ON, the data/time the message was received is
OFF
VSF MSG Date/Time
ON
played to the user prior to the message.
ON
When ON, the user must enter their valid Authorization
No password/
code to access their VSF Voice Mailbox. The password Password only/
VM Password check
Password only
can be defined as none, the Authorization code only or
Station number
the normal Station Number and Authorization code.
and password
When using an adjunct VM, the system can translate the
Mailbox number from the user’s station number to the
eMG80:100
VMID Number
assigned VMID. The system sends the station number
Max. 8 digit
eMG800:1000
or VMID, if assigned, to the VM (in-band or SMDI) in
UCP:1000
order to identify the appropriate Voice Mailbox.
Messages stored in the VSF may be retrieved in either a
FIFO/
Retrieve MSG Method FIFO (first-in-first-out) or LIFO (last-in-first-out) order
LIFO
LIFO
based on this entry.
Wake-Up
A VSF system announcement can be recorded to play to
0-200
0
Announcement
the station as a Wakeup Announcement.
Two way record
The two way record announcement can be recorded to
0-200
0
announcement
play to the station as Announcement.
When a user has voice mail, system can provides this
as voice prompt instead of dial tone according to option
based on station.
Disable: System provides normal dial tone when a user
Disable,
Message Wait
goes to off hook status.
Tone,
Tone
Notice(MWI, CLI, VM) Tone: System provides warning tone instead of dial tone
Prompt
to give indication when a user goes to off hook status.
Prompt: System provides message indication as voice
prompt when a user goes to off hook status.
DECT phone do not support this feature.
Auto Talk Recording
Option
Enhanced Attributes
VM Message No
VM COS
Number of Voice Messages in the user’s Mailbox.
Each Voice Mailbox is assigned one of five VM Classes
of Service (COS) that determines basic characteristics
of the Mailbox such as message retention. The Voice
Mail COS attributes are set in PGM 253.
296
000
1-5
1
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.2.17-1 STATION VM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
A Mailbox can be assigned as an Administrator Mailbox
Disable
Administrator Mailbox permitting broadcast messaging and control of other
Disable
Enable
user mailboxes.
A mailbox can be configured so that the connected party
Announce Only
Disable
will hear the greeting but cannot leave a message,
Disable
Mailbox
Announce Only. A fter the greeting, the call is routed
Enable
based on the Announce Only Option.
This option determines if the caller will be disconnected
Announce Only
Previous Menu/
Previous menu
or returned to the previous menu after hearing the
Option
Hang Up
Announce Only Mailbox greeting.
Company Directory – This field is first name of a station for Company
Max. 12
N/A
First Name
Directory feature.
characters
Company Directory – This field is last name of a station for Company Directory
Max. 12
N/A
Last Name
feature.
characters
Message
While listening to a message the user may rewind or
03 - 99
04
Rewind/Fast-Forward Fast forward. The Rewind and Fast Forward time are
Time
determined by this field.
If the notification to the user’s mobile repeatedly fails,
VM Notify retry count after the retry count, the system will send the call to the
00 - 99
03
Attendant to complete the notification.
When the mobile notification call is placed, the system
will terminate the call, considering the call a failed
VM Notify dial time
00 - 99
15 sec
attempt, if no digits are received from the mobile phone
user before the timer expires.
VM Forward Option
When a left message is forwarded, this option is applied. Move / Copy
Move
A left message is copied or moved to 1’st mailbox
Cascade Mailbox 1
Station No
N/A
destination station.
A left message is copied or moved to 2’nd mailbox
Cascade Mailbox 2
Station No
N/A
destination station.
A left message is copied or moved to 3’rd mailbox
Cascade Mailbox 3
Station No
N/A
destination station.
A left message is copied or moved to 4’th mailbox
Cascade Mailbox 4
Station No
N/A
destination station.
A left message is copied or moved to 5’th mailbox
Cascade Mailbox 5
Station No
N/A
destination station.
Disable /
Cascade Method
Cascade method is determined.
Copy /
Disable
Move
Normal Only /
Cascade Message
Cascade Message Type is determined.
Urgent Only /
Normal only
Type
All
Cascade Apply Timer Cascade Apply Timer is set.
001 ~250 (min)
0
E-Mail notification
[Send Mail] button : click [Send mail] button to send mail for notification
E-Mail Notification
Enable
SMTP Server
Address (IP or
Domain Name)
If this option is set ON, the system send Email as soon
as getting Voice mail.
This field defines the address or URL of the SMTP mail
server for the notification.
297
OFF
ON
IP v4 addressor
Mail server
name
OFF
Max. 64
characters
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.2.17-1 STATION VM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
SMTP Port
SMTP Security
Connection
E-Mail Account ID
E-Mail Account
Password
Sender E-Mail
Address (From)
Receiver E-Mail
Address (To)
Attach Message
Option
Delete Message
Option
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
This field defines the TCP/IP port the system will employ
1 - 65535
when communicating with the SMTP E-mail server.
The system can support basic security policies when
No Security/
communicating with the SMTP E-mail server. Note the
SSL/
server must also be configured for the selected security
TLS
protocol.
This field defines the account Identification for the
system configured in the SMTP server.
This field defines the password for the system’s E-mail
account in the SMTP server.
This field defines the E-mail address used to send the
E-mail address
new Voice Message notification via E-mail.
This field defines the E-mail address to notify when a
E-mail address
new VSF message is received for the station.
When E-mail notification is enabled in the VM COS
(PGM 253), the E-mail may include the voice mail as a
OFF
wav file attachment. The proper information must be
ON
assigned for the receiver mail and system mail account
information.
After sending an E-mail notification the system will
OFF
automatically delete the Voice message from the user’s
ON
Voice Mailbox if this parameter is ON.
298
DEFAULT
25
No Security
ON
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.18 Station Personal CCR Table – PGM 128
Selecting Station Personal CCR displays the Station Personal CCR Table input page. Enter a
valid Station range and click [Load] to enter the Station Personal CCR Table data. Click [Save]
button after changing the type or value.
Figure 4.4.2.18-1 Station Personal CCR Table
Table 4.4.2.18-1 STATION CCR Table
ATTRIBUTE
1-0 Destination
CCR One Digit
CCR Table Usage
*Button Used As
DESCRIPTION
Digit dialed by outside caller.
A destination type and value can be programmed by dialed digit. 14
kinds destination is available.
When ON, the system will analyze the first digit received only,
additional digits dialed by the caller are ignored.
If this option is ON, CCR table can be activated.
If this option is OFF, CCR table is not available, instead of that, dialing
digits by outside caller can be recognized as DISA dialing.
* can be used as the following:
System Numbering Plan
Replay Greeting
Access Mailbox
Leave Message Immediate
299
RANGE
DEFAULT
…
NA
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Leave
Refer to Message
Description Immediate
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.2.18-1 STATION CCR Table
ATTRIBUTE
# Button Used As
DESCRIPTION
# can be used as the following:
System Numbering Plan
Replay Greeting
Access Mailbox
Leave Message Immediate
Table 4.4.2.18-2 STATION CCR DESTINATIONS
DESTINATION TYPES
Route to a Station
Route to a Station Group
Route with System Speed Dial
Route as PBX Transfer with System Speed Dial (Flash then dial speed dial digits)
Route to VSF Announcement
Route to VSF Announcement and disconnect
Route to Networked Station.
Conference Room
Internal Page
External page
All Call Page
Route to voice mail(station group/station number)
Company Directory
Record VM Greeting
Room type conference group join
300
RANGE
DEFAULT
System
Refer to
Description
Access
Mailbox
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
4.4.2.19 Station Name Overview & Display
Selecting Station Name Overview shows the current station name.
Figure 4.4.2.19-1 Station Name Overview
Each station name will be displayed if the each station has the name.
301
Issue 1.6
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Selecting Station Name Display will display the Station Name input page. Enter a valid Station
range and click [Load] to enter the Station Name data. For convenience, the copy, paste, and
drag is available to enter or modify data. Click [Save] button after changing the type or value.
Figure 4.4.2.19-2 Station Name Display
You can fill out the Station name, Input name (up to 20 digits), company directory-First name &
Last name for customer’s convenience.
302
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.20 Station User Greeting
Selecting Station User Greeting will display the Station User Greeting data input page. Enter a
valid Station range and click [Load] to enter the Station Voice Mail Attributes data. Use the check
mark to indicate which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save]
button.
Figure 4.4.2.20-1 Station User Greeting
There are 4 User greeting for each station.
User can select multi user greeting depending on the condition, call type, and time.
-. Condition: unconditional, busy, DND, No answer
-. Call Type: Internal, External
-. Call Time: Day, Night, Timed
303
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.21 Station Data Copy
Selecting Station Data Copy will display the Station Data Copy data input page. Enter a valid
Source Station, Destination Station Range and click [Copy] to copy the station data. Note that
this function is not available for an Attendant station.
Figure 4.4.2.21-1 Station Data Copy
304
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.22 Station CTI IP Address (1st Party TAPI)
Selecting Station CTI IP Address displays the page shown in the following figure. Enter a Station
Range and click [Load] to display and modify the CTI IP address. Click [Save] button after
changing the type or value.
Figure 4.4.2.22-1 Station CTI IP Address
The system supports 1st party TAPI (Telephony Application Programming Interface) for CTI
(Computer Telephony Integration). The system will send specific TAPI information to the IP
address for activity by the associated Station.
305
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.2.23 Station Recording Information
Selecting Station recording information displays the page shown in the following figure. Enter a
Station Range and click [Load] to display and check the current recording information on each
station.
Figure 4.4.2.23-1 Station Recording Information
The {Station Recording information} displays the recording state of voice mail greeting and
company directory name with O and X. (O: recorded, X: not recorded)
306
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.3 Board Based Data
Selecting the Board Based Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in the left frame
as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4.4.3-1 Board Based Data Main Page
307
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.3.1 H.323 VoIP Attributes - PGM 130
Selecting H.323 VoIP Attributes returns the H.323 VoIP Attributes data input page. Enter the VoIP
gateway Sequence number (refer to ‘Device IP Plan’ if you want to find the sequence number)
and click [Load] to enter VoIP data. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Enter Device/GW slot sequence number: eMG80: 1-300 / eMG800: 1-2890 / UCP: 1-3688
Figure 4.4.3.1-1 H.323 VoIP Attributes
The VOIP channels may be used for Distributed Networking, access to SIP or H.323 networks
and for remote iPECS devices. When the standard H.323 VoIP protocol is employed for an
external VoIP call, several attributes of these channels can be assigned. The H.323 call set-up
mode and tunneling (H.245 Encapsulation) can be established.
Also for H.323 support, a RAS (Registration, Admissions and Status) channel can be defined.
The RAS channel IP addresses (uni-cast and multi-cast) as well as the IP port Numbering Plan
and other H.323 set-up characteristics are defined.
This page also allows setting the IP TOS bit for Diffserv, a commonly recognized packet
prioritization protocol. Higher priority packets are given priority in the Default gateway or Layer 3
Switch queue. However, they are the first to be discarded in the event of long queue delays,
which may cause excess packet loss and poor voice quality.
Refer to the following table for a description of the features and the input required.
308
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.3.1-1 H.323 VOIP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
H323 Setup Mode
H323 Tunneling Mode
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
IP calls can be set-up using the H.323 normal
or Fast Start mode.
IP calls can be set-up using the H.245
encapsulation (Tunneling).
H323 Early Media
(early H245)
This feature is the ability of two user endpoints
to communicate before call is actually
established in normal call mode. This feature is
not used when 'H323 Setup Mode' is 'Fast'.
* Setup: Caller party tries to open early media
on receiving the Setup message.
* Proceeding: Calling party tries to open early
media on receiving the Proceeding message.
* Alerting: Calling party tries to open early
media on receiving the Alerting message.
H323 DTMF Path
During a call, DTMF can be sent in-band or
out-of-band (H.245)
DIFFSERV
TCP Keep-Alive
This parameter sets DiffServ pre-tagging for
Voice packet.
Note high values may cause high packet
discard levels.
The system will send a polling message every
75 seconds to assure the status of the TCP
connection.
Normal/
Fast
OFF
ON
DEFAULT
Fast
ON
Setup,
Proceeding,
Alerting
Out-band/
In-band/
2833
IN
0~63
4
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
TCP/IP Port
1718
IP Address
224.0.1.41
TCP/IP Port
1719
IP Address
82.134.80.2
001-999
(seconds)
120
Max. 23 digit
9
OFF
ON
OFF
Gatekeeper Attributes
When this feature is ON, the VoIP channel is
RAS Usage
used as the Gatekeeper.
This field defines the Multicast TCP/IP Port for
RAS Multicast IP Port
RAS Information of Gatekeeper.
RAS Multi-cast IP
This field defines the Multicast IP address for
Address
RAS Information of Gatekeeper.
This parameter defines the Unicast IP Port for
RAS Uni-cast IP Port
RAS Information of Gatekeeper.
RAS Uni-cast IP
This parameter defines the Unicast IP address
Address
for RAS Information of Gatekeeper.
To maintain a connection, the system and
RAS Keep Alive Time GateKeeper must exchange RAS Information
prior to expiration of this timer.
RAS Number Plan
The numbering plan for Calling Number in RAS
Prefix
Setup.
The system can be assigned to use the simple
RAS Light RRQ Usage RRQ (Registration Request) message (ON) or
the full RRQ message (OFF).
RAS Gateway ID
The Gatekeeper ID.
128 characters
Fail Over Usage
If an H.323 call fails to set-up in the ‘Call Setup
No Response time’ below, the system will
attempt to place the call on the Failover CO/IP
group also defined below.
309
OFF
ON
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.3.1-1 H.323 VOIP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Call Setup No
Response Time
Failover CO Group
Number
DESCRIPTION
When Failover is enabled, the system places
the fail-over call if this timer expires before the
system receives a response to setup
messages.
The system will place the Fail-over call
employing a CO/IP line from the assigned
CO/IP Line Group.
RANGE
DEFAULT
0, 3-10 Sec.
5
eMG80:1-21
eMG800:1~201
UCP:1~201
VOIP(VOIU) GW Port Usage
Q.931 Port Range
IP-Binding H.323 signaling option: Q.931 TCP
Port Range.
Range IP-Binding H.323 signaling option:
H.245 TCP Port Range.
IP-Binding H.323 signaling option: RAS UDP
Port Range.
TCP port
2048-2559
TCP port
2560-3071
UDP port
2048-3071
Media Port Range
IP-Binding media option: Media UDP Port
Range.
UDP port
eMG80:6000-7036
eMG800:6000-14400
UCP:6000-19972
Data Sharing Port
Range
IP-Binding option: Data Sharing TCP Port
Range.
TCP port
8500-8548
H.245 Port
RAS Port Range
External CODEC Priority Configuration
External CODEC
Priority Configuration
The system supports five Codecs and, for
negotiating purposes, the priority of each can
be defined. Codecs not assigned a consecutive
priority are not available during negotiations
with the host.
310
None/
g.711-u/
g.711-a/
g.723.1/
g.729/
g.729-a
none
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.3.2 T1/E1/PRI Attributes - PGM 131
Selecting T1/E1/PRI Attributes returns the T1/E1/PRI Attributes data input page. Enter the Device
Sequence number (refer to ‘Device IP Plan’ if you want to find the sequence number) and click
[Load] to enter T1/E1/PRI data. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Enter Device/GW slot sequence number : eMG80: 1-300 / eMG800: 1-2890 / UCP: 1-3688
Figure 4.4.3.2-1 T1/E1/PRI Attributes
Each T1/E1/PRI module can be assigned for various attributes of the interface. The T1 interface
framing and line coding can be selected and, for the PRI, TE or NT operation can be selected.
Refer to the following table for a description of the features and the input required.
Table 4.4.3.2-1 T1/E1/PRI ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
T1 Setup Mode
Select T1 Setup mode D4 frame: Using In-Band
Control Protocol.
ESF: Using Data link Message.
ESF/
D4
D4
T1 Line Mode
Select T1 line coding (AMI/B8ZS).
PRI Line Mode
Select TE/NT Mode.
PRI /E1 CRC Check
Enable CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check).
E1 R2DSP check
Used for R2-E1 Device or E1 Device.
DCO PX Type
Reserved for future usage for R2 E1 Device.
Caller Name
Type(PRI(T1) only)
If the caller has a name, the Caller Name is sent
to the network according to the option
(FACILITY, DISPLAY). (USA only)
311
AMI/
B8ZS
TE/NT
OFF
ON
OFF/
ON
S1240/
TDX1B/
STANDARD/
CONGES_DIS
FACILITY,
DISPLAY
B8ZS
TE
OFF
OFF
STANDARD
FACILITY
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.3.3 Board Base Attributes - PGM 132
Selecting Board Base Attributes will display the Board Base Attributes data input pag. Enter the
Sequence number (refer to ‘Device IP Plan’ if you want to find the sequence number) and click
[Load] to enter attribute values. Use the check boxes to indicate which attributes to modify; data
for checked attributes is stored for the entire range of devices when saved. Click [Save] button
after changing Value.
Enter Device/GW slot sequence number: eMG80: 1-300 / eMG800: 1-2890 / UCP: 1-3688
Figure 4.4.3.3-1 Board Base Attributes
Appliances (Devices and IP Phones) can be connected to the iPECS over a managed WAN
without the need to employ a VoIP channel. In this case, the system does not implement security
(IPSec) or QoS treatment over the link. To implement the managed WAN connectivity, the iPECS
must be assigned with the IP address of the router for all appliances that may attempt a point-topoint connection over the managed WAN, including devices on the iPECS LAN. Note that if the
device‘s Router IP address is not defined, the system will use the Router IP address defined in
System & Device IP Address Plan.
The default codec employed by each device can be specifically defined as G.711, G.729, G.723,
G.722, or the system default codec assigned.
Appliances include support for SRTP (Secure Real-Time Protocol), which employs Advanced
Encryption Standard (AES) to secure RTP packets. If RTP security is enabled then IPSEC or
SRTP is implemented for RTP packet.
Table 4.4.3.3-1 BOARD BASE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Router IP Address
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Enter the Default gateway (Router) IP address
associated with the selected devices.
IP Address
312
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.3.3-1 BOARD BASE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Device Codec Type
Firewall IP Address
RTP Packet Relay Firewall
IP Address
DESCRIPTION
Select the CODEC type for each device.
Enter the Firewall IP address of the selected
devices.
Enter the Firewall IP address associated with
the Remote Phone or Gateway if there a dual
broadband connection for SIP trunks and
Remote phones (using a VOIB/VOIM).
SRTP implements AES (Advanced Encryption
Standard) for packets between other devices
with RTP Security enabled. To reduce
bandwidth use or to use an external VPN, this
parameter must be OFF.
RANGE
DEFAULT
G.711, G.723.1,
G.729, G.722, or
SYSTEM CODEC
SYSTEM
CODEC
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
OFF
ON
ON
TNET Enable
When a module or station is to be connected in
a Centralized Control network (TNET), the
device must be enabled for TNET operation.
OFF
ON
eMG80:ON
eMG800:OFF
UCP: OFF
T38 Enable
FAX over IP Lines is supported when T38
mode is ON.
OFF
ON
OFF
RTP Security
USE Board IP for SIP
T38 Port Usage
When the VoIP channels of a VOIB/VOIM are
OFF
used for SIP, such as a SIP Trunk, the IP
ON
address of the VOIB/VOIM must be used for
the SIP messages (ON).
The TCP/IP port employed for T38 packets is
Different from Voice
negotiated and the system can allow the port
Same as Voice
to be the same as or different from the
NAT Triggered
preceding Voice packets. The system can also
employ NAT to determine the port.
RFC2833 Payload
Payload value for RFC2833
RFC2833 Volume
Volume(Gain) of RFC2833 payload
RFC2833 Redundancy
Sending time of end packet of RFC2833
313
OFF
DIFF WITH
VOICE
0~127
101
0~36(-dB)
10
1~8
4
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.4 CO Line Data
Selecting the CO Line Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in the left frame as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 4.4.4-1 CO Line Data Main Page
314
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Selecting CO Line Overview will show the current overview of CO line. The information may vary
depending on installed modules.
Figure 4.4.4-2 CO Line Overview
315
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.4.1 Common Attributes - PGM 140
Selecting Common Attributes will display the Common Attributes data input page. Enter a valid
CO range and click [Load] to enter the Common Attributes data. Use the check mark to indicate
which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save] button.
Enter CO Range: eMG80: 1-74 / eMG800: 1-600 / UCP: 1-998
Figure 4.4.4.1-1 Common Attributes
Common Attributes define various characteristics of CO lines facilities under control of the system.
Most characteristics require an On/Off setting; refer to the following table. Specific descriptions for
Class-of-Service and CO line Call Metering tones are provided in Table 4.4.4.1-3.
Table 4.4.4.1-1 Common Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
CO Type
Each CO Line is assigned a type, Normal, DID or TIE
Line.
CO/IP Group
Each CO/IP Line is assigned to a group; grouping should
be based on the Line type, technology and COS.
316
RANGE
Normal/
DID/
TIE/
Unused
eMG80:0-21
eMG800:0-201
UCP:0-201
DEFAULT
Normal
1
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.4.1-1 Common Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Each CO/IP Line is assigned a Class-of-Service that
interacts with the Station COS, refer to Table 4.4.4.1-2
CO COS 1: Station COS applies
CO COS 2: Exception Table A governs
CO Line COS
CO COS 3: Exception Table B governs
CO COS 4: Restricts LD calls & Exception Table C
CO COS 5: Overrides Station COS 2~6 with no
restrictions.
Each CO/IP Line can be assigned as connected to a CO
CO Line Type
Line or a PBX/CTX Line.
Universal Night Answer (UNA) allows any station user to
Universal Night Answer
answer a call on the CO/IP line by dialing the UNA code.
CO/IP Group
Each CO/IP Group can be assigned to require the user
Authorization
enter an Authorization Code.
CO Tenancy Group
CO/IP Name Display
CO Name Assign
DISA Account Code
DISA CO Access
Wait If VSF Busy
SMS Outgoing
SMS Received Station
Reject Anonymous
Incoming Call
Prefix Table ID
LDT Table Index
LDT Zone Number
ENBLOCK Sending
Only stations in the assigned Tenancy group are
permitted access to the defined CO Line.
The IP Phone display can indicate the CO line/IP channel
number or the twelve (12) character name, if assigned
below.
Each CO Line and IP group can be assigned a twelve
(12)-character name for display purposes.
With DISA Account Code “ON”, users are required to
enter a DISA Authorization code. Codes are entered in
‘Authorization Code Table section’.
When enabled, DISA users may access the VoIP facilities
of the system.
When a DID/DISA call assigned to receive a VSF
announcement arrives and all channels are busy, the call
may wait with Ring back until a channel is available (ON)
or route to the DID/DISA Destination -PGM 167-.
Each CO line can be assigned to support PSTN SMS.
RANGE
DEFAULT
COS 1~5
COS 1
PBX
CO
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
eMG80:00-15
eMG800:0-32
UCP:0-100
OFF
ON
If the LDT Zone Number of a LDT table (LCR LDT(221))
is equal to this value, the LDT table is available to this CO
Line.
This entry determines if the system sends dialed digits to
the ISDN line as they are received (OFF), or collects all
digits and forwards them in a block. (ON).
317
OFF
OFF
0
OFF
Max. 12
characters
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Disable
Enable
Disable
When a PSTN SMS is received, the system delivers the
Station
message to the assigned station.
When REJECT ANONYMOUS is enabled, incoming calls
OFF
without Caller ID are rejected.
ON
When the Prefix Dialing Table (PGM 206) feature is used,
0 – 6.
this Prefix Table ID is employed. If this value is set to 0,
0 means disable
the Prefix Table feature is disabled.
When LCR is configured, this LDT Table index is
referenced for outgoing calls on this CO/IP Line.
CO
….
OFF
0
0-10(eMG80),
0-32(eMG800)
0-32(UCP)
1
1-100
1
OFF
ON
ON
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.4.1-1 Common Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DID preserve Name
Burst Tone to Caller
Collect Call Blocking
Collect Call Answer
Timer
Collect Call Idle Timer
Gain table index
Tone table index
DESCRIPTION
For DID lines, the CLI is normally displayed only during
ringing. If enabled here, the CLI will be displayed for the
entire call duration.
When DID Call Wait is assigned for the station, the
system can send audible off-hook signals as a short burst
of tone for DID calls from this CO/IP Line.
This parameter defines the type of Collect Call Blocking
supported for E1 CO lines with R2 signaling. (Intended for
Brazil only)
These parameters determine treatment of an incoming
call when Collect Call Blocking Double Answer is
assigned. In this case, the system answers the call and
maintains the connection for the Call Answer time then,
the system will disconnect for the Call Idle time before
finally reconnecting the call.
One of three Gain tables can be configured for TDM
connections.
One of the five Tone table can be configured for use with
the CO/IP Line.
RANGE
DEFAULT
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Disable/
Double Answer/
Double Answer
w/Indication
Disable
1-250 (100ms)
10
1-250 (100ms)
20
1-3
1
1-5
1
Digit conversion table
index
One of the Digit Conversion Tables can be configured for
use for this CO/IP Line.
eMG80:1-15
eMG800:1-32
UCP:1-32
1
Prepaid Call
The Pre-paid Call feature must be enabled for use by a
station. User can set the budget for the station call charge
in advance.
OFF
ON
OFF
Prepaid Money (0999999)
&
Used Prepaid Money
Automatic call
recording destination
An amount can be associated with the station as
prepayment for outgoing calls. The assigned “Pre-paid
Money” is reduced by the calculated call cost (Call
Metering or cost/minute). This parameter displays the
remaining funds for outgoing calls. Prepaid Money is
often used in small hospitality businesses.
The “Used Pre-paid Money” displays the money that has
been used.
When desired, the IP CR server can be used to record
calls on the CO/IP Line. This value defines the Station
Group of the IP CR server. The IP CR Agent object, see
PGM 237, must be assigned as CO Line for proper
operation.
An incoming call can be routed to the destination based
on Calling Name.
ICLID Usage
Disable - ICLID feature is disabled
CLI - ICLID feature is operated with CLI
Name, CLI - ICLID feature is operated with Name and CLI
PBX Code Insertion for System can insert PBX code automatically if preEmergency call
configured when a user make an emergency call.
0-999999
0
0-999999
Disable/
CLI/
Name, CLI
CLI
Disable,
PBX code1~4
Disable
00-99
0
Timer Attributes
CO CUT OFF TIMER
When the Station is assigned Call Time restriction is
318
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.4.1-1 Common Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
assigned, this timer defines the allowed call duration.
DISA Delay Timer
DISA Answer Timer
CO Line MOH
Once answered, the system attaches a DTMF receiver to
the DISA call to receive caller-dialed digits. This timer
introduces a delay before attaching the DTMF receiver to
the CO line. (Intended for Russia only)
When a call is received on a CO line with DISA service,
the system will answer the call when the DISA Answer
Timer expires. (Intended for Russia only)
Tone Attributes
A held call can be connected to one (1) of ten (10)
possible audio sources while on Hold as Music-on-Hold
(MOH).
CO Dial Tone
CO Ring Back Tone
CO Error Tone
ISDN Lines may provide a digital signal rather than actual
tones. In this case, the iPECS can provide the tones. If
the ISDN provides the tone, the Tone is “ON”, for an
iPECS system-generated tone, the tone is set to “OFF”.
CO Busy Tone
RANGE
DEFAULT
00 = disable
0-9 seconds
0
0-9 seconds
0
Refer to Sys
Hold/
Internal Music/
External Music/
VSF MOH/
SLT MOH1~5/
VSF MOH2~3
Refer to Sys
Hold
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
One of eleven sources can be defined as dial tone for use
by the CO line.
Dial Tone/
Internal Music/
External Music/
VSF MOH/
SLT MOH1~5/
VSF MOH2~3
Dial Tone
CO Ring Back Tone
Source
One of eleven sources can be defined as ring back tone
for use by the CO line.
Ring Back Tone/
Internal Music/
External Music/
VSF MOH/
SLT MOH1~5/
VSF MOH2~3
Ring Back
Tone
COL Ring Tone
One of sixteen Ring Tones can be configure for use by
this CO Line.
00-16
0
CO Line Dial Tone
Source
319
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.4.1-2 STATION/CO LINE TOLL RESTRICTIONS
CO COS 1
CO COS 2
CO COS 3
CO COS 4
CO COS 5
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
Only Local Call (LD
code/counter) & Table C
No
Restriction
STA
COS 2
Exception Table A
governs the dialing
Exception Table A
governs the dialing
No Restriction
Only Local Call (LD
code/counter) & Table C
No
Restriction
STA
COS 3
Exception Table B
governs the dialing
No Restriction
Only Local Call (LD
code/counter) & Table C
No
Restriction
Only Local Call (LD
code/counter) & Table C
No
Restriction
Only Local Call (LD
code/counter) & Table C
No
Restriction
Only Local Call (LD
code/counter) & Table C
No
Restriction
In-house dialing only
In-house
dialing only
STA
COS 1
STA
COS 7
Exception Table B
governs the
dialing
Exception Table A & Exception Table A Exception Table B
B governs the dialing governs the dialing governs the
dialing
Local Call only (LD
Local Call only (LD Local Call only
Code, “1” or “0”) and Code, “1” or “0”)
(LD Code, “1” or
Table C
and Table C
“0”) & Table C
Only Local Call (LD
Only Local Call (LD Only Local Call
code/counter) &
code/counter) and (LD code/counter)
Table C
Table C
& Table C
In-house dialing only In-house dialing
In-house dialing
only
only
STA
COS 8
Exception Table D
governs the dialing
Exception Table D
governs the dialing
No Restriction
Only Local Call (LD
code/counter) & Table C
No
Restriction
STA
COS 9
Exception Table D
governs the dialing
Exception Table D
governs the dialing
No Restriction
Only Local Call (LD
code/counter) & Table C
No
Restriction
Exception Table D & Exception Table D
STA
COS 10 E governs the dialing & E governs the
dialing
Exception
Table
A
&
Exception Table A
STA
B
and
D
&
E
governs
& B and D & E
COS 11
the dialing
governs the dialing
No Restriction
Only Local Call (LD
code/counter) & Table C
No
Restriction
No Restriction
Only Local Call (LD
code/counter) & Table C
No
Restriction
STA
COS 4
STA
COS 5
STA
COS 6
Table 4.4.4.1-3 CALL METERING FUNCTION
ENTRY
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
CALL METERING TYPE
- None
- 50 Hz
- 12 KHz
- 16 KHz
- Singular Polarity Reverse (SPR)
- Plural Polarity Reverse (PPR)
- No Polarity Reverse (NPR)
320
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.4.2 Analog Attributes - PGM 141
Selecting Analog Attributes will display the Analog Attributes data input page. Enter a valid CO
range and click [Load] to enter the Analog (PSTN) Attributes data. Use the check mark to
indicate which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save] button.
Enter CO Range: eMG80: 1-74 / eMG800: 1-600 / UCP: 1-998
Figure 4.4.4.2-1 Analog Attributes
Analog Attributes define various characteristics of Analog CO Lines under control of the system.
Most characteristics require an On/Off setting; refer to the following table. Specific descriptions for
CO Line (SMDR) Call Metering tones are provided in Table 6.4.2-2.
Table 4.4.4.2-1 Analog ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
CO Line Signal
Data(Fax) Station
Number
SMDR Metering Unit
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Each analog CO Line can be assigned to send
either DTMF or Pulses for dialed digits to the PSTN.
DTMF
Pulse
DTMF
Each CO line can be assigned to recognize a FAX
call when a specified station answers.
This field selects the call-metering signal from the
PSTN to indicate call cost, refer to Table 4.4.4.1-2.
Station Number
See
Table 4.4.4.1-2
None
Line Drop (CPT)
Each CO Line can be programmed to disconnect if
error tone is detected.
OFF
ON
OFF
Maintain CPT on talking
(Answer by User)
The system can continuously monitor the CO Line
during a call and, if error tone is detected, drop the
call.
OFF
ON
OFF
Flash Timer
This time sets the flash time.
000-300
(*10 msec)
50
Open Loop Detect timer
This entry sets the duration of open loop that will be
00-20
04
321
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.4.2-1 Analog ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
ICLID Ring Timer
Proctor Service
Analog Line monitor
LD Inter Digit Timer
LD Pause count
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
recognized as a “Disconnect Signal”.
When a call is received, the system may use ICLID
(Incoming Caller ID) to route the call. The system
will delay routing a call for this duration while
awaiting ICLID. Enter a 00 to disable ICLID routing.
(*100 msec)
00-20
(*Sec)
4
Each analog CO line can be assigned to send the
station number as DTMF digits for Proctor service.
OFF
ON
OFF
The system can monitor and report faults on an
analog CO Line.
This time is for setting the duration between digits
for LD (Long Distance) call.
This count sets the number of Pause for Long
distance call.
OFF
ON
ON
00-20 (*1sec)
0
0-10
0
Table 4.4.4.2-2 CALL METERING FUNCTION
ENTRY
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
SMDR METERING UNIT TYPE
- None
- 50 Hz
- 12 KHz
- 16 KHz
- Singular Polarity Reverse (SPR)
- Plural Polarity Reverse (PPR)
- No Polarity Reverse (NPR)
322
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.4.3 VoIP Attributes - PGM 142
Selecting VoIP Attributes will display the Analog Attributes data input page. Enter a valid CO
range and click [Load] to enter the VoIP Attributes data. Use the check mark to indicate which
attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save] button.
Enter CO Range: eMG80: 1-74 / eMG800: 1-600 / UCP: 1-998
Figure 4.4.4.3-1 VoIP Attributes
Table 4.4.4.3-1 VoIP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
CO VoIP Mode
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
The VoIP channels can support iPECS,
H.323 or SIP protocols. This field defines the
protocol for the VoIP channel(s).
COMMON/
H323 only/
SIP only/
RTP-Packet-Relay only/
H323 & RTP-Packet-Relay/
SIP & RTP-Packet-Relay
COMMON
323
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.4.4 ISDN Attributes - PGM 143
Selecting ISDN Attributes will display the ISDN Attributes data input page. Enter a valid CO range
and click [Load] button to enter the ISDN Attributes data. Use the check mark to indicate which
attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save] button.
Enter CO Range: eMG80: 1-74 / eMG800: 1-600 / UCP: 1-998
Figure 4.4.4.4-1 ISDN Attributes
PGM 143 assigns attributes associated with ISDN lines in the entered range.
Table 4.4.4.4-1 ISDN ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
TEI Type
ISDN – SS CD/CR(CFU)
Advice of Charge
DESCRIPTION
The TEI (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) is a unique
identifier for each device attached to the ISDN line.
When the system shares an ISDN connection with
other devices, the TEI should be automatic to assure
no conflict with the other attached devices.
Otherwise, the Fixed identifier option should be
employed.
RANGE
DEFAULT
Fixed/
Automatic
Automatic
No Service/
Permits a user to access to ISDN Supplementary Call
Call Deflection/
Deflection Service. (Except USA version).
Call Rerouting
When assigned, the system will analyze the Advice of
Charge information in the Facility Message according
to the ETSI specifications with appropriate regional
protocol support.
324
No AOC/
Italy & Spain/
Finland/
Australia/
Belgium/
ETSI STD
No Service
No Service
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.4.4-1 ISDN ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
ISDN Line Type
Calling Sub-address
Screening indicator
ISDN PLUS Code
CP/Alert inband
Disconnect inband
Disconnect with Inband
Info
DESCRIPTION
The system will encode voice using the A-law or ulaw PCM format to match the installed ISDN back
bone.
For outgoing calls, the user’s station number may be
included in the ISDN call SETUP message Subaddress field.
The ISDN Screening Indicator can be configured.
When the incoming CLI starts with “+”, this value will
be inserted in place of the “+” sign.
Send progress indication with in-band information in
Call proceeding and Alerting messages.
Send progress indication with in-band information in
Disconnect message.
When system receives DISCONNECT message with
Inband information from PSTN, the following option
can be applied:
-. Ignore Inband information: Line is disconnected
-. Bypass Inband information: Progress Information is
transferred
-. Wait Release: System wait to send Release
message till the other party is disconnected
325
RANGE
DEFAULT
μ-Law/
A-Law
μ-Law
OFF
ON
OFF
User Provided,
No Service/
User Provided,
Pass/
User Provided,
Fail/
Network
Provided.
User Provided,
No Service
0000-9999
-
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Ignore Inband
information,
Bypass Inband
information,
Wait Release
OFF
OFF
Ignore Inband
information
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.4.5 CO/IP Ring Assignment - PGM 144
Selecting CO/IP Ring Assignment will display the CO/IP Ring Assignment data input page. Enter
a valid CO range and click [Load] to enter the CO/IP Ring Assignment data. Use the check mark
to indicate which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save]
button.
Enter CO Range: eMG80: 1-74 / eMG800: 1-600 / UCP: 1-998
Figure 4.4.4.2-1 CO/IP Ring Assignment
Each “Normal” CO/IP line is assigned to signal a station, station group or VSF Announcement for
an incoming call (Ring). Separate ring assignments are made for Day, Night, and Timed Ring
mode. A delay from 1 to 9 Ring cycles can also be assigned, based on this assignment, the
station/Station group will receive audible ring after a delay of the number of Ring cycles entered.
In addition, when assigned to ring a VSF Announcement, the system can be programmed to
disconnect after the announcement, ‘Auto Drop’.
When CO/IP Lines are programmed to ring the built-in Auto Attendant, a delay of 0 to 30 seconds
can be assigned as the AA Ring Time. The delay allows stations to be assigned Ring and to
answer prior to signaling the AA. At expiration of the AA Ring Time, the call is sent to the
assigned VSF announcement or announcement 1 when no VSF announcement is assigned.
326
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.4.6 DID Service Attributes - PGM 145
Selecting DID Service Attributes will display the DID Service Attributes data input page. Enter a
valid CO range and click [Load] button to enter the DID Service Attributes data. Use the check
mark to indicate which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save]
button.
Enter CO Range: eMG80: 1-74 / eMG800: 1-600 / UCP: 1-998
Figure 4.4.4.6-1 DID Service Attributes
DID lines can be assigned the type of “Start” signaling and treatment of received digits. Digits can
be used “as is” to route the call within the system, digits can be converted and used to route the
call, or digits can be converted to a Table index to determine the call routing from a Table look-up.
Refer to the following table for additional description of attributes and values.
Table 4.4.4.6-1 DID SERVICE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
DID Start Signal
Assigns the type of DID start signaling,
Immediate, Wink or Delayed for the CO/IP Line.
DID Conversion Type
The received DID digits can be treated to
determine call routing, simple conversion
(Convert), use “as is” (no treatment), or modify
using Flexible DID Conversion Table (Look-up).
Number of Digits
The number of digits expected from the PSTN
Expected from DID Circuit DID circuit.
DID Digit Mask
DID digit modification sequence: “#” deletes the
digit, “*” accepts the digit “as is”, a digit (0~9)
replaces the digit. The modification is based on
the position of the digit (1~4) in the received
number.
327
RANGE
Immediate/
Wink/
Delayed
DID Digit Conversion/
Use ‘as is’/
Modify using Flexible
DID conversion table
DEFAULT
Wink
Use ‘as is’
2~4
eMG80:3
eMG800:4
UCP:4
(0~9, *, #)
#***
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.4.7 DISA Service Attributes - PGM 146
Selecting DISA Service Attributes will display the DISA Service Attributes data input page. Enter
a valid CO range and click [Load] to enter the DISA Service Attributes data. Use the check mark
to indicate which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save]
button.
Enter CO Range: eMG80: 1-74 / eMG800: 1-600 / UCP: 1-998
Figure 4.4.4.7-1 DISA Service Attributes
DISA Service can be enabled on CO lines based on the system operation mode (Day, Night, and
Timed). DISA calls may be routed to dial tone and await user dialing (simple routing) or through a
multi-layered Audio Text menu assigning a VSF Announcement and a Customer Call Route
(CCR) Table Index. The system can be programmed to disconnect after the announcement, ‘Auto
Drop’, or follow the CCR Table routing with a user-recorded announcement requesting specific
inputs from the user.
328
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.4.8 CO/IP Preset Forward Attributes - PGM 147
Selecting CO/IP Preset Forward Attributes will display the CO/IP Preset Forward Attributes data
input page. Enter a valid CO range and click [Load] to enter the CO/IP Preset Forward Attributes
data. Use the check mark to indicate which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is
stored by clicking [Save] button.
Enter CO Range: eMG80: 1-74 / eMG800: 1-600 / UCP: 1-998
Figure 4.4.4.8-1 CO/IP Preset Forward Attributes
The CO/IP Preset Call Forward feature enables a CO line to initially ring at multiple stations and
forward to a pre-determined destination. A separate timer can be defined for each CO/IP line for
no-answer. The destination can be any index to the ICLID Ring Table in section 4.4.7.5 or a
Voice Mailbox. The VMID field allows selecting a specific mailbox when the CO line call forwards
to an external VM group.
Table 4.4.4.8-1 CO/IP PRESET FORWARD ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
An incoming call, which remains unanswered for
Preset FWD Timer
this timer, is routed as defined in the ‘ICLID Ring
Table Index section’.
If an incoming call remains unanswered after the
Preset ICLID Ring Table Preset Fwd time above, the call is routed as
Index
defined in the ‘ICLID Ring Table index’ defined
here.
Each CO/IP line can be assigned a VMID (Voice
Preset VMID Digit
Mail Id) that is sent to the external VM group to
identify the desired Mailbox for the call.
329
RANGE
DEFAULT
00-99
(Sec.)
00
001-250
Mailbox ID
(Max. 4 digits)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.4.9 MATM Attributes - PGM 149
Selecting MATM Attributes will display the MATM Attributes data input page. Enter a valid CO
range and click [Load] to enter the MATM Attributes data. Use the check boxes to indicate which
attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored for the entire range of CO/IP Lines when
saved. Use the check mark to indicate which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is
stored by clicking [Save] button. These attributes are available for Country code 82.
Enter CO Range: eMG80: 1-74 / eMG800: 1-600 / UCP: 1-998
Figure 4.4.4.9-1 MATM Attributes
Table 4.4.9-1 MATM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
MATM Sub Type
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
This is the analog trunk type for the MATM
option board.
COIU : LCO
RDIU : RD (ring down, only for national
army)
LDIU : LD (loop dial, only for national army)
EMC = E&M continuous,
EMD = E&M discontinuous)
LCO,
RD,
LD,
EMC,
EMD,
Unused
LCO
Send Wink (IC),
Wait Seize Ack(OG),
Send Wink (IC) and
Wait Seize Ack(OG),
This is the signal type for the analog trunk.
Send Sub Answer (IC)
This should be set with alternate trunk type.
MATM Start Signal Type
and Wait Sub
These can be set by testing with available
Answer(OG),
values.
Send Wink and Send Sub
Answer(IC),
Wait Ack and Wait Sub
Answer(OG),
330
Send Wink (IC)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.9-1 MATM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
2W or 4W
DLY Start Timer
Wink Timer
SND ANS Timer
OSND RLS Timer
SND RING ON Timer
SND RING OFF Timer
SND RING RPT CNT
CO
SND RING RPT CNT
RD
CO Ring STOP Timer
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
For E&M Lines, this value should be set as
2 wire or 4wire to match the line.
This is timer value for analog signaling.
This is timer value for analog signaling.
This is timer value for analog signaling.
This is timer value for analog signaling.
This is timer value for analog signaling.
This is timer value for analog signaling.
Send Wink and Send Sub
Answer(IC) & Wait Wink
and wait sub answer(OG),
Unused Type
2W/
4W
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
4~255
4~255
DEFAULT
4W
6
6
6
13
20
40
This is timer value for analog signaling.
0~255
8
This is timer value for analog signaling.
01~20
2
This is timer value for analog signaling.
0~255
30
331
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.4.10 NA ISDN Line Attributes - PGM 150
Selecting NA (North America) ISDN Line Attributes will display the NA ISDN Line Attributes data
input page. Enter a valid CO range and click [Load] to enter the NA ISDN Line Attributes data.
Use the check mark to indicate which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by
clicking [Save] button.
Enter CO Range: eMG80: 1-74 / eMG800: 1-600 / UCP: 1-998
Figure 4.4.4.10-1 NA ISDN Line Attributes
To comply with the North American ISDN standards, certain attributes must be defined for the
system. These include Directory (telephone) Number and Service Profile Id (SPID) for the device.
Note that this programming is required only for “Country Code” 1, USA installations. Refer to
Table 4.4.4.10-1 for information on individual attributes.
Table 4.4.4.10-1 NA ISDN LINE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Local Exchange Type
The type of ISDN determines several specifics of the
protocol and is required for proper operation.
SPID Number
The Service Profile Identifier (SPID) is a number
assigned to a fully initializing ISDN terminal and
enables the Stored Program Control switching System
(SPCS) to identify the ISDN terminal at layer 3 of the
D-channel signaling protocol. The SPID is a freeformatted numeric string composed of 9 to 20 numeric
{0-9} and International Alphabet (IA5) characters. The
332
RANGE
DEFAULT
NI 1/
NI 2/
5 ESS/
Nortel
NI 2
20 digits
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.4.10-1 NA ISDN LINE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
SPID uniquely identifies a particular set of
subscription parameters assigned to a TSP.
Directory Number
Initializing terminals are required to store a 7-digit DN
in order to perform the compatibility checking
procedures that are part of call termination.
20 digits
EKTS Mode
The EKTS (Electronic Key Telephone Service)
terminal permits a user to operate those features that
are specific to EKTS, as well as voice features that
may function distinctly in the EKTS environment.
EKTS allows a DN to be shared by more than one
terminal, on the same or on different interfaces.
NONE/
EKTS
NONE
Type for 1/2/3
ISDN CALLED NO uses the International format,
National format, Network format, Subscriber format, or
Abbreviated format when the user dials 1~3digits.
Unknown/
International/
National/
Network/
Subscriber/
Abbreviated
Unknown
Type for 4/5/6
ISDN CALLED NO is constructed with International
format, National format, Network format, Subscriber
format, or Abbreviated format when the user dials 4~6
digits.
Unknown/
International/
National/
Network/
Subscriber/
Abbreviated
Unknown
Type for 7/8/9
ISDN CALLED NO is constructed with International
format, National format, Network format, Subscriber
format, or Abbreviated format when the user dials 7~9
digits.
Unknown/
International/
National/
Network/
Subscriber/
Abbreviated
Unknown
Type for 10/11
ISDN CALLED NO is constructed with International
format, National format, Network format, Subscriber
format, or Abbreviated format when the user dials
more than 10 digits.
Unknown/
International/
National/
Network/
Subscriber/
Abbreviated
Unknown
333
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.4.11 CID/CPN Attributes - PGM 151
Selecting CID/CPN Attributes will display the CID/CPN Attributes data input page. Enter a valid
CO range and click [Load] to enter the CID/CPN Attributes data. Use the check mark to indicate
which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save] button.
Enter CO Range: eMG80: 1-74 / eMG800: 1-600 / UCP: 1-998
Figure 4.4.4.11-1 CID/CPN Attributes
COLP: Connected Line Presentation / CLIP: Calling Line Identification Presentation
Setting CID Password directly
You can set the CID password to click “Go to Setting” button. After clicking it, you will move to the
following PGM 162 and set the CID password, and then save CID password to mark tick on the
save box and click the Save button.
Refer to Table 4.4.4.11-1 for information on individual attributes.
Table 4.4.4.11-1 CID/CPN ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
COLP Table Index
DESCRIPTION
When an incoming call on an ISDN Line is answered, the
system will send caller id using the number from the
CLIP/COLP Table (section 4.4.7.2) entry defined by this
parameter. The station number is included as a suffix of
334
RANGE
DEFAULT
N/A
0-49
Station CLI
Station CLI
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.4.11-1 CID/CPN ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
RANGE
DEFAULT
N/A
0-49
Station CLI
Station CLI
Unknown/
International/
National/
Unused/
Subscriber
National
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Max. 4 digits
-
Max. 6 digits
-
Max. 4 digits
-
CLI Transit
When the system must send CLI to the ISDN for an off-net
call, the CLI can be either the original caller’s CLI or the
CLI of the Off-net forwarding/transferring station.
ORI/
CFW
CFW
ISDN Redirecting
Number
When the system needs to send a Redirecting number to
the ISDN for an off-net call, the Redirecting number can be
either the original caller’s CLI or the CLI of the Off-net
forwarding/transferring station. If it is no service then
system will not send this information. If it is configured for
OGR CLI (original CLI) then system will send original CLI
that is received from incoming CO line. If it is CFW CLI
then system will send the redirecting CLI that is the CLI of
the off-net call forwarding station.
NO SERVICE/
ORG CLI/
CFW CLI
NO
SERVICE
CLIP Table Index
Type of Number for
Calling Party Info
DESCRIPTION
the caller id. For “Using Station’s COLP Attribute”, the
Station CLI type entered below will be used in place of the
station number.
When a call is placed on an ISDN Line, the system will
send caller id using the number from the CLIP/COLP Table
entry defined by this parameter. The station number is
included as a suffix of the caller id. For “Using Station’s
CLIP Attribute”, the Station CLI Type entered below will be
used in place of the station number.
For outgoing calls on an ISDN Line, this parameter defines
the “Type of Number Plan” provided in Calling Party
Information Element of the ISDN call SETUP message.
Regional ISDN providers may use the Local Area Prefix
code for special services. In cases where the code is not
Incoming Prefix Code
provided in the incoming call SETUP message, the system
Insertion
can insert the My Local Prefix and My Area Code below in
SMDR, LNR, displays, etc.
Regional ISDN providers may use the Local Area Prefix
Outgoing Prefix Code code for special services. The system can insert the “My
Insertion
Area Code” and “My Local Prefix Code” in the Connect
message as defined in those items below.
When an incoming call includes the international Country
code in the ISDN call SETUP message, the Country code
International Access
can be included in the station display. To include the
Code
Country code, Incoming Prefix insertion, and CLI display in
Station Data must be ON.
Regional ISDN providers may use the Local Prefix and
Area codes for special services. The system will insert this
My Area Code
Local Area Code in the call SETUP messages defined
under the Incoming/Outgoing Prefix Code Insertion entries
above.
Regional ISDN providers may use the Local Prefix and
Area codes for special services. The system will use this
My Area Prefix Code code for insertion of the Local Prefix Code in the call
SETUP messages if Local Prefix Insertion is enabled
above.
335
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.4.11-1 CID/CPN ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Incoming CLI Choice – When ISDN setup message has
two CLIs (Transit Point CLI / Original CLI), this option
determines the CLI the system will recognize.
Original CLI/
Transit point
Transit Point CLI
CLI
Calling party
numbering Plan
ISDN Calling Party Numbering Plan can be configured.
Unknown,
ISDN/Telephony,
Data/Numbering,
Telex,
National Std,
Private,
Reserved
ISDN/
Telephony
Called party
numbering Plan
Unknown,
ISDN/Telephony,
Data/Numbering,
ISDN Calling Party Numbering Plan can be programmable.
Telex,
National Std,
Private,
Reserved
Unknown
Station CLI Type
When the Station CLI is used with the CLIP or CLOP, one
of five Station CLIs as defined in PGM 114 section 4.4.7.2
is used for this CO/IP Line as selected here.
Choice incoming CLI
Station CLI 1 –
Station CLI 5
Station CLI
1
When a DID call is received on an ISDN Line, this entry
DID Remove Number determines the number of digits that will be removed
starting at the first received digit.
00~99
00
Selects one digit remove mode in ISDN Called Digits for
Italy DID.
Enable
Disable
Disable
One Digit Remove
CID mode
The type of CID signal can be assigned according to the
type of CID from the carrier.
RCID detect
Russia CID Detect Mode.
RCID request
Russia CID Request Mode.
RCID Request First
Delay Timer
RCID No-Answer
Timer
RCID Digit Number
RCID Request Count
RCID Request Retry
Delay Timer
Russia CID First Delay Timer.
Russia CID NO–Answer Timer.
Russia CID Digit Number.
Russia CID Request Count.
Russia CID Retry Delay Timer.
336
Disabled/
FSK/
DT-AS(TAS) FSK/
DTMF/
RCID
LOCAL/
ALL
USER/
AUTO
010–150
(10msec)
001–300
(Sec.)
04–10
1–3
10–30
(10msec)
FSK
ALL
AUTO
30
20
07
1
10
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.4.12 T1 CO Line Attributes - PGM 152
Selecting T1 CO Line Attributes will display the T1 Line Attributes data input page. Enter a valid
CO range and click [Load] to enter the T1 Line Attributes data. Use the check mark to indicate
which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save] button.
Enter CO Range: eMG80: 1-74 / eMG800: 1-600 / UCP: 1-998
Figure 4.4.4.12-1 T1 CO Line Attributes
North American T1 standards require that the T1 terminating device, in this case iPECS system,
include various “adjustable” timers and counters as described below.
Table 4.4.4.12-1 T1 CO LINE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Pause Timer
RELEASE GUARD
DT DELAY
INTER DIGIT
WINK Timer
OP RATE
DESCRIPTION
A timed pause may be included in a Speed Dial number, in
which case, the pause time is defined by this entry. Not
currently implemented.
The release guard timer defines the length of time the
system will maintain a Line as busy after the call has been
terminated to assure the PSTN has sufficient time to ‘clear
down’ the circuit. Not currently implemented.
The DT (Dial tone) Delay timer defines the duration dial
tone must be received for DT recognition.
Not currently implemented.
The Inter Digit timer defines the duration between digit
transmissions. Not currently implemented.
For TIE or DID Lines the Wink timer defines the length of
time the ‘wink’ (T1 TIE line circuit reversal) will last.
For Pulse signaling, defines the duration and make/break
ratio of each pulse.
337
RANGE
DEFAULT
1~9
(seconds)
2
01~60
(100 ms)
20
02~50
(100 ms)
10
15~30
(20 ms)
7~15
(20 ms)
60-40(10pps)
66-33(10pps)
15
10
60-40
(10pps)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.4.12-1 T1 CO LINE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
SEZ DTC
RELEASE
IASG TY
RING DTC
RING STOP
COLLECT DGT
STORE TIME
DESCRIPTION
This timer defines the length of a valid ‘line seizure’ signal.
For Ground Start, this timer defines the minimum length of
time ground will not be applied to the TIP side from the
PSTN.
Incoming Address Signaling Type defines the type of
signaling (DTMF or Pulse) expected.
The Ring DTC (detect) timer defines the minimum
acceptable length of the Ring-on time during a ring cycle.
The Ring Stop timer defines the maximum Ring-off time
during a ring cycle.
Collect DGT (digits) defines the number of digits expected
on a DID line.
For DID lines, this timer defines the maximum delay
between incoming DID digits.
338
RANGE
60-40(20pps)
66-33(20pps)
0~127
(20 ms)
0~127
(20 ms)
PULSE/
DTMF
2~9
(100 ms)
10~60
(100 ms)
DEFAULT
3
7
DTMF
2
60
1~6
3
1~15
(second)
15
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.4.13 DCOB CO Line Attributes - PGM 153
Selecting DCOB CO Line Attributes will display the DCOB Line Attributes data input page. Enter
a valid CO range and click [Load] button to enter the DCOB Line Attributes data. Use the check
mark to indicate which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save]
button.
Enter CO Range: eMG80: 1-74 / eMG800: 1-600 / UCP: 1-998
Figure 4.4.4.13-1 DCOB CO Line Attributes
Table 4.4.4.13-1 DCOB LINE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Line Status
DNIS Service
Number of CLI Digits
DCOB Type
Call Category
Number of Digits
Expected from DID
circuit
DESCRIPTION
This parameter defines the code that the system will
send to indicate idle line status in accordance with
E1R2 specifications.
In R2, this field determines whether system will send
caller information to PX or not.
This parameter defines the number of digits expected
as the Calling Line Identification from digital CO lines.
According to this type, the line can be restricted to the
type of service, incoming DID and outgoing calls
(DOD).
This parameter defines the code sent in response to a
call category request from the network in accordance
with E1R2 specifications.
This parameter defines the number of digits expected
as DID digits from digital CO lines. If set to “0”, the
number of digits defined in PGM 145 is used.
339
RANGE
DEFAULT
1~9
6
OFF
ON
OFF
01~15
10
DID/DOD,
DOD,
DID
DID
1~9
1
0~32
0
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5 System Data
Selecting the System Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in the left frame as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 4.4.5-1 System Data Main Page
340
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.1 System Attributes - PGM 160 & 161
Selecting System Attributes will display the System Attributes data entry page. Selecting the blue
colored text in the Table header will sort the table based on the selected column. Click [Save]
button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.1-1 System Attributes
System Attributes define settings that affect system wide features and functions. Generally, the
entry will turn the feature ON (enable) or OFF (disable). Refer to Table 4.4.5.1-1 for a description
of the Attributes and the data entries required.
Setting CID Password directly
You can set the CID password to click “Go to Setting” button. After clicking it, you will move to the
following PGM 162 and set the CID password, and then save CID password to mark tick on the
save box and click the Save button.
341
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.1-1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
When Attendant is busy with receiving call, the
system will provide either Ring-back tone or
Attendant Call Queued
Background music (MOH). If MOH is selected, the
Ring Back Tone
Music Source must be defined in ‘Music source –
PGM171’.
When Camp-On is used, the calling station will
Camp-On MOH/Ring- receive either ring-back tone or MOH. If MOH is
Back Tone
selected, a source must be defined in ‘Music source –
PGM171’.
The system can use dial-tone detection or a timed
CO Dial Tone Detect
pause for speed dial numbers that contain a Pause.
CO Lines are selected by the system from groups
CO Line Choice
using either the LAST used, FIRST or ROUND robin
method.
A DISA user is allowed to retry erroneous
authentication code entries. This entry sets the
number of retries before the system disconnects.
CO/IP calls, which are assigned UNA, can activate
External Night Ring
the Loud Bell Contact. While in the Night mode, an
incoming call will activate the contact.
A single depression of the [Hold] button places the
Hold Preference
call on the preferred hold, System or Exclusive.
Print LCR Converted
SMDR will output the number dialed by either the
digits
system’s LCR or the user.
The system can be configured to queue incoming
Attendant Call Queuing
calls to a busy Attendant.
This field allows Main Attendants to activate
Day/Night mode and other System Attendant menus
USE PGM_0 IN ALL
ATD
except PGM 06 – Record system announcement.
(Not available in USA version.)
When a call is routed to a destination external to the
Off-net Prompt Usage iPECS, the Off Net routing prompt can be played.
(Not available in US version)
When an Unsupervised Conference is established
CO to CO
with DISA, Off-Net Fwd, etc., the Unsupervised
Unsupervised
Conference timer determines the allowed duration of
Conference Timer
the call. If enabled here, the user may extend the
Extend
allowed duration.
When the optional ACD Event messages are
ACD Manager Print
required, the system must be enabled here to send
the events.
The Call Log saves the Outgoing call, Received call,
or Lost call information and can be displayed by
CALL LOG Number
pressing Call Log Display Button. The maximum size
of the Call Log per station is defined here.
If enabled, the system will repeat DTMF tones to the
Repeat DTMF tone
caller’s station when the call is routed to an off-net
location.
DISA Retry Count
342
RANGE
DEFAULT
MOH/
Ring-Back Tone
MOH
MOH/
Ring-Back Tone
MOH
OFF
ON
LAST
FIRST
ROUND
OFF
LAST
1~9
3
OFF
ON
OFF
System/
Exclusive
LCR/
USER
OFF
ON
System
LCR
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
15~50
15
OFF
ON
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.1-1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Off-Hook Ring Type
Page Warning Tone
Automatic Privacy
DESCRIPTION
Off-hook ring can be a single tone burst or muted
normal ring.
A warning tone can be sent prior to a page
announcement.
Automatic Privacy can be disabled, allowing stations
to join an active CO/IP call. A warning tone can be
provided, see Privacy Warning Tone below.
RANGE
MUTE/
BURST
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
If desired, a warning tone can be provided when
OFF
privacy is overridden.
ON
ACD statistics can be periodically sent to the
OFF
ACD Print Enable
assigned serial port. To provide periodic reports, this
ON
feature must be ON.
This entry defines the time, in 10-second increments,
001~255
ACD Print Timer
between the periodic ACD reports assigned above.
(1 sec)
When a periodic report is sent, the ACD database can
OFF
Clear ACD Database
be cleared automatically, if “ON”.
ON
When a user dials ‘9’, the system can search all
OFF
Override 1st CO Group
CO/IP Groups for the first available CO/IP line.
ON
The default codec can be defined as G.711, G.729,
G.729/
G.722 or G.723.1 for decreased bandwidth needs.
G723.1/
Codec Type
The selected codec will be used on all internal
G711/
communications as well as for remote iPECS devices.
G722
The G.711 voice frame packetization time determines
10/20/30
G.711 Packetization
the interval at which voice samples are packetized
(1 msec)
and sent when the G.711 codec is used.
The G.723.1 voice frame packetization time
30/60
G.723 Packetization
determines the interval at which voice samples are
(1 msec)
packetized and sent when the G.723.1 codec is used.
The system can use ISDN Network time or NTP to
Disable/
Network Time/Date
synchronize time with the ISDN or data network.
ISDN/
ISDN sync is not available in USA version.
NTP
The system can invoke COS dialing restrictions when
OFF
Incoming Toll Check
a user dials while connected to incoming call.
ON
This field determines the TCP port employed to
Web Server Port/TLS access the system WEB server. This field also
00001-65535/
for Web
enables Transport Layer Security (TLS) for access to Enable or Disable
Web Admin.
When an Authorization code is required, the user may
Auth Retry Count
attempt to enter a Valid code up to the maximum
1-9
value defined in this field.
System Authorization codes are entered by the user
Simple Auth Code
OFF
as “*” and the code (ON) or “*”+ the Auth code index
Usage
ON
and the code (OFF).
If a user fails to enter a valid Authorization code in the
number of attempts assigned in Auth Retry Count
OFF
above, the station is disconnected or the Station COS
COS 7 when Auth Fail
ON
is changed to COS 7. In the latter case, the user must
employ COS Restore in Station User PGM 2 to return
the station to the normal COS.
Privacy Warning Tone
343
DEFAULT
MUTE
ON
ON
ON
OFF
010
OFF
ON
G711
020
030
Disable
ON
80/
Disable
3
ON
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.1-1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Unified Message
Format
Conference Room CO
Tel Number
System Integration Messages are sent out the defined
OFF
serial or TCP channel.
ON
ISDN DID number an external party must dial to enter
Max. 15 digits
a Conference room.
When call recording is active, a tone can be sent to all
OFF
Record warning tone
connected parties to indicate the conversation is
ON
being recorded.
UCP (MPB) DIFF
Diff-Serv Code Point applied to packets from LAN port
00-63
SERVE
of the UCP (iPECS eMG LAN port of the MPB).
Transfer mode for upgrades from MPB to an iPECS
FTP
Device Upgrade Mode
device.
TFTP
When a CO call is transferred to a busy extension,
MOH/
CO Transfer Tone
Ring Back Tone or Music On Hold will be played to
Ring-Back Tone
the CO Line.
When a new member joins a conference room, the
Conference Warning
OFF
system provides warning tone to conference
Tone
ON
members.
When a CO line does not provide dial tone, the
Unused/
Dummy Dial Tone
system can provide dummy dial tone.
Use
SIP phones may set-up a point-to-point RTP
connection (PTP) or to assure a controlled
RTD/
SIP Station Mode
connection, RTP can be routed via a VoIP channel
PTP
(RTD).
When the PSTN will be used to send SMS, the phone
number of the Short Message Service Center must be
SMS Center Number
Max. 23 digits
entered.
When the CO/IP Line will be used to receive SMS, the
SMS Center CLI
Max. 23 digits
Caller Id expected from the Short MSG Service
Center must be defined.
DEFAULT
OFF
ON
46
FTP
Ring-Back Tone
ON
Unused
Routed
None/
SMS Protocol
G.722 Packetization
Transit-out security
Emergency call
attendant Notify
3-Way Conference
Preference
The Short Message Service Protocol must be
selected to support SMS.
The G.722 voice frame packetization time determines
the interval at which voice samples are packetized
and sent when the G.722 codec is used.
The system will check the IP address for transit-out
calls in the master system. If not valid the transit-out
call is denied.
The Attendant can be notified when another user in
the system dials emergency number.
When 3-way conference calling, the system uses the
selected device to establish the conference mixing.
When “Local” is assigned, the device, such as a SIP
344
ETSI-P1/
ETSI-P2/
KT-LivingNet/
SIP-Text/
SIP-XML/
KT IP-PBX/
SKN IP-PBX/
KT XML
NONE
10/20/30
(1 msec)
020
Unused/
Use
Use
Unused/
Use
Use
Local/
MCIM
Local
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.1-1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
First digit * in SPD
Use Strong Password
VSF SMTP port
CTI IP
Intercom busy service
Auto save new
message
IGMP query usage
IGMP query interval
timer
DESCRIPTION
phone, must provide the mixing. This option is
available only for UCP.
Normally, when “*” is the first digit in a Speed Dial
number, the Display Security feature is activated so
that the number is not shown in the LCD of iPECS IP
or LDP Phones. Otherwise, the “*” is sent as the first
digit to the carrier.
When enabled, passwords in PGM 162 must be
longer than 10 digits and include both numbers and
characters.
SMTP port used for the VSF and UVM gateway
(VMIU/VMIB).
When assigned, the system will accept 3rd party TAPI
messages only from assigned IP address.
When busy, an intercom call may use Off-hook VoiceOver or Intrusion to connect to the called intercom
party.
After listening to a voice message, if the user takes no
action, the system can automatically save the
message or leave the message in the new message
category.
The system employs multi-cast packets for
registration and certain general functions such as
MOH. With some multicast snoop enabled Layer 2
switches, multicast packets are not forward unless an
IGMP query device exists in the network. This entry
enables the IGMP query option and system sends
periodic IGMP query message to avoid multicast
blocking.
This timer defines the interval for each IGMP query
message.
IGMP queries are sent to all IP hosts (ON) on the
network or to iPECS devices only. For All Hosts, IP
address 224.0.0.1 is used otherwise the iPECS
IGMP query all host
specific 239.20.19.50 IP address is used. If problems
occur with MOH, the “All Hosts” may correct the
issue.
This entity specifies a group addresses being queried.
If ON is selected, all multicast group are queried. If
OFF is selected, iPECS registering device group
IGMP query generic
(239.20.19.50) is queried only. This should be ON
when there is a MOH problem.
If enabled, calls using * or # as the first digit are
Restrict star and pound
prohibited by the system.
Restricted Dialing
If a restricted number is called, the system will output
Display After Answer
an SMDR record for the call after the call is answered.
IP BIND USAGE
If It’s ON, VOIU/VOIB/VOIM will apply IP-Binding with
information in PGM130 / PGM133 (Media port).
345
RANGE
DEFAULT
Display Security/
Display Security
Digit *
OFF
ON
ON
00001~65535
25
0.0.0.0
Voice-over/
Intrusion
Voice over
Unused/
Use
Unused
OFF
ON
OFF
0~3600
(Sec.)
180
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.1-1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
New 5 Wake Up
Usage
Easy 5 Wake Up
Usage
Station VM Feature
Usage
End code(#) usage in
System Auth Code
Remote VM Access
Transfer Tone Usage
CID Password Usage
LCR Dial Tone Detect
ICM call log
Mobile Phone
Presence Service port
Mobile Phone
Presence State Sync
DESCRIPTION
With the “New Wake-Up” option, the user can assign
five alarm notification times, otherwise only one
Wake-Up time can be set.
If this value is set to ON, and New 5 Wake Up Usage
is also set to ON, each station user can enter his/her
wake up time without entering wake up type and wake
up index.
If this option is set to ON, Station VM feature (PGM
127) can be used.
Enhanced features of the VSF/UVM can be disabled.
Features controlled by this setting include as below:
Company Directory
Remote Announcement Recording
Administrator Mailbox
Distribution List
Mark a Message as Private, Urgent, or
Delivery Confirmation
Record Greeting through CCR
Voice Mail Class of Service
If this option is set to ON, End code (#) must be
entered when system Auth code is entered.
If this value is OFF, the user cannot access to VSF
mailbox via DID, DISA CO call and so on (i.e. through
CO line channel).
If this value is ON, Warning tone is served to the
[transfer to] station. This is only applied to screened
transfer case.
If this value is ON, a user must enter the CID
password to modify an admin value about CID setting.
If this value is set to ON, the system first checks dial
tone in case on analog CO Lines then LCR dialing is
completed. If no dial tone is detected, the call is
rerouted to Alternate DMT Index.
If LCR type is set to M13, LCR dial tone detect option
is not applied.
If this value is set to ON, the system provides an ICM
Call log for iPECS IP and LDP Phones.
This is for an interface between eMG and external
server that sends http/xml data. Currently the first
usage of this port is ‘mobile phone presence’ service.
If set to a valid port the presence service will be
implemented and the system will await messages for
presence from the external server.
When the system receives presence information for a
mobile extension from external server, the system
synchronizes the station’s call state with this presence
information. A busy presence will set the station to
busy.
346
RANGE
DEFAULT
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
00001~65535
00000
OFF/
DSS LED only/
Station Status
Station Status
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.1-1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Mobile Phone
Presence Force Idle
Timer
DESCRIPTION
The system will return a station’s state to idle if there
is no updated presence information from external
server for the duration of this timer.
Picked-up station
name usage
If this value is set to ON, system requests a
password:
When a user enters Attendant program ([PGM] + 0,
When an Attendant enters Speed program,
When a user assigns attendant program code ([PGM]
+ 0) to Flexible button,
Name of picked up station is display when pickup
internal call.
Display LCR mode
Display “LCR MODE” when LCR is activated.
VM Notify to Mobile
Extension over CO
If this value is set to ON, an analog Loop Start CO
Line can be used for the VM notification call to the
Mobile Extension.
MODEM Associated
Station/CO line
When a call is received by the assigned CO Line, the
call is routed to the system’s built-in modem. This
option is available only for eMG80 & eMG800.
Attendant Password
Usage
Display {MEET ME}
Soft button
Number of CLI Wait
List
Emergency Mailbox
Station
MSVC XML Port
IPCR Announce for
recording warning
If this value is set to OFF, {MEET ME} soft button is
not displayed during a paged.
The system check the status of each device with a
polling message periodically using this timer.
When an Emergency Mailbox Station is assigned, an
emergency call placed by a station is recorded
automatically to the assigned mailbox.
The XML port used to support Web callback, callthrough and iPECS ClickCall application for MSVC
(Mobile Service) must be defined.
When ON, the IPCR server Call Recording notification
announcement is played to the caller in place of the
warning tone.
RANGE
DEFAULT
0~3600
(Sec.)
0
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Disable
Enable
Disable
CO/STA
eMG80:STA/
239
eMG800:STA/2
199
OFF
ON
ON
0-255
0
00001~65535
7878
OFF
ON
OFF
IPCR Announce for
only incoming
User can select IPCR Announce only when it’s
incoming by setting ON.
OFF
ON
OFF
Mobile EXT CO
Access Password
Check
When a mobile extension places an external call
using an iPECS CO/IP Line, the user may be required
to enter a valid Authorization code to place the call.
OFF
ON
OFF
When ON, the Hold key is used for paging.
OFF
ON
ON
15 ~ 255 seconds
15
All,
Accessible ICM
Group only
ALL
All,
ALL
Hold key usage on
paging
Device Info Request
Interval
The system checks the status of each device with a
polling message at intervals of this timer.
The Dial by Name feature can allow stations in any
ICM tenancy groups to call a station any in ICM
Dial By Name List
Tenancy group. When desired, Dial by Name can be
limited to function within allowed Tenancy calling
groups, PGM 125.
Dial By System Speed If this value is set to "Accessible System Speed Zone
347
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.1-1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Name List
Only", the system speed dial number of Accessible
system speed zone (System Speed Zone (232)) is
displayed in {Dial by Name}.
The user can select the display language used in the
Web pages. Either English or the “Local” language
Default Web Language can be selected. Note the “Local Language” must be
entered in the Multi-Language file in Maintenance
section.
No Range Load Limit
on Web Admin
Forward limitation by
caller COS
No CLI Call Log
Remote VM Forward
Access
DB Backup to USB
monthly
DB Backup to USB
weekly
SLT Line Monitor
OFF: Limited index range will be accepted (e.g. 1100)
ON: No limitation of table index (e.g. 221, 222, 270,
etc)
Caller (internal station) call to a station offnet
forwarded. It can be forwarded by caller COS if it's
ON.
Leave system Call log even though there is no CLI
information if it is ON. Otherwise Call log is not
leaved.
If the value is ON, Call Forwarding setting from
remote access is enabled. If the value is OFF, Call
Forwarding setting from remote access is disabled.
RANGE
Accessible
System Speed
Zone Only
English/
Local language
English
OFF/ON
ON
OFF/ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
System downloads the database to USB periodically.
The user can access, copy and delete files in USB
drive via web admin. So you can back up DB by
choosing the specific date for Monthly or Weekly.
N/A,
1,
15
N/A,
Mon ~ Sun.
SLT line supervision is to be supported to check the
line connection/disconnection periodically as
programmed - daily or programmed time. When the
line is disconnected, alarm call/message notification is
provided to pre-defined destinations like other alarms.
System will send e-mail notification according to
"Common SMTP Attributes" and "Alarm Attributes".
This is to provide more reliability for mission-critical
services for hospitality or health care solutions (i.e.
bath alarms using SLT line).
Conditions
- Normal SLT service is not available during detection
period since the detection takes several seconds.
- Ringer test determines the presence of appropriate
ringer terminations on the line. The measured
impedance must be within the defined limits: 1.4 kΩ
(5 REN) ~ 40 kΩ (0.175 REN). Otherwise the test
fails, which means that normal SLT device can be
detected, but if simple device which does not provide
the proper ringer impedance is connected, then we
cannot detect it properly.
- Supported system options: UCP/eMG80/800 with
Unified 2.1 software
OFF
ON
348
DEFAULT
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.1-1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
- Supported G/W & Boards: UCP-SLTM, UCP100
SLTU, eMG80/800 SLIB
The system monitors if SLT Line functions correctly at
SLT Line Monitor Time
a preset time in this field.
UCS Client can be checked by Ring ACK Message. If
the Ring ACK message is sent and get no ACK
message, System set the state of UCS Client on OOS
(Out of service) after the set of Ring ACK count.
If the Ring ACK Count is 0, the UCS Client goes to
UCS Ring ACK Count OOS (Out Of Service) after 1 time. If the count is 2,
UCS Client can go to OOS (Out Of Service) at 3
times.
UCS Client is ringing before expiring the Ring ACK
timer set on System Timers ‘UCS Ring ACK Timer’
and afterwards will hear Error tones.
Dial Back to Caller
from Remote VM
Access
Web Admin Login
Failure count to block
Web Admin Hacking
Block Period
Web Admin Hacking
Block Email
Notification
SMTP Server IP
Address
SMTP Server Domain
Address
SMTP Port
SMTP Security
Connection
E-Mail Account ID
E-Mail Account
A user accesses to voice mail from remote, the user
can make a call to the caller of the voice mail like
below.
If ‘Toll Free’ is selected, the user can make a call to
the caller of the voice mail.
If ‘toll check’ is selected, Station COS will be applied.
If ‘Rejected’ is selected, the user can’t make a call to
the caller of the voice mail.
For security, administrator can set the limited count to
log in Web admin from 5 to 99.
This setting time is the duration of blocking the access
to Web admin if Web admin login fails.
If this option is Enable, System send the notification
by email about blocking the web admin. The email
address is following the below ‘Alarm Receiver E-Mail
Address(To) & Notification Receiver E-Mail
Address(To)’.
SMDR/ACD/Alarm Mail Attribute
Common SMTP Attributes
SMTP server IPv4 address to receive the SMDR Email reports.
SMTP Mail server Domain address to receive the
SMDR e-mail reports. Check DNS IP address setting.
This field defines the TCP/IP port that the system will
employ when communicating with the SMTP E-mail
server. (It is moved to web admin PGM 160-161)
The system can support basic security policies when
communicating with the SMTP E-mail server. Note
the server must also be configured for the selected
security protocol.
This field defines the user’s ID for SMTP server. If the
user’s ID and password is assigned, SMTP server will
check the validity of the user ID and password.
This field defines the user‘s password for SMTP
349
RANGE
DEFAULT
0-23
0
0-9
0
Toll Free,
Toll Check,
Rejected
Toll Free
5-99, o: unused
5
5-60 minutes
5
Disable,
Enable
Disable
12-digits
0.0.0.0
1-65535
25
No security/
SSL/
TLS
No security
Max. 40
characters
Max. 20
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.1-1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Password
server. If the user‘s ID and password is assigned,
SMTP Mail server will check the validity of user ID
and password.
E-Mail address used by the system as the “From”
Sender E-Mail Address
address when sending Database, SMDR, ACD, and
(From)
Alarm reports.
Domain name of SMTP Mail server to receive SMDR
Sender System
reports. This field is used in place of SMTP Mail
Domain Name
Server IP Address above.
Database Attributes [Send Mail]
RANGE
DEFAULT
characters
Max. 40
characters
Max. 18
characters
[Send Mail] button is used for sending the mail after filling out the below menu
Sets day of month for Database to be sent on a
NA/
Database Mail Send
monthly basis (NA for no monthly reports, select the
1/
Monthly Set
day for 1 or 15).
15
Database Mail Send
Sets day of week to send Database weekly.
Day-of week
Weekly Set
Select the desired database type: All database,
Database Type
System speed, Station speed, LCR, etc.
Database Receiver
E-mail address to receive the Database E-mail
Max. 40
Mail Address
reports.
characters
NA
N/A
All Database
SMDR Attributes
[Send Mail] button is used for sending the mail after filling out the below menu
SMDR Mail Send
Weekly Set
Sets day of week to send SMDR data weekly.
Sets time-of-day for SMDR data to be sent on a daily
SMDR Mail Send Daily
basis (00 for no daily records, 01-23 for hour of the
Set
day).
SMDR Mail Auto Send If the SMDR buffer is full, the system can
Set
automatically send a notification by E-mail.
SMDR Mail Auto
Delete SMDR records after sending E-mail.
Delete Set
SMDR Receiver Mail
E-mail address to receive the ACD E-mail reports.
Address
NA,
Monday to
Sunday
N/A
00-23
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Max. 40
characters
OFF
OFF
ACD Attributes
[Send Mail] button is used for sending the mail after filling out the below menu
ACD Mail Send
Weekly Set
Sets day of week to send ACD statistic data weekly.
ACD Mail Send Daily
Set
Sets time-of-day for ACD statistic data to be sent on a
daily basis (00 for no daily records, 01-23 for hour of
the day).
ACD Database Delete
After Mail Send
ACD Receiver Mail
Address
Delete ACD statistic data after sending E-mail
E-mail address to receive the ACD E-mail reports.
350
NA,
Monday to
Sunday
N/A
00-23
N/A
OFF
ON
Max. 40
characters
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.1-1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Alarm Attributes
[Send Mail] button is used for sending the mail after filling out the below menu
Alarm Receiver E-Mail
The system will send email to saved E-Mail Address
Address(To) &
when system alarm is occurred or system restarts.
Notification Receiver
E-Mail Address(To)
Max. 40
characters
LDAP Server Settings
Server Display Name
Server IP
Server Port
Require Login
Use SSL
Search Base
LDAP User ID
LDAP User Password
When the UCS Client requires access to an LDAP
server, the system will provide the LDAP server
information to the client. The server name is defined
in this field.
When an LDAP server is employed, the IP address of
the server must be defined.
When an LDAP server is employed, the TCP/IP port
of the server must be defined.
The UCS Client ID and Password may be required for
log in to the LDAP server.
When supported by the server, the client can employ
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) for added security.
Server base means Search option. You can get the
search option from LDAP Server manager. For
example, if OU (Organization Unit) is OC and DC
(Directory Company) are ucapp and com, you can
give the option "OU=OC, DC=ucapp, DC=com" in this
field. You will get the desired directory.
ID and Password must be required to connect to
LDAP Server.
351
15 characters
LDAP Server
0.0.0.0
0001-65535
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.2 System Password - PGM 162
Selecting System Password will display the System Password data entry page. Use the check
boxes to indicate which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored for the Keyset
Admin, Remote Access Password, or CID password when saved. Click [Save] button after
changing Value.
It is important to use strong password for lowering overall risks of a security breach. The
best way to choose good password are designed to make passwords less easily
discovered by intelligent guessing.
Figure 4.4.5.2-1 System Password
Access to the system database and maintenance functions can be protected by passwords up to
twelve (12) digits. Three passwords can be defined, Keyset Admin, Remote Access and CID.
Check the save box and enter the password and click the save button.
The following success message is displayed if the password is correct and saved successfully.
352
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.3 Alarm Attributes - PGM 163
Selecting Alarm Attributes will display the Alarm Attributes data entry page. Click [Save] button
after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.3-1 Alarm Attributes
The system can monitor an external contact. This contact is most often employed as an Alarm
indicator or Doorbell. The Alarm attributes define the operation of the external contact. For the
Alarm, the signal to assigned stations can be repeating or a single burst, the former is often
desired. For the Doorbell, a single tone is sent each time the contact activates. Refer to Table
4.4.5.3-1 for a description of the features and the data entries required for each attribute.
If the related alarm attributes are set to ‘Alarm & Email’ or ‘Email Noti only’, the system sends an
email to the address that set in PGM 160~161 Alarm Attributes ‘Alarm Receiver E-Mail Address
(To) & Notification Receiver E-Mail Address (To)’.
Table 4.4.5.3-1 ALARM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Alarm Enable
Alarm Contact Type
Alarm Mode
Alarm Signal Mode
DESCRIPTION
This entry enables/disables the contact monitoring
circuitry.
This parameter establishes the contact state that will
activate the Alarm, close or open.
The contact can be treated to function as a doorbell or an
alarm.
The assigned stations will receive a Repeating signal or
single burst (Once) of alarm tone.
353
RANGE
OFF
ON
Close/
Open
Alarm/
Door-Bell
Repeat/
Once
DEFAULT
OFF
Close
Alarm
Repeat
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.3-1 ALARM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Alarm 1 Display
Alarm 2 Display
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
In case of UCP600/2400, {Alarm 1 Display} and {Alarm 2
Display} are added. Otherwise, {Alarm Display} is added.
When alarm port 1 is activated, the string of {Alarm 1
Display} or {Alarm Display} is displayed in assigned
stations.
When alarm port 2 is activated, the string of {Alarm 2
Display} is displayed in assigned stations.(UCP600/2400)
System Notification
This entry enables/disables the Emergency call
notification.
DCOB Fault Notify
This entry enables/disables DCOB Fault notification.
SIP Registration Fault This entry enables/disables SIP Registration Fault
Notify
notification.
Station Capacity Full This entry enables user to get the notification as alarm
Notify
when Station Capacity is over the capacity.
CO Capacity Full
This entry enables user to get the notification as alarm
Notify
when CO Capacity is over the capacity.
This entry enables user to get the notification as alarm
SMDR Full Notify
when SMDR is over the capacity.
VM Memory Full
This entry enables user to get the notification as alarm
Notify
when the memory of Voice Mail is full.
WTIM (WTIB) Base
This entry enables user to get the notification as alarm
Fault Notify
when WTIM (WTIB) base gets the fault.
WTIM (WTIB) Chain This entry enables user to get the notification as alarm
Fault Notify
when WTIM (WTIB) chain gets the fault.
This entry enables user to get the notification as alarm
I SMDR Full Notify
when I SMDR is over the capacity.
This entry enables user to get the notification as alarm
Cabinet Fault Notify
when the cabinet has fault only for eMG800 & UCP.
This entry enables user to get the notification as alarm
Bar Full Notify
when Bar is full.
This entry enables user to get the notification as alarm
IPCR Fault Notify
when IPCR gets the fault.
This entry enables user to get the notification as alarm
IP Watch Fault Notify
when IP Watch has fault only for eMG800 & UCP.
This entry enables user to get the notification as alarm
Bath Alarm Notify
about Bath Alarm.
Temp activation of all This entry enables user to get the notification as alarm
license Expiry Notify before Temp activation of all license expires.
Maintenance Expire
This entry enables user to get the notification as alarm
Notify
before Maintenance license expires.
Emergency Call Notify
Excessive
Registration over
license Notify
Geo-Slave/Survival
Mode (T-NET LCM)
Expire Notify
TAPI Disconnected
Notify
This entry enables user to get the notification as alarm in
case of the excessive registration over License.
This entry enables user to get the notification as alarm
before Geographical slave/Survival mode (T-NET LCM)
license expires.
This entry enables user to get the notification as alarm
when TAPI is disconnected.
354
Alarm & Email
Alarm & Email
Alarm & Email
Alarm & Email
Alarm & Email
Alarm & Email
Alarm & Email
Alarm & Email
Alarm & Email
Alarm & Email
OFF,
Alarm & Email,
Alarm & Email
Email Noti
Only,
Alarm & Email
Alarm Only
Alarm & Email
Alarm & Email
Alarm & Email
Alarm & Email
Email Noti
Only
Alarm & Email
Alarm & Email
Alarm & Email
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.4 Attendant Assignment - PGM 164
Selecting Attendant Assignment will display the Attendant Assignment data entry page. Click
[Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.4-1 Attendant Assignment
eMG80 is consist of 1 System attendant and 3 Main attendant. eMG800 is consist of 1 System
attendant and 4 Main attendant. UCP is consist of 1 System attendant and 49 Main attendant.
The System Attendant has higher priority in call handling and system management functions. As
a default, the System Attendant is assigned Station 100 for eMG80 & Station 1000 for
eMG800/UCP. Main Attendants are not assigned by default.
355
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.5 Multi-cast IP/Port - PGM 165
Selecting Multi-cast IP/Port will display the Multi-cast IP/Port data entry page. Click [Save] button
after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.5-1 Multi-cast IP/Port
Multi-cast is employed by the system to send BGM, MOH, paging and Push-To-Talk packets.
Employing a single multi-cast packet reduces the overall LAN traffic. In some cases, specifically
when multiple systems are connected to the same default gateway (router) it may be
advantageous to define different IP ports for each system.
Table 4.4.5.5-1 eMG80 MULTI-CAST IP/Port
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
8100
(8101)
8102
(8103)
8104
(8105)
BGM Internal
RTP and RTCP ports for internal BGM.
0000-9999
BGM External 1
RTP and RTCP ports for external BGM 1.
0000-9999
BGM External 2
RTP and RTCP ports for external BGM 1.
0000-9999
356
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.5-1 eMG80 MULTI-CAST IP/Port
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
8106
(8107)
8108
(8109)
8110
(8111)
8112
(8113)
8114
(8115)
8116
(8117)
8118
(8119)
Internal Page 1
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 1.
0000-9999
Internal Page 2
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 2.
0000-9999
Internal Page 3
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 3.
0000-9999
Internal Page 4
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 4.
0000-9999
Internal Page 5
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 5.
0000-9999
Internal Page 6
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 6.
0000-9999
Internal Page 7
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 7.
0000-9999
Internal Page 8
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 8.
0000-9999
Internal Page 9
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 9.
0000-9999
Internal Page 10
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 10.
0000-9999
Internal Page 11
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 11.
0000-9999
Internal Page 12
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 12.
0000-9999
Internal Page 13
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 13.
0000-9999
Internal Page 14
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 14.
0000-9999
Internal Page 15
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 15.
0000-9999
Internal Page 16
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 16.
0000-9999
Internal Page 17
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 17.
0000-9999
Internal Page 18
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 18.
0000-9999
Internal Page 19
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 19.
0000-9999
Internal Page 20
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 20.
0000-9999
Internal Page 21
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 21.
0000-9999
Internal Page 22
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 22.
0000-999
Internal Page 23
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 23.
0000-9999
Internal Page 24
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 24.
0000-9999
357
8120
(8121)
8122
(8123)
8124
(8125)
8126
(8127)
8128
(8129)
8130
(8131)
8132
(8133)
8134
(8135)
8136
(8137)
8138
(8139)
8140
(8141)
8142
(8143)
8144
(8145)
8146
(8147)
8148
(8149)
8150
(8151)
8152
(8153)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.5-1 eMG80 MULTI-CAST IP/Port
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
8154
(8155)
8156
(8157)
8158
(8159)
8160
(8161)
8162
(8163)
8164
(8165)
8166
(8167)
Internal Page 25
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 25.
0000-9999
Internal Page 26
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 26.
0000-9999
Internal Page 27
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 27
0000-9999
Internal Page 28
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 28
0000-9999
Internal Page 29
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 29
0000-9999
Internal Page 30
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 30
0000-9999
Internal Page 31
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 31
0000-9999
Internal Page 32
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 32
0000-9999
Internal Page 33
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 33
0000-9999
Internal Page 34
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 34
0000-9999
Internal Page 35
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 35
0000-9999
Internal Page All
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal All Call Page
0000-9999
External Page 1
RTP and RTCP ports for External Page 1.
0000-9999
External Page 2
RTP and RTCP ports for External Page 2.
0000-9999
External Page All
RTP and RTCP ports for External All Call Page.
0000-9999
Page All
RTP and RTCP ports for All Call Page.
0000-9999
PTT 1
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 1.
0000-9999
PTT 2
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 2.
0000-9999
PTT 3
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 3.
0000-9999
PTT 4
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 4.
0000-9999
PTT 5
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 5.
0000-9999
PTT 6
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 6.
0000-9999
PTT 7
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 7.
0000-9999
PTT 8
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 8.
0000-9999
358
8168
(8169)
8170
(8171)
8172
(8173)
8174
(8175)
8176
(8177)
8178
(8179)
8180
(8181)
8182
(8183)
8184
(8185)
8186
(8187)
8188
(8189)
8190
(8191)
8192
(8193)
8194
(8195)
8196
(8197)
8198
(8199)
8200
(8201)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.5-1 eMG80 MULTI-CAST IP/Port
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
8202
(8203)
8204
(8205)
8206
(8207)
8208
(8209)
8210
(8211)
8212
(8213)
8214
(8215)
PTT 9
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 9.
0000-9999
PTT All
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group ALL
0000-9999
BGM Internal VSF
RTP and RTCP ports for VSF BGM
0000-9999
SLT MOH 1
RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH1
0000-9999
SLT MOH 2
RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH2
0000-9999
SLT MOH 3
RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH3
0000-9999
SLT MOH 4
RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH4
0000-9999
SLT MOH 5
RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH5
0000-9999
VSF MOH2
RTP and RTCP ports for VSF MOH2
0000-9999
VSF MOH3
RTP and RTCP ports for VSF MOH3
0000-9999
8216
(8217)
8218
(8219)
8220
(8221)
Table 4.4.5.5-2 eMG800 MULTI-CAST IP/Port
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
8100
(8101)
8102
(8103)
8104
(8105)
8106-8304
(8107-8305)
8306
(8307)
8308
(8309)
8310
(8311)
8312
(8313)
8314
(8315)
8316-8332
(8317-8333)
8334
(8335)
8336
(8337)
BGM Internal
RTP and RTCP ports for internal BGM.
0000-9999
BGM External 1
RTP and RTCP ports for external BGM 1.
0000-9999
BGM External 2
RTP and RTCP ports for external BGM 1.
0000-9999
Internal Page 1-100
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 1.
0000-9999
Internal Page All
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal All Call Page
0000-9999
External Page 1
RTP and RTCP ports for External Page 1.
0000-9999
External Page 2
RTP and RTCP ports for External Page 2.
0000-9999
External Page All
RTP and RTCP ports for External All Call Page.
0000-9999
Page All
RTP and RTCP ports for All Call Page.
0000-9999
PTT 1-9
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 1.
0000-9999
PTT All
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group ALL
0000-9999
BGM Internal VSF
RTP and RTCP ports for VSF BGM
0000-9999
359
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.5-2 eMG800 MULTI-CAST IP/Port
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
8338-8346
(8339-8347)
8348-8350
(8349-8351)
SLT MOH 1-5
RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH1
0000-9999
VSF MOH2-3
RTP and RTCP ports for VSF MOH2
0000-9999
Table 4.4.5.5-3 UCP MULTI-CAST RTP/RTCP
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
BGM Internal
RTP and RTCP ports for internal BGM.
0000-9999
BGM External 1
RTP and RTCP ports for external BGM 1.
0000-9999
BGM External 2
RTP and RTCP ports for external BGM 1.
0000-9999
Internal Page 1 ~ Internal Page 100 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 1.
0000-9999
Internal Page All
RTP and RTCP ports for Internal All Call Page
0000-9999
External Page 1
RTP and RTCP ports for External Page 1.
0000-9999
External Page 2
RTP and RTCP ports for External Page 2.
0000-9999
External Page All
RTP and RTCP ports for External All Call Page.
0000-9999
Page All
RTP and RTCP ports for All Call Page.
0000-9999
PTT 1
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 1.
0000-9999
PTT 2
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 2.
0000-9999
PTT 3
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 3.
0000-9999
PTT 4
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 4.
0000-9999
PTT 5
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 5.
0000-9999
PTT 6
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 6.
0000-9999
PTT 7
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 7.
0000-9999
PTT 8
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 8.
0000-9999
PTT 9
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 9.
0000-9999
PTT All
RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group ALL
0000-9999
BGM Internal VSF
RTP and RTCP ports for VSF BGM (VSF MOH)
0000-9999
360
DEFAULT
8100
(8101)
8102
(8103)
8104
(8105)
8106~8304
(8107~8305)
8306
(8307)
8308
(8309)
8310
(8311)
8312
(8313)
8314
(8315)
8316
(8317)
8318
(8319)
8320
(8321)
8322
(8323)
8324
(8325)
8326
(8327)
8328
(8329)
8330
(8331)
8332
(8333)
8334
(8335)
8336
(8337)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.5-3 UCP MULTI-CAST RTP/RTCP
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
SLT MOH 1
RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH1
0000-9999
SLT MOH 2
RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH2
0000-9999
SLT MOH 3
RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH3
0000-9999
SLT MOH 4
RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH4
0000-9999
SLT MOH 5
RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH5
0000-9999
VSF MOH2
RTP and RTCP ports for VSF MOH2
0000-9999
VSF MOH3
RTP and RTCP ports for VSF MOH3
0000-9999
361
DEFAULT
8338
(8339)
8340
(8341)
8342
(8343)
8344
(8345)
8346
(8347)
8348
(8349)
8350
(8351)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.6 DISA COS - PGM 166
Selecting DISA COS will display the DISA COS data entry page. Click [Save] button after
changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.6-1 DISA COS
A DISA user is subject to the dialing restrictions assigned in the DISA Class-of-Service (COS).
The restrictions applied are the same as with the corresponding Station COS levels 1~11 and
interact with the CO/IP COS in the same manner. An assignment is made for Day, Timed and
Night Ring mode of system operation. The default for all three modes (Day, Night, Timed ring) of
DISA COS is 7, allowing internal calls only.
362
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.7 DID/DISA Destination - PGM 167
Selecting DID/DISA Destination displays the Tenant Group input page. Select Tenant Group, the
system will display the DID/DISA Destination Attributes. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Enter ICM Tenancy group: eMG80 : 0-15 / eMG800: 0-32 / UCP: 0-100
Figure 4.4.5.7-1 DID/DISA Destination
When a DID line or DISA user dials an invalid/vacant or busy station number the caller will be
sent to the assigned destination that is selected according to the CO Tenancy group of the
DID/DISA line. The destination is separately defined for invalid, busy, and No Answer conditions
and can be defined as the Attendant, busy tone, a Station Group or a VSF Announcement.
For calls on a DID line to a busy station, DID Call Wait can be assigned, refer to ‘Common
Attributes section’, and the call will queue for the station for the No-Answer time. After the Noanswer time, the call routes to the DID/DISA Destination unless forwarded. Also, for DID calls
only, announcements (prompts) can be sent from the VSF or UVM gateway (in case of UCP) to
the caller for various conditions, busy, error, DND, No Answer, or Attendant Transfer.
363
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.8 External Control Contacts - PGM 168
Selecting External Control Contacts will display the External Control Contact data entry page.
Click [Save] button after changing Value.
The number of External Control Contact: 2 (eMG80), 2 (eMG800), 4 (UCP)
Figure 4.4.5.8-1 External Control Contact
The system includes a programmable contact, which can be used to control external devices.
Refer to the table ‘System capacity’ for number of available contacts. Each contact is assigned to
activate under one of several conditions. As a Loud Bell Contact (LBC), the contact will activate
when the assigned station or group receives an external call. For LBC, when the system is in the
Night or Timed Ring mode, the contact will activate for incoming UNA (Universal Night Answer)
calls and will ignore any station assignment. The contact may alternatively activate as a Door
Lock Release contact, when External Page Zone 1 is accessed or when External Page Zone 2 is
accessed.
364
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.9 LCD Display Mode - PGM 169
Selecting LCD Display Mode will display the data entry page. Click [Save] button after changing
Value.
Figure 4.4.5.9-1 LCD Display Mode
The LCD display mode sets the time (12/24 hr.), date (day/month order) and language. Refer to
Table 4.4.5.9-1 and Table 4.4.5.9-2 for a description of the modes and the data entries required.
Table 4.4.5.9-1 LCD DISPLAY MODES
ATTRIBUTE
LCD Date Display
Mode
LCD Time Display
Mode
Language Display
Mode
LCD Weekday Display
Mode
DESCRIPTION
Sets the Date display as month/day or day/month.
Sets the Time display mode as 12 hour or 24-hour
(military) time.
Sets the Language used in the display; refer to
Table 4.4.5.9-2 below.
Sets the Day-of-Week (DoW) display mode:
no DoW display mm/dd/DoW, (alpha month
display, overrides setting of button 1 above.
display mm/dd/DoW, numeric month display,
overrides setting of button 1 above.
365
RANGE
DD-MM-YY
MM-DD-YY
12 Hour Mode
24 Hour Mode
DEFAULT
MM-DD-YY
12 Hour
English
Follow - PGM169
BTN1/
Type1
(MM/DD WDY)/
Type2
(MM DD WDY)
Follow PGM169
BTN1
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.9-2 LCD LANGUAGE SELECTION
LANGUAGE
English
Italian
Finnish
Dutch
Swedish
Danish
Norwegian
Hebrew
German
French
Portuguese
Spanish
Korean
Estonian
Russian
Turkish
Polish
Greek
Arabic
366
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.10 LED Flashing Rate - PGM 170
Selecting LED Flashing Rate will display the data entry page. Click [Save] button after changing
Value.
Figure 4.4.5.10-1 LED Flashing Rate
The LED flash rate for various functions and states can be assigned any one of the system‘s 15
signals. The various functions and states are shown in the following table. The 15 flash signals
available in the system are shown in the table ‘LED flash rate’.
Table 4.4.5.10-1 LED INDICATION
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
CO Incoming Ring
CO button Incoming ring flashing rate.
00-14
CO Transfer Ring
CO button transfer ring flashing rate.
00-14
COL Queue Ring
CO button queue call back ring flashing rate.
00-14
367
DEFAULT
FLASH 30 IPM
(2)
FLASH 120 IPM
(10)
FLASH 240 IPM FLUTTER
(6)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.10-1 LED INDICATION
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
COL RCL Ring
CO button recall ring flashing rate.
00-14
COL I Hold Ring
CO button I hold flashing rate.
00-14
COL System Hold Ring
CO button system hold flashing rate.
00-14
COL Exclusive Hold Ring
CO button exclusives hold flashing rate.
00-14
COL Outgoing Disabled
CO button outgoing disabled flashing rate.
00-14
COL Incoming Off-net
CFW
CO button incoming off-net call forward
flashing rate.
00-14
COL DISA Indication
CO button DISA indication flashing rate.
00-14
COL Supplementary Call
Waiting
COL Supplementary Call
Hold
CO button supplementary call waiting flashing
rate.
00-14
CO button supplementary hold flashing rate.
00-14
DSS CO Ring
DSS button CO ring flashing rate.
00-14
DSS All Ring
DSS button ICM ALL ring flashing rate.
00-14
DSS Associated Ring
DSS button ICM ring associate device
flashing rate.
00-14
DSS Incoming Ring
DSS button station is in DND.
00-14
DSS Lock Out
DSS button station is in lock out.
00-14
DSS Pre-select Message
DSS button station is in pre-selected
message.
00-14
DSS camp on ICM Hold
DSS button station is in ICM hold.
00-14
DSS Other
DSS button station is in other state.
00-14
ACD Queue Ring 2
CIQ #1 Threshold.
00-14
ACD Queue Ring 6
CIQ #2 Threshold.
00-14
ACD Queue Ring 7-X
CIQ #3 Threshold.
00-14
ACD DND (Off Duty)
ACD an agent is off duty (ACD DND).
00-14
ACD Warning
ACD warning tone.
00-14
ACD Help
ACD help request/response.
00-14
Feature Record
FEATURE voice record button.
00-14
368
DEFAULT
FLASH 480 IPM FLUTTER
(8)
FLASH 30 IPM WINK
(12)
FLASH 60 IPM
(3)
FLASH 120 IPM
(10)
FLASH 240 IPM FLUTTER
(6)
FLASH 240 IPM FLUTTER
(6)
FLASH 240 IPM
(5)
FLASH 240 IPM FLUTTER
(6)
FLASH 480 IPM
(8)
FLASH 30 IPM
(2)
FLASH 60 IPM
(3)
FLASH 120 IPM
(10)
FLASH 60 IPM
(3)
FLASH 480 IPM FLUTTER
(8)
FLASH 30 IPM
(2)
FLASH 60 IPM
(3)
FLASH 120 IPM
(10)
FLASH 60 IPM
(3)
FLASH 120 IPM
(10)
FLASH 240 IPM
(5)
FLASH 120 IPM
(10)
FLASH 120 IPM
(10)
FLASH 120 IPM
(10)
FLASH 240 IPM
(5)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.10-1 LED INDICATION
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Feature Message Wait
FEATURE message wait.
00-14
DSS Out-of-service state
DSS button a station is in out-of-service state.
00-14
On-demand Ring mode
DND led of attendant station for ring mode.
00-14
Night Ring mode
DND led of attendant station for ring mode.
00-14
Timed Ring mode
DND led of attendant station for ring mode.
00-14
Auto Ring mode
DND led of attendant station for ring mode.
00-14
Page Hold Button
HOLD LED for paging.
00-14
DSS Station DND(off duty) DSS button station in Station DND.
00-14
Message Wait (Call Back)
Message wait.
00-14
DSS in use
DSS button station is in use.
00-14
Table 4.4.5.10-2 LED FLASH RATE TABLE
Flash Rate
DESCRIPTION
1
Steady On
2
30 ipm flash (30% On)
3
60 ipm flash (30% On)
4
60 ipm double wink (30% On-Off-On-Off & 70% On)
5
240 ipm flash (30% On)
6
240 ipm flutter (30% On-Off-On-Off-On & 70% Off)
7
480 ipm flash (30% On)
8
480 ipm flutter (30% On-Off-On-Off-On & 70% Off)
9
15 ipm flash (30% On)
10
120 ipm flash (30% On)
11
120 ipm flutter (30% On-Off-On-Off-On & 70% Off)
12
30 ipm double flash (30% On-Off-On & 70% Off)
13
480 ipm double wink (30% On-Off-On-Off & 70% On)
14
480 ipm double flash (30% On-Off-On & 70% Off)
369
DEFAULT
FLASH 30 IPM
(2)
FLASH OFF
(00)
FLASH 60 IPM
(3)
FLASH Steady
FLASH 240 IPM
(5)
eMG: FLASH 480 IPM (8)
UCP: FLASH Off (00)
FLASH 60 IPM
(3)
FLASH 120 IPM
(10)
eMG: FLASH 30 IPM (2)
UCP: FLASH Off (00)
Steady On
(1)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.11 Music Sources - PGM 171
Selecting Music Sources will display the Music Sources data entry page. Click [Save] button after
changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.11-1 Music Sources
Music inputs are provided for use as the Background Music and/or Music-On-Hold source inputs.
Up to three VSF announcements may be recorded and played as MOH to the connected caller.
The “VSF MOH” selection employs System announcement number 201, and for the VSF MOH 2
and VSF MOH 3 selections, any unused announcement can be employed. In addition, up to five
SLT ports may be used as MOH to the held caller.
370
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.12 PBX Access Codes - PGM 172
Selecting PBX Access Codes will display the PBX Access Codes data entry page. Click [Save]
button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.12-1 PBX Access Codes
When the system is used “behind” a PBX/CTX, the system needs to recognize the PBX/CTX
Trunk access codes to implement proper dialing restriction, tone detection sequences and Flash
timing. A maximum of four (4) Trunk Access Codes of one (1) or two (2) digits can be entered.
371
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.13 Ringing Line Preference Priority - PGM 173
Selecting Ring Line Preference Priority will display the Ringing Line Preference Priority data entry
page. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.13-1 Ringing Line Preference Priority
When multiple calls are ringing at the same time to a station assigned Ringing Line Preference,
the order of preference is based on the type of call: CO/IP Transfer, CO/IP Recall, Incoming call,
CO/IP Queue. A queued CO/IP call is always assigned the lowest priority.
372
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.14 RS-232 Port Settings - PGM 174
Selecting RS-232 Port and USB 1&2 port Settings will display the RS-232 Port and USB 1&2 port
Settings data entry page. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.14-1 RS232 Port and USB 1&2 port Settings
Certain characteristics of each port are programmable including baud rate, RS 232 control, and
page settings. Refer to the following table for a description of the settings and the data entries
available.
Table 4.4.5.14-1 RS232 PORT and USB 1&2 port Settings
ATTRIBUTE
Baud Rate
CTS/RTS
Page Break
Line Per Page
XON/XOFF
DESCRIPTION
This entry establishes the BAUD rate for the RS-232 serial
port.
The system’s RS232 port can support Clear-to-Send (CTS)
and Ready-to-Send (RTS), control leads.
The system can send a page break command over the
serial port at the end of each page.
See Lines per Page below for page length set-up.
This entry sets the page length, the number of lines the
system will send before sending the page break.
This entry enables/disables XON/XOFF protocol.
373
RANGE
Unknown/
9600/
19200/
38400/
57600/
115200
OFF
ON
DEFAULT
115200
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
001~199
66
XON/
XOFF
XOFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.15 Serial Port Selections - PGM 175
Selecting Serial Port Selections will display the Serial Port Selections data entry page. For each
function select the desired output using the drop-down menu and, if a TCP channel is assigned,
enter the TCP port. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.15-1 Serial Port Selections
The system has six (6) serial ports (1 RS232, 3 TCP Channels and 2 USB serial). A serial port is
assigned to each function that requires a serial output.
374
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.16 Pulse Dial (Break/Make) Ratio - PGM 176
Selecting Pulse Dial (Break/Make) Ratio will display the Break/Make Ratio data entry page. Click
[Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.16-1 Break/Make Ratio
For Pulse dial CO Lines, the system supports 10pps and break/make ratios of 60/40% or 66/33%.
375
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.17 SMDR Attributes - PGM 177
Selecting SMDR Attributes will display the SMDR Attributes data entry page. Click [Save] button
after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.17-1 SMDR Attributes
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR), which is output over an RS 232 port or TCP channel,
contains details on both incoming and outgoing calls. Various SMDR attributes can be assigned
including; output records for all calls or LD only, call cost per pulse when using call metering, etc.
Refer to the following table for a description of each Attribute and the data entries required.
Table 4.4.5.17-1 SMDR ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Save Enable
Print Enable
Record Type
DESCRIPTION
The system can output all outgoing call records (ON) or, to
allow for PSTN call set-up times, only records for calls that
exceed the SMDR Timer (OFF). For SMDR Timer settings
refer to “Start Timer” as the below.
The system can output SMDR records automatically as they
occur (real-time) or only when requested. When this attribute
is ON, SMDR is sent at call completion.
The system can record all outgoing calls or only long distance
calls. Long distance calls are identified by the LD digit count
and LD codes assigned in “Long Distance code”.
376
RANGE
DEFAULT
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Long Distance/
ALL calls
Long
Distance
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.17-1 SMDR ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Long Distance Call
Digit Counter
Dialed numbers, which exceed the assigned LD digit count are
considered long distance calls for SMDR and COS purposes.
07-15
07
Print Incoming Call
The system can output records for Incoming calls as well as
outgoing calls. If enabled, incoming as well as outgoing calls
are recorded.
OFF
ON
OFF
Print Lost Call
When incoming call records are enabled, the system can also
provide records for unanswered incoming (abandoned) calls.
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
0~9
0
Right/
Left
Right
Records In Detail
Hidden Dialed Digit
The system can output detailed call records (ON) or summary
call information (total number of calls, cost and cost for each
station).
For security purposes, digits dialed for an outgoing call can be
hidden and replaced with “*”. This field defines the number of
digits to hide. The Dialed Digit Hide Option below defines
whether leading or trailing digits are hidden The station must
be assigned for SMDR Hidden digits in ‘Common Attributes
section’.
Dialed Digit Hide
Option
When “HIDDEN DIALED DIGIT” is enabled, above, this field
determines if leading or trailing digits are hidden.
SMDR Currency Unit
The unit of currency used for call cost can be identified with 3characters for easy reference.
SMDR Cost Per
Metering Pulse
SMDR Decimal
Location
Start Timer
Long Distance Code
When call metering is provided by the PSTN, the cost per
metering pulse can be assigned.
This value determines the position of the decimal in the Cost
per Pulse entry above, starting from the right most digits.
To allow for call set-up times through the PSTN, a “Valid call
timer” can be set.
For SMDR and COS purposes, five (5) Long Distance codes
of up to two (2) digits each can be assigned. If dialed as the
1st digits, the call is considered an LD call.
For incoming calls, the system will send the defined data item
for “Field I”. The data item may be CLI, CPN or Ring Service
Time. Note the User dialed number is always provided for an
outgoing call.
For incoming calls, the system will send the defined data item
SMDR Ring/CLI/CPN
for “Field II”. The data item may be CLI, CPN or Ring Service
Service II
Time.
For an ISDN call involving an MSN number, the MSN number
Print MSN
Information can be included in the SMDR Record.
Each SMDR Record can include a record number starting at 1
and incrementing until the records are deleted. The record
number will reset to 1 when SMDR capacity is reached or
Print Serial No
SMDR Mail Auto Delete Set is enabled under System
Attributes.
SMDR CLI or Ring
Service I
SMDR Interface
Service
When enabled, the system stores SMDR data to send to
applications including NMS (Network Management System)
upon request.
377
Max. 3
characters
6-digits
000000
0~5
0
000~250
(msec)
5 two digit LD
codes, use * as
wild card(any
digit)
RING/
CLI/
CPN
RING/
CLI/
CPN
OFF
ON
0
RING
CPN
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
CO CALL,
CO & ICM
CALL
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.17-1 SMDR ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
When enabled, intercom call data is stored as part of the
SMDR data.
When enabled, intercom call data is printed as part of the OnSMDR ICM Print
line SMDR.
SMDR Disconnect
When enabled, the disconnect cause is stored in Off-line
Cause
SMDR data and printed as parted of the On-line SMDR.
To monitor long duration external calls, a “Long Time Call” can
be set. If CO call duration exceeds this value, a notification will
Long time call
be sent to NMS server and alarm. If set to “000” the feature is
disabled.
Print SMDR from any When a CO call is transferred to a Net transit-out CO, the local
CO to NET call
SMDR record is deleted.
When a call is transferred by a station, the SMDR record can
be charged based on the following options.
1. Individual: When a call is transferred to another station, the
transferred call is charged both stations based on the time on
Transfer Call Charge the call.
Rate
2. Integrate transferring station: When a call is transferred to
another station, the call is charged to the transferring station.
3. Integrate transferred station: When a call is transferred to
another station, the call is charged to the station receiving the
transfer.
When a call is transferred by a station, the SMDR record can
be charged based on the following options.
1. Individual charging: When the Attendant places an outgoing
call and transfers the call to a station, the Transfer Call
Charge Rate above.
Attendant Transfer
2. Attendant station charging: When Attendant places an
Charge Rate
outgoing call and transfers this call to a station, the call is
charged to the Attendant.
3. Transferred station charging: When the Attendant places an
outgoing call and transfers this call to a station, the call is
charged to the receiving station.
The system will recognize the digits assigned as the
International Access
International access code digit sequence when dialed as the
Code
first digits.
The system will recognize the digits assigned as the Mobile
Mobile Access Code network access code digit sequence when dialed as the first
digits.
SMDR ICM Save
VSF Voicemail
indication
Calls to the Voice Mail may be shown as I (Incoming call) or V
(New indication) for Voice Mail in the SMDR record.
Display Nxxxx for Net An “N” can be included in the SMDR to identify the call as a
number
Network call.
Select SMDR type for outgoing call.
- All call: SMDR can be provided for all outgoing call.
Outgoing call type
- Answered call: SMDR can be provided in case the called
party is answered.
378
RANGE
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
DEFAULT
OFF
OFF
OFF
000 ~ 144
(10 min.)
0
OFF
ON
OFF
Individual/
Integrate
transferring
station/
Integrate
transferred
station
Individual
Station
Individual
charging/
Attendant
station
charging/
Transferred
station
charging
Individual
charging
Max. 4 digits
Max. 4 digits
I (Incoming
call)/
V (New
indication)
OFF/
ON
All Call,
Answered Call
I(Incoming
call)
OFF
All Call
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.18 System Date & Time - PGM 178
Selecting System Date & Time will display the System Date & Time and DST data entry page.
Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.18-1 System Date & Time
The System Date and Time are established by the [Time & Date] menu. The date and time are
employed for several features and functions including; LCR, LCD displays, SMDR outputs, Auto
Ring mode Selection, Wake-up Alarm, etc.
If Daylight Savings Time is enabled the system time will be adjust one-hour forward and back at
the DST start and end times, respectively.
379
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.19 System Multi Language - PGM 179
Selecting System Multi Language will display the System Multi Language data entry page. Click
[Save] button after changing Value.
Enter Device/GW slot sequence number: eMG80 : 1-300 / eMG800: 1-2890 / UCP: 1-3688
Figure 4.4.5.19-1 System Multi-Language
The VSF (VMIU, VMIB, UVM) supports multiple languages (18 languages); up to six languages
may be supported simultaneously. Once the prompts are downloaded to the VMIU and VMIB, the
caller receives the Language selection announcement for DISA and CCR calls as well as
preceding a Station Group announcement or DID error announcement. The language selection
announcement will only affect the language prompts enabled for use with the device indicated by
the Sequence number.
380
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.20 System Timers - PGM 180 ~ 182 & 186
Selecting System Timers will display the System Timers data entry page. Click [Save] button
after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.20-1 System Timers
A number of timers can be assigned to control and affect many features and functions. Refer to
the following table for a description of the timers and the input required.
Table 4.4.5.20-1 SYSTEM TIMERS
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Enter the desired time that Attendant receives recall
after the system will disconnect the call.
Enter the desired recall time for call park. Parked call
Call Park Recall Timer
will recall the station at a specified time.
When a call is transferred using Camp-On, this field
Camp-on Recall Timer determines the desired recall time for Camp-on. The
station receives the call again with a specified time.
Exclusive Hold Recall Enter the desired time for Exclusive hold. The station
Timer
receives the call again after a specified time.
Attendant Recall Timer
381
RANGE
00~60
(minutes)
000~600
(seconds)
DEFAULT
01
120
000~600
(seconds)
030
000~600
(seconds)
060
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.20-1 SYSTEM TIMERS
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Enter the desired time for Hold recall. The station
receives the call again after a specified time.
System Hold Recall
Enter the desired time for System hold recall time. The
Timer
station receives the call again after a specified time.
Enter the desired time for transferring the call again to
Transfer Recall Timer
the receiving station.
If the ACNR Pause Timer expires and no CO/IP Line is
available for ACNR recall, in this filed, you can set the
ACNR Delay Timer
delay time before ACNR attempts to access a CO/IP
line again. This feature doesn’t affect the ACNR retry
counter.
Enter the desired time for pause between ACNR recall
ACNR Pause Timer
attempts.
Enter the number of ACNR retry attempts. ACNR will
ACNR Retry Counter
finish after a specified times.
Regarding CIS country, the range is from 1 to 9.
If call progress tones are not available for ACNR, the
ACNR Tone Detect
system will wait the specified time after dialing before
Timer
considering the called party as “busy/no answer”.
If a user accesses a CO/IP Line and takes no action,
Automatic CO Release
the system will automatically release the CO/IP Line
Timer
when the specified time is over or expired.
Inter-digit timer used with Customer Call Routing
CCR Inter-digit Timer
function.
To prevent dialing when CO/PBX has slow response,
CO Dial Delay Timer
dialing by the system can be delayed using this timer.
When a CO/IP Line is returned to idle, the system will
CO Release Guard
deny access for the specified time to assure the PSTN
Timer
returns the CO/IP Line circuitry to be idle.
This timer sets the maximum ‘OFF’ duration of the
CO Ring Off Timer
incoming ring cycle for the Ring Detect circuitry of the
system to detect an abandoned call.
This timer sets the ‘ON’ time of the incoming ring cycle
for the Ring Detect circuitry of the system to recognize
CO Ring ON Timer
an incoming call.
Users can receive a periodic tone indicating the length
of an outgoing call. This timer sets the time before and
Elapsed Call Timer
between the tones. Note CO Warning Tone must be
enabled for the station in Station Data in ‘Station Data
section’.
If no data packet is received during a Web connection,
Web Password Guard
after the guard time a password check will be initiated
Timer
by the system.
When a user activates No-Answer Forward, calls will
Call Forward No
ring for this duration before being forward. The Station
Answer Timer
No-Answer Forward timer section will take precedence.
A DID/DISA call to a busy station will forward to the
DID/DISA No Answer
DID/DISA Destination assigned under section should
Timer
this timer expires.
I-Hold Recall Timer
382
RANGE
000~600
(seconds)
000~600
(seconds)
000~600
(seconds)
DEFAULT
030
030
030
000~300
(seconds)
030
000~300
(seconds)
030
1~13
03
001~300
(seconds)
30
000~300
(seconds)
030
000~300
(seconds)
00~99
(minutes)
030
05
010~150
(seconds)
020
001~150
(seconds)
060
1~9
(100 msec)
2
005~900
(seconds)
180
001~999
(minutes)
5
000~600
(seconds)
15
000~255
(seconds)
00
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.20-1 SYSTEM TIMERS
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
VSF User Maximum
Record Timer
VSF Valid User
Message Timer
This timer sets the maximum duration allowed for the
User Greeting in the system’s VSF.
This timer sets the minimum duration allowed for a User
Greeting.
This timer sets the minimum time required to activate
Door Open Timer
the contact assigned as a door open contact.
If a user goes off-hook to receive Intercom dial tone and
ICM Dial Tone Timer
takes no action for this timer, the user will receive error
tone.
This timer sets the maximum time allowed between
Inter Digit Timer
each user-dialed digit. At expiration, the user will
receive error-tone.
An iPECS IP or LDP Phone user will receive periodic
MSG Wait Reminder
reminder tones of a message waiting at intervals of this
Tone Timer
timer.
Determines the maximum duration of a page after
Paging Timeout Timer
which the caller and Page Zone are released.
A Timed pause of this duration is used in speed dial
Pause Timer
and during other automatically dialed digits sent to the
PSTN.
When a Soft Key is used on the 6000 or 7000 series
Soft auto RLS Timer
iPECS IP or LDP Phone, after expiration of this timer,
the display will return to the previous display.
When the system sends a “Pause” to Voice Mail using
in-band signals, this timer defines the Pause duration.
VM Pause Timer
(Not available in the USA.)
This timer determines the duration the system
SLT Hook Switch
considers an actual state change in the hook-switch
Bounce Timer
and not a spurious contact bounce.
SLT Maximum Hook
This timer sets the maximum time an SLT user can
Switch Flash Timer
depress the hook-switch for a Flash signal.
SLT Minimum Hook
This time sets the minimum time an SLT user must
Flash Timer
depress the hook-switch for a Flash signal.
Station Auto Release
For an internal call, the system will return a station to
Timer
idle if the call remains unanswered for this duration.
This timer determines the duration of an “Unsupervised
Unsupervised
Conference” before the station is recalled or the
Conference Timer
conference is dropped. 00 means 10 minutes.
This timer sets the delay (no action duration) for
Prime Line Delay Timer
delayed (Warm) Prime Line operation.
This timer sets the duration of the “Seize Acknowledge
Wink Signal Timer
Signal” (Wink) sent to the PSTN on a DID line.
When an ISDN Line is assigned to send digits En-block,
En-block Inter Digit
CO Attribute section, the system will send digits if the
Timer
user dials “#” or this En-block inter-digit timer expires.
This timer establishes the duration of DTMF tones sent
DTMF Duration Timer
on an analog CO line.
The system will receive DID digits for this timer.
Flex DID Timer
After the timer expires, the system will use the last 2 to
383
RANGE
000~999
(seconds)
0~9
(seconds)
00~99
(100 msec)
DEFAULT
0
4
20
001~255
(seconds)
10
01~20
(seconds)
5
00~60
(minutes)
00
000~255
(seconds)
15
1~9
(seconds)
3
1-30
(seconds)
10
1-90
(ms)
30
01~25
(100 msec.)
1
01~25
(100 msec.)
000~250
(10 msec.)
000~300
(seconds)
00~99
(minutes)
01~20
(seconds)
010~200
(10 msec.)
01~20
(seconds)
04~99
(10 msec.)
01~99
(100 msec)
10
30
60
10
5
10
5
10
30
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.20-1 SYSTEM TIMERS
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
4 digits received as DID digits.
R2 Out Manage Timer
Reserved for future usage for R2 timers.
R2 In Manage Timer
Reserved for future usage for R2 timers.
R2 Disappear Timer
Reserved for future usage for R2 timers.
R2 Pulse Timer
Reserved for future usage for R2 timers.
R2 Ready Timer
Reserved for future usage for R2 timers.
Dial Tone Delay Timer
Reserved for future usage for R2 timers.
Record Warning
Repeat Timer
At expiration of this timer, the system will notify the
Attendant when a user does not respond to a Wake up
alarm.
The duration of Voice Messages in the built-in Voice
Mail are reduced by this timer to remove error tone that
may be sent by the carrier after disconnect.
When an iPECS IP or LDP Phone receives a
disconnect message or signal from CO line the phones
goes to idle after this timer.
When Local redundancy is implemented, should the
LAN cable fail, both call servers may attempt to be
active. To protect against this “dual active” case, the
system can periodically check for an active back-up
module.
When the Prepaid funds are exhausted, the user will
receive a warning tone indicating the call will be
dropped after this timer expires.
System try to make emergency call according to the CO
access rule/Prefer CO/CO group if system could not
seize predefined emergency Co line within this timer.
If record warning tone is set and this timer is set greater
than 1, it works periodically when it’s recorded.
Error Tone Timer
This timer sets the duration for Error Tone.
Howling Tone Timer
This timer sets the duration for Howling Tone.
Wake Up Fail Timer
VSF Cut Error Tone
Timer
On Hook Auto Idle
Timer
IP Watch Timer
Prepaid Call Drop
Warning Timer
Emergency retry timer
VM Notify Play Delay
Over CO Timer
Fax Detect timer
Auto Pause Release
timer
UCS Ring ACK Timer
Short Modem Timer
When VM notification to the mobile uses an analog loop
start Line, system will treat the call as the answered
after this timer and play the new message prompt.
It is maximum fax tone detection time to deliver FAX
call to fax destination.
IPCR Mute function will be released by this auto pause
released timer.
UCS Client is ringing before expiring the Ring ACK
timer and afterwards will hear Error tones.
If {Short modem} of a SLT is ON, the SLT maintains the
384
01~50
(seconds)
01~50
(seconds)
01~50
(seconds)
01~30
(*20ms)
000~500
(*200ms)
01~30
(*20ms)
14
14
14
7
7
20
00~99
20
00~90
(seconds)
0
00~99
(seconds)
0
0~250
(1 sec.)
0
00-99
10
00~99
(seconds)
0
000~999
(seconds)
5~180
(seconds)
0~180
(seconds)
30
1~99
(1 sec.)
10
1~20
(1 sec.)
0~255
(1 sec.)
0~20
(seconds)
01~60
0
30
10
0
0
10
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.20-1 SYSTEM TIMERS
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
modem mode for this time.
Call log/Directory Auto
Idle Timer
RANGE
DEFAULT
(1 sec.)
When the timer is set "xx" and there is no action by a
user while navigating call log/directory menu in a
station, the station will go to idle in case of on-hook
state.
If the timer is set to 0, the feature is not worked.
Condition
1. The call log auto idle timer is supported only below
phones.
- LIP-90xx series (9010/20/30/40)
- LIP-80xxE series (8012E/24/40E)
- LDP phones.
* Firmware of LIP-90xx and LIP-80xxE series should
be upgraded (LIP-90xx: A.0Eb or later version, LIP80xxE: A.1Fn or later version).
2. The DECT phone and LIP-9070 do not support the
directory auto idle timer.
385
00,
10-99 (1 sec.)
0
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.21 In-Room Indication - PGM 183
Selecting In-Room indication will display the In Room data entry page. Click [Save] button after
changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.21-1 In-Room Indication
The Supervisor Station can set the In-Room Indication for all members in the In-Room indication
group. Up to 10 Supervisors (groups) can be configured can be programmed, and each can have
up to 20 members in the group, excluding the Supervisor.
ATTRIBUTE
Supervisor
Member 01~20
DESCRIPTION
This entry assigns the Station number for the InRoom Group Supervisor.
This entry assigns stations as members of the
In-Room Group.
386
RANGE
Station number
Station number
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.22 Web Access Authorization
Selecting Web Access Authorization will display the Web Access Authorization data entry page.
This page is only displayed when a password is defined. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
A user can select three authorization option (N/A, Read, Read/Write) only in Web Access &
Station Web Authorization PGM of Web Admin.
Figure 4.4.5.22-1 Web Access Authorization
Three different passwords can be assigned for the access to the iPECS Web administration so
that the different levels of access to the program fields can be allowed. Four levels (User,
Administrator, Custom1, and Custom2) have access to the assigned fields in this page by
selecting N/A, Read, Read/Write. The Maintenance password has access all the programming
fields and the maintenance fields including trace settings, device log view, gain & cadence control,
lock key install and device delete feature. In addition, the Maintenance level user can assign the
authorities of the other user levels.
In the Maintenance menu, the Database, SMDR, and Voice Mail Delete fields can be chosen by
User level or Admin Level.
387
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.23 Station Web Access Authorization
Selecting Station Web Authorization will display the Web authorization data entry page. Click
[Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.23-1 Station Web Access Authorization
Three access levels can be assigned to each station for access to the Station Web pages in
Station Data (Common Attributes (111): ‘Station Web Level’). Level 1 has access to all Station
pages and attributes. The pages and attributes for Levels 2 and 3 are programmable.
388
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.24 NTP Attributes - PGM 195
Selecting NTP Attributes will display the System NTP Attributes entry page.
Figure 4.4.5.24-1 NTP Attributes
The system can employ the Network Time Protocol (NTP) to synchronize the system time with an
NTP time server. The system requests the time from the NTP server at 10-minute intervals and
then determines the time differential. If the system time is more 2 seconds off the NTP time, the
system time is adjusted to synchronize with the NTP server time.
389
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.25 SNMP Attribute - PGM 196
Selecting SNMP Attribute will display the SNMP Attributes entry page. Click [Save] button after
changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.25-1 SNMP Attribute
SNMP Attributes, as shown on the screen, are divided into three categories: SNMP Agent, SNMP
Security, and SNMP Trap. The SNMP Service field enables the SNMP agent running in the
iPECS call server. The SNMP port field defines the UDP port used for communications from
iPECS system for SNMP messages. This port should not be changed.
In SNMP Security are the Read Only and Read Write SNMP Community fields, 4 to 16
characters. The SNMP community designates an SNMP communication group to which an
SNMP message belongs, and is a logical relationship between the SNMP agent (iPECS system)
and SNMP manager (iPECS NMS). The SNMP community settings must be the same for the
iPECS systrem and the iPECS NMS server.
Read Only Community (default=Public)—Defines a community string used when the
iPECS NMS reads data from iPECS system.
Read Write Community (default=Private)—Defines the community string used when
iPECS NMS reads or writes data to iPECS system.
Although iPECS system can accept packets from any SNMP manger such as iPECS NMS, for
improved security, the IP address of specific servers can be defined and allowed Read only or
Read Write access. It is recommended that the system be assigned with the IP address of a
specific NMS server with Read Write access.
The SNMP Trap configuration defines the Trap Community, and the Trap Destination, which
390
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
includes the IP Address of the SNMP manager, iPECS NMS, and the .message type. The Trap
Community designates a communication group to which a Trap message belongs, and is a
logical relationship between the SNMP agent (iPECS system) and SNMP manager (iPECS NMS).
This 4 to 16 character string should be the same as the Trap community string defined in the
iPECS NMS. The Trap community should be the same for all iPECS systems registered to an
iPECS NMS server whereas the SNMP community may be defined with different strings for each
iPECS system.
The Trap Destination defines the IP address of the iPECS NMS server and the port, 162. Enter
the IP address of the NMS server but, the port should not be changed. The pull down menu next
to the address is used to define the message type. Three values are available:
Trap – message type is defined in SNMPv1, but because iPECS-NMS and iPECS
system use SNMPV2, the Trap type message is not recommended.
Notification – message type sent from the SNMP agent once without checking the
reception of the message.
Inform – message type requires an acknowledgement from the SNMP manager. If the
agent does not receive a response, the message is resent. Inform messages are
intended for use in environments with high packet loss however, use of the Inform
message type may detrimentally affect iPECS system performance.
The iPECS SNMP attributes are defined here. Refer to Table 4.4.5.25-1 for description and
values that can be entered.
Table 4.4.5.25-1 SNMP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
SNMP service
SNMP MIB Type
DESCRIPTION
SNMP Service field is used to set the SNMP agent in the
iPECS ON or OFF.
Select SNMP MIB specification.
U-CEMS is KOREA telecom speciation.
SNMP Port
SNMP Protocol port number.
Read Only Community
Read only community should be used when SNMP
manager (NMS) is trying to read data from SNMP agent
(eMG)
RANGE
OFF
ON
iPECS-NMS/
U-CEMS
DEFAULT
OFF
iPECS-NMS
161
When the SNMP manager (NMS) needs to read and write
Read Write Community data to the agent (iPECS system). This attribute should be
enabled.
4 ~ 16
characters
public
4 ~ 16
characters
private
Trap Community
For the SNMP agent (eMG/UCP), this field defines the
destination IP address to receive trapped messages
(Alarm/fault events).
4 ~ 16
characters
public
Trap Destination
IP address of iPECS NMS server, port 162 should not be
changed.
IP address
Public
Message Type
Defines how the agent sends the Message.
Notification/
Inform/
Trap
Notification
391
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.26 Cabinet Attribute for UCP - PGM 197
Selecting Cabinet Attribute will display the Cabinet Attributes entry page. Click [Save] button after
changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.26-1 Cabinet Attribute
This Web page displays system cabinet configurations and alarm status.
392
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.27 Hot Desk Attributes - PGM 250
Selecting Hot Desk Attributes will display the Hot Desk Attributes data entry page. Click [Save]
button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.27-1 Hot Desk Attributes
Hot Desk feature is available only for LIP phone, NOT for Digital phone and LIP-8002/2E.
A Hot Desk station allows a user to login for access to the system features and resources. Once
logged in, the user is provided access to system features and resources employing the database
for the user‘s assigned station.
User station numbers, which are used as the Agent ID, are assigned automatically by the system.
The system assigns station numbers to each agent starting at the highest station number
available.
Table 4.4.5.27-1 HOT DESK ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Number of Agent
Assign number of Hot desk agent.
View Agent Range
View the assigned station numbers for agents.
Auto Logout Timer
A Hot desk station will return to inactive if the
logged in user takes no action for the Auto Logout
timer.
393
RANGE
DEFAULT
eMG80: 0-100
eMG800: 0-300
UCP:0-1200
0
N/A
00~24 Hrs.
00
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.28 System Call Routing - PGM 251
Selecting System Call Routing will display the System Call Routing data entry page. Enter a valid
Index range and click [Load] to enter Call Routing data. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.28-1 System Call Routing
System Call Routing establishes scenarios with criteria to route calls. Criteria include time 0f day,
day of week, Caller and Called numbers, etc. System Call Routing takes precedent over other
system based call routing. However, Station and CO Call Routing scenarios take precedence
over System Call Routing scenarios.
Table 4.4.5.28-1 System Call Routing Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
Caller ID
Called Num
DESCRIPTION
This field defines the Caller Id for the
scenario.
This field defines the Called number for this
scenario.
Time condition (Start Day and
End Day, weeks, start time and
end time)
The time and day for activation of the
scenario can be defined.
Destination (Type and Value)
This field defines the destination type and
value for call routing when the scenario
criteria are met.
394
RANGE
DEFAULT
Max. 23 Digits
N/A
Max. 23 Digits
YYYY-MM-DD
hhmm
(Must be 4 digits)
STA
Station Group
SPD
PABX/
VSF/
VSF(#)/
Net Station/
Company room/
INT Page/
N/A
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.5.28-1 System Call Routing Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
EXT Page/
All Page/
VM/
ICLID Table
Scenario Priority
Scenario Active
Scenario VMID
Scenario COS
Scenario DISA Active
Each scenario can be assigned a priority.
The highest priority scenario meeting the
criteria is used to route the call.
A scenario must be active to be employed. If
not active the scenario is ignored.
A Voice Mail Id can be associated with the
scenario for routing to a Voice Mailbox.
If DISA is active for the scenario, the COS
can be assigned for the call.
The scenario can employ DISA for the
incoming call routing.
Scenario ICM Group
The scenario can route calls to a specific
Tenancy group.
Scenario Zone No.
A zone can be assigned so that only CO
calls to a CO/IP Line in the Zone will route
based on the scenario.
Scenario Start CO and End CO
0-9
(Highest priority)
ON
OFF
OFF
Voice mail ID
0-11
(COS level)
OFF/
ON
eMG80:0-15,
eMG800:0-32
UCP:0-100
0
OFF
0
0-32
0
This field defines a range of CO/IP Lines that
will employ to the scenario.
eMG80:0-74,
eMG800:0-600
UCP:0-998
0
Scenario Group: this is used for
scenario group by attendant.
Scenarios can be group allowing the
Attendant to select a group of scenarios to
route calls.
eMG80: Group
number(01~15/
00: unused)
eMG800: Group
number(01~32/
00: unused)
UCP:0-100
0
Zone Holiday
A Zone can be assigned for routing calls
using the scenario during Holiday periods
defined for the Zone.
0-32
0
395
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.29 CO Call Rerouting - PGM 252
Selecting CO Call Rerouting will display the CO Call Rerouting data entry page. Enter a valid
Index range and click [Load] to enter Call Routing data. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.29-1 CO Call Rerouting
CO Call Rerouting establishes routing for CO/IP calls with a specified caller id on CO/IP Lines
from a specified group. The rerouting sends calls out over another CO/IP Line or group, a
network destination, a DISA call or to another station. The incoming CO group and compare digits
determine if the call should be rerouted and the destination is determined by the CO code and
Telephone number, which is dialed when the incoming group and compare digits are matched.
The routing type determines if the call is routed normal (N/A) or if the call is routed over a network
or employs DISA.
Example CRR chart
Index
-
Incoming CO group
Compare Code CO Code + Tel number
Routing Type
0
1
454
88005123456
N/A
1
2
456**
8901123456
N/A
2
1
42*555
9123456
N/A
3
5
353
8901123456
NET Type
4
5
401
DISA Type
Index 0: If an incoming call on a CO/IP Line from group has digits “454” then seize CO 5
and send digit 123456.
396
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
-
Index 1: If an incoming call on a CO/IP Line from group 2 has digits “456**” then seize
CO group 1 and send digit 123456.
-
Index 2: If an incoming call on a CO/IP Line from group1 has digits “42*555” then seize
the first CO/IP Line and send digit 123456.
-
Index 3; if an incoming call on a CO/IP Line from group 5 has digits “353” then seize CO
group 1 and send digit 123456 as a transit-out call over the Network.
-
Index 4: If an incoming call on a CO/IP Line from group 5 has digits “401” then activate
DISA and await digits from the caller.
397
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.30 VM COS Attributes – PGM 253
Selecting VM COS Attributes will display the VM COS Attributes data entry page. Select a valid
VM COS and click [Load] to enter VM COS data. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.30-1 VM COS Attributes
VM COS establishes various common characteristics of the user’s Voice Mailbox including
greeting and message length, E-mail notification, message retention, etc.
Table 4.4.5.30-1 VM COS ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
RANGE
DEFAULT
0-99 (Seconds)
0-600 (Seconds)
60
0
This defines maximum number of voice mail message.
0-250
0
Retention Time
Voice mail messages will be automatically deleted after
this number of days.
0-99 Days
0
E-Mail Notification
E-mail notification can be enabled or disabled and, if
enabled, the message can be deleted after notification.
Greeting Length
Message Length
Number Of
Messages
Future Delivery
Message
Confirm Message
Receipt
Private Message
Mark
DESCRIPTION
This defines maximum user greeting length.
This defines maximum user message recording time.
Future Delivery of messages can be enabled or
disabled.
Confirm message receipt can be enabled or disabled.
Private message mark can be enabled or disabled.
398
Disable/
Notification Only/
Notification &
Delete
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Notification &
Delete
OFF
OFF
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.31 Static Route Attributes – PGM 254
Selecting Static route Attributes will display the static route attributes data entry page. Click [Save]
button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.31-1 Static Route Table Attributes
Table 4.4.5.31-1 STATIC ROUTE TABLE ATTIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Net address
Net mask
Network IP address
Net mask
IP address
Gateway IP address
Gateway(route) IP address
IP address
399
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.32 Access Control List – PGM 255
Access Control List will display the access control attributes data entry page. Enter a valid index
range and click [Load] to enter ACL data. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.32-1 Access Control List
Access Control determines the Source IP addresses that can access the system for specific
protocols.
Table 4.4.5.32-1 ACCESS CONTROL LIST
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Protocol
This field defines the accessing protocol type.
Port number
This field further defines the protocol TCP/IP port number.
The port number can be configured as either the source or destination
port number.
The allowed source IP address and net mask allowed access is
defined by this field.
This is a general remark field.
Port type
Source IP address
Remark
400
RANGE
DEFAULT
N/A, ALL,
TCP, UDP,
ICMP
N/A
DEST/
SRC
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.33 Attendant Ring Mode – PGM 257
Selecting Attendant ring mode will display Attendant ring mode entry page. Click [Save] button
after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.33-1 Attendant Ring Mode
Administrator assigns the ring mode to 1 Main attendant and 15 ICM Tenancy Group Attendant.
Five ring modes are supported as Day, Night, Timed, Auto, On demand ring mode (eMG80:
1~15/ eMG800: 1~32/UCP: 1~100).
The Attendant controls the system Ring mode changing from Auto ring Mode to Day, Night,
Timed or On demand ring mode. Based on the ring mode selected in the field of Saved Ring
Mode, different ring assignments, COS (Class of Service) and answering privileges are invoked
for the system users.
In case Main attendant select the other ring mode of Day ring mode in the field of Saved Ring
Mode, ICM Tenancy group attendant controls the system ring mode instead of Main attendant.
So Current Ring Mode and Saved Ring Mode of ICM Tenancy group attendant may be different.
401
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.34 System Speed Dial
Selecting System Speed Dial will display the System Speed Dial entry page. Enter a valid range
of System Speed Dial numbers and click [Load] to enter Speed Dial data. For convenience, the
copy, paste, and drag is available to enter or modify data. Click [Save] button after changing
Value.
The index range is flexible according to selecting ‘Speed Numbering’ in ‘System ID (100)’.
Enter Index range: eMG80: 2000-4999 / eMG800: 2000-9999 / UCP: 20000-31999
Figure 4.4.5.34-1 System Speed Dial List
The eMG80 (eMG800/UCP) has memory for 3000(8000/12,000) Speed Dial numbers of up to 25
digits each. Each System Speed bin (index) is assigned the CO/IP Line for the Speed Dial, the
number to be dialed and a name for Dial-by-Name.
402
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.35 Custom Messages
Selecting Custom Messages will display the Custom Message Table data entry page. Click [Save]
button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.35-1 Custom Message
The system’s 10 Custom messages can be defined with up to 24 characters each.
403
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.36 PPTP Attributes
Selecting PPTP Attributes will display the PPTP Attributes Table data entry page. Click [Save]
button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.5.36-1 PPTP Attributes
When required, the system supports Point to Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP). PPTP must be
enabled and values for the PPTP server IP address, Id and password must be entered and a
server name may be entered.
404
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.5.37 PPP Attributes for eMG – PGM 205
Selecting PPP Attributes will display the PPP Attributes data entry page. Use the check mark to
indicate which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save] button.
Figure 4.4.5.37-1 PPP Attributes
In addition to remote access via an IP network connection, the system database may be
accessed remotely via an ISDN connection. Placing a call over an ISDN Line to the designated
PPP Station will provide a connection to the system database. The system will request a user id
and password, which must match one of the User Ids and passwords assigned. After a matching
id and password are received, the iPECS Login Home page is provided.
Table 4.4.5.37-1 PPP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
User ID 1
User Password 1
The System accepts this PPP ID 1 as valid.
The password entered is used to authorize PPP ID 1.
User ID 2
The System accepts this PPP ID 2 as valid.
User Password 2
PPP Server IP
Addr
The password entered is used to authorize PPP ID 2.
When configured, the PPP Server IP Address must match
this entry. To apply this option the system must be restarted.
When configured, the PPP Client IP Address must match
PPP Client IP Addr
this entry. To apply this option the system must be restarted.
405
RANGE
DEFAULT
Max. 12 characters
Max. 12 characters
likppp01
Ipkts01
Max. 12 characters
likppp02
Max. 12 characters
Ipkts02
IP Address
IP Address
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.6 Station Group Data
Selecting the Station Group Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in the left frame
as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4.4.6-1 Station Group Data
Stations can be grouped so that incoming calls will search (Station) for an idle station in the group.
The system allows assignment of three Station processes, Circular, Terminal and ACD. In
addition, there are eight (8) functional groups available: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) based
on ACD station, Ring, Call Pick-Up, External Voice Mail (SLT connected), VSF-Voice Mail, iPECS
Feature Server Voice Mail and Network Voice Mail, and UCS Groups.
Certain types of groups can incorporate announcements, which are given to the calling party. The
system‘s VSF can store up to two hundreds (200) announcements for use with Station Groups.
Note that a station can belong to multiple groups if the groups are all of the same type. Also note
that when a station group is assigned to a group type (Circular, Terminal, ACD, VM, FS VM, VSFVM, Net VM, UCS and Ring), the group attributes are initialized to the default values.
406
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.6.1 Station Group Overview
Selecting the Station Group Overview item will return the Station Group Overview page. This
page displays the Station Group attributes (type, pick-up attribute, Member list, and Group name)
for all the Station Groups.
Figure 4.4.6.1-1 Station Group Overview
All information of each group will be displayed and changed the assignment on this page.
Each Group can be assigned Type, Pickup attributes, Member list, and Group name by clicking
“Go to Assignment” on this page. Station Group Assignment (190) will be displayed and directly
go to Station Group Attributes (191) of the group by clicking “Go to Attributes”.
407
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.6.2 Station Group Assignment - PGM 190
Selecting Station Group Assignment will display the Station Group data entry page. Enter the
desired Station Group number and click [Load] to display the Group Assignment.
Figure 4.4.6.2-1 Station Group Assignments
Under Station Group Assignments the type, members and Pick-Up attributes are assigned to the
Station Group. Note for the Net VM group, the network number must be assigned as the Net VM
group member station.
Table 4.4.6.2-1 STATION GROUP ASSIGNMENT
ATTRIBUTE
Group Type
Pick-up Attribute
Member
− DESCRIPTION
Defines the type of station group.
Stations can pick-up group calls ringing at other
stations in the group. This does not apply to the VM
groups.
Assigns stations as members of a station group or, for
the Net VM group type, defines the Net Number of the
group.
408
RANGE
DEFAULT
N/A,
Circular,
Terminal,
ACD,
Ring,
Voice Mail,
Pick-Up,
VSF-VM,
UMS VM,
NET VM,
UCS
N/A
OFF
ON
OFF
-
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.6.3 Station Group Attributes - PGM 191
Selecting Station Group Attributes will display the Station Group Attributes data entry page. Enter
the Station Group number and click [Load], the Web page for the selected group will be
displayed as in Figure 4.4.6.3-1 to Figure 4.4.6.3-8 based on the Group type.
Each type of group has a different set of available attributes relating to announcements, timers,
overflow, etc. Table 4.4.6.3-1 through Table 4.4.6.3-8 provides descriptions for the attributes and
data entries required. Note that the attributes for the Circular and Terminal Station groups are
given in Table 4.4.6.3-1 and the UCD attributes include the ACD functions Table 4.4.6.3-2.
Figure 4.4.6.3-1 Terminal & Circular Group Attributes
Table 4.4.6.3-1 TERMINAL & CIRCULAR GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
− DESCRIPTION
If all stations in the group are busy when a call is offered,
the call may continue to wait (queue) for an available
station. If the queue period exceeds the VSF Announce 1
VSF Announce 1 Timer timer, the call is sent to a VSF announcement. If the
timer is set to 000, the call will receive the first
announcement, in full, prior to the station process
(guaranteed announcement).
When a call assigned to receive a guaranteed
Guar-Annc(Timer 0)
announcement arrives and all channels are busy, the call
Wait If Busy
may wait with Ring back until a channel is available (ON)
or bypass the announcement (OFF).
409
RANGE
DEFAULT
000~999
(seconds)
015
OFF
ON
ON
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.6.3-1 TERMINAL & CIRCULAR GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
− DESCRIPTION
After the 1st announcement, the 2nd ANNC TMR is
activated. At expiration, if the call remains queued to the
VSF Announce 2 Timer
group, the call is sent to the assigned 2nd VSF
announcement.
The Station Group can be assigned an announcement,
which is played if the call remains queued beyond the
VSF Announce 1
VSF Announce 1 Timer duration. The announcement
Location
location is the VSF Announcement number. An entry of
00 indicates no announcement.
VSF Announce 1 Auto If this attribute is selected, the call will drop after the 1st
Drop
VSF announcement.
The Station Group can be assigned a 2nd
announcement, which is played if the call remains
VSF Announce 2
queued beyond the VSF Announce 2 Timer duration.
Location
The announcement location is the VSF Announcement
number. An entry of 00 indicates no announcement.
VSF Announce 2 Auto If this attribute is selected, the call will drop after the 2nd
Drop
VSF announcement.
The 2nd announcement can be repeated to callers that
VSF Announce 2
remain in queue at intervals of the Announcement 2
Repeat Timer
Repeat Timer. Note VSF Announce 2 Repeat below
must be “ON”.
After the 2nd announcement, if the call remains queued
VSF Announce 2
to the group, the 2nd VSF announcement can be
Repeat
repeated at the Announce 2 Repeat Timer interval,
defined above.
Overflow Destination
Overflow Timer
Wrap-Up Timer
No Answer Timer
Pilot Station Group
REPT No Member
Music Source
RANGE
DEFAULT
000~999
(seconds)
000
00~200
00: none
Check box
00~200
00: none
Check box
000~999
(seconds)
000
OFF
ON
OFF
STA/NET or
A call to the group will continue to route through the
Station Group/
group until answered or all group members have been
VSF
tried. The call will remain at the last station or route to the
Announcement/
assigned overflow destination. If VSF Announcement is
Auto Drop/
selected, Auto Drop can be checked.
System SPD
A call to the group will remain at the last station in the
000~600
180
group or can be sent to the assigned Overflow
(seconds)
Destination after expiration of the Overflow Timer.
After terminating a group call, a Group member will be
000~999
002
maintained in a busy state for the duration of the Wrap(seconds)
Up timer.
Calls to a station in the group are directed to the station,
00~99
if unavailable or unanswered in the No Answer Timer,
15
(seconds)
the call can be routed based on the assigned hunt
process.
A circular/terminal Station group can be set so that only
OFF
ON
calls to the pilot number (station group number) will hunt.
ON
If a call is received and no members are on-duty, an ICM
OFF
call will return re-order tone, while a CO/IP call will be
OFF
ON
routed to the overflow destination.
A Music source can be assigned so that calls to the
Ring back tone/
Internal Music
group will receive audio from the assigned source in
Internal Music/
410
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.6.3-1 TERMINAL & CIRCULAR GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
− DESCRIPTION
place of ring-back tone.
RANGE
DEFAULT
External Music/
VSF MOH/
SLT MOH1~5/
VSF MOH2~3
A member activating Call forward may be placed in an
OFF
unavailable state for Station group calls (ON). When
Allow Forward Member
ON
OFF, group calls are sent to the member as normal
(OFF).
When a call overflows or routes to the VM group, a
Mailbox Message Wait
Station Number
station number is used to identify the Mailbox for the
Station
group messages.
The password associated with a group Mailbox is defined
Mailbox Password
here. The password is used in conjunction with the group Max. 12 digits
Mailbox as with a normal station.
STA./NET or
Calls to a Station group may forward directly to a defined Station group/
Forced Forward
destination, bypassing the hunt process. “Forced
VSF
Destination
Forward”, below, must be enabled.
Announcement/
Sys. Speed
Calls to a Station group may forward directly to a defined
Forced Forward
OFF
destination, see above “Forced Forward Destination”
Destination Usage
ON
when Forced Forward is enabled for the group.
Max. 12
Group Name
A name can be designated for the group.
characters
When the number of calls queued to the group match
Maximum Queued Call this parameter, new calls will receive error tone and be
00-99
disconnected after the VSF Announcement 1, if
Counter
assigned, is played.
411
ON
OFF
99
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Figure 4.4.6.3-2 ACD Group Attributes
Table 4.4.6.3-2 ACD GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
If all stations in the group are busy when a call is
offered, the call may continue to wait (queue) for an
available station. If the queue period exceeds the VSF
VSF Announce 1
Announce 1 Timer, the call is sent to a VSF
Timer
announcement. If the timer is set to 000, the call will
receive the first announcement, in full, prior to the hunt
process (guaranteed announcement).
When a call assigned to receive a guaranteed
Guar-Annc (Timer 0) announcement arrives and all channels are busy, the
Wait If Busy
call may wait with Ring back until a channel is available
(ON) or bypass the announcement. (OFF)
After the 1st announcement, a 2nd timer is activated. At
VSF Announce 2
expiration, if the call remains queued to the group, the
Timer
call is sent to the assigned 2nd VSF announcement.
Each Station Group can be assigned an announcement,
which is played if the call remains queued beyond the
VSF Announce 1
VSF Announce 1 Timer duration. The announcement
Location
location is a VSF announcement number. An entry of 00
indicates no announcement.
412
RANGE
DEFAULT
000~999
(seconds)
015
OFF
ON
ON
000~999
(seconds)
000
00~200
00: none
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.6.3-2 ACD GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
VSF Announce 1
Auto Drop
VSF Announce 2
Location
VSF Announce 2
Auto Drop
VSF Announce 2
Repeat Timer
VSF Announce 2
Repeat
DESCRIPTION
If this attribute is selected, the call will drop after the 1st
VSF announcement
The Station Group can be assigned a 2nd
announcement, which is played if the call remains
queued beyond the VSF Announce 2 Timer duration.
The announcement location is a VSF announcement
number. An entry of 00 indicates no announcement.
If this attribute is selected, the call will drop after the 2nd
VSF announcement
The 2nd announcement can be repeated to calls that
remain in queue at intervals of the VSF Announce 2
Repeat Timer. Note repeating must be “ON” under VSF
Announce 2 Repeat below.
After the 2nd announcement, if the call remains queued
to the group, the 2nd VSF announcement can be
repeated at the VSF Announce 2 Repeat Timer interval.
A call to the group will continue to route through the
group until answered or all group members have been
Overflow Destination tried. The call will queue to the group or route to the
assigned Overflow Destination. If VSF Announce is
assigned, Auto Drop is available.
Overflow Timer
Wrap-Up Timer
ACD No Answer
Timer
REPT No Member
Music Source
A call to a group will remain queued to the group or be
sent to the assigned Overflow Destination after
expiration of the Overflow Timer
After terminating a group call, a Station Group member
will be maintained in a busy state for the duration of the
Wrap-Up timer.
Calls to an agent in the group are directed to the
station, if unanswered in the NO ANSWER TIMER, the
call can be routed another agent
If a call is received and no members are on-duty, an
ICM call will return re-order tone, while a CO/IP call will
be routed to the overflow destination.
A Music source can be assigned so that calls to the
group will receive audio from the assigned source in
place of ring-back tone while in queue.
An ACD supervisor can monitor agent conversations. A
warning tone can be provided to the agent and
ACD Warning Tone
connected party when the supervisor activates the
monitor feature.
When a call comes into the group and there are no
Alternate Destination group members available, the call will be routed to the
assigned Alternate Destination.
413
RANGE
DEFAULT
00~200
00: none
000~999
(seconds)
000
OFF
ON
OFF
STA/NET or Station
Group/
VSF
Announcement/
Auto Drop/
System SPD
000~600
(seconds)
180
000~999
(seconds)
002
00-99
(seconds)
00
OFF
ON
OFF
Ring back tone/
Internal Music/
External Music/
VSF MOH/
SLT MOH1~5/
VSF MOH2~3
Internal Music
OFF
ON
OFF
STA/NET or Station
Group,
System SPD
....
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.6.3-2 ACD GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Supervisor Timer
Supervisor Call
Count
Maximum Queued
Call Counter
Supervisor 1 to 5
ACD DND Wrap
Timer
Entered Caller ID
ICLID Usage
Forward Member
Calls
Group Name
DESCRIPTION
When calls have been in queue longer than the
Supervisor Timer, the ACD supervisor is notified by a
display of the longest queue time.
When the number of calls in queue exceeds the
Supervisor Call Count, the ACD Supervisor is notified
by a display of queued calls.
When the number of calls queued to the group match
this parameter, new calls will receive error tone and be
disconnected after the VSF Announcement 1, if
assigned, is played.
Any valid iPECS IP or LDP Phone with display can be
assigned as a Supervisor, max. 5 ACD Supervisors.
This parameter sets the duration a station will receive
ring before the system places the station in ACD DND
and unavailable for group calls. A setting of ‘00’
disables automatic ACD DND.
Within 5 seconds of a guaranteed announcement, the
caller may dial digits as an ICLID. The user-dialed digits
are compared to the ICLID Table entries, for routing or,
for a single dialed digit, to the ACD CCR table below.
A member activating Call Forward may be placed in an
unavailable state for Station group calls (ON). When
OFF, group calls are sent to the member as normal.
An ACD group name can be designated.
RANGE
DEFAULT
000~999
(seconds)
030
00~99
00
00-99
99
Station
002~200
(Sec.)
010
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF : no FWD
ON : FWD
ON
Max. 12 characters
CIQ Route 1
CIQ Route 2
CIQ Route 3
CIQ Route 4
CIQ Route 5
CIQ Route 6
CIQ Route 7
CIQ Route 8
CIQ Route 9
When an ACD call is queued, the caller may be allowed
to dial a digit to exit the queue and route to another
destination. The alternate destination is based on the
user-dialed digit and can be a station, Station group,
system-speed bin, or network station. Dial the digit
below for the type of destination and enter the value
associated with the destination.
1: Enter a station number.
2: Enter a Station group number.
3: Enter a system speed bin.
4: Enter a network station number
Not selected
CIQ Route 0
ZAP Tone
CIQ Announcement
Mailbox Message
Wait Station
Mailbox Password
Agents using a headset can have ACD calls connected
to them automatically preceded by a tone (Zap tone).
If enabled, queued callers receive the CIQ message
st
nd
(You are # in queue) after the 1 and 2
announcement.
When an ACD call overflows or routes to the VM group,
a station number is used to identify the Mailbox for the
ACD group messages
The password associated with an ACD group Mailbox is
defined here. The password is used in conjunction with
the ACD group Mailbox as with a normal station.
414
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Station number
Max. 12 digits
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.6.3-2 ACD GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
RANGE
DEFAULT
OFF
ON
OFF
00-99
10
00-200
0
eMG80:00~15 or
00-40/
eMG800:0~105/
UCP:0~105
00
Delay timer for CIQ #1 Announcement
000-180
015
Interval for repeating the CIQ #1 Announcement.
000-180
045
CIQ #2 Page Alert Threshold
If the queued call count exceeds the threshold, the
system plays the CIQ #2 Announcement to the CIQ #2
Page Zone after the CIQ #2 Announcement Delay
Timer. The announcement is repeated at intervals of the
CIQ #2 Announcement Repeat Timer.
00-99
20
CIQ #2 Page Alert Announcement
Location
VSF announcement number for the CIQ #2
Announcement.
00-200
0
eMG80:00~15 or
00-40/
eMG800:0~105/
UCP:0~105
00
Delay timer for CIQ #2 Announcement
000-180
015
Interval for repeating the CIQ #2 Announcement.
000-180
025
CIQ #3 Page Alert Threshold
If the queued call count exceeds the threshold, the
system plays the CIQ #3 Announcement to the CIQ #3
Page Zone after the CIQ #3 Announcement Delay
Timer. The announcement is repeated at intervals of the
CIQ #3 Announcement Repeat Timer.
00-99
30
CIQ #3 Page Alert Announcement
Location
VSF announcement number for the CIQ #3
Announcement.
00-200
0
eMG80:00~15 or
00-40/
eMG800:0~105
UCP:0~105
00
000-180
015
CIQ Display To
Agent - Mode
CIQ #1 Page Alert Threshold
CIQ #1 Page Alert –
Announcement
Location
CIQ #1 Page Alert –
Page Zone
CIQ #1 Page Alert Delay Time
CIQ #1 Page Alert Repeat Time
CIQ #2 Page Alert –
Page Zone
CIQ #2 Page Alert Delay Time
CIQ #2 Page Alert Repeat Time
DESCRIPTION
When an ACD call is in queue, the Call in queue
information is displayed in the LCD of agent and
supervisor phones.
If the queued call count exceeds the threshold, the
system plays the CIQ #1 Announcement to the CIQ #1
Page Zone after the CIQ #1 Announcement Delay
Timer. The announcement is repeated at intervals of the
CIQ #1 Announcement Repeat Timer.
VSF announcement number for the CIQ #1
Announcement.
Page Zone to receive CIQ #1 Announcement.
Page Zone to receive CIQ #2 Announcement.
CIQ #3 Page Alert Page
Zone
Page Zone to receive the CIQ #3 Announcement.
CIQ #3 Page Alert Delay Time
Delay timer for the CIQ #3 Announcement
415
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.6.3-2 ACD GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
005
CIQ #3 Page Alert Repeat Time
Interval for repeating the CIQ #3 Announcement.
000-180
Forced Forward
Destination
Calls to a Station group may forward directly to a
defined destination, by passing the hunt process.
“Forced Forward”, below, must be enabled.
STA./NET or
Station group,
VSF
Announcement,
Sys. Speed
Calls to a Station group may forward directly to a
Forced Forward Dest defined destination, see above “Forced Forward
OFF
Usage
Destination” when Forced Forward is enabled for the
ON
group.
Reference table of Auto Ring Mode Table Time for ACD
Manual Change/
Group Ring Mode. When Manual Change is selected,
Auto Ring Mode
the Group supervisor can change the ACD group ring
eMG: Table 0 ~ 15
mode manually with ACD Group Ring Mode flexible
UCP: Table 0 ~ 100
number.
Day Destination
Night Destination
Timed Destination
OFF
Manual
Change
Normal Service,
STA/NET or Station
When the ACD Ring Mode Table schedule is in the Day
group,
mode, ACD group calls route to the destination defined
VSF
here.
Announcement,
Sys. Speed
Normal
Service
When the ACD Ring Mode Table schedule is in the
Night mode, ACD group calls route to the destination
defined here.
Normal Service,
STA/NET or Station
group,
VSF
Announcement,
Sys. Speed
Normal
Service
When the ACD Ring Mode Table schedule is in the
Timed mode, ACD group calls route to the destination
defined here.
Normal Service,
STA/NET or Station
group,
VSF
Announcement,
Sys. Speed
Normal
Service
OFF
ON (RING and
LED)
ON (LED only)
OFF
If there are queued group calls, the queuing indication
ACD Group Queuing
can be served to group members by Mute Ring and
Call Indication
LED button flashing.
416
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Figure 4.4.6.3-3 Ring Group Attributes
Table 4.4.6.3-3 RING GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
VSF Announce 1
Timer
Guar-Ann(Timer 0)
Wait If Busy
VSF Announce 2
Timer
VSF Announce 1
Location
DESCRIPTION
If all stations in the group are busy when a call is offered,
the call may continue to wait (queue) for an available
station. If the queue period exceeds the VSF Announce 1
Timer, the call is sent to a VSF announcement. If the timer
is set to 000, the call will receive the first announcement,
in full, prior to the hunt process (guaranteed
announcement).
When a call assigned to receive a guaranteed
announcement arrives and all channels are busy, the call
may wait with Ring back until a channel is available (ON)
or bypass the announcement. (OFF)
After the 1st announcement, a 2nd announcement Timer
is activated. At expiration, if the call remains queued to the
group, the call is sent to the assigned 2nd VSF
announcement.
Each Ring Group can be assigned an announcement,
which is played if the call remains queued beyond the VSF
Announce 1 Timer duration. The announcement location is
a VSF Announcement number. An entry of 00 indicates no
announcement.
417
RANGE
DEFAULT
000~999
(seconds)
015
OFF
ON
ON
000~999
(seconds)
000
00~200
00: none
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.6.3-3 RING GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
VSF Announce 1
Auto Drop
If this attribute is selected, the call will drop after the 1st
VSF announcement.
The Ring Group can be assigned a 2nd announcement,
which is played if the call remains queued beyond the VSF
VSF Announce 2
Announce 2 Timer duration. The announcement location is
Location
a VSF Announcement number. An entry of 00 indicates no
announcement.
VSF announce Auto If this attribute is selected, the call will drop after the 2nd
Drop
VSF announcement
The 2nd announcement can be repeated to calls that
VSF Announce 2
remain in queue at intervals of the VSF Announce 2
Repeat Timer. Note VSF Announce 2 Repeat below must
Repeat Timer
be “ON”.
After the 2nd announcement, if the call remains queued to
VSF Announce 2
the group, the 2nd VSF announcement can be repeated at
the VSF Announce 2 Repeat Timer interval, defined
Repeat
above.
A call to the group will continue to ring group member
stations until answered. The call will remain at the last
Overflow Destination
station or routes to the assigned Overflow Destination. If
VSF Announce is assigned, Auto Drop is available.
Overflow Timer
Wrap-Up Timer
Music Source
Maximum Queued
Call Counter
Allow Forward
Member
Group name
Mailbox Message
Wait Station
Mailbox Password
Forced Forward
A call to a group will remain in the group or route to the
assigned Overflow Destination after expiration of the
Overflow Timer.
After terminating group call, a Station Group member will
be maintained in a busy state for the duration of the WrapUp Timer.
A Music source can be assigned so that calls to the group
will receive audio from the assigned source in place of
ring-back tone.
RANGE
Check box
00~200
00: none
Check box
000~999
(seconds)
000
OFF
ON
OFF
STA/NET or Station
Group,
VSF Announcement,
Auto Drop,
System SPD
000~600
(seconds)
180
000~999
(seconds)
002
Ring back tone/
Internal Music/
External Music/
VSF MOH/
SLT MOH1~5/
VSF MOH2~3
Internal
Music
When the number of calls queued to the group match this
parameter, new calls will receive error tone and be
00-99
disconnected after the VSF AA announcement, if
assigned, is played.
A member activating Call Forward may be placed in an
OFF : no FWD
unavailable state for Station group calls (ON). When OFF,
ON : FWD
group calls are sent to the member as normal.
A group name can be designated.
Max.12 characters
When a call overflows or routes to the VM group, a station
number is used to identify the Mailbox for the group
Station number
messages.
The password associated with the group Mailbox is
Max. 12 digits
defined here. The password is used in conjunction with the
group Mailbox as with a normal station.
Calls to a Station group may forward directly to a defined
STA/NET or Station
418
DEFAULT
99
ON
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.6.3-3 RING GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Destination
Forced Forward
Dest Usage
Ring group
indication
DESCRIPTION
destination, bypassing the hunt process. “Forced
Forward”, below, must be enabled.
RANGE
DEFAULT
group,
VSF Announcement,
Sys. Speed
Calls to a Station group may forward directly to a defined
destination, see above “Forced Forward Destination” when
Forced Forward is enabled for the group.
When a station calls a Ring Group, DSS/BLF buttons
assigned for the calling station will flash and muted ring is
received.
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF,
Mute,
Burst
Mute
Figure 4.4.6.3-4 External Voice Mail Group Attributes
Table 4.4.6.3-4 EXTERNAL VOICE MAIL GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Wrap-Up Timer
Put Mail Index
Get Mail Index
Station Group Type
DESCRIPTION
After terminating a group call, the VM port will be
maintained in a busy state for the duration of the
Wrap-Up timer.
For external analog Voice Mail groups, an index to the
Voice Mail Dial Table that contains the “Put Mail” dial
code.
For external analog Voice Mail groups, an index to the
Voice Mail Dial Table that contains the “Get Mail” dial
code.
The type of Station Group process applied to the SLT
ports connected to the VM can be assigned as
Circular or Terminal.
419
RANGE
DEFAULT
000~900
(seconds)
002
1~4
1
1~4
2
Terminal/
Circular
Terminal
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.6.3-4 EXTERNAL VOICE MAIL GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Overflow Timer
A call to a group will remain at the last station in the
group or be sent to the assigned Overflow Destination
after expiration of the Overflow Time.
000~600
(seconds)
180
Overflow Destination
STA/NET or
A call to the group will continue to route through the
Station Group,
group until answered or all group members have been
VSF
tried. The call will remain at the last station or will
Announcement,
route to the assigned Overflow Destination. If
Auto Drop,
assigned VSF Announce, Auto Drop is available.
System Speed
Forced Forward
Destination
Calls to a Station group may forward directly to a
defined destination, by passing the hunt process.
“Forced Forward”, below, must be enabled.
Forced Forward Dest
Usage
Calls to a Station group may forward directly to a
defined destination, see above “Forced Forward
Destination” when Forced Forward is enabled for the
group.
Group Name
A group name can be designated.
Server type
Server number
Member Type
When a third party SIP server is used for AA/VM, or
the IPCR or third party SIP recording server is used,
the server type must be selected.
Each IPCR and third party SIP server must be
assigned a server number from 01 ~ 10 which
correlates this group with an Agent table.
STA/NET or
Station group,
VSF
Announcement,
Sys. Speed
OFF
ON
OFF
Max. 12
character
IPCR/
3rd party
3rd party
eMG: 0-2
UPC:0-10
0
eMG80:0-140
Member type is assigned as SLT type or SIP Type. In eMG800:0-1200
case of SIP Type, enter the capacity from 1-140 for
UCP:0-2400
(SLT Type/ SIP
eMG80 & 1-1200 for eMG800 & 1-2400 for UCP.
Type)
420
-
SLT Type
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Figure 4.4.6.3-5 Pick-Up Group Attributes
Table 4.4.6.3-5 PICK-UP GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Auto Pick Up
All Ring
DESCRIPTION
If a group member is ringing, other members of
the Group can Pick-Up the ringing call by simply
going “Off-hook”.
When a call is offered to a member of the Pick-Up
Group in the Tone Ring mode, all members will
ring. Note Auto Pickup above must be “ON”.
421
RANGE
DEFAULT
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Figure 4.4.6.3-6 VSF Group Attributes
Table 4.4.6.3-6 VSF GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Retention Time (day)
Dial Time Out (sec)
Group Name
DESCRIPTION
When voice messages are stored in the VSF, the
system will maintain (store) the message for the
maximum number of days set in this program (0 to
99 days). (Not used)
This timer determines the inter-digit time for a
VSF-AA or a VM session. If this timer expires
while the VSF AA or VM is awaiting user input, the
system will assume the remote party has
disconnected and will return the channel to idle.
A group name can be designated.
422
RANGE
DEFAULT
00-99
(day)
0
00-99
(seconds)
15
Max. 12
characters
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Figure 4.4.6.3-7 iPECS Feature Server Voice Mail Group (UMS-VM) Attributes
Table 4.4.6.3-7 FEATURE SERVER VOICE MAIL GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
If all stations in the group are busy when a call is offered,
the call may continue to wait (queue) for an available FSVM channel. If the queue period exceeds the VSF
VSF Announce 1
Announce 1 Timer, the call is sent to a VSF
Timer
announcement. If the timer is set to 000, the call will
receive the first announcement, in full, prior to the station
process (guaranteed announcement).
After the 1st announcement, a 2nd Announcement Timer
VSF Announce 2
is activated. At expiration, if the call remains queued to
Timer
the group, the call is sent to the assigned VSF Announce
2 Location.
Each group can be assigned an announcement, which is
played if the call remains queued beyond the VSF
VSF Announce 1
Announce 1 Timer duration. The announcement location
Location
is a VSF Announcement number. An entry of 00 indicates
no announcement.
VSF Announce 1 Auto If this attribute is selected, the call will drop after the 1st
Drop
VSF announcement.
The Group can be assigned a 2nd announcement, which
VSF Announce 2
is played if the call remains queued beyond the VSF
Location
Announce 2 Timer duration. The announcement location
is a VSF Announcement number. An entry of 00 indicates
423
RANGE
DEFAULT
000~999
(seconds)
015
000~999
(seconds)
000
00~200
00: none
Check box
00~200
00: none
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.6.3-7 FEATURE SERVER VOICE MAIL GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
no announcement.
VSF Announce 2 Auto If this attribute is selected, the call will drop after the 2nd
Drop
VSF announcement.
The 2nd announcement can be repeated to calls that
VSF Announce 2
remain in queue at intervals of the announcement 2
Repeat Timer
repeat timer. Note VSF Announce 2 Repeat below must
be “ON”.
After the 2nd announcement, if the call remains queued
VSF Announce 2
to the group, the 2nd VSF announcement can be
Repeat
repeated at the VSF Announce Repeat timer interval,
above.
Overflow Destination
Overflow Timer
No Answer Timer
Pilot Station Group
Alternate Destination
Station Group type
Wrap-Up Timer
Check box
000~999
(seconds)
000
OFF
ON
OFF
STA/NET or
A call to the group will continue to route through the
Station group,
group until answered or all group members have been
VSF
tried. The call will remain at the last station or route to the
Announcement,
assigned Overflow Destination. If assigned VSF
Auto drop,
Announce, Auto Drop is available.
System Speed
A call to a group will remain at the last station in the
000~600
group or route to the assigned Overflow Destination after
(seconds)
expiration of the Overflow Timer.
Calls to a station in the group are directed to the station,
00~99
if unavailable or unanswered in the No Answer Timer, the
(seconds)
call can be routed based on the assigned hunt process.
A FS-VM Station group can be set so that only calls to
OFF
the pilot number (station group number) will hunt.
ON
When a call comes into the group and there are no group
STA/NET or
members available, the call will be routed to the assigned Station group,
Alternate Destination.
System SPD
The Station group process for the FS-VM group can be
Circular/
defined as Circular or Terminal.
Terminal
After terminating any call, the FS port will be maintained
000~999
in a busy state for the duration of the Wrap-Up Timer.
(seconds)
Forced Forward
Destination
Calls to a group may forward directly to a defined
destination, by passing the hunt process. “Forced
Forward”, below, must be enabled.
Forced Forward Dest
Usage
Calls to a Station group may forward directly to a defined
destination, see above “Forced Forward Destination”
when Forced Forward is enabled for the group.
Group Name
A group name can be designated.
424
180
15
ON
Circular
2
Sta./NET or
Station group,
VSF
announcement,
Sys. Speed
OFF
ON
Max. 12
characters
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Figure 4.4.6.3-8 iPECS UCS Server Group Attributes
Table 4.4.6.3-8 UCS GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
UC Server
DESCRIPTION
UCS Server number, this value must be set to 1.
425
RANGE
DEFAULT
00-16
1
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.6.4 Pick Up Group Overview
Selecting the Pick Up Group Overview item will return the Station Pick Up Group Overview page.
This page displays the Station Group member stations for all the Station Pick Up Groups. Note
that data cannot be entered on this page.
Figure 4.4.6.4-1 Pick Up Group Overview
426
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.6.5 Pick Up Group - PGM 192
Selecting Pick Up Group will display the Pick Up Group entry page. Enter the desired Pick Up
Group number and click [Load] to display the group member Assignment.
Enter Group Number: eMG80: 0-49 / eMG800: 0-199 / UCP: 0-199
Figure 4.4.6.5-1 Pick Up Group
Table 4.4.6.5-1 PICK UP GROUP ASSIGNMENT
ATTRIBUTE
Member
DESCRIPTION
Assign stations as members of the Pick-Up group.
427
RANGE
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.6.6 Personal Group Overview
Selecting Personal Group Overview displays the master station and member list for all the
personal groups.
Figure 4.4.6.6-1 Personal Group Overview
Clicking [Go to Assignment] goes to move Personal group (260) for assigning Master station &
Member Station and setting Personal group attributes directly.
428
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.6.7 Personal Group - PGM 260
Selecting Personal Group will display the Personal Group entry page. Enter a valid Personal
Group number and click load to enter group data.
Enter Group Number: eMG80: 1-70 / eMG800: 1-600 / UCP: 1-1200
Figure 4.4.6.7-1 Personal Group
Several stations can share same station number. That means Personal Group is extended
feature of Linked Pair.
A Personal Group is composed with a master station and several member stations.
A master station and all member stations share master station‘s number.
In case of Member station, each member station can be set the delay (Dly) time.
By using this shared number, almost features (Call To xxx / Call From xxx / SMDR / Message
Wait…) can be activated.
But, some features can be chosen by PGM 261 attribute about all station activating or individual
station working.
In PGM 260, Personal group master and member can be assigned.
In PGM 261, Personal group attribute can be set.
429
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.6.8 Personal Group Attribute - PGM 261
Selecting Personal Group Attribute will display the Personal Group Attribute entry page. Enter a
valid Personal Group number to enter the group data. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Enter Group Number: eMG80: 1-70 / eMG800: 1-600 / UCP: 1-1200
Figure 4.4.6.8-1 Personal Group Attributes
Table 4.4.6.8-1 PERSONAL GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Wake-Up
Call-Forward
Do-Not Disturb
Linked Pair Mode
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
If this value is set to Overall, all member wake-up
follow by master wake up.
Individual/
If this value is set to Individual, individual wake-up
Overall
is worked by each station.
If this value is set to Overall, call forward setting
affect to Master and all members.
Individual/
If this value is set to Individual, individual Call
Overall
Forward is worked by each station.
If this value is set to Overall, DND setting affect to
Master and all members.
Individual/
If this value is set to Individual, individual DND is
Overall
worked by each station.
If this value is set to ON, Master and Member
OFF(Cover Ring)/
Stations are linked and only one station can be
ON(Cover Ring
activated.
and State Sync.)
430
DEFAULT
Individual
Overall
Individual
OFF(Cover
Ring)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.7 ISDN Line Data
Selecting the ISDN Line Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in the left frame as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 4.4.7-1 ISDN Line Data
Each ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) Line provides digital services to the end-user.
Basic Rate Lines have three (3) channels, 2 B channels and a D channel. The 2 B channels
provide 64 Kbps each, a total of 128 Kbps for “Bearer” or voice channels. The D channel provides
a 16 Kbps signaling channel. Primary Rate Lines have 23/30 64 Kbps ‘B’ channels and 1/2 64
Kbps signaling channels. For proper operation, entries are required for various attributes and
Tables to match the ISDN circuit and services.
431
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.7.1 ISDN Attributes - PGM 200
Selecting ISDN Attributes will display the ISDN Attributes data entry page. Click [Save] button
after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.7.1-1 ISDN Attributes
ISDN attributes define several characteristics of the ISDN interface. ISDN call cost services
(Advice of Charge), CLI modification, voice encoding, and other characteristics of the interface
are defined, refer to the following table.
Table 4.4.7.1-1 ISDN ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
CO ATD Code
CLI Print To Serial
Display DID
Information
DESCRIPTION
When the system is set to send the station number with
ISDN CLIP or COLP, either the station number or this ATD
code will be sent based on Common Attributes section,
EXT or ATD assignment.
The ISDN Calling Line Id may be included in call records,
refer to SMDR Attributes section.
Display DID digit information on LCD and print it to serial
port.
432
RANGE
DEFAULT
Max.2 Digits
OFF/
ON
OFF/
ON
OFF
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.7.2 CLIP/COLP Table - PGM 201
Selecting CLIP/COLP Table will display the CLIP/COLP Table Attributes data entry page. Click
[Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.7.2-1 CLIP/COLP Table
Normally, the system will send the primary Directory Number of the ISDN Line in the ISDN call
SETUP and CONNECT messages to identify the caller (CLIP) or the answering (COLP) party
respectively. Under certain circumstances, it may be desirable to provide the secondary or DID
number for the ISDN Line. In these cases, the CLIP/COLP Table may be used to define the digits
sent. The number sent is selected based on the index assigned for the CO/IP Line under
‘CID/CPN Attributes section’.
The CLI Station Number is sent in place of the station number. For all other entries, the station
number is sent as a suffix to the number in the Table. Note that this number is sent only if
CLIR/COLR is disabled under the CLIR Service and COLR Service assignments in the Station
ISDN Attributes.
Setting CID Password directly
You can set the CID password to click “Go to Setting” button. After clicking it, you will move to the
following PGM 162 and set the CID password, and then save CID password to mark tick on the
save box and click the Save button.
433
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.7.3 MSN Table - PGM 202
Selecting MSN Table will display the MSN Table data entry page. For convenience, the copy,
paste, and drag is available to enter or modify data. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Enter Index Range: eMG80: 1-500 / eMG800: 1-1500 / UCP: 1-2400
Figure 4.4.7.3-1 MSN Tables
When an ISDN Line assigned for DID operation receives an incoming call, the call will be routed
to a station based on the Flexible DID Table Index assigned in the MSN Table. Each iPECS
configuration has a different capacity as indicated by the entry range in the following table.
Table 4.4.7.3-1 MSN TABLE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
CO Line Range
DESCRIPTION
Enter the CO Line Range.
Index of Flexible DID Table Index to the Flexible DID Table.
Called Telephone Number
RANGE
DEFAULT
eMG80:1-74
eMG800:1-600
UCP:1-998
None
0~9999
None
When the received MSN number matches this entry,
Max. 23 Digits
the call is routed based on the DID Table index entered
(Include * and #)
above.
434
None
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.7.4 ICLID Route Table - PGM 203
Selecting ICLID Route Table will display the ICLID Route Table data entry page. Click [Save]
button after changing field.
Figure 4.4.7.4-1 ICLID Route Table
The system can employ ICLID (Incoming Calling Line Id) to determine the routing of incoming
external calls. Each CO/IP Line, including DID Lines and ACD group calls may be assigned to
employ ICLID routing. The system will compare the received ICLID to entries in the ICLID Route
Table and, if a match is found, will route the call to the destination defined in the ICLID Ring
Assignment Table index assigned here.
Table 4.4.7.4-1 ICLID ROUTE TABLE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
ICLID Ring Assign Index
Caller Telephone
Number
Caller Name
Ring Tone
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Index to the ICLID Ring Assignment Table that
determines the call routing.
ICLID (Incoming Caller Id) to match for the index. If the
Caller Id matches the Table entry, the index is used to
select the route.
ICLID name that is sent by the system to the
destination for the ICLID routed call.
If the received Caller Id matches the Caller Telephone
Number, the Ring tone selected here is employed for
the call alerting.
eMG: 001~250
UCP: 001~500
None
24 Digits
None
12 characters
None
01 ~ 16
Ring Tone
435
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.7.5 ICLID Ring Assignment Table - PGM 204
Selecting ICLID Ring Assignment Table will display the ICLID Ring Assignment Table data entry
page. The station number starts 100 for eMG80 and 1000 for eMG800/UCP. Click [Save] button
after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.7.5-1 ICLID Ring Assignment Table
If the Incoming Caller ID matches an entry in the ICLID Route Table, the index from the Table is
used to determine the call routing from the ICLID Ring Assignment Table. Separate ring
assignments are made for Day, Night, and Timed Ring mode for each index, 001 to 250, in this
table. When assigned to ring to a VSF announcement, the call can be automatically dropped after
the announcement by entering ‘#’ after the announcement number.
When CO Lines are programmed to Ring an external AA/VM, VSF or Feature Server Group as
an Automated Attendant, the Ring signal can be on an immediate or delayed basis allowing other
stations/groups to be assigned Ring and answer prior to signaling the AA. The delay is defined in
seconds from 00 to 30.
436
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.7.6 PPP Attributes for UCP - PGM 205
Selecting PPP Attributes will display the PPP Attributes data entry page. Use the check boxes to
indicate which attributes to define; data for checked attributes is stored for the entire range of
stations when saved. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.7.6-1 PPP Attributes
In addition to remote access via an IP network connection, the system database may be
accessed remotely via an ISDN connection. Placing a call over an ISDN Line to the designated
PPP Station will provide a connection to the system database. The system will request a user id
and password, which must match one of the User Ids and passwords assigned. After a matching
ID and password are received, iPECS Login Home page is provided.
Table 4.4.7.6-1 PPP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Station number
None
User ID 1
User Password 1
If the incoming capability is 64 Kbps unrestricted digital and
the called party number matches the PPP destination, the
system will automatically answer the call and request PPP
ID and password.
The System accepts this PPP ID 1 as valid.
The password entered is used to authorize PPP ID 1.
Max. 12 characters
Max. 12 characters
likppp01
Ipkts01
User ID 2
The System accepts this PPP ID 2 as valid.
Max. 12 characters
likppp02
Max. 12 characters
Ipkts02
PPP Destination
User Password 2
PPP Server IP
Addr
The password entered is used to authorize PPP ID 2.
When configured, the PPP Server IP Address must match
this entry. To apply this option the system must be restarted.
When configured, the PPP Client IP Address must match
PPP Client IP Addr
this entry. To apply this option the system must be restarted.
437
IP Address
IP Address
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.7.7 Prefix Dialing Table - PGM 206
Selecting ISDN Prefix Dialing Attributes will display the Prefix Dialing Table Attributes data entry
page. For convenience, the copy, paste, and drag is available to enter or modify data. Click [Save]
button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.7.7-1 Prefix Dialing Table Attributes
Prefix Dialing Table. With this table, three features can be supported.
1. Analog CO Call Charge with NPR metering.
2. SIP direct dialing with no wait inter-digit timer.
3. ISDN Prefix Call – ISDN en-block Dialing with Prefix Call Setup.
If first some digits (up to 8 digits) of outgoing dial number are matched with Prefix Code of each
table, this table can start work. By each Co-line (PGM 142 – F20), Table ID (0-6) can be set. This
table ID (PGM 142 – F20) is associated with PGM 206 – each table ID.
Table 4.4.7.7-1 Prefix dialing Table Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Prefix Code
Enter the Prefix code. (Max 8 digits)
Table ID
Enter Table ID (0-6). 0 means NOT used.
Min Digit
Max Digit
Select the minimum dial digits (00-30).
Select the maximum dial digits (00-30).
Number Of Type
Select Number of Type (0~6).
Unknown/International/National/Network
Spec/Subscriber/Abbreviated /Reserved.
438
RANGE
DEFAULT
Max. 8 Digits
(Include * and #)
0-6
0
00-30
00-30
0
0
Unknown/
International/
National/
Network spec/
Subscriber/
Abbreviated/
Reserved
Unknown
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.7.7-1 Prefix dialing Table Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Numbering Plan
Select Numbering Plan (0~6).
Unknown/ISDN/Data Numbering/Telex/National
Standard/Private /Reserved.
Sending Complete
Select Sending Complete option. (On/Off)
Call Charge Type
Call Charge Timer
Call Cost
Flat Rate
Call Charge Type (0~5).
Unknown/Local/Long
Distance/International/Mobile/reserved
Call Charge Timer can be assigned. By this timer
value Call Metering can be established.
Call Cost is calculated by CALL TIMER. (ex : timer is
1 min, cost is 000020, then after 3 minute call, total
call cost is calculated to 000060)
If Flat Rate is ON, Flat Rate is applied by CALL COST
per a call.
439
RANGE
Unknown/
ISDN Telephony/
Data numbering/
Telex/
National standard/
Private/
Reserved
ON/OFF
DEFAULT
Unknown
OFF
Unknown/
Local/
Long distance/
International/
Mobile/
Reserved
Unknown
000-999
0
000000-999999
000000
ON/OFF
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.7.8 ISDN Clock Priority for eMG800 - PGM 207
Selecting ISDN Clock Priority will display the ISDN Clock priority Attributes data entry page. Click
[Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.7.7-1 ISDN Clock Priority Attributes
Table 4.4.7.7-1 ISDN Clock Priority Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
Priority
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Clock priority if more than one ISDN boards are used
1-18
440
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.8 SIP Data
Selecting the SIP Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in the left frame as shown
in the following figure.
Figure 4.4.8-1 SIP Data
441
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.8.1 SIP Common (System based) Attributes - PGM 210
Selecting SIP Common Attributes will display the SIP System based Attributes data entry page.
The attributes are system based SIP server data that running on MPB/UCP. Click [Save] button
after changing Value.
DNS server address is where system can get IP address of external party that was written in
Name in system. Local UDP/TCP/TLS Port is MPB/UCP‘s SIP signaling port number.
‘Signal TLS Option’ is for the SIP signaling by TLS configuration.
‘SIP Status’ the status of is running of SIP server in MPB/UCP.
Figure 4.4.8.1-1 SIP Common Attributes
Check Message Send Timer – This is Keep Alive Message (OPTIONS) frequency from SIP
server (MPB/UCP) to SIP Phone. If a SIP Phone does not respond to system‘s Keep Alive
Message then system will make the status of SIP Phone to ‘disconnected’ in system.
Keep Alive Message (OPTIONS) programming for a SIP station is as below:
− Frequency: SIP Data / SIP Common Attributes (210) - Check Message Send Timer.
− Usage ON/OFF for a SIP Extension: SIP Data / SIP Phone Attributes (211) – Keep Alive
Usage.
− Retry Count: IP Data / SIP Phone Attributes (211) – Retry Count.
442
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.1-1 SIP Common Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Primary DNS
Address
Secondary DNS
Address
Local Server UDP
Port
Local Server TCP
Port
Local Server TLS
Port
Name Resolution Server.
System will be restarted after Save.
Name Resolution Server.
System will be restarted after Save.
SIP UDP signaling port.
System will be restarted after Save.
SIP TCP signaling port.
System will be restarted after Save.
SIP TLS signaling port.
System will be restarted after Save.
Check Message
Send Timer
Keep Alive (OPTIONS Message) sending frequency
DEFAULT
IP Address
(Max. 32 characters)
IP Address
(Max. 32 characters)
5060
5060
5061
0, 10 ~ 3600
(Sec.)
0: OFF
0
TLS1.0/
TLS1.2/
SSL3(Auto)
TLS1.0
RSA/ECC
RSA
SIP signaling TLS encryption primary key method.
System will be restarted after Save.
None/
ARIA-128/
AES-128/
ARIA-128-SHA2/
AES-128-SHA2/
AES-256-SHA2(RSA)
None
SIP signaling TLS encryption secondary key method.
System will be restarted after Save.
None/
ARIA-128/
AES-128/
ARIA-128-SHA2/
AES-128-SHA2/
AES-256-SHA2(RSA)
None
Signal TLS option
TLS Version
Crypt Mode
First TLS
Second TLS
Persistent Level
Capacity Level
TLS version.
TLS1.0: TLS1.0 is used for TLS connection.
TLS1.2: TLS1.2 is used for TLS connection.
SSL3(Auto) : TLS1.0 or TLS1.2 is used – auto
negotiation
System will be restarted after Save.
TLS Crypt Mode.
System will be restarted after Save.
TLS signaling path method
TRANSACTION : different path with INVITE, INFO,
MESSAGE
TRANSACTION_USER : same path with INVITE, INFO,
MESSAGE
System will be restarted after Save.
TLS session maintenance rate, maximum 70%.
System will be restarted after Save.
Connection Reuse
TLS session maintain or not.
(TLS)
The system supports two certification formats PrivacySystem Cert File
Enhanced Electronic Mail (PEM) or Distinguished
Format
Encoding Rules (DER).
System Cert Key
Password to encrypt private key.
password
443
TRANSACTION/
TRANSACTI
TRANSACTION_USE
ON_USER
R
0 - 100
70
OFF
ON
ON
PEM(Normal)
DER (Normal)
PEM
(Normal)
Max. 16 characters
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.1-1 SIP Common Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
TLS Security
Change password that is used to encrypt TLS
certification periodically.
SRTP Security
Allow only SRTP call (blocking none SRTP call).
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
DEFAULT
OFF
OFF
SIP Message blocking option
ON: Discard SIP Request (INVITE, REGISTER, NOTIFY,
OPTIONS, MESSAGE …) if VIA IP and From IP are
neither the server IP nor SIP Extension IP.
ALLOW: proceed REGISTER from remote site.
Remote Register DENY: Discard all remote REGISTER.
(It is applied with IP AUTH USAGE ON)
Time interval to check invalid remote REGISTER
REGISTER Check
flooding. (It is applied with IP AUTH USAGE ON and
Time
Remote REGISTER ALLOW)
IP AUTH USAGE
REGISTER
Threshold
REGISTER Lock
Time
Threshold value to decide if it is invalid remote
REGISTER flooding. (It is applied with IP AUTH USAGE
ON and Remote REGISTER ALLOW)
Time interval to discard remote REGISTER if it is
REGISTER flooding state. (It is applied with IP AUTH
USAGE ON and Remote REGISTER ALLOW)
OFF
ON
ON
ALLOW/
DENY
ALLOW
0~3600
(Sec.)
0
0~60000
0
0~250
(Min.)
0
SIP SMS Option
SMS Domain
SMS request URI
SMS Mode
Domain Name used for sending SIP SMS
Request URI for sending SIP SMS.
This is only for Korea telecom.
Assign SMS mode(normal or external)
This is only for Korea telecom.
Max. 32 characters
Max. 32 characters
1549
Normal,
External
Normal
SIP FAX Option
Start w/ G.711
Fax
G.711 Fax
method
T38 FAX
Failover(711)
G711 Fax path through Mode. G711 will be negotiated
OFF
as voice path and Fax will send this voice path.
ON
G711 Fax Mode. VBD – VBD codec attribute will be
711A/711U/711A(VBD)
added in SDP.
.711U(VBD)
When T38 Negotiation is failed, G711 Codec will be used
OFF
for Fax Transmission.
ON
OFF
711A
OFF
Miscellaneous Option
OCS Prefix Code
SIP Pound Use
BLF SYNC
NOTIFY Timer
When the server type assigned for a SIP Trunk is OCS,
the system will send these digits as a prefix to the
number in the SIP “To:” header.
SIP employs Enblock dialing where the user dials all
digits before they are sent to the carrier for processing.
When the user completes dialing of a SIP call, ‘#’ is used
to indicate end of dialing. If users must be able to dial ‘#’,
SIP Pound Use can be disabled and the system will
automatically send digits at expiration of the inter-digit
time.
When the system reboots, the button LEDs of SIP
phones may indicate erroneous status. To display proper
status LEDs, the system sends a Notify message to
444
Max. 8 Digits
OFF
ON
OFF
10-360
10
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.1-1 SIP Common Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
VOIM RELAY or
DIRECT
VOIM
RELAY
OFF
ON
OFF
503/
486
503
DSCP/
TOS
TOS
0~63
0
0~7
5
0~63
0
0~7
5
synchronize the LED states at expiration of this timer.
SRTP
PATH(SIPEXT)
DNS SRV Usage
Out OF Rsc
Response
Error Code For
Trunk Rerouting
For SIP extensions connected to the same LAN as the
system, the SRTP path can be established through a
VoIP channel (Packet Relay) or directly between the
end-points.
The system can be configured to query the DNS for the
SRV resource record, which defines domains for various
services.
When the system has no resources available for the SIP
Request, the system will respond with this code.
If iPECS system receives this Error Code in response to
a request, the call will be rerouted. The semi-colon (;) is
used to separate multiple SIP message codes.
SIP QOS Option
SIP QOS Method
Selection
SIP Signal DSCP
value
SIP Signal TOS
value
RTP DSCP value
RTP TOS value
For SIP messages, the system can employ Diff Serv or
TOS to implement QoS.
When Diff Serv is selected as the QoS method, the
DSCP value for SIP signaling messages is defined.
When TOS is selected as the QoS method, the TOS
value for SIP signaling messages is defined.
When DSCP is selected as the QoS method, the DSCP
value for RTP packets is defined.
When TOS is selected as the QoS method, the TOS
value for RTP packets is defined.
SIP T-NET Option
Korea Telecom only, when employing an iPECS system
as the CM, iPECS system will require a Prefix to set-up a
SIP trunk call.
Korea Telecom only, enables the Prefix method for
CM Prefix Method processing a call with a SIP trunk through iPECS
system.
CM Prefix
Max. 4 Digits
Normal,
With prefix
Normal
20~3600
60
1~20
1
20~3600
20
OFF/ON
OFF
SIP Trunk Register Option
Register Retry
Timer
Option Check
number
Option Check
Interval
When registration fails, iPECS system attempts to
register periodically at intervals of this timer.
Korea Telecom only, a SIP Options message is used for
redundancy. If the system does not respond to the
Option message after the number of attempts, the
redundant server becomes active
Korea Telecom only, a SIP Options message is used for
redundancy. The Option message is sent at intervals of
this timer.
SIP Alarm Server Option
Alarm Server
Usage
Alarm Server
Address
If this value is changed, all WTIB will restart.
Enter the alarm server address up to 32 characters.
Alarm Server UDP Default UDP port for Alarm server.
Max. 32 characters
Port
445
5060
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.1-1 SIP Common Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
OFF/
ON
OFF
OFF/
ON
OFF
0~1
0
Port
Alarm Server
Check Usage
Terminal State
Announcement
600BE Channels
for Alarm
If IPECS doesn’t receive reply for this option 3
consecutive times, will not send Message and
Information to Alarm server. PGM 210 check message
send timer.
Information (Terminal state) is sent to Alarm server if this
value is ON, not sent to Alarm server if this value is OFF.
The number of 600BE channels reserved for Alarm SMS.
4.4.8.2 SIP Trunk Status Overview
Selecting SIP Trunk Status Overview displays the overview page. The page displays the Proxy,
Domain, etc. for the SIP Trunks configured in PGM 133.
Figure 4.4.8.2-1 SIP trunk status overview
446
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.8.3 SIP CO Attributes - PGM 133
Selecting SIP CO Attributes returns the SIP CO Attributes data input page. Enter the CO Range
and click [Load] to enter attribute values. Use the check mark to indicate which attributes to
modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save] button.
Enter CO Range: eMG80: 1-74 / eMG800: 1-600 / UCP: 1-998
Figure 4.4.8.3-1 SIP CO Attributes
Various parameters must be entered for proper operation of SIP Trunk including the SIP proxy
and Registrar as outlined in the following table.
Table 4.4.8.3-1 SIP CO ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Soft Switch Type
DESCRIPTION
Allows identification of soft-switch to support
extended soft-switch capabilities.
KT, SK TELINK, etc.: Service Provider.
447
RANGE
DEFAULT
Normal/
Broadsoft/
KT/
SK TELINK/
KT-C/
MS OCS/
SKYPE
CONNECT/
SIP-CC/
TI PK0/
ERICSSON IMS/
DNS
REDUNT(Tele2)/
MS LYNC
KT-CENTREX
Normal
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.3-1 SIP CO ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Proxy Server Address
DESCRIPTION
SIP Proxy server IP address up to 64 characters.
RANGE
IP address
The SIP module will communicate only to SIP Proxy
Server.
In this case, destination address of all
OFF/
Use Outbound Proxy
communication will be the IP of SIP Proxy Server.
ON
Use Outbound Proxy flag should be 'OFF' when you
use that SIP module for channels of 3rd-party SIP
Extensions.
This field establishes the SIP connection mode as
UDP/TCP/
Connection Mode
UDP, TCP or TLS for SIP signaling messages.
TLS
The caller name may be included in SIP messages.
When included, the name can display in the LCD of
Unused /
Caller Name Service
iPECS IP and LDP Phones. In addition, the Contact
Use
Display Name assigned to the SIP User Id (PGM
126) will be sent in the SIP message.
A SIP 181 Message is sent when a call is being
Unused /
181 Being Forwarded
redirected or forwarded, if enabled.
Use
To improve reliability of Provisional SIP messages,
OFF
100rel support
the system is configured to send and expect to
ON
receive an ACK response to such messages.
During capabilities negotiation, the system sends
OFF
the first priority codec id or the prioritized list of
Use single codec only
ON
codecs as defined in the Codec priority settings
below.
When employed behind a NAPT server, the system
OFF
can use the Rport parameter in the SIP Via header
Use rport method
ON
to request the SIP server respond to the IP address
and port of the originator.
Domain name of the Service Provider’s SIP Call
Max. 40
Domain
server that is used in SIP “To:” headers.
characters
The system can accept SIP INVITE requests from
Domain Only /
Invite Acceptance
any domain or only from the “Domain” specified
From All
above.
The system will populate the SIP “Contact” header
SIP Device Addr/
Contact Address Domain Domain with either the iPECS device IP address or
Server Domain
the “Domain” specified above.
The system will populate the SIP “From” header
SIP Device Addr/
From Address Domain
Domain with either the iPECS device IP address or
Server Domain
the “Domain” specified above.
When the iPECS system and VoIP devices are
OFF
assigned a Firewall IP address, the system can use
Firewall IP Apply
ON
either the Firewall or local IP address in the Via and
Contact headers as well as in SDP messages.
When a SIP call is redirected by a 3xx Diversion
Recursing /
response such as when a call forwards, the SIP
Diversion Recursing
Non-Recursing
message can be forked (recursing) or forwarded
(non-recursing).
The system can respond to a SIP Invite with a SIP
183 Msg.
VSF Answer Response
183 Session Progress message. This allows a VSF
200 OK
448
DEFAULT
OFF
UDP
Use
Unused
OFF
OFF
OFF
From All
SIP Device
Addr
Server Domain
ON
Recursing
200 OK
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.3-1 SIP CO ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Recursing /
Non-Recursing
Recursing
OFF
ON
OFF
1-65535
3600
Port
5060
Port
5060
Port
5061
announcement to play and user dialed digits to be
analyzed by CCR and, if the CCR destination is an
external number, the system can send a SIP 3xx
call diversion message to forward the call via the
SIP network.
RTP Diversion Method
Reserved Currently.
With “OPTIONS Usage” ON, an Option message is
sent at intervals of the Check Message Send Timer
OPTIONS Usage (Keep assigned in PGM 210 to assure a connection with
Alive)
the SIP CO. SIP COs generally provide an Option
message. In this case, the UCP should not be
enabled here.
Periodically, the system must re-register with the
SIP Registrar. While this timing is often negotiated
Proxy Registration Timer
with the Registrar, the system can be configured
with this timer to establish the re-register interval.
When employing UDP transport, this port number is
Proxy Server UDP Port
employed for messages to the SIP proxy.
When employing TCP transport, this port number is
Proxy Server TCP Port
employed for messages to the SIP proxy.
When employing TLS transport, this port number is
Proxy Server TLS Port
employed for messages to the SIP proxy.
The User Id indices from the SIP User ID Attributes
Table PGM 126 that will register with the SIP
Registration UID Range
Service Provider’s SIP Registrar must be
configured.
Max. 140 Entries
DTMF Type
DTMF dialing signals can be sent from the system
using in-band or various Info messages. The
method or type must match the SIP Call Server.
INBAND/
2833/
INFO (DTMF)/
INFO (DTMF
RELAY)/
INFO(TELEPHON
E EVENT)/
INFO(NORTEL
NETWORKS)
Action with REG Failure
When registration fails, the link is down to the SIP
Call server, or the system receives no response to
an Invite message in the “Call Setup No-response”
timer below, the call will return error tone (Wait
Idle), or Fail-over to a Line from the Fail-over CO
Group specified below (Idle).
IDLE/
WATI IDLE
Media Port
The UDP ports used for RTP (media) packets can
be limited to a fixed range.
449
UDP Port
INBAND
IDLE
eMG80:60007036
eMG800:600014400
UCP:600019972
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.3-1 SIP CO ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Secondary Proxy Server
Secondary Proxy Server
Address
Secondary Domain
Secondary Proxy Server
UDP Port
It is used for SIP proxy server redundancy.
KOREA telecom only.
It is used for SIP proxy server redundancy.
KOREA telecom only.
It is used for SIP proxy server redundancy.
KOREA telecom only.
IP Address
Max. 32
Characters
Port
ID Presentation Option
ID Usage
P-Asserted-ID
Remote-Party-ID
Privacy(CLIR)
Presentation
The system normally provides a P-Asserted ID in
SIP messages. The system can be configured not
to provide the header.
The system normally provides a Remote-Party-ID in
SIP messages. The system can be configured not
to provide the header.
SIP employs various headers that include a User Id
and Name. In some cases, it may desirable to
restrict the called party from receiving this
information. Several options for Caller Id restriction
can be applied.
Unused
Use
Use
Unused
Use
Use
Anonymous
Name &
Anonymous
Number/
Anonymous
Name/
Privacy: user/
Privacy: id/
Privacy:
user;id;critical/
Privacy: id &
anonymous & PPreferred-ID
Anonymous
Name &
Anonymous
Number
ID Individuality
CID Password
From ID
From Display
Enter CID Password.
The Id in the “From” header of SIP messages can
be based on the calling station, the User Id or a
fixed User Id.
Extension SIP User Id: one of three SIP User
Ids assigned to the station in PGM 111. Select
which of the three indices to use in the SIP UID
Selection below.
Extension outgoing CLI: the CLI configured for
the station through Web PGM 113 and 151.
Authorized Representative Id: the User Id of the
“Authorized Representative Id” assigned to the SIP
User Id that is indexed to the station in PGM 111.
The specific index is selected below as the SIP UID
Selection.
Fixed Table: the SIP User ID from the SIP UID
Fixed Table Index attribute assigned below.
The “Display” field of the “From” header can be
configured to use the below:
450
Extension SIPUser-ID Table/
Extension
outgoing-CLI/
Authorized
Representative
ID/
Fixed Table
Extension SIPUser-ID Table
SYS RULE/
Extension
SYS RULE
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.3-1 SIP CO ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
System Rule:
a. From ID = Extension SIP User-ID Table,
display Contact Display Name from PGM 126,
otherwise display Station Name from PGM 111 or
blank.
b. From ID = Extension Outgoing CLI, display
Station Name from PGM 111 or blank.
c. From ID = Authorized Rep Id, display
Contact Display Name of Authorized Rep Id from
PGM 126 otherwise display Station Name from
PGM 111 or blank.
d. From ID = Fixed Table display Contact
Display Name from PGM 126 or Station Name from
PGM 111 or blank.
Extension outgoing CLI: the CLI configured for
the station through Web PGM 113 and 151
outgoing-CLI
DEFAULT
P-Asserted-ID
The Id in the “P-Asserted Id” header of SIP
messages can be based on the calling station, the
User Id or a fixed User ID.
Ext SIP User ID: one of three SIP User Table
indices assigned to the station in PGM 111. Select
which of three in the SIP UID Selection below.
Extension outgoing CLI: the CLI configured for
the station through Web PGM 113 and 151.
Authorized Representative ID: the User Id of
the “Authorized Representative ID” assigned to the
SIP User Id that is indexed to the station in PGM
111. The specific index is selected below as the SIP
UID Selection.
Fixed Table: the SIP User ID from the SIP UID
Fixed Table Index attribute assigned below.
Extension SIPUser-ID Table/
Extension
outgoing-CLI/
Authorized
Representative
ID/
Fixed Table
Extension SIPUser-ID Table
P-Asserted-ID Display
The “Display” field of the “P-Asserted Id” header
can be configured to use the below:
System Rule:
a. P-Asserted ID = Extension SIP User-ID
Table, display Contact Display Name from PGM
126, otherwise display Station Name from PGM 111
or blank
b. P-Asserted ID = Extension Outgoing CLI,
display Station Name from PGM 11 or blank
c. P-Asserted ID = Authorized Rep Id, display
Contact Display Name of Authorized Rep Id from
PGM 126 otherwise display Station Name from
PGM 111 or blank
d. P-Asserted ID = Fixed Table display
Contact Display Name from PGM 126 or Station
Name from PGM 111 or blank
Extension outgoing CLI: the CLI configured for
the station through Web PGM 113 and 151.
SYS RULE/
Extension
outgoing-CLI
SYS RULE
451
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.3-1 SIP CO ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Contact ID
Remote-Party-ID
DESCRIPTION
The Id in the “Contact ID” header of SIP messages
can be based on the calling station, the User Id or a
fixed User ID.
Ext SIP User ID: one of three SIP User Table
indices assigned to the station in PGM 111. Select
which of three in the SIP UID Selection below.
Extension outgoing CLI: the CLI configured for
the station through Web PGM 113 and 151.
Fixed Table: the SIP User Id from the SIP UID
Fixed Table Index attribute assigned below
The Id in the “Remote-Party ID” header of SIP
messages can be based on the calling station, the
User Id or a fixed User Id.
Ext SIP User ID: one of three SIP User Table
indices assigned to the station in PGM 111. Select
which of three in the SIP UID Assignment section
below.
Extension outgoing CLI: the CLI configured for
the station through Web PGM 113 and 151.
Fixed Table: the SIP User ID from the SIP UID
Fixed Table Index attribute assigned below.
RANGE
DEFAULT
Extension SIPUser-ID Table/
Extension
outgoing-CLI/
Fixed Table
Extension SIPUser-ID Table
Extension SIPUser-ID Table/
Extension
outgoing-CLI/
Fixed Table
Extension SIPUser-ID Table
Offnet Call Route ID Transit
CO to Offnet Direct Call Route
The below applies to calls routed from a CO/IP Line to an Off-net location by the system over a SIP Trunk.
From/Contact ID
From Display
P-Asserted-ID
The ID in the “From” and “Contact” headers of SIP
messages employ System Attendant CLI, the
original CLI or a fixed User Id.
Sys Atd: the CLI configured for the System
Attendant through Web PGM 113 and 151.
Original CLI: the CLI received by the system for
the original incoming call.
Fixed Table: the SIP User ID from the SIP UID
Fixed Table Index attribute assigned below.
The “Display” field of the “From” header can be
configured to use the below:
System Rule:
a. From ID = System Atd, display Contact
Display Name from PGM 126, otherwise display
Attendant Station Name from PGM 111 or blank.
b. From ID = Original CLI, display the Name in
received by the system for the original call.
c. From ID = Fixed Table display Contact
Display Name from PGM 126 or Station Name from
PGM 111 or blank.
Original CLI: the CLI received by the system for
the original incoming call.
The ID in the “P-Asserted ID” header of SIP
messages can be based on the System Attendant,
the Original CLI or a fixed User ID.
452
SYS ATD/
Original CLI/
Fixed Table
SYST ATD
SYS RULE/
Original CLI
SYS RULE
SYS ATD/
Original CLI/
Fixed Table
SYST ATD
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.3-1 SIP CO ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Sys Atd: CLI: the CLI configured for the System
Attendant through Web PGM 113 and 151.
Original CLI: the CLI received by the system for
the original incoming call.
Fixed Table: the SIP User Id from the SIP UID
Fixed Table Index attribute assigned below.
The “Display” field of the “P-Asserted Id” header
can be configured to use the below:
System Rule:
a. P-Asserted ID = System Atd, display
Contact Display Name from PGM 126, otherwise
display Attendant Station Name from PGM 111 or
SYS RULE/
blank.
P-Asserted-ID Display
SYS RULE
Original CLI
b. P-Asserted ID = Original CLI, display the
Name in received by the system for the original call.
c. P-Asserted ID = Fixed Table display
Contact Display Name from PGM 126 or Station
Name from PGM 111 or blank.
Original CLI: the CLI received by the system for
the original incoming call.
The Id in the “Remote-Party ID” header of SIP
messages can be based on the System Attendant,
the Original CLI or a fixed User ID.
SYS ATD/
Sys Atd: the CLI configured for the System
Remote-Party-ID
Original CLI/
Original CLI
Attendant through Web PGM 113 and 151.
Fixed Table
Original CLI: the CLI received by the system for
the original incoming call.
Fixed Table: the SIP User ID from the SIP UID
Fixed Table Index attribute assigned below.
The Id in the “Diversion” header of SIP messages
can be based on the System Attendant, the Original
CLI or a fixed User ID, or Unused.
Unused/
Unused: no Diversion header provided.
SYS ATD/
Sys Atd: the CLI configured for the System.
Diversion
Unused
Original CLI/
Attendant through Web PGM 113 and 151.
Fixed Table
Original CLI: the CLI received by the system for
the original incoming call.
Fixed Table: the SIP User ID from the SIP UID
Fixed Table Index attribute assigned below.
Offnet Call Forward by Station
The below apply to calls routed from a CO/IP Line to an Off-net location by a station over a SIP Trunk.
From/Contact ID
The Id in the “From” and “Contact” headers of SIP
messages employ the forwarding Station, the
original CLI or a fixed User ID.
Extension: the Extension SIP User ID or
Extension Outgoing CLI as assigned for the From
ID under ID Individuality.
Original CLI: the CLI received by the system for
the original incoming call.
453
Extension/
Original CLI/
Fixed Table
Extension
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.3-1 SIP CO ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
From Display
P-Asserted-ID
P-Asserted-ID Display
Remote-Party-ID
Diversion
DESCRIPTION
Fixed Table: the SIP User ID from the SIP UID
Fixed Table Index attribute assigned below.
The “Display” field of the “From” header can be
configured to use the below:
System Rule:
a. From ID = Extension, display Contact
Display Name from PGM 126, otherwise display
Station Name from PGM 111 or blank.
b. From ID = Original CLI, display the Name in
received by the system for the original call.
c. From ID = Fixed Table display Contact
Display Name from PGM 126 or blank.
Original CLI: the CLI received by the system for
the original incoming call.
The Id in the “P-Asserted ID” header of SIP
messages employ the forwarding Station, the
original CLI or a fixed User ID
Extension: the Extension SIP User ID or
Extension Outgoing CLI as assigned for the From
ID under ID Individuality.
Original CLI: the CLI received by the system for
the original incoming call
Fixed Table: the SIP User ID from the SIP UID
Fixed Table Index attribute assigned below.
The “Display” field of the “P-Asserted Id” header
can be configured to use the below:
System Rule:
a. P-Asserted ID = Extension, display Contact
Display Name from PGM 126, otherwise display
Station Name from PGM 111 or blank.
b. P-Asserted ID = Original CLI, display the
Name in received by the system for the original call.
c. P-Asserted ID = Fixed Table display
Contact Display Name from PGM 126 or blank.
Original CLI: the CLI received by the system for
the original incoming call.
The Id in the “Remote Party ID” header of SIP
messages employ the forwarding station, the
original CLI or a fixed User ID.
Extension: the Extension SIP User ID or
Extension Outgoing CLI as assigned for the From
ID under ID Individuality.
Original CLI: the CLI received by the system for
the original incoming call.
Fixed Table: the SIP User Id from the SIP UID
Fixed Table Index attribute assigned below.
The Id in the “Diversion” header of SIP messages
can be based on the forwarding station, the Original
CLI or a fixed User ID, or Unused.
454
RANGE
DEFAULT
SYS RULE/
Original CLI
SYS RULE
Extension/
Original CLI/
Fixed Table
Extension
SYS RULE/
Original CLI
SYS RULE
Extension/
Original CLI/
Fixed Table
Extension
Unused/
SYS ATD/
Original CLI/
Unused
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.3-1 SIP CO ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Unused: no Diversion header provided.
Fixed Table
Extension: the Extension SIP User ID or
Extension Outgoing CLI as assigned for the From
ID under ID Individuality.
Original CLI: the CLI received by the system for
the original incoming call.
Fixed Table: the SIP User ID from the SIP UID
Fixed Table Index attribute assigned below.
Mobile Extension External Call
The below applies to calls routed to a Mobile Extension over a SIP Trunk
From/Contact ID
From Display
P-Asserted-ID
P-Asserted-ID Display
The Id in the “From” and “Contact” headers of SIP
messages employ the calling station, the original
CLI or a fixed User ID.
Extension: the Extension SIP User ID or
Extension Outgoing CLI as assigned for the From
ID under ID Individuality.
Original CLI: the CLI received by the system for
the original incoming call or Station number for ICM
call.
Fixed Table: the SIP User ID from the SIP UID
Fixed Table Index attribute assigned below.
The “Display” field of the “From” header can be
configured to use the below:
System Rule:
a. From ID = Extension, display Contact
Display Name from PGM 126, otherwise display
Station Name from PGM 111 or blank.
b. From ID = Original CLI, display Station
Name from PGM 111 for ICM call or the Name in
received by the system for the original outside call.
c. From ID = Fixed Table display Contact
Display Name from PGM 126 or blank.
Original CLI: the CLI received by the system for
the original incoming call.
The Id in the “P-Asserted Id” header of SIP
messages employ the calling station, the original
CLI or a fixed User ID.
Extension: the Extension SIP User ID or
Extension Outgoing CLI as assigned for the From
ID under ID Individuality.
Original CLI: the CLI received by the system for
the original incoming call or station number for ICM
call.
Fixed Table: the SIP User ID from the SIP UID
Fixed Table Index attribute assigned below.
The “Display” field of the “P-Asserted ID” header
can be configured to use the below:
System Rule:
a. P-Asserted ID = Extension, display Contact
455
Extension/
Original CLI/
Fixed Table
Extension
SYS RULE/
Original CLI
SYS RULE
Extension/
Original CLI/
Fixed Table
Extension
SYS RULE/
Original CLI
SYS RULE
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.3-1 SIP CO ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Remote-Party-ID
Diversion
DESCRIPTION
Display Name from PGM 126, otherwise display
Station Name from PGM 111 or blank.
b. P-Asserted = Original CLI, display Station
Name from PGM 111 for ICM call or the Name in
received by the system for the original outside call.
c. P-Asserted = Fixed Table display Contact
Display Name from PGM 126 or blank.
Original CLI: the CLI received by the system for
the original incoming call.
The Id in the “Remote Party Id” header of SIP
messages employ the Station CLI, the original CLI
or a fixed User ID.
Extension: the Extension SIP User ID or
Extension Outgoing CLII as assigned for the From
ID under ID Individuality.
Original CLI: the CLI received by the system for
the original incoming call or station number for ICM
call.
Fixed Table: the SIP User ID from the SIP UID
Fixed Table Index attribute assigned below.
The Id in the “Diversion” header of SIP messages
can be based on the calling station, the Original CLI
or a fixed User ID, or Unused.
Unused: no Diversion header provided.
Extension: the Extension SIP User ID or
Extension Outgoing CLII as assigned for the From
ID under ID Individuality.
Original CLI: the CLI received by the system for
the original incoming call or the station number for
ICM call.
Fixed Table: the SIP User Id from the SIP UID
Fixed Table Index attribute assigned below.
RANGE
DEFAULT
Extension/
Original CLI/
Fixed Table
Extension
Unused/
SYS ATD/
Original CLI/
Fixed Table
Unused
SIP UID Assignment
When a header is assigned to use “Fixed Table”,
the ID from this SIP User ID (PGM 126) Table index
is used.
When a header is assigned to use the “Extension
SIP-User-ID Table”, the SIP User ID is selected
SIP User ID SELECTION
using this SIP UID index in the Station Attributes
(PGM 111).
SIP User ID Fixed Table
Index
Index
Index,
Index 2,
Index 3
SIP User Table
Index
None/
g.711-u/
g.711-a/
g.723.1/
g.729/
g.729-a/
g.722
none
External CODEC Priority Configuration
1st ~5th priority
1st. priority
2nd. priority
3rd. priority
4th. priority
5th. Priority
1. If specify priority to a specific CODEC then it will
work for negotiation RTP data.
2. If only 1st. priority is specified and the others are
456
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.3-1 SIP CO ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
none, then it will work as single CODEC only does.
SIP Call Setup Failover Option
When the system initiates a SIP Trunk call and
receives no response from the SIP proxy server,
after expiration of this timer the SIP call is canceled
Call Setup No Response and a Fail-over call placed on the Fail-over CO/IP
0, 3 ~ 15 sec
Line group specified below. Note the timer can be
set at 3 to 15 seconds and ‘0’, which disables Failover.
When the system attempts to initiate a SIP Trunk
eMG80:1 ~ 21
call and the SIP Trunk is in an OOS state or the SIP
Failover CO Group
eMG800:1~201
proxy server does not respond in the No Response
Number
(Max. Numbers of
time above, the system will cancel the SIP call and
CO Group)
place a call over a CO/IP Line from this group.
5sec
none
SIP Session Timer
Session Timer Usage
Session Timer Value
Min SE
During a SIP call or “session”, there are no
signaling packets sent or received from the SIP Call
server. In order to assure a session is still active,
the system can periodically send an Option
message that the SIP Call server should
acknowledge.
When “Session Timer Usage” is enabled, the
system will verify the session at this timer interval.
During negotiation with “Session Timer Usage”
enabled, the system will use this value as the
minimum Session expiration timer and will not
respond to a SIP Option message prior to expiration
of this timer.
ON/OFF
OFF
90~ 3600
360
90~ 3600
90
sip: method/
tel: method
SIP: method
Local/
Global
Local
Yes
No
No
URI Formatting and Rules
General Formatting
To Field Method
The SIP “To:” header is formatted using the SIP or
Telephony method as shown below.
SIP method
To: < sip:[Number]@[Domain];user=phone >
Telephony method
To: < tel:+[Number] >Domain
When assigned the Telephony method for the “To”
header, the number format can be:
Local - [tel:+Number]@[Domain] or
Numbering Format
Global (+E164) - [tel:+E.164
Address]@[Domain]
E.164 Address: Nation + Area Code + Number
The Area code (PGM 143) can be added as a prefix
if the ‘Numbering Format’ is set as Local.
Local: include Area Code Example:
user dials ‘8701234’ and the Area code is ‘042’
The resulting “To” field URI is
457
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.3-1 SIP CO ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Yes
No
No
User Dial
Result
0314504639
+82314504639
0082314504639
+82314504639
15886724
15886724
0314504639
4504639
OFF
ON
OFF
tel:+0428701234@[Domain]
Global: include phonecontext
If the ‘Numbering Format’ is Global and the ‘To
Field Method’ is Telephony, the ‘phone-context’ can
be added as below.
user dials ‘0011428701234’ from Country code 82
The resulting “To” field URI is,
tel:+0011428701234@[Domain];phone-context=+82
Specific Formatting by Conversion (example)
From 4 digits
To 6 digits
0
+82
00
+
1588
1588
031
SRTP Setting
SRTP Usage
1st CRYPTO
2nd CRYPTO
When implemented by the carrier, the system can
encrypt media (RTP) packets employing SRTP
(Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol). But VoIP
Virtual switching channel does not support SRTP.
The first priority Crypt method for SRTP.
The range is as below:
None
ARIA_CM_192_HMAC_SHA1_80
AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80
ARIA_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80
AES_CM_192_HMAC_SHA1_80
ARIA_CM_256_HMAC_SHA1_80
AES_CM_256_HMAC_SHA1_80
The second priority Crypt method for SRTP.
The range is as below:
None
ARIA_CM_192_HMAC_SHA1_80
AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80
ARIA_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80
AES_CM_192_HMAC_SHA1_80
ARIA_CM_256_HMAC_SHA1_80
AES_CM_256_HMAC_SHA1_80
None
None
Caller/Called ID
ID Option
Caller ID Selection
Display Caller
Name(Though Id is
Anonymous)
Called ID Selection
For the purposes of display and ICLID call routing,
iPECS employ this header as the “Caller ID”.
Even though the User ID is Anonymous, the system
can display the SIP “From” header “Display Name”
field for the call.
For the purposes of call routing, the “SIP Request”
or “To” header will be employed by the system as
458
P-Asserted-ID/
Remote-Party-D/
From ID
P-Asserted-ID
No
Yes
No
Request URI/
To ID
Request URI
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.3-1 SIP CO ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
0~71
(0:Normal/171:Check To
header)
0
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No Service,
SIP AOC
No Service
the “Called Party ID”.
Miscellaneous set
Drop Busy Station
Ignore INBAND DTMF
While busy, the system can be configured to
terminate a station call, and accept and connect any
new call from the SIP Trunk. For special use, it is
available only in Italy.
In some situations, DTMF tones from the connected
party may be received along with the DTMF Type
specified above. This can cause errors in detection
such as double digits. In this case, the system can
be configured to ignore Inband DTMF signals. Note
do not disable Inband signals if selected as the
“DTMF Type” above as this may disable DTMF
detection.
Multiple SIP User ID ranges may register with the
SIP CO, for example, SIP COs from different
providers. When different SIP User ID ranges are
SIP Trunk Group
required on a SIP CO, a different SIP Trunk Group
should be assigned to each range. Note this has no
relationship with the CO/IP Line Group.
The system can employ the SIP Refer method to
Send Refer for Transfer forward or transfer incoming calls to an “Off-net”
location if supported by the SIP Service Provider.
When Comfort Noise generation is desired, the
CN Payload Insert
system will provide a Comfort Noise Payload during
periods of silence.
If the option is Yes, an appropriate ring back tone
may be played to the calling party when the called
party's phone is alerting without changing the
Ignore 180 after 183
internal or system ring back tone. For example,
when placing a call from USA to Korea, a Korean
ring back tone is heard by the caller.
For outgoing SIP call, "user=phone" will be added in
Add “user=phone” param
Request URI of INVITE.
When assigned, The system estimates the call cost
Advice of Charge
for display on the phone with appropriate regional
protocol support.
459
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
4.4.8.4 SIP Registration Status Overview
Figure 4.4.8.4-1 SIP Registration status overview
460
Issue 1.6
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.8.5 SIP UID Allocation Status Overview
Selecting SIP User ID Allocation Status will display the allocation overview page. The SIP User Id
Allocation Status Overview page displays the station(s) assigned to each SIP User Id index in the
Station Common Attributes PGM 111.
Figure 4.4.8.5-1 SIP UID Allocation Status Overview
461
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.8.6 SIP User ID Attributes – PGM 126
Selecting SIP User ID Attributes will display the SIP User ID input page. Enter a valid SIP User ID
Index Number range, see Station Data, and click [Load] to view the SIP User ID Attributes for the
first index in the range. Enter new data and click [Save] to modify the attributes for the index
range.
Enter SIP User ID Index number: eMG80: 1-140 / eMG800: 1-1200 / UCP: 1-2400
Figure 4.4.8.6-1 SIP User ID Attributes
For each station, an index to the SIP User Id Attributes Table is defined in PGM 111 Station
Attributes. The SIP User Id Attributes Table defines SIP characteristics associated with the index
including User ID, Authentication name, etc. These characteristics are required for proper
operation of the system and registration of the iPECS IP and LDP phones when employed with
SIP trunk. See also, PGM 133. Note PGM 126 and PGM 133 are accessible only via Web Admin.
Setting CID Password directly
You can set the CID password to click “Go to Setting” button. After clicking it, you will move to the
following PGM 162 and set the CID password, and then save CID password to mark tick on the
save box and click the Save button.
Table 4.4.8.6-1 SIP User ID ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
This field defines the SIP User Id from by the SIP Service
Registration User ID
provider. The User Id has the format User ID@Domain.
Note the domain is commonly the system IP address.
The SIP Service Provider may require authentication of the
Authentication User ID
user for registration and at other times during call setup.
462
RANGE
Max. 64
characters
Max. 64
characters
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.6-1 SIP User ID ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
The Authentication name from the provider must be entered
for proper SIP registration.
The SIP Service Provider may require authentication of the
Authentication User
Max. 32
user for registration and at other times during call setup.
Password
characters
The Authentication password from the provider must be
assigned for proper SIP registration.
The Contact header of SIP messages is populated with the
Max. 16
Contact Number
specified SIP User ID.
characters
The Display Name specified is used for the Contact header
Max. 21
Contact Display Name
Name field.
characters
Associative Station
Not used.
Station number
Number
The SIP Trunks are provided in two formats
1) Registered: the system must register for service
Register/
Provision
User ID Register
often using Authentication
Provision
2) Provision: the provider sends all SIP messages to a
fixed IP; the system does not register for service.
The User Id can be assigned an index of another User ID.
Authorized
eMG80:0~140
When the SIP CO is configured to employ the Authorized
0
Representative ID
eMG800:0~1200
Representative Id as the SIP “From” or “Contact” header,
Table Index
UCP:0~2400
the indexed User ID is employed.
If registration is enabled (User ID Register above) the
iPECS can send the User ID or Authorized Representative
OFF
User ID Usage
OFF
ID to the SIP Proxy to register the ID. Otherwise, only the
ON
Authentication Name and password are used.
ID Assigned
Incoming calls from a SIP trunk can be routed
Station/
1) to the ID assigned Station (any station with any of the SIP
User ID Table Indices in PGM 111 matching the incoming
Ring Assignment/
ID
Ring Route Type
DID Conversion/ assigned
SIP User Id),
MSN-DID
2) based on CO/IP Ring assignments (PGM 144),
Station
Conversion(PGM
3) using DID treatment defined below, or
4) follow the MSN Table routing (PGM 145).
145)
When the Ring Route above is defined as DID, the system
will send the call to a destination based on the DID
DID Digit
conversion selected here. The digits in the SIP User ID may
Conversion/
be used “as is” to identify the desired station, modified
Use ‘as is’/
DID Conversion Type
Use ‘as is’
Modify Using
based on the DID Digit mask below and routed to the
Flexible DID
resulting station or the modified DID number can be used as
an index to the Flexible DID Conversion Table, PGM 231 to Conversion Table
route the call.
Number of Digits (2-4) When DID Digit Conversion or Flexible DID Conversion
2-4
3
Expected from DID
Table routing is used, the number of digits received is
Circuit
defined in this field.
When DID Digit Conversion or Flexible DID Conversion
DID Digit Mask
Table routing is used, the digit conversion is defined in this
4 Digits: *, #, 0-9
#***
(4digits: *,#,0-9
field. For each of the four (4) digits, use “*” to accept any
digit, “#” to delete the digit, or a digit 0-9 to replace the digit.
SMS Received Station When an SMS is received for this User Id, the Station to
Number
receive the SMS must be defined.
463
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.8.7 SIP Phone Attributes - PGM 211
Selecting SIP Phone Attributes will display the SIP Phone input page. Enter a valid SIP Station
Number or range, and click [Load] to view the SIP Phone Attributes for the first Station Number
in the range. Enter new data and click [Save] to modify the attributes for a Station or range.
Figure 4.4.8.7-1 SIP Phone Attributes
< Registration >
For a new registration of SIP station, input ID/PWD & Desired Station Number in PGM 443 of
Station User Login Table. This SIP Phone Attributes are for Stations that are already registered to
system.
− Register Mode - Register/ Manual: Set Registration Time Out or Not
− Registration Status: View connection status (Disconnected or Not) for a station
− IP Address: SIP Phone‘s IP address
− IP Port: SIP Phone‘s IP Port Number
− Transport Mode: SIP signaling method
− SIP Phone Type: Automatically Assigned by System
− Device NAT Usage: Automatic Detection
− Registration Timer Usage: OFF – Assign (Re-) Registration Timer by Provisioning
(212), ON – Assign (Re-) Registration Timer by SIP Phone Attributes (211).
− Registration Timer: more than 10 minute recommended.
− 407 Authentication: Authentication of Registration (and Call Setup). To implement
464
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
authentication, user login Password should be available in PGM 443 for the
Station.
< Keep Alive / NAT Resolution >
To keep stable information of SIP Phone‘s Connection, IP address and Port number that is under
NAT environment, system uses ‘OPTIONS’ message to implement Keep Alive and assist NAT
resolution - effort to maintain IP address of SIP Phone by sending message so often from system
to SIP Phone. SIP Phone should be capable to answer for ‘OPTIONS’ message
− Check Message Sending Timer in [SIP Data / SIP Attributes (210)] : 120 seconds
− Keep Alive Usage for a SIP Station in [SIP Data / SIP Phone Attributes (211)] : ON
− Retry Count for a SIP Station in [SIP Data / SIP Phone Attributes (211)] : 3
< System Firewall Resolution >
In case of firewall routed with MPB, to distinguish remote SIP Phone that is outside of firewall
from system local area a check bit is required per a SIP Station. With this check bit, system can
determine whether to serve communication using firewall mapped WAN IP address of MPB or
serve communication using LAN IP address of MPB/UCP.
− SIP Phones that are outside of system protect firewall : [SIP Data / SIP Phone
Attributes (211)] – ‘Same Firewall with MPB/UCP’ to ‘OFF’
< Session Timer >
To confirm talk state frequently during in talk state, system sends ‘UPDATE’ message to SIP
Phone. If there is no response for the UPDATE message with in Maximum session timer, system
will disconnect the talking call.
− [SIP Data / SIP Phone Attributes (211)] – Session Timer Support : ON
− [SIP Data / SIP Phone Attributes (211)] – Max Session Timer : if exceed, disconnect
talking call
− [SIP Data / SIP Phone Attributes (211)] – Min Session Timer: minimum guard timer for
session timer negotiation.
< SRTP >
Voice & Video Data Encryption requires synchronization of CRYPTO method between system
and SIP Phone side. If system specifies SRTP information then same information should be in
SIP Phone side by Phone user programming.
SRTP usage requires a SRTP relay channel via system VOIU and VOIB/VOIM.
− [SIP Data / SIP Phone Attributes (211)] – SRTP Usage: ON
→SIP Phone self-programming is required, too – SRTP ON
− [SIP Data / SIP Phone Attributes (211)] – 1st CRYPTO key generation type: one of
ARIA_CM_192_HMAC_SHA1_80, AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80,
ARIA_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80
→SIP Phone self-programming is required, too – 1st/2nd CRYPTO method
− [SIP Data / SIP Phone Attributes (211)] – 2nd CRYPTO key generation type: one of
ARIA_CM_192_HMAC_SHA1_80, AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80,
ARIA_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80
→SIP Phone self-programming is required, too – 1st/2nd CRYPTO method
465
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
< DTMF >
1) INFO (OUT BAND) type DTMF
- Presented in SIP signaling message.
- INFO (SIMPLE DTMF) / INFO (NORTEL NETWORKS) / INFO (DTMF RELAY) / INFO
(TELEPHONE EVENT)
- Default: INFO (DTMF RELAY)
2) TONE (INBAND) type DTMF
- Presented in RTP packet
- Additional VOIU/VOIB (VOIM) DSP channel is required to detect DTMF in RTP
- INBAND / 2833
This is to avoid double play of CO dial tone
‘Set’ if SIP phone plays CO dial tone by itself. If not, there will be another CO dial tone from
external.
Some SIP Phone will reject Request-URI if IP and port in domain field is different from its
contact IP and port.
‘Normal’: IP and port number in Request URI domain field will be the real IP and port number
of the SIP phone.
‘KT-FMC’: IP and port number in Request URI domain field will be system IP and port
System Busy Tone: there will be a ‘busy-tone’ on busy state that is presented by system.
Additional VOIB/VOIU/VOIM DSP channel is required.
486 Busy Message: there will be ‘486 busy’ SIP signaling response on busy state.
For a SIP station, system can establish multiple or single call sessions. With this option system
can control ‘call-wait’ option in system side. Normally, the SIP Phone has its ‘call-wait ON/OFF’
option by itself.
Options are as below:
‘Multiple’: for a new additional call to SIP Phone, system initiates every call for the SIP
Phone regarding it is on idle state. The ‘call-wait allow/deny’ is decided by SIP Phone itself.
‘Single’: system initiates only one call for a SIP Phone. The ‘call-wait’ is denied by system
side. So, a call to a busy SIP station will be implemented on a busy state call-control.
Table 4.4.8.7-1 SIP PHONE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Registration Mode
DESCRIPTION
Initial registration of a SIP phone is accomplished
employing the parameters set in Station User Login
466
RANGE
DEFAULT
Manual
Register
Register
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.7-1 SIP PHONE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Registration Status
IP address
IP Port
Transport Mode
System SIP Port
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
PGM 443. The SIP phone can be required to register
with the system periodically based on the Registration
Timer or the registration can be maintained without the
need for the SIP phone to reregister with the system
(Manual).
The system will display the status of the SIP phone
registration.
The system will display the IP address of the registered
SIP phone.
The system will display the IP port used for the
registered SIP phone.
The system will display the IP transport used by the
registered SIP phone for signaling messages (UDP,
TCP or TLS). In case of TLS, the options configured in
the SIP Common Attributes (PGM 210) apply.
DEFAULT
UDP
The system will display the system SIP Port.
The type of SIP phone is generally determined by the
system and can be an Ericsson-LG standard SIP
phones or the 3rd party SIP phone type.
The Register Mode determines if the SIP phone is
behind a NAT server. When set in the Auto mode, the
Device register mode
system will determine if the phone is behind a NAT
server.
When the Registration Mode is “Register”, the phone
must register with the system periodically. The timer
Registration Timer
that determines the period can be the Registration
usage
Timer below (ON) or, when OFF, the timer is assigned
through provisioning (PGM212).
When the Registration Timer is enabled above, the
system informs the SIP phone that registration is
required at intervals of this Registration Timer. If the
Registration Timer
phone does not register within the timer, the phone is
placed in an Out-of-Service state until the phone
registers. Note shorter times will increase LAN traffic.
The system will periodically send an Option message to
assure a connection with the registered SIP phone.
Note when separated by a NAT server, Keep-Alive
Keep Alive Usage
should be employed to maintain the NAT table record.
The Check Message Sending Timer in PGM 210
determines the frequency.
The system periodically sends an Option message to
assure a connection with the registered SIP phone. If
Retry Count
there is no response, the system sends additional
Option messages, and, after the retry count, considers
the SIP phone Out-of-Service.
The system can challenge the SIP phone during
registration and outgoing call set-up with a SIP 407
407 Authentication
Authentication message requiring the SIP phone to
provide the Authentication Id and password assigned in
3rd SIP
SIP Phone Type
467
AUTO,
NO NAT,
NAT
AUTO
OFF
ON
OFF
30-3600
3600
OFF
ON
OFF
3-10
3
OFF
ON
ON
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.7-1 SIP PHONE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
the Station Login PGM 443.
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
181 Being Forwarded N/A
100 rel Support
Session Timer
Support
Max Session Timer
Min Session Timer
Within same firewall
with UCP (MPB)
SRTP Usage
1st CRYPTO
2nd CRYPTO
DTMF Type
N/A
During a SIP call or “session”, there are no signaling
packets sent or received from the SIP Call server. In
order to assure a session is still active, the system can
periodically send an Update message that the SIP Call
server should acknowledge.
When “Session Timer Support” is enabled, the system
will verify the session at this timer interval.
During negotiation with “Session Timer Support”
enabled, the system will use this value as the minimum
Session expiration timer and will not respond to a SIP
Option message prior to expiration of this timer.
For a remote SIP phone, the system must
communicate with the phone employing the system’s
“Firewall” address (OFF). Otherwise, the system
employs the LAN address to communicate with the SIP
phone.
When supported by the SIP phone, the system can
encrypt media (RTP) packets employing SRTP (Secure
Real-Time Protocol).
468
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
180-3600
1800
60-150
90
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
The first priority cryptographic method for SRTP is
selected from the below:
None
ARIA_CM_192_HMAC_SHA1_80
AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80
ARIA_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80
AES_CM_192_HMAC_SHA1_80
ARIA_CM_256_HMAC_SHA1_80
AES_CM_256_HMAC_SHA1_80
The second priority cryptographic method for SRTP is
selected from the below:
None
ARIA_CM_192_HMAC_SHA1_80
AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80
ARIA_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80
AES_CM_192_HMAC_SHA1_80
ARIA_CM_256_HMAC_SHA1_80
AES_CM_256_HMAC_SHA1_80
DTMF dialing signals sent by the SIP phone must be
defined for the system to detect the tones properly. For
Inband DTMF, a VoIP channel is required.
OFF
None
None
INBAND,
2833,
INFO(SIMPLE
DTMF),
INFO(NORTEL
NETWORKS),
INFO(DTMF
INFO(DTMF
RELAY)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.7-1 SIP PHONE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
SMS Type
DESCRIPTION
The Short Message Service Protocol (type) must be
selected to support SMS.
RANGE
RELAY),
INFO(TELEPHONE
EVENT)
AUTO,
Text/plan,
Text/plan(KR),
Xnipm+xml
DEFAULT
AUTO
When the user of a SIP phone dials a CO/IP Line
OFF
OFF
access code with Enblock dialing, the system can
ON
provide virtual dial tone to the user.
For compatible SIP phones, the system supports SIP
OFF
MWI NOTIFY
Subscribe/Notify. When enabled here, the system
OFF
message-summary
sends Message Waiting notifications to the SIP phone.
The SIP Request header Domain field can use the SIP
phone’s IP address and port (Normal) or for ‘KT-FMC’
Normal
Normal
Request URI Type
the Request URI Domain field will be system IP and
KT FMC
port.
To indicate a busy condition to the SIP phone, the
system can provide RTP packets with busy tone or the System Busy Tone, System Busy
Busy Service
SIP 486 Busy message. Providing busy tone requires a 486 Busy Message
Tone
VoIP DSP channel in the system.
The system can route calls to the SIP phone while busy
(Multiple). In this case, the SIP phone determines if Call
Multiple,
Waiting is supported. Otherwise, if the SIP phone is
Multiple
Call Initiation Mode
Single
busy, the system routes calls based on the busy
treatment (Single).
The system normally provides the 183 Session
Progress SIP message to establish a “Pre-audio”
connection. The “Pre-audio” connection permits the
system to send tones (CO dial tone or ringback tone) to
183 Session
183 Session
Pre Audio Connection
the SIP phone. In addition, the SIP phone can send
Progress,
Progress
For DTMF
DTMF tones the user dials in response to CO dial tone
200 OK
or a remote IVR message. Some SIP phones may
require the 200 OK message, which “answers” the call,
to allow dialing after the call has been initiated.
This feature can be set in case of the following Range:
- OFF(REG): Extension name will be updated with
displayed in REGISTER message.
OFF(REG),
- ON: Extension name will not be updated.
ON,
Do Not Overwrite
OFF(REG)
- OFF(INV): Extension name will be updated with
OFF(INV),
Station Name
displayed in INVITE message.
OFF(REG+INV)
- OFF(REG+INV): Extension name will be updated
with displayed in REGISTER or INVITE message.
Follow CO Enblock
Skip "dial tone by system" phase and deliver
OFF
OFF
Process
transparent message of CO trunk to SIP phone.
ON
If this option is ON, CLI is published by suffixing DID
OFF
Suffix DID Tbl to CLI
OFF
Conversion table index.
ON
Select the SIP Profile type between Default and
CISCO-CP.
Default,
Default
SIP Profile
- Default: Normal SIP phone.
CISCO-CP
- CISCO-CP: CISCO SIP phone.
CO DIAL TONE
469
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.8.8 SIP Phone Provisioning - PGM 212
Selecting SIP Phone Provisioning will display the SIP Phone Provisioning Data input page. Select
one of CONFTYPE (Ericsson-LG Enterprise SIP Phone Type) and set the attributes you want to
set for those types of SIP Phones on their registration to system and press [Save] button.
To store provisioning files that have been uploaded to the iPECS system, press [Store uploaded
Provision files]. To view the stored configuration files, press [View Provision files]. To
download Provision files, press [Download Provision files]. To view TLS Cert. files, press [View
TLS Cert files] button.
Figure 4.4.8.8-1 SIP Phone Provisioning
To pre-assign default attributes and download configuration to SIP Extensions when they register
to System.
< For Who? (for all of specified Phone type or for one MAC specified Phone) >
CONFTYPE: select Phone Type / Mandatory
< Ericsson-LG Enterprise WIT-400HE >
− Currently MPB/UCP (TFTP only) does not proceed provisioning for WIT400H(http
only) because of different method
→But, WIT-400HE follows System’s default provisioning by itself automatically.
470
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
< Ericsson-LG Enterprise LIP8002 / LIP88xx/LIP-8XXXE >
− MPB/UCP proceed provisioning for LIP8002 / LIP88xx/LIP-8XXXE
< Other 3rd party SIP Extensions >
− Does not proceed provisioning
Private Mac: specify MAC address if provisioning target is only for one specific SIP
extension / Optional
< For What ? >
Re-Registration Timer: this will be useless if [SIP User ID Attributes (PGM 126) - Registration
Timer Usage] is ON
SIP Extension’s Local UDP/TCP/TLS Port number
Proxy Port: Server port number in sight of SIP Extension toward MPB/UCP
Transport: Signaling mode
SIP Extension’s CODEC Priority
NTP Server and DST setting
The default volume of Speaker/Handset/Headset, maximum volume of Handset
Table 4.4.8.8-1 SIP PHONE PROVISIONING
ATTRIBUTE
CONFTYPE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
To modify or view a Configuration file, from the drop-down,
select an Ericsson-LG Enterprise SIP Phone type.
DEFAULT
None
MAC address must just be entered for Private Conf file
Private MAC
There are two types of Config files, a global file for all phones of
a specific type and a phone specific file. To view or modify a
Phone specific file, enter the MAC address of the SIP phone.
Private MAC
address
Don’t enter MAC address for common Conf file
When the SIP User ID Attributes are configured with
Registration Mode=Register and the Registration Timer
Registration Timer
Usage=OFF, this timer is used to determine the valid
registration period.
When employing UDP transport, this port number is employed
Local UDP Port
for messages from the SIP phone.
When employing TCP transport, this port number is employed
Local TCP Port
for messages from the SIP phone.
When employing TLS transport, this port number is employed
Local TLS Port
for messages from the SIP phone.
The system sends RTP packets to the SIP phone using the first
Local RTP Port
port available starting with this port number.
The SIP phone will send messages to the UCP system over this
Proxy TCP Port
SIP Server port.
The SIP phone will send messages to the UCP system over this
Proxy TLS Port
SIP Server port.
The IP packet transport mode used between the system and
Transport Mode
SIP phone for signaling messages is defined as UDP, TCP or
TLS. In case of TLS, the options configured in the SIP Common
471
120-3600
3600
Port (1-65535)
5060
Port (1-65535)
5060
Port (1-65535)
5061
Port (1-65535)
23000
Port (1-65535)
5060
Port (1-65535)
5061
UPD
TCP
TLS
UDP
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.8-1 SIP PHONE PROVISIONING
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Port (1-65535)
5060
G.711-u
G.711-a
G.723.1
G-729
G.722
None
Attributes (PGM 210) apply.
Signaling Port
When SIP phone transports the message to the system, this
port number is employed for messages from the SIP phone.
1st priority ~ 4th
priority
When the system negotiates with the SIP phone, the Codec
priority specified is employed. If only the 1st. priority Codec is
defined, only that Codec is available from the phone.
If the Codec is not supported by the remote party, the call will
fail.
Preferred Voice CODEC Priority
NTP Setting (Need for TLS)
NTP Server
Address
NTP Interval
The IP8800 series phones employ NTP to determine the time of
day. The NTP server id must be configured for the phone.
The phone periodically checks the NTP server to determine the
proper time of day.
Max. 32
Characters
0-120
(Hours)
NTP Time Zone
The phone must be configured with the local Time Zone for
proper operation and time display.
GMT
DST Usage
The phone must be configured to support Daylight Saving Time.
ON
OFF
1
OFF
DSP Setting
Speaker Volume
Handset Volume
Headset Volume
MAX Handset
Volume
The default volume level of SIP phone speaker can be set
through the Config file.
The default volume level of SIP phone handset can be set
through the Config file.
The default volume level of SIP phone headset can be set
through the Config file.
The default maximum volume level of SIP phone handset can
be set through the Config file.
1-11,
1-7 (IP8850)
1-11,
1-7 (IP8850)
1-11,
1-7 (IP8850)
1-11
6
6
6
11
Digit Map
Dial Tone Digit
A digit string can be defined in the Config file so that the SIP
phone will provide a “Second Dial Tone” to the user.
Max. 256
Digits
Inter Digit Timer
Inter digit timer between Dial digit in SIP Phone.
Pause Timer
Dial Pause timer in SIP Phone.
Digit Map
Send setup to system numbering plan.
Max. 1000
Emergency Code
The Emergency dial code for the SIP phone can be set through
the Config file.
Max. 1000
01-20
(Sec.)
01-20
(Sec.)
3
3
System Setting
Feature Sync.
Auto Idle Timer
Check Domain
Telnet Usage
With Do Not Disturb and Call Forward feature synchronization
ON, when SIP Phone changes the DND or Call Forward state,
the system is informed of the change in status.
Phone goes to idle after this timer when the phone receives
disconnect message or signal from system.
The IP8800 SIP Phones can be configured to verify the domain
in SIP messages match the registered proxy server.
00-99
(Sec.)
OFF
ON
The IP8800 series phones can support Tenet access to the CLI.
Enable
472
ON
OFF
ON
5
ON
Disable
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.8.8-1 SIP PHONE PROVISIONING
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Disable
WEB Usage
The IP8800 series phones incorporate a Web server for access
to the phone configuration files.
Enable
Disable
Disable
Security Setting
The system supports two certification formats Privacy-Enhanced PEM(Normal),
Cert File Format
PEM(Normal)
Electronic Mail (PEM) or Distinguished Encoding Rules (DER).
DER (Normal)
The system provisioning cryptosystem is configured to employ
RSA
Crypt Mode
RSA
either RSA or ECC (Elliptic Curve Cryptography).
ECC
TLS (Transport Layer Security) version can be selected. The
TLS1.0
TLS Version
TLS1.2
default is TLS 1.2 for strong secure.
TLS1.2
SIP signaling TLS encryption primary key method.
System will be restarted after Save.
The range is as below:
None,
Refer to
First TLS Crypto
None
AES_128_CBC_SHA,
description
ARIA_128_CBC_SHA,
AES_128_CBC_SHA256,
ARIA_256_CBC_SHA256
SIP signaling TLS encryption second key method.
System will be restarted after Save.
The range is as below:
Second TLS
None,
Refer to
None
Crypto
AES_128_CBC_SHA,
description
ARIA_128_CBC_SHA,
AES_128_CBC_SHA256,
ARIA_256_CBC_SHA256
When implemented by the carrier, the system can encrypt
Disable,
SRTP Usage
media (RTP) packets employing SRTP (Secure Real-Time
Disable
Enable
Transport Protocol).
The first priority Crypt method for SRTP.
The range is as below:
None,
Refer to
First SRTP Crypto
None
AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80,
description
ARIA_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80,
ARIA_CM_192_HMAC_SHA1_80
The second priority Crypt method for SRTP.
The range is as below:
Second SRTP
None,
Refer to
None
Crypto
AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80,
description
ARIA_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80,
ARIA_CM_192_HMAC_SHA1_80
Save button: save provisioning for the specified common CONFTYPE or specific SIP Extension with Private MAC.
Store uploaded Provision files button: Store the uploaded provision files.
Download Provision files button: download the provision files.
View Provision files button: display all of saved provisioning information.
View TLS Cert files button: display all of saved TLS Cert files information.
473
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.8.9 Provisioning File View & Delete
Selecting Provisioning File View & Delete displays a list of all the Provisioning files stored in the
provisioning files directory as shown in the following figure. Note this does not included files that
have been uploaded to iPECS eMG/UCP file system but not “stored” under PGM 212. To delete
a file from the provisioning file directory, check the box in front of the file to be deleted then click
[Delete].
Figure 4.4.8.9-1 Provisioning File View & Delete
474
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.8.10 VMEX Station Data - PGM 215
Selecting VMEX Station data will display the VMEX Station Data input page as shown in the
following figure. Enter a range, and click [Load] to view the VMEX Data for all stations in the
range. Use the check boxes to indicate the VMEX Station Data to modify. After modifying the
data, click [Save] to store the VMEX Station Data.
Enter VMEX Station Index Range: eMG80: 1-140 / eMG800: 1-1200 / UCP: 1-2400
Figure 4.4.8.10-1 VMEX Station Data
The Virtual Mobile Extension feature permits a remote mobile phone to act as a station within the
system employing SIP. For proper operation, various parameters as shown in the following table
must be configured for the Station data.
Table 4.4.8.10-1 VMEX Station Data
ATTRIBUTE
Station Number
Mobile Number
DID Number
Connection
Table
Proxy Address
Fail-over
DESCRIPTION
The station number of the VMEX can be modified. The VMEX station
number must not conflict with other numbering plans. The station number
can be modified here or in PGM 105 and is affected by the 8 Digit Table
The Caller Id of the Mobile phone must be entered to allow the system to
recognize the VMEX phone. The mobile number here must match the
number in the SIP From header.
The DID number associated with the VMEX must be configured to allow
for recognition of calls to the VMEX.
An index to the Connection Table PGM 216 must be entered. One of ten
indices can be assigned permitting the use of multiple SIP Call servers.
The SIP Proxy for the VMEX must be configured for access to the VMEX.
The index (Station Number) of the Mobile Extension Table (PGM 236)
can be assigned for Fail-over operation. In this case, the Table entry
must be configured for fail-over operation.
475
RANGE
Station
Number
0 ~ 10
Station
Number
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.8.11 VMEX Connection table - PGM 216
Selecting VMEX Connection table will display the VMEX Connection Data input page. Use the
check boxes to indicate the Table index data to modify and click [Save] button to store.
Figure 4.4.8.11-1 VMEX Connection Table
With VMEX, the carrier’s Mobile network sends calls to and from the Mobile phone directly to the
system employing a SIP Call server. For proper operation, the SIP Call server must be configured
and special prefix codes must be defined for calls from and to the mobile phone.
Table 4.4.8.11-1 VMEX Connection Table
ATTRIBUTE
Proxy IP
Domain Name
Port
Firewall
E164
To Prefix
From Contact
Prefix
Outbound Prefix
DESCRIPTION
This field assigns the IP address or URL of the Service Provider’s
SIP Proxy server.
Domain name of the Service Provider’s SIP Call server that is used
in SIP “To:” headers.
Normally SIP signaling messages are sent on port 5060. If desired a
different port can be defined.
The iPECS system can use the Firewall address or LAN address of
the iPECS system board when communicating with the VMEX.
The structure of the received SIP invite To header from the VMEX
can be defined for proper conversion. This field is not presently
used.
A special prefix code is included in the SIP invite “To” header sent
from iPECS system to the carrier’s SIP Call server to identify VMEX
service
A special prefix code is included in the SIP invite “From” and
“Contact” header sent from iPECS system to the carrier’s SIP Call
server to identify VMEX service
A special prefix code that must be in the SIP invite “To” header
received by iPECS system for calls from the VMEX. If the prefix
received does not match this entry, the call is rejected.
Outbound Usage Not used.
Diversion Usage
Not used
476
RANGE
DEFAULT
5060
Not/
Apply
Unknown
International
National
Local
3 to 5 digits
3 to 5 digits
8 digits
Apply
Unknown
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9 Tables Data
Selecting the Tables Data group returns the sub-menu displayed in the left frame as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 4.4.9-1 Tables Data
477
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.1 LCR Control Attributes - PGM 220
Selecting LCR Control Attributes will display the LCR Control Attributes data entry page. Click
[Save] button after changing Value.
The LCR Tables provide a mechanism to define the database, which will route outgoing calls,
particularly long distance, using the most cost effective route. User dialed digits are compared to
table entries and modified appropriately based on time of day, day of week, and assigned routes.
There are four LCR Tables, LCR Control Attributes, LCR Leading Digit Table, LCR Digit
Modification Table, and LCR Initialization Table.
Figure 4.4.9.1-1 LCR Control Attributes
The LCR Control Attributes Table, among other items, allows assignment of the LCR Access
Modes. The LCR Access Modes defines the user operations that will access the LCR feature.
The LCR Access Modes are:
LCR Disabled.
Loop (user dials ‘9’ or CO/IP Group code (8xx), or presses a Loop button).
Loop and Internal (user dials digits without a CO/IP Access Code prefix).
Loop and Direct CO Line (user dials CO Line Access Code (88xx) or pressing a {CO
line} button).
Loop, Direct CO Line, and Internal.
Internal, Loop, Direct CO and Direct Loop.
In addition, days of the week are grouped into zones (Day Zones) and the time of day can be set
into three groups (Time Zones). The following table provides general descriptive information and
input ranges.
478
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.9.1-1 LCR Control Attribute
ATTRIBUTE
LCR Access Mode
Day Zone
Time Zone1
Time Zone2
Time Zone3
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Disable/
Only Loop LCR/
Internal and Loop
LCR/
Loop and Direct
This entry defines the effective LCR modes, the modes
CO LCR/
by which the user can access LCR.
Internal, Loop and
Direct CO LCR/
Internal, Loop,
Direct CO and
Direct Loop LCR
Each day of the week is assigned to a Day Zone (1~3).
Zone1~3
(days of the
The active Day Zone is the Zone assigned to the
current day of the week.
week)
This entry defines the hours of the day during which
each Zone is active for Time Zone 1. Note hours not
00~24
defined in Time Zone 2 and 3 are automatically part of
Time Zone 1.
This entry defines the hours of the day during which
each Zone 2 is active for Time Zone 2. Note hours not
00~24
defined in Time Zone 2 and 3 are automatically part of
Time Zone 1.
This entry defines the hours of the day during which
Zone 3 is active for Time Zone 3. Note hours not
00~24
defined in Time Zone 2 and 3 are automatically part of
Time Zone 1.
479
DEFAULT
Disable
Zone 1
00~24
00~24
00~24
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.2 LCR LDT (Leading Digit Table) - PGM 221
Selecting LCR-LDT (Leading Digit Table) will display the LCR-LDT data entry page. Select the
LDT Index range desired, blue text above the table header. Click [Save] button after changing
Value.
Enter LDT Table Index Range: eMG80: 1-10 / eMG800: 1-32 / UCP: 1-32
Figure 4.4.9.2-1 LCR Leading Digit Table
The Leading Digits Table is used to analyze the user-dialed digits to determine an appropriate
Digit Modification Table Index. LDT Tables are provided for 10 for eMG80 system & 32 for
eMG800/UCP system. The Table is divided into bins. The applicable LCR Access Modes (LCR
Type) and the digits (up to the first 12) dialed by the user are compared with the entries in the
Leading Digit Table. In addition, indices to the Digit Modification Table are defined for each of the
three (3) Zones and Time Zones configured in the LCR Control Attributes. The following table
provides a brief description and entries for the Leading Digit Table.
Table 4.4.9.2-1 LCR LEADING DIGITS
ATTRIBUTE
LCR Type
DESCRIPTION
This entry defines the LCR modes that will apply to this
LDT index.
480
RANGE
DEFAULT
Internal,
CO Line,
Both
Both
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.9.2-1 LCR LEADING DIGITS
ATTRIBUTE
Compared Digits
Check Password
LDT Zone Number
DMT1
DMT2
DMT3
DESCRIPTION
Up to 12 digits that, if matched by the user dialed digits, will
access the DMT Indices of the associated Leading Digit
Table bin.
If enabled (ON), when the dialed digits match the LDT
digits, the system will send second dial tone to request the
user input a valid Authorization code.
If the LDT Zone Number of a station/co line is equal to this
value, this LDT table is available to the station/co line.
(Station Data->Common Attributes(111), CO Line Data>Common Attributes(140))
This entry defines the Digit Modification Table index
(00~99) for each Time Zone for Day Zone 1. The
appropriate index will be selected for the current Day and
Time Zone. One entry (DMT index) is made for each Time
Zone, six (6) digits.
This entry defines the Digit Modification Table index
(00~99) for each Time Zone for Day Zone 2. The
appropriate index will be selected for the current Day and
Time Zone. One entry (DMT index) is made for each Time
Zone, six (6) digits.
This entry defines the Digit Modification Table index
(00~99) for each Time Zone for Day Zone 3. The
appropriate index will be selected for the current Day and
Time Zone. One entry (DMT index) is made for each Time
Zone, six (6) digits.
481
RANGE
DEFAULT
Max. 12 digits
(Include * and #)
OFF
ON
OFF
1-100
1
Must be 6 digits
3 DMT indices
Must be 6 digits
3 DMT indices
Must be 6 digits
3 DMT indices
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.3 LCR DMT (Digit Modification Table) - PGM 222
Selecting LCR DMT (Digit Modification Table) will display the LCR-DMT data entry page. Enter
the DMT Table Index range then click [Load] to modify the DMT data. Click [Save] button after
changing Value.
Figure 4.4.9.3-1 LCR Digit Modification Table
Using the index determined from the analysis of the LCR Leading Digits Table, the dialed number
is modified in accordance with the Digit Modification Table and sent over the CO/IP group
assigned for the index.
Digits of the dialed number can be deleted based on the “Removal Position” and “Number of
digits to be removed” entries and a digit stream can be inserted in the resulting number. Counting
from the first dialed digit, the Removal Position defines the location of the digit where removal
begins and, the Number of digits to be removed defines the number of digits to remove. The “Add
Digits” are then inserted in the resulting number at the digit position assigned by the Add Position
entry. The resulting number is then dialed over the CO/IP path assigned. If the assigned path is
not available, the “Alternate DMT index” is used to determine the number and CO/IP path to be
used.
482
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.9.3-1 LCR DIGIT MODIFICATION
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
This entry defines the digit stream to insert in the number
after digit removal. Digits 0~9, ‛*‘, ‛#‘, and special
characters,
Add Digits
P: timed Pause
D: Dial tone detect
F: Billing station number
This entry defines the position of the digit where removal
Removal Position
is to begin, starting with the 1st dialed digit (01).
Number of digits to This entry defines the number of digits to remove starting
be removed
at the “Removal Position
This entry defines the position in the number, after digit
Add Position
removal, where the Add Digits are inserted.
CO/IP Group
Alternative DMT
Index
Networking
Number Plan Bin
SMDR Code
This entry defines the CO/IP Group that the system will
attempt to use for the call.
This entry defines an Alternate Digit Modification Table
Index to use if no path is available in the assigned CO/IP
Group.
This entry defines the Net Number Plan Table bin that
the system will attempt to use for the transit out call.
This only used for TNET with CM. This code will be send
to CM when the TNET status is changed from Local
survival mode to bypass mode.
483
RANGE
DEFAULT
Max. 25 digits
01~12
1
00~12
0
01~13
1
eMG80:01-21
eMG800:01-202
UCP: 01-201
1
00~99
001-251
Max. 4 digits
(Include * and #)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.4 LCR Table Initialization - PGM 223
Selecting LCR Table Initialization will display the LCR Table Initialization data entry page. Click
[Initialize] button to initialize input data.
Figure 4.4.9.4-1 LCR Table Initialization
The LCR Table Initialization allows global values to be assigned to the various Digit Modification
Table entries. In addition, the LCR Leading Digits and LCR Digit Modification Tables can be
initialized to the default (no entries) state.
The CO group rage is from 1 to 21 for eMG80 and from 1 to 201 for eMG800/UCP.
484
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.5 Digit Conversion Table - PGM 270
Selecting Digit Conversion Table will display the page shown. Click [Save] button after changing
Value.
Enter Table Number: eMG80: 1-15 / eMG800: 1-32 / UCP: 1-32
Figure 4.4.9.5-1 Digit Conversion Table
The Digit Conversion Table index is assigned to the Station and CO line. In addition, digit
conversion can be applied according to the Apply Time Type (Unconditional, Day/Night/Timed or
LCR/Time) as necessary. Each Table has 200 entries of up to 24 digits. Entries in the Tables can
be any digit (0-9), “*”, “#”,”X” (Mask Digit), “F” (Ignore digit). Each Index can be applied by Apply
Option (All/Station/CO line/Disable).
Table 4.4.9.5-1 Digit Conversion table
ATTRIBUTE
Apply time
DESCRIPTION
The Apply time type to be applied when the
dialed digit is dialed.
Auto Ring Mode table Day/Night/Timed Time Table Index.
Dialed digit
Changed digit
ARS CO Access
Code
Apply option
Dialed digit to be compared.
Changed digit.
If a selected path is not available for some
reason (All Busy, Line Fault etc.) after digit
conversion, Alternative Route Selection (ARS)
will connect calls using predefined designated
ARS digit in digit conversion table.
The Apply Option can be applied according to
the caller.
485
RANGE
Unconditional,
Follow Day/Night/Timed,
Follow LCR
N/A,
eMG:00-15
UCP:00-32
Max. 24 Digits
Max. 24 Digits
DEFAULT
Unconditional
N/A
Max. 8 Digits
All / Station /
CO line / Disable
All
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.6 Toll Exception Table - PGM 224
Selecting Toll Exception Table will display the Toll Table data entry page. Select the desired
Allow or Deny Table, blue text above the table header, desired. Click [Save] button after
changing Value.
Figure 4.4.9.6-1 Toll Exception Table
There are ten Toll restriction Tables arranged in pairs. Each pair consists of an Allow Table and a
Deny Table. Allow and Deny entries for Table `A‘ apply to Station and DISA Class of Service 2/4
and 11. Allow and Deny entries for Table `B‘ apply to Station and DISA Class of Service 3/4 and
11. Allow and Deny entries for Table `C‘ apply to Station and DISA Class of Service 5 and 6.
Allow and Deny entries for Table `D‘ apply to Station and DISA Class of Service 8/10 and 11.
Allow and Deny entries for Table `E‘ apply to Station and DISA Class of Service 9 to 11. The
Allow and Deny Tables each permit up to 50 entries of up to 20 digits. Entries in the Tables can
be any digit (0-9), “#” as a wild card (don‘t care) digit, or “*” as an end of entry digit.
Based on Table entries, stations or DISA users are allowed or denied dialing specified numbers.
The following rules apply to establishing restrictions based on the Table entries:
If the appropriate Allow/Deny Table pair has no entries and COS is 2 to 4, no
restrictions are applied. If the COS is 5 or 6, no Long Distance dialing is allowed.
If entries are only made in the Allow Table, only those numbers entered can be dialed,
all other dialed numbers will be restricted.
If entries are only made in the Deny Table, only those numbers entered will be
restricted and all other numbers can be dialed.
When there are entries in both the Allow and Deny Table pair, if the number is in the
Deny Table, the number will be restricted otherwise the number can be dialed without
restriction.
486
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.7 Emergency Code Table - PGM 226
Selecting Emergency Code Table will display the Emergency Code Table data entry page. Click
[Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.9.7-1 Emergency Code Table
The Emergency Code Table is used to identify emergency numbers which, when dialed, will
override all COS dialing restrictions. An Emergency Code number may be up to fifteen (15) digits
in length.
487
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.8 COS Table
Selecting COS Table will display the COS Table data entry page. Data can be filtered to display
specific modes and the values to change can be limited to a specific mode and type, Station or
System Authorization codes.
Figure 4.4.9.8-1 COS Table
Assignments for COS are made for the Day, Night, and Timed Ring for each station and system
Authorization code. The standard Station COS 1 to 11 is assigned to each Authorization code.
Note the COS may also be defined in the Station and System Authorization Code Tables.
488
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.9 Authorization Codes Table - PGM 227
There are two Authorization Code Tables, the System Authorization Code Table and Station
Authorization Code Table. Selecting Station Authorization Code Table will display the data entry
page in Figure 4.4.9.9-1 and selecting System Authorization Code Table will display the page in
Figure 4.4.9.9-2. Enter a Station or System Index range and click [Load] to modify the data. For
convenience, the copy, paste, and drag is available to enter or modify data. Please click [Save]
button to apply after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.9.9-1 Station Authorization Code Table
User can change the authorization code and COS for the station range across the board and click
the Range save button to save.
489
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Enter System Index Range: eMG80: 1-360 / eMG800: 1-1200 / UCP: 1-2800
Figure 4.4.9.9-2 System Authorization Code Table
User can change COS for the system index range across the board and click the Range save
button to save.
Authorization codes are employed to control access to system resources and facilities. Walking
COS, CO/IP Group access, DISA calls and certain Call Forward types may require input of a valid
Authorization code. Codes up to 12 digits may be entered into the system database.
There are two types of Authorization codes, station and system. The Station entries are
associated with individual stations. The number of system Authorization codes varies based on
the configuration; the number of available codes is provided in Table 2.1-x. Each Authorization
code may be assigned a separate COS for Day, Night and Timed Ring mode operation.
The system will allow the station associated Authorization codes to be duplicated. However, the
iPECS will not allow duplicate or conflicting system level codes unless the ‘*’ and Authorization
table indexing is used to enter codes. Conflicting codes occur when a shorter code contains the
first digits of a longer code, i.e. 12 conflicts with 1234.
490
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.9.9-1 STATION CLASS-OF-SERVICE
STATION
COS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
RESTRICTIONS
No restrictions are placed on dialing from the station.
The assignments in Exception Table A are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
The assignments in Exception Table B are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
The assignments in both Exception Tables A & B are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
The leading digit dialed cannot be a Long Distance code, default “0”, and further
denied/allowed based on Exception Table C.
The leading digits dialed cannot be a Long Distance code & digit count cannot exceed the LD
digit counter, default 8 digits, and further denied/allowed based on Exception Table C.
Intercom and paging calls are allowed. No outgoing dialing except for emergency calls is
allowed on CO Lines.
The assignments in the Exception Table D are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
The assignments in the Exception Table E are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
The assignments in the Exception Table D & E are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
The assignments in the Exception Table A & B and D & E are monitored for allow and deny
numbers.
Table 4.4.9.9-2 STATION/CO LINE COS TOLL RESTRICTIONS
STA COS 1
STA COS 2
STA COS 3
STA COS 4
STA COS 5
STA COS 6
STA COS 7
CO COS 1
CO COS 2
CO COS 3
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
Exception Table
A governs the
dialing
Exception Table
A governs the
dialing
No Restriction
Exception Table
B governs the
dialing
No Restriction
Exception Table
B governs the
dialing
Exception Table
A & B governs
the dialing
Exception Table
A governs the
dialing
Exception Table
B governs the
dialing
Local Call only
(LD Code, “1” or
“0”) and Table C
Local Call only
(LD Code, “1” or
“0”) and Table C
Local Call only
(LD Code, “1” or
“0”) and Table C
Only Local Call
Only Local Call
(LD code/counter) (LD
and Table C
code/counter)
and Table C
In-house dialing In-house dialing
only
only
Only Local Call
(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
In-house dialing
only
491
CO COS 4
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
In-house dialing
only
CO COS 5
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
In-house dialing
only
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.9.9-2 STATION/CO LINE COS TOLL RESTRICTIONS
CO COS 1
STA COS 8
STA COS 9
STA COS 10
STA COS 11
CO COS 2
CO COS 3
CO COS 4
CO COS 5
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
Only Local
Call(LD
code/counter)
and Table C
No Restriction
Exception Table
D governs the
dialing
Exception Table
D governs the
dialing
No Restriction
Exception Table
E governs the
dialing
Exception Table
E governs the
dialing
No Restriction
Exception Table
D & E governs
the dialing
Exception Table
D & E governs
the dialing
No Restriction
Exception Table
A & B and D & E
governs the
dialing
Exception Table
A & B and D & E
governs the
dialing
No Restriction
492
No Restriction
No Restriction
No Restriction
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.10 Customer Call Routing Table - PGM 228
Selecting CCR Table will display the Customer Call Routing data entry page. Enter an index to
select the appropriate CCR Table and click [Load] to modify the table. Click [Save] button after
changing Value.
Figure 4.4.9.10-1 Customer Call Routing Table
The system incorporates IVR (Interactive Voice Response) capabilities called CCR (Customer
Call Routing). After, or during a VSF Announcement, the caller may dial digits to select a
destination or route for the call. The CCR Table defines the destination type and value associated
with the digit dialed by the caller in response to the index, a VSF Announcement (01-70). The
available destinations are shown in Table 4.4.9.10-1 below.
Up to 70 single-level Audio Text menus may be assigned or, multi-level menu structures
(maximum 70 levels) can be established using one menu as a destination for the previous level.
Each CCR announcement can have re-route destination – Busy / Error / No Answer case.
Each re-routed destination types are Tone / Attendant / Station Group / VSF Announcement
number.
The table includes a “CCR 1 Digit Only” option. When this option is enabled, the system will
accept only a single digit as the entry. When the option is OFF, the caller can dial multiple digits
that are accepted as DISA dialing.
Temporary announcement can be used in holiday, or emergency case.
When Temporary Announcement Usage is set to ON, programmed Temp Announcement is
played instead of CCR table announcement.
This Temporary Announcement can be set also by Remote Access - by using [Remote Access to
Mobile Extension] feature.
493
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
After access to Mobile Extension,
To turn On Temp Announcement, 8 + CCR Announcement Number.
To turn Off Temp Announcement, 9 + CCR Announcement Number.
Table 4.4.9.10-1 CCR DESTINATIONS (PGM 228)
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
N/A
Route to a Station
Route to a Station Group
Route with System Speed Dial
Route as PBX Transfer with System Speed Dial (Flash then dial speed dial digits)
Route to VSF Announcement
Route to VSF Announcement and disconnect
Route to Networked Station
Conference Room
Internal Page
External page
All Call Page
Route to voice mail (station group/station number)
Company Directory (USA Only)
Record VM Greeting (USA Only)
Room type Conf Group Join
494
Issue 1.6
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.11 Executive/Secretary Table - PGM 229
Selecting Executive/Secretary will display the Executive/Secretary Table data entry page. Click
[Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.9.11-1 Executive/Secretary Table
Stations can be paired as Executive/Secretary pairs so that when the Executive enters DND,
intercom and transferred calls are automatically routed to the Secretary. An Executive may have
only one Secretary however, a Secretary can be assigned to multiple Executives. A Secretary of
one pair may be the Executive of another however, assignments that form a loop-back are not
allowed. In addition, when active, the Secretary can be assigned to receive the Executive‘s voice
messages, refer to Common Attributes section.
The “CO Call to Sec” option will route all CO calls to the Executive to the defined Secretary‘s
station regardless of the Executive‘s station status. The “Call Exec if Sec DND” option will route
Executive calls back to the Executive if the Secretary is in DND. The Exec Grade permits higher
grade Executives to override the Executive/Secretary Forward feature to call a lower grade
Executive (Korea only). The highest grade is 1 and the lowest grade is 12. The “ICM Call to Sec”
option will route all internal calls to the Executive(except for calls from higher or same grade
executive) to the defined Secretary‘s station regardless of the Executive‘s station status.
Refer to the following table for a description of the Executive/Secretary parameters and the input
required.
495
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.9.11-1 Executive/Secretary Table
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Assign Executive.
Assign Secretary.
If desired, all incoming CO calls to the Exec. The call is
CO Call to Secretary
routed to the Secretary’s station regardless of the
Executive’s status.
Call Executive if Secretary is in If the Secretary is in DND, Executive calls can be routed
DND
back to the Executive.
Higher (or equal) grade Executives can override the
th
Executive/Secretary Forward feature (5 : ICM call to
Executive grade
SEC) to call a lower grade Executive. Highest grade: 01,
Lowest grade: 12.
If this option is ON, all internal calls to the executive
station (except for calls from higher or same grade
executive) are routed to the Secretary’s station
regardless of the Executive’s status.
ICM Call to Secretary
8801 Default value
Korea, India, Israel, Turkey,
Thailand : ON
Otherwise : OFF
When executive call to the secretary who is in ‘T’ mode.
Secretary Auto Answer
The call will be answered by hands free mode if it is ON.
If Group is greater than 1, it works that lower grade
executive can call to higher grade executive directly
Executive Group
when they are same group.
RANGE
DEFAULT
Enable/
Disable
Disable
Enable/
Disable
Disable
01~12
12
Enable/
Disable
Disable
Enable/
Disable
Disable
00-50
00
Executive
Secretary
496
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.12 Flexible DID Conversion Table - PGM 231
Selecting Flexible DID Conversion Table will display the Flexible DID Table data entry page. For
convenience, the copy, paste, and drag is available to enter or modify data. Click [Save] button
after changing Value. Click [Initialize All table Data] to initialize all table and Click [Delete All
Table Data] to delete.
Figure 4.4.9.12-1 Flexible DID Conversion Table
When the received DID digits are converted, the resulting three-digit number may be used as an
index to the Flexible DID Conversion Table. The Flexible DID Table index is used when DID Line
is assigned a Conversion type 2, refer to the DID Service attributes section 4.4.4.6. Using the
index from the digit conversion a destination for the DID call is determined by a Look-up in the
Flexible DID Table. The destination for the call is generally defined as a type and a value. The
type selects options such as station, station group, VSF, etc. The value specifies the particular
station, station group, etc. In addition, ICLID routing can be enabled for DID lines or can be
assigned as an index to the Auto Ring Mode table.
Table 4.4.9.12-1 FLEXIBLE DID CONVERSION
ATTRIBUTE
Day Ring Mode Destination
Night Ring Mode Destination
Timed Ring Mode Destination
Reroute Destination
DESCRIPTION
Destination setting for Day Ring mode.
Destination setting for Night Ring mode.
Destination setting for Timed Ring mode.
Destination setting for Reroute Ring mode.
497
RANGE
DEFAULT
N/A,
Station,
Station Group,
System Speed,
PABX transfer with
system speed,
VSF announcement,
VSF announcement
and Disconnect,
Networking,
Conference room,
Internal page,
External page,
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.9.12-1 FLEXIBLE DID CONVERSION
ATTRIBUTE
ICLID Table
ICM Tenancy Group
(Auto Ring Table)
MOH
Ring Tone
Name
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
All call page,
Voice mail (Station
group),
ICLID Table,
Company Directory,
Record VM Greeting,
Room type Conf Group
Join
OFF/ON
DEFAULT
Use ICLID Routing, section 4.4.7.4.
OFF
A DID Conversion Table Index can be
N/A
eMG80: 0~15
assigned to employ an ICM Tenancy Group
eMG800: 0~32
Auto Ring Table to determine
UCP: 0~100
Day/Night/Timed operation mode.
A Music source is assigned so that calls to the
Refer to CO Hold,
Refer to CO
destination receive audio from the source in
Internal/External Music
Hold
place of ring-back tone.
1,
External Music 2,
VSF MOH,
SLT MOH 1,
SLT MOH 2,
SLT MOH 3,
SLT MOH 4,
SLT MOH 5,
VSF MOH 2,
VSF MOH 3
A call routed with the DID Conversion Table
0-16
0
will employ the selected Ring tone to alert the
destination.
An eleven character Name can be configured
11 characters
for the Table bin.
498
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.13 System Speed Zone Table - PGM 232
Selecting System Speed Zone will display the System Speed Zone data entry page. Click [Save]
button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.9.13-1 System Speed Zone
System Speed Dial Bins assigned to a zone are only available to stations allowed access to that
zone. Each zone can be assigned to apply the appropriate Station and CO Line COS for the
speed dial number prior to dialing.
The speed Bin in Zone and Station Range to access zone is different according to selecting
Speed Numbering, refer to ‘Speed Numbering’ in System ID (100)
Table 4.4.9.13-1 SYSTEM SPEED ZONES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Speed Bin Range in Zone
Station Range to Access
Zone
A range of Speed Dial Bins is assigned to a zone.
A range of Stations is permitted access to the System
Speed dials in the Zone.
Toll Checking
Toll restriction can be applied to Speed Dials in the Zone.
Auth Checking
The user can be required to enter a valid Authorization
code to use Speed Dials in the zone.
499
RANGE
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
DEFAULT
ON
ON
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.14 Auto Ring Mode Table - PGM 233
Selecting Auto Ring Mode Table will display the Auto Ring Mode Table data entry page. Enter the
desired index (Tenancy Group) and click [Load] to enter data. Click [Save] button after changing
Value.
Enter Index: eMG80: 0-15 / eMG800: 0-32 / UCP: 0-100
Figure 4.4.9.14-1 Auto Ring Mode Table
The system can be programmed to automatically select the Ring and COS based on time of day
and day of the week. Three Ring & COS modes are available, Day, Night, and Timed. The Ring
assignments are as defined in CO Ring Assignments. COS assignments are made in the Station
COS and DISA COS programs discussed in sections, respectively.
The start times for Day, Night and start and end times for Timed modes are entered for each day
of the week. After the Timed end time the mode returns to day if time is not in the Night mode.
The Attendant can override the Automatic selection and select the desired mode (Day, Night, and
Timed) manually. A separate Auto Ring Table can be established for each ICM Tenancy Group in
section (indices 1 ~ 15 for eMG80 & indices 1~32 for eMG800 & 1~100 for UCP) and for the
system (index 00).
500
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.15 Voice Mail Dialing Table - PGM 234
Selecting Voice Mail Dialing Table will display the Voice Mail Dialing data entry page. Click [Save]
button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.9.15-1 External Voice Mail Dialing Table
When an external Voice Mail system is used that connects to an SLT port, a digit sequence must
be defined for the system to signal various call characteristics to the Voice Mail system. The
external Voice Mail uses the sequences to determine appropriate announcements or further call
routing. The Table permits the definition of digits as either a prefix or suffix to other digits (station
number for mailbox identification). Sequences are defined for such call characteristics as Put Mail,
Get Mail, No Answer call, etc. as described in the following table.
Table 4.4.9.15-1 VOICE MAIL DIALING TABLE
ATTRIBUTE
Voice Mail 1 (Put)
Voice Mail 2 (Get)
DESCRIPTION
Code to send when the voice mail is to receive
call to record a message.
Put Mail.
When you enter the Digit, the following Digit
means as below:
P: Pause, D: DND, F: Flash
Code to send when the voice mail is to playback
a recorded message.
501
RANGE
Prefix
Suffix
(Max. 12 Digits/
Include *, #, P, D, F)
Prefix
Suffix
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.9.15-1 VOICE MAIL DIALING TABLE
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Get Mail.
When you enter the Digit, the following Digit
means as below:
P: Pause, D: DND, F: Flash
RANGE
(Max. 12 Digits/
Include *, #, P, D, F)
Voice Mail 3 (Busy)
Code to send when the voice mail is to receive a
call when the user is busy.
Busy Mail.
When you enter the Digit, the following Digit
means as below:
P: Pause, D: DND, F: Flash
Prefix
Suffix
(Max. 12 Digits/
Include *, #, P, D, F)
Voice Mail 4 (No
Answer)
Code to send when the voice mail is to receive a
call when the user did not answer.
No Answer Mail.
When you enter the Digit, the following Digit
means as below:
P: Pause, D: DND, F: Flash
Prefix
Suffix
(Max. 12 Digits/
Include *, #, P, D, F)
Voice Mail 5 (Error)
Code to send when the voice mail is to receive a
call when a user dialing error exists.
Error Mail.
When you enter the Digit, the following Digit
means as below:
P: Pause, D: DND, F: Flash
Prefix
Suffix
(Max. 12 Digits/
Include *, #, P, D, F)
Voice Mail 6 (DND)
Code to send when the voice mail is to receive a
call when the user is in DND.
DND Mail.
When you enter the Digit, the following Digit
means as below:
P: Pause, D: DND, F: Flash
Prefix
Suffix
(Max. 12 Digits/
Include *, #, P, D, F)
Voice Mail 7
When you enter the Digit, the following Digit
means as below:
P: Pause, D: DND, F: Flash
Voice Mail 8(CLI)
When you enter the Digit, the following Digit
means as below:
P: Pause, D: DND, F: Flash
Voice Mail 9
(Disconnect)
CLI Usage
Code for disconnect call.
Disconnect Mail.
When you enter the Digit, the following Digit
means as below:
P: Pause, D: DND, F: Flash
Not use: Do not send CLI
Real CLI length: Send CLI without padding
before prefix code.
Fixed CLI length: Send CLI with fixed length.
DEFAULT
Prefix
Suffix
(Max. 12 Digits/
Include *, #, P, D, F)
Prefix
Suffix
(Max. 12 Digits/
Include *, #, P, D, F)
Prefix
Suffix
(Max. 12 Digits/
Include *, #, P, D, F)
Not use,
Real CLI length,
Fixed CLI length
Not use
Fixed CLI Length
Define length of CLI.
10-20
10
Fixed CLI Pad
Define padding character for CLI.
0-9,*,#
0
502
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.16 Registration Table - PGM 235
Selecting Registration Table will display the Registration data entry page. Click [Save] button
after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.9.16-1 MAC Registration Table
When multiple iPECS systems are located on the same LAN, it may be desirable to register addon devices employing the Registration Table.
Table 4.4.9.16-1 MAC REGISTRATION TABLE
ATTRIBUTE
MAC Address
Maximum Port
Device ID
DESCRIPTION
Enter MAC address of a device to register
Enter maximum number of ports (channels) for the device.
A device ID may be entered for registration. The Device ID
available are shown at the bottom of the System Overview
Web page.
503
RANGE
DEFAULT
00-99
000000000000
00
0-255
0
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.17 Mobile Extension Table - PGM 236
Selecting Mobile Extension Table will display the Mobile Extension data entry page. Select the
Station Order range desired, blue text above the table header. Selecting the blue colored text in
the Table header will sort the table based on the selected column. Click [Save] button after
changing Value.
Figure 4.4.9.17-1 Mobile Extension Table
A mobile phone can be used in conjunction with an iPECS Phone. The Mobile phone can access
system resources available to the user‘s wired phone and will receive ring for incoming iPECS
calls. The user may be allowed to enable the Mobile extension and define the mobile number.
The system can be defined to employ a specific CO/IP Line Group to place calls to the Mobile
phone. In addition, the mobile phone can be assigned to receive Station group calls to the
primary extension. Also, parameters for notification of new VSF voice mails can be defined.
Table 4.4.9.17-1 MOBILE EXTENSION TABLE
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
PGM Authority
The user may be allowed to activate the mobile
extension feature.
Usage
Mobile extension feature can be enabled and Fail
Over to Mobile extension can be included.
Station Group Call
Enable
VSF Notify
Notify Retry
When the paired station is a member of a Station
group (ACD, Circular, or Terminal), group calls can
be sent to the active mobile extension.
When enabled the active Mobile Extension will
receive notification by the system when the user has
a new message in the built-in Voice Mail.
The number of attempts the system will make to
complete a notification when receiving busy/no504
RANGE
Disable
Enable
Disable
Mobile Ext
Fail Over
DEFAULT
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Unused
Use
Unused
1 – 9 Times
3 Times
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.9.17-1 MOBILE EXTENSION TABLE
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
1 – 3 minutes
3 Minute
Caller
My Ext.
Caller
OFF
ON
OFF
0 ~ 255
0
0-200
0
eMG80:1~21
eMG800:1~201
UCP: 1~201
1
answer is defined.
Retry Interval
Notify CLI
Call Back
Delay Timer
Announcement
CO Group
Telephone Number
CLI Number
Suffix DID table index
to the CLI
Tel Num As CLI Num
This field defines the time between notification
attempts. If a notification fails, the system will retry
after the timer expires.
When the system sends CLI to the Mobile Extension,
the CLI can be either the original caller’s CLI or the
CLI of the station.
If “ON”, an incoming Mobile Extension call will be
released before answered and system places a call
to Mobile Extension. After the Mobile answers, the
dial tone is provided and the Mobile Extension can
place internal or external calls.
When the Mobile Extension requests a Call Back, the
system will place the Call Back after expiration of this
Delay timer.
A system announcement can be recorded to provide
the Mobile caller with a menu of dialing commands
available to the remote Mobile user, remote control.
The CO/IP Line group used to call (ring) the Mobile
Extension is defined.
The telephone number of the Mobile extension or
Fail-over number of the station must be assigned for
proper operation.
When the Mobile Telephone number and CLI do not
match, the CLI entered here is used to authorize
incoming calls from the Mobile.
An incoming DID call is passed to the Mobile
Extension with the original caller’s CLI and the
Flexible DID Conversion Table index.
(format: ‘original CLI’ + ‘*’ + ‘DID Table Index’)
If this option is set to ON, Telephone Number is used
the same as CLI Number.
That means, when the mobile user calls to his
station, if Telephone Number or CLI Number is
matched with his mobile number, then the mobile
user hears system dial tone, and calling to outside is
available.
If this option is set to OFF, only CLI Number is
matched, system dial tone is served.
505
Not assigned
Not assigned
OFF/ON
OFF
OFF/ON
ON
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.18 IPCR Agent Table - PGM 237
Selecting IPCR Agent Table will display the IPCR Agent data entry page. Select the Index and
Agent ID Order range desired, blue text above the table header. Selecting the blue colored text in
the Table header will sort the table based on the selected column. Click [Save] button after
changing Value.
Enter the Agent order: eMG80: 1-140 / eMG800: 1-1200 / UCP: 1-2400
Figure 4.4.9.18-1 IPCR Agent Table
This table correlates an Object Type (Station or CO/IP Line) to the IPCR (Call Recording) Agent
index in the IPCR server. The table is also employed with third-party servers for call recording.
When a call is placed or received by the station or CO/IP Line, the call is recorded in the IPCR
server under the Agent ID (Order number).
Multiple Announcement (1~9) in IPCR can be entered in ‘Announce Number’.
506
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.19 Dummy Dial-Tone Digit Table
Selecting Dummy Dial-Tone Digit Table will display the Dummy Dial-Tone Digit data entry page.
Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.9.19-1 Dummy Dial-Tone Digit Table
When digit conversion is programmed, the CO line is seized after digit conversion is completed
and therefore user cannot hear the CO dial tone from PX until completing digit conversion. For
this case, a dummy dial tone can be programmed. Pressing one of pre-programmed digits (‘0–9’,
‘*’, ‘#’, X’) will provide CO dial tone to the user regardless of CO line seizure.
507
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.20 Flexible Button Default Table – PGM 239
Selecting Flexible button default table will display the below page. Use the check mark to indicate
which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save] button.
Figure 4.4.9.20-1 Flexible Button Default Table
The system provide 30 default flexible button table so administrator can be configured each table
for using ‘Preset Flexible Button Default (240)’.
Administrator can assign the type among the below types on Flexible button.
Table 4.4.9.20-1 FLEX BUTTON TYPE
TYPE
REMARK
N/A
Empty (unassigned), may be defined by the user.
CO Line
Assigns button to access a defined CO/IP line.
CO Group
Assigns button to access a free line in the CO/IP Group.
Loop
Assigns button to access a loop line.
Station Number
Programming
(Numbering Plan)
Assigns button as DSS/BLF for the assigned station number.
Programming (PGM)
Station Speed Bin
System Speed Bin
Net Station Number
U-Loop
Assigns button to dial a code from the Flexible Numbering Plan, see Appendix section.
Assigns button to perform a User Program function from the Fixed Numbering Plan,
Appendix section.
Station Speed Dial bin.
System Speed Dial bin.
Refer to section Network Numbering Plan Table - PGM 324.
U-Loop button for call wait of internal & external call.
508
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.9.21 Preset Flexible Button Default – PGM 240
Selecting Preset flexible button default will display the below page. Click [Save] button after
changing Value.
Figure 4.4.9.21-1 Preset Flexible Button Default
Administrator can assign Preset flexible button table to the station automatically by default.
Before connecting the station, administrator has to set this table according to Priority, Station
Type, the number of Button, Station Range, and check the preset Index (1~30). The preset index
means the range of Flexible Button Default Table (PGM 239).
509
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.10 Networking Data
Selecting the Networking Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in the left frame as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 4.4.10-1 Networking Data
510
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.10.1 Network Basic Attributes - PGM 320
Selecting Network Basic Attributes will display the Network Basic Attributes entry page. Click
[Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.10.1-1 Network Basic Attributes
Table 4.4.10.1-1 NETWORK BASIC ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Net Enable
Net Retry Count
Net CNIP Enable
Net CONP Enable
Net Signal Method
DESCRIPTION
For operation, the Networking function must be enabled here.
Note a license is required.
Not used.
The name of calling station is sent to the called iPECS UCP.
CNIP is shown in the LCD of the called party’s station.
The name of the connected station is sent to the calling iPECS
system. The CONP is shown in the LCD of the calling party’s
station.
Network signaling can be sent in the Facility or User QSIG
supplementary service message.
Net Cas Enable
Not used.
Net VPN Enable
Not used.
Net CC Retain Mode
Net IP Auth.
This field defines the Network signaling retain mode for CCBS
service.
For operation, the Networking function must be enabled here.
Note a license is required.
511
RANGE
DEFAULT
OFF
ON
OFF
00-99
0
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
UUS/
Facility
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Facility
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.10.2 Network Supplementary Attributes - PGM 321
Selecting Network Supplementary Attributes will display the Network Supplementary Attributes
entry page. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.10.2-1 Network Supplementary Attributes
Table 4.4.10.2-1 NETWORK SUPPLEMENTARY ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Net Transfer Mode
TCP Port for BLF
UDP Port for BLF
BLF Manager IP
Duration of BLF State
Multicast IP
DESCRIPTION
Call Forward and Transfer over the network employs
the selected Rerouting or Join method
The TCP/IP port for BLF message packets to BLF
Manager is defined.
The UDP port for BLF message packets to BLF
Manager is defined.
The IP Address of BLF Manager server is required
when iPECS UCP is configured with eMG systems in
the Network.
The system sends BLF messages to the BLF
Manager at intervals of this timer.
The multicast IP address for BLF service.
When a call forward or transfer does not receive a
Net Trans Recall timer response for the Network system, the call recalls the
transferring party at expiration of this timer.
If an outgoing SIP call receives no response after
NET Reroute CO
expiration of this timer, the call is rerouted to the
Group
alternate CO line.
BLF Service Usage
BLF Manager support must be enabled for use.
512
RANGE
DEFAULT
REROUT/
JOIN
REROUT
9500-9999
9500
9500-9999
9501
0.0.0.0
01-99
(Sec.)
10
0.0.0.0
001-300
(msec)
10
eMG80:0~20
eMG800:0~200
UCP:0~200
OFF, ON
ON
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.10.2-1 NETWORK SUPPLEMENTARY ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Alternate/Secondary
signal port
DESCRIPTION
This signal port is used to add an alternate or
secondary receiving signal port. A default receiving
signal port is TCP 1720 and an additional signal port
will be opened if this field is configured to valid value.
When the system is installed behind xDSL modem,
the problem of consecutive second call can happen
by uncontrolled H.323 ALG function at xDSL modem.
This field can be used to solve the problem of
consecutive second call.
RANGE
DEFAULT
0,
1024-65535
0
4.4.10.3 Net CO Line Overview
Selecting Net CO Line Overview will be displayed as below.
Figure 4.4.10.3-1 Network CO Line Overview
513
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.10.4 Network CO Line Attributes - PGM 322
Selecting Network CO Line Attributes will display the Network CO Line Group entry page. Enter a
valid CO/IP Line range and click [Load] to enter the Network CO Line data. Click [Save] button
after changing Value.
Enter CO Range: eMG80: 1-74 / eMG800: 1-600 / UCP: 1-998
Figure 4.4.10.4-1 Network CO Line Attributes
Table 4.4.10.4-1 NETWORK CO LINE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Networking CO Group
Network CO Line Type
Interworking System
DESCRIPTION
The CO/IP Lines in the assigned group are employed
as Network CO Lines, connecting to other systems in
the network.
The CO/IP Line is assigned for use by the network as
a PSTN (carrier) or connection to the network.
Select Qsig interworking system among the below
type.
- iPECS (Basic call, Supplementary service)
- Nortel (Basic call, Name service)
- Panasonic (Basic call, Name service-Tunneled
message)
- Cisco (Basic call, Name service-Display IE)
- Simens (Basic call, Name service)
- Astra (Basic call)
514
RANGE
DEFAULT
00-24
00
NET/
PSTN
PSTN
iPECS (Basic
call,
Refer to Description
Supplementar
y service)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
4.4.10.5 Network Numbering Plan Table Overview
Selecting Network Numbering Plan Table Overview will be displayed as below.
Figure 4.4.10.5-1 Network Numbering Plan Table overview
515
Issue 1.6
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.10.6 Network Numbering Plan - PGM 324
Selecting Network Numbering Plan Table will display the Network Numbering Plan Table data
entry page. Enter a valid table index and click [Load] to enter the Network Numbering Plan data.
For convenience, the copy, paste, and drag is available to enter or modify data. Click [Save]
button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.10.6-1 Network Numbering Plan Table
The Network Numbering Plan establishes the digit strings that make-up the numbering plan and
associated routing for each Plan code.
Table 4.4.10.6-1 NETWORK NUMBERING PLAN TABLE
ATTRIBUTE
Network Type
Numbering Plan
Code
Networking CO
Group
CPN ISDN
Information
CPN Information
Setup Wait
Response Time
ALT Speed Bin
DESCRIPTION
The type or use of the code is defined as directed to the
PSTN (carrier) or a Networked system.
This field defines the digits, 0 ~ 9 that make up a Network
Numbering Plan code. An ‘*’ will represent any digit. To
assign the code for the stations in another system, enter
the common station number digits followed by “#”.
The Numbering Plan CO Group indicates the Network
CO/IP Group that is used for the connection. A ‘00’ entry
is an internal net station number.
When an ISDN Line is used to place a network call, the
CPN ISDN Information and the network Number are used
as the Called party number.
RANGE
DEFAULT
NET / PSTN
NET
Max. 16 digits
(Include * and #)
00-24
Max. 16 digits
When a VoIP channel is used to place a network call, the
CPN used is the IP address associated with the VoIP
channel.
Enter IP address
1: 00 CPN INFORMATION 01
2: 00 CPN INFORMATION 02
3: 00 CPN INFORMATION 03
4: 00 CPN INFORMATION 04
Networking call-setup failure timer when there is no
0, 3~15 Sec.
proceeding message from network (i.e. IP-Network is
down)
Should the Network path fail, the system can place the
eMG80:2000~4999
call over an alternative path using a System Speed Dial eMG800:2000~9999
516
0
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.10.6-1 NETWORK NUMBERING PLAN TABLE
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
number.
MPB IP Address
MPB Port number
Digit Repeat
PSTN Enblock
PSTN CLI Method
CO Attendant Code
CLI
Firewall Routing
Transit Out Auth
COS
SMDR Digit Hide
Site name
Emergency reroute
timer
Tunneled SIG MSG
Alternate/Secondary
signal port
Local route ID
RANGE
DEFAULT
UCP: 20000~31999
This field is the IP Address of the destination system for
the code
The TCP/IP port number of destination system for the
Net Numbering Plan code is defined.
When the number plan code, see above, is for PSTN call
or transit-call, the number code can be included in
SETUP message.
When a PSTN receives a Transit-out call from a
networked user, the digits can be sent En-block (YES) or
Over-lap (NO).
The CLI sent with the call for this code can be set as the
NET CLI (station number) or PSTN, which sends the CLI
configured for the CO/IP Line and Station CLI.
0.0.0.0
0000-9999
5588
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
NET
PSTN
NET
When a networked system places a transit out call, the
OFF
Centralized ATD CLI can be sent.
ON
When the system can communicate with the networked
OFF
system directly, over a common VPN, the systems Non
ON
Firewall address is sent in IP packets (OFF). Otherwise,
the Firewall IP address is sent (ON).
When a user requests a transit-out call by seizing a CO
Yes
line, COS may be applied according to the authorization
No
code.
For a Transit-out call from the iPECS, the networked
Yes
system that places the call may desire to receive the
No
Authorization code
A twelve-character name can be assigned to the system
Max. 12 characters
for use with network calls.
When a networked station places an Emergency call and
the “Emergency CO or Group” in the Station Common
0-10
Attributes is a Transit-out CO/IP Line or group, the call
(Sec.)
will Fail-over to the “Fail-over CO Group” in PGM 133 or
the “Net Reroute CO Group” in PGM 321 after this timer
expires. The “Fail-over CO Group” will have priority.
Send and Receive H323 message that include ISDN
OFF
QSIG message. It is used to make networking with
ON
Panasonic system.
This destination signal port is used on calling to remote
network system. A default destination signal port is TCP
1720 but the port number is changed if this field is
configured to valid value. When the system is installed
behind xDSL modem, the problem of consecutive second
0-65535
call can happen by uncontrolled H.323 ALG function at
xDSL modem. This field can be used to solve the
problem of consecutive second call. Here, the value
should be an alternate or secondary receiving signal port
which is configured at remote system.
These two fields are used when a remote network
517
Max. 15 characters
OFF
ON
No
No
00
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.10.6-1 NETWORK NUMBERING PLAN TABLE
ATTRIBUTE
Remote route ID
Sending Name
option
DESCRIPTION
system want to check the route ID value to authenticate
the system. Here, ‘Local Route ID’ is the route ID string
for local system. And ‘Remote Route ID’ is the route ID
string for remote system.
Basically the calling party name is transferred in QSIG
messages. This field is an additional way to send the
calling party name. In some PBX systems, the Q.931
Display IE field is used to transferring the calling party
name and this value can be used as an interoperating
solution for displaying the calling party name.
518
RANGE
DEFAULT
Max. 15 characters
OFF,
Display IE(CISCO)
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.10.7 Network Feature Code Table - PGM 325
Selecting Network Feature Code Table returns the data entry page. Click [Save] button after
changing Value.
Figure 4.4.10.7-1 Network Feature Code Table
Table 4.4.10.7-1 NETWORK FEATURE CODE TABLE
ATTRIBUTE
Net Feature Code
Net Feature type
DESCRIPTION
Digit sequence or code used to activate special Network
Features.
Each Network Feature Code is assigned to activate a feature
in the destination system.
RANGE
DEFAULT
16 digits
None
N/A,
Internal Page,
External Page,
All Call Page,
Net Door Open,
Conference
Room,
Call Park,
N/A
In case of eMG80, the value range is as below:
Internal page: 1-35, External page (1), All Call page (1-3: 1(INT), 2(EXT), 3(ALL)), Net door Open
(1-2), Conference Room (1-9), Call Park (1-19)
In case of eMG800, the value range is as below:
Internal page: 1-100, External page (1), All Call page (1-3: 1(INT), 2(EXT), 3(ALL)), Net door
Open (1-2), Conference Room (1-9), Call Park (1-200)
519
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.11 H.323 Routing Table
Selecting the H.323 Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in the left frame as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 4.4.11-1 H.323 Routing Table Main Page
520
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.11.1 H.323 Basic Attributes -PGM 326
Selecting H.323 Basic Attributes will display the data entry page. Click [Save] button after
changing Value.
Enter Device/GW slot sequence number: eMG80: 1-300 / eMG800: 1-2890 / UCP: 1-3688
Figure 4.4.11.1-1 H.323 Basic Attributes
H.323 Signaling can be operated with each VOIB/VOIM or MPB/UCP.
Table 4.4.11.1-1 H.323 Basic Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
IP Band Usage
DESCRIPTION
If it is set to ON, system allows H.323 signaling with
system IP address. Or, each VOIB/VOIM IP Address
can be used.
521
RANGE
DEFAULT
OFF
ON
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.11.2 H.323 CO Group Attributes -PGM 327
Selecting H.323 CO Group Attributes will display the data entry page. Click [Save] button after
changing Value.
Enter Group number: eMG80: 1-20 / eMG800: 1-200 / UCP: 1-200
Figure 4.4.11.2-1 H.323 CO Group Attributes
The VOIP channels are used for Distributed Networking, access to SIP or H.323 networks and for
remote iPECS devices. When the standard H.323 VoIP protocol is employed for an external VoIP
call, several attributes of these channels can be assigned. The H.323 call set-up mode and
tunneling (H.245 Encapsulation) can be established.
Also for H.323 support, a RAS (Registration, Admissions and Status) channel can be defined.
The RAS channel IP addresses (uni-cast and multi-cast) as well as the IP port Numbering Plan
and other H.323 set-up characteristics are defined.
Table 4.4.11.2-1 H.323 CO Group Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
H.323 Setup mode
H.323 Tunneling mode
H323 Early Media
(early H245)
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
H.323 IP calls can be set-up using the H.323 normal or
Fast Start mode.
H.323 IP calls can be set-up using the H.245
encapsulation (Tunneling).
Fast
Norm
OFF
ON
This feature is the ability of two user endpoints to
communicate before call is actually established in normal
call mode. This feature is not used when 'H323 Setup
Mode' is 'Fast'.
* Setup: Caller party tries to open early media on receiving
the Setup message.
* Proceeding: Calling party tries to open early media on
receiving the Proceeding message.
Setup,
Proceeding,
Alerting
522
DEFAULT
Fast
ON
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.11.2-1 H.323 CO Group Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
* Alerting: Calling party tries to open early media on
receiving the Alerting message.
IN/
H.323 DTMF Path
During a connection, DTMF Digits can be sent in-band or
out of band (H.245).
RFC2833/
H245_ALNUM/
IN
H225_SIG/
H245_SIG
TCP Keep Alive
TCP No Delay
Sending Setup Ack
message
The system will send a polling message every 75 seconds
to assure the status of the TCP connection.
Normally small chunks of TCP (H323) messages are
combined into one packet and be sent to remote party to
improve the efficiency of network. Sometimes this action
yields the H323 signaling problem when system is behind
NAT router and there is H323 ALG is running. 'OFF' value
can be a solution to overcome the problem.
System provides SETUP ACK message when there is no
‘sending complete IE’ in SETUP message.
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
1~65535
1718
IP Address
224.0.1.41
1~65535
1719
IP Address
82.134.80.2
001-999
(SEC)
120
10~100%
80
Gatekeeper Attributes
RAS Usage
Determine whether VOIU/VOIB/VOIM will be used as a
Gatekeeper.
RAS MultiCast IP Port
Multi-cast IP Port for RAS Information of Gatekeeper.
RAS MultiCast IP
Address
Multi-cast IP address for RAS Information of Gatekeeper.
RAS UniCast IP Port
Uni-cast IP Port for RAS Information of Gatekeeper.
RAS UniCast IP
Address
Uni-cast IP address for RAS Information of Gatekeeper.
The time between exchange of RAS Information between
GK and VOIB/VOIU.
This feature is used when H323 call is routed by RAS
gatekeeper. Keep alive interval time between the system
RAS IIR Multiplier Ratio and gatekeeper is provided by gatekeeper on registration
time. This value of ratio is used to change the keep alive
interval time from gatekeeper.
RAS Number Plan
The numbering plan for Calling Number in RAS Setup.
Prefix
The Gatekeeper ID (This can be programmed only via
RAS Light RRQ usage
WEB Admin).
The system can be assigned to use the simple RRQ
RAS Gateway ID
(Registration Request) message (ON) or the full RRQ
message (OFF).
The H.323 call will be failover to another line (FAIL OVER
Fail over Usage
USAGE: ON).
Call Setup No
The H.323 call will be failover. The time will be set.
Response time
RAS Keep Alive Time
Fail over CO Group
number
If the H.323 call will be failover, assign another CO group.
523
Max. 23 digits
OFF
ON
OFF
Max. 128
characters
OFF
ON
0, 3-15
(Sec.)
eMG80:1-20
eMG800:1-200
UCP:1-200
OFF
0
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.11.3 H.323 Incoming Route table -PGM 328
Selecting H.323 Incoming Route table will display the data entry page. Click [Save] button after
changing Value.
Enter CO Group number: eMG80 : 1-20 / eMG800: 1-200 / UCP: 1-200
Figure 4.4.11.3-1 H.323 Incoming Route table
To get the direct H.323, the From IP-Address and ‘incoming CO Group number’ to be routed
should be assigned.
Table 4.4.11.3-1 H.323 Incoming Route table
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Calling IP Address
IP address associated with H.323 incoming calls.
255.255.255.255 is used when external call cones from
unknown IP Address which is not listed in this table entry.
CO Group
CO group number associated with H.323 incoming calls.
524
RANGE
DEFAULT
0.0.0.0
eMG80:1~20
eMG800:1~200
UCP:1~200
0
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.12 T-NET Data
Selecting the T-NET Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in the left frame as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 4.4.12-1 T-NET Data Main Page
In a Centralized Control T-NET (Transparent Network), remote devices may be registered to a
Central iPECS system(CM) and to a Local iPECS system (LM). In this way, the CM maintains
control of the remote device. Should the WAN connection between an LM and CM fail (polling
error), the LM will initiate operational control of the locally registered devices. Calls between the
systems (CM and LM) can automatically shift to PSTN Modules registered with the LM for Failover operation. The configuration and characteristics of LMs and CM are configurable as is Failover operation.
525
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.12.1 T-NET Basic Attributes -PGM 330
Selecting T-Net Basic Attributes will display the data entry page. Click [Save] button after
changing Value.
Figure 4.4.12.1-1 Zone number overview
Each iPECS system in a Central Control network environment must be enabled for T-NET
operation in order to function as part of the network.
526
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.12.2 T-NET CM Attributes -PGM 331
Selecting T-Net CM Attributes will display the data entry page. Click [Save] button after changing
Value.
Figure 4.4.12.2-1 T-NET CM Attributes
Each LM (Local iPECS system), which is part of a Central Control Network, must be defined with
the IP Address of the CM (Central iPECS system). The LM configuration data is sent to the CM at
the time the LM registers with the CM. Total port counts define the ports, which are allocated in
the CM database for use by devices registered to the LM. The number of ports defined in the
database of each LM must be equal to or less than the ports defined in the CM for the LM, see
PGM 332, in order to register properly.
Table 4.4.12.2-1 T-NET CM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Register
Enable
DESCRIPTION
This field informs the LM to attempt registration with the CM. This field
must be set to ON for proper registration.
CM server type Assign the type of CM server; iPECS eMG/UCP or iPECS CM.
IP Address
This field defines the IP address of the CM that will be used by the LM.
IPKTS Port
number
In the TNET environment, the IPKTS protocol signaling UDP port is
defined. At present this field is not used, do not change this port number.
This field defines the total number of ports the LM will request be
Total number of
allocated by the CM for devices attached to the LM. This value must be
port
equal to or less than the port count in the CM for the LM devices.
This field defines the maximum polling failures an LM considers a WAN
Polling Count
fault.
RANGE
OFF
ON
eMG/UCP,
CM
OFF
eMG/UCP
IPv4 address
0001-9999
5588
0000-9999
0
00-99
5
2
Polling interval
This field defines the interval time between LM to CM polling attempts.
00-99
Zone Number
Zone number can be assigned to Device or GW.
1-32
527
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.12.3 T-NET LM Attributes -PGM 332
Selecting T-Net LM Attributes will display as below. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.12.3-1 T-NET LM Attributes
The CM (Central iPECS system) must be programmed with the MAC and IP address of each LM
(Local iPECS system) in the Centralized Control network as well as the maximum configuration of
each LM. Up to 100 Local iPECS system (LMs) may be defined and configuration entered. The
port counts define the ports that are allocated in the CM database for use by devices registered to
the LM. The number of ports defined in the database for each LM in PGM 331, must be equal to
or less than the ports defined in the CM for the LM, in order to register properly.
Table 4.4.12.3-1 T-NET LM ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Mac Address
This field defines the MAC address of the LM that will be part of the TNET environment and is used by the CM for authorization.
MAC address
IP Address
This field is the IP address of the LM.
IPv4 address
Multicast IP
address
In the T-NET environment, the IP KTS protocol signaling UDP port is
0001-9999
defined. At present this field is not used, do not change this port
number.
This field defines the total number of ports the LM will request from the
000-999
CM for devices attached to the LM. This value must be equal to or more
than the port count defined in the LM.
This field defines the multicast IP address that could be used in T-NET
IPv4 address
branch site.
Zone number
Zone number can be assigned to Device or GW.
IPKTS Port
Total no of
port
528
1-32
DEFAULT
5588
0
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.12.4 T-NET FoPSTN table -PGM 333
Selecting T-NET FoPSTN Table will display the data entry page. Enter an index range then click
[Load] to modify the data. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.12.4-1 T-NET FoPSTN table
The Fail-over function allows the systems in T-NET environment to complete calls between
systems over a PSTN (analog or digital) line should the WAN connection to the CM fail. A CO
gateway Module must be registered to the LM for local CO services. Users may call others in the
normal manner and the call is routed over CO facilities to the remote CM. When calls are directed
to a DID line at the receiving system, the system will select a line from the assigned CO Group
and dial the Tel Number with the station number dialed as the trailing digits.
Table 4.4.12.4-1 Fail Over to PSTN ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Station numbers associated with the remote system. A range can
Numbering Plan be indicated by using “*” to indicate the range. Example: 21* covers Station number
210 to 219 or 2100 to 2199.
This field defines the CO Group of the local system that will be used eMG80:1~20
eMG800:1~200
CO Group
to place calls to the stations entered in the Fail Over Numbering
UCP:1~200
Plan above, should WAN failure occur.
This field defines the telephone number the system should dial to
place a call to the stations entered in the FO Numbering Plan,
Tel Number
24 digits
should WAN failure occur. An “*” may be entered as a wild card to
indicate insertion of the dialed station number.
529
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.12.5 T-NET Control Contact -PGM 334
Selecting T-NET Control Contact will display the data entry page. Enter the T-NET range from the
T-Net LM Attributes then click [Load] to modify the data. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Enter T-NET Range: eMG80: 1-15 / eMG800: 1-32 / UCP: 1-100
Figure 4.4.12.5-1 T-NET Control Contact
Each LM incorporates relay contacts that can be employed as a Door Lock Release. The contact
activates a third party Door Lock Release mechanism activated by dialing the Door Unlock code
at a local station.
530
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.12.6 T-NET Music/Alarm -PGM 335 ~ 336
Selecting T-NET Music/Alarm will display the data entry page. Enter the T-NET range from the TNet LM Attributes then click [Load] to modify the data. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Enter T-NET Range: eMG80: 1-15 / eMG800: 1-32 / UCP: 1-100
Figure 4.4.12.6-1 T-NET Music/Alarm
To minimize WAN traffic, the CM does not provide BGM/MOH to an LM. The LM employs local
BGM and MOH facilities to reduce traffic load on the WAN and IP channel processors. The LM
uses IP Multicast for local BGM and MOH transport. In addition, the Alarm contacts of the LM can
be defined for use as a local alarm or doorbell.
When alarm port 1 of the LM is activated, the string of {Alarm 1 Display} is displayed in assigned
stations.
When alarm port 2 of the LM is activated, the string of {Alarm 2 Display} is displayed in assigned
stations (if LM is UCP600/2400).
531
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.12.7 T-NET ISDN Clock Priority for eMG800 - PGM 337
Selecting T-NET ISDN Clock priority will display the data entry page. Enter the T-NET range from
the T-Net LM Attributes then click [Load] to modify the data. Click [Save] button after changing
Value.
Figure 4.4.12.7-1 T-NET ISDN Clock Priority
Table 4.4.12.7-1 T-NET ISDN Clock priority
ATTRIBUTE
Priority
DESCRIPTION
ISDN clock priority in a TNET site.
RANGE
1-18
532
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
4.4.13 Zone Data
Selecting the Zone Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed.
Figure 4.4.13-1 Zone Data Main Page
533
Issue 1.6
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.13.1 Zone Number Overview
Selecting Zone Number Overview returns the data entry page.
Figure 4.4.13.1-1 Zone number overview
Zone data is a tool employed to easily manage the characteristics of groups of devices under the
control of an MPB/UCP. Such devices can be grouped to a Zone to define common
characteristics including Country Code, DSCP, RTP packet handling, etc. Common attributes are
defined at the device, Zone and Inter-zone level. Device settings have priority over system and
Zone settings, while Zone settings have priority over system settings.
Generally, transport of RTP packets should be a peer-to-peer communication over either a LAN
or VPN. If iPECS devices are separated by a NAPT server or direct peer-to-peer communications
is not available, packet relay must be employed to assure communication. In packet relay, RTP
packets are received by a local VoIP channel, which is under control of the MPB/UCP, and the IP
address is translated from a public to the device’s private address. The VoIP channel implements
a secure channel using IPSec protocol. Devices can be assigned as part of an “RTP Relay group”
to use the same VoIP channels to implement relay of RTP packets. Packet relay groups also
provide for conversion of multi-cast packets from the MPB/UCP to uni-cast and back again at the
group level to multi-cast. Note packet relay requires a VoIP channel be available locally for each
simultaneous call that requires packet relay.
534
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.13.2 Device Zone Number – PGM 436
Selecting the Device Zone Number returns the Zone Number data input page. Enter the
Sequence number range (refer to section 4.4.1.4 System & Device IP Address Plan - PGM 102 &
103) and click [Load] to assign a Zone number for the device. Click [Save] button after changing
Value.
Enter Device/GW sequence Range: eMG80: 1-300 / eMG800: 1-2890 / UCP: 1-3688
Figure 4.4.13.2-1 Device Zone Number
Device Zone Number assigns a device to one of up to 32 specific Zones.
Table 4.4.13.2-1 DEVICE ZONE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Zone number
DESCRIPTION
Zone number can be assigned to Device or GW.
535
RANGE
DEFAULT
1-32
1
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.13.3 Device Zone Attributes – PGM 437
Selecting the Device Zone Attributes returns the Device Zone Attributes data input page. Enter
the Sequence number Range (refer to section 4.4.1.4 System & Device IP Address Plan - PGM
102 & 103) and click [Load] to assign a Zone number for the device. Use the check mark to
indicate which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save] button.
Enter Device/GW sequence Range: eMG80: 1-300 / eMG800: 1-2890 / UCP: 1-3688
Figure 4.4.13.3-1 Device Zone Attributes
Device Zone Attributes define characteristics specific to the device including the registration
password, Diff Serv Code Point, Nation, etc. In addition, Zone characteristics set at the Device
level take precedence over characteristics for the Zone Attributes. While a Zone may incorporate
up to 15 different RTP packet Relay Groups, for clarity a single RTP Relay Group should be used
within a Zone.
Table 4.4.13.3-1 DEVICE ZONE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Remote Access
Password
Diff Serv
Country Code
Language Code
DESCRIPTION
Registration password assigned in device for Remote
stand-alone device only
MPB assigned code point will take precedence. Applies
to all devices
Country location of the device.
Available selections are given in Country code table.
Each device can be assigned a local language or
536
RANGE
DEFAULT
Max. 12 digits
None
0-63
4
Country Code
Nation
dependent
Language Code
Nation
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.13.3-1 DEVICE ZONE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
English as the LCD Display Language.
Codec Type
RTP Relay Group
Page Area Group
VM Device Slot
Sequence.
(VMIU/VMIB Slot
Sequence)
Select Default Multi
Language
VM Retry Count
Remark
The codec selection method can be defined as device
based, see PGM 132, or based on the codec type
assigned to the Zone.
This attribute defines the RTP Relay group employed by
the device, 00-no relay. Zone parameters define the
VoIP device to employ.
The Paging Area Group identity is employed to
determine when multicast to unicast conversion is
needed to relay paging data across the network using a
VoIP channel of a VOIU/VOIM or Paging Agent (VoIP
channel of an iPECS LIP Phone).
The VSF gateway used to support Voice Mail for a
device is defined. The VSF/UVM must be under control
of the same eMG/UCP as the device.
The recorded language selection prompt is played to the
user when accessing the built-in AA/VM. The system
supports up to six languages.
The user may select an available language. If the
language is unavailable, the user may attempt to enter a
valid language type based on this retry counter. If the
user cannot enter a valid language, the announcement is
provided in the default language.
Descriptive information to help installer/programmer in
identifying the device Zone, i.e. Branch1.
537
DEFAULT
dependent
Follow Zone,
Follow Me
(ADM132)
Follow Me
(ADM132)
00-15
00
(no relay)
00-15
00
(same paging
relay area)
eMG80: Max. 3
Digits
eMG800/UCP:
Max. 4Digits
1~6
1
0-9
3
Max. 21
characters
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.13.4 Access & Page Relay – PGM 438
Selecting Access & Page Relay returns the Access & Page RTP packet relay data input page.
Enter the Sequence number Range (refer to section 4.4.1.4 System & Device IP Address Plan PGM 102 & 103) and click [Load] to define packet relay characteristics for Paging between
Zones. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Enter Device/GW sequence Range: eMG80: 1-300 / eMG800: 1-2890 / UCP: 1-3688
Figure 4.4.13.4-1 Zone Page RTP Packet Relay
iPECS protocol employs multi-cast to send of RTP packets to multiple devices at one time. This
improves efficiency and lowers traffic by sending a single multi-cast packet to multi-cast group
members. In particular, paging employs this multi-cast technique. However, since multi-cast is not
commonly supported outside of the LAN, uni-cast must be used to transport such signals
between routers. At the receiving Zone, a local VoIP channel receives the uni-cast signal from the
controlling MPB. The VoIP channel then converts the packet address to a multi-cast signal for
delivery to devices in the same Zone RTP Relay Group.
Table 4.4.13.4-1 Zone Page RTP Packet Relay
ATTRIBUTE
Page RTP Relay to
Zone
Page By RTP Relay
From Zone
DESCRIPTION
The device can be configured to relay RTP packets for paging
to other zone members, Paging Rely.
The device can be configured to receive relayed packets from
the assigned Zones(s).
538
RANGE
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
DEFAULT
Disable
Disable
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
4.4.13.5 Inside Zone Attributes Overview
Figure 4.4.13.5-1 Zone Attributes Overview
539
Issue 1.6
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.13.6 Zone Attribute – PGM 439
Selecting the Zone Attributes returns the Zone Attributes data input page. Enter the desired Zone
number range and click [Load] to assign Zone characteristics. Use the check mark to indicate
which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save] button.
Figure 4.4.13.6-1 Zone Attributes
The nation code, codec and VMIU/VMIB assigned for a Zone will be employed by all devices in
the Zone unless a different entry is made in Device Zone data. If the Device Zone data is default
or assigned by the MPB, the Zone data will take precedence.
The Zone Attributes define when and which VoIP channels to use for RTP packet relay. Local
VoIP channels are assigned to perform the packet relay function and the use can be defined as “if
needed” or use the assigned RTP Relay Group. For “if Need”, the MPB will employ the IP KTS
STUN protocol to determine when packet relay is required. If assigned “RTP Relay Group”,
packet relay will always be employed for RTP packet receipt.
Table 4.4.13.6-1 ZONE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Nation code of devices in the zone. Available selections
Country code
are given in Country code table.
E.164 Management Information (Outgoing Dial Number : E164-> Normal) (Incoming CLI Number: Normal >164)
Nation Code
Assign area code that is use to convert CLI format
(normal <-> E.164)
International
Assign international access code that is use to convert
Access Code
CLI format (normal <-> E.164)
Local Number Digit CLI length is over this count then it is long distance call
Count
otherwise it is local call.
Area Code
540
Max 5 Digits
Max 5 Digits
00-30
0
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.13.6-1 ZONE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
For an outgoing call, the system can insert a zero (‘0’) in
front of area code.
No
Yes
No
For an outgoing call, the system can insert my area code
in the CLI.
No
Yes
No
(it is for incoming CLI)
Leading Zero
Insertion for Area
code
My Area Code
Insertion
Exceptional Conversion : for Outgoing Dial Number
Conversion Case
#1
Conversion Case
#2
Conversion Case
#3
Conversion Case
#4
Conversion Case
#5
The first digits, up to four (4), dialed by the user can be
converted to a digit string of up to six (6) digits and may
include a plus (+) sign. For example if the “From” digits
are 00 and the “To” digits are +820, if the user dials
002233432, the system converts the number to +820
2233432.
From (4-digits) and
To (6-digits)
Exceptional Conversion : for Incoming CLI Number
Conversion Case
#1
Conversion Case
#2
Conversion Case
#3
Conversion Case
#4
The first digits, up to four (4), received as the CLI can be
converted to a digit string of up to six (6) digits and may
include a plus (+) sign. For example if the “From” digits
are 00 and the “To” digits are +820, if the user dials
002233432, the system converts the number to +820
2233432.
From (4-digits) and
To (6-digits)
Normal Zone Management Information
Language Code
Codec Type
Language code of devices in the zone.
Assigns the codec employed by devices in the Zone.
1st RTP Relay
Device Slot Seq.
2nd RTP Relay
Device Slot Seq.
VM Device Slot
Sequence
(VMIU/VMIB Slot
Sequence)
Assigns when to use the packet relay function, with “If
Need” the MPB will automatically determines when to use
packet relay, while “RTP Relay Group” will always
implement packet relay for RTP packets.
Assigns the local VOIU or VOIB IP channels that will be
used to implement packet relay for devices in the Zone.
Back-up VoIP channels for RTP packet relay use in the
Zone.
Assigns the UVMU/UVM/VMIU/VMIB used to support
Voice Mail for devices in the Zone. The
UVMU/UVM/VMIU/VMIB must be under control of the
same MPB/UCP as the device being assigned.
Remark
Descriptive information to help installer/programmer in
RTP Relay Rule
541
Language Code
Nation
dependent
System codec
G.711
G.723.1
G.729
G.722
System codec
If need/
Relay Group/
Forced to Relay
If need
Sequence
Number
Sequence
Number
eMG80:13
eMG800:19
eMG80:14
eMG800:NA
Sequence
Number
eMG80: 2
(1:15/2:16)
eMG800: 3
Max. 21 characters
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.13.6-1 ZONE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
The time & date displayed at the station are based on the
time zone selected or the system time
Time zone,
System time
System time
This parameter may be used to limit the number of
maximum Inter Zone connections. When this value is set
to 0, there is no limit on the total Inter Zone connections.
eMG80:0-140 (0:
No limit)
eMG800: 0-1200
(0: No limit)
UCP: 0-2400 (0:
No limit)
0
eMG80:0-74 (0: No
limit)
eMG800: 0-600 (0:
No limit)
UCP: 0-998 (0: No
limit)
0
identifying the device Zone, i.e. Branch1.
Display time zone
Max Total Inter
Zone Connections
Max Outgoing CO
Calls
This field may be used to limit the number of outgoing
CO/IP calls from the Zone. When this value is set to 0,
there is no limit on the number of outgoing CO/IP calls.
Refer to Sys Hold,
Internal music
External Music
Zone MOH Assign A Music source can be assigned so that calls to this zone.
VSFMOH,
SLT MOH1~5,
VSF MOH2~3
Emergency Call
Assigns the destination station for Emergency Call
Station number
Notify Station
Notification.
This field assigns a secondary station to receive
Emergency Call
Station number
notification of an Emergency call from a device in the
nd
Notify 2 Station
Zone.
DCOB Fault Notify This field assigns the station to receive notification of a
Station number
Station
DCOB (Digital CO Board) fault.
SIP Registration
This field assigns the station to receive notification of a
Station number
Fault Notify Station SIP Trunk registration fault.
If option is "System DST mode", the zone will follow the
Daylight Saving
system DST mode (System Date &Time (178)).
System DST mode,
Usage
If option is "OFF", the zone will not apply the Daylight
OFF
Saving Time.
542
Refer to Sys
Hold
System DST
mode
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.13.7 Zone RTP Relay Group – PGM 440
Selecting the Zone RTP Relay Group returns the RTP Relay ON/OFF data input page. Enter the
desired Zone and Group numbers and click [Load] button to assign Zone characteristics. Click
[Save] button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.13.7-1 Zone RTP Packet Relay Groups
While it is strongly recommended that a Zone only have a single RTP Relay Group, up to 15
Groups can be assigned to a Zone. Devices in an RTP Relay Group should have common
requirements for packet relay use. In some situations, it may be necessary to implement packet
relay to groups in a Zone. Note that when “if Need” is assigned as the RTP Relay Rule in the
Zone Attributes, assignments here are ignored.
543
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.13.8 Inter Zone Attribute – PGM 441
Selecting the Inter Zone Attribute returns the data input page. Enter the desired Source and
Destination Zone number range and click [Load] to assign Zone characteristics. Click [Save]
button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.13.8-1 Inter-Zone Attributes
Inter Zone Attributes define RTP packet relay treatment for communications between devices in
different Zones.
Table 4.4.13.8-1 INTER-ZONE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Codec Type
DESCRIPTION
Assigns the codec employed by devices in the Zone.
Assigns when to use the packet relay function between Zones,
with “If Need” the MPB will automatically determine when to use
RTP Relay Rule
packet relay, while “RTP Relay Group” will always implement
packet relay for RTP packets between the Zones.
Assigns how to employ the Source and Destination VoIP
channels. The assigned Source channels may be used for both
RTP Relay
sides of the communication or separately only for a device in the
Device
Source Zone. The Destination channels are then used as back-up
Utilization
channels or only for devices in the Destination Zone.
Src RTP Relay The Sequence number associated with the VoIP channels in the
Device Slot Seq. Source Zone that handle Packet Relay.
544
RANGE
DEFAULT
System Codec/
G.711 / G.723.1
G.729 / G.722
NA
If need/
Always not/
Forced to do
If need
For Both Side/
Separated (SRC
to DEST)
For Both
side
Sequence
Number
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.13.8-1 INTER-ZONE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE
Dest. RTP
Relay Device
Slot Seq.
Max Inter Zone
connection
Use Firewall IP
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
The Sequence number associated with the VoIP channels to
handle packet relay for the Destination Zone is defined. When
Sequence
Utilization is Separate the channels are used for devices in the
Number
destination Zone, otherwise they are used as back up for both
sides.
This field determines the maximum Inter Zone connections
eMG80:0-140
between the source zone and destination zone. When this value is
eMG800: 0-1200
set to 0, there is no limit on the number of connections between
UCP:0-2400
the zones.
If this option is set to ON, System use Firewall IP of VoIP board
OFF
for RTP relay between Zones. But, if this option is OFF, System
ON
use Local IP of VoIP board for RTP relay between zones.
545
DEFAULT
0
ON
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.13.9 Zone Holiday Assignment - PGM 444
Selecting the Zone Holiday Assignments returns the data input page. Enter the desired Source
and Destination Zone numbers range and click [Load] to assign Zone holiday. Click [Save]
button after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.13.9-1 Zone Holiday Assignment
Holidays and vacation day intervals for each zone can be established to define the Service mode
(Day, Night, and Timed) Up to 40 holidays and 5 vacation intervals can be defined.
Table 4.4.13.9-1 ZONE HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT
ATTRIBUTE
Ring Mode
Vacation
Holiday
DESCRIPTION
Enter the desired Service mode for the Holiday or
Vacation.
Five ranges may be entered for vacation periods, enter
the start and end dates as YY/MM/DD – YY/MM/DD.
Each Zone can have up to 40 holidays assigned,
entering the date as MM/DD.
546
RANGE
DEFAULT
Day Ring Mode/
Night Ring Mode/
Timed Ring Mode/
N/A
Timed Ring
Mode
Must be 12 digits
None
Must be 4 digits
None
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.14 Device Login
Selecting the Device Login Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in the left frame
as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4.4.14-1 Device Login Data Main Page
547
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.14.1 Remote Device Registration – PGM 442
Selecting the Remote Device Registration will display the Remote Registration Table data input
page. Enter a Table index range and select [Load] to enter MAC address information. For
convenience, the copy, paste, and drag is available to enter or modify data. Click [Save] button
after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.14.1-1 Remote Device Registration
When a device attempts to register with the controlling iPECS, the system will check the device
MAC address and password against the Registration table. If a match is found, the device is
registered regardless of Dip-switch 2 position of eMG and Dip Switch position 3 of UCP. The
system database is updated and the device receives device specific configuration data from the
MPB/UCP.
Table 4.4.14.1-1 REMOTE DEVICE REGISTRATION
ATTRIBUTE
Mac Address
Password
Zone
Nation code
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Mac address of remote device
Password, if any, assigned in the devices database
via Device Web admin.
The Zone to be assigned to the device.
Nation or country location of the device.
548
DEFAULT
MAC Address
Up to 12 digits
01-32
01
Assigned in System ID
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.14.2 Station User Login – PGM 443
Selecting the Station User Login will display the User Login Registration data input page. Enter
an index range then click [Load] to modify Station Login data. For convenience, the copy, paste,
and drag is available to enter or modify data. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Enter Index Range: eMG80: 1-140 / eMG800: 1-1200 / UCP: 1-2400
Figure 4.4.14.2-1 Station User Login
Station User Login configures User credentials for registration of iPECS UCS clients and initial
registration of SIP phones. A station must register with the system each time it is connected to
the system. The ID and password are assigned along with other characteristics of the remote
station such as Zone, desired station number, country code, Language and a remark can be
defined. The iPECS UCS Client can be configured as link-paired station by assigning the same
Desired-Number as a registered desktop iPECS LIP Phone.
Note for the UCS Client, the UCS Standard Client Login, PGM 446, may be employed in place of
PGM 443 as a single point to configure the client information.
Table 4.4.14.2-1 STATION USER LOGIN
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Registered
Number
Station number registered to the station, displayed only after
registration.
Device Type
This filed is indicated what kind of device type is.
ID
Password
The User Login ID must be entered for registration
The User Login password must be entered for registration.
549
RANGE
Station number
12 Characters
12 digits
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.14.2-1 STATION USER LOGIN
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Zone
The device can be assigned to a Zone.
The desired number can be entered for the device. To link an
iPECS UCS and iPECS LIP Phone, enter the station number
Desired Number of the registered iPECS LIP Phone prior to registration of the
iPECS UCS or the UCS Client, PGM 446 may be used as the
single administration point.
Nation code
Language
Linked
RANGE
DEFAULT
1-32
1
Station number
The Nation code for the device is assigned.
The default Language type for system voice prompts can be
assigned to the device from the available languages.
This field indicates the Linked pair status of the station.
550
Language Code
Assigned in
System ID
Nation
dependent
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.15 UCS Data
Selecting the UCS Data group returns the sub-menu displayed in the left frame as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 4.4.15-1 UCS Data Main Page
551
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.15.1 Common Attributes – PGM 445
Selecting Common attributes will display the common attributes input page. Click [Save] button
after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.15.1-1 Common Attributes
Common Attributes for the UCS Clients include client login characteristics and LDAP server
information shared with the clients as shown in the following table.
Table 4.4.15.1-1 Common attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
iPECS system employs a per-seat license. The number
of UCS Clients that are active at a time cannot exceed
the licensed capacity.
Minimum Password The minimum length of a UCS Client password can be
Length
defined up to 12 characters.
Do Not Allow the
The User ID can be employed as the password if
Same Password
permitted (OFF).
and User ID
The system employs XML to send or request certain
XML Port
information such as the User picture. The TCP/IP port
can be defined.
Concurrent Clients
in login
Clients Check
Interval
Periodically, iPECS system will verify the status of
logged in UCS clients.
552
RANGE
DEFAULT
System capacity
100
0-12
12
OFF
ON
OFF
8899
30-60
Seconds
30
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.15.1-1 Common attributes
ATTRIBUTE
UCS Server Type
DESCRIPTION
The server that provides UCS service can be iPECS
system (Standard) or the external UCS Server
(Premium). Additional video and collaboration features
are provided by the UCS Server as Premium service.
When the UCS Server is employed, the Standard Client
Login information (PGM 446) is transferred from iPECS
system to the UCS Server after the client is registered.
If "Preserve UCS DB when server type is changed" is
checked, UCS DB will not be initialized when UCS
server mode is changed.
RANGE
DEFAULT
Standard
Premium
Standard
LDAP Server Settings
Server Display
Name
Server IP
Server Port
Require Login
Use SSL
Search Base
When the UCS Client requires access to an LDAP
server, the system will provide the LDAP server
information to the client. The server name is defined in
this field.
When an LDAP server is employed, the IP address of
the server must be defined.
When an LDAP server is employed, the TCP/IP port of
the server must be defined.
The UCS Client ID and Password may be required for
log in to the LDAP server.
When supported by the server, the client can employ
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) for added security.
Search base means Search option. You can get the
search option from LDAP Server manager. For
example, if OU (Organization Unit) is OC and DC
(Directory Company) are ucapp and com, you can give
the option "OU=OC, DC=ucapp, DC=com" in this field.
You will get the desired directory.
553
15 characters
0.0.0.0
00001-65535
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.15.2 UCS Standard Client Login – PGM 446
Selecting UCS Standard Client Login will display the UCS standard client login input page. Enter
the Client index and click [Load] to modify the Client data. Use the check boxes to indicate the
attributes to modify. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Enter UCS Client Index: eMG80: 1-32 / eMG800: 1-200 / UCP: 1-200
Figure 4.4.15.2-1 UCS Standard Client Login
The UCS Client information is configured for each client prior to registration. When the UCS
Server is employed to provide Premium service, iPECS system will transfer the information to the
server after the client registers and, after registration, any changes to the client configuration are
accomplished in the UCS Server.
Table 4.4.15.2-1 UCS Standard Client Login
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Name
Office Phone
The station number for the UCS Client can be assigned here
and will update PGM 103 and 443.
The UCS Client Id for the UCS Client can be assigned here
and will update PGM 103 and 443.
The UCS Client password, up to 32 characters must be
assigned.
The user’s name, up to 32 characters should be entered.
Set Office phone number.
Cellular Phone
Set Cellular phone number.
Max. 32 characters
Home Phone
Set Home phone number.
Max. 32 characters
Office Name
Set Office name.
Max. 32 characters
Station Number
User ID
User PWD
Min. 4 characters
Max. 32 characters
Max. 32 characters
Max. 32 characters
Office Department Set Office Department.
Max. 32 characters
Email address
Set Email address.
Max. 40 characters
Linked Pair
If the UCS Client is part of a Linked pair, it must be enabled
here. By entering the Station number of iPECS IP Phone as
the UCS Client Station Number, the stations will employ MAC
linking.
554
DEFAULT
OFF
ON
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.15.2-1 UCS Standard Client Login
ATTRIBUTE
Unique ID
Mutual presence
permission
License
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
When the UCS Server is employed, each client must have a
unique Id of at least 40 characters, which identifies the clients
Min. 40 characters
to the UCS Server. Once the Client registers, iPECS system
will send the information to the UCS Server. Note that the UCS
Server Type in PGM 445 must be configured as “Premium”.
The presence status of the Client can be shared with other
OFF
ON
clients.
ON
STD-V
The status of license will be displayed and select the license
STD-NV
License
for usage among range.
MOBILE
555
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.15.3 UCS Premium Client Login – PGM 446
Selecting UCS Premium Client Login will display the UCS Premium client login input page. Enter
the Client index and click [Load] to modify the Client data. Use the check boxes to indicate the
attributes to modify. Click [Save] button after changing Value.
Enter UCS Server ID: eMG80: 1-2 / eMG800: 1-5 / UCP: 1-16
Figure 4.4.15-1 UCS Premium Client Login
The UCS Client information is configured for each client prior to registration. When the UCS
Server is employed to provide Premium service, iPECS system will transfer the information to the
server after the client registers and, after registration, any changes to the client configuration are
accomplished in the UCS Server.
Table 4.4.15.3-1 UCS Premium Client Login
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
Name
Office Phone
The station number for the UCS Client can be assigned
here and will update PGM 103 and 443.
The UCS Client Id for the UCS Client can be assigned here
and will update PGM 103 and 443.
The UCS Client password, up to 32 characters must be
assigned.
The user’s name, up to 32 characters should be entered.
Set Office phone number.
Cellular Phone
Set Cellular phone number.
Max. 32 characters
Home Phone
Set Home phone number.
Max. 32 characters
Office Name
Set Office name.
Max. 32 characters
Office Department
Set Office Department.
Max. 32 characters
Email address
Set Email address.
Max. 40 characters
Linked Pair
If the UCS Client is part of a Linked pair, it must be enabled
here. By entering the Station number of iPECS IP Phone as
the UCS Client Station Number, the stations will employ
MAC linking.
Station Number
User ID
User PWD
556
DEFAULT
Min. 4 characters
Max. 32 characters
Max. 32 characters
Max. 32 characters
OFF
ON
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.15.3-1 UCS Premium Client Login
ATTRIBUTE
Unique ID
Mutual presence
permission
License
DESCRIPTION
When the UCS Server is employed, each client must have
a unique Id of at least 40 characters, which identifies the
clients to the UCS Server. Once the Client registers, iPECS
system will send the information to the UCS Server. Note
that the UCS Server Type in PGM 445 must be configured
as “Premium”.
The presence status of the Client can be shared with other
clients.
The status of license will be displayed and select the
license for usage among range.
557
RANGE
DEFAULT
Min. 40 characters
OFF
ON
PREM-V
PREM-NV
MOBILE
ON
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.15.4 UCS Standard Client Attributes – PGM 447
Selecting UCS Standard client attributes will display the UCS standard client attributes input page.
Enter the UCS Client index then click [Load] to modify the client data. Use the check mark to
indicate which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save] button.
Enter UCS Client Index: eMG80: 1-32 / eMG800: 1-200 / UCP: 1-200
Figure 4.4.15.4-1 UCS Standard Client Attributes
The UCS Client can be allowed or denied access to several features as described in Table
4.4.15.4-1.
Table 4.4.15.4-1 UCS Standard Client Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Allow Scheduled Dial
Allow Flexible Button
Allows Scheduled Dialing from the client.
Allows the user to access Flex buttons on the UCS Client.
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
ON
ON
Allow Step Call
Allows access to the step-call feature by the UCS client.
OFF/ON
ON
Allow Call Memo
Allows the UCS Client access to the Call Memo feature.
OFF/ON
ON
Allow Call Pickup
Permits the UCS Client use of the Direct and Group Call Pickup features.
OFF/ON
ON
558
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.15.5 Administrative Message – PGM 448
Selecting Administrative Message will display the administrative message input page. Click
[Send] button after filling out the subject and Contents and checking the destination.
Figure 4.4.15.5-1 Administrative Message
An administrator can send a message to UCS Clients such as a Welcome message.
Table 4.4.15.5-1 Administrative Message
ATTRIBUTE
Subject
Destination
Contents
DESCRIPTION
Message subject.
RANGE
DEFAULT
Max. 80 bytes
The message can be sent to currently active UCS
Clients or to All Clients. For the All Clients
selection, the message is sent to all active Clients
and as each Client logs in.
Message body.
559
Login user
All users
Max. 255 bytes
All
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.15.6 UCS Standard Client Audio Setting – PGM 449
Selecting UCS Standard Client Audio setting will display the audio setting input page. Enter the
Client index and click [Load] to modify the Client data. Use the check mark to indicate which
attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save] button.
Enter UCS Client Index: eMG80: 1-32 / eMG800: 1-200 / UCP: 1-200
Figure 4.4.15.6-1 UCS Standard Client Audio Setting
Audio characteristic for the Speaker and earphone mode can be established for best overall
audio performance.
Table 4.4.15.6-1 Audio Setting by Mobile User & Mobile phone
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
OFF
Earpiece or Earphone conversion mode
Enable Noise Suppression
The system can implement various levels of “Noise
suppression from “OFF” to “Very High” in six levels.
OFF
ON
Enable Automatic Mic. Volume
The system can implement Auto gain control for the
Earphone.
Echo Control
Echo cancellation can be enabled for the Earphone.
OFF
ON
Disable
Minimum
Low
560
OFF
Disable EC
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.15.6-1 Audio Setting by Mobile User & Mobile phone
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
DEFAULT
Moderate
High
Maximum
Speaker Conversation Mode
The system can implement various levels of “Noise
Enable Noise Suppression
suppression from “OFF” to “Very High” in six levels.
The system can implement Auto gain control for the
Enable Automatic Mic. Volume
Speakerphone.
Echo Control
Echo cancellation can be enabled for the
Speakerphone.
561
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Disable
Minimum
Low
Moderate
High
Maximum
OFF
OFF
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.16 DECT Data
Selecting the DECT Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in the left frame as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 4.4.16-1 DECT Data Main Page
562
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.16.1 DECT Registration (0#)
Selecting DECT Registration returns the DECT Registration input page. Use the check mark to
indicate which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is stored by clicking [Save] button.
Figure 4.4.16.1-1 DECT Subscription Screen
On this page, the DECT PARK and authorization codes are defined. Several “Options” are
available to enable subscription, unsubscribe a DECT station, enable mobility, etc. A chart is
included displaying the registered and subscribed DECT terminals.
Table 4.4.16.1-1 DECT Registration
ATTRIBUTE
Park Code
AC Code
DECT Subscribe All
Data Erase Password
DESCRIPTION
The PARK (Portable Access Rights Key) Code is a
unique system Id entered at the DECT handset during
the subscription process.
The Authentication Code is entered at a DECT handset
to verify subscription.
To erase all data of DECT, enter the password.
Option
DECT Subscribe
Enable
Enables the system to accept subscription from a
DECT handset.
563
RANGE
DEFAULT
14 digits
Not
programmed
Up to 8 digits
1111
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table 4.4.16.1-1 DECT Registration
ATTRIBUTE
Desired Station
DESCRIPTION
Desired station number for the wireless DECT handset.
Several types of handsets may be selected.
Phone Type
DECT Unsubscribe
DECT User
Authentication
DECT Mobility
Station Erase
Press [Send] button after entering the number and
type.
To terminate a subscription, enter the station number
for the DECT handset. Note the Station must be
connected, otherwise use Station Erase field below.
To subscribe successfully, the user will be required to
enter the Station Authorization Code from PGM 227.
When a DECT handset is registered to multiple
systems that are networked, calls can be routed over
the network to the DECT handset location.
Enter the registered station number, select Mobility ON
or OFF and click [write] box then Save the page.
To terminate the registration for a DECT phone that is
not connected, enter the registered station number and
click [Save] button.
564
RANGE
DEFAULT
Station Number
GDC-480H/500H,
GDC-400/450H,
Standard GAP
GDC480H/500H
Station number
Station number
OFF
ON
Station number
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.16.2 DECT ATTRIBUTES - PGM 491
Selecting the DECT Attributes returns the DECT ATTRIBUTES input page. Click [Save] button
after changing Value.
Figure 4.4.16.2-1 DECT ATTRIBUTES
DECT Attributes define functions associated with the DECT equipment and operation as shown
in the following table.
Table 4.4.16.2-1 DECT Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
Auto Call Release
Base Fault Alarm
Chain Fault Alarm
Handover
Sensitivity (GDC500H only)
DESCRIPTION
If enabled, when the other party of an active internal call
disconnects, DECT terminal returns to idle.
If enabled, DECT Base station alarms are sent to the
Attendant.
If enabled, alarms are sent to the Attendant indicating a
fault in the link between WTIM modules. This feature is
only for UCP.
The user can control the handover sensitivity of GDC500H. (Normal or Strong)
If this value is changed, all WTIBs will restart.
565
RANGE
OFF
ON
Disable
Enable
DEFAULT
OFF
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Normal
Strong
Normal
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.16.3 DECT Multi-zone support
Selecting the DECT Multi-zone support will display the DECT Multi-zone support input page. Click
[Save and All WTIM (WTIB)s reset] button after changing Value to apply.
Figure 4.4.16.3-1 DECT Multi-zone support attributes
It is for roaming of DECT phones in large sites with more than 3 WTIM (WTIB).
566
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.17 Hotel Data
Selecting the hotel data returns the sub-menu displayed in the left frame as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 4.4.17-1 Hotel Data main page
With Hotel Data, we describe the function on another Hotel Feature and Programming manual.
Refer to “Hotel Feature and Programming manual’.
567
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.18 Green Mode for eMG - PGM 500
Selecting the Green Mode program group returns the sub-menu displayed in the left frame as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 4.4.18-1 Green mode main page
568
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.18.1 Green mode activation
Selecting Green Mode Activation returns the page shown. Click [Save] button after changing
Value.
Figure 4.4.18.1-1 Green Mode Activation
The system can disable the power of a Digital Phone or Single Line Telephone (SLT) installed in
the HYIB/SLIB/DSIB to save power during night or holiday mode. The power ON/OFF can be
controlled by Web admin manually or automatically by assigning power ON/OFF time.
Table 4.4.18.1-1 Green Mode Activation Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
Power Save Usage
Slot No.
Board Type
Station Range
Power Save Mode
Current Status
Power ON button
Power OFF button
DESCRIPTION
Enables or Disables Power Save usage.
The Slot Number of board supporting power control.
Board Type.
Station Number Range of board supporting power control.
Enables or Disables Power Save Usage Mode of each board.
Displays the current status of board power ON/OFF.
Power ON manually all of stations in Power Save used board.
Power OFF manually all of stations in Power Save used board.
569
DEFAULT
Disable
Disable
ON
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.18.2 Green Mode Time Setting
Selecting the Green Mode Time Setting returns the page shown. Click [Save] button after
changing Value.
Figure 4.4.18.2-1 Green Mode Time Setting
The power ON/OFF time can be assigned to control Green Mode automatically. The power
ON/OFF time can be defined at each day in a week. And when defined that time, power to assign
board will be served or not.
Table 4.4.18.2-1 Green Mode Time Setting
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
Power ON Time
The time to start power supply to assigned board.
Power OFF Time
The time to stop power supply to assigned board.
570
RANGE
hhmm
(Must be 4 Digits)
hhmm
(Must be 4 Digits)
DEFAULT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.19 Redundancy Data for UCP600 & 2400
Selecting the redundancy data returns the sub-menu displayed in the left frame as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 4.4.19-1 Redundancy Data main page
571
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.19.1 Redundancy Attributes – PGM 502
Selecting Redundancy attributes will display the page shown. Click [Save] button after changing
Value.
Figure 4.4.19.1-1 Redundancy Attributes
The Redundancy attributes enable redundancy and activate “Geographical” redundancy.
Table 4.4.19.1-1 Redundancy Attributes
ATTRIBUTE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
CPU Redundancy
usage
Change Active UCP By
Power Fail
Geographical
Redundancy
When redundancy is employed, this field informs the master
UCP that a redundant UCP is available.
When power fails, the active UCP is changed to the standby
mode and the standby UCP becomes active.
Geographical redundancy permits remote location of the
redundant UCP modules.
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
572
DEFAULT
OFF
OFF
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.19.2 Redundancy IP Address – PGM 503
Selecting the redundancy IP Address will display the page shown. Click [Save] button after
changing Value.
Figure 4.4.19.2-1 Redundancy IP Address
For proper operation, the IP addressing parameters of the LAN1 ports of the redundant UCP
modules must be defined for Redundancy.
573
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.20 Initialization - PGM 450
Selecting Initialization will return the sub-menu in the left frame in as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4.4.20-1 Initialization
574
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.4.20.1 Initialization Table - PGM 450
Selecting Initialization will display the Initialization Table data entry page. Use the check mark to
indicate which attributes to modify; data for checked attributes is initialized by clicking [Initialize]
button or reset system by clicking [Reset system] button.
Figure 4.4.20.1-1 Initialization Menu
The system has been pre-programmed with certain features using the default data. The default
data are loaded into memory when the system is initialized. The system should always be
initialized when first installed or the database appears corrupted.
In addition, the UCP system can be restarted from this page and, if redundant processors are
equipped, the active and standby UCP modules can be modified.
The system can be initialized manually during installation.
Note
1) If you reset eMG system when Dip switch 2 is On, all database will be initialized including
PGM 101-104.
2) If you reset UCP system when Dip switch 4 is On, all database will be initialized including
PGM 101-104.
575
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5 Maintenance
The Maintenance tab main screen displays information on the system software versions as well
as information on modules and terminals connected to the system. From this page, the database
upload/download, software upgrade, access control, license install and other management
functions shown in Figure 4.5-1 ~ 4.5-3 are accessed. In addition, at the top of the central screen,
detailed software version information is provided. Also, you can monitor the device in real time by
clicking [Real-time Device Monitoring].
As eMG/UCP software is being upgraded regularly, we cannot guarantee the software
version displayed and it may be different from the current version.
Among Menus on Maintenance, the following functions are not available at UCP2400.
1. VSF Prompt message
2. VSF System greeting
3. Voice Mail USB Backup on VSF Mail Management
Real time monitoring for Device
You can monitor the current status about Device in real time. The new information is highlighted
in red.
Figure 4.5-1 eMG80 Maintenance Main Page
576
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Figure 4.5-2 eMG800 Maintenance Main Page
Figure 4.5-3 UCP Maintenance Main Page
577
Issue 1.6
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.1 S/W Upgrade
iPECS system employs a NAND based memory file system thus, html, UCP/MPB upgrade and
iPECS appliance image files can be uploaded without impact to the current database. All of
iPECS series modules can be upgraded by remote access through the system. Selecting S/W
Upgrade from the Maintenance page displays the Appliance Version page and sub-menus
display in the left frame as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4.5.1-1 S/W Upgrade
There are two types of upgrade images: application and kernel image. If both are required,
upgrade the kernel first and then the application.
The VMIU is part of the MPB and VSF prompts are upgraded by uploading prompt files to the
MPB. VMIB prompts are upgraded by direct upload of prompt files to the VMIB.
578
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.1.1 File Upload
From the File Upload page, click [Select file] button and then open the pop-up folder. Select the
desired file to upload to the system’s memory and click the [Start] button. The file is sent to the
system’s memory, saved and automatically loaded upon a system reset or restart.
Prior to upload, verify sufficient memory is available in eMG/UCP File System for the files to be
uploaded. Refer to ‘File System section’ to view the free disk space and delete any unused files.
Note names of files required for normal system operation will be grey out and cannot be deleted.
Html image files are extracted and previous HTML files are deleted at completion of the upload
process. New VSF prompt files are also available immediately upon successful uploaded.
Figure 4.5.1.1-1 File Upload
* If file upload succeeds, a success page will be displayed.
579
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.1.2 Upgrade Process
If the iPECS Appliance image is uploaded, the appliances of the type for which an image was
uploaded will be displayed and can be selected to upgrade, as shown in the following figure
Upgrade Process. Select the desired appliance and click [Upgrade] button, the upgrade process
will start and a progress screen will be displayed.
Figure 4.5.1.2-1 Upgrade Process
4.5.1.2.1
Upgrade Process View
The Upgrade Process View provides a status window; refer to the following Upgrade Process
View, for Module and terminal upgrade activity in process.
Figure 4.5.1.2-1 Upgrade Process View
580
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
4.5.1.2.2
Issue 1.6
iPECS eMG/UCP Upgrade Process
iPECS Software Full Upgrade Sequence
The following shows the order in which the upgrade process proceeds and firmware files for
iPECS and modules. Note the xxxx in the ROM file names indicates the version number of the file.
MPB/UCP Upgrade Process
1. Upload MPB/UCP application image.
iPECS UCP
UCP application image
(Example, S-UCP-Rls1601-2.1.1-app.rom
iPECS eMG
eMG 80/800 MPB application image
(Example,
eMG80: S-eMG80MPB-Rls1512-2.1.1-App
eMG800: S-eMG800MPB-Rls1512-2.1.1-App)
2. Restart MPB/UCP.
Note:
If the new system database is not compatible with existing system database, it will be necessary
to initialize the system database. This can be done manually using the Initialize Dip Switch
located on the UCP/MPB module or via the Initialization Web page.
Upgrade of the UCP/MPB includes HTML files; a separate upload of the HTML files is not
required. HTML files can be separately upgraded under the File System
Appliances Upgrade Process
1. Upload Appliance application image to MPB
LIP 8012/8024/8040E application image:
LIP 8002E application image:
GS98Pxxxx.rom (xxxx indicates the version)
GS99Pxxxx.rom (xxxx indicates the version)
2. Select target appliances & Upgrade application image and click [Upgrade].
3. Wait until upgrade process completes.
4. Automatically restart when upgrade completes successfully.
Upgrade of Voice Prompt for eMG
1. Access to VSF Prompt Upgrade page.
2. Select First/Second/Third for multiple language voice prompt.
3. Upload the proper prompt file.
VSF prompt file:
??96Wxxxx.rom (?? Is nation, i.e. GS, DM, KR, etc. ; xxxx indicates the version)
Upgrade of Voice Prompt to VMIU for eMG
1. Access to MPB.
2. Select First/Second/Third for multiple language of voice prompt.
3. Upload the proper prompt file to VMIU.
VMIB prompt file:
??96Wxxxx.rom (?? Is nation, i.e. GS, DM, KR, etc. ; xxxx indicates the version)
581
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.1.3 Upgrade HTML Files
The “File View” Menu is used to upload file and reload the system’s html files. Upload time of html
will take 5 ~ 10 minutes.
4.5.1.3.1
Appliances Upgrade (Device and iPECS Phone)
Upload appliance image, and click [Upgrade process] button to select upgrade appliances. If
appliances are selected, click [Upgrade] button. The page shown in Figure 4.5.1.2-1 will be
displayed indicating the Upload command has been sent and upgrade process is working. This
page will display the Upload status. When the appliance upgrade process is successful, the
status is updated to “Success”. If the upgrade process fails, the process is attempted an
additional three (3) times before abandoned.
4.5.1.3.2
Direct Appliances Upgrade
Should the above managed upgrade process fail, appliances (Devices and iPECS Phones) can
be upgraded directly using the appliance IP address as the upgrade destination address. Note
the later may require local access.
Figure 4.5.1.3.2-1 iPECS Phone Direct Connect Upgrade
582
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
4.5.1.4 WTIB Base upgrade Process for eMG800
Upgrade WTIB base image of eMG800.
1.
Upload WTIB base image to MPB.
2.
Select target base & Upgrade.
3.
Wait until upgrade process completes.
4.
Automatically restart when upgrade completes successfully.
Figure 4.5.1.4 WTIB Base Upgrade Process
583
Issue 1.6
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.2 Database
4.5.2.1 Database Upload
The Database Upload selection will display the Database Upload page as shown in figure. Select
[Select Files] then select the database file desired from the local PC and click [Start] to upload
the database to the system.
Figure 4.5.2.1-1 Database Upload
4.5.2.2 Database management
Selecting Database Management will display the Database Download page. Select the structure
to determine the portion or structure of the download. Click [Download] then select the directory
and file name in the pop-ups that follow to save the file to the PC. After building a database file,
the download function will be available. A maximum of five downloadable files for various types of
data and structure can be built; building additional files deletes the oldest.
Figure 4.5.2.2-1 Database Download
You can add or modify the file name by entering the characters including special character (#,
$, %, &, ', ( ), -, ., @, _). The comment will be created as [XXXXX] before ‘.admgzu’. It is useful to
search DB after downloading.
Clicking on [Download] button will present the File Download window. Files should be saved to
disk. Note that this screen will appear for all download processes.
A user can apply DB file from USB memory. The DB file name is composed of system type, DB
type, date & time and version information.
584
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.3 Multi Language
The system can employ either English or a “Local Language” for the Web page displays. The
multi-language file, which is a csv (comma separated variable) formatted file, is downloaded to a
PC and the English terms are translated to the local language. The modified file can then be
uploaded to iPECS system. Once uploaded, the user can select the “Change Language” button
and select either English or the Local Language translation for Web page displays.
4.5.3.1 Multi Language File Upload
The Multi Language File Upload selection returns the Multi Language File Upload page as shown
in figure. By selecting the Multi Language File desired from the local PC, the desired Multi
Language File can be uploaded to iPECS system.
Figure 4.5.3.1-1 Multi Language File Upload
4.5.3.2 Multi Language File Download
Selecting Multi Language File Download will display the Multi Language File Download page
figure. Selecting this option will download the entire iPECS system Multi Language File to the
local PC. This also allows the Multi Language File in the PC to be uploaded to iPECS system
using the file upload procedures in S/W Upgrade section.
Figure 4.5.3.2-1 Multi Language File Download
585
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.4 SMDR
The iPECS system can download SMDR data in a SYLK format file (.slk). The file is compressed
using the “gz” file format. After unzipping, the file can be opened under any common spreadsheet
application. The system will provide a view of SMDR data for the station range entered in the
Web page Figure. This page may also be employed to delete SMDR records for the station range
entered.
Figure 4.5.4-1 SMDR Access
586
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.5 File System
4.5.5.1 File View & Delete
The File View & Delete page displays a list of the various files stored in the file system memory.
To delete a file, check the box for the file and click [Delete]. Files can also be downloaded to the
PC using the [Download] button to the right of the file name.
Note the system requires the files displayed in grey and the system will not allow deletion of these
files.
Figure 4.5.5.1-1 File View and Delete
4.5.5.2 File System Information
The File System Information page displays the disk status including the total and free disk space
as shown in figure. Use this page to determine if the free space on the disk is sufficient for
uploading Upgrade files, section 4.5.1.
Figure 4.5.5.2-1 File System Information
587
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.6 MOH (Music On-Hold) Management
4.5.6.1 MOH Delete & Download
The MOH Delete & Download page displays a list of the thirteen files stored in the file system
memory. To delete a file, check the box for the file and click [Delete]. Files can also be
downloaded to the PC using the [Download] button to the right of the file name.
Figure 4.5.6.1-1 MOH Delete & Download
4.5.6.2 MOH Upload
Selecting “MOH Upload” will display the page shown in figure. Here MOH can be uploaded to the
system for each of up to thirteen (13) MOH. MOH files format must be followed as shown in the
page ‘G.711 a/u-Law wav (8000Hz, 16bit, mono)’.
Figure 4.5.6.2-1 MOH Upload
588
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.7 License Install
Various licenses can be installed to expand capacity of the system and Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
services available in the system as well as soft clients and feature applications. After obtaining a
license, the code is entered in the Value column as shown in Figure 4.5.7-1.
Figure 4.5.7-1 License Install
589
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.7.1 License upload
Before License upload, make sure that the date of system is set correctly. Click the Select files
button and then open the pop-up folder. Select a valid license file to upload to the system and
click the [Start] button. If the file which is sent to the system is “System License File”, it will be
saved and automatically applied without restart. The enabled features by uploading license file
can be shown in “System Overview” page.
Figure 4.5.7.1-1 License Upload
You can check license upload detailed log by clicking "Log View" button.
4.5.7.2 Gateway License for UCP
All gateways which can have gateway license type are displayed in this web page. If a valid
gateway license file was uploaded by “License Upload” and a gateway with matched serial
number is registered in system, [Apply] button will be activated. This button is used to send the
license file to the gateway. After the license file is sent, it will be deleted and the gateway will be
restarted to apply features of the license file.
1) The following figure is before uploading the license.
590
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
2) After re fresh, the following figure is displayed and click the apply button to activate.
3) The final step is to reset the gateway license and then refresh. You can see the following
figure for Gateway license.
4.5.7.3 Temp License Activation
Before Temp License Activation, make sure that the date of system is set correctly. In this page,
Temp License can be activated by clicking [Activation] button. Remaining days and activation
times are displayed in State column. The Temp License can be activated totally 6 times. It is valid
for 60 days at first activation and is valid 30 days from second activation. Therefore the license
file which has correct port number and features must be uploaded. Otherwise, system may enter
“Limited Service Mode” due to the mismatched license.
Figure 4.5.7.3-1 Temp License Activation
Notification
1) Please back up your DB before you activate a temporary license.
2) Must verify the present license before the temporary license expires.
3) If a temp license expires, upload a new license file or use within the scope of current
license file. Otherwise, the system may go to [Limited Service Mode].
591
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.8 DECT Statistics Feature
Selecting DECT Statistics Feature displays the page shown in figure. Select the desired radial
button and, where needed, enter the WTIM/WTIB sequence number then click [Send] to view the
statistics.
Figure 4.5.8-1 DECT Statistics Feature
592
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.9 VSF Prompt Upload
iPECS sytem delivers system prompts in up to six (6) languages. The prompts for each language
are stored in a separate file. Files for each of the languages supported are available from the
local Ericsson-LG Enterprise representative. The entire prompt file or individual prompts may be
uploaded to the system. Once uploaded to the system the file is employed to play prompts to
iPECS eMG/UCP user.
UCP2400 doesn’t support VSF prompt message.
VSF prompt sub-menu is a little different among eMG80, eMG800, and UCP.
Prompt selection: eMG800 and UCP are available.
Prompt Upload /Delete: Available.
Individual upload: Available.
4.5.9.1 Prompt selection
Selecting Prompt Selection displays the page shown in figure. The System Voice Prompt
language files are stored in the VSF memory and are enabled with the Prompt Selection page. A
reference “Position” is assigned a language selected from the drop-down menu. Once the
language for each position is selected, saving the page enables all the languages selected.
Figure 4.5.9.1-1 Prompt Selection for eMG800 & UCP
593
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.9.2 Prompt Upload/Delete
Selecting Prompt Upload/Delete displays the page shown in Figure 4.5.9.2-1 & Figure 4.5.9.2-2.
From this page, the entire prompt file for selected languages can be deleted and updated prompt
files uploaded to the system. The Select file button is used to upload files. The check box and
Delete button are used to delete old or unused language files.
Figure 4.5.9.2-1 Prompt Upload & Delete for eMG80
Figure 4.5.9.2-2 Prompt Upload & Delete for eMG800 & UCP
594
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.9.3 Individual Upload
Selecting “Individual Upload” will display the page shown in figure. Here individual system
prompts can be uploaded to the system for each of up to six (6) languages. Prompt files must be
appropriately named and must be in a G.711 a/u-Law format.
Figure 4.5.9.3-1 Individual Upload
595
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.10 VSF System Greeting
The System Greetings (Announcements) can be downloaded from the system or Uploaded to the
system. Individual announcements can be recorded externally and then uploaded to the system.
Like prompts, the individual announcement files must be in a .wav format using the g.711 codec.
Individual greetings for each Language position can be uploaded as well as downloaded.
Clicking on the message will download the message to the browser, which will play the message.
To save the message, right click and select save as. Locate a directory and change the file
name, if desired and click save.
All announcements can be downloaded from the system as a back-up file and uploaded to the
VSF memory as required.
UCP2400 doesn’t support VSF system greeting.
4.5.10.1 Individual Upload
Selecting Individual Upload displays the page shown in Figure 4.5.10.1-1. From this page,
individual pre-recorded announcements for each language position can be uploaded from the PC
to the VSF gateway. Select the language position and assure the file name matches the
appropriate System Announcement number. The file format must be shown on the page.
Figure 4.5.10.1-1 Individual Upload
596
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.10.2 Individual download
Selecting Individual Download displays the page shown in figure. The page will display a list of
System announcement in the VSF memory. Individual files may be downloaded with the
Download button next to the announcement file name or using the checkbox and the delete
button the announcement can be deleted from the VSF memory.
Figure 4.5.10.2-1 Individual Download
4.5.10.3 System greeting Upload
Selecting System Greeting Upload displays the page shown in figure. From this page,
announcements for each language “Position” can be uploaded to the VSF memory. First, select
the language position then click the Select Files button to select the file to upload from the PC.
Figure 4.5.10.3-1 System Greeting Upload
597
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.10.4 System greeting Download
Selecting System Greeting Download displays the page shown in figure. From this page,
announcements for each language “Position” can be downloaded from the VSF memory as a
back-up file. First, select the language position, click the Download button then follow the normal
save file process to store the file to the PC.
Figure 4.5.10.4-1 System Greeting Download
598
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.11 User Greeting
Administrators can upload or download User greeting to System. So User greetings are available
to use at iPECS phones.
4.5.11.1 User Greeting Upload
To upload the User Greeting, complete the following steps:
› Click [Select File] button.
› Select the User greeting file (rom file) from folder.
› Click [Start] to upload and then display the following figure ‘success’.
Figure 4.5.11.1-1 User Greeting Upload
599
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.11.2 User Greeting Download
To download the User Greeting from System, complete the following steps:
› Click [Download] button.
› The tab will be displayed at the left bottom of page. Click the arrow box and select [Open] to
show.
Figure 4.5.11.2-1 User Greeting Download
600
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.12 Company Directory
Administrators can upload or download company directories to System. So company directories
are available to use at iPECS phones.
4.5.12.1 CDN Upload
To upload the Company Directory, complete the following steps:
› Click [Select File] button.
› Select the Company Directory file (rom file) from folder.
› Click [Start] to upload and then display the following figure ‘success’.
Figure 4.5.12.1-1 CDN Upload
601
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.12.2 CDN Download
To download the Company Directory from System, complete the following steps:
› Click [Download] button.
› The tab will be displayed at the left bottom of page. Click the arrow box and select [Open] to
show.
Figure 4.5.12.2-1 CDN Download
602
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.13 Voice Mail Management
The Voice Mail Management permits the administrator to view the status of the built-in Voice Mail
boxes and delete the all messages, delete messages for specific stations, or back-up all the
messages to the PC.
4.5.13.1 Voice Mail Delete
Selecting Voice Mail Delete displays the page as shown in figure. From this page, messages
stored in the VMIU (VMIB) can be deleted for all stations or a station range. In addition, using the
“Display Station Voice Mail Status” button, the number of messages for each station is displayed.
Figure 4.5.13.1-1 Voice Mail Delete
A user can delete user greeting if you set "Including user greeting" option when a user delete
voice mail.
603
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.13.2 Voice Mail USB Backup
Selecting Voice Mail Backup displays the page shown in figure.
In case of eMG, this page permits the Administrator to send all Voice messages in the
VMIU/VMIB memory to the USB port of the KSU. Note the VSF must be idle and a USB memory
device installed in the system.
The eMG800 has only [Backup Voice Mail to USB (VMIU)].
In case of UCP, this page permits the Administrator to send all Voice messages in the VSF
gateway memory to the USB port of the UCP module. Note the VSF gateway must be idle and a
USB memory device installed in the UCP module.
UCP2400 doesn’t support Voice mail USB Backup.
Figure 4.5.13.2-1 Voice Mail USB Backup
To back up Voice Mail, click the backup Voice Mail to USB button. User can find all information
about the status, Number of files, Total file size, and the percentage of Progress by text.
604
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.14 Function program
The Function Program allows the administrator to build a set of programs with attributes in a
structure customized to the administrator. The Function programs can then be accessed under
the Administration pages using the “Function Base” button at the top of the left navigation page.
Single level and multi-level programs can be structured. The User Function Management permits
functions to be deleted or, with the “Add Function” button, new program functions can be added.
4.5.14.1 User Function Management Page
Selecting User Function Management displays the page shown in figure. Using the check box
and Delete button Function programs previously saved can be deleted.
Figure 4.5.14.1-1 User Function Management Page
605
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Adding Function
This step is divided into 5 steps and you can make the desired function each step. The following
is the guide to make Name and add the function on each step:
1) To enter the function name, English, Numbering, Underscore (_) and Parentheses are
available. Function name has to be filled out.
2)
To enter the step name, English, Numbering, and Special letters except Double
quotation marks are available.
3) The step name doesn’t need to be filled out, but the function has to be configured each
step.
4) To cancel or close this tab, click the close button (X) and pop up the blow;
1. Click the Add Function button.
2. On the below window, click the desired PGM in the left frame. First fill out the function
name and step name. To configure the step 1, click the Make table to check the desired
function and then click the Save button.
Check All: check all functions
Save: Save the checked functions
Initialize: Initialize the checked functions
606
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
3. The selected functions are displayed and click the Save button after checking each
functions. The rest steps are the same as the step 1.
4. Finally, click the Save Function to save and then click the OK button.
607
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
5. To check the function, click Function Base button in the left frame and User Function List
and you will see the following figure.
You can enable or disable the function by checking each function and then click the save
after setting Value. Also move to each step by clicking the next button or Previous button.
Deleting Function
To delete the user function, click Maintenance at the top of window and then click the Function
Program -> User Function Management. Check the desired function to delete and click the delete
button.
608
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.15 User Management
iPECS UCP supports up to 50 system accounts and up to ten (10) users may simultaneously
access system Web services. The default ID is ‘admin’ and the password is ‘1234’. The Access
privilege is determined based on the entered system account (ID/Password) and the privilege
assigned for the user.
Please follow up the below instructions to make User ID:
1) Maximum 16 characters & digits.
2) In English only.
3) First letter must be Alphabet. The rest are available: Alphabet, number, underscore (_).
4) Don’t use ‘blank’.
It is strongly recommended that a unique User ID and strong password be entered to
minimize the risk of admin and maintenance access by unauthorized personnel.
User should register more than a maintenance ID.
Figure 4.5.15-1 User Management
4.5.15.1 Company (Tenant group) Administrator Account
The main (maintenance) administrator of the system can make new administrator account for
each tenant group. The tenant group administrator can configure the system according to tenant
group and ‘Web access authorization’ in System Data. Managing the available feature will be
assigned Web Access Authorization in System Data.
609
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Operation
1. Web Access Authorization
> Program Custom#1 and #2 privilege columns by selecting N/A, Read, Read/Write for
Tenant group administrator.
2. User Management: add User account for Tenant group administrator.
1) Enter ID and Password.
2) Select Custom 1 or Custom 2.
3) Enter the desired Tenant group number.
UCP100/600/2400 100 groups
eMG800
32 groups
eMG80
15 groups
Note
- Maximum 50 users (including Maintenance, Admin and User privilege).
- The main administrator can’t add Tenant group administrator account for all tenant
group because the number of tenant group of UCP is 100.
4) Click [Save] button to create Account.
5) Log in with the account.
6) The available PGM menu will be displayed by assigning ‘Web Access Authorization’.
610
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.16 Trace
The system software incorporates routines to monitor and output detailed call and feature
processing information, and event logs. Information is provided on a system or device level as
requested. Administrators can find the information on this page.
Figure 4.5.16-1 Trace Main Page
We explain [Packet Capture] and [Trace Log via web] among them because it is very useful to
use Web admin.
Packet Capture
A user can start and stop capturing packets and download packet capture result. The dump file
will be replaced when new capturing is started.
Default option is included. The file name is packetdump.cap. -i eth0 -w packetdump.cap -c 10000
- Option explanation
protocol filter: tcp or udp or icmp
port filter: both source and destination port -> port #number, source port -> src port #number,
611
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
destination port -> dst port #number
IP filter: both source and destination host IP -> host #IP_ADDR, source host IP -> src host
#IP_ADDR, destination host IP -> dst host #IP_ADDR
# Example
UDP and Port 5588 and Source IP address 10.1.1.100: udp and port 5588 and src host
10.1.1.100
Trace Log via web
A user can start and stop logging and download trace log result. The log file will be replaced
when new logging is started.
1. Set 'Trace Attribute' to 'COM1(UART1)' from 'Set Trace Direction' menu.
2. Set 'Board Trace', 'Device Trace' and 'Virtual Trace Dip Switch(P452)' menu.
3. Click [Start] button.
4.5.17 TDM Gain Control
Control voice gain of TDM device for each direction. For more information to change Value, it is
recommended that you ask your dealer or an authorized Ericsson-LG Enterprise representative.
We can’t guarantee the damage according to changing Value arbitrarily.
Figure 4.5.17-1 TDM Main Page
612
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.18 IP Gain Control
Audio gain for signals from and to each type of device is adjustable through the IP Gain Control
page. The default gain values for the system are set to match the Nation Code. For more
information to change Value, it is recommended that you ask your dealer or an authorized
Ericsson-LG Enterprise representative. We can’t guarantee the damage according to changing
Value arbitrarily.
Figure 4.5.18-1 IP Gain Control Main Page
4.5.19 Tone/ Ring Gain & Cadence Control
Selecting Tone Table will display the page shown. Here the tones, cadence and gain used with
features can be managed. For more information to change Value, it is recommended that you ask
your dealer or an authorized Ericsson-LG Enterprise representative. We can’t guarantee the
damage according to changing Value arbitrarily.
Figure 4.5.19-1 Tone/Ring Gain & Cadence Control Main Page
Control system tone/ring cadence and frequency.
System announcement or music can be provided instead of system ring/tone if it is assigned in
tone table.
613
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.5.20 Appliances Control
The Appliances Control page permits control of several characteristics of IP phones and analog
CO lines such as Comfort Noise level and side tone. For more information to change Value, it is
recommended that you ask your dealer or an authorized Ericsson-LG Enterprise representative.
We can’t guarantee the damage according to changing Value arbitrarily.
Figure 4.5.20-1 Appliances Control Main Page
4.5.21 Web Certificate
SSL stands for Secure Sockets Layer, a global standard security technology that enables
encrypted communication between a web browser and a web server. It is utilized by millions of
online businesses and individuals to decrease the risk of sensitive information (e.g. credit card
numbers, user names, passwords, emails, etc.) from being stolen or tampered with by hackers
and identity thieves. In essence, SSL allows for a private “conversation” just between the two
intended parties.
To create this secure connection, an SSL certificate (also referred to as a “digital certificate”) is
installed on a web server and serves two functions:
-
It authenticates the identity of the website (this guarantees visitors that they’re not on a
bogus site)
-
It encrypts the data that’s being transmitted.
The web server certificated must have a domain name however default web certificate of a
system has no information for domain. So, a web browser displays warning message about
ERR_CERT_AUTHORITY_INVALID. To clear this warning, an administrator has to issue a
certificate for the system.
There is a need to generate own self signed certificate in order to mitigate the vulnerability of
security and do not display the caution pop-up such as 'un-trusted site' because the system use
IP address or URL. This certificate is needed to use 'https//XXX' , not 'http://xxx'.
To create Certificate
Please must check date and time. The certificate will not operate well on PC or Mobile device if
the time of certificate issued on between system and PC or Mobile device is different.
Step 1: Enter Domain name and then click [Issue] button. The certificate will be used for IP
address of this system if Domain name is not entered as blank.
614
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
The following result is displayed on browser.
Step 2: Install Certificates into the Trusted Root Certification Authorities certificate store after
downloading directly as below picture or sending to email for installing the desired devices if you
want to get the certificates via email.
The way to install Certificates is followed by the type of Windows OS, Android OS, or iOS OS.
Step 3: Restart Web server to apply New certificate by clicking [Web Server Restart] button.
Note
Clean up all certificate and files by clicking [Server Certificate Clean up] button.
615
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Figure 4.5.21-1 Web Certificate Issue
616
Issue 1.6
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
4.6 On-Line web user guide
We provide On-line web user guide about the frequent use of features to a user.
You can access it in the login page as below without entering ID and Password.
We didn’t explain the user guide because you can easily get the information on the following
features on the web.
617
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Appendix A Program Codes
User and Attendant Program Codes, refer to Table A-1 and A-2, are digit sequences users and
the Attendant may dial while in the User Program Mode to assign Flex buttons and affect the
status of a feature or setting. For more information on the User Program Mode, refer to the iPECS
Features and Operation Manual.
Many of these codes may be assigned to a button of an iPECS IP or LDP Phone by pressing the
[PGM] button as the first entry of a Flexible button assignment, see Flex button Programming in
the iPECS Features and Operation Manual.
Table A-1 Station User Program codes
618
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table A-2 Attendant User Program Codes
CODE
0111
0112
0113
0114
0115
0116
0121
0122
0123
0124
0125
0126
0127
0128
0129
021
022
031
032
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
051
052
053
054
055
06
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
070
08
*#
FUNCTION
Print SMDR, by Station
Delete SMDR, by Station
Display Call Charge
Abort Print
Print Lost Call Report
Delete Lost Call Report
Print Traffic Analysis (All summary)
Print Traffic Analysis (All summary periodically)
Abort “Print Traffic Analysis (All summary periodically)”
Print Traffic Analysis (Attendant)
Print Traffic Analysis (Call summary)
Print Traffic Analysis (Call Hourly)
Print Traffic Analysis (H/W Usage)
Print Traffic Analysis (CO summary)
Print Traffic Analysis (CO Hourly)
Set ICM only Mode
Restore Station COS
Authorization Code Registration
Erase Authorization
System Date/Time set
LCD Date Mode
LCD Time Mode
Set Wake Up Time from Attendant
Wake Up Disable from Attendant
PX Clock Set through ISDN message
Hot Desk login
Hot Desk logout
Custom/Pre-select Message
DND/Call Forward/Pre-selected MSG Cancel
Custom Display Message (11-20)
Monitor Conference Room
Delete Conference Room
VSF – Record System Greeting
Register Station Name
Isolate CO Fault Line
Automatic Day/Night/Timed Ring Table
External Page Music -1 Assignment/Cancel
External Page Music -2 Assignment/Cancel
LCD Display Language
PTT Login / Logout
Display CPU redundancy state
Font Set
Contrast Set
Emergency History about emergency call
Admin Programming Code to enter
619
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Appendix B Flexible Numbering Plan
(Web based)
The System Numbering Plan can be selected from 1 of 9 basic Numbering Plans. Table B-1
provides a brief description of the plans and Table B-2 for eMG and Table B-3 for UCP provide
the Numbering Plan codes for each of the nine basic plans. The Number Plan is selected in
Program 100 and individual codes in the plan can be changed using the Flexible Numbering Plan
Programs 106 to 109.
Table B-1 Numbering Plan Description
Plan Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Description
Basic Numbering Plan
The station number can be within 799
Australia Default
New Zealand Default
Italy Default
Finland Default
Default for Sweden
Default for Norway
Default for Israel
eMG80
eMG800
UCP
100 - 239
100 - 239
100 - 239
700– 839
200– 339
210 – 349
100– 239
100– 239
100– 239
1000-2199
1000-2199
1000-2199
7000-8199
2000-3199
2100-3299
1000-2199
1000-2199
1000-2199
1000 – 3399
1000 – 3399
1000 – 3399
1000 – 3399
2000– 4399
2100 –4499
1000 – 3399
1000 – 3399
1000 – 3399
Table B-2 eMG Basic Numbering Plan 1-4, Default Values
Basic Numbering Plan
Feature
1
2
3
4
Intercom Call for eMG80
100 ~239
100-239
100-239
700-839
Intercom Call for eMG800
1000-2199
1
Internal Page Zone
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Internal All Call Page
Meet Me Page
External Page Zone 1
External All Call Page
All Call Page (Internal/External)
SMDR Account Code Enter
Flash Command to CO Line
SLT Last Number Redial
Do Not Disturb (Toggle On/Off)
Call Forward
Speed Dial Programming
Activate Message Wait/Callback
Message Wait/Callback Answer
SLT Speed Dial Access
DND/FWD Cancel
SLT CO System Hold
eMG80:301~335
eMG800:*301~*400
543
544
545
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
620
10002199
10002199
Remark
10002199
*301~*335 *101~*135 #101~#135
*543
*544
*545
*548
*549
*550
*551
*552
*553
*554
*555
*556
* 557
* 558
* 559
* 560
#3
##
#41
#5
#00
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
#3
##
#41
#5
#00
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Basic Numbering Plan
Feature
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
35
SLT Program Mode Access
Attendant Unavailable
AME Feature
Alarm Reset
Group Call Pickup
Universal Night Answer
Account Code with bin
Walking COS
ACD agent On/Off Duty
ACD Supervisor Login
ACD Supervisor Logout
ACD Help Code
ACD Calls In Queue Display
ACD Supervisor Status
ACD Supervisor Monitor
ACD Reroute Queued Call
Answer
ACD Reroute Queued Call No
answer
Camp-On Answer
36
Call Park Locations
37
Station Group Pilot Number
33
34
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Station User VSF Features
Access
Call Coverage Ring
Direct Call Pickup
Access CO Group
Access Individual CO/IP Line
Access Held CO/IP
Access Held Individual CO/IP
Access CO in First CO Group
Attendant Call
VM Message Wait Enabled
VM Message Wait cancel
Door Open (1st Door )
Door Open (2nd Door )
MCID Request
Unsupervised conference time
Extension code
PTT Group Login/Logout
ACD Agent primary login
ACD Agent primary logout
ACD Agent secondary login
ACD Agent secondary logout
Wrap-up end
T-NET CM Login/out
1
2
3
4
Remark
561
562
564
565
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
* 561
* 562
* 564
* 565
**
* 567
* 568
* 569
* 571
* 572
* 573
* 574
* 575
* 576
* 577
561
562
564
565
**
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
561
562
564
* 565
*1
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
SLT
578
* 578
578
578
579
* 579
579
579
621
eMG80:#601~#619
eMG800:#601~#800
eMG80:401~449
eMG800:401~500
* 621
#601 -#
619
*401 –
*440
*521
#601 –
#619
*620 –
*659
*521
#601 –
#619
*620 –
*659
*66
66
*78
*78
76
*77
89
88
8*
8#
9
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
*0
*76
*77
89
88
8*
8#
9
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
*0
*76
*77
#89
#88
#8*
#8#
9
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
*0
*76
*77
#89
#88
#8*
#8#
0
9
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
*0
##
##
*##
*##
#0
581
582
583
584
585
586
#0
* 581
* 582
* 583
* 584
* 585
* 586
#*0
581
582
583
584
585
586
#*0
581
582
583
584
585
586
621
SLT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Basic Numbering Plan
Feature
60
61
62
63
64
65
1
2
3
4
59
68
587
588
589
580
* 59
* 68
* 587
* 588
* 589
* 580
*59
*79
587
588
589
580
*59
*79
587
588
589
580
58*
* 58*
58*
58*
58#
570
563
57*
57#
56*
56#
* 58#
* 570
* 563
*57*
*57#
*56*
*56#
58#
570
563
57*
57#
56*
56#
58#
570
563
57*
57#
56*
56#
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
77
78
Enter Into Conf-Room
Enter Into Conf-Group
Station ICR
Pick up Group Pick-Up
Emergency Page
Remote Mobile Extension Control
ACD agent ON/OFF Duty-All
group
SLT ACNR
ACD Supervisor Ring Mode
Company Directory Name
ISDN Supplementary Hold
ISDN Supplementary Conf
Forced Channel Seize
Override DND/Forward
Cancel Call Back
Transfer to VSF Number
CCR
Room type conf Group join
Last Number Redial ( LNR )
Save Number Redial
79
Station Speed Dial Access
[SPEED] + XXX
80
System Speed Dial Access
[SPEED] + XXXX
66
55*
#2
5*0
[REDIAL]
[Save]
*55*
55*
55*
#2
#2
#2
5*0
5*0
5*0
[REDIAL] [REDIAL] [REDIAL]
[Save]
[Save]
[Save]
[SPEED] + [SPEED] + [SPEED] +
XXX
XXX
XXX
[SPEED] + [SPEED] + [SPEED] +
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Remark
Keyset
Keyset
Table B-2 eMG Basic Numbering Plan 5-9, Default Values
Basic Numbering Plan
Feature
Intercom Call for eMG80
Intercom Call for eMG800
1
Internal Page Zone
2
Internal All Call Page
3
Meet Me Page
4
External Page Zone 1
5
External All Call Page
All Call Page
6
(Internal/External)
SMDR Account Code
7
Enter
Flash Command to CO
8
Line
9
SLT Last Number Redial
Do Not Disturb (Toggle
10
On/Off)
11 Call Forward
12 Speed Dial Programming
5
6
7
8
9
200-339
210-349
100-239
100-239
1000-2199
100 ~239
1000-2199
*101-*135
#3
##
#41
#5
*301-*335
*543
*544
*545
*548
401- 429
43
44
45
48
*301- *335
*543
*544
*545
*548
301~335
543
544
545
548
#00
*549
49
*549
549
50
*550
*550
550
SLT
51
*551
51
*551
551
SLT
52
*552
52
*552
552
SLT
53
*553
53
*553
553
SLT
54
55
*554
*555
54
55
*554
*555
554
555
SLT
2000-3199 2100-3299 1000-2199
622
Remark
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table B-2 eMG Basic Numbering Plan 5-9, Default Values
Basic Numbering Plan
Feature
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Activate Message
Wait/Callback
Message Wait/Callback
Answer
SLT Speed Dial Access
DND/FWD Cancel
SLT CO System Hold
SLT Program Mode
Access
Attendant Unavailable
AME Feature
Alarm Reset
Group Call Pickup
Universal Night Answer
Account Code with bin
Walking COS
ACD agent On/Off Duty
ACD Supervisor Login
ACD Supervisor Logout
ACD Help Code
ACD Calls In Queue
Display
ACD Supervisor Status
ACD Supervisor Monitor
ACD Reroute Queued
Call Answer
ACD Reroute Queued
Call No answer
Camp-On Answer
Call Park Locations
Station Group Pilot
Number
Station User VSF
Features Access
39 Call Coverage Ring
40 Direct Call Pickup
41 Access CO Group
Access Individual CO/IP
42
Line
43 Access Held CO/IP
Access Held Individual
44
CO/IP
Access CO in First CO
45
Group
46 Attendant Call
VM Message Wait
47
Enabled
5
6
7
8
9
Remark
56
*556
56
*556
556
SLT
57
*557
57
*557
557
SLT
58
59
690
*558
*559
*560
58
59
*10
*558
*559
*560
558
559
560
SLT
SLT
SLT
691
*561
50
*561
561
SLT
692
694
695
**
697
698
699
671
672
673
674
*562
*564
*565
*566
*567
*568
*569
*571
*572
*573
*574
*12
*36
*13
*14
*15
*16
*17
*20
*21
*22
*23
*562
*564
*565
*566
*567
*568
*569
*571
*572
*573
*574
562
564
565
**
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
675
*575
*24
*575
575
676
677
*576
*577
*25
*26
*576
*577
576
577
678
*578
*27
*578
578
679
*579
*28
*579
579
*29
601 – 619
*621
#601 – #619
*621
#601~#619
621
*621
#601 – #619 #601 – #619
720 – 759
*401 - *440
620 – 659
*401 - *440
620~659
*66
66
*11
66
*66
*76
*77
89
*76
*77
89
*30
7
89
*76
*77
#89
76
*77
89
88
88
88
#88
88
8*
8*
8*
#8*
8*
8#
8#
8#
#8#
8#
0
9
9
0
9
9
0
0
#9
0
*8
*8
*8
*8
*8
623
SLT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table B-2 eMG Basic Numbering Plan 5-9, Default Values
Basic Numbering Plan
Feature
5
6
7
8
9
48 VM Message Wait cancel
49 Door Open (1st Door )
50 Door Open (2nd Door )
*9
#*1
#*2
*9
#*1
#*2
*9
*31
*32
*9
#*1
#*2
*9
#*1
#*2
51 MCID Request
*0
*0
*35
*0
*0
*##
##
*37
##
##
#*0
681
682
#0
*581
*582
*38
*40
*41
#0
*581
*582
#0
581
582
683
*583
*42
*583
583
684
*584
*43
*584
584
685
686
*59
*68
687
688
689
*585
*586
*59
*68
*587
*588
*589
*44
*45
*46
*47
*48
*49
*50
*585
*586
*59
*68
*587
*588
*589
585
586
59
*68
587
588
589
680
*580
**
580
580
68*
*58*
*5#
*58*
58*
68#
*58#
*51
*58#
58#
67*
*570
*52
*570
570
*21
*22
*563
*57*
*53
*54
*563
*57*
563
57*
*23
*57#
*55
*57#
57#
*24
*25
*56*
*56#
*56*
*56#
56*
56#
*55
#2
*55*
#2*
*56
*57
*58
*59
*55*
#2
55*
#2
5*0
5*0
*61
5*0
[REDIAL]
[REDIAL]
[REDIAL]
[REDIAL]
[REDIAL]
Keyset
[Save]
[SPEED] +
XXX
[SPEED] +
XXXX
[Save]
[SPEED] +
XXX
[SPEED] +
XXXX
[Save]
[SPEED] +
XXX
[SPEED] +
XXXX
[Save]
[SPEED] +
XXX
[SPEED] +
XXXX
[Save]
[SPEED] +
XXX
[SPEED] +
XXXX
Keyset
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
77
78
79
80
Unsupervised conference
time Extension code
PTT Group Login/Logout
ACD Agent primary login
ACD Agent primary logout
ACD Agent secondary
login
ACD Agent secondary
logout
Wrap-up end
T-NET CM Login/out
Enter Into Conf-Room
Enter Into Conf-Group
Station ICR
Pick up Group Pick-Up
Emergency Page
Remote Mobile Extension
Control
ACD Agent ON/OFF DutyAll group
SLT ACNR
ACD Supervisor Ring
Mode
Company Directory Name
ISDN Supplementary Hold
ISDN Supplementary
Conf
Forced Channel Seize
Override DND/Forward
Cancel Call Back
Transfer to VSF Number
CCR
Room type conf Group
join
Last Number Redial
( LNR )
Save Number Redial
Station Speed Dial
Access
System Speed Dial
Access
624
Remark
(Except
USA
version)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table B-3 UCP Basic Numbering Plan 1-4, Default Values
Basic Numbering Plan
Feature
1
Intercom Call
Internal Page Zone
Internal All Call Page
Meet Me Page
External Page Zone 1-2
External All Call Page
All Call Page
SMDR Account Code Enter
Flash Command to CO Line
SLT Last Number Redial
DND (Toggle On/Off)
Call Forward
Speed Dial Programming
Activate Message Wait/Callback
Message Wait/Callback Answer
SLT Speed Dial Access
DND/FWD cancel
SLT CO System Hold
SLT Program Mode Access
Attendant Unavailable
AME Feature
Alarm Reset
Group Call Pickup
Universal Night Answer
Account Code with bin
Walking COS
ACD Agent On/Off Duty
ACD Supervisor Login
ACD Supervisor Logout
ACD Help Code
ACD Calls In Queue Display
ACD Supervisor Status
ACD Supervisor Monitor
ACD Reroute Queued Call Answer
ACD Reroute Queued Call No Answer
Camp-On Answer
Call Parking Locations
Station Group Pilot Number
Station User VSF Features Access
Call Coverage Ring
Direct Call Pickup
Access CO Group
Access Individual CO/IP Line
Access Held CO/IP
Access Held Individual CO/IP
2
3
4
Remark
1000 ~3399 1000 ~3399 1000 ~3399 1000 ~3399
*301~*400
*301~*400
*101~*200
*301~*400
543
*543
#3
#43
544
*544
##
##
545-546
*545-*546
#41-#42
#41-#42
548
*548
#5
#5
549
*549
#00
#00
550
*550
550
#9
SLT
551
*551
551
551
SLT
552
*552
552
552
SLT
553
*553
553
553
SLT
554
*554
554
554
555
*555
555
555
SLT
556
*556
556
*66
SLT
557
* 557
557
*67
SLT
558
* 558
558
#8
SLT
559
* 559
559
559
SLT
560
* 560
560
560
SLT
561
* 561
561
561
SLT
562
* 562
562
562
564
* 564
564
564
565
* 565
565
* 565
566
* 566
**
*1
567
* 567
567
2
568
* 568
568
568
569
* 569
569
569
571
* 571
571
571
572
* 572
572
572
573
* 573
573
573
574
* 574
574
574
575
* 575
575
575
576
* 576
576
576
577
* 577
577
577
578
* 578
578
578
579
* 579
579
579
621
* 621
621
621
SLT
#601~#800 #601~#800 #601~#800 #101~#300
401 – 500 *401 – *500 *401 – *500 #620 – #719
66x
66x
*66x
69x
x: 1 ~ 3
76
*76
*76
67
77
*77
*77
*77
89xx
89xx
89xx
89xx
xxx: 000~201,
88xxx
88xxx
88xxx
48xxx
xxx: 001~999
8*
8*
8*
4*
8#xx
8#xx
8#xx
4#xx
xx: 01~74
625
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table B-3 UCP Basic Numbering Plan 1-4, Default Values
Basic Numbering Plan
Feature
Access CO in First CO Group
Attendant Call
VM Message Wait Enabled
VM Message Wait Cancel
Door Open (1st Door )
Door Open (2nd Door )
Door Open (3rd Door )
Door Open (4th Door )
MCID Request
Unsupervised conference time
Extension code
PTT Group Login/Logout
ACD Agent primary login
ACD Agent primary logout
ACD Agent secondary login
ACD Agent secondary logout
Wrap-up end
T-NET CM Login/out
Enter Into Conf-Room
Enter Into Conf-Group
Station ICR
Pick up Group Pick-Up
Emergency Page
Remote Mobile Extension Control
ACD Agent ON/OFF Duty-All group
SLT ACNR
ACD Supervisor Ring Mode
Company Directory Name
ISDN Supplementary Hold
ISDN Supplementary Conf
Forced Channel Seize
Override DND/Forward
Cancel Call Back
Transfer to VSF Number
CCR
Room type Conf Group join
Last Number Redial ( LNR )
Save Number Redial
Station Speed Dial Access
System Speed Dial Access
1
2
3
4
9
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
#*4
*0
9
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
#*4
*0
9
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
#*4
*0
1
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
#*4
*0
##
##
* ##
*22
#0
581
582
583
584
585
586
59
68
587
588
589
580
58*
58#
570
563
57*
57#
56*
56#
#0
* 581
* 582
* 583
* 584
* 585
* 586
* 59
* 68
* 587
* 588
* 589
* 580
* 58*
* 58#
* 570
* 563
*57*
*57#
*56*
*56#
#*0
581
582
583
584
585
586
* 59
* 68
587
588
589
580
58*
58#
570
563
57*
57#
56*
56#
*21
581
582
583
584
585
586
59
68
587
588
589
580
58*
58#
570
563
57*
57#
56*
56#
55*
#2
5*0
[REDIAL]
[Save]
[SPEED] +
XXX
[SPEED] +
XXXXX
*55*
#2
5*0
[REDIAL]
[Save]
[SPEED] +
XXX
[SPEED] +
XXXXX
55*
#2
5*0
[REDIAL]
[Save]
[SPEED] +
XXX
[SPEED] +
XXXXX
55*
#2
5*0
[REDIAL]
[Save]
[SPEED] +
XXX
[SPEED] +
XXXXX
626
Remark
Keyset
Keyset
XXX:
000~099
XXXXX:
20000~31999
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table B-3 UCP Basic Numbering Plan 5-9, Default Values
Basic Numbering Plan
Feature
5
6
7
Intercom Call
2000-4399
2100-4439
1000-3339
Internal Page Zone
*101-*200
*301-*400
301- 400
Internal All Call Page
#3
*543
43
Meet Me Page
##
*544
44
External Page Zone 1-2
#41- #42
*545 - *546
45- 46
External All Call Page
#5
*548
48
All Call Page
#00
*549
49
SMDR Account Code Enter
50
*550
0
Flash Command to CO Line
51
*551
51
SLT Last Number Redial
52
*552
52
DND (Toggle On/Off)
53
*553
53
Call Forward
54
*554
54
Speed Dial Programming
55
*555
55
Activate Message
56
*556
56
Wait/Callback
Message Wait/Callback
57
*557
57
Answer
SLT Speed Dial Access
58
*558
58
DND/FWD cancel
59
*559
59
SLT CO System Hold
690
*560
*10
SLT Program Mode Access
691
*561
50
Attendant Unavailable
692
*562
*12
AME Feature
694
*564
*36
Alarm Reset
695
*565
*13
Group Call Pickup
**
*566
*14
Universal Night Answer
697
*567
*15
Account Code with bin
698
*568
*16
Walking COS
699
*569
*17
ACD Agent On/Off Duty
671
*571
*20
ACD Supervisor Login
672
*572
*21
ACD Supervisor Logout
673
*573
*22
ACD Help Code
674
*574
*23
ACD Calls In Queue Display
675
*575
*24
ACD Supervisor Status
676
*576
*25
ACD Supervisor Monitor
677
*577
*26
ACD Reroute Queued Call
678
*578
*27
Answer
ACD Reroute Queued Call
679
*579
*28
No Answer
Camp-On Answer
621
*621
*629
Call Parking Locations
#601 – #800 #601 – #800 #601 – #800
Station Group Pilot Number
720 – 819
*401 - *500 #401 - #500
Station User VSF Features
*66x
66x
67x
Access
Call Coverage Ring
*76
*76
*76
Direct Call Pickup
*77
*77
*77
Access CO Group
89xxx
89xxx
89xxx
627
8
9
Remark
1000-3339
*301- *400
*543
*544
*545 - *546
548
*549
*550
*551
*552
*553
*554
*555
1000-3339
*301- *400
543
544
545-546
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
*556
556
SLT
*557
557
SLT
*558
*559
*560
*561
*562
*564
*565
*566
*567
*568
*569
*571
*572
*573
*574
*575
*576
*577
558
559
560
561
562
564
565
**
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
*578
578
*579
579
*621
#601 – #800
*401 - *500
*621
#601 – #800
620-719
SLT
66x
*66
x: 1 ~ 3
*76
*77
#89xxx
76
*77
89
xxx: 000-
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table B-3 UCP Basic Numbering Plan 5-9, Default Values
Basic Numbering Plan
Feature
5
Access Individual CO/IP
Line
Access Held CO/IP
Access Held Individual
CO/IP
Access CO in First CO
Group
Attendant Call
VM Message Wait Enabled
VM Message Wait Cancel
Door Open (1st Door )
Door Open (2nd Door )
Door Open (3rd Door )
Door Open (4th Door )
MCID Request
Unsupervised conference
time Extension code
PTT Group Login/Logout
ACD Agent primary login
ACD Agent primary logout
ACD Agent secondary login
ACD Agent secondary
logout
Wrap-up end
T-NET CM Login/out
Enter Into Conf-Room
Enter Into Conf-Group
Station ICR
Pick up Group Pick-Up
Emergency Page
Remote Mobile Extension
Control
ACD Agent ON/OFF DutyAll group
SLT ACNR
ACD Supervisor Ring Mode
Company Directory Name
ISDN Supplementary Hold
ISDN Supplementary Conf
Forced Channel Seize
Override DND/Forward
Cancel Call Back
Transfer to VSF Number
CCR
6
7
8
9
88xxx
88xxx
88xxx
#88xxx
88
8*
8*
8*
#8*
8*
8#xxx
8#xxx
8#xxx
#8#xxx
8#
0
9
9
0
9
9
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
#*4
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
#*4
0
*8
*9
*31
*32
*33
*34
#9
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
#*3
#*4
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
*0
*0
*35
*0
*0
*##
##
*37
##
##
#*0
681
682
683
#0
*581
*582
*583
*38
*40
*41
*42
#0
*581
*582
*583
#0
581
582
583
684
*584
*43
*584
584
685
686
*59
*68
687
688
689
*585
*586
*59
*68
*587
588
*589
*44
*45
*46
*47
*48
*49
*50
*585
*586
*59
*68
*587
*588
*589
585
586
59
*68
587
588
589
680
*580
**
#1
580
68*
*58*
*5#
*58*
58*
68#
67*
*21
*22
*23
*24
*25
*58#
*570
*563
*57*
*57#
*56*
*56#
*51
*52
*53
*54
*55
*56
*57
*58#
*570
*563
*57*
*57#
*56*
*56#
58#
570
563
57*
57#
56*
56#
55*
#2
*55*
#2*
*59
#2
*55*
#2
55*
#2
628
Remark
201
xxx:
001~999
xxx:
001~999
(Except
USA
version)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table B-3 UCP Basic Numbering Plan 5-9, Default Values
Basic Numbering Plan
Feature
Room type Conf Group join
Last Number Redial ( LNR )
Save Number Redial
Station Speed Dial Access
System Speed Dial Access
5
6
7
8
9
Remark
5*0
[REDIAL]
[Save]
[SPEED] +
XXX
5*0
[REDIAL]
[Save]
[SPEED] +
XXX
5*0
[REDIAL]
[Save]
[SPEED] +
XXX
5*0
[REDIAL]
[Save]
[SPEED] +
XXX
[REDIAL]
[Save]
[SPEED] +
XXX
[SPEED] +
XXXXX
[SPEED] +
XXXXX
[SPEED] +
XXXXX
[SPEED] +
XXXXX
[SPEED] +
XXXXX
Keyset
Keyset
XXX:
000~099
XXXXX:
20000~3
1999
629
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Appendix C Database Details & Default
for Station Administration for eMG
The following Tables, divided based on the Program group and Program, provide the default
values assigned to all Admin entries. Prior to changing an entry during programming assure you
have an understanding of the PROGRAM and its purpose.
Table C-1 SYSTEM ID
BTN
SUB-MENU
DEFAULT
PGM: 100 -System ID
1
Country Code
2
Customer Site Name
3
My Area Code
1
Numbering Plan Type
1
2
3
4
5
4
6
7
8
5
6
PRIFIX Usage
System ID reset
REMARK
Maximum 4 digits
Maximum 24 characters
Maximum 6 digits
Overall default Numbering Plan, the 1st station digit should
be 1 – 4.
The station number can be from 100~799.
Australia Default
New Zealand Default
Italy Default
Finland Default, Max Station Ports is 60.
Stations above Max ports will be displayed “***”.
Max Station Ports 70 Stations above Max ports will be
displayed “***”.
The station number can be from 100~ 999.
System reset
Table C-2 Numbering Plans
BTN
SUB-MENU
DEFAULT
REMARK
PGM: 102 -System IP Address Plan
1
2
3
MPB Address
MPB Subnet mask
Router IP Address
4
System start IP address
5
System end IP address
6
7
8
System Subnet mask
Automatic IP Address Assignment
Second System IP Address
9
Second System Net Mask
10
Firewall IP Address
11
First Start Mac Address
10.10.10.2
255.255.255.0
10.10.10.1
10.10.10.10
10.10.10.254
255.255.255.0
ON
0.0.0.0
255.255.255.0
Public IP Address for H.323 calls
Router IP Address for WAN access
Private start address for system to
module & terminal communications
Private end address for system to
module & terminal communications
Second Private IP Address for modules
Second Private Sub-net Mask for
modules
0.0.0.0
IP Address of firewall for external
network (WAN/IP) access
00:00:00:00:00:00 First : Start MAC Address to register a
630
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-2 Numbering Plans
BTN
SUB-MENU
12
First End Mac Address
13
Second Start Mac Address
14
Second End Mac Address
15
System IP Address plan Reset
16 Unused
17 Unused
18 MPB DNS IP Address
19 MPB DHCP
PGM: 103 Device IP Address Plan
1
2
3
4
CO/IP Device IP Address
Station IP Address
MISU IP Address
VMIB & VSF IP Address
5
MCIB_V IP Address
6
Device IP Address Plan
7
WITB IP Address
DEFAULT
REMARK
device regardless of the 3rd dip switch
00:00:00:00:00:00 First : End MAC Address to register a
device regardless of the 3rd dip switch
00:00:00:00:00:00 Second : Start MAC Address to register
a device regardless of the 3rd dip switch
00:00:00:00:00:00 Second : End MAC Address to register
a device regardless of the 3rd dip switch
Returns System IP Address Plan to
default values.
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
OFF
10.10.10.10~254
OFF
MCAST
Flex 1: Set IP Address
Flex 2: Set Mac Address
Flex 3: ARP
Flex 4: Registration
Flex 5: CPU Type
Flex 6: Device ID (type)
10.10.10.10~254
OFF
MCAST
Flex 1: Set IP Address
Flex 2: Set Mac Address
Flex 3: ARP
Flex 4: Registration
Flex 5: CPU Type
Flex 6: Device ID (type)
10.10.10.10~254
OFF
MCAST
Flex 1: Set IP Address
Flex 2: Set Mac Address
Flex 3: ARP
Flex 4: Registration
Flex 5: CPU Type
Flex 6: Device ID (type)
10.10.10.10~254
On
On
Flex 1: Set IP Address
Flex 2: Set Mac Address
Flex 3: ARP
Flex 4: Registration
Flex 5: CPU Type
Flex 6: Device ID (type)
10.10.10.10~254
OFF
MCAST
Flex 1: Set IP Address
Flex 2: Set Mac Address
Flex 3: ARP
Flex 4: Registration
Flex 5: CPU Type
Flex 6: Device ID (type)
System Reset
10.10.10.10~254
OFF
MCAST
631
Flex 1: Set IP Address
Flex 2: Set Mac Address
Flex 3: ARP
Flex 4: Registration
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-2 Numbering Plans
BTN
SUB-MENU
DEFAULT
REMARK
Flex 5: CPU Type
Flex 6: Device ID (type)
PGM: 104 - CO/IP Device Sequence Number
CO/IP Device Sequence Assignment
Next available
Sequence numbers are assigned to the
maximum available for the system.
PGM: 105 - Flexible Station Number, Base 1
1~140
Flexible Station Number
PGM: 106 -Flexible Numbering Plan part A, Base 1
1
Internal Page Zone
2
Internal All Call Page
3
Meet Me Page
4
External Page Zone 1
5
Unused
6
External All Call Page
7
All Call Page (Internal & External)
8
SMDR Account Code Enter
9
Flash Command to CO Line
10 Last Number Redial
11 DND (Toggle On/Off)
12 Call Forward
13 Speed Dial Programming
14 Message Wait/Callback Enable
15 Message Wait/Callback Return
16 Speed Dial Access
17 Cancel DND/FWD/Pre-MSG
18 CO System Hold
19 Programming Mode Enter Code
20 Attendant Unavailable
21 Alarm Reset
22 Group Call Pickup
23 Universal Night Answer
24 Account Code
PGM: 107 -Flexible Numbering Plan part B, Base 1
1
Walking COS Code
2
ACD Agent On/Off Duty
3
ACD/UCD Supervisor Login
4
ACD/UCD Supervisor Logout
5
ACD/UCD Help Code
6
ACD/UCD Calls In Queue Display
7
ACD/UCD Supervisor Status Display
8
ACD Supervisor Monitor
9
ACD Reroute Queued Call w/ answer
10 ACD Reroute Queued Call w/o answer
11 Camp-On Answer
12 Call Park Locations
13 Group Pilot Number
14 Station User VSF Features
Default Numbering Plan Country Code
1.
301~335
543
544
545
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
565
566
567
568
569
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
621
#601~#619
401-440
*66
632
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-2 Numbering Plans
BTN
SUB-MENU
DEFAULT
15 Call Coverage Ring
16 Direct Call Pickup
17 CO/IP Group Access
18 Individual CO/IP Access
19 Retrieve Last Held CO/IP
20 Retrieve Held Individual CO/IP
21 Access 1st available CO Line
22 Attendant Call
23 VM Message Waiting Enable
24 VM Message Waiting Cancel
PGM: 108 - Flexible Numbering Plan part C, Base 1
1
1st Door Open
2
2nd Door Open
PGM: 109 - Flexible Numbering Plan part D, Base 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
24-1
24-2
24-3
24-4
REMARK
76
*77
89
88
8*
8#
9
0
*8
*9
#*1
#*2
MCID Request
Answering Machine Emulation
Unsupervised conference extend code
PTT Group login in-out code
ACD Agent Primary Login Code
ACD Agent Primary Logout Code
ACD Agent Secondary Login Code
ACD Agent Secondary Logout Code
ACD Wrap-up End
TNET Login/out Code
Enter Into Conf-Room
Enter into Conf-Group
Station ICR
Pick Up Group Pick-up
Emergency Page
Remote MEX Control
All Group Agent On/Off Duty
SLT ACNR Code
ACD Supervisor Ring Mode
Company Directory Name
ISDN SUPPLEMENT HOLD
ISDN SUPPLEMENT CONFERENCE
Forced Seize Busy Station/CO
Added Flexible Numbering Plan
Override DND/Call forward
Cancel Call Back
Transfer To VSF Announcement Number
CCR
*0
564
##
#0
581
582
583
584
585
586
59
68
587
588
589
580
58*
58#
570
563
57*
57#
56*
56#
55*
#2
Table C-3 STATION DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM: 110 - Station Type
1
Station Type
RANGE
1-8
633
DEFAULT
REMARK
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-3 STATION DATA
BTN
2
SUB-MENU
DSS/DLS MAP
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
Station
PGM: 111 -Station Attributes I
1
2
Auto Speaker Selection
Call Forward
3
DND
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
OFF
Data Line Security
Howler Tone
No Touch Answer
Page Access
Speaker/Headset Ring
Speakerphone/Headset
LCD Display LED
0: OFF, 1:ALL,
2:icm call only, 3:co
call only
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
S/H/BOTH
ON/OFF
Ring/MWI
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Speaker
Speaker
MWI
11
Loop LCR Account
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
12
13
Call Coverage
Call Coverage Delay Ring
1: ON, 0: OFF
0~9
OFF
0
14
Off-net Forward Disable
0:ENA, 1:DIS
Enable
15
16
17
18
Forced ICM Mode Change
Active PTT Group
Station ICM Tenancy Group
VMIU/VMIB Board
1:ON, 0:OFF
0~9
1~15
OFF
19
SIP User ID Table Index
000-140
20
Camp on Tone
21
Serial DSS
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: Disable
0 : Enable
22
ICM Dial Tone Source
23
ICM Ring Back Tone Source
24
UMS Attach Message
PGM: 112 - Station Attributes II
1
CO Call Time Tone
OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
2
Automatic Hold
1: ON, 0: OFF
3
4
CO Call Time Restriction
CO Line Access
1: ON, 0: OFF
EN/DIS
634
Station based LOOP LCR
authorization option
Off-net Forward Activation
(Except USA version)
1
000
0: dial tone
1: Int/Ext 1
2: Ext 2
3: VSF
4~8:SLT MOH1~5
9~10:VSF
MOH2~3
0: ring back tone
1: Int/Ext 1
2: Ext 2
3: VSF
4~8:SLT MOH1~5
9~10:VSF
MOH2~3
1: ON, 0: OFF
SPKR: Speakerphone
ON: Speakerphone
ON
Enable
dial tone
ring back
tone
ON
OFF
ATD:ON
Others: OFF
OFF
ENABLE
Sequence Number
Index to Station SIP Attributes
Table (PGM 126, Web only)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-3 STATION DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
CO/IP Line Queuing
CO PGM
Ringing Line Preference
Speed Dial Access
UCD Group Service
Ring Group Service
Two Way Record
EN/DIS
EN/DIS
EN/DIS
EN/DIS
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
ENABLE
DISABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE
OFF
OFF
OFF
12
Message Speed Scroll
0-7
3
13
Hot Desk Station
1:ON, 0:OFF
OFF
14
Prefer CO/CO Group
CO Access Code
Or CO Group
Access Code
..
15
Send SLT CLI
1:ON, 0:OFF
ON
16
17
ACD Member Priority
ez Attendant Password
0~9
1: ON, 0: OFF
0
OFF
18
Emergency CO
19
20
21
22
23
24
Station Account code required
Auto Call recording
Call Recording Station
Voice Mail Back-up
VM Back-up Station
VM Back-up Prompt
CO Access Code
Or CO Group
Access Code
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
Station number
1: ON, 0: OFF
Station number
1: ON, 0: OFF
REMARK
Scroll speed for Graphic LCD
Key-set
Send CLI info to SLT/Soft/Wit
phone.
Any CO
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
PGM: 113 - Station Attributes III
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
ADMIN
VSF Access
Group Listen
Override Privilege
SMDR Hidden Dialed Digits
Voice Over
Prime Line
Alarm/Door Bell Attribute
DID Call Wait
Left Message Executive
E & MIC Headset
En-block Mode
VSF Message Retrieve
VMID Number
Auto ACD DND
Fwd if OOS
Backlight
VSF Mail Server IP address
VSF Mail Address
Block Back Call
By Pass DTMF
Proctor Monitor
EN/DIS
EN/DIS
EN/DIS
EN/DIS
EN/DIS
EN/DIS
1: HOT, 0: WARM
EN/DIS
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: FIFO, 0: LIFO
Station number
dial-pad digit
1: ON, 0: OFF
0 ~2
0.0.0.0
ENABLE
ENABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
ENABLE
WARM
DISABLE
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
FIFO
STA #
0
OFF
busy
For new Soft-Key Key-set
For new Soft-Key Key-set
For adjunct Voice Mail-box id
0=no reason code
0: Off, 1: busy, 2: always on
Web Admin 132 to modify
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
635
OFF
OFF
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-3 STATION DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
23
24
24-1
24-2
24-3
VSF Mail Server ID
Added Station Attribute (2nd)
VSF Mail Server P/W
Door Open
VSF MSG DD/TM
24-4
OGM DEST
24-5
VSF DEL MSG
24-6
VM PWD CHECK
24-7
Barge In Mode
RANGE
DEFAULT
Web Admin
Web Admin
EN/DIS
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
0: No password
1: PWD only
2: Station number
and Password
0: Disable
1: Monitor
2:Monitor&Join &
Disconnect
ENABLE
ON
NOT
ASSIGNED
OFF
Station
number and
password
Disable
24-9 RLS Cost Display
24-10 LDT Table Index
24-11 WEB Call Back
0: Transfer
1: Drop
2: Ignore
3: Hold Release
1: ON, 0: OFF
No. of LDT Table
EN/DIS
24-12 VSF SMTP Security
0-2
0
24-13 VSF SMTP Port
24-14 VSF Sender Mail Address
00001-65535
25
24-8
SLT Flash Mode
24-15 Prepaid call
24-16 Prepaid money
24-17 Default VM number
Transfer
OFF
1
DISABLE
0: OFF
1: ON
000000 -999999
OFF
0
24-18 SKT mode
Default (0)
24-19 Off hook ring
0: BURST
1: MUTE
2: SYSTEM
3:SILENCE
Refer to
System (2)
SIP color ring
Forced account code
Flexible Bin PGM
Station Web level
24-24 Headset page
PGM: 114 - Station Attributes IV
1
CLIP Display
0 : NO Security / 1 : SSL / 2 :
TLS
Web Admin
0: Default
1: Short
2: Long
3: Far
24-20
24-21
24-22
24-23
REMARK
0: OFF, 1: ON
OFF
0: OFF, 1: ON
ON
LEVEL 1 ~ LEVEL 3 LEVEL 1
1~3
(SPKR/
HEADSET/
Both)
1: ON, 0: OFF
636
1: SPKR
OFF
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-3 STATION DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
COLP Display
Progress Indication
CLIR Service
COLR Service
Station CLI 1
3.1 kHz Audio
CLI Name Display
CLI/IP Redirect Display
CLI Message Wait
EXT OR ATD
MSN Wait
Unused
DID Restriction
DISA Restriction
Unused
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
Max 12 digits
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: Red, 0: CLI
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ATD,0: EXT
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Station No
OFF
OFF
CLI
OFF
EXT
OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
OFF
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
24-1
24-2
24-3
24-4
24-5
24-6
Modem Enable
FAST CLI For Transfer Call
Unused
PICK UP By Flex Button
Multi Language
Pre-Sel Msg DND
Pre-Sel Msg Language
Added station attributes
Station CLI 2
Station CLI 3
Station CLI 4
Station CLI 5
SLT CID type
Wakeup announcement
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ORI, 0: TRN
OFF
TRN
1: ON, 0: OFF
Prompt 1 – 6
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
1
OFF
24-7
Camp on enable
24-8
24-9
Gain table
Tone table
24-10 Digit conversion table
24-11
24-12
24-13
24-14
24-15
24-16
24-17
24-18
24-19
24-20
Video on calling
E.164 CLI To
Flexible page
Align LCD
Two way recording
LDT Zone
ECM Fax (T38)
Display restrict
Small popup use
Large popup timer
RANGE
Prompt 1 – 6
Max 16 Chars
Max 16 Chars
Max 16 Chars
Max 16 Chars
(0:FSK/1:DTMF)
0-200
0: OFF
1: ON
1–3
1–5
eMG80: 1-15
eMG800: 1-32
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1-3
0-2
0-200
001-100
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
0-5
DEFAULT
1
Station No
Station No
Station No
Station No
FSK
0
ON
1
1
0
OFF
OFF
3 page
0
00
001
ON
OFF
OFF
0
24-21 MWI LED
0-4
0
24-22 NFC Auth use
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
637
REMARK
0: Not align, 1: Left, 2: Right
0:ALL MWI, 1:VM MWI
2: CLI MWI, 3: SMS MWI
4: ICM MWI
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-3 STATION DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
24-23 Short Modem
RANGE
1: ON, 0: OFF
DEFAULT
REMARK
OFF
PGM: 115 - Flexible Buttons Assignment
01~
24
Flexible Buttons Assignment
1: Empty Button
2: Station PGM
Button
3: {Speed Dial
xx}Button
4: Numbering Plan
Button
5: Network DSS
Number
6: MSN Number
PGM: 116 - Station COS
1
2
3
Station COS: Day Ring
Station COS: Night Ring
Station COS: Timed Ring
1~11
1~11
1~11
1
1
1
PGM: 117 - CO Line/IP Channel Group Access
CO/IP Group
01~20
1
001-024
Group 01
PGM: 118 - Internal Page Zone Access
Internal Page Zone Access
PGM: 119 - PTT Group Access
PTT Page Zone
01~10
PGM: 120 - Preset Call Forward
Preset Call Forward
-
1: Unconditional Forward
2: Internal Busy Forward
3: Internal No Answer Forward
4: External Busy Forward
5: External No Answer
Forward
6: Voice Mail box
7: Internal DND
8: External DND
1~7
-
1: Flex Button
2: CO Line
3: CO Group
4: Station Number
5: Hunt Group
6: Station Speed
7: System Speed
EN/DIS
ENABLE
000~600
00~99
000
00
1~8 + destination
PGM: 121 - Idle Line Selection
Type
PGM: 122 – Station IP Attributes
1
Direct IP Call
PGM: 123 - Station Timers
1
2
Station Fwd No-Answer Timer
Cur off timer
638
1 second increments
1 minute increments
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-3 STATION DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
PGM: 124 - Linked Pair Station Attributes
1
2
3
Set IP Address
Router IP Address
Set Mac Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
PGM: 125 - ICM Tenant Group
1
2
Group Attendant
Group Access
Station No.
Group 01~15
Group 01
PGM: 127 – Station VM Attributes
1
2
3
VM COS
Administrator Mail Box
Announce Only Mail Box
1-5
EN/DIS
EN/DIS
1
DISABLE
DISABLE
4
Announce Only Option
Previous Menu
Hang Up
Previous
Menu
5
6
7
8
Company Directory – First Name
Company Directory – Last Name
Cascade Mail Box
Cascade Type
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
9
Message Rewind/Fast Forward
Time
3-99(SEC)
4
10
11
Notify Retry count
Notify Dial time
00-99
00-99
3
5
1-14
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
0-3
0-3
OFF
OFF
0
0
LSS index + button
…
PGM: 128 – Station CCR Table
1-10
11
12
13
14
Station CCR
CCR table usage
CCR One Digit
* Button Used As
# Button Used As
PGM: 129 - DSS Label Edit
LSS Label
Max 16 char.
Table C-4 BOARD DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM: 130 - H.323 VoIP Attributes
1
H.323 Setup Mode
2
H.323 Tunneling Mode
3
H.323 DTMF Path
4
H.323 DiffServ Pre tagging
5
RAS Usage
6
RAS Multi-cast IP Address
7
RAS Multi-cast IP port
8
RAS Uni-cast IP Address
9
RAS Uni-cast IP port
10 RAS Keep-alive Timer
11 RAS Numbering Plan prefix
12 RAS Gateway Id
RANGE
0~1
1: ON, 0: OFF
0~1
00~63
1: ON, 0: OFF
IP address
Port number
IP address
Port number
001 ~ 999
24 digits
128 characters
639
DEFAULT
Fast
ON
0: In-band
4
OFF
224.0.1.41
1718
82.134.80.2
1719
120
REMARK
0: Fast/1: Normal
0:Off/1:On
1:Out/0:In
1 second increments
Web Admin only
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-4 BOARD DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
24-1
24-2
24-3
RAS Light RRQ
TCP Keep Alive
FAIL OVER USAGE
Fail over Time
Fail over Group
Q931 START PORT
Q931 END PORT
H245 START PORT
H245 END PORT
RAS START PORT
RAS END PORT
H.323 VoIP Attributes
MEDIA START PORT
MEDIA END PORT
DATA START PORT
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
03-10 (Sec.)
01-21
00001-65535
00001-65535
00001-65535
00001-65535
00001-65535
00001-65535
OFF
ON
OFF
5
00001-65535
00001-65535
00001-65535
6000
7036
8500
24-4
DATA END PORT
00001-65535
8548
0~1
0~1
0~1
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: S1240
2: TDX1B
3: STANDARD
4: CONGES_DIS
D4
B8ZS
TE
OFF
OFF
REMARK
2048
2559
2560
3071
2048
3071
PGM: 131 -T1/E1/PRI Attributes
1
2
3
4
5
T1 Setup Mode
T1 Line Mode
PRI Line Mode
PRI/E1 CRC Check
E1 R2 DSP Check
6
DCO PX Type
0:D4/1:ESF
0: B8ZS/1:AMI
0:NT/1:TE
STANDARD
PGM: 132 - Board Base Attributes
1
Router IP address
IP Address
2
Device CODEC Type
0-4
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Firewall IP address
RTP Security
TNET Enable
UMS Sender e-mail address
T38 Enable
USE Board IP for SIP
RTP firewall IP
IP Address
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
40 Characters
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
IP address
10
T38 Port Usage
11
12
RFC2833 Payload
RFC2833 Volume
4
0: DIFF WITH
VOICE
1: SAME AS
VOICE
2: TRIGGERING
000-127
00-36
640
0: G.711,
1: G.723.1,
2: G.729,
3: G.722
4: System Codec refer to
PGM 161-button 9.
ON
OFF
Web only to modify
OFF
OFF
0
0
0
-dB
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-4 BOARD DATA
BTN
13
SUB-MENU
RFC2833 Redundancy
RANGE
1-8
DEFAULT
REMARK
0
Table C-5 CO LINE DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
PGM: 140 - CO Service Attributes
CO Service Type
Flex 1~4
1 (Normal)
1: Normal CO line, 2: DID,
3: TIE Line, 4: Unused
PGM: 141 - CO/IP Line Attributes I
1
2
3
4
5
CO/IP Group Assignment
CO Line COS
CO Start Signal
CO Line Type
CO Line Signal Type
01-20
1~5
1: Ground, 0: Loop
1: PBX, 0: CO
1: DTMF, 0: Pulse
1
Loop
CO
DTMF
6
7
8
Flash Type
Universal Night Answer
CO/IP Group Auth
1: Ground, 0: Loop
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
Loop
OFF
OFF
9
Data Station No
4 digits
10
Tenancy Group
00~ 15
FAX/Modem can be assigned
to STA
00
11
CO VoIP Mode
1~6
Common
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
PROCTOR ON/OFF
WAIT IF VSF BUSY
Unused
Unused
COL RING TONE
Unused
Gain table index
Tone table index
Digit conversion table index
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
ON
1-12
0
1-3
1-5
01-15
1
1
01
1: ON, 0: OFF
12 characters
0~6
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
0
OFF
ON
1: Common, 2: H.323 only, 3:
SIP only, 4: RTP RLY, 5:
H.323/TRP RLY, 6: SIP/RTP
RLY
0 is Not Available
PGM: 142 - CO/IP Line Attributes II
1
2
3
4
5
CO Line Name Display
CO Line Name Assign
Metering Unit
Line Drop using CPT
DISA Authorization Code
6
CO Line MOH
0~10
1
7
8
9
10
11
CO Dial Tone
CO Ring Back Tone
CO Error Tone
CO Busy Tone
DISA CO Access
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
641
Max 12 character, alpha entry
Not Supported
0: Refer to System hold, 1:
INT Music, 2: EXT music, 3:
VSF MOH, 4~8: SLT
MOH1~5, 9~10: VSF MOH2~3
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-5 CO LINE DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
12
13
14
CO Flash Timer
Open Loop Detect Timer
ICLID Detect Timer
15
SMS OUTGOING
16
SMS RCV STATION
17
CO Line Dial Tone Source
18
CO Line Ring Back Tone Source
19
REJECT ANONYMOUS
RANGE
000~300
00~20
00~20
0: Disable
1: Enable
0: dial tone
1: INT Music,
2: EXT music,
3: VSF MOH,
4~8: SLT MOH1~5,
9~10: VSF
MOH2~3
0: ring back tone
1: INT Music,
2: EXT music,
3: VSF MOH,
4~8: SLT MOH1~5,
9~10: VSF
MOH2~3
1: ON / 0:OFF
DEFAULT
050
04
00
REMARK
10 msec. Increments
100 msec. Increments
1 sec. Increments
Disable
dial tone
ring back
tone
OFF
20
PREFIX TABLE ID
0-6
0
21
Cut Off Timer
00-99
00
22
23
24
DISA Delay Timer
LDT Table Index
DISA Answer Timer
0-9
1-10
0-9
0
1
0
1: ON, 0: OFF
None
None
ON
If prefix table ID is set to 0,
then prefix dialing call cannot
be applied.
If prefix table ID is set to (1-6),
then prefix dialing call can be
applied with PREFIX DIALING
TABLE(PGM 206)
Co base call cut off timer can
be set at this field.
PGM: 143 - ISDN Line Attributes
1
2
3
COLP Table Index
CLIP Table Index
EN-BLOC Sending
4
Type Of Number
0~4
International
5
DID Remove digit count
00~99
00
6
TEI Type
1: Auto, 0: Fixed
Auto
7
ISDN-SS CD/CR
1: ON, 0: OFF
Disable
8
ISDN One Digit Remove
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
9
Advice of Charge Type
0~5
0
642
0: Unknown
1: International
2: National
3: Unused
4: Subscriber
Received digits deleted from
left
0: Disable, 1: Deflect,
3: Reroute
(Except USA version)
(For Italy)
0: None
1: Italy/Spain
2: Finland
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-5 CO LINE DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
3: Australia
4: Belgium
5: ETSI Standard
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
ISDN Line Type
Calling Sub-address
Incoming Prefix Code Insertion
Outgoing Prefix Code Insertion
International Access Code
My Area Code
My Area Prefix Code
CLI Transit Code
Preserve Name for DID calls
ISDN Redirecting number
20
Choice Incoming CLI
21
Calling Party Numbering Plan
1: μ-Law, 0: A-Law
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
Max 4 digit
Max 6 Digits
Max 4 Digits
1: ORI 0: CFW
1: ON, 0: OFF
No SVC / ORI/CFW
Transit Point CLI
/ Original CLI
0-6
μ-Law
OFF
OFF
ON
CFW
OFF
No SVC
Transit Point
CLI
1
22
Called Party Numbering Plan
0-6
0
23
Screening Indicator
0-3
0
Added CO line attributes
Station CLI Type
ISDN PLUS Code
CP/ALERT INBAND
Disconnect INBAND
Bursting to Caller
Station CLI 1-5
Max 4 digits
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
Station CLI 1
OFF
OFF
OFF
24
24-1
24-2
24-3
24-4
24-5
0: Unknown.
1: ISDN / Telephony.
2: Data / Numbering.
3: Telex.
4: National Standard.
5: Private.
6: Reserved.
0: Unknown.
1: ISDN / Telephony.
2: Data / Numbering.
3: Telex.
4: National Standard.
5: Private.
6: Reserved.
0: User Provided, No Service.
1: User Provided, Pass.
2: User Provided, Fail.
3: Network Provided.
PGM: 144 - CO Ring Assignment
1
2
Day
Night
Station/Group
Station/Group
3
Timed Ring
Station/Group
Dial 1: Station + Delay (0~9
ring cycles)
Dial 2: Hunt group
Dial 3: VSF announcement
(01~70)
Dial 4: AA Ring delay Time
(00~30 sec.)
PGM: 145 - DID Service Attributes
1
DID Signal
1: Immediate
643
Wink
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-5 CO LINE DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
2: Wink
3: Delayed Dial
2
DID conversion Type
0-2
1
3
4
DID Digit Receive Number
DID Digit Mask
2-4
4 digits
3
#***
0: DID Data Conversion
(PGM230)
1: call to the valid extension.
2: convert with Flex DID Table
(PGM231)
PGM: 146 - DISA Service Attributes
DISA (Day/Night/Timed Ring)
Flex 1: Day
Flex 2: Night
Flex 3: Timed
Enter VMIB/VMIU
Announcement number.
PGM: 147 - CO Preset Forward Attributes
1
CO Preset Forward Timer
00~99
00
2
3
ICLID Ring Table Index
VMID Number
001~250
0000~9999
None
None
1 second increments
PGM: 148 – CO Additional Attribute
1
CID type
2
RCID detect
3
RCID request
4
5
6
7
8
RCID request first delay timer
RCID no answer timer
RCID digit number
RCID request count
RCID request retry delay timer
9
COLLECT CALL BLOCKING
10
11
12
13
COLLECT CALL ANSWER TIMER
COLLECT CALL IDLE TIMER
Analog line monitoring
Ring detection register
0: Disabled
1: FSK
2: DTAS FSK
3: DTMF
4: Russian CID
0: LOCAL
1: ALL
0: USER
1: AUTO
10-150(10msec)
1-300(sec)
4-10
1-3
10-30(10msec)
0: Disabled
1: Double Answer
2: With Indication
1-250
1-250
ON/OFF
000-255
FSK
ALL
AUTO
20
20
7
1
10
Disabled
10
20
ON
000
PGM: 150 - NA ISDN Line Attributes
1
Local Exchange Type
1~4
NI 1
2
3
4
SPID Number
Directory Number
EKTS Mode
9~23 digits
23 digits
1:EKTS /0:NONE
NONE
5
Type for 1/2/3
0~5
0
644
1: NI 1
2: NI 2
3: 5 ESS
4: NORTEL
0: Unknown
1: International
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-5 CO LINE DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
2: National
3: Network
4: Subscriber
5: Abbreviated
6
7
8
5
Type for 4/5/6
Type for 7/8/9
Type for 10/11
Type for 1/2/3
0
0: Unknown
1: International
2: National
3: Network
4: Subscriber
5: Abbreviated
0
0: Unknown
1: International
2: National
3: Network
4: Subscriber
5: Abbreviated
0
0: Unknown
1: International
2: National
3: Network
4: Subscriber
5: Abbreviated
0~5
0
0: Unknown
1: International
2: National
3: Network
4: Subscriber
5: Abbreviated
1~5 (Sec.)
1~5 (Sec.)
1~5 (Sec.)
5~15 (Sec.)
5~15 (Sec.)
10~30 (Sec.)
1~10 (Sec.)
10~60 (Sec.)
1~10 (Sec.)
1~100 (Sec.)
10~60 (Sec.)
1%
250~300 (bytes)
1~5
1~5
1~5
1
1
2
10
10
15
4
30
4
90
40
3
260
3
1
1
1~9
01~60
2
20
0~5
0~5
0~5
PGM: 151 - ISDN CO Line Attributes
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
T200
T201
T202
T203
T204
T302
T303
T305
T308
T309
T310
N200
N201
N202
N204
K_Valule
PGM: 152 - T1 Line Timers Attributes
1
2
Pause Time
Release Guard Time
645
1 sec increments
100 msec increments
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-5 CO LINE DATA
BTN
3
4
5
SUB-MENU
RANGE
Dial-Tone Delay Time
Inter-Digit Time
Wink Time
02~50
15~30
07~15
DEFAULT
10
15
10
6
Pulse Rate
0~3
0
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Seize DTC Time
Release Time
Address Signaling Type
Ring Start Time
Ring Stop Time
Collect Digit
Digit Store Time
0~127
0~127
1:DTMF, 0:Pulse
2~9
10~60
1~6
01~15
3
7
DTMF
2
60
3
15
1~9
1: ON, 0: OFF
01-15
0-2
1-9
00~32
6
OFF
10
2
1
0
REMARK
100 msec increments
20 msec increments
20 msec increments
0 : 60-40(10pps)
1 : 66-33(10pps)
2 : 60-40(20pps)
3 : 66-33(20pps)
20 msec increments
20 msec increments
100 msec increments
100 msec increments
1 sec increments
PGM: 153 - DCOB CO Line Attributes
1
2
3
4
5
6
Line Status
DNIS Service
Number of CLI Digits
DCOB Type
Call Category
DID Digit number
Table C-6 SYSTEM DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
PGM: 160 - System Attributes I
2
3
Attendant Call Queuing RingBack Tone
Camp-on, MOH/Ring-Back Tone
CO Dial-Tone Detect
4
CO Line Choice
0~2
Last
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
DISA Retry Counter
External Night Ring
Hold Preference
Print LCR Converted Digit
Attendant Call Queue Available
All Attendant PGM ‘0’ Access
Off-Net Prompt Usage
1~9
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: Sys, 0: Excl
1: LCR, 0: User
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
3
OFF
System
LCR
OFF
OFF
OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
15 ~ 50
1: ON, 0: OFF
1~9
OFF
15
ON
3
1
12
13
14
15
16
17
Unsupervised Conf Timer
Extension
ACD Information Print
Call Log List Number
Off-net DTMF Tone
Authorization Retry Counter
Conference Room Telephone
number
1: RBT, 0: MOH
MOH
1: RBT, 0: MOH
1: ON, 0: OFF
MOH
OFF
8 digits
646
0: Round Robin,1: Last Used,
2: First
System/Exclusive Hold
(Except USA version)
(Except USA version)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-6 SYSTEM DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
24-1
24-2
24-3
24-4
24-5
24-6
24-7
24-8
MPB DIFFSERV
UPGRADE MODE
TRANSFER TONE
CONF WARN TONE
TLS for WEB
DUMMY DIAL TONE
ADDED ATTR
SIP STA MODE
SYS AUTH END CODE
STN VM FEATURE USAGE
Remote VM access
Transfer Tone usage
LCR Dial tone detect
ICM Call log
ATD password usage
24-9
24-10
24-11
24-12
Pickup STA name usage
Display LCR mode
Easy 5 wake up usage
WEB login usage
24-13
VM MEX notify over LCO
24-14
24-15
Modem ASC CO line
Meet me soft display
24-16
24-17
Device information request
interval time
Number of CLI Wait list
RANGE
DEFAULT
00-63
1: FTP, 0: TFTP
1: RBT, 0: MOH
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
04
FTP
RBT
ON
OFF
OFF
ADDED ATTR
RTD
OFF
ON
0: RTD, 1: PTP
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: DISABLE
1: ENABLE
00-74
0: OFF, 1: ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
015-255
015
000-255
000
REMARK
DISABLE
0
ON
PGM: 161 - System Attributes II
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Off-Hook Ring Signal Type
Page Warning Tone
Privacy
Privacy Warning Tone
ACD PRNT Enable
ACD PRNT Timer
ACD Clear after PRNT
Override 1st CO Group
1: Mute, 0: Burst
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
001~255
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
Mute
ON
ON
ON
OFF
10
OFF
ON
9
Base Codec Type
0-3
G711
10
11
G.711 Packetization
G.723 Packetization
20
30
12
Network Time/Date
13
14
15
16
Incoming Call Toll Check
Web Server TCP port
Web Password Security
Old Auth. Code Usage
10/20/30
30/60
0: DISABLE
1: ISDN CLOCK
2: NTP
1: ON, 0: OFF
00001~65535
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
00080
OFF
ON
17
COS 7 on Auth code entry
failure
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
647
DISABLE
10 second increments
0: G711, 1: G.723.1, 2: G.729,
3: G.722
1 msec increments
1 msec increments
(USA version do not support
ISDN CLOCK)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-6 SYSTEM DATA
BTN
18
19
20
21
22
23
SUB-MENU
Unified Message Format
Record Warning Tone
Unused
Unused
SMS CENTER NUMBER
SMS PROTOCOL
24
24-1
24-2
24-3
24-4
24-5
24-6
ADDED ATTR
G.722 PACKETIZATION(1ms)
Unused
SMS CENTER CLI
TRANSIT-OUT SECURITY
EMR CALL ATD NOTIFY
Unused
24-7
FIRST DIGIT * IN SPD
24-8
24-9
Strong password
VSF/VMIB SMTP PORT
24-10
ICM BUSY SVC
24-11
24-12
24-13
24-14
24-15
24-16
24-17
24-18
24-19
24-20
24-21
24-22
24-23
AUTO SAVE NEW MSG
IGMP QUERY USAGE
IGMP INTV_TMR(1sec)
IGMP QUERY ALL HOSTS
IGMP QUERY GENERIC
RING-GROUP INDICATION
RESTRICT * AND #
RESTRICT ANS DGT DISP
IP BIND USAGE
ACD MAILSEND WEEKLY SET
ACD MAILSEND DAILY SET
ACD DEL AFTER MAILSEND
NEW 5 WAKE UP USAGE
24-24
ACD GROUP INDICATION
RANGE
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
DEFAULT
OFF
ON
23 digits
0~8
NONE
10/20/30 msec
20
23 digits
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
ON
0: DISPLAY
SECURITY
1: DIGIT *
1: ON, 0: OFF
0 – 65535
1: OHVO,
0: INTR
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
0~3600 (Sec.)
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
0-7
00-23
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
DISPLAY
SECURITY
ON
25
OHVO
OFF
OFF
180
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
0
OFF
OFF
0: OFF,
1: ON RING,
2: ON LED
OFF
Max 12 digits
Max 12 digits
-
PGM: 162 - System Password
1
2
Admin Password
Maintenance Password
REMARK
PGM: 163 - Alarm Attributes
648
0: No PSTN SMS support,
1: ETSI-P1
2: ETSI-P2
3: KT-LivingNet
4: SIP-Text
5: SIP-XML
6: KT-IP-PBX
7: SKN-IP-PBX
8: KT XML
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-6 SYSTEM DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
1
Alarm Enable
2
Alarm Contact Type
3
Alarm/Door Bell Mode
4
Alarm Signal Mode
5
Emergency call notification
6
DCOB Fault notification
7
SIP registration fault notification
RANGE
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: Close,
0: Open
1: Alarm,
0: Door-Bell
1: Repeat,
0: Once
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
DEFAULT
REMARK
OFF
Close
Alarm
Repeat
ON
ON
0: OFF
1: ON
ON
Station
1: 100 (1000)
Flex 1 – 61
Flex 1 – 61
8100-8220
8101 - 8221
1~11
1~11
1~11
1
1
1
PGM: 164 - Attendant Assignment
1
Attendant Assignment
Button 1 : System Attendant
Button 2: Main Attendants
PGM: 165 - Multicast RTP / RTCP
1
2
Multicast RTP
Multicast RTCP
Max 4 digit
Max 4 digit
PGM: 166 - DISA COS
1
2
3
Day mode COS
Night mode COS
Timed mode COS
PGM: 167 - DID/DISA Destination
F1: Tone, F2: Attendant, F3:
Hunt, F4: Announce
1
Busy Destination
Flex 1~4
Flex 1(Tone)
2
Error Destination
Flex 1~4
Flex 1(Tone)
3
No Answer Destination
Flex 1~4
Flex 1(Tone)
4
VSF Prompts usage
Flex 1~5
Flex 1~5: ON
5
Reroute Busy Destination
Flex 1~3
Flex 1(Tone)
6
Reroute Error Destination
Flex 1~3
Flex 1(Tone)
7
Reroute No Answer Destination
Flex 1~3
Flex 1(Tone)
8
DND Destination
Flex 1~3
Flex 1(Tone)
9
Reroute Net CO busy
Destination
Flex 1~3
Flex 1(Tone)
F1: Tone, F2: Attendant, F3:
Hunt
1~3
1~3
-
1: LBC, 2: Door, 3: Ext. 1,
1: LBC, 2: Door, 3: Ext. 1,
PGM: 168 - External Control Contacts
1
First Contact
2
Second Contact
PGM: 169 - LCD Date/Time & Language Mode
1
Date Display Mode
2
Time Display Mode
1: MMDDYY
0: DDMMYY
1: 12H, 0: 24H
649
MMDDYY
12H
F1: Tone, F2: Attendant, F3:
Hunt, F4: Announce
F1: Tone, F2: Attendant, F3:
Hunt, F4: Announce
1: ON, 0: OFF
F1: Tone, F2: Attendant, F3:
Hunt
F1: Tone, F2: Attendant, F3:
Hunt
F1: Tone, F2: Attendant, F3:
Hunt
F1: Tone, F2: Attendant, F3:
Hunt
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-6 SYSTEM DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
3
Language Display Mode
00~17
00 (Eng)
4
Weekday Display Mode
0~2
0
PGM: 170 - Flexible Button LED Flashing Rate
1
CO Incoming Ring Flashing Rate
00~14
2
CO Transfer Ring Flashing Rate
00~14
3
CO Queue Ring Flashing Rate
00~14
4
CO Recall Ring Flashing Rate
00~14
5
CO I Hold Flashing Rate
00~14
6
CO System Hold Flashing Rate
00~14
7
CO Exclusive Hold Flashing Rate
00~14
8
CO Out-going disabled Flashing
Rate
00~14
9
CO incoming call off-net forward
Flashing Rate
00~14
10
CO DISA Indication Flashing
Rate
00~14
11
CO supplementary call waiting
Flashing Rate
00~14
12
CO Supplementary Hold Flashing
00~14
Rate
13
DSS button Flashing Rate for CO
Ring
00~14
14
DSS button Flashing Rate for
ICM all Call
00~14
15
DSS button Flashing Rate for
ICM Ring associate
00~14
16
DSS button Flashing Rate for a
station in DND
00~14
17
DSS button Flashing Rate for a
station in Lock-out
00~14
18
DSS button Flashing Rate for a
station in pre-selected message
mode
00~14
19
DSS button Flashing Rate for a
station in ICM Hold
00~14
20
DSS button Flashing Rate for a
station in other case
00~14
21
CIQ #1 Threshold
00~14
22
CIQ #2 Threshold
00~14
FLASH 30 IPM
(2)
FLASH 120 IPM
(10)
FLASH 240 IPM
FLUTTER (6)
FLASH 480 IPM
FLUTTER (8)
FLASH 30 IPM
WINK (12)
FLASH 60 IPM
(3)
FLASH 120 IPM
(10)
FLASH 240 IPM
FLUTTER (6)
FLASH 240 IPM
FLUTTER (6)
FLASH 240 IPM
(5)
FLASH 240 IPM
FLUTTER (6)
FLASH 480 IPM
(7)
FLASH 30 IPM
(2)
FLASH 60 IPM
(3)
FLASH 120 IPM
(10)
FLASH 60 IPM
(3)
FLASH 480 IPM
FLUTTER (8)
FLASH 30 IPM
(2)
FLASH 60 IPM
(3)
FLASH 120 IPM
(10)
FLASH 60 IPM
(3)
FLASH 120 IPM
650
REMARK
0 : PGM 169 BTN 1
1 : MM/DD WDY
2 : MM DD WDY
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-6 SYSTEM DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
23
CIQ #3 Threshold
00~14
24
ACD DND button
00~14
25
ACD Warning tone
00~14
26
ACD Help Button
00~14
27
Voice Record button
00~14
28
Message Wait button
00~14
29
DSS Out-of-service state
00~14
30
On-demand Ring mode
00~14
31
Night Ring mode
00~14
32
Timed Ring mode
00~14
33
Auto Ring mode
00~14
34
Page Hold Button
00~14
35
DSS Off duty
00~14
DEFAULT
REMARK
(10)
FLASH 240 IPM
(5)
FLASH 120 IPM
(10)
FLASH 120 IPM
(10)
FLASH 120 IPM
(10)
FLASH 240 IPM
(5)
FLASH 30 IPM
(2)
FLASH OFF
(00)
FLASH 60 IPM
(3)
FLASH
STEADY (01)
FLASH 240 IPM
(5)
FLASH 480 IPM
(7)
FLASH 60 IPM
(3)
FLASH 120 IPM
(10)
PGM: 171 - Music Source
1
2
BGM Type
MOH Type
0~10
0~10
651
1
00: No BGM
01: INT Music
02: EXT Music
03: VSF MOH
04: SLT MOH1
05: SLT MOH2
06: SLT MOH3
07: SLT MOH4
08: SLT MOH5
09: VSF MOH2
10: VSF MOH3
1
00: Hold tone
01: INT Music
02: EXT Music
03: VSF MOH
04: SLT MOH1
05: SLT MOH2
06: SLT MOH3
07: SLT MOH4
08: SLT MOH5
09: VSF MOH2
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-6 SYSTEM DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
10: VSF MOH3
3
Int/Ext1 Music
4
SLT MOH
5
6
VSF MOH 2
VSF MOH 3
00~12
Romance
F1: SLTMOH1
F2: SLTMOH2
F3: SLTMOH3
F4: SLTMOH4
F5: SLTMOH5
01-70
01-70
N/A
N/A
Max 2 digits
-
00: ROMANCE
01: TURKISH MARCH
02: GREEN SLEEVE
03: FUR ELISE
04: CARMEN
05: WALTZ
06: PAVANE
07: SICHILIANO
08: SONATA
09: S PRING
10: CAMPANELLA
11: BADINERIE
12: BLUE DANUBE
PGM: 172 - PBX Access Codes
1 –4
PBX Access Code
Maximum 4 PBX access code
PGM: 173 - Ringing Line Preference Priority
1
2
3
4
Transfer CO Call
Recalling CO Call
Incoming CO Call
Queued CO Call
1~4
1~4
1~4
1~4
1
2
3
4
PGM: 174 - RS-232 Port Settings
1
Baud Rate
1~6
115200
2
3
4
5
CTS/RTS
Page Break
Line Page
XON/XOF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
001~199
1: XON, 0: XOFF
OFF
OFF
066
XOFF
1: Unused
2: 9600 BAUD
3: 19200 BAUD
4: 38400 BAUD
5: 57600 BAUD
6: 115200 BAUD
PGM: 175 - Serial Port Function Selection
Print Port Selection
1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
Flex 1~2
Select Print Port
Off-line SMDR/Statistics Print
Admin Print
Traffic Print
SMDI Print
SERIAL1
1~7
1~7
1~7
1~7
SERIAL1
SERIAL1
SERIAL1
SERIAL1
652
Flex 1: Select Print Port,
Flex 2: Select TCP port
1-2: Serial, 3-5: dynamic TCP
port
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-6 SYSTEM DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
2
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
Call Info Print
On-line SMDR Print
Trace Print
Debug Print
ACD Package Print
Select TCP port
Off-line SMDR/Statistics Print
Admin Print
Traffic Print
SMDI Print
Call Info Print
On-line SMDR Print
Trace Print
Debug Print
ACD Package Print
1~7
1~7
1~5
1~7
1~7
SERIAL1
SERIAL1
SERIAL1
SERIAL1
SERIAL1
1-9999
1-9999
1-9999
1-9999
1-9999
1-9999
1-9999
1-9999
1-9999
NULL
NULL
NULL
NULL
NULL
NULL
NULL
NULL
NULL
2-10
ISMDR Print
1-9999
NULL
1: 66/33
0: 60/40
60/40
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
REMARK
PGM: 176 - Break/Make Ratio
1
Break/Make ratio
PGM: 177 - SMDR Attributes
1
SMDR Save Enable
2
SMDR Print Enable
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
SMDR Recording Call Type
SMDR LD Call Digit Counter
Print Incoming Call
Print Lost Call
Records in Detail
SMDR Dial Digit Hidden
SMDR Currency unit
SMDR Cost Per Unit Pulse
SMDR Decimal Location
SMDR Start Timer
SMTP Mail Server Address
1: LD, 0: ALL
07~15
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
0~9
3 Characters
6 digits
0~5
000~250
12 digits
LD
07
OFF
ON
ON
0
000000
0
000
14
User Mail Address
e-mail address
ON: Real-time, OFF: Ondemand
LD: Long Distance, ALL: All
1 sec increments
40 character modify via Web
only
Web only
SMDR System Domain Name
18 characters
15
16
17
18
Mail Send Weekly Set
Mail Send Daily Set
Auto Send Mode
Auto Delete Mode
0-7
00-23
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
0
00
OFF
OFF
19
SMDR Long Distance Codes
Flex 1~Flex 5
0
Maximum 5 LD codes, 2 digits
each
20
SMDR Ring/CLI/CPN (SVC_1)
0: Ring
1: CLI
2: CPN
RING
For incoming call, 0: Ring
Service Time, 1: CLI, 2: CPN,
3: None Dialed number for
outgoing call
21
MSN Print on SMDR
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
653
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-6 SYSTEM DATA
BTN
22
23
24
24-1
24-2
24-3
24-4
24-5
24-6
24-7
24-8
24-9
24-10
24-11
24-12
24-13
24-14
24-15
SUB-MENU
SMDR Ring/CLI/CPN (SVC_2)
Print Serial No
SMDR Attributes
Hidden digit location
SMDR Interface Service
SMDR ICM Save
SMDR ICM Print
SMDR Disconnect Cause
Long Time Call(10min)
SMDR No Out Net Call
Unused
Unused
SMTP Mail Server ID
SMTP Mail Server PWID
RANGE
DEFAULT
0: Ring
1: CLI
2: CPN
3: None
1: ON, 0: OFF
01-19
1: Right, 0: Left
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
000-144
1: ON, 0: OFF
CPN
24-16
SMTP security
24-17
SMTP port
24-18
VSF VM Display
24-19
Display N type
Max 40
Characters
0-2
(0:No security
1:SSL
2:TLS)
1-65535
0:’I’
1:’V’
1:ON, 2:OFF
For incoming call, 0: Ring
Service Time, 1: CLI, 2: CPN,
3: None
OFF
Left
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
000
OFF
40 characters
20 characters
0: Individual
1: Integrate
Transferring
Transferred Call Charge Rate
Station
2: Integrate
Transferred
Station
0: Individual
1: Attendant
Attendant Transfer Charge Rate
Charging
2: Transferred
Station Charging
SMTP Mail Server Domain
100 Character
Address
SMTP sender Mail (WEB)
REMARK
Individual
Individual
-
0
25
0:’I’
OFF
PGM: 178 - System Date & Time
1
2
System Time
System Date
HH:MM
MMDDYY
-
Hour/Minute sequence.
Month/Day/Year sequence
3
DST Enable Mode
0: OFF, 1: ON
OFF
2nd Sunday of
March at 2:00
AM
Activate / deactivate DST
ability
4
DST Start Time
See DST Table
5
DST End Time
See DST Table
654
1st Sunday in
Nov. at 2:00
Web Only, DST Table format
Web Only, DST Table format
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-6 SYSTEM DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
AM
PGM: 179 - Multi-Language Support
1
2
3
4
5
6
1st language
2nd Language
3rd Language
4th Language
5th Language
6th Language
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
00~60
000~600
000~200
000~300
000~300
000~300
000~300
000~300
030~300
1~13
001~300
000~300
000~300
00~99
00~99
010~150
010~150
1~9
005~900
001~999
00~99
000~999
01
120
030
060
030
030
030
030
030
3
030
030
030
00
05
020
060
2
180
5
0
0
US
Korea
Turkey
Russia
Australia
Germany
PGM: 180 - System Timers I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
ATD Recall Timer
Call Park Timer
Camp-On Recall Timer
Exclusive Hold Recall Timer
I-Hold Recall Timer
System Hold Recall Timer
Transfer Recall Timer
ACNR Delay Timer
ACNR Pause Timer
ACNR Retry Counter
ACNR Tone Detect Timer
Automatic CO Release Timer
CCR Inter-digit Timer
CO Restrict Timer
CO Dial Delay Timer
CO Release Guard Timer
CO Ring Off Timer
CO Ring On Timer
CO Elapsed Call Timer
Web Password Guard Timer
On hook idle Timer
Call recording repeat time
1 min increments
1 sec increments
1 sec increments
1 sec increments
1 sec increments
1 sec increments
1 sec increments
1 sec increments
1 sec increments
1 sec increments
1 sec increments
100 msec increments
1 minute increments
100 msec increments
100 msec increments
100 msec increments
100 msec increments
1 sec increments
1 min increments
1 sec increments
PGM: 181 - System Timers II
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Call Fwd No Answer Timer
DID/DISA No Answer Timer
VSF User Max Record Timer
VSF Valid User Message Timer
Door Open Timer
ICM Dial Tone Timer
Inter-Digit Timer
000~600
000~255
000~999
0~9
05~99
01~20
01~20
015
000
60
4
20
10
05
1 sec increments
1 sec increments
1 sec increments
1 sec increments
100 msec increments
1 sec increments
1 sec increments
8
Message Wait Reminder Tone
Timer
00~60
00
1 min increments
9
10
Paging Timeout Timer
Pause Timer
000~255
1~9
015
3
11
3-Soft Auto Release Timer
01-30
10
12
VM Pause Timer
1-90
30
655
1 sec increments
1 sec increments
1 sec increments
(Reserved for new keyset)
100 msec increments
(Except USA version)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-6 SYSTEM DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
13
14
VSF cut error Timer
Unused
15
Emergency retry timer
16
Error tone timer
17
Howling tone timer
18
Notification play delay
19
Short Modem timer
RANGE
1-90
DEFAULT
00
00~99
(1 sec.)
005~180
(1 sec.)
000~180
(1 sec.)
1~99
(1 sec.)
1~60
(1 sec.)
REMARK
1 sec increments
00
1 sec increments
30
1 sec increments
30
1 sec increments
10
1 sec increments
10
1 sec increments
PGM: 182 - System Timers III
1
SLT Hook Switch Bounce Timer
01~25
01
100 msec increments
2
SLT Max Hook Switch Flash
Timer
01~25
07
100 msec increments
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
SLT Min Hook-flash Timer
Station Auto Release Timer
Unsupervised Conference Timer
Prime Line Delay Timer
Wink Timer
En-block Inter-Digit Timer
DTMF Duration Timer
Flexible DID Timer
Wakeup fail Timer
Prepaid warn timer
000~250
000~300
00~99
01~20
010~200
01~20
04~99
01~99
00~99
00~99
010
060
10
05
010
5
10
30
20
00
10 msec increments
1 sec increments
1 minute increments
1 sec increments
10 msec increments
1 sec increments
10 msec increments
100 msec increments
1 sec increments
1 sec increments
01~50
01~50
01~50
01~30
000~500
01~30
14
14
14
07
07
20
1 sec increments
1 sec increments
1 sec increments
20 msec increments
20 msec increments
1 sec increments
PGM: 183 -In room indication
1
2
Supervisor
Member 01~20
PGM: 186 - DCOB System Attributes
1
2
3
4
5
6
R2 Out manage Timer
R2 Incoming manage Timer
R2 Disappear Timer
R2 Pulse Timer
R2 Ready Timer
R2 Dial tone Delay Timer
PGM: 195 – NTP Attributes
1
Network Time/Date
0 : Disable
1: ISDN
2: NTP
Disable
PGM: 253 – VM COS Attributes
1
2
3
4
5
Greeting Length
Message Length
Number Of Messages
Retention Time
E-mail Notification
00-99
000-600
000-250
00-99
0: OFF
60
0
0
0
Notification &
656
TIME SOURCE
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-6 SYSTEM DATA
BTN
6
7
8
SUB-MENU
RANGE
Future Delivery Message
Confirm Message Receipt
Private Message Mark
PGM: 260 – Personal Group
1
Master Station
2
Member Station
DEFAULT
1: Notification
2: Notification &
Delete
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Station Range
Station Range
-
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
REMARK
Delete
PGM: 261 – Personal Group Attributes
1
2
3
4
Use Master Wake Up
Use Master Call Forward
Use Master DND
Set linked pair
Table C-7 STATION GROUP DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
PGM: 190 - Station Group Assignment, 401 – 439
1
Group Type
0~10
0
2
3
Pick-up Attribute
Circular group
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
0: No Assignment
1: Circular
2: Terminal
3: UCD/ACD
4: Ring
5: VM
6: Pick-Up
7: VSF-VM
8: UMS
9: NET-VM
10: UCS
Not applicable VM group
PGM: 191 - Station Group Attributes, by Group Type
CIRCULAR GROUP
1
2
3
4
5
6
VSF Announce 1 Timer
VSF Announce 2 Timer
VSF Announce 1 Location
VSF Announce 2 Location
VSF Announce 2 Repeat Timer
VSF Announce 2 Repeat
7
Overflow Destination
8
9
10
11
12
13
Overflow Timer
Wrap-Up Timer
No Answer Timer
Pilot Hunt
Report No Member
Music Source
000~999
000~999
00~200
00~200
000~999
1: ON, 0: OFF
Station/Group/
VSF/Speed
000~600
000~999
00~99
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
00~10
657
015
000
00
00
000
OFF
1 second increments
1 second increments
1 second increments
180
002
15
ON
OFF
1
1 second increments
1 second increments
1 second increments
00: Ring-back
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-7 STATION GROUP DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
01: INT Music
02: EXT Music
03: VSF MOH
04: SLT MOH1
05: SLT MOH2
06: SLT MOH3
07: SLT MOH4
08: SLT MOH5
09: VSF MOH2
10: VSF MOH3
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Member Forward
Mailbox Message Wait Station
Mailbox Password
Forced destination
Forced forward destination usage
1: ON, 0: OFF
Station Number
12 digits
1~4
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
None
None
WAIT IF 1ST ANNC BUSY
Group name
Maximum queue call count
1: ON, 0: OFF
20 character
00-99
ON
….
99
000~999
000~999
00~200
00~200
000~999
1: ON, 0: OFF
015
000
00
00
000
OFF
OFF
TERMINAL GROUP
1
2
3
4
5
6
VSF Announce 1 Timer
VSF Announce 2 Timer
VSF Announce 1 Location
VSF Announce 2 Location
VSF Announce 2 Repeat Timer
VSF Announce 2 Repeat
7
Overflow Destination
8
9
10
11
12
Overflow Timer
Wrap-Up Timer
No Answer Timer
Pilot Hunt
Report No Member
Station/Group/
VSF/Speed
000~600
000~999
00~99
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
180
002
15
ON
OFF
Music Source
00~10
1
14
Member Forward
Mailbox Message Wait Station
Mailbox Password
Forced destination
Forced forward destination usage
WAIT IF 1ST ANNC BUSY
1: ON, 0: OFF
Station Number
12 digits
1~4
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
None
None
658
1 second increments
-
13
15
16
17
18
19
1 second increments
1 second increments
OFF
ON
1 second increments
1 second increments
1 second increments
00: Ring-back
01: INT Music
02: EXT Music
03: VSF MOH
04: SLT MOH1
05: SLT MOH2
06: SLT MOH3
07: SLT MOH4
08: SLT MOH5
09: VSF MOH2
10: VSF MOH3
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-7 STATION GROUP DATA
BTN
20
21
SUB-MENU
Group name
Maximum queue call count
RANGE
DEFAULT
20 character
00-99
….
99
000~999
000~999
00~200
00~200
000~999
1: ON, 0: OFF
15
000
00
00
00
OFF
REMARK
UCD/ACD GROUP
1
2
3
4
5
6
VSF Announce 1 Timer
VSF Announce 2 Timer
VSF Announce 1 Location
VSF Announce 2 Location
VSF Announce 2 Repeat Timer
VSF Announce 2 Repeat
7
Overflow Destination
8
9
10
Overflow Timer
Wrap-Up Timer
Report No Member
Station/Group/
VSF/Speed
000~600
000~999
1: ON, 0: OFF
180
000
OFF
Music Source
0~10
1
12
ACD Warning Tone
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
13
Alternate Destination
Station/Group
/Speed
14
15
16
17
Supervisor Timer
Supervisor Call Count
WAIT IF 1ST ANNC BUSY
Maximum Queued Call Counter
000~999
00~99
1: ON, 0: OFF
00~99
030
00
ON
99
18
Supervisors
Station
-
19
20
UCD/ACD Station Priority
ACD DND Wrap-up Timer
0~9
002~200
0
010
21
ACD ICLID Usage
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
22
ACD Group Name
20 Character
-
24
24-1
24-2
ACD CIQ Route
Flex 1 ~ 10
ACD Sub Attribute
Zap Tone
Mailbox Message Wait Station
Flex 1-20
1: ON, 0: OFF
Station Number
659
1 second increments
-
11
23
1 second increments
1 second increments
1 second increments
1 second increments
00: Ring-back
01: INT Music
02: EXT Music
03: VSF MOH
04: SLT MOH1
05: SLT MOH2
06: SLT MOH3
07: SLT MOH4
08: SLT MOH5
09: VSF MOH2
10: VSF MOH3
1 second increments
Max, 5 station can be
supervisors
1 second increments
When guaranteed
announcement is used
Flex 10 : when caller dial “0”
Flex 1~9 : caller digit 1~9
Ex.) When Flex 1 is pressed
1: Station Number
2: Hunt Group Number
3: System Speed Number
4: Network Station Number
OFF
None
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-7 STATION GROUP DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
24-3
24-4
24-5
24-6
Mailbox Password
Call In Queue Display
Forced forward destination usage
Call In Queue #1 Threshold
12 digits
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
00~99
24-7
Call In Queue #1 Announcement
Location
00~200
24-8
Call In Queue #1 Page zone
00~15 or
00~40
00
000~180
015
1 second increments
000~180
045
1 second increments
00~99
20
24-9
24-10
24-11
Call In Queue #1 Announcement
Delay Timer
Call In Queue #1 Announcement
Repeat Timer
Call In Queue #2 Threshold
None
OFF
OFF
10
24-12
Call In Queue #2 Announcement
Location
00~200
24-13
Call In Queue #2 Page zone
00~15 or
00~40
00
000~180
015
1 second increments
000~180
025
1 second increments
30
24-14
24-15
Call In Queue #2 Announcement
Delay Timer
Call In Queue #2 Announcement
Repeat Timer
24-16
Call In Queue #3 Threshold
00~99
24-17
Call In Queue #3 Announcement
Location
00~200
24-18
Call In Queue #3 Page zone
00~15 or
00~40
00
24-19
Call In Queue #3 Announcement
Delay Timer
000~180
015
1 second increments
000~180
005
1 second increments
1: ON, 0: OFF
000 ~ 180
1: ON, 0: OFF
1-4
OFF
000
ON
1 second increments
000~999
000~999
00~200
00~200
000~999
1: ON, 0: OFF
015
00
00
00
000
OFF
24-20
24-21
24-22
24-23
24-24
Call In Queue #3 Announcement
Repeat Timer
Call in Queue Mention
ACD No-answer Timer
Member Forward
Forward destination
RING GROUP
1
2
3
4
5
6
VSF Announce 1 Timer
VSF Announce 2 Timer
VSF Announce 1 Location
VSF Announce 2 Location
VSF Announce 2 Repeat Timer
VSF Announce 2 Repeat
7
Overflow Destination
8
9
10
Overflow Timer
Wrap-Up Timer
Music Source
11
Maximum Queued Call Counter
Station/Group/
VSF/Speed
000~600
000~999
0~10
00~99
1 second increments
180
002
1
99
660
1 second increments
1 second increments
1 second increments
1 second increments
00: Ring-back
01: INT Music
02: EXT Music
03: VSF MOH
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-7 STATION GROUP DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
04: SLT MOH1
05: SLT MOH2
06: SLT MOH3
07: SLT MOH4
08: SLT MOH5
09: VSF MOH2
10: VSF MOH3
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Member Forward
Mailbox Message Wait Station
Mailbox Password
Forced destination
Forced forward destination usage
1: ON, 0: OFF
Station Number
12 digits
1~4
1: ON, 0: OFF
ON
None
None
WAIT IF 1ST ANNC BUSY
Group name
1: ON, 0: OFF
20 characters
ON
….
000~999
1~4
1~4
000
1
2
OFF
External VM GROUP
1
2
3
Wrap-Up Timer
Put Mail Index
Get Mail Index
4
VM Group Hunt Type
5
Overflow Timer
6
Overflow Destination
7
8
9
Forced forward usage
Forced forward destination
Group name
10
Server type
11
Server number
12
Member type
13
Server capacity
1: Circular
0: Terminal
000~600
Station/Group or
System Speed
0: OFF / 1: ON
1-4
20 characters
0: IPCR
1: 3rd
01-10
1 second increments
Terminal
180
1 second increments
OFF
.
.
3rd
0: SIP
1: SLT
000~140
SIP
0
PICK-UP GROUP
1
2
Auto Pick-Up
All Group Member Ringing
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
OFF
00 ~ 99
00 ~ 99
20 characters
00
15
...
1 Day increments
1 second increments
000~999
000~999
01~70
01~70
000~999
1: ON, 0: OFF
Station/Group/
15
000
00
00
00
OFF
-
1 second increments
1 second increments
VSF-VM GROUP
1
2
3
Retention
Dial time
Group name
UMS GROUP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
VSF Announce 1 Timer
VSF Announce 2 Timer
VSF Announce 1 Location
VSF Announce 2 Location
VSF Announce 2 Repeat Timer
VSF Announce 2 Repeat
Overflow Destination
661
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-7 STATION GROUP DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
8
9
10
11
Overflow Timer
No Answer Timer
Pilot Hunt
Alternate Destination
12
Hunt Type
13
Wrap-Up Timer
14
Forced forward usage
15
16
Forced forward destination
Group name
UCS GROUP
Select UCS
1
UCS Server
RANGE
DEFAULT
VSF/Speed
000~600
00~99
1: ON, 0: OFF
Station/Group
1: Circular
0: Terminal
002~999
180
15
ON
REMARK
1 second increments
1 second increments
Circular
002
0: OFF
1: ON
1-4
20 characters
1 second increments
OFF
...
...
Flex 1
01 ~ 16
1
Station
-
Only selection 1 is supported
PGM: 192 - Pick up Group Assignment
1
Member assignment
Table C-8 ISDN LINE & ICLID ROUTING DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM: 200 - ISDN Attributes
1
CO ATD CODE
2
CLI Print To Serial
3
Display DID info
RANGE
2 digits
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
DEFAULT
REMARK
OFF
OFF
PGM: 201 - CLIP/COLP Table
1
CLIP/COLP Table
00~49
PGM: 202 - MSN Table
1
2
3
CO range
Index
Telephone number
000~999
23 digits
Index to PGM 231 Table
PGM: 203 - ICLID Route Table
1
2
3
4
Index
ICLID Telephone number
ICLID Name
ICLID Tone
001~250
24 digits
12 characters
01~12
-
The bin no of PGM 204
2 digits
PGM: 204 - ICLID RING Assignment Table
1
2
Day
Night
Station/Group
Station/Group
3
Timed Ring
Station/Group
PGM: 205 - PPP Attributes
1
PPP Destination Station number
Station Number
662
Flex 1: Station + Delay (0~9
ring cycles)
Flex 2: Hunt group
Flex 3: VSF announcement
(01~70)
Flex 4: AA Ring delay Time
(00~30 sec.)
None
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-8 ISDN LINE & ICLID ROUTING DATA
BTN
2
3
4
5
6
7
SUB-MENU
PPP User ID 1
PPP Password 1
PPP User ID 2
PPP Password 2
Server IP address
Client IP address
RANGE
12 Characters
12 Characters
12 Characters
12 Characters
IP address
IP address
DEFAULT
REMARK
likppp01
Ipkts01
likppp02
Ipkts02
PGM: 206 - PREFIX Dialing Table Attributes
1
2
3
4
5
PREFIX CODE
TABLE ID
MIN DIGIT
MAX DIGIT
NUM OF TYPE
Max. 8 digits
0-6
00-30
00-30
0
0
0
0-6
0:Unknown
1:International
2:National
0 (UNKNOWN) 3:Network Spec.
4:Subscriber
5:Abbreviated
6:Reserved
6
NUM PLAN
0-6
7
SENDING COMPLETE
1:ON / 0:OFF
8
CALL CHARGE TYPE
0-5
9
10
CALL CHARGE TIMER
Prefix table
000-999
0:Unknonw
1:ISDN/Telephony
2:Data numbering
0 (UNKNOWN) 3:Telex
4:National standard
5:Private
6:Reserved
OFF
0:Unknown
1:Local
2:Long Distance
0 (UNKNOWN)
3:International
4:Mobile
5:reserved
000
Table C-9 TABLES DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
PGM: 220 - LCR Control Attributes
1
LCR Access Mode
1~6
M00
1: M00
2: M01
3: M02
4: M11
5: M12
6: M13
MON
TUE
WED
1~3
1~3
1~3
1
1
1
Set the Day of week zone
2
1
2
3
663
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-9 TABLES DATA
BTN
3
4
5
SUB-MENU
RANGE
4
5
6
7
Set the Time Zone of Day zone1
THUR
FRI
SAT
SUN
1
2
3
Set the Time Zone of Day zone1
00~24
00~24
00~24
1
2
3
Set the Time Zone of Day zone1
00~24
00~24
00~24
1
2
00~24
00~24
3
00~24
DEFAULT
REMARK
1~3
1~3
1~3
1~3
1
1
1
1
Both
-
1: Internal 2: CO Line, 3: Both
PGM: 221 - LCR Leading Digit Table
1
2
3
4
5
6
LCR Type
Code (leading digit)
Day Zone 1 DMT
Day Zone 2 DMT
Day Zone 3 DMT
Check Password
1~3
Max. 12 digits
6 digits
6 digits
6 digits
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
Time Zone 1~3: 2 digits each
Time Zone 1~3: 2 digits each
Time Zone 1~3: 2 digits each
LCR code authorization
PGM: 222 - LCR Digit Modification Table
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Added Digit
Removal Position
Number of Remove digits
Add Position
CO/IP Group
Alt Index
Net num plan bin
SMDR code
Max. 25 digits
01~12
00~12
01~13
01-21
00~99
000~251
4 digit
01
00
01
01
-
PGM: 223 - LCR Table Initialization
1
2
3
4
5
6
DMT Of Day zone 1
DMT Of Day zone 2
DMT Of Day zone 3
CO Group Init
Alt Index Init
Initialize All LCR
6 digits
6 digits
6 digits
01-21
00~99
Time Zone 1~3: 2 digits each
Time Zone 1~3: 2 digits each
Time Zone 1~3: 2 digits each
PGM: 224 - TOLL Table
1
2
3
4
5
6
Allow Table A (01~50)
Deny Table A (01~50)
Allow Table B (01~50)
Deny Table B (01~50)
Allow Table C (01~50)
Deny Table C (01~50)
Max. 20 digits
Max. 20 digits
Max. 20 digits
Max. 20 digits
Max. 20 digits
Max. 20 digits
664
-
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-9 TABLES DATA
BTN
7
8
9
10
SUB-MENU
RANGE
Allow Table D (01~50)
Deny Table D (01~50)
Allow Table E (01~50)
Deny Table E (01~50)
Max. 20 digits
Max. 20 digits
Max. 20 digits
Max. 20 digits
DEFAULT
REMARK
-
PGM: 226 - Emergency Code Table
Emergency Code Table (01~10)
Max. 15 digits
PGM: 227 - Authorization Code Table
1
1-1
2
2-1
2-2
Table entry
Max. 12 digits
Station Authorization code
Station Authorization code
System Authorization code
System Authorization code
Set COS
Max. 12 digits
001~360
Max. 12 digits
Flex1~3
Flex 1: Station
Flex 2: System
PGM: 228 - Customer Call Routing Table
CCR Table index
01 ~ 70
1~14 Select Flex 1 ~ 14
Station
-
Station
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
01 ~ 12
36 entries
OFF
OFF
12
1: Station
2: Hunt Group
3: System Speed
4: PABX Xfer
5: VSF Announcement
6: Call Disconnect
Announcement
7: Route to Networked Station
8: Conference Room
9: Internal Page
10: External Page
11: All Call Page
12: Voice Mail (Station Group)
13: Company Directory (USA
Only)
14: Record VM Greeting (USA
Only)
PGM: 229 - Executive/Secretary Pairs
1
2
3
4
Executive/Secretary Pair
CO Call to Secretary
Call to Exec if Secretary in DND
Executive grade
5
ICM call to SEC
6
SEC auto answer
7
EXEC GROUP
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
00-50
OFF
OFF
00
PGM: 231 - Flexible DID Conversion Table
1
2
3
4
DID Destination Name
Day Destination
Night Destination
Timed Ring Destination
11 characters
1~15
1~15
1~15
665
-
1: station
2: group
3: System
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-9 TABLES DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
5
Reroute Destination
1~15
-
6
7
Use ICLID
Auto Ring Table
ON/OFF
(00-16),16:N/A
OFF
N/A
8
9
MOH
Ring Tone
00-10
(00-12), 0:N/A
00
N/A
2200~4999
100~239
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
2200~4999
100~239
ON
ON
REMARK
4: PBX Xfer
5: VSF
6: VSF & Disconnect
7: Networked Station
8: Conference Room
9: Int Page
10: Ext Page
11 : All Page
12 : VM
13 : ICLID Table
14 : Company Directory (USA
Only)
15 : Record VM Greeting (USA
Only)
PGM: 232 - System Speed Zone
1
2
3
4
Speed Bin Range in Zone
Station Range
Toll Checking
Authorization check
PGM: 233 Auto Ring Mode Assignment (Day/Night/Timed RING) Table
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Monday Timer
Tuesday Timer
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
0000~2359
0000~2359
0000~2359
0000~2359
0000~2359
0000~2359
0000~2359
Assign Day, Night and Timed
start times Default 0900, 1800,
none
PGM: 234 - Voice Mail Dial Table
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
VM dial codes 1
VM dial codes 2
VM dial codes 3
VM dial codes 4
VM dial codes 5
VM dial codes 6
VM dial codes 7
VM dial codes 8
VM dial codes 9
PGM: 235 – MAC Registration Table
1
Mac Address Information
2
Max port of device
3
Device ID
12 digits
12 digits
12 digits
12 digits
12 digits
12 digits
12 digits
12 digits
12 digits
P#
P##
P#*3P
P#*4P
P#*5P
P#*6P
*****
0
0 (N/A)
00~99
0~255
PGM: 236 - Mobile Extension Table
1
Program Authority
1: ON, 0: OFF
666
OFF
1: Prefix/2: Suffix/Any digits
1: Prefix/2: Suffix/Any digits
1: Prefix/2: Suffix/Any digits
1: Prefix/2: Suffix/Any digits
1: Prefix/2: Suffix/Any digits
1: Prefix/2: Suffix/Any digits
1: Prefix/2: Suffix/Any digits
1: Prefix/2: Suffix/Any digits
1: Prefix/2: Suffix/Any digits
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-9 TABLES DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
2
Access Authority
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
CO Group
Telephone number
Mobile extension CLI
Hunt Call enable
VSF Notify
Notify Retry
Retry Interval
Notify by My CLI
Call back
Delay timer
Announcement
Suffix DID table
RANGE
0: Disable
1: Mobile EXT.
2: Fail over
01-20
DEFAULT
REMARK
Disable
01
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1 to 9 Times
1 to 3 minute
OFF
OFF
3 Times
3 minute
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
000~255
0~200
0: OFF, 1: ON
OFF
OFF
0
0
OFF
000~140
00~24
000
N/A
00
1: ON, 0: OFF
OFF
000~169
01~20
01
PGM: 250 –Hot Desk Attributes
1
2
3
Number of Agents
View Agent Range
Auto Logout Timer
1 hours increments
PGM: 252 –CO Call Rerouting
1
2
3
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
Enable CRR
Init CRR
CRR attributes
Compare CO group
Receive digit
CO+TEL number
Type
Max. 12 digits
Max. 20 digits
PGM: 270 –Digit conversion table
1
2
3
4-15
16
17
0: Unconditional
1: Follow DNT
2: Follow LCR
Max. 24 digits
Max. 24 digits
Max. 24 digits
00–15, none
0: All
1: Reserved
2: CO line
3: Disable
Apply time
Dialed digit
Unconditionally changed
Changed digit
Ring mode table
Apply option
Unconditional
0
All
Table C-10 NETWORKING DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
PGM: 320 - Network Basic Attributes
1
Networking Enable
2
Retry Count
3
CNIP Enable
RANGE
1: ON, 0: OFF
00~99
1: ON, 0: OFF
667
DEFAULT
OFF
00
ON
REMARK
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-10 NETWORKING DATA
BTN
4
5
6
7
8
SUB-MENU
CONP Enable
Signal Method
CAS Enable
VPN Enable
CC Retain Mode
RANGE
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: FAC, 0: UUS
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
DEFAULT
OFF
FAC
OFF
OFF
OFF
REMARK
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
PGM: 321 - Network Supplementary Attributes
1
Transfer Mode
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TCP Port for BLF
UDP Port for BLF
BLF Manager IP Address
Duration of BLF STS
Multicast IP Address
Transfer Fault Recall Timer
VoIP Call Reroute
BLF service usage
1: REROUTE
0: JOIN
0000~9999
0000~9999
IP address
01~99
IP address
001~300
00~20
1: ON, 0: OFF
REROUTE
9500
9501
0.0.0.0
10
0.0.0.0
10
(#: Skip)
100 ms increments
(#: Skip)
1 second increments
00
ON
PGM: 322 - Network CO Line Attributes
1
Network CO Line Group
00~24
00
2
Net CO Line Type
0: PSTN
1: NET
PSTN
CO group programming for
Networking call between
systems.
PGM: 324 - Network Numbering Plan Table
1
System Use
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Numbering Plan Code
Numbering Plan Net CO Group
CPN Information
Alternate Speed Bin
Destination MPB IP Address
Destination MPB Port No
Digit Repeat
Net PSTN En-block
CO ATD code CLI
Firewall
AUTHO CODE COS USE
SMDR DIAL HIDDEN
NET PSTN CLI
15
Site name
16
Emergency reroute
0: NET
1: PSTN
16 digits
00~24
Flex 1~2
2000~4999
IP address
0000-9999
0: NO, 1: YES
0: NO, 1: YES
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
0: NO, 1: YES
0: NO, 1: YES
0: NET
1: PSTN
Max.12
characters
00~10
NET
0.0.0.0
5588
NO
NO
OFF
OFF
NO
NO
NET
(Skip: #)
00
PGM: 325 - Network Feature Code
1
2
Net Feature Code
Net Feature Destination
16 digits
1~6
-
668
1 : INT PAGE
2 : EXT PAGE
3 : ALL CALL PAGE
4: DOOR OPEN
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-10 NETWORKING DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
5:Conference Room (1-9)
6:Call park (01-19)
Table C-11 Zone Holiday Assignment
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
PGM: 444 – Zone Holiday Assignment
1
Ring Mode
2
3
Vacation
Holiday
0:DAY
1: NIGHT
2:TIMED
3: N/A
12 digits
4 digits
TIMED
-
Table D-12 Green Mode Activation
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
DEFAULT
REMARK
PGM: 500 – Green Mode Activation
1
Power Save Usage
2
Power On/Off
3
4
Power Save Mode
Power Current State
0: Disable
1: Enable
0: OFF
1: ON
Flex 1~6
Flex 1~6
Disable
ON
-
PGM: 501 – Green Mode Time Setting
1
2
Power ON Time
Power OFF Time
Table C-13 INITIALIZATION
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
REMARK
PGM: 450 - Initialization
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Flexible Numbering Plan
Station Data
CO Line Data
System Data
Station Group Data
ISDN Data
System Timer Data
Toll Table Data
LCR Table Data
Other Tables
Flexible Button Data
Network
All Data
System Reset
Unused
669
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-13 INITIALIZATION
ITEM
16
17
DESCRIPTION
REMARK
Personal Group
Default Password
Table C-14 PRINT-OUT DATABASE
ITEM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
DESCRIPTION
REMARK
Flexible Numbering Plan
IP Setting Plan
Station Data
CO Line Data
System Data
Station Group Data
ISDN Data
System Timer Data
Toll Table Data
LCR Table Data
Other Tables
Nation Specific Data
Flexible Button Data
All Data
LCD Message
QUIT Print Out
String Length
Board Base Attributes
Networking Table
Hotel Data
String Length
Working LCD Print-out
Enter station range
Enter CO range
Enter station range
10 or 20 character
Table C-15 VIRTUAL DIP SWITCH
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
REMARK
PGM: 452 - Virtual Trace Dip Switch Access
1
Call Trace
ON/OFF
2
VoIP Trace
ON/OFF
3
HTTP Trace
ON/OFF
4
Multicast Trace
ON/OFF
5
CTI Trace
ON/OFF
6
Raw Trace
ON/OFF
7
MPMP Trace
ON/OFF
8
CPU Redundancy Trace
ON/OFF
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
670
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-15 VIRTUAL DIP SWITCH
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
9
MISU/VMIU Trace
ON/OFF
10
DSP Trace
ON/OFF
11
SIP Trace
ON/OFF
12
ISMDR Trace
ON/OFF
13
SIP MSG Trace
ON/OFF
14
FULL SIP Trace
ON/OFF
15
Hotel Trace
ON/OFF
16
SIP EXT Trace
ON/OFF
17
DEBUG Trace
ON/OFF
18
IPATD Trace
ON/OFF
19
ISDN Trace
ON/OFF
20
SPI Trace
ON/OFF
21
DECT Trace
ON/OFF
22
HTTPXML Trace
ON/OFF
REMARK
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
PGM: 453 - Virtual Dip Switch Access
1
Device Polling
ON/OFF
2
SMDI Setting
ON/OFF
3
Multicast LED
ON/OFF
4
Auto Negotiation
MANUAL/AUTO
5
Full or Half duplex
FULL/HALF
6
100 M or 10 M Tx/Rx bps
100/10
671
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is ON)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is Manual)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is HALF)
Press Flex Button (Toggle: ON/OFF, LED lights if
trace is 10 M bps)
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-16 DECT DATA
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
PGM: 491 - DECT ATTRIBUTES
1
AUTO CALL RLS
2
BASE FAULT ALARM
3
CHAIN FAULT ALARM
ON/OFF
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
DEFAULT
REMARK
OFF
Disable
Disable
Table C-17 NATION SPECIFIC
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
PGM: 400 - IP Phone (H/S) Receive Gain Control
IPKT Rx Gain
Flex 1-8
PGM: 401 - IP Phone (H/F) Receive Gain Control
-
IPKT Rx Gain
Flex 1-8
PGM: 402 - SLT Receive Gain Control
-
SLT Rx Gain
Flex 1-8
PGM: 403 - ACO Receive Gain Control
− -
ACO Rx Gain
Flex 1-8
PGM: 404 - DCO Receive Gain Control
− -
DCO Rx Gain
Flex 1-8
PGM: 422 - Tone Generation Gain
− -
Tone Generation Gain
01-37
PGM: 423 - ACNR Tone Cadence
− -
ACNR Tone Cadence
1-5
PGM: 424 - ACNR Ring Frequency
− -
ACNR-Ring Frequency
1-5
PGM: 425 - SLT Tone Cadence
− -
SLT Tone Cadence
1-2
PGM: 426 - DTMF PCM Tone Generation Gain
− -
DTMF PCM Tone Generation Gain
1-5
PGM: 427 - DTMF RTP Tone Generation Gain
− -
DTMF RTP Tone Generation Gain
1-4
PGM: 429 - LCOB Configuration
− -
LCOB Configuration Type
1-5
PGM: 480 - WIT Phone Rx Gain Control
− -
WIT Rx Gain
Flex 1-14
PGM: 481 - WIT Phone Tx Gain Control
− -
WIT Tx Gain
Flex 1-14
PGM: 496 - DKT Phone (H/S) Rx Gain Control
− -
DKT(H/S) Rx Gain
Flex 1-13
PGM: 497 - DKT Phone (H/S) Tx Gain Control
− -
DKT(H/S) Tx Gain
Flex 1-13
672
REMARK
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Issue 1.6
Table C-17 NATION SPECIFIC
BTN
SUB-MENU
RANGE
PGM: 498 - DKT Phone (H/F) Rx Gain Control
− -
DKT(H/F) Rx Gain
Flex 1-13
PGM: 499 - DKT Phone (H/F) Tx Gain Control
− -
DKT(H/F) Tx Gain
Flex 1-13
673
REMARK
iPECS eMG80 & eMG800 & UCP
Administration and Programming Manual
Thanks for purchasing iPECS system
The contents of this document are subject to revision without
notice due to continued progress in methodology, design
and manufacturing. Ericsson-LG Enterprise shall have no
liability for any error or damage of any kind resulting from the
use of this document.
Issue 1.6
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Author : James Innovates Company : Ericsson Create Date : 2016:08:04 13:47:55+09:00 Modify Date : 2016:08:24 10:14:36+09:00 Source Modified : D:20160804044546 Tagged PDF : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-20:48:00 Metadata Date : 2016:08:24 10:14:36+09:00 Creator Tool : Acrobat PDFMaker 9.0 for Word Document ID : uuid:48e82eb5-e51a-4af9-b4be-1cfec1de8fa1 Instance ID : uuid:2e9d0ea2-56ef-4706-9310-35171b51cc00 Subject : 2 Format : application/pdf Creator : James Innovates Producer : Adobe PDF Library 9.0 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 689EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools